From ed5640d8b587fbcfed7dd7967f3de04b37a76f26 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Daniel Baumann Date: Sun, 7 Apr 2024 11:06:44 +0200 Subject: Adding upstream version 4:7.4.7. Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann --- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp | 295 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp | 208 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp | 113 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp | 378 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp | 295 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp | 193 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp | 306 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp | 117 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp | 247 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp | 344 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp | 114 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp | 275 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp | 217 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp | 121 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp | 368 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp | 445 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp | 543 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp | 266 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp | 218 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp | 67 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp | 126 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp | 373 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp | 155 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp | 411 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp | 415 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp | 175 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp | 162 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp | 249 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp | 108 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp | 156 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp | 121 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp | 105 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp | 167 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp | 126 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 188 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp | 135 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp | 2583 ++++++++++++++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp | 143 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp | 116 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp | 197 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp | 97 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp | 113 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp | 104 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp | 92 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp | 186 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp | 101 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp | 78 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp | 89 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp | 97 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp | 76 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp | 60 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp | 196 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp | 335 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp | 125 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp | 153 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp | 205 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp | 128 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp | 149 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp | 107 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp | 239 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp | 105 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp | 102 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp | 98 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp | 70 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp | 305 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp | 117 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp | 83 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp | 229 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp | 104 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp | 77 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp | 67 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp | 118 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp | 90 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp | 130 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp | 74 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp | 109 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp | 101 + .../source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp | 28 + .../source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp | 72 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp | 66 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp | 91 + .../source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp | 73 + .../source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp | 154 ++ .../source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp | 34 + .../source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp | 42 + .../source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp | 34 + .../source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp | 36 + .../source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp | 123 + .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp | 59 + .../shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp | 86 + .../text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp | 174 ++ .../text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp | 63 + .../text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp | 87 + .../01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp | 73 + .../shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp | 84 + .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp | 33 + .../source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp | 102 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp | 41 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp | 104 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp | 284 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp | 565 +++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp | 85 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp | 33 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp | 821 +++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp | 694 ++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp | 94 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp | 116 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp | 199 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp | 167 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp | 45 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp | 63 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp | 99 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp | 129 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp | 48 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp | 81 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp | 90 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp | 47 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp | 57 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp | 79 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp | 88 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp | 134 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp | 43 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp | 297 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp | 38 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp | 114 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp | 53 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp | 40 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp | 92 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp | 234 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp | 54 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp | 50 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp | 68 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp | 52 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp | 69 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp | 26 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp | 27 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp | 58 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp | 989 ++++++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp | 272 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp | 55 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp | 41 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp | 33 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp | 189 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp | 49 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp | 51 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp | 64 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp | 80 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp | 73 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp | 141 ++ .../source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp | 25 + .../text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp | 85 + .../source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp | 25 + .../source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp | 24 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp | 121 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp | 167 ++ .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp | 51 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp | 114 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp | 129 + .../source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp | 58 + .../text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp | 61 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp | 109 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp | 57 + .../source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp | 104 + .../source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp | 90 + .../source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp | 67 + .../source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp | 105 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp | 120 + .../text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp | 209 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp | 129 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp | 127 + .../text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp | 2002 +++++++++++++++ .../text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp | 66 + .../text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp | 67 + .../text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp | 86 + .../source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp | 287 +++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp | 75 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp | 95 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp | 142 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp | 89 + .../source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp | 60 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp | 167 ++ .../text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp | 109 + .../text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp | 93 + .../source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp | 86 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp | 84 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp | 130 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp | 113 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp | 78 + .../text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp | 76 + .../source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp | 71 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp | 65 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp | 80 + .../source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp | 59 + .../source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp | 118 + .../source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp | 96 + .../source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp | 115 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp | 87 + .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp | 67 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp | 97 + .../source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp | 137 ++ .../text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp | 117 + .../text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp | 408 ++++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp | 72 + .../source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp | 208 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp | 144 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp | 210 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp | 126 + .../source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp | 195 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp | 57 + .../shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp | 187 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 133 + .../source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp | 54 + .../text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp | 139 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp | 97 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp | 100 + .../source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp | 134 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp | 65 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp | 103 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp | 56 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp | 66 + .../text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp | 67 + .../text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp | 67 + .../text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp | 59 + .../text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp | 217 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp | 62 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp | 137 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp | 640 +++++ .../source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp | 93 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp | 160 ++ .../source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp | 359 +++ .../source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp | 45 + .../text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp | 56 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp | 94 + .../source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp | 61 + .../source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp | 134 + .../text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp | 121 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp | 111 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp | 169 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp | 82 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp | 42 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp | 96 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp | 206 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp | 59 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp | 216 ++ helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp | 44 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp | 37 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp | 46 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp | 39 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp | 37 + .../source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp | 51 + .../text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp | 35 + .../source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp | 37 + .../text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp | 35 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp | 24 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp | 151 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp | 163 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp | 194 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp | 149 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp | 161 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp | 190 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp | 90 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp | 48 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp | 81 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp | 116 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp | 78 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp | 124 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp | 133 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp | 119 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp | 66 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp | 64 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp | 190 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp | 111 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp | 101 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp | 49 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp | 103 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp | 141 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp | 112 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp | 69 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp | 241 ++ .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp | 55 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp | 108 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp | 106 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp | 38 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp | 58 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp | 98 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp | 111 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp | 115 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp | 46 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp | 44 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp | 70 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp | 52 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp | 109 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp | 130 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp | 47 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp | 71 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp | 43 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp | 62 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp | 53 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp | 45 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp | 94 + .../text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp | 79 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp | 32 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp | 89 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp | 110 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp | 54 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp | 63 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp | 40 + .../text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp | 56 + .../text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp | 50 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp | 74 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp | 77 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp | 45 + .../text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp | 43 + .../text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp | 71 + .../text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp | 68 + .../source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp | 43 + .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp | 39 + .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp | 41 + .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp | 42 + .../text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp | 39 + .../source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp | 100 + helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp | 183 ++ 843 files changed, 74101 insertions(+) create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp create mode 100644 helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text/shared') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c98becce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ + + + + + + + Frequently-Used Buttons + /text/shared/00/00000001.xhp + + + +

Frequently-Used Buttons

+
+ + + + + + + + + +

Cancel

+ Clicking Cancel closes a dialog without saving any changes made. +
+ +
+ + +

Finish

+ Applies all changes and closes the wizard. +
+ +
+

Toolbars

+ By clicking the arrow next to some icons you open a toolbar. To move a toolbar, drag the title bar. As soon as you release the mouse button, the toolbar remains at the new position. Drag the title bar to another position, or drag to an edge of the window, where the toolbar will dock. Close a toolbar by clicking the Close Window icon. Make the toolbar visible again by choosing View - Toolbars - (toolbar name). +
+
+

Spin button

+
+ + + In form controls, a spin button is a property of a numerical field, currency field, date field, or time field. If the property "Spin button" is enabled, the field shows a pair of symbols with arrows pointing to opposing directions, either vertically or horizontally. + + + In the Basic IDE, a spin button is the name used for the numerical field together with the two arrow symbols. + + +You can type a numerical value into the field next to the spin button, or select the value with the Up Arrow or Down Arrow symbols on the spin button. On the keyboard you can press the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to increase or reduce the value. You can press the Page Up and Page Down keys to set the maximum and minimum value. +If the field next to the spin button defines numerical values, you can also define a measurement unit, for example, 1 cm or 5 mm, 12 pt or 2". +
+
+
+

Convert

+ If you click forward through the dialog, this button is called Next. On the last page the button has the name Convert. The conversion is then performed by clicking the button. +
+
+

Context Menu

+To activate the context menu of an object, first click the object with the +left mouse button to select it, and then, while holding down the Ctrl key or the Command and Option keys, click the mouse button again + click the right mouse button. Some context menus can be called even if the object has not been selected. Context menus are found just about everywhere in $[officename]. +
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected element or elements after confirmation. +
+
+ + + + + + + + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. +
+

Metrics

+ You can enter values in the input fields in different units of measurement. The default unit is inches. However, if you want a space of exactly 1 cm, then type "1cm". Additional units are available according to the context, for example, 12 pt for a 12 point spacing. If the value of the new unit is unrealistic, the program uses a predefined maximum or minimum value. +
+

Close

+ Closes the dialog and saves all changes. +
+
+

Close

+ Closes the dialog. +
+
+ +

Apply

+ Applies the modified or selected values without closing the dialog. +
+
+This option appears only for Paragraph Style, Frame Style, and Page Style. +
+
+This option appears only for Paragraph Style and Character Style. +
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shrink / Expand

+ Click the Shrink icon to reduce the dialog to the size of the input field. It is then easier to mark the required reference in the sheet. The icons then automatically convert to the Expand icon. Click it to restore the dialog to its original size. + The dialog is automatically minimized when you click into a sheet with the mouse. As soon as you release the mouse button, the dialog is restored and the reference range defined with the mouse is highlighted in the document by a blue frame. + + + + Icon shrink + + + Shrink + + + + + Icon Expand + + + Expand + + +
+
+
+ + + + + +

Preview Field

+ Displays a preview of the current selection. +
+
+

Preview

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +

Next

+ Click the Next button, and the wizard uses the current dialog settings and proceeds to the next step. If you are on the last step, this button becomes Create. +
+
+ +

Dialog Buttons

+

Reset

+ Resets modified values back to the tab page previous values. + +
+

Cancel

+ Closes dialog and discards all changes. +
+ +
+

OK

+ Saves all changes and closes dialog. +
+
+
+ +

Resetin Tools - Options

+ Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. +
+
+ +

Resetall tab dialogs

+ Resets changes made to the current tab to those applicable when this dialog was opened. A confirmation query does not appear when you close the dialog. +
+
+ + + +

StandardUFI: Name is Default on Tools-Options-Writer-Basic Fonts

+ Resets the values visible in the dialog back to the default installation values. + A confirmation does not appear before the defaults are reloaded. +
+
+

Cancel

+Closes dialog and discards changes on all tabs. If Apply was used, then changes after the last use of Apply are discarded. +
+
+

Reset

+Resets modified values on the current tab back to the values when the dialog was opened. If Apply is used before closing the dialog, then values are reset to those after the last use of Apply. +
+
+

Apply

+Applies modifications on all tabs without closing dialog. Cannot be reverted with Reset. +
+
+

Reset to Parent

+Values for the current tab are set to those found in the corresponding tab of the style specified in “Inherit from” in Organizer. In all cases, also when “Inherit from” is “- None -”, current tab values specified in “Contains” are removed. +
+
+This option appears only for Paragraph Style, Character Style, and Frame Style. +
+
+ + + + + + + + +

Back

+ View the selections in the dialog made in the previous step. The current settings remain unchanged. This button can only be activated from page two on. +
+
+ +

Options

+ Click the Options label to expand the dialog to show further options. Click again to restore the dialog. +
+See also the following functions: +
+ The search supports wildcards or regular expressions. With regular expressions enabled, you can enter "all.*", for example to find the first location of "all" followed by any characters. If you want to search for a text that is also a regular expression, you must either precede every character with a "\" character, or enclose the text into \Q...\E. You can switch the automatic evaluation of wildcards or regular expression on and off in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. +
+ When using functions where one or more arguments are search criteria strings that represents a regular expression, the first attempt is to convert the string criteria to numbers. For example, ".0" will convert to 0.0 and so on. If successful, the match will not be a regular expression match but a numeric match. However, when switching to a locale where the decimal separator is not the dot makes the regular expression conversion work. To force the evaluation of the regular expression instead of a numeric expression, use some expression that can not be misread as numeric, such as ".[0]" or ".\0" or "(?i).0". +
+
+If an error occurs, the function returns a logical or numerical value. +(This command is only accessible through the context menu). +By double-clicking a tool, you can use it for multiple tasks. If you call the tool with a single-click, it reverts back to the last selection after completing the task. +Press Shift+F1 and point to a control to learn more about that control. +
+

Options dialog buttons

+

OK

+Save the changes in the page and close the Options dialog. +

Cancel

+Close the Options dialog and discard all changes done. +

Apply

+Applies the modified or selected values without closing the Options dialog. + +
+Some options cannot be reset once edited. Either edit back the changes manually or click Cancel and reopen the Options dialog. +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cfbc9b60 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,208 @@ + + + + + + + Glossary of Internet Terms + /text/shared/00/00000002.xhp + + + + + +
+ + Internet glossary + common terms;Internet glossary + glossaries;Internet terms + terminology;Internet glossary + +mw changed "Internet...". + +

Glossary of Internet Terms

+If you are a newcomer to the Internet, you will be confronted with unfamiliar terms: browser, bookmark, email, homepage, search engine, and many others. To make your first steps easier, this glossary explains some of the more important terminology you may find in the Internet, intranet, mail and news. +
+ + +
+ +

CMIS

+The Content Management Interoperability Services (CMIS) standard defines a domain model and Web Services and Restful AtomPub bindings that will enable greater interoperability of Enterprise Content Management (ECM) systems. CMIS uses Web services and Web 2.0 interfaces to enable rich information to be shared across Internet protocols in vendor-neutral formats, among document systems, publishers and repositories, within one enterprise and between companies. +
+ +
+

EPUB

+ EPUB is standard for electronic book files with the extension .epub that can be downloaded and read on devices like smartphones, tablets, computers, or e-readers. + EPUB is a technical standard published now by the Publishing group of W3C. EPUB is a popular format because it is open and is based on HTML. + An EPUB publication is delivered as a single file and is an unencrypted zipped archive containing a website. It includes HTML files, images, CSS style sheets, and other assets such as metadata, multimedia and interactivity. +
+ +
+ +

WebDAV

+Short for Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning, an IETF standard set of platform-independent extensions to HTTP that allows users to collaboratively edit and manage files on remote Web servers. WebDAV features XML properties on metadata, locking - which prevents authors from overwriting each other's changes - namespace manipulation and remote file management. WebDav is sometimes referred to as DAV. +
+ +
+ +

Frames

+Frames are useful for designing the layout of HTML pages. $[officename] uses floating frames into which you can place objects such as graphics, movie files and sound. The context menu of a frame shows the options for restoring or editing frame contents. Some of these commands are also listed in Edit - Object when the frame is selected. +
+ +
+ +

FTP

+FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol and is the standard transfer protocol for files in the Internet. An FTP server is a program on a computer connected to the Internet which stores files to be transmitted with the aid of FTP. While FTP is responsible for transmitting and downloading Internet files, HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) provides the connection setup and data transfer between WWW servers and clients. +
+ +
+ + HTML; definition + + + +

HTML

+HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) is a document code language, which is used as the file format for WWW documents. It is derived from SGML and integrates text, graphics, videos and sound. +If you want to type HTML commands directly, for example when doing exercises from one of the many available HTML books, remember that HTML pages are pure text files. Save your document under the document type Text and give it the file name extension .HTML. Be sure there are no umlauts or other special characters of the extended character set. If you want to re-open this file in $[officename] and edit the HTML code, you must load it with the file type Text and not with the file type Web pages. +There are several references on the Internet providing an introduction to the HTML language. +
+ +
+ +

HTTP

+The Hypertext Transfer Protocol is a record of transmission of WWW documents between WWW servers (hosts) and browsers (clients). +
+ + + +
+ + ImageMap; definition + + + +

ImageMap

+An ImageMap is a reference-sensitive graphic or frame. You can click on defined areas of the graphic or frame to go to a target (URL), which is linked with the area. The reference areas, along with the linked URLs and corresponding text displayed when resting the mouse pointer on these areas, are defined in the ImageMap Editor. +There are two different types of ImageMaps. A Client Side ImageMap is evaluated on the client computer, which loaded the graphic from the Internet, while a Server Side ImageMap is evaluated on the server computer which provides the HTML page on the Internet. In server evaluation, clicking an ImageMap sends the relative coordinates of the cursor within the image to the server, and a dedicated program on the server responds. In the client evaluation, clicking a defined hotspot of the ImageMap activates the URL, as if it were a normal text link. The URL appears below the mouse pointer when passing across the ImageMap. +As ImageMaps can be used in different ways, they can be stored in different formats. + +

ImageMap Formats

+ImageMaps are basically divided between those that are analyzed on the server (i. e. your Internet provider) and those analyzed on the web browser of the reader's computer. +
+ +
+ + Server Side ImageMap + + + +

Server Side ImageMaps

+Server Side ImageMaps appear for the reader as a picture or frame on the page. Click on the ImageMap with the mouse, and the coordinates of the relative position are sent to the server. Aided by an extra program, the server then determines the next step to take. There are several incompatible methods to define this process, the two most common being: + + + + W3C (CERN) HTTP Server (Format type: MAP - CERN) + + + NCSA HTTP Server (Format type: MAP - NCSA) + +$[officename] creates ImageMaps for both methods. Select the format from the File type list in the Save As dialog in the ImageMap Editor. Separate Map Files are created which you must upload to the server. You will need to ask your provider or network administrator which type of ImageMaps are supported by the server and how to access the evaluation program. +
+ +
+ + Client Side ImageMap + + + +

Client Side ImageMap

+The area of the picture or frame where the reader can click is indicated by the appearance of the linked URL when the mouse passes over the area. The ImageMap is stored in a layer below the picture and contains information about the referenced regions. The only disadvantage of Client Side ImageMaps is that older Web browsers cannot read them; a disadvantage that will, however, resolve itself in time. +When saving the ImageMap, select the file type SIP - StarView ImageMap. This saves the ImageMap directly in a format which can be applied to every active picture or frame in your document. However, if you just want to use the ImageMap on the current picture or frame, you do not have to save it in any special format. After defining the regions, simply click Apply. Nothing more is necessary. Client Side ImageMaps saved in HTML format are inserted directly into the page in HTML code. +
+ +
+ + Java; definition + + + +

Java

+The Java programming language is a platform independent programming language that is especially suited for use in the Internet. Web pages and applications programmed with Java class files can be used on all modern operating systems. Programs using Java programming language are usually developed in a Java development environment and then compiled to a "byte code". +
+ +
+ +

Proxy

+A proxy is a computer in the network acting as a kind of clipboard for data transfer. Whenever you access the Internet from a company network and request a Web page that has already been read by a colleague, the proxy will be able to display the page much quicker, as long as it's still in the memory. All that has to be checked in this case is that the page stored in the proxy is the latest version. If this is the case, the page won't have to be downloaded from the much slower Internet but can be loaded directly from the proxy. +
+ +
+ + SGML; definition + + + +

SGML

+SGML stands for "Standard Generalized Markup Language". SGML is based on the idea that documents have structural and other semantic elements that can be described without reference to how such elements should be displayed. The actual display of such a document may vary, depending on the output medium and style preferences. In structured texts, SGML not only defines structures (in the DTD = Document Type Definition) but also ensures they are consistently used. +HTML is a specialized application of SGML. This means that most Web browsers support only a limited range of SGML standards and that almost all SGML-enabled systems can produce attractive HTML pages. +
+ +
+ + search engines; definition + + + +

Search Engines

+A search engine is a service in the Internet based on a software program used to explore a vast amount of information using key words. +
+ +
+ + tags; definition + + + +

Tags

+HTML pages contain certain structural and formatting instructions called tags. Tags are code words enclosed by brackets in the document description language HTML. Many tags contain text or hyperlink references between the opening and closing brackets. For example, titles are marked by the tags <h1> at the beginning and </h1> at the end of the title. Some tags only appear on their own such as <br> for a line break or <img ...> to link a graphic. +
+ +
+ + URL; definition + + + +

URL

+The Uniform Resource Locator (URL) displays the address of a document or a server in the Internet. The general structure of a URL varies according to type and is generally in the form Service://Hostname:Port/Path/Page#Mark although not all elements are always required. An URL can be a FTP address, a WWW (HTTP) address, a file address or an email address. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5dc2f71a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + +Conversion of measurement units +/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+measurement units; converting +units; converting +converting;metrics +metrics;converting + +Conversion of measurement units +In some dialogs, you can enter measurement values into input boxes. If you just enter a numerical value, the default measurement unit is used. +You define the default measurement unit for Writer text documents in the dialog that you get by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. For Calc, Draw, and Impress, you open a document of that type and then open the appropriate General page as for Writer. +In input boxes for length units you can also add the unit abbreviation according to the following list: + + + +Unit abbreviation + + +Explanation + + + + +mm + + +Millimeter + + + + +cm + + +Centimeter + + + + +in or ″ + + +Inch + + + + +pi + + +Pica + + + + +pt + + +Point + + +
+ +The following formulas convert the units: + + +1 cm = 10 mm + + +1 inch = 2.54 cm + + +1 inch = 6 Pica = 72 Point + + +For example, in a text document, open Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. To indent the current paragraph by one inch, enter 1 in or 1" into the "Before text" box. To indent the paragraph by 1 cm, enter 1 cm into the input box. +To input the maximum or minimum allowed value respectively, click the current value and then press the Page Up or Page Down key. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..797e759ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,378 @@ + + + + + +To access this command... +/text/shared/00/00000004.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

To access this command... +

+ +

Open file with example:

+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Font Color + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line spacing: 1 + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line spacing: 1.5 + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line spacing: 2 + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Superscript + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Subscript + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line Style + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line Color + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Line Width + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Area Style / Filling + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Align Top + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Align Bottom + + +
+ +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Align Center Vertically + + +
+ +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Apply + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Cancel + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Up One Level + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Create New Directory + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Up One Level + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Create New Folder + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Go to the previous comment + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Go to the next comment + + +
+ +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Open File + + +
+ +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Save As + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +Export Directly as PDF + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eb8367579 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ + + + + + + + General Glossary + /text/shared/00/00000005.xhp + + + +
+common terms;glossaries +glossaries;common terms +terminology;general glossary + + mw changed "terminology;glossaries" and deleted one entry +

General Glossary

+ This glossary includes explanations of some of the most important terms you will come across in $[officename]. +
+ Use the glossary to look up unfamiliar terms found in any $[officename] application. + + + +
+ASCII; definition + +

ASCII

+ Abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a character set for displaying fonts on personal computers. It consists of 128 characters including letters, numbers, punctuation and symbols. The extended ASCII character set contains 256 characters. Each character has been assigned a unique number, also referred to as ASCII Code. + In HTML pages, only characters from the 7 Bit ASCII character set should appear. Other characters, such as German umlauts, are distinguished by way of a separate code. You can input extended ASCII code characters: the $[officename] export filter performs the necessary conversion. +
+ +
+

Bézier Object

+ Developed by the French mathematician Pierre Bézier, a Bézier curve is a mathematically defined curve used in two-dimensional graphic applications. The curve is defined by four points: the initial position and the terminating position, and two separate middle points. Bézier objects can be modified by moving these points with the mouse. +
+
+ +CTL;definition +complex text layout;definition +complex text layout, see CTL + + MW added a cross reference +

Complex Text Layout (CTL)

+ Languages with complex text layout may have some or all of the following features: + + + The language is written with characters or glyphs that are composed of several parts + + + The text direction is from right to left. + + + Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. + Enable CTL support using %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + +
+
+ +
+
+ +DDE; definition + +

DDE

+ DDE stands for "Dynamic Data Exchange," which is a predecessor of OLE, "Object Linking and Embedding". With DDE, objects are linked through file reference, but not embedded. + You can create a DDE link using the following procedure: Select cells from a Calc spreadsheet, copy them into the clipboard and switch to another spreadsheet and select the Edit - Paste Special dialog. Select the Link option to insert the contents as a DDE link. When activating a link, the inserted cell area will be read from its original file. +
+
+

Direct and Style Formatting

+ A style is a set of formatting attributes, grouped and identified by a name (the style name). When you apply a style to an object, the object is formatted with the set of attributes of the style. Several objects of same nature can have the same style. As consequence, when you change the set of formatting attributes of the style, all objects associated with the style also change their formatting attributes accordingly. Use styles to uniformly format a large set of paragraphs, cells, and objects and better manage the formatting of documents. + When you do not use styles, and apply formatting attributes to parts of text directly, this is called Direct formatting (also called manual formatting). The formatting is applied only to the selected area of the document. If the document has several paragraphs, frames, or any other object, you apply direct formatting on each object. Direct formatting is available with the Format menu and with the Formatting toolbar. + A direct formatting attribute applied on a object overrides the corresponding attribute of the style applied to the object. +
+
+windows; docking definition +docking; definition + +

Docking

+ Some windows in $[officename], for example the Styles window and the Navigator, are "dockable" windows. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. On each edge you can dock several windows on top of, or alongside each other; then, by moving the border lines, you can change the relative proportions of the windows. + + To undock and re-dock, holding down the CommandCtrl key, double-click a vacant area in the window. In the Styles window, you can also double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons, while you hold down the CommandCtrl key. + + +
+
+ +

Docking (AutoHide)

+ On any window edge where another window is docked you will see a button which allows you to show or hide the window.UFI: fix button removed, see spec "Window Splitter" + + + If you click the button on the window edge to show the window, the window will remain visible until you manually hide it again (with the same button). + + + If you show the window by clicking the window border, but not the button, you activate the AutoHide function. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you click in the document, the docked window hides again. + + + +
+
+formatting; definition + +

Formatting

+ Formatting refers to the visual layout of text using a word-processing or DTP program. This includes defining the paper format, page borders, fonts and font effects, as well as indents and spacing. You can format text directly or with Styles provided by $[officename]. + +
+ +
+ + half-width;definition + halfwidth;definition + full-width;definition + fullwidth;definition + +

Half-width and Full-width Characters

+ Half-width and full-width are properties used to differentiate characters used by some East Asian languages and scripts, mainly Chinese, Japanese, and Korean (CJK). + The Han characters, Hiragana and Katakana characters, as well as Hangul characters used by these scripts are usually of square shape, and on fixed-width (monospace) display they occupy space of two Latin/ASCII characters. They are therefore called full-width characters, while the letters in Latin alphabet, digits, and punctuation marks included in ASCII character set are called half-width characters. + For historical reasons, a set of square-shaped Latin letters, digits, and punctuation marks are also defined and used in CJK typography, in addition to or in place of their half-width counterparts. They are called full-width forms. Similarly, there are also half-width forms of the usually full-width Katakanas and Hangul Jamos, and they have narrower shapes instead of square ones. A character's half-width and full-width forms are essentially two ways of writing the same character, just like uppercase and lowercase forms of Latin alphabet. $[officename] supports conversion between half-width and full-width, as well as ignoring width difference when matching text strings. +
+ +
+ +IME; definition + +

IME

+ IME stands for Input Method Editor. A program that allows the user to enter complex characters from non-western character sets using a standard keyboard. + +
+
+JDBC; definition +

JDBC

+ You can use the Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) API to connect to a database from %PRODUCTNAME. JDBC drivers are written in the Java programming language and are platform independent. + +
+
+ +kerning; definition + +

Kerning

+ Kerning means increasing or decreasing the amount of space between pairs of letters to improve the overall appearance of the text. + The kerning tables contain information on which pairs of letters require more spacing. These tables are generally a component of a font. + +
+ +
+ +

Numeral System

+ A numeral system is determined by the number of digits available for representing numbers. The decimal system, for instance is based on the ten digits (0..9), the binary system is based on the two digits 0 and 1, the hexadecimal system is based on 16 digits (0...9 and A...F). + +
+
+ +objects; definition + +

Object

+ An object is a screen element containing data. It can refer to application data, such as text or graphics. + Objects are independent and do not influence each other. Any object containing data can be assigned certain commands. For example, a graphic object has commands for image editing and a spreadsheet contains calculation commands. + +
+
+ +ODBC; definition + +

ODBC

+ Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) is a protocol norm with which applications can access database systems. The query language used is Structured Query Language (SQL). In $[officename], you can determine for each database whether to use SQL commands to run queries. Alternatively, you can use the interactive help to define your query by mouseclick and have it automatically translated into SQL by $[officename]. + The 32bit ODBC functions required here can be installed on your system at any time with the help of the setup program supplied with your database. You can then amend the properties through the Control Panel. + + +
+
+ +OLE; definition + +

OLE

+ Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) objects can be linked to a target document or may also be embedded. Embedding inserts a copy of the object and details of the source program in the target document. If you want to edit the object, simply activate the source program by double-clicking on the object. + If an OLE object is linked to a target document, then the target document must be available in the location specified in the link. Deleting or moving the target document will make it impossible to open the linked OLE object. You can use the Save URLs relative to file system option in the General section of Load/Save Options to configure your system to save links relative to your filesystem. + +
+
+ +OpenGL; definition + +

OpenGL

+ OpenGL represents a 3D graphics language, initially developed by SGI (Silicon Graphics Inc). Two dialects of this language are commonly used: Microsoft OpenGL, developed for use under Windows NT, and Cosmo OpenGL made by SGI. The latter represents an independent graphics language for all platforms and all kind of computers, even usable on machines without special 3-D graphics hardware. + +
+
+ +

PNG

+ Portable Network Graphics (PNG) is a graphic file format. The files are compressed with a selectable compression factor, and, as opposed to the JPG format, PNG files are always compressed without any information loss. + +
+
+ +

Primary key

+ A primary key serves as a unique identifier of database fields. The unique identification of database fields is used in relational databases, to access data in other tables. If reference is made to a primary key from another table, this is termed a foreign key. + In $[officename], you define the primary key in the design view of a table, by choosing the relevant command from the context menu of a row header for the selected field. +
+ +
+

Relational Database

+ A relational database is a collection of data items organized as a set of formally described tables from which data can be accessed or reassembled in many different ways without having to reorganize the database tables. + A relational database management system (RDBMS) is a program that lets you create, update, and administer a relational database. An RDBMS takes Structured Query Language (SQL) statements entered by a user or contained in an application program and creates, updates, or provides access to the database. + A good example of a relational database can be given with a database containing Customer, Purchase, and Invoice tables. In the Invoice table, there is no actual customer or purchasing data; however, the table contains references through a relational link, or a relation, to the respective customer and purchasing table's fields (for example, the customer ID field from the customer table). +
+ +
+ +register-true; definition +page line-spacing; definition + +

Page line-spacing (register-true)

+ In %PRODUCTNAME, the register-true feature is called Page line-spacing. + Page line-spacing refers to the coincident imprint of the lines within a type area on the front and the back side of a page. The page line-spacing feature makes a page easier to read by preventing gray shadows from shining through between the lines of text. The page line-spacing term also refers to lines in adjacent text columns, where lines in different columns use the same vertical grid, thereby aligning them vertically with each other. + Page line-spacing printing is particularly useful for documents that will have two pages set next to each other (for example, in a book or brochure), for multi-column layouts, and for documents intended for double-sided printing. +
+ +
+

RTF

+ Rich Text Format (RTF) is a file format developed for the exchange of text files. A special feature is that the formatting is converted into directly readable text information. Unfortunately, in comparison to other file formats, this creates relatively large files. +
+ +
+

Saving Relatively and Absolutely

+ In various dialogs (for example, Tools - AutoText) you can select whether you want to save files relatively or absolutely. + If you choose to save relatively, the references to embedded graphics or other objects in your document will be saved relative to the location in the file system. In this case, it does not matter where the referenced directory structure is recorded. The files will be found regardless of location, as long as the reference remains on the same drive or volume. This is important if you want to make the document available to other computers that may have a completely different directory structure, drive or volume names. It is also recommended to save relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server. + If you prefer absolute saving, all references to other files will also be defined as absolute, based on the respective drive, volume or root directory. The advantage is that the document containing the references can be moved to other directories or folders, and the references remain valid. +
+
+

Focus

+ In a form document, a control must receive focus from the user in order to become active and perform its tasks. For example, users must give focus to a text box in order to enter text into it. + There are several ways to give focus to a control: + + + Designate the control with a mouse or any pointing device. + + + Navigate from one control to the next with the keyboard. The document's author may define a tabbing order that specifies the order in which controls will receive focus if the user navigates the document with the keyboard. Once selected, a control may be activated by some other key sequence. + + + Select a control through an access key (sometimes called "keyboard shortcut" or "keyboard accelerator"). + + +
+
+

Spin button

+ +
+
+SQL;definition + +

SQL

+ Structured Query Language (SQL) is a language used for database queries. In $[officename] you can formulate queries either in SQL or interactively with the mouse. + +
+
+ +

SQL Database / SQL Server

+ An SQL database is a database system which offers an SQL interface. SQL databases are often used in client/server networks in which different clients access a central server (for example, an SQL server), hence they are also called SQL server databases, or SQL servers for short. + In $[officename], you can integrate external SQL databases. These may be located on your local hard disk as well as on the network. Access is achieved through ODBC, JDBC, or a native driver integrated into $[officename]. + +
+
+

Widows and Orphans

+ Widows and orphans are historical typography terms, which have been in use for many years. A widow refers to a short line at the end of a paragraph, which when printed, appears alone at the top of the next page. An orphan is, in contrast, the first line of a paragraph printed alone at the bottom of the previous page. In a $[officename] text document you can automatically prevent such occurrences in the desired Paragraph Style. When doing so, you can determine the minimum amount of lines to be kept together on a page. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d657f88ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Toolbars +Icon on the Tools bar: + +Icon on the Formatting Bar: + +Icon on the Formatting Bar: + +Icon on the Slide View Bar: + +This overview describes the default toolbar configuration for $[officename]. + +
+Asian Language Support +
+These commands can only be accessed after you enable support for Asian languages in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47887d582 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Context Menus +/text/shared/00/00000010.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Context Menus

+
+

Cut

+ Cuts out the selected object and stores it on the clipboard. The object can be reinserted from the clipboard by using Paste. +
+
+

Paste

+ Inserts the element that you moved to the clipboard into the document. This command can only be called if the contents of the clipboard can be inserted at the current cursor position. +
+
+

Insert

+ Opens a submenu in the Gallery where you can choose between Copy and Link. The selected Gallery object is either copied into the current document or a link is created. + If you have selected an object in your document, then a new insertion will replace the selected object. +
+

Background

+ Inserts the selected picture as a background graphic. Use the submenu commands Page or Paragraph to define whether the graphic should cover the entire page or only the current paragraph. +
+

Copy

+ Copies the selected element to the clipboard. +
+
+

Delete

+ Deletes the current selection. If multiple objects are selected, all will be deleted. In most cases, a confirmation question appears before objects are deleted. + The object is either physically deleted from the data carrier or the object display is removed, depending on context. +
+
+ If you choose Delete while in the Gallery, the entry will be deleted from the Gallery, but the file itself will remain untouched. +
+
+

Open

+ Use the Open command to open the selected object in a new task. +
+
+

Rename

+ Enables a selected object to be renamed. After selecting Rename the name is selected and a new one can be entered directly. Use the arrow keys to set the cursor at the beginning or end of the name to delete or add to part of the name or to reposition the cursor. +
+
+ + +

Update

+ Updates the view in the window or in the selected object. +
+
+

Preview

+ The element selected is displayed in the Gallery at maximum size. Double-click the preview to switch back to the normal Gallery view. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cfc7e4c7c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Menu Commands +/text/shared/00/00000011.xhp + + + +Menu Commands +
+The window containing the document you want to work on must be selected in order to use the menu commands. Similarly, you must select an object in the document to use the menu commands associated with the object. +The menus are context sensitive. This means that those menu items are available that are relevant to the work currently being carried out. If the cursor is located in a text, then all of those menu items are available that are needed to edit the text. If you have selected graphics in a document, then you will see all of the menu items that can be used to edit graphics.removed a para +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fa112daa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +About Import and Export Filters +/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp + + + +import filters +export filters +filters; for import and export +files; filters and formats +formats; on opening and saving +importing; HTML and text documents +exporting;HTML and text documents +text documents; importing/exporting +HTML documents; importing/exporting +UTF-8/UCS2 support +HTML; export character set +PostScript; creating files +exporting;to PostScript format + +

About Import and Export Filters

+In $[officename], apart from its own XML formats you can also open and save many foreign XML formats. +In UNIX, certain file formats cannot be recognized automatically. +$[officename] normally recognizes the correct file type automatically on opening a file. There may be cases where you have to select the file type yourself in the Open dialog. For example, if you have a database table in text format that you want to open as a database table, you need to specify the file type "Text CSV" after selecting the file. +

BASIC Macros in Microsoft Office Documents

+In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties you can specify the settings for the VBA macro codes in MS Office documents. VBA macros are unable to run in $[officename]; they must first be converted and adapted. Often you only want to use $[officename] to change the visible content of a Word, Excel or PowerPoint file and then save the file again in Microsoft Office format without changing the macros they contain. You can set the behavior of $[officename] as desired: Either the VBA macros are saved in commented form as a subroutine of $[officename] and when the document is saved in MS Office format are written back correctly again, or you can select the Microsoft Office macros to be removed when loading. The last option is an effective protection against viruses within the Microsoft Office documents. +

Notes regarding external formats and file types

+Even if they are not installed, some filters can be selected in the Open and Save dialogs. If you select such a filter, a message will appear saying that you can still install the filter if you require. +If you want to install additional filters or remove individual filters from the installation, close %PRODUCTNAME, start the Setup program and select the Modify option. Then you will see a dialog in which you can add or remove individual components of %PRODUCTNAME. Graphic filters can be found in "Optional Components". + +

+ + +Importing and Exporting Text Documents

+ + + +$[officename] Writer can read various versions of the Microsoft Word text format. You also can save your own texts in Word format. However, not everything available with $[officename] Writer can be transferred to Word, and not everything can be imported. + + + +Importing is normally not problematic. Even redlining information and controls are imported (and exported) so that $[officename] recognizes inserted or deleted text in Word documents as well as font attributes that have been modified. Different coloring for each author and the time of such changes is also included. When graphic text boxes and labels are imported from templates, most of the attributes are also imported as direct paragraph and drawing attributes. However, some of the attributes may be lost during the import procedure. + + + +It is also possible to import and export RTF files. This file format can be used to exchange formatted texts across various applications and platforms. In this way, many formats read by most programs will be transferred without a problem. The clipboard uses RTF format when you insert part of a spreadsheet from $[officename] Calc through DDE into $[officename] Writer. +The filter Text Encoded helps you open and save text documents with another encoding font. The filter opens a dialog that enables you to select character set, default fonts, language and paragraph break. +

Importing and Exporting in HTML Format

+With $[officename] Writer, you can insert footnotes and endnotes in your HTML document. They are exported as meta tags. The footnote and endnote characters are exported as hyperlinks. +Comments are used to include unknown characters in an HTML document. Every note that begins with "HTML:..." and ends with ">" is treated as an HTML code, but is exported without these designations. Several tags around text can be included after "HTML:..." Accented characters are converted into the ANSI character set. Comments are created during import (for example, for meta tags that have no room in the file properties or unknown tags). +The HTML import of $[officename] Writer is able to read files that have UTF-8 or UCS2 character coding. All characters that are contained in the ANSI character set or in the system's character set can be displayed. +When exporting to HTML, the character set selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility is used. Characters not present there are written in a substitute form, which is displayed correctly in modern web browsers. When exporting such characters, you will receive an appropriate warning. + + If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, you select Mozilla Firefox or $[officename] Writer as the export option, upon export all important font attributes are exported as direct attributes (for example, text color, font size, bold, italic, and so on) in CSS1 styles. (CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets.) Importing is also carried out according to this standard. + + +The "font" property corresponds to Mozilla Firefox; that is, before the font size you can specify optional values for "font-style" (italic, none), "font-variant" (normal, small-caps) and "font-weight" (normal, bold). + + +For example, "Font: bold italic small-caps 12pt/200% Arial, Helvetica" switches to bold, italic, small caps, double-space with the font family Arial or Helvetica, if Arial doesn't exist. + + + + +"Font: 10pt" switches to a 10pt font, with bold, italic, small caps off. + + +If $[officename] Writer are set as the export option, the sizes of the control field and their internal margins are exported as styles (print formats). CSS1 size properties are based on "width" and "height" values. The "Margin" property is used to set equal margins on all sides of the page. To allow different margins, the "Margin-Left", "Margin-Right", "Margin-Top" and "Margin-Bottom" properties are used. +The distances of graphics and Plug-Ins to the content can be set individually for export to $[officename] Writer. If the top/bottom or right/left margin is set differently, the distances are exported in a "STYLE" option for the corresponding tag as CSS1 size properties "Margin-Top", "Margin-Bottom", "Margin-Left" and "Margin-Right". +Frames are supported with the use of CSS1 extensions for absolute positioned objects. This applies only to the export options Mozilla Firefox and $[officename] Writer. Frames can be aligned as graphics, Plug-Ins, +and Floating Frames, but character-linked frames are not possible. +Frames are exported as "<SPAN>" or "<DIV>" tags if they do not contain columns. If they do contain columns then they are exported as "<MULTICOL>". +The measurement unit set in $[officename] is used for HTML export of CSS1 properties. The unit can be set separately for text and HTML documents under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View. The number of exported decimal places depends on the unit. + + + +Measurement Unit + + +Measurement Unit Name in CSS1 + + +Maximum Number of Decimal Places + + + + +Millimeter + + +mm + + +2 + + + + +Centimeter + + +cm + + +2 + + + + +Inch + + +in + + +2 + + + + +Pica + + +pc + + +2 + + + + +Point + + +pt + + +1 + + +
+The $[officename] Web page filter supports certain capabilities of CSS2. However, to use it, print layout export must be activated in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. Then, in HTML documents, besides the HTML Page Style, you can also use the styles "First page", "Left page" and "Right page". These styles should enable you to set different page sizes and margins for the first page and for right and left pages when printing. +

Importing and Exporting Numbering

+If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, the export option "$[officename] Writer" is selected, the indents of numberings are exported as "margin-left" CSS1 property in the STYLE attribute of the <OL> and <UL> tags. The property indicates the difference relative to the indent of the next higher level. +A left paragraph indent in numbering is indicated as "margin-left" CSS1 property. First-line indents are ignored in numbering and not exported. +Importing and Exporting Spreadsheet Files +$[officename] imports and exports references to deleted sections such as, for example, a referenced column. The whole formula can be viewed during the export process and the deleted reference contains an indication (#REF!) to the reference. A #REF! will be correspondingly created for the reference during the import. +

Importing and Exporting Graphics Files

+As with HTML documents, you can choose to use a filter with or without the element ($[officename] Impress) in the name to open a $[officename] graphics file. If without, the file will be opened as a $[officename] Draw document. Otherwise, the file saved by an old program version is now opened in $[officename] Impress. +When you import an EPS file, a preview of the graphic is displayed in the document. If a preview is not available, a placeholder corresponding to the size of the graphic is displayed in the document. Under Unix and Microsoft Windows you can print the imported file by using a PostScript printer. +If a different printer is used the preview will be printed. When exporting EPS graphics, a preview is created and has the TIFF or EPSI format. If an EPS graphic together with other graphics is exported in the EPS format then this file will be embedded unchanged in the new file. +Multipage-TIFFs are allowed when graphics are imported or exported in TIFF format. The graphics are retrieved as a set of individual pictures in a single file, for example, the individual pages of a fax. +Some $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress options can be accessed through File - Export. See Graphics Export Options for more information. +

PostScript

+To export a document or graphic in PostScript format: + + +If you have not yet done so, install a PostScript printer driver, such as the Apple LaserWriter driver. + + +Print the document with the File - Print menu command. + + +Select the PostScript printer in the dialog and mark the Print to file check box. A PostScript file will be created. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00d462289 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,306 @@ + + + + + + + + + XML File Formats + /text/shared/00/00000021.xhp + + + +exporting; XML files + XML file formats + extensions; file formats + suffixes in file formats + document types in $[officename] + file formats; changing $[officename] defaults + defaults;file formats in $[officename] + file formats;OpenDocument/XML + OpenDocument file formats + ODF file formats +mw changed "file formats;OpenDocument." entry and deleted "file formats;XML". MW made "document types;..." a one level entrymw changed "defaults;..." + +XML File Formats + + By default, $[officename] loads and saves files in the OpenDocument file format. + The OpenDocument file format (ODF) is a standardized file format used by many software applications. You can find more information at the Wikipedia site: wikipedia.org/wiki/OpenDocument. + OpenDocument file format names + %PRODUCTNAME uses the following file formats: + + + + Document format + + + File extension + + + + + ODF Text + + + *.odt + + + + + ODF Text Template + + + *.ott + + + + + ODF Master Document + + + *.odm + + + + + ODF Master Document Template + + + *.otm + + + + + HTML Document + + + *.html + + + + + HTML Document Template + + + *.oth + + + + + ODF Spreadsheet + + + *.ods + + + + + ODF Spreadsheet Template + + + *.ots + + + + + ODF Drawing + + + *.odg + + + + + ODF Drawing Template + + + *.otg + + + + + ODF Presentation + + + *.odp + + + + + ODF Presentation Template + + + *.otp + + + + + ODF Formula + + + *.odf + + + + + ODF Database + + + *.odb + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME Extension + + + *.oxt + + +
+ + The HTML format is not an OpenDocument format. + ODF Chart is the name of the file format for stand alone charts. This format with the extension *.odc is currently not in use. + Evolution of the OpenDocument format + The OpenDocument format evolves over time. + + + + ODF version + + + Date of standard approval by OASISintl. community wants intl iso standard date formats + + + First supporting version of the software + + + + + ODF 1.0 + + + 2005-05-01 + + + OpenOffice.org 1.1.5 or StarOffice 7 + + + + + ODF 1.1 + + + 2007-02-02 + + + OpenOffice.org 2.2 or StarOffice 8 Update 4 + + + + + ODF 1.2 + + + 2011-09-30 + + + OpenOffice.org 3, StarOffice 9, Oracle Open Office + + + + + ODF 1.2 Extended (compatibility mode) + + + — + + + LibreOffice 3.5 + + + + + ODF 1.2 Extended + + + — + + + OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2 + + + + + ODF 1.3 + + + TBD + + + LibreOffice 7.0 + + + + + ODF 1.3 Extended + + + — + + + LibreOffice 7.0 + + +
+ In current versions, you can select to save your documents using ODF 1.2 or ODF 1.0/1.1 (for backward compatibility). Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select the ODF format version. +If you want to define another file format as the default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. +XML file structure +Documents in OpenDocument file format are stored as compressed zip archives that contain XML files. To view these XML files, you can open the OpenDocument file with an unzip program. The following files and directories are contained within the OpenDocument files: + + +The text content of the document is located in content.xml. +By default, content.xml is stored without formatting elements like indentation or line breaks to minimize the time for saving and opening the document. The use of indentations and line breaks can be activated in the Expert configuration by setting the property /org.openoffice.Office.Common/Save/Document PrettyPrinting to true. + + +The file meta.xml contains the meta information of the document, which you can enter under File - Properties. +If you save a document with a password, meta.xml will not be encrypted. + + +The file settings.xml contains further information about the settings for this document. + + +In styles.xml, you find the styles applied to the document that can be seen in the Styles window. + + +The meta-inf/manifest.xml file describes the structure of the XML file. + + +Additional files and folders can be contained in the packed file format. +Definition of the XML formats +The schema for the OpenDocument formats can be found on the www.oasis-open.org web site. +
+ + + +Document Converter Wizard +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..047e3c20d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +See also... +/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +See also... + + + +Tools Menu - Scenarios + + + +
+On the help page for $[officename] general you can find instructions that are applicable to all modules, such as working with windows and menus, customizing $[officename], data sources, Gallery, and drag and drop. +If you want help with another module, switch to the help for that module with the combo box in the navigation area. +
+The availability of this function depends on your X Window Manager. + + +Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents. + +Enables the display of a brief description of menus and icons at the mouse pointer. +
+Some of the shortcut keys may be assigned to your desktop system. Keys that are assigned to the desktop system are not available to %PRODUCTNAME. Try to assign different keys either for %PRODUCTNAME, in Tools - Customize - Keyboard, or in your desktop system. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c270af62f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + +Graphics Export Options +/text/shared/00/00000200.xhp + + + + +Graphics Export Options +Defines graphics export options. +
+ +
+When you export graphical elements to a file, you can select the file type. For most supported file types a dialog opens where you can setup export options. +The following file types do not show an options dialog: RAS, SVG, TIFF, XPM. +The other file types show options dialogs where you can set the width and height of the exported image. +Depending on the file type, you can specify some more options. Press Shift+F1 and hover over the control to see an extended help text. + +Common controls + + +Specifies the measurement units. +Width +Specifies the width. +Height +Specifies the height. + +Resolution controls + + +Resolution +Enter the image resolution. Select the measurement units from the list box. + +More options +JPEG controls +For JPEG files you can set the color depth and the quality. + + +Select the color depth from 8 bit grayscale or 24 bit true color. + + +Sets the compression for the export. A high compression means a smaller, but slower to load image. + + +Sets the quality for the export. Choose from a low quality with minimal file size, up to a high quality and big file size + +BMP controls +For BMP files you can set the compression and the RLE encoding. + +Applies RLE (Run Length Encoding) to the BMP graphics. + +PBM PGM PPM controls +For PBM, PGM, and PPM files you can set the encoding. + + +Exports the file in binary format. The resulting file is smaller than a text file. + +Exports the file in ASCII text format. The resulting file is larger than a binary file. + +PNG controls +For PNG files you can set the compression and the interlaced mode. + + +Specifies whether the graphic is to be saved in interlaced mode. + +GIF controls +For GIF files you can set the transparency and the interlaced mode. + + +Specifies whether to save the background of the picture as transparent. Only objects will be visible in the GIF image. Use the Color Replacer to set the transparent color in the picture. + +EPS controls +For EPS files you can set the preview, the color format, the compression, and the version. + +You must print an EPS file with a PostScript printer. Other printers will only print the embedded preview. + + +Specifies whether a preview image is exported in the TIFF format together with the actual PostScript file. + +Specifies whether a monochrome preview graphic in EPSI format is exported together with the PostScript file. This format only contains printable characters from the 7-bit ASCII code. + +Compression is not available at this level. Select the Level 1 option if your PostScript printer does not offer the capabilities of Level 2. + +Select the Level 2 option if your output device supports colored bitmaps, palette graphics and compressed graphics. + +Exports the file in color. + +Exports the file in grayscale tones. + +LZW compression is the compression of a file into a smaller file using a table-based lookup algorithm. + +Specifies that you do not wish to use compression. + +See Import and Export Filter Information for more information about filters. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f118801da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Dif Import/Export/ Lotus import/ dBASE import +/text/shared/00/00000206.xhp + + + +Dif Import/Export/ Lotus import/ dBASE import +Defines the options for import/export. These dialogs will be automatically shown if the corresponding file type is selected. +Character set +Select the character set from the options used for import/export. +For further information regarding filters, refer to the topic: Information about Import and Export Filters. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3afaac677 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Export text files +/text/shared/00/00000207.xhp + + + + + +Export text files +The Export text files dialog allows you to define the export options for text files. The dialog will be displayed if you save spreadsheet data as file type "Text CSV", and if the Edit filter settings check box is marked in the Save As dialog. +Field options +Defines the field separator, text separator and character set that is used for the text export. +Character set +Specifies the character set for text export. +Field delimiter +Choose or enter the field delimiter, which separates data fields. +Text delimiter +Choose or enter the text delimiter, which encloses every data field. + +Quote all text cells +Exports all text cells with leading and trailing quote characters as set in the Text delimiter box. If not checked, only those text cells get quoted that contain the Field delimiter character. + +Save cell content as shown +Enabled by default, data will be saved as displayed, including applied number formats. If this checkbox is not marked, raw data content will be saved, as in older versions of the software. +Depending on the number format, saving cell content as shown may write values that during an import cannot be interpreted as numerical values anymore. +Fixed column width +Exports all data fields with a fixed width. + + +The width of a data field in the exported text file is set to the current width of the corresponding column. + + +Values are exported in the format as currently seen in the cell. + + +If a value is longer than the fixed column width, it will be exported as a ### string. + + +If a text string is longer than the fixed column width, it will be truncated at the end. + + +The alignment Left, Centered, and Right will be simulated by inserted blanks. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..756cc6634 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000208.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ + + + + + + + Text Import + /text/shared/00/00000208.xhp + + + + + + + + +Text Import +Sets the import options for delimited data. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +Import + + +Character Set +Specifies the character set to be used in the imported file. + + +Language +Determines how the number strings are imported. +If Language is set to Default (for CSV import) or Automatic (for HTML import), Calc will use the globally set language. If Language is set to a specific language, that language will be used when importing numbers. +When importing an HTML document, the Language selection can conflict with the global HTML option Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers. The global HTML option is effective only when the Automatic language option is selected. If you select a specific language in the HTML Import Options dialog, the global HTML option is ignored. + + +From Row +Specifies the row where you want to start the import. The rows are visible in the preview window at the bottom of the dialog. + +Separator Options +Specifies whether your data uses separators or fixed widths as delimiters. + + +Fixed width +Separates fixed-width data (equal number of characters) into columns. Click on the ruler in the preview window to set the width. + + +Separated by +Select the separator used in your data. + + +Tab +Separates data delimited by tabs into columns. + + +Semicolon +Separates data delimited by semicolons into columns. + + +Comma +Separates data delimited by commas into columns. + + +Space +Separates data delimited by spaces into columns. + + + +Other +Separates data into columns using the custom separator that you specify. Note: The custom separator must also be contained in your data. + + +Merge delimiters +Combines consecutive delimiters and removes blank data fields. + + + +Trim spaces +Removes starting and trailing spaces from data fields. + + + +String delimiter +Select a character to delimit text data. You can also enter a character in the text box. + +Other options +Sets some other import options. + + +Format quoted field as text +When this option is enabled, fields or cells whose values are quoted in their entirety (the first and last characters of the value equal the text delimiter) are imported as text. + + +Detect special numbers +When this option is enabled, Calc will automatically detect all number formats, including special number formats such as dates, time, and scientific notation. +The selected language influences how such special numbers are detected, since different languages and regions many have different conventions for such special numbers. +When this option is disabled, Calc will detect and convert only decimal numbers. The rest, including numbers formatted in scientific notation, will be imported as text. A decimal number string can have digits 0-9, thousands separators, and a decimal separator. Thousands separators and decimal separators may vary with the selected language and region. + + +Skip empty cells +When this option is enabled, Calc preserves previous content of cells when pasting empty ones. Otherwise, Calc deletes content of previous cells. +In Text to Columns conversion, if cell content begins with a separator and this option is disabled, then first column will be emptied. + +Fields +Shows how your data will look when it is separated into columns. + + +Column type +Choose a column in the preview window and select the data type to be applied the imported data. You can select one of the following options: + + + + + Type + + + Function + + + + + Standard + + + $[officename] determines the type. + + + + + Text + + + Imported data are treated as text. + + + + + Date (DMY) + + + Applies a date format (Day, Month, Year) to the imported data in a column. + + + + + Date (MDY) + + + Applies a date format (Month, Day, Year) to the imported data in a column. + + + + + Date (YMD) + + + Applies a date format (Year, Month, Day) to the imported data in a column. + + + + + US English + + + Numbers formatted in US English are searched for and included regardless of the system language. A number format is not applied. If there are no US English entries, the Standard format is applied. + + + + + Hide + + + The data in the column are not imported. + + +
+ +If you selected one of the date formats (DMY), (MDY), or (YMD) and you enter numbers without date delimiters, the numbers are interpreted as follows: + + + + + Number of characters + + + Date format + + + + + 6 + + + Two characters each are taken for day, month, and year in the selected order. + + + + + 8 + + + Four characters are taken for the year, two each for month and day, in the selected order. + + + + + 5 or 7 + + + As with 6 or 8 characters, but the first part of the sequence has one character less. This will suppress a leading zero for month and day. + + +
+ +If you want to include the leading zero in the data you import, in telephone numbers for example, apply the "Text" format to the column. + + +Preview +Shows how the imported text will look after it is separated into columns. To apply a format to a column when it is imported, click a column and select a Column type. When you select a Column type, the column heading displays the applied format. +If you want to use a fixed width to separate the imported data into columns, click in the ruler to set the width boundaries. +Navigating Without the Mouse +For more information, see Information about Import and Export Filters. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ebfd52b05 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + +ASCII Filter Options +/text/shared/00/00000215.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

ASCII Filter Options

+You can specify which options, such as basic font, language, character set, or break, are imported or exported with a text document. The dialog appears when you load an ASCII file with the filter "Text Encoded" or when you save the document the first time, or when you "save as" with another name. +
+ +
+

Properties

+Defines the settings for importing or exporting your file. When exporting, only the character set and paragraph break can be defined. + +

Character set

+Specifies the character set of the file for export or import. +

Include byte-order mark

+For Unicode character set only, a byte order mark (BOM) is a sequence of bytes used to indicate Unicode encoding of a text file. The presence of the UTF-8 BOM is optional and may cause problems with some software, especially legacy software not designed to handle UTF-8. + +

Default fonts

+By setting a default font, you specify that the text should be displayed in a specific font. The default fonts can only be selected when importing. + +

Language

+Specifies the language of the text, if this has not already been defined. This setting is only available when importing. +

Paragraph break

+Defines the type of paragraph break for a text line. + +

CR & LF

+Produces a "Carriage Return" and a "Linefeed". This option is the default. + +

CR

+Produces a "Carriage Return" as the paragraph break. + +

LF

+Produces a "Linefeed" as the paragraph break. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5db89a06f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,344 @@ + + + + + + + + +File Menu +/text/shared/00/00000401.xhp + + + +

File Menu

+Choose File - Preview in Web Browser. +
+Choose File - New. + +New icon on the Standard bar (the icon shows the type of the new document). +
+ + + + +Icon New + + +New + + +
+ +
+Key CommandCtrl+N +
+Menu File - New - Templates. +Key Shift+CommandCtrl+N +Choose File - New - Labels. +Choose File - New - Labels - Labels tab. +
+Choose File - New - Labels - Format tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Format tab. +
+
+Choose File - New - Labels - Options tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Options tab. +
+Choose File - New - Business Cards. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Medium tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business Cards tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Private tab. +Choose File - New - Business Cards - Business tab. +
+Choose File - Open. +CommandCtrl+O +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Open + + +Open File + + +
+ +
+
+
+Menu File - Open, File type Text Encoded selected. +Menu File - Save As, File type Text Encoded selected. +
+Choose File - Wizards. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Page Design. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Letterhead Layout. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Printed Items. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Recipient and Sender. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Footer. +Choose File - Wizards - Letter - Name and Location. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Page Design. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Items to include. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Sender and Recipient. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Footer. +Choose File - Wizards - Fax - Name and Location. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Page Design. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - General information. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Headings to include. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Names. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Agenda items. +Choose File - Wizards - Agenda - Name and Location. +Click Use Wizard to Create Form in a database file window. +Click Use Wizard to Create Report in a database file window. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 1. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 2. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 3. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Wizards page 4, there must be a database connection. +In form design, click the Group Box icon on the toolbar
and use the mouse to create a frame - Last page of wizards. +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. +Choose File - Wizards - Euro Converter. +
+Menu File - Wizards - Address Data Source. +
+Address Data Source Wizards - Additional settings +Address Data Source Wizards - Table selection +Address Data Source Wizards - Data source title +Address Data Source Wizards - Field assignment +Choose File - Close. +
+Choose File - Save. +CommandCtrl+S + Open Standard or Table Data bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Save + + +Save + + +
+ +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Save as + + +Save As + + +
+ +
+$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML Document file type. The dialog opens automatically. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 1 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 2 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 3 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 4 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 5 of the wizard. +$[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress menu File - Export, select HTML file type, page 6 of the wizard. +Choose File - Export, select a graphics file type. The dialog opens after you click Save. +Choose File - Save All. +Choose File - Save As. +
+Choose File - Reload. +
+Choose File - Properties. +Choose File - Properties - General tab. +
+Choose File - Digital Signatures - Sign Existing PDF. +
+
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security and, in the Certificate Path area, click Certificate. +
+
+Choose File - Digital Signatures - Digital Signatures. +Choose Tools - Macros - Digital Signature. +Choose File - Properties - General tab, click Digital Signatures button. +Double-click or right-click the Signature field on the Status bar. +
+Choose File - Properties - General tab, press Digital Signatures button, then click Sign Document button. +Choose File - Properties - Description tab. +Choose File - Properties - Custom Properties tab. +Choose File - Properties - Statistics tab. +Choose File - Properties - Security tab. +Choose File - Properties - CMIS Properties tab. +Choose File - Properties - Font tab. +
+Menu File - Print Preview. +
+ + + + +Icon Print preview + + +Print Preview + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose File - Printer Settings. +
+Menu File - Send. +
+Choose File - Send - Email Document. +
+ + + + +Icon Email Document + + +Email Document + + +
+ +
+
+Choose File - Export. + +
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as EPUB. + + + + + Icon Export as EPUB + + + + Export Directly as EPUB + + +
+
+ +
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - Digital Signatures tab. +
+
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - Security tab. +
+
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - General tab. +
+
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - Initial View tab. +
+ +
+ Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF - User Interface tab. +
+
+Choose File - Export As - Export as PDF. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Export Directly as PDF + + +Export Directly as PDF + + +
+
+
+Choose File - Send - Email as PDF. +
+Choose File - Send - Create Master Document. +
+Choose File - Print. +CommandCtrl+P + On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Print Icon + + +Print + + +
+ +
+ + +On the Print Preview bar of a text document, click + + + + +Icon Print Page Preview + + +Print Page Preview + + +
+ + + +
+
+Choose File - Exit %PRODUCTNAME. +CommandCtrl+Q +
+Choose File - New - Master Document. +
+Choose File - Open - File type, select Text CSV. +Choose Data - Text to Columns (Calc). +
+Choose File - Export, if EPS is selected as file type, this dialog opens automatically. +Choose File - Export, if PBM, PPM or PGM is selected as file type, the dialog opens automatically. +Choose File - Versions. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f12d29036 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + +View Menu +/text/shared/00/00000403.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

View Menu

+
+Choose View - Zoom - Zoom. +Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad +Zoom also with (+) (-) (×) and (÷) on the number keypad. +Click or right-click the field on the Status bar. +
+
+Choose View - Toolbars. +
+Choose View - Toolbars - Standard. +Choose View - Toolbars - Tools. +Choose View - Status Bar. +Choose View - Color Bar. +
+Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Internet. +Choose Insert - Hyperlink. +
+Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Mail. +Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click Document. +Click Hyperlink icon on Standard bar, click New Document. +
+Choose View - Full Screen. +Shift+CommandCtrl+J + + +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Full Screen (in Print Preview) + + +
+ +
+ + +
+
+If a text document or spreadsheet is open: +Menu View - Data Sources. +CommandCtrl+Shift+F4 keys +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Data Sources + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose View - HTML Source. +Open context menu in an HTML document. +
+ + + + +Icon + + +HTML Source + + +
+ +
+
+Choose View - Grid and Helplines. +Choose View - Snap Guides (Impress or Draw). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53a765055 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,275 @@ + + + + + +Insert Menu +/text/shared/00/00000404.xhp + + + +

Insert Menu

+Choose Insert - Comment. +Press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+C. +
+Choose Insert - Media - Scan. +
+
+Choose Insert - Media - Scan - Select Source. +
+
+Choose Insert - Media - Scan - Request. +
+
+Choose Insert - Special Character. +Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Customize - Character button. + +Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Customize - Character button. + +On the Standard or the Insert bar, clickbar or toolbar here? +
+ + + + +Icon Special character + + +Special Character + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Insert - Media - Audio or Video. + Choose Insert - Audio or Video. +
+ + + +Audio or Video + + +
+
+
+Choose Insert - OLE Object. +
+Choose Insert - OLE Object - OLE Object. +On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon OLE object + + +OLE Object + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Insert - OLE Object - QR and Barcode. +
+
+Choose Insert - OLE Object - Formula Object. +On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Formula + + +Formula + + +
+
+
+Choose Format - Chart Type. +Choose Insert - Chart . +Choose Format - Chart Type. +Choose Insert Chart. +Choose Format - Chart Type. +Choose Insert - Chart. +
+Choose Insert - Chart. +On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Chart + + +Chart + + +
+
+
+
+Choose Insert - Image. +On the Standard bar, click bar or toolbar? +
+ + + +Icon Image + + +Image + + +
+
+
+
+ + +Choose Insert - Frame - Floating Frame + + +Choose Insert - Floating Frame. + + +On the Insert bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon Floating frame + + +Floating Frame + + +
+
+
+Open a file of a type that is unknown to %PRODUCTNAME and that is no text file. + +
+On the Fontwork bar, click + + + + +Icon Fontwork + + + Fontwork Gallery + + +
+
+
+Choose Insert - Fontwork +
+
+ + + + +Icon Basic shapes + + +Basic Shapes + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Symbol Shapes + + +Symbol Shapes + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Block arrows + + +Block Arrows + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Flowcharts + + +Flowcharts + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Callouts + + +Callouts + + +
+
+
+ + + + +Icon Stars + + +Stars + + +
+
+
+ Choose Insert - Signature Line +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a6903a822 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ + + + + + + + Tools Menu + /text/shared/00/00000406.xhp + + + +

Tools Menu

+ + Choose Tools - Gallery or click the Gallery icon on the Standard bar -
New Theme button - Files tab. +
+ Choose Tools - Spelling. + F7 key + On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + + Icon + + + Spelling + + +
+
+
+ Choose Tools - Language - Hangul/Hanja Conversion. Asian language support must be enabled. + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Conversion. Asian language support must be enabled. + Choose Tools - Language - Chinese Conversion - Edit terms button. Asian language support must be enabled. + Choose Tools - Spelling. + Choose Tools - Spelling, then click Options. +
+ Choose Tools - Thesaurus. + CommandCtrl+F7 +
+
+ Choose Tools - Color Replacer ($[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress). +
+ Choose Tools - Media Player. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic, or press OptionAlt+F11 (if not assigned by your system). + Choose Tools - Macros - Run Macro. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - BeanShell. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - JavaScript. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - Python. +
+ Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro. +
+ Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic,
click the Organizer button,
click the Libraries tab,
and then click the Password button. + Choose Tools - Macros - Organize Macros - %PRODUCTNAME Basic,
click the Organizer button. + Choose Tools - Extension Manager. + Choose Tools - Extension Manager, click Check for Updates button. + Choose Tools - Macros - XML Filter Settings. + Tools - Macros - XML Filter Settings, then click New or Edit. + Tools - Macros - XML Filter Settings, then click Test XSLTs. + Choose Tools - Customize. + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab. + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab, click the gear Icon gear menu dropdown menu and choose Add. + Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab, click the gear Icon gear menu dropdown menu and choose Move. + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard tab. A document must be opened. + Choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars tab. + Choose Tools - Customize - Events tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Smart Tags tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Exceptions tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Localized Options tab. + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion tab. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General. +
+ Path selection button in various wizards. + Click Edit button for a few entries under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename]. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. + Choose Tools - AutoText - Path. (autotext only) +
+ Choose Tools - ImageMap. + Choose Tools - ImageMap, then select a section of the ImageMap and click Properties - Description. +
+ Choose Format - Area - Colors tab. +
+
+ Choose Format - Area - Area, press the Color button and click the Pick button. +
+ + + + + Icon + + + + Press the Color Dialog button in the Illumination tab of the 3D Effects dialog. + + +
+
+
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Security. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - OpenCL. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Basic IDE. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Online Update. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors. + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +
+
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids,
in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit. +
+
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge Email. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid. +
+ Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western). + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian). Asian language support must be enabled. +
+ Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table. + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes. + Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. + Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Compatibility. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Formula. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Defaults. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button. + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid. + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print. + Open a drawing document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw. + Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math. + Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f1365faf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + +Window Menu +/text/shared/00/00000407.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + Window Menu + Choose Window - New Window. + Choose Window - List of open documents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..705c3ccbb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Help Menu +/text/shared/00/00000408.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Help Menu +Choose Help - %PRODUCTNAME Help. +Choose Help - About %PRODUCTNAME. +
+Automatically after %PRODUCTNAME is first started. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c72f152bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/shared/00/00000409.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Toolbars

+
+ Choose Data - More Filters - Standard Filter. + Database table view: Standard Filter icon in the Database toolbar. + Form view: Standard Filter icon in the Form bar. + + + + + Icon Standard Filter + + + Standard Filter + + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ead7d9e84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + +Database +/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp + + + +

Database

+In a database file window, choose Tools - Table Filter. +View - Database Objects - Queries + +In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties - Advanced Settings tab. +In a database file window of type ODBC or Address book,
choose Edit - Database - Connection Type. +Path selection button in various wizards / Edit buttons for some entries in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. +In a database file window of type ODBC, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type.see #i56356 +In a database file window of type Address book - LDAP, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type JDBC, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type MySQL, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type dBASE, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type dBASE, choose Edit - Database - Properties, click Indexes. +In a database file window of type Text, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window of type MS ADO, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window, choose Tools - SQL. +In a database file window, click the Queries icon. +In a database file window, click the Tables icon. +
+In a database file window, click the Tables icon. Choose Insert - Table Design or Edit - Edit. +
+In a database file window, click the Tables icon. Choose Insert - Table Design or Edit - Edit.UFI: was: "... , then Tools - Index Design or Index Design button" + (don't know where that is now) +In a database file window, choose Insert - Query (Design view).Please have a look of correctness +In a database file window, click the Queries icon, then choose Edit - Edit. +In a database file window, click the Queries icon, then choose Edit - Edit.
If the referenced fields no longer exist, you see this dialog. +Open query design and choose Insert - New Relation, or double-click on a connection line between two tables. + +
+ + + + + Add Table Icon + + +Insert Tables + + +
+
+
+ + + + +New Relation Icon + + +New Relation + + +
+
+
+Find Record icon on the Table Data bar and Form Design bar. +
+ + + + +Find Record Icon + + +Find Record + + +
+
+
+
+Sort Order icon on the Table Data bar and Form Design bar. +
+ + + + +Sort Order Icon + + +Sort Order + + +
+
+
+In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +Drag and drop a table or a query into the table part of another database file window. +In a database file window, choose Insert - Form. +In a database file window, choose Edit - Database - Properties. +In a database file window, choose Tools - Relationships. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21fba358d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,368 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040500.xhp + + + +This listing is split over the files 00040500, 00040501, 00040502 and 00040503. +

Format Menu

+Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. +
+Choose Format - Character. +On Text Formatting bar (with cursor in object), click +
+ + + + Icon Character + + + Character + + +
+
+
+
+Choose Format - Character - Font tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Font tab. +Open context menu of a row header in a database table - choose Table Format - Font tab. +Choose Format - Title - Character tab (Chart documents). +Choose Format - Legend - Character tab (Chart documents). +Choose Format - Axis - Character tab (Chart documents). + + +Choose Format - Cells - Font tab (spreadsheets). +Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets). + + +
+
+Choose Format - Character - Font Effects tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Font Effects tab. + + +Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets). + + +
+
+Choose Format - Character - Position tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Alignment tab. + + +Menu Format - Page - Header/Footer - Edit button (spreadsheets). + + +
+
+Choose Format - Character - Asian Layout tab +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Asian Layout tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Asian Typography tab (not in HTML). +Choose Format - Cells - Asian Typography tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and click Modify/New - Asian Typography tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Character - Hyperlink tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph. +On Text Formatting bar (with cursor in object), click +
+ + + + Icon Paragraph + + + Paragraph + + +
+
+
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Alignment tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Alignment tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Indents & Spacing tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Tabs tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Tabs tab. +Double-click the ruler +
+
+(all options only in Writer or Calc) +Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Image - Properties - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Page - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Character - Borders tab. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Borders tab. +Choose Format - Page - Header - More button. +Choose Format - Page - Footer - More button. +Choose Format - Cells - Borders tab. +
+
+ + + Menu Format - Paragraph - Border tab - Padding. + + + Menu Format - Page - Border - Padding. + + +
+
+Choose Format - Paragraph - Background tab. +Choose Format - Character - Highlighting tab. +Choose Format - Image - Background tab. +Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Area tab. +Choose Format - Page - Background tab. +Choose Format - Page - Header - More button. +Choose Format - Page - Footer - More button. +Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Background tab. +Choose Insert/Edit - Section - Background tab +Choose Format - Cells - Background tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Page Style - Organizer tab. +Choose Styles - Edit Style - Organizer tab. +Choose Styles - Manage Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Page - Organizer tab. +Choose Styles - Manage Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab. +
+
+Choose Format - Styles - Edit Style - Organizer tab. +Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab. +
+
+Choose Slide - Properties - Page tab. +
+
+Choose View - Styles (Command+T) +(F11) - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Organizer tab. +
+
+ + +Choose Slide - Properties - Slide tab + + +Choose Page - Properties - Page tab. + + +Choose Format - Page - Page tab. +Choose View - Styles (Command+T) +(F11) - open context menu of a page style entry and choose Modify/New - Page tab. + + +Choose Format - Page Style - Page tab. +Choose View - Styles (Command+T) +(F11) - open context menu of a page style entry and choose Modify/New - Page tab. + + +Choose Format - Page Style - Page tab (Writer). + + +
+ + +
+ Command+TF11 +Choose View - Styles. + + + Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles. + + + Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles. + + + Choose Styles - Manage Styles. + + + Choose Styles - Manage Styles. + On Formatting bar, click + + + + Icon Styles + + + Styles + + +
+ + +
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + On the Drawing bar, click + + +
+ + + + Icon 3d window + + + 3D Effects + + +
+
+
+Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Geometry tab. +Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Shading tab. +Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Illumination tab. +Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Textures tab. +Open the context menu of the 3D object, choose 3D Effects - Material tab. +
+Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. +Right-click a paragraph, choose List - Bullets and Numbering. +On Formatting bar, click +
+ + + + Bullets and Numbering dialog Icon + + + Bullets and Numbering + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering. Open Customize tab page. + + + Open Styles - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify. + + + Open Styles - List Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify. + + +
+
+ Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Bullets tab. + + + Open Styles - Presentation Styles - context menu of an Outline Style - choose New/Modify. + + + Open Styles - List Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify. + + +
+
+ + + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - context menu of a Presentation Style (except Background) - choose New/Modify - Numbering tab. + + + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Ordered tab. + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - context menu of a List Style - choose New/Modify - Ordered tab. + Choose Styles - Manage Styles - context menu of a List Style - choose New/Modify - Ordered tab. + + +
+Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Image tab. +
+Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Outline tab. +Choose Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11) - context menu of a List Style entry - choose New/Modify. +
+
+ + + Choose Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position tab. + Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - choose List Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify - Position tab. + Choose Styles - Manage Styles - choose List Styles - context menu of an entry - choose New/Modify - Position tab. + Choose Tools - Chapter Numbering - Position tab. + + +
+
+ + + Menu Format - Image - Properties - Crop tab. + + + Icon on the Image toolbar: + + + + + + + + + + Icon Crop + + + Crop + + +
+ + +
+
+Choose Format - Text. +
+ +
+Menu Format - Asian phonetic guide. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df82926e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040501.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,445 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040501.xhp + + + + This listing is split over the files 00040500, 00040501, 00040502 and 00040503. +

Format Menu

+ Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. No database connection in current form is allowed. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click More Controls icon, click Table Control icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 1. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box or List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 2. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click List Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 3. + Open Form Controls toolbar, click Combo Box icon and drag mouse to generate field. Database connection must exist in the form: Wizard - Page 3. + Open Toolbox bar in Basic dialog editor, click + + + + Icon Properties + + + Properties + + +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form Properties. +
+ + + + Icon Form + + + Form + + +
+
+
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form Properties - General tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Form Properties icon - General tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form Properties - Data tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Form Properties icon - Data tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected control on an XML Form document, choose Control Properties - Data tab. + Open Form Controls toolbar of an XML Form document, click Control icon - Data tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Form Properties - Events tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Form Properties icon - Events tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control Properties. +
+ + + + Icon Control + + + Control + + +
+
+
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control Properties - General tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - General tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control Properties - Data tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Control icon - Data tab. +
+
+ Open context menu of a selected form element - choose Control Properties - Events tab. + Open Form Design toolbar, click Control Properties icon - Events tab. +
+
+ On Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Activation Order + + + Activation Order + + +
+
+
+
+ On Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Add Field + + + Add Field + + +
+
+
+
+ On Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Form Navigator + + + Form Navigator + + +
+
+
+
+ On Form Controls toolbar or Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Design Mode + + + Design Mode On/Off + + +
+
+
+
+ Open Form Navigator - select form - open context menu - choose Open in Design Mode. + On Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Open in Design Mode + + + Open in Design Mode + + +
+
+
+
+ On Form Control toolbar, click + + + + Icon Wizard + + + Wizards On/Off + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Open context menu - choose Arrange ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + Choose Shape - Arrange ($[officename] Draw). + + + + Icon Arrange + + + Arrange + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Draw). + Shift+CommandCtrl+plus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Arrange - Bring to Front ($[officename] Impress). +
+ + + + Icon Bring to Front + + + Bring to Front + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Draw). + CommandCtrl+plus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) + Open context menu - choose Arrange - Bring Forward ($[officename] Impress). + + + + Icon Bring Forward + + + Bring Forward + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Draw). + CommandCtrl+minus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) + Open context menu - choose Arrange - Send Backward ($[officename] Impress). + + + + Icon Send Backward + + + Send Backward + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Draw). + Shift+CommandCtrl+minus sign ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw) + Open context menu - choose Arrange - Send to Back ($[officename] Impress). +
+ + + + Icon Send to Back + + + Send to Back + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - To Foreground. +
+ + + + Icon To Foreground + + + To Foreground + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Arrange - To Background. +
+ + + + Icon To Background + + + To Background + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Align (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). +
+
+ Choose Format - Align - Left ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Left (selected objects) ($[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Align - Left (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Left + + + Left + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align - Centered ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Centered + + + Centered + + +
+
+
+ +
+ Choose Format - Align - Top ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Top (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Align - Top (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Top + + + Top + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align - Centered ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + Open context menu - choose Align - Centered (objects selected) ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Centered + + + Centered + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align - Bottom ($[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc). + Choose Shape - Align - Bottom (objects selected) ($[officename] Draw). + On Align bar ($[officename] Impress, $[officename] Draw), click +
+ + + + Icon Bottom + + + Bottom + + +
+
+
+
+ For a selected object, choose Format - Anchor. + Right-click on a selected object - choose Anchor. +
+ On Drawing Object Properties bar, Image bar, Frame bar, OLE Objects bar or Form Design bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Anchor + + + Anchor + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Anchor - To Page. + Choose Format - Anchor - To Paragraph. + Choose Format - Anchor - To Character. + Choose Format - Anchor - As Character. + Choose Format - Anchor - To Frame. + Choose Format - Anchor - To Cell. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43ba42ec8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,543 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040502.xhp + + + + This listing is split over the files 00040500, 00040501, 00040502 and 00040503. +

Format Menu

+
+ Choose Format - Line (Impress and Draw).i64150 + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Line (Writer). + Choose Format - Object - Line (Calc). + On Line and Filling bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Line + + + Line + + +
+
+
+
+ + + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Line - Line tab. + + + Choose Format - Object - Line - Line tab. + + + Choose Format - Title - Borders tab (charts). + Choose Format - Legend - Borders tab (charts). + Choose Format - Axis - Line tab (charts). + Choose Format - Grid - Line tab (charts). + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Borders tab (charts). + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Borders tab (charts). + Choose Format - Chart Area - Borders tab (charts). + + + Choose View - Styles - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Line tab (presentation documents). + + +
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Line - Line Styles tab. + +
+ + + Choose Format - Line + + + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Line - Arrow Styles tab. + + + Right-click a selected object - choose Line - Arrow Styles tab. + + + On the Drawing Object Properties bar, choose Arrow Styles tab, after clicking + + + On the Drawing Object Properties bar or Image bar, choose Arrow Styles tab, after clicking + + + On the Image bar or Line and Filling bar, choose Arrow Styles tab, after clicking + + + +
+ +
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Area. + On Line and Filling bar, click +
+ + + + Icon Area + + + Area + + +
+
+
+
+ + +
+ Choose View - Styles (Command+TF11) - choose Paragraph, Frame or Page style - open context menu - choose Modify/New - Area tab. + Choose Table - Properties - Background tab. Select the table object - Cell, Row or Table - which background area is to be filled. + Choose Format - Page Style - Area tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Area - Area +
+ + + Choose Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11) - choose Cell or Page style - open context menu - choose Modify/New - Background tab. + Choose Format - Page - Background tab + Choose Format - Cells - Background tab + Choose Format - Object - Area - Area tab. + + + Choose Format - Style - Edit Style - Area tab + Choose Slide - Properties - Background tab + Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11), choose Drawing or Presentation style - open context menu - choose Modify/New - Area tab. + Choose Format - Object and Shape - Area - Area tab + + + Choose Format - Style - Edit Style - Area tab + Choose Format - Styles - Manage Styles (Command+TF11), choose Drawing style - open context menu - choose Modify/New - Area tab. + Choose Page - Properties - Background tab. + Choose Format - Area - Area tab + + + Choose Format - Title - Area tab. + Choose Format - Legend - Area tab. + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Area tab. + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Area. + Choose Format - Chart Area - Area. + + + When editing a form: + + When editing a report: + Choose Format - Page - Background tab. + + + + + +
+
+ Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (drawing documents). + Choose Format - Object and Shape - Area - Transparency tab (presentation documents). + Choose Format - Chart Wall - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Chart Area - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Chart Floor - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - All Titles - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Subtitle - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Title (X Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Title (Y Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Title - Title (Z Axis) - Transparency tab (chart documents) + Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Point - Transparency - tab (chart documents). + Choose Format - Object Properties - Data Series - Transparency tab (chart documents). +
+
+ Choose Format - Paragraph - Transparency tab. + Choose View - Styles - open context menu of an entry and choose Modify/New - Transparency tab. +
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Area - Shadow tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Area - Gradients tab. + + Choose Format - + + Text Box and Shape - + Object - + Object and Shape - + + Area - Hatch tab. + + + + + + Choose Format - Page Style - Area + Choose Page - Properties - Background + Choose Slide - Properties - Background + + - Hatch tab. + + + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Area - Image tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Text Attributes + Object - Text - Text. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Text Attributes + Object - TextObject and ShapeText - Text tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Text Attributes + Object - TextText - Text Animation tab. +
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Position and Size. + F4 keyF4 key +
+
+ + + + Icon Position and Size + + + Position and SizeUFI: in Form Design toolbar + + +
+
+
+ Open the context menu for the object - choose Name. +
+
+ Right-click on a selected image, frame, or OLE object - choose Properties - Options tab. + For a selected object, choose Format - Description +
+
+Click on textbox or shape to select, then... +Choose Format - + Text Box and Shape - + Object - + Object and Shape - + Position and Size - Position and Size tab. + +Open context menu for selected object - choose Position and Size - Position and Size tab. + + + + +Icon Position and Size + + + + Position and Size menu icon + + + +
+ + + + +Press F4 after selection to open the tab directly. + + +
+
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Position and Size - Rotation tab. + + + + Icon Rotate + + + Rotate + + +
+
+ Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Position and Size - Slant & Corner Radius tab. + Choose Format - Text Box and Shape - + Object - Position and Size - Callout tab. This is only available for textbox callouts, not for custom shapes callouts. +
+ Choose Edit - Points. + Open context menu - choose Edit Points. + Open context menu - choose Edit Points. + F8 keyF8 key + + + + Icon Edit Points + + + Edit Points + + +
+
+
+ Choose Format - Character (drawing functions). + Open context menu - choose Character. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Size. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Bold. +
+ + + + Icon Bold + + + Bold + + +
+
+
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Italic. +
+ + + + Icon Italic + + + Italic + + +
+
+
+
+ Open the menu Format - Text and choose Single Underline or Double Underline. +
+ + + + Icon Underline + + + Underline + + +
+
+
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Strikethrough. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Shadow. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Contour. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Superscript. +
+
+ Open context menu - choose Style - Subscript. +
+
+ Choose Format - Spacing. +
+
+ Choose Format - Spacing - Line Spacing: 1. +
+
+ Choose Format - Spacing - Line Spacing: 1.5. +
+
+ Choose Format - Spacing - Line Spacing: 2. +
+
+ Choose Format - Align Text - Left. + Open context menu - choose Align - Left. +
+ + + + Icon Align Left + + + Align Left + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align Text - Right. + Open context menu - choose Align - Right. +
+ + + + Icon Align Right + + + Align Right + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align Text - Centered. + Open context menu - choose Align - Center. +
+ + + + Icon Centered + + + Align Center HorizontallyCentered + + +
+
+
+
+ Choose Format - Align Text - Justified. + Open context menu - choose Align - Justified. +
+ + + + Icon Justified + + + Justified + + +
+
+
+ Click Fontwork icon on Drawing bar. +
+ Choose Format - Group. + Open context menu - choose Group. +
+
+ + + Choose Shape - Group - Group + + + Choose Format - Group - Group + + + Open context menu - choose Group (for text box and shapes). +
+ + + + Icon Group + + + Group + + +
+
+
+
+ + + Choose Shape - Group - Ungroup. + + + Choose Format - Group - Ungroup. + + + Open context menu - choose Ungroup. +
+ + + + Icon Ungroup + + + Ungroup + + +
+
+
+
+ + + Choose Shape - Group - Exit Group. + + + Choose Format - Group - Exit Group. + + + Open context menu - choose Exit Group. +
+ + + + Icon Exit Group + + + Exit Group + + +
+
+
+
+ + + Choose Shape - Group - Enter Group. + + + Choose Format - Group - Enter Group. + + + Open context menu - choose Enter Group. +
+ + + + Icon Enter Group + + + Enter Group + + +
+
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7db2a6a34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040503.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Format Menu + /text/shared/00/00040503.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +This listing is split over the files 00040500, 00040501, 00040502 and 00040503. +

Format Menu

+
+Choose Format - Rows - Height. +Open context menu of a row header in an open database table - choose Row Height. +
+
+Choose Format - Columns - Width. +Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Width. +
+
+ + + Choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab. + Choose View - Styles (Command+T)(F11) - open context menu and choose Modify/New - Numbers tab. + + + Open context menu for a column header in an open database table - choose Column Format - Format tab. + + + Choose Table - Number Format (for tables). + Choose Insert - Field - More Fields - Variables tab and select Additional formats in the Format list (for variables). + + +Choose Format - Axis - Y Axis - Numbers tab (chart documents). +
+
+Choose Format - Title - Main Title - Alignment tab.Choose Format - Cells - Alignment tab. +Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Format - Alignment tab. +
+Open context menu of a row header in a database table - choose Table Format. +Open context menu of a column header in a database table - choose Column Format. +Context menu for a row header in an open database table - Delete Rows. +
+Choose Shape - Flip ($[officename] Draw). +Choose Format - Image - Properties - Image tab. +Open context menu - choose Flip (presentation documents). +
+
+Choose Shape - Flip - Vertically ($[officename] Draw). +Choose Format - Image - Properties - Image tab. +Open context menu - choose Flip - Vertically (presentation documents). +
+
+Choose Shape - Flip - Horizontally ($[officename] Draw). +Choose Format - Image - Properties, and then click the Image tab. +Choose Format - Flip - Horizontally. +Right-click a selected object - choose Flip - Horizontally ($[officename] Impress). +
+
+Select three or more objects and +Choose Shape - Distribute Selection ($[officename] Draw). +Open context menu - choose Distribute Selection ($[officename] Impress). +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..510f1270e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +/text/shared/00/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows +Every docked window has an icon to control the display properties of the window. +
+To show or hide a docked window, click the icon. +
+AutoShow and AutoHide Docked Windows +You can click the edge of a hidden docked window to open the window. +The docked window closes automatically when you move the mouse pointer outside of the window. +Multiple docked windows act as a single window in AutoShow/AutoHide mode. +Drag and Drop +If you drag an object over the edge of a hidden docked window, the window opens in AutoShow mode. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1f155e3e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Gallery context menu +/text/shared/00/01010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Gallery context menu + +Defines how a selected graphic object is inserted into a document. + +Inserts a copy of the selected graphic object directly into the document. + +Inserts the selected graphic as a link. + +The Preview command displays the selected graphic. + + + +Assigns a title to a selected Gallery object. + +Deletes the selected graphic after confirmation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..892ab1c07 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Context Menu of Web Pages in Read-Only Mode +/text/shared/00/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Context Menu of Web Pages in Read-Only Mode + +Opens a dialog where you can save the selected graphics. + +Copies the link at the mouse pointer to the clipboard. + +Copies a selected graphic to the clipboard. + +If you have deactivated the graphics display, choose the Load Graphics command to make them visible. + +Sets all graphics in the document to be invisible. + +Allows you to save the background of a Web page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4fc5004c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/00/01050000.xhp + + + +
+ + +GeneralUFI: this is a tab page of the Gallery. Deleted everything else +The General tab page lists the general properties of the current theme. +
+ +Name +Displays the name of the theme. If no name has been assigned, you can type a new name in the text box. +Type +Specifies the object type. +Location +Specifies the complete object path. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4d4bc4088 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ + + + + + + +Edit Menu +/text/shared/00/edit_menu.xhp + + + +

Edit Menu

+
+Choose Edit - Undo. +CommandCtrl+Z +On the Standard bar or Table Data bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Undo + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Redo. +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Redo + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Edit - Repeat. +
+Choose Edit - Cut. +CommandCtrl+X +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Cut + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Copy. +CommandCtrl+C +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Copy + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Paste. +CommandCtrl+V +On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Paste + + +
+ +
+
+
+Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste Special. +CommandCtrl + Shift + V. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste Unformatted Text. + Right-click to open the context menu and choose Paste Special - Unformatted Text. + CommandCtrl + Alt + Shift + V. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste Nested Table. + Right-click on the target table cell to open the context menu and choose Paste Special - Nested Table. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste as Rows above. + Right-click on the target table cell to open the context menu and choose Paste Special - Rows Above. +
+
+ Choose Edit - Paste Special - Paste as Columns Before. + Right-click on the target table cell to open the context menu and choose Paste Special - Columns Before. +
+ +
+Choose Edit - Select All. +CommandCtrl+A +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Select All + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Edit - Track Changes. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Record. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Show. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage. +
+Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage - List tab. +Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes. The AutoCorrect dialog appears.
Click the Edit Changes button and navigate to the List tab. +
+Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage - Filter tab. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Merge Document. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Compare Document. + +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect + +
+Choose Edit - Track Changes - Comment. +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage - List tab.
Click an entry in the list and open the context menu.
Choose Edit Comment. +
+ + +
+Choose Edit - Find. +CommandCtrl+F +
+
+Choose Edit - Find & Replace. +CommandCtrl+H + On the Standard bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Find & Replace + + +
+ +
+
+Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Attributes. +Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Format button. +
+ + + + + + Search Icon or CommandCtrl+F + + + On the Table Data bar, click Find icon, then Similarity search check box, then click the Similarities button (database table view). + + +
+ + + + Search Icon9.oct.2020 Ctrl+F is not configured for Database Form view + + + On the Form Navigation bar, click Record Search icon, then Similarity search check box, then click the Similarities button (database form view). + + +
+ + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace - Similarity search check box, then click the Similarities button. + + +
+ +Choose Tools - Bibliography Database. +Choose Edit - Links to External Files. +Choose Edit - Links to External Files - Modify (DDE links only). +
+Select a frame, then choose Edit - OLE Object - Properties. +Open context menu of selected frame, choose Properties. +
+Choose Edit - OLE Object. +Choose Edit - OLE Object - Edit, also in the context menu of selected object. +Choose Edit - OLE Object - Open. +Choose Edit - Reference. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7307df7fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Standard Icons Alt Texts to be Embedded +/text/shared/00/icon_alt.xhp + + +Standard Icon Alt Text + + + +Standard Icons Alt Texts to be Embedded +Icon + +Warning Icon + +Tip Icon + +Note Icon + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29bb9bf52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Keyboard Shortcuts + /text/shared/00/kbd_shortcuts.xhp + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts (to embed)

+ + + + + Command+T + F11 + + + + + + + + Command+F8 + Ctrl+F8 + + + + + + + + Command+F9 + Ctrl+F9 + + + + + + + + Command+Enter + Ctrl+Enter + + + + + + + + Option+Enter + Alt+Enter + + + + + + + + Command+Option+Shift+V + Crtl+Alt+Shift+V + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ae3aac364 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,218 @@ + + + + + + + New + /text/shared/01/01010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

New

+ Creates a new $[officename] document. +
+ +Creates a new $[officename] document. Click the arrow to select the document type. +
+ +
+ +If you want to create a document from a template, choose New - Templates. +A template is a file that contains the design elements for a document, including formatting styles, backgrounds, frames, graphics, fields, page layout, and text. + + + + Icon + + + Name + + + Function + + + + + Icon + + + Text Document + + + Creates a new text document in $[officename] Writer. + + + + + Icon + + + Spreadsheet + + + Creates a new spreadsheet document in $[officename] Calc. + + + + + Icon + + + Presentation + + + Creates a new presentation document in $[officename] Impress. + + + + + Icon + + + Drawing + + + Creates a new drawing document in $[officename] Draw. + + + + + Icon + + + Database + + + Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. + + + + + Icon + + + HTML Document + + + Creates a new HTML document. + + + + + Icon + + + XML Form Document + + + Creates a new XForms document. + + + + + Icon + + + Master Document + + + Creates a new master document. + + + + + Icon + + + Formula + + + Creates a new formula document in $[officename] Math. + + + + + Icon + + + Labels + + + Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels in $[officename] Writer. + + + + + Icon + + + Business Cards + + + Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document in $[officename] Writer. + + + + + Icon + + + Templates + + + Creates a new document using an existing template. + + +
+
+ Opening documents +
+ + Creates a new text document in $[officename] Writer. + + Creates a new spreadsheet document in $[officename] Calc. + + Creates a new presentation document in $[officename] Impress. + + Creates a new drawing document in $[officename] Draw. + + +Opens the Database Wizard to create a database file. + +Creates a new HTML document. + + Creates a new XForms document. + + Creates a new master document. + + Creates a new formula document in $[officename] Math. + + Opens the Labels dialog where you can set the options for your labels, and then creates a new text document for the labels in $[officename] Writer. + + Opens the Business Cards dialog where you can set the options for your business cards, and then creates a new text document in $[officename] Writer. + + Creates a new document using an existing template or opens a sample document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b71ad5297 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Master Document + /text/shared/01/01010001.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Master Document + Use a master document to organize complex projects, such as a book. A master document can contain the individual files for each chapter of a book, as well as a table of contents, and an index. +
+ +
+
+ + +
+ + Navigator for Master Documents +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..460914a6e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Labels + /text/shared/01/01010200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Labels + Allows you to create labels. Labels are created in a text document. You can print labels using a predefined or a custom paper format. + You can also print a single label or an entire sheet of labels. +
+ +
+ + + + +New Document + Creates a new document for editing. + +
+ Creating labels + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0994cc9c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + Labels + /text/shared/01/01010201.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Labels + Specify the label text and choose the paper size for the label. +
+
+ +
+Inscription + Enter or insert the text that you want to appear on the label(s). + +Label text + Enter the text that you want to appear on the label. You can also insert a database field. + +Address + Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten. + To change your return address, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME, and then click on the User Data tab. + +Database + Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label. + +Table + Select the database table containing the field(s) that you want to use in your label. + + +Database field + Select the database field that you want, and then click the arrow to the left of this box to insert the field into the Label text box. + The name of the database field is bounded by brackets in the Label text box. If you want, you can separate database fields with spaces. Press Enter to insert a database field on a new line. +Format + You can select a predefined size format for your label or a size format that you specify on the Format tab. + +Continuous + Prints labels on continuous paper. + +Sheet + Prints labels on individual sheets. + +Brand + Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. + +Type + Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on the brand on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom label format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. +Info + The paper type and the dimensions of the label are displayed at the bottom of the Format area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0df00cdcb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Format + /text/shared/01/01010202.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Format + Set paper formatting options. +
+
+ +
+ +Horizontal pitch + Displays the distance between the left edges of adjacent labels or business cards. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Vertical pitch + Displays the distance between the upper edge of a label or a business card and the upper edge of the label or the business card directly below. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Width + Displays the width for the label or the business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Height + Displays the height for the label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Left margin + Displays the distance from the left edge of the page to the left edge of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Upper margin + Displays distance from the top edge of the page to the top of the first label or business card. If you are defining a custom format, enter a value here. + +Columns + Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the width of the page. + +Rows + Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to span the height of the page. + +Save + Saves the current label or business card format. + + +Save Label Format + +Brand + Enter or select the desired brand. + +Type + Enter or select a label type. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e347ced5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Options + /text/shared/01/01010203.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Options + Sets additional options for your labels or business cards, including text synchronization and printer settings. +
+
+ +
+ +Entire Page + Creates a full page of labels or business cards. + +Single Label + Prints a single label or business card on a page. + +Column + Enter the number of labels or business cards that you want to have in a row on your page. + +Row + Enter the number of rows of labels or business cards that you want to have on your page. + +Synchronize contents + Allows you to edit a single label or business card and updates the contents of the remaining labels or business cards on the page when you click the Synchronize Labels button. + + +Synchronize Labels + The Synchronize labels button only appears in your document if you have selected the Synchronize contents on the Options tab when you created the labels or business cards. + Copies the contents of the top left label or business card to the remaining labels or business cards on the page. +Printer + Displays the name of the currently selected printer. + +Setup + Opens the Printer Setup dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34060e871 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Business cards +/text/shared/01/01010300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Business cards +Design and create your own business cards. You can choose from a number of pre-defined size formats or create your own. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f6ef1485 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Medium + /text/shared/01/01010301.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ Medium + Select the size of your business card from a number of predefined size formats, or a size format that you specify on the Format tab. +
+
+ +
+Format + Select a size format for your business card. + +Continuous + Prints business cards on continuous paper. + +Sheet + Prints business cards on individual sheets. + +Brand + Select the brand of paper that you want to use. Each brand has its own size formats. + +Type + Select the size format that you want to use. The available formats depend on what you selected in the Brand list. If you want to use a custom size format, select [User], and then click the Format tab to define the format. + +Info + The paper type and the dimensions of the business card are displayed at the bottom of the Format area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..55c7005bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010302.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Business Cards + /text/shared/01/01010302.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Business Cards + Define the appearance of your business cards. +
+
+ +
+ +Content + Select a design layout for your business card. + Select a business card category in AutoText - Section box, and then click a layout in the Content list. + +AutoText - Section + Select a business card category, and then click a layout in the Content list. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92262fcb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Private + /text/shared/01/01010303.xhp + + + +
+ + +Private + Contains personal contact information for business cards. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab.removed switched note about autotext not supplied with OOo
+
+ +
+Private data + Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. You can also modify or update these entries by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + + +First name 2 + Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. + +Last name 2 + Enter the last name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. + +Initials 2 + Enter the initials of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. + + +Country + Enter the name of the country in which you live. + + +Profession + Enter the title of your profession. + +Phone + Enter your home telephone number. + +Mobile + Enter your mobile telephone number. + + +Homepage + Enter the address of your internet homepage. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2a01307ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010304.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + Business + /text/shared/01/01010304.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Business + Contains contact information for business cards that use a layout from a 'Business Card, Work' category. Business card layouts are selected on the Business Cards tab. +
+
+ +
+Business data + Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. + If you want to include your name on a business card, enter your name on the Private tab. Then choose a layout on the Business Cards tab that includes a name placeholder. + + +Company 2nd line + Enter additional company details. + +Slogan + Enter the slogan of your company. + + +Country + Enter the name of the country where your business is located. + + +Phone + Enter your business telephone number. + +Mobile + Enter your mobile telephone number. + + +Homepage + Enter the address of your company's internet homepage. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e23446f82 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Open + /text/shared/01/01020000.xhp + + + + + directories; creating new + folder creation + My Documents folder; opening + multiple documents; opening + opening; several files + selecting; several files + opening; files, with placeholders + placeholders;on opening files + documents; opening with templates + templates; opening documents with + documents; styles changed + styles; changed message + + mw replaced "wildcards" by "regular expressions"mw deleted "regular expressions;" and "files;" +
+ + + + + +

Open

+ Opens a local or remote file, or imports one. +
+
+ +
+ %PRODUCTNAME uses the native file picker dialog of the window manager of your operating system for the Open command. + + If the file that you want to open contains styles, special rules apply. + +

Display area

+ Displays the files and folders in the folder that you are in. To open a file, select the file, and then click Open. + To open more than one document at the same time, each in an own window, hold CommandCtrl while you click the files, and then click Open. + + + + Modern system file dialogs present many features for file handling. Most allows you to rename, delete, create files, sort list of files, display files and folders in icons, tree or list views, traverse the file system folder tree and much more. Use the mouse right button to get a list of commands on the selected files in the display area. + + + + Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog. + + Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog. + + Click to delete all selected files. + + + +

File name

+ Enter a file name or a path for the file. + The following features are available in the dialog: + + +

Version

+ If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open. You can save and organize multiple versions of a document by choosing File - Versions. The versions of a document are opened in read-only mode. + +

File type

+ Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the folder. +

Open

+ Opens the selected document(s). + +

Insert

+ If you opened the dialog by choosing Insert - Document, the Open button is labeled Insert. Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position. + +

Read-only

+ Opens the file in read-only mode. + + + +

Play

+ Plays the selected sound file. Click again to stop playing the sound file. + + + +
+ +

Opening Documents With Templates

+ When you open a document created from a template, %PRODUCTNAME checks to see if the template has been modified since the document was last opened. If the template was changed, a dialog is shown where you can select which styles to apply to the document. + + + To apply the new styles from the template to the document, click Update Styles. + + + To retain the styles that are currently used in the document, click Keep Old Styles. + + + %PRODUCTNAME recognizes templates located in any directory defined for Templates in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. + If a document was created using a template that cannot be found, a dialog is shown that asks you how to proceed next time the document is opened. + To break the link between the document and the missing template, click No, otherwise %PRODUCTNAME will look for the template the next time you open the document. + When you use File - Save As and select a template filter to save a template in a directory that is not specified in the Templates path, then the documents based on that template will not be checked. +
+
+ Opening Documents + Import and Export Filters +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdfa8ae21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Open Remote... + /text/shared/01/01020001.xhp + + + +
+ + +remote file; open +open; remote file + +Open Remote + Opens a document located in a remote file service. +
+
+ Choose File - Open Remote. + Click the Remote Files button in the Start Center. + Long-click the Open icon and select Open Remote File. + +
+ A remote file server is a web service that stores documents with or without checkin, checkout, version controls and backups. +
+ Opening and saving files in remote servers +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..627d84353 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Select Path + /text/shared/01/01020101.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Select Path + Sets file paths. +
+ +
+ +Select + Selects the indicated path. + +Path: + Enter or select the path from the list. +
+ Open dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f8a611a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Filter Selection + /text/shared/01/01020103.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Filter Selection +Allows you to select an import filter. +
+ +
+ + + +Filter list + Select the import filter for the file that you want to open. + If $[officename] does not recognize the file type of the document that your want to open, try any of the following: + + + Select the import filter from the list. + + + Ensure that the file extension corresponds to the file type of the document. For example, a Microsoft Word document must have a *.doc or *.docx extension for $[officename] to use the appropriate filter. + + + + + + + Install a missing import filter with the $[officename] Setup program. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f51a544bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Close + /text/shared/01/01050000.xhp + + + +
+documents; closing +closing;documents +mw deleted "backing window" + +

Close

+Closes the current document without exiting the program. +
+
+ +
+The Close command closes all open windows of the current document. +If you have made changes to the current document, you are prompted if you want to save your changes. +no longer the default: id="par_id3159399" If you open a document for printing, and do not make any changes, you are still prompted to save your changes when you close the document. This is because $[officename] keeps track of when a document is printed. +When you close the last open document window, you see the Start Center. +
+ Close the current window + Exit $[officename] +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4497a57cf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Save + /text/shared/01/01060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Save + Saves the current document. +
+
+ +
+ When you edit an AutoText entry, this command changes to Save AutoText. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eaf8edfd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Save Remote... + /text/shared/01/01060001.xhp + + + +
+ +remote file; save +save; remote file + +Save Remote... + Saves a document located in a remote file service. +
+
+ Choose File - Save Remote... .How to proper deal with ellipses? + Long-click on the Save icon and select Save Remote File... . + +
+A remote file server is a web service that stores documents with or without checkin, checkout, version controls and backups. +
+ Opening and saving files in remote servers +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..deac0208d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01060002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Save a Copy + /text/shared/01/01060002.xhp + + + +
+ +save; save a copy +save a copy + +Save a Copy + Saves a copy of the actual document with another name or location. +
+
+ Choose File - Save a Copy. +
+Creates another file with same contents of the current file. The current file is kept open for editing. +
+ Save + Save as + Export +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..854259683 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Save As +/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp + + + +
+saving as command; precautions + + + +Save As +Saves the current document in a different location, or with a different file name or file type. + +
+
+ +
+%PRODUCTNAME uses the native file picker dialog of the window manager of your operating system for the Save as command. + +To save a document as a template, use the command File - Templates - Save As Template. + + +File name +
+Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL +
+ + + +File type +
+Select the file format for the document that you are saving. In the display area, only the documents with this file type are displayed. File types are described in Information on Import and Export Filters. +
+ + + +Always save your document in a %PRODUCTNAME file type before saving it to an external file type. When you export to an external file type, some formatting features may be lost. + + + + +Save +
+Saves the file. +
+Save with password +
+Protects the file with a password that must be entered before a user can open the file. +Only documents using the %PRODUCTNAME XML-based format can be saved with a password. +
removed autoextension, i82752 + +

Encrypt with GPG key

+Use OpenPGP public keys to encrypt documents. + +Edit filter settings +Allows you to set the spreadsheet saving options for some types of data files.UFI: had to change text and remove Calc switch because switch did not work correctly + +Selection +Exports only the selected graphic objects in %PRODUCTNAME Draw and Impress to another format. If this box is not checked, the entire document is exported. +If you are exporting to any document file type, the entire document is exported. + +
+ +Export of Text Files +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2064b7d47 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Export + /text/shared/01/01070001.xhp + + + +
+ +documents; exporting +converting; $[officename] documents +exporting;to foreign formats +MW deleted "document types;..." + +Export +Saves the current document with a different name and format to a location that you specify. +
+
+ +
+Unlike Save As, the Export command writes a copy of the current document in a new file with the chosen format, but keeps the current document and format open in your session. +The Export command opens the system file picker, where you can enter the name and format of the exported file. +

File Name

+Enter a file name or a path for the file. +

File Type

+ +

Save

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c8cb6f40 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Export As + /text/shared/01/01070002.xhp + + + +
+ + +Export as; PDF +Export as; EPUB + +

Export As

+ Export the document in PDF or EPUB formats. +
+
+ Choose File - Export As. +
+ +

Export Directly as PDF

+ Export the entire document using your default PDF settings. + +

Export Directly as EPUB

+ Export the entire document using your default EPUB settings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6190e023b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Properties +/text/shared/01/01100000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Properties +

+Displays the properties for the current file, including statistics such as word count and the date the file was created. +UFI: removed a note +
+
+ +
+The Properties dialog contains the following tab pages: + + + + + + + + + + + +Depending on your access rights to the file, you might not see all of the tabs in the Properties dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9022d3ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Description (File Properties) + /text/shared/01/01100100.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Description

+ Contains descriptive information about the document. +
+
+ +
+ +

Title

+ Enter a title for the document. + +

Subject

+ Enter a subject for the document. You can use a subject to group documents with similar contents. + +

Keywords

+ Enter the words that you want to use to index the content of your document. Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. + +

Comments

+ Enter comments to help identify the document. +Title, Subject, and Keywords are exported to PDF files as PDF Document Properties. Entered values are exported and will appear in the corresponding fields in the PDF Document Properties Description. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..698047c09 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + General (File properties) + /text/shared/01/01100200.xhp + + + +
+ +version numbers of documents +documents; version numbers +files; version numbers +editing time of documents +documents; editing time + + + + +

General

+ Contains basic information about the current file. +
+
+ +
+ +

File

+ Displays the file name. +

Type

+ Displays the file type for the current document. +

Location

+ Displays the path and the name of the directory where the file is stored. +

Size

+ Displays the size of the current document in bytes. +

Created

+ Displays the date and time and author when the file was first saved. +

Modified

+ Displays the date and time and author when the file was last saved in a $[officename] file format. +

Template

+ Displays the template that was used to create the file. + +

Digitally signed

+ Displays the date and the time when the file was last signed as well as the name of the author who signed the document. +

Digital Signatures

+ Opens the Digital Signatures dialog where you can manage digital signatures for the current document. +

Last printed

+ Displays the date and time and user name when the file was last printed. + After printing, a document must be saved to preserve its Last printed data. No warning message is given about this, if an unsaved document is closed. +

Total editing time

+ Displays the amount of time that the file has been open for editing since the file was created. The editing time is updated when you save the file. +

Revision number

+ Displays the number of times that the file has been saved. + +

Apply User Data

+ Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + +

Reset Properties

+ Resets the editing time to zero, the creation date to the current date and time, and the version number to 1. The modification and printing dates are also deleted. +

Save preview image with this document

+ Saves a thumbnail preview .png inside the document. This image may be used by a file manager under certain conditions. + To disable generating thumbnails in general, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. Click the Open Expert Configuration button, and search for GenerateThumbnail. If this property has the value true, then double-click on it to set its value to false. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09f48ae41 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Custom Properties + /text/shared/01/01100300.xhp + + + +
+ + +Custom Properties + Allows you to assign custom information fields to your document. +
+
+ +
+ +Properties + Enter your custom contents. You can change the name, type, and contents of each row. You can add or remove rows. The items will be exported as metadata to other file formats. + +Add + Click to add a new row to the Properties list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d38ae235a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Statistics + /text/shared/01/01100400.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+number of pages +documents;number of pages/tables/sheets +number of tables +number of sheets +cells;number of +pictures;number of +OLE objects;number of + + + + + +

Statistics

+Displays statistics for the current file. +
+
+ +
+Some statistic values can be used as variables in formulas. +

Pages:

+Number of pages in the file. +

Tables:Sheets:

+Number of tables in the file.Number of sheets in the file. This statistic does not include tables that were inserted as OLE objects. + + + +

Cells:

+ Number of cells with content in the file. +

Formula groups:

+ Number of contiguous ranges in a column with same formula. + + +

Images:

+ Number of images in the file. This statistic does not include images that were inserted as OLE objects. +

OLE Objects:

+ Number of OLE objects in the file, including tables and graphics that were inserted as OLE objects. +

Paragraphs:

+ Number of paragraphs, including blank paragraphs, in the file. +

Words:

+ Number of words, including words consisting of a single character, in the file. +

Characters:

+ Number of characters, including spaces, in the file. Non-printable characters are not included. +

Characters excluding spaces:

+ Number of characters, excluding spaces, in the file. Non-printable characters are not included. +

Lines:

+ Number of lines in the file. +

Update

+ Updates the statistics. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef09eda2d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Security +/text/shared/01/01100600.xhp + + + +
+password as document property +file sharing options for current document +read-only documents;opening documents as +saving;with password by default +user data;removing when saving + + + + +Security +Sets password options for the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + +Open file read-only +Select to allow this document to be opened in read-only mode only. +This file sharing option protects the document against accidental changes. It is still possible to edit a copy of the document and save that copy with the same name as the original. + + +Record changes +Select to enable recording changes. This is the same as Edit - Track Changes - Record. +To protect the recording state with a password, click Protect and enter a password. Other users of this document can apply their changes, but they cannot disable change recording without knowing the password. + + +Protect / Unprotect +Protects the change recording state with a password. If change recording is protected for the current document, the button is named Unprotect. Click Unprotect and type the correct password to disable the protection. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a64aa4422 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Templates + /text/shared/01/01110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Templates

+ Lets you organize and edit your templates, as well as save the current file as a template. +
+
+ Select File - Templates. +
+ + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5985e4408 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + Address Book Assignment + /text/shared/01/01110101.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + +

Address Book Assignment

+
+ Edit the field assignments and the data source for your address book. +
+
+ Choose Tools - Address Book Source. +
+

Address Book Source

+ Set the data source and data table for your address book. + +

Data Source

+ Select the data source for your address book. + +

Table

+ Select the data table for your address book. + +

Assign

+ Add a new data source to the Address Book Source list. +

Field assignment

+ Define the field assignments for your address book. + +

(Field name)

+ Select the field in the data table that corresponds to the address book entry. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..132d6209f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Save as Template + /text/shared/01/01110300.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

Save as Template

+ Saves the current document as a template. +
+
+ Choose File - Templates - Save as Template. +
+ +

Enter Template Name

+ Enter a name for the template. + +

Select Template Category

+ Select a category in which to save the new template. + +

Set as default template

+ The new template will be used as the default template. +Templates added with this command appear automatically in the Template Manager. You can also use the Template Manager to import templates. Both methods are recommended for adding templates. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a658c2ff4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Template + /text/shared/01/01110400.xhp + + + +
+ +

Edit Template

+ Opens a dialog where you can select a template for editing. +
+
+ Choose File - Templates - Edit Template. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a2846d8c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,373 @@ + + + + + + + Print + /text/shared/01/01130000.xhp + + + +
+ printing; documents +documents; printing +text documents; printing +spreadsheets; printing +presentations; print menu +drawings; printing +choosing printers +printers; choosing +print area selection +selecting; print areas +pages; selecting one to print +printing; selections +printing; copies +copies; printing +spoolfiles with Xprinter + + + + +

Print

+ Prints the current document, selection, or the pages that you specify. You can also set the print options for the current document. + The printing options can vary according to the printer and the operating system that you use. +
+
+ +
+ The Print dialog consists of three main parts: A preview with navigation buttons, tab pages with control elements specific to the current document type, and the Print, Cancel and Help buttons. + If you just want to know how to print your document, click any of the following links. + + + Printing text documents: + + + + + + + + + Printing spreadsheets: + + + + + + + + Printing presentations: + + + + + General printing: + + + + The settings that you define in the Print dialog are valid only for the current print job that you start by clicking the Print button. is this true for Printer Settings, too?If you want to change some options permanently, open %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME (application name) - Print. + To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for spreadsheet documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print. + To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for presentation documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. + Press Shift+F1 or choose Help - What's This? and point to any control element in the Print dialog to see an extended help text. + + +

Preview

+ The preview shows how each sheet of paper will look. You can browse through all sheets of paper with the buttons below the preview. + +

Preview checkbox

+ Turn on or off display of the print preview. +

Preview navigation box

+ + Enter the number of page to be shown in the preview in the box or use the arrow buttons to display pages in the preview. + + 🡆 Shows preview of the next page. + ⯮ Shows preview of the last page. + + 🡄 Shows preview of the previous page. + ⯬ Shows preview of the first page. +

General

+ On the General tab page, you find the most important control elements for printing. You can define which contents of your document are to be printed. You can select the printer and open the Printer Settings dialog. + +

Printer

+ + The list box shows the installed printers. Click the printer to use for the current print job. + + +

Status

+ Shows the availability of the selected printer. + +

Properties

+ + Opens the Printer Properties dialog. The printer properties vary according to the printer that you select. + + +

Range and copies

+ +

All pages

+ Prints the entire document. + +

Pages

+ + + + + + Prints only the pages or slides that you specify in the Pages box. + +

Selection

+ + Prints only the selected area(s) or object(s) in the current document. + + + To print a range of pages, use a format like 3-6. To print single pages, use a format like 7;9;11. You can print a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. +

Include

+ Select the subset of pages to print. Possible values are: + + + + + + + Even pages: + Prints only even numbered pages or slides. + + + + + + + + + Odd pages: + Prints only odd numbered pages or slides. + + + + + Odd and even pages: + Prints the entire document. + + + + + + +

From which

+ Select the source of sheet content to be printed. Possible values are Print all sheets and Print selected sheets. + + + +

Paper sides

+ If the printer is capable of duplex printing it's possible to choose between using only one side of the paper or both. + +

Number of copies

+ + Enter the number of copies that you want to print. + + +

Collate

+ Preserves the page order of the original document. + + +

Create separated prints jobs for collated output

+ Check to not rely on the printer to create collated copies but create a print job for each copy instead. + + +

Print in reverse order

+ Check to print pages in reverse order. + +

Page Layout

+ The Page Layout section can be used to save some sheets of paper by printing several pages onto each sheet of paper. You define the arrangement and size of output pages on the physical paper. + + Change the arrangement of pages to be printed on every sheet of paper. The preview shows how every final sheet of paper will look. + For some document types, you can choose to print a brochure. + + +

Paper size

+ Set the paper size you would like to use. The preview will show how the document would look on a paper of the given size. + +

Orientation

+ Select the orientation of the paper. Possible values are Portrait and Landscape. + + + +

Pages per sheet

+ Print multiple pages per sheet of paper. + Select how many pages to print per sheet of paper. When the number of pages is set to Custom, then the following settings shows: + +

Pages

+ Select number of rows. + +

By

+ Select number of columns. + +

Margin

+ Select margin between the printed pages and paper edge. + +

Distance

+ Select margin between individual pages on each sheet of paper. + + +

Order

+ Select order in which pages are to be printed. + + +

Draw a border on each page

+ Check to draw a border around each page. + + +

Brochure

+ Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Writer

+

Contents

+ +

Page Background

+ Specifies whether to print colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page, which you have specified under Format - Page - Background. + +

Images and other graphic objects

+ Specifies whether the graphics and drawings or OLE objects of your text document are printed. + +

Hidden text

+ Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. + +

Text placeholders

+ Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout. + +

Form controls

+ Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. +

Comments

+ + + Specify where to print comments (if any). +

Color

+ +

Print text in black

+ Specifies whether to always print text in black. +

Pages

+ +

Print automatically inserted blank pages

+ If this option is enabled automatically inserted blank pages are printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page. + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Calc

+

Pages

+ +

Suppress output of empty pages

+ If checked empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Impress

+

Document

+ +

Type

+ Select which parts of the document should be printed. + +

Slides per page

+ Select how many slides to print per page. + +

Order

+ Specify how to arrange slides on the printed page. +

Contents

+ +

Slide name

+ Specifies whether to print the page name of a document. + +

Date and time

+ Specifies whether to print the current date and time. + +

Hidden pages

+ Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden. +
+

Color

+ +

Original colors

+ Specifies to print in original colors. + +

Grayscale

+ Specifies to print colors as grayscale. + +

Black and white

+ Specifies to print colors as black and white. + +

Size

+ Specify how to scale slides in the printout. + +

Original size

+ Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. + +

Fit to printable page

+ Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer so they fit on the paper in the printer. +

Distribute on multiple sheets of paper

+ Prints a large format document, such as a poster or banner, by distributing the document page across multiple sheets of paper. The distribution option calculates how many sheets of paper are needed. You can then piece together the sheets. + +

Tile sheet of paper with repeated slides

+ Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, repeat the pages or slides on one sheet of paper. +
+ + +

%PRODUCTNAME Draw

+

Contents

+ +

Page name

+ Specifies whether to print the page name of a document. + +

Date and time

+ Specifies whether to print the current date and time. + + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Math

+

Contents

+

Title

+ + Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. + +

Formula text

+ Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. + +

Borders

+ Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout. +

Size

+ +

Original size

+ Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. + +

Fit to page

+ Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. + + +

Scaling

+ Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified factor. + Enter the scale factor for scaling the formula. + + + +

Unix hints

+ You can also use the Printer Settings to specify additional printer options. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73eab3b5b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Printer Setup + /text/shared/01/01140000.xhp + + + +
+ + printers; properties + settings; printers + properties; printers + default printer; setting up + printers; default printer + page formats; restriction + + + + +Printer Settings + Select the default printer for the current document. +
+
+ +
+You might experience a slight delay when you change the default printer for a document that contains embedded $[officename] OLE objects. +Printer + Lists the information that applies to the selected printer. + If the list is empty, you need to install a default printer for your operating system. Refer to the online help for your operating system for instructions on how to install and setup a default printer. + +Name + Lists the installed printers on your operating system. To change the default printer, select a printer name from the list. +Status + Describes the current status of the selected printer. +Type + Displays the type of printer that you selected. +Location + Displays the port for the selected printer. +Comments + Displays additional information for the printer. + +Properties + Changes the printer settings of your operating system for the current document. + Ensure that the Landscape or Portrait layout option set in the Printer Properties dialog matches the page format that you set by choosing Slide - PropertiesPage - PropertiesFormat - Page. + +Options + Opens the Printer Options dialog where you can override the global printer options set on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME + +Writer +Calc +Writer/Web - Print panel for the current document. + The Options button is only available in %PRODUCTNAME Writer and Calc. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..66c7a327b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Send + /text/shared/01/01160000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Send +Sends a copy of the current document to different applications. +
+
+ +
+Email Document +New menu commands, see #i46895 and #i63793UFI: New commands all have the same Help IDs, but different names + +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. + +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft file format is used. + + +Email as OpenDocument Spreadsheet + Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +Email as Microsoft Excel + Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft Excel file format is used. + + +Email as OpenDocument Presentation +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +Email as Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft PowerPoint file format is used. + + +Email as OpenDocument Text +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The OpenDocument file format is used. +Email as Microsoft Word +Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The Microsoft Word file format is used. + + + + + +UFI: removed 2 help ids +Create Master Document + +Create HTML Document + + + +Create AutoAbstract + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e41d29ee2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Email Document + /text/shared/01/01160200.xhp + + + +
+ +Email Document + Opens a new window in your default email program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General is used. +
+
+ +
+If the document is in HTML format, any embedded or linked images will not be sent with the email. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48d9efd28 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Create Master Document + /text/shared/01/01160300.xhp + + + + + +

Create Master Document

+ Creates a master document from the current Writer document. A new sub-document is created at each occurrence of a chosen paragraph style or outline level in the source document. +
+ +
+The Navigator appears after you create a master document. To edit a sub-document, double-click the name of a sub-document in the Navigator. +

File name

+ + + +

separated by

+ Select the paragraph style or outline level that you want to use to separate the source document into sub-documents. By default a new document is created for every outline level 1. +

File type

+ +

Save

+removed autoextension + + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1cb9ae68 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Exit + /text/shared/01/01170000.xhp + + + +
+exiting;$[officename] +mw made "exiting..." a two level entry + +

Exit %PRODUCTNAME

+ Closes all %PRODUCTNAME programs and prompts you to save your changes. This command does not exist on macOS systems. +
+
+ +
+
+Close the current document +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e6ba96dbd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Save All + /text/shared/01/01180000.xhp + + + +
+ +Save All + Saves all modified $[officename] documents. +
+
+ +
+If you are saving a new file or a copy of a read-only file, the Save As dialog appears. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d178b3cf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Versions + /text/shared/01/01190000.xhp + + + + + +
+versions;file saving as, restriction + + + +Versions + Saves and organizes multiple versions of the current document in the same file. You can also open, delete and compare previous versions. +
+
+ +
+If you save a copy of a file that contains version information (by choosing File - Save As), the version information is not saved with the file. +New versions + Set the options for saving a new version of the document. + +Save New Version + Saves the current state of the document as a new version. If you want, you can also enter comments in the Insert Version Comment dialog before you save the new version. + +Insert Version Comment + Enter a comment here when you are saving a new version. If you clicked Show to open this dialog, you cannot edit the comment. + +Always save version when closing + If you have made changes to your document, $[officename] automatically saves a new version when you close the document. + If you save the document manually, do not change the document after saving, and then close, no new version will be created.issue 12653 + +Existing versions + Lists the existing versions of the current document, the date and the time they were created, the author and the associated comments. + + +Open + Opens the selected version in a read-only window. + +Show + Displays the entire comment for the selected version. + +Delete + Deletes the selected version. + +Compare + Compare the changes that were made in each version. If you want, you can Manage Changes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4575f387 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Recent Documents +/text/shared/01/01990000.xhp + + + +
+
+ +Recent Documents + +Lists the most recently opened files. To open a file in the list, click its name. +
+
+The number of files that are listed can be changed in the Expert configuration by setting the property /org.openoffice.Office.Common/History PickListSize. +The file is opened by the %PRODUCTNAME module that saved it. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ed657d0f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Undo + /text/shared/01/02010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+undoing;editing +editing;undoing + + + +

Undo

+ Reverses the last command or the last entry you typed. To select the command that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Undo icon on the Standard bar. +
+
+ +
+To change the number of commands that you can undo, go to the Expert configuration and set a new value of the property "/org.openoffice.Office.Common/Undo Steps". +Some commands (for example, editing Styles) cannot be undone. +You can cancel the Undo command by choosing Edit - Redo. +

About the Undo command in database tables

+ When you are working with database tables, you can only undo the last command. + If you change the content of a record in a database table that has not been saved, and then use the Undo command, the record is erased. +

About the Undo command in presentations

+ The Undo list is cleared when you apply a new layout to a slide. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5794607ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Redo + /text/shared/01/02020000.xhp + + + +
+restoring;editing +redo command +mw made "restoring..." a two level entry + + +Redo + Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e9dcb4b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Repeat + /text/shared/01/02030000.xhp + + + +
+repeating; commands +commands; repeating + + + +Repeat + Repeats the last command. This command is available in Writer and Calc. +
+UFI: had to remove switch construct because help-ids don't work any more inside switches, see i47727 +although this invalidates the fix of i34949 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c52d1222 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Cut + /text/shared/01/02040000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+cutting +clipboard; cutting + + +Cut + Removes and copies the selection to the clipboard. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da25d06a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Copy + /text/shared/01/02050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+clipboard; Unix +copying; in Unix + + +Copy + Copies the selection to the clipboard. +
+Each time you copy, the existing content of the clipboard is overwritten. +
+ +
+ + +$[officename] also supports the clipboard under Unix; however, you must use the $[officename] commands, such as Ctrl+C. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27993e859 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Paste + /text/shared/01/02060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +pasting; cell ranges +clipboard; pasting +cells; pasting +pasting; Enter key +pasting; Ctrl+V shortcut + +mw deleted "cell ranges,pasting" + + + + +overwrite dialog in Calc if target is not empty + + + +Paste + Inserts the contents of the clipboard at the location of the cursor, and replaces any selected text or objects.UFI: text used for icon and menu +
+
+ + + + Press the Enter key. + + +
+ + +In a spreadsheet, when you paste a range of cells from the clipboard, the result depends on the current selection: If only one cell is selected, the cell range will be pasted started from that cell. If you mark a cell range wider than the cell range in the clipboard, the cell range will be pasted repeatedly to fill the selected cell range. +Pasting contents in %PRODUCTNAME Calc + When copying a cell or a range in %PRODUCTNAME Calc the selection is marked with blinking dashes around the range (the "marching ants") to indicate what was being selected during the clipboard operation. + Marching ants mark for Calc clipboard + There are two ways to paste the clipboard contents in a spreadsheet document: + + + Using CommandCtrl+V shortcut, the Paste icon in the toolbar or choose Edit - Paste: The contents of the clipboard is pasted in the target location and the clipboard keeps the contents for more paste operations. The copied selection mark stays active. + + + Using Enter key: the clipboard contents is pasted once and cleared. No further paste is possible with the clipboard contents. The copied selection mark is disabled. + + +To deactivate the copied selection mark press the Esc key. The clipboard contents is not cleared. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..802711c84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + + Paste Special + /text/shared/01/02070000.xhp + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Paste Special

+ Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify. +
+ + + + + + +
+ +
+ + + +

Source

+ Displays the source of the clipboard contents. + +

Selection

+ Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. The available format depends on the copied or cut source format. + + + When you paste HTML data into a text document, you can choose "HTML format" or "HTML format without comments". The second choice is the default; it pastes all HTML data, but no comments. + + + + + + + +

Paste Special

+ This dialog appears in Calc if the clipboard contains spreadsheet cells. +

Presets

+ Choose one of the presets to quickly load commonly used settings for Paste Special. +

Values Only

+ Pastes only cell contents including text, numbers and dates. +

Values & Formats

+ Pastes cell contents and formats applied to cells. +

Formats Only

+ Pastes only formats applied to cells. +

Transpose All

+ Pastes all cell contents with their positions transposed. +

Run immediately

+ Check this option to load the preset and immediately apply it. When unchecked, choosing a preset will only load the corresponding options in the dialog without pasting anything. + Uncheck Run immediately to load the options from the preset and change its settings in the Paste Special dialog before applying them by clicking OK. +

Selection

+ Select a format for the clipboard contents that you want to paste. + +

Paste all

+ Pastes all cell contents, comments, formats, and objects into the current document. + +

Texti50436

+ Inserts cells containing text. + +

Numbers

+ Inserts cells containing numbers. + +

Date & Time

+ Inserts cells containing date and time values. + +

Formulas

+ Inserts cells containing formulae. + +

Comments

+ Inserts comments that are attached to cells. If you want to add the comments to the existing cell content, select the "Add" operation. + +

Formats

+ Inserts cell format attributes. + +

Objects

+ Inserts objects contained within the selected cell range. These can be OLE objects, chart objects, or drawing objects. +

Operations

+ Select the operation to apply when you paste cells into your sheet. + +

None

+ Does not apply an operation when you insert the cell range from the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard will replace existing cell contents. + +

Add

+ Adds the values in the clipboard cells to the values in the target cells. Also, if the clipboard only contains comments, adds the comments to the target cells. + +

Subtract

+ Subtracts the values in the clipboard cells from the values in the target cells. + +

Multiply

+ Multiplies the values in the clipboard cells with the values in the target cells. + +

Divide

+ Divides the values in the target cells by the values in the clipboard cells.UFI: fixes #i14796# +

Options

+ Sets the paste options for the clipboard contents. + +

Skip empty cells

+ Empty cells from the clipboard do not replace target cells. If you use this option in conjunction with the "Multiply" or the "Divide" operation, the operation is not applied to the target cell of an empty cell in the clipboard. + + If you select a mathematical operation and clear the Skip empty cells box, empty cells in the clipboard are treated as zeroes. For example, if you apply the Multiply operation, the target cells are filled with zeroes. + +

Transpose

+ The rows of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become columns of the output range. The columns of the range in the clipboard are pasted to become rows.i59261 + +

Link

+ Inserts the cell range as a link, so that changes made to the cells in the source file are updated in the target file. To ensure that changes made to empty cells in the source file are updated in the target file, ensure that the "Paste All" option is also selected. +You can also link sheets within the same spreadsheet. When you link to other files, a DDE link is automatically created. A DDE link is inserted as a matrix formula and can only be modified as a whole. +

Shift Cells

+ Set the shift options for the target cells when the clipboard content is inserted. + +

Don't shift

+ Inserted cells replace the target cells. + +

Down

+ Target cells are shifted downward when you insert cells from the clipboard. + +

Right

+ Target cells are shifted to the right when you insert cells from the clipboard. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af99cede0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Select All + /text/shared/01/02090000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Select All + Selects the entire content of the current file, frame, or text object. +
+To select all of the cells on a sheet, click the button at the intersection of the column and row header in the top left corner of the sheet. +
+ +
+ +To select all of the sheets in a spreadsheet file, right-click the name tab of a sheet, and then choose Select All Sheets. Selects all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46acfe4ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,411 @@ + + + + + + Find & Replace + /text/shared/01/02100000.xhp + + + +
+ + Find & Replace dialog + + + + + +

+ + Find & Replace + +

+ + + Finds or replaces text or formats in the current document. + + +
+
+ +
+ Find Toolbar + + + Type the text to search in the current document. Press Enter to search the text. + + + + Click to search the next occurrence in downward direction. + + + + Click to search the next occurrence in upward direction. + + + +

Find

+ + Enter the text that you want to find, or select a previous search from the list. + + Search options are listed under the Find box and in the Other options area of the dialog. + +

Match case

+ + case sensitivity;searching + + + + Matches the exact character provided in the Find box without considering any alternative case matches. + + + Disable this option to consider all possible case matches. For example, entering "a" in the Find box matches both "a" and "A". + Beware that some characters may have more than one match when Match case is disabled. For instance, "s" matches "s", "S" and "ß" (sharp S used in the German language). + + + searching;formatted numbers + searching;formatted display + finding;formatted numbers + finding;formatted display + + + +

Formatted display

+ + Includes number formatting characters in the search. + + + + +

+ + Entire Cells + Whole words only + +

+ + + Searches for whole words or cells that are identical to the search text. + + + + searching; all sheets + finding; in all sheets + sheets; searching all + + +

+ + All sheets + +

+ + + Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file. + + + + Searches through all of the sheets in the current spreadsheet file. + + + +

Replace

+ + Enter the replacement text, or select a recent replacement text or style from the list. + + Replacement options are listed under the Find box and in the Other options area of the dialog. + + + + +

Find All

+ Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). + + + copied text as hidden help, see issue 115137 + + + Finds and selects all instances of the text or the format that you are searching for in the document (only in Writer and Calc documents). + + +

Find Previous

+ + Finds and selects the previous occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document. + + +

Find Next

+ + Finds and selects the next occurrence of the text or format that you are searching for in the document. + + +

Replace

+ + Replaces the selected text or format that you searched for, and then searches for the next occurrence. + + +

Replace All

+ + Replaces all of the occurrences of the text or format that you want to replace. + + Repeat this command until all replacements on your slide have been made. + + +

Other options

+ + + Shows more or fewer search options. Click this label again to hide the extended search options. + + + finding; selections + + +

Current selection only

+ + Searches only the selected text or cells. + + +

Replace backwards

+ + Search starts at the current cursor position and goes backwards to the beginning of the file. + + + + +

Comments

+ + In Writer, you can select to include the comment texts in your searches. + + + + + +

+ + + + Regular expressions + +

+ + + + + Allows you to use regular expressions in your search. + + + i72448 +Ext help text not found within switches. Solution: Keep switched text for normal display, add hidden help text as "fall through". + + Allows you to use regular expressions in your search. + + + + + + + + + had to copy extended help to outside of switch construct - see issue 72448 + + + Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list. + + +

+ + Paragraph Styles / Including Styles + Cell Styles + +

+ + Searches for text formatted with the style that you specify. Select this checkbox, and then select a style from the Find list. To specify a replacement style, select a style from the Replace list. + + + + +

+ Match character width (only if Asian languages are enabled) +

+ + + Distinguishes between half-width and full-width character forms. + + + + +

+ Sounds like (Japanese) (only if Asian languages are enabled) +

+ + + Lets you specify the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. Select this checkbox, and then click the Sounds button to specify the search options. + + + + + + + Sets the search options for similar notation used in Japanese text. + + + + Searching in Japanese + +

Diacritic-sensitive

+ Searches exact match, does not include Unicode combining marks in search. For example, searching for كتب will not match كَتَبَ or كُتُب or كتِب and so on. +

Kashida-sensitive

+ Searches exact match, does not include Arabic Tatweel mark U+0640 (also known as Kashida) in search. For example, searching for كتاب will not match كـتاب or كتــــاب and so on. +

+ + + Attributes + + +

+ + + + + + +

+ + + Format + + +

+ + + Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. + After you select format and attributes that you want to search for, the Paragraph Styles checkbox in the Other options area changes to Including Styles. Select this checkbox if you want to include search for formatting and attributes set by styles. + + + +

+ + No Format + +

+ + + Click in the Find or the Replace box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats. + + + + Click in the Find or the Replace box, and then click this button to remove the search criteria based on formats. + + + + The search and replace criteria selected for Format and Attributes are displayed under the Find and Replace boxes. + + +

+ + Direction + +

+ + + Determines the order for searching the cells. + + + +

+ + Rows + +

+ + + Searches from left to right across the rows. + + + + Searches from left to right across the rows. + + +

+ + Columns + +

+ + + Searches from top to bottom through the columns. + + + + Searches from top to bottom through the columns. + +

+ + Search in + +

+ +

+ + Formulas + +

+ + + Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. + + + + Searches for the characters that you specify in formulas and in fixed (not calculated) values. For example, you could look for formulas that contain 'SUM'. + +

+ + Values + +

+ + + Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. + + + + Searches for the characters that you specify in values and in the results of formulas. + +

+ + Comments + +

+ + + Searches for the characters that you specify in the comments that are attached to the cells. + + + + Searches for the characters that you specify in the comments that are attached to the cells. + + + After you close the Find & Replace dialog, you can still search using the last search criteria that you entered, by pressing Shift+CommandCtrl+F. +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7caadd4a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,415 @@ + + + + + + + List of Regular Expressions + /text/shared/01/02100001.xhp + + + + +regular expressions; list of +regular expressions; new line +regular expressions; empty paragraph +regular expressions; begin of word +regular expressions; begin of paragraph +regular expressions; end of paragraph +lists; regular expressions +replacing; tab stops (regular expressions) +tab stops; regular expressions +concatenation, see ampersand symbol +ampersand symbol, see also operators +mw added "replacing;" and "tab stops;" +

List of Regular Expressions

+ + + + Term + + + Representation/Use + + + + + Any character + + + The given character, unless it is a regular expression meta character. The list of meta characters follows in this table. + + + + + . + + + Any single character except a line break or a paragraph break. For example, the search term "sh.rt" matches both "shirt" and "short". + + + + + ^ + + + The beginning of a paragraph or cell. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames, at the beginning of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "^Peter" matches the word "Peter" only when it is the first word of a paragraph. + + + + + + $ + + + The end of a paragraph or cell. Special objects such as empty fields or character-anchored frames at the end of a paragraph are ignored. Example: "Peter$" matches only when the word "Peter" is the last word of a paragraph, note "Peter" cannot be followed by a period. + $ on its own matches the end of a paragraph. This way it is possible to search and replace paragraph breaks. + + + + + * + + + Zero or more of the regular expression term immediately preceding it. For example, "Ab*c" matches "Ac", "Abc", "Abbc", "Abbbc", and so on. + + + + + + + + + + One or more of the regular expression term immediately preceding it. For example, "AX.+4" finds "AXx4", but not "AX4". + The longest possible string that matches this regular expression in a paragraph is always matched. If the paragraph contains the string "AX 4 AX4", the entire passage is highlighted. + + + + + ? + + + Zero or one of the regular expression term immediately preceding it. For example, "Texts?" matches "Text" and "Texts" and "x(ab|c)?y" finds "xy", "xaby", or "xcy". + + + + + \ + + + The special character that follows it is interpreted as a normal character and not as a regular expression meta character (except for the combinations "\n", "\t", "\b", "\>" and "\<"). For example, "tree\." matches "tree.", not "treed" or "trees". + + + + + \n + + + A line break that was inserted with the Shift+Enter key combination when in the Find text box. + A paragraph break that can be entered with the Enter or Return key when in the Replace text box in Writer. Has no special meaning in Calc, and is treated literally there. + To change line breaks into paragraph breaks, enter \n in both the Find and Replace boxes, and then perform a search and replace. + + + + + \t + + + A tab character. Can also be used in the Replace box. + + + + + + \b + + + A word boundary. For example, "\bbook" matches "bookmark" and "book" but not "checkbook" whereas "book\b" matches "checkbook" and "book" but not "bookmark". + Note, this form replaces the obsolete (although they still work for now) forms "\>" (match end of word) and "\<" (match start of word). + + + + + ^$ + + + Finds an empty paragraph. + + + + + ^. + + + Finds the first character of a paragraph. + + + + + & or $0 + + + Adds the string that was found by the search criteria in the Find box to the term in the Replace box when you make a replacement. + For example, if you enter "window" in the Find box and "&frame" in the Replace box, the word "window" is replaced with "windowframe". + You can also enter an "&" in the Replace box to modify the Attributes or the Format of the string found by the search criteria. + + + + + [...] + + + Any single occurrence of any one of the characters that are between the brackets. For example: "[abc123]" matches the characters ‘a’, ‘b’, ’c’, ‘1’, ‘2’ and ‘3’. "[a-e]" matches single occurrences of the characters a through e, inclusive (the range must be specified with the character having the smallest Unicode code number first). "[a-eh-x]" matches any single occurrence of the characters that are in the ranges ‘a’ through ‘e’ and ‘h’ through ‘x’. + + + + + [^...] + + + Any single occurrence of a character, including Tab, Space and Line Break characters, that is not in the list of characters specified inclusive ranges are permitted. For example "[^a-syz]" matches all characters not in the inclusive range ‘a’ through ‘s’ or the characters ‘y’ and ‘z’. + + + + + \uXXXX + \UXXXXXXXX + + + The character represented by the four-digit hexadecimal Unicode code (XXXX). + The character represented by the eight-digit hexadecimal Unicode code (XXXXXXXX). + For certain symbol fonts the symbol (glyph) that you see on screen may look related to a different Unicode code than what is actually used for it in the font. The Unicode codes can be viewed by choosing Insert - Special Character, or by using Unicode conversion shortcut. + + + + + | + + + The infix operator delimiting alternatives. Matches the term preceding the "|" or the term following the "|". For example, "this|that" matches occurrences of both "this" and "that". + + + + + {N} + + + The post-fix repetition operator that specifies an exact number of occurrences ("N") of the regular expression term immediately preceding it must be present for a match to occur. For example, "tre{2}" matches "tree". + + + + + {N,M} + + + The post-fix repetition operator that specifies a range (minimum of "N" to a maximum of "M") of occurrences of the regular expression term immediately preceding it that can be present for a match to occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" matches "tre" and "tree". + + + + + {N,} + + + The post-fix repetition operator that specifies a range (minimum "N" to an unspecified maximum) of occurrences of the regular expression term immediately preceding it that can be present for a match to occur. (The maximum number of occurrences is limited only by the size of the document). For example, "tre{2,}" matches "tree", "treee", and "treeeee". + + + + + (...) + + + The grouping construct that serves three purposes. + + + To enclose a set of ‘|’ alternatives. For example, the regular expression "b(oo|ac)k" matches both "book" and "back". + + + To group terms in a complex expression to be operated on by the post-fix operators: "*", "+" and "?" along with the post-fix repetition operators. For example, the regular expression "a(bc)?d" matches both "ad" and "abcd" in a search.; the regular expression "M(iss){2}ippi" matches "Mississippi". + + + To record the matched sub string inside the parentheses as a reference for later use in the Find box using the "\n" construct or in the Replace box using the "$n" construct. The reference to the first match is represented by "\1" in the Find box and by "$1" in the Replace box. The reference to the second matched sub string by "\2" and "$2" respectively, and so on. + + + For example, the regular expression "(890)7\1\1" matches "8907890890". + With the regular expression "\b(fruit|truth)\b" in the Find box and the regular expression "$1ful" in the Replace box occurrences of the words "fruit" and "truth" can be replaced with the words "fruitful" and "truthful" respectively without affecting the words "fruitfully" and "truthfully" + + + + + [:alpha:] + + + Represents an alphabetic character. Use [:alpha:]+ to find one of them. + + + + + [:digit:] + + + Represents a decimal digit. Use [:digit:]+ to find one of them. + + + + + [:alnum:] + + + Represents an alphanumeric character ([:alpha:] and [:digit:]). + + + + + [:space:] + + + Represents a space character (but not other whitespace characters).UFI: see #i41706# + + + + + [:print:] + + + Represents a printable character. + + + + + [:cntrl:] + + + Represents a nonprinting character. + + + + + [:lower:] + + + Represents a lowercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + + + + + [:upper:] + + + Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. + + +
+For a full list of supported metacharacters and syntax, see ICU Regular Expressions documentation +Regular expression terms can be combined to form complex and sophisticated regular expressions for searches as show in the following examples. +

Examples

+ + + + + Expression + + + Meaning + + + + + ^$ + + + An empty paragraph. + ^ specifies that the match must be at the start of a paragraph, + $ specifies that a paragraph mark or the end of a cell must follow the matched string. + + + + + ^. + + + The first character of a paragraph. + + . specifies any single character. + + + + + e([:digit:])? + + + Matches "e" by itself or an "e" followed by one digit. + e specifies the character "e", + [:digit:] specifies any decimal digit, + ? specifies zero or one occurrences of [:digit:]. + + + + + ^([:digit:])$ + + + Matches a paragraph or cells containing exactly one digit. + + + + + + + + ^[:digit:]{3}$ + + + Matches a paragraph or cell containing only three digit numbers + + + {3} specifies that [:digit:] must occur three times, + + + + + + \bconst(itu|ruc)tion\b + + + Matches the words "constitution" and "construction" but not the word "constitutional." + \b specifies that the match must begin at a word boundary, + const specifies the characters "const", + ( starts the group, + itu specifies the characters "itu", + | specifies the alternative, + ruc specifies the characters "ruc", + ) ends the group, + tion specifies the characters "tion", + \b specifies that the match must end at a word boundary. + + +
+ +
+ + + + + + +Wiki page about regular expressions in Writer +Wiki page about regular expressions in Calc +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..512659999 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Similarity Search +/text/shared/01/02100100.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+For example, a similarity search can find words that differ from the Find text by two characters. + +Set the options for the similarity search. +

Settings

+Define the criteria for determining if a word is similar to the search term. + +

Exchange characters

+Enter the number of characters in the search term that can be exchanged. For example, if you specify 2 exchanged characters, "sweep" and "creep" are considered similar. + +

Add characters

+Enter the maximum number of characters by which a word can exceed the number of characters in the search term. + +

Remove characters

+Enter the number of characters by which a word can be shorter than the search term. + +

Combine

+Searches for a term that matches any combination of the similarity search settings. +Using Combine better meets a user's expectations from looking at the settings, but may return false positives. Not using Combine may match less than expected, but does not return false positives. +A Weighted Levenshtein Distance (WLD) algorithm is used. If Combine is not checked, then settings are treated as an exclusive-OR (strict WLD). +If Combine is checked, then settings are treated as an inclusive-OR (relaxed WLD). + +Be careful when using Replace All with Similarity Search. Best to be certain first about what will be found. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da757b8d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ + + + + + + + Attributes + /text/shared/01/02100200.xhp + + + + + +

Attributes

+ Choose the text attributes that you want to search for. For example, if you select the Outline attribute, then all characters formatted manually with an Outline effect are found. If you also want to find characters with an Outline effect as part of a style, then select Including styles in the Other Options section, before searching. + +

Options

+ Select the attributes that you want to search for. + +
+

Keep with Next Paragraph

+ Finds the Keep With Next Paragraph attribute. +
+
+

Do not split paragraph

+ Finds paragraphs with the Do not split paragraph attribute enabled. +
+
+

Spacing

+ Finds the Spacing (top, bottom) attribute. +
+
+

Alignment

+ Finds the Alignment (left, right, centered, justified) attribute. +
+
+

Effects

+ Finds characters that use a Case effect (Uppercase, Lowercase, Capitalize every word, or Small capitals). +
+
+

Blinking

+ Finds characters use the Blinking attribute. +
+
+

Strikethrough

+ Finds characters formatted with the Strikethrough attribute. +
+
+

Indent

+ Finds the Indent (from left, from right, first line) attribute. +
+
+

Widows

+ Finds the Widow Control attribute. +
+
+

Kerning

+ Finds Spacing (standard, expanded, condensed) attributes and pair kerning. +
+
+

Outline

+ Finds characters formatted with the Outline attribute. +
+
+

Position

+ Finds characters using the Normal, Superscript or Subscript attributes. +
+
+

Page line-spacing

+ Finds paragraphs with the Activate page line-spacing attribute enabled. +
+
+

Relief

+ Finds characters formatted with the Relief attribute. +
+
+

Rotation

+ Finds the Rotation attribute. +
+
+

Shadowed

+ Finds characters formatted with the Shadowed attribute. +
+
+

Font

+ Finds any instance where the default font was changed. +
+
+

Font Color

+ Finds any instance where the default font color was changed. +
+
+

Font Size

+ Finds the Font size/Font height attribute. +
+
+

Font Weight

+ Finds the Bold or the Bold and Italic attribute. +
+
+

Font Posture

+ Finds the Italic or the Bold and Italic attribute. +
+
+

Orphans

+ Finds the Orphan Control attribute. +
+
+

Page Style

+ Finds the Break With Page Style attribute. +
+
+

Hyphenation

+ Finds the Hyphenation attribute. +
+
+

Character scaling

+ Finds characters formatted with Scale width. +
+
+

Language

+ Finds the Language attribute (for spelling). +
+
+

Tab Stops

+ Finds paragraphs that use an additional tab set. +
+
+

Underline

+ Finds characters formatted with Underlining. +
+
+

Vertical text alignment

+ Finds the Vertical text alignment attribute. +
+
+

Individual Words

+ Finds characters formatted with Underlining or Strikethrough as Individual words. +
+
+

Character background

+ Finds characters that use the Background attribute. +
+
+

Line Spacing

+ Finds the Line spacing (single line, 1.5 lines, double, proportional, at least, lead) attribute. +
+
+

Overline

+ Finds characters formatted with Overlining. +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..04d1c03dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Text Format (Search) + /text/shared/01/02100300.xhp + + + + +

Text Format (Search)

+ Finds specific text formatting features, such as font types, font effects, and text flow characteristics. +
+ +
+The search criteria for attributes are listed below the Find box. +You do not need to specify a search text in the Find box when you search and replace formatting. +To define a replacement format, click in the Replace box, and then click the Format button. +Use the Text Format (Search) or the Text Format (Replace) to define your formatting search criteria. These dialogs contain the following tab pages: + + + + + + + + + + +
+Attributes +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f157cbf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + + + + + + + Navigator for Master Documents + /text/shared/01/02110000.xhp + + + +

Navigator for Master Documents

+In a Master document, you can switch the Navigator between normal view and master view. + +The Navigator lists the main components of the master document. If you rest the mouse pointer over a name of a sub-document in the list, the full path of the sub-document is displayed. +The master view in the Navigator displays the following icons: +

Toggle Master View

+ Switches between master view and normal view. + + + + Icon + + + Toggle Master View + + +
+ + +

Edit

+ Edit the contents of the component selected in the Navigator list. If the selection is a file, the file is opened for editing. If the selection is an index, the Index dialog is opened. + + + + Icon + + + Edit + + +
+ + +

Update

+ Click and choose the contents that you want to update. + + + + Icon + + + Update + + +
+ +

Selection

+ Updates the contents of the selection. + +

Indexes

+ Updates all indexes. + +

Links

+ Updates all links. + +

All

+ Updates all contents. + +

Edit link

+ This command is found by right-clicking an inserted file in the Navigator. Changes the link properties for the selected file. + + +

Insert

+ Inserts a file, an index, or a new document into the master document. + You can also insert files into the master document by dragging a file from your desktop and dropping on the master view of the Navigator. + + + + Icon + + + Insert + + +
+ +

Index

+ Inserts an index or a table of contents into the master document. + +

File

+ Inserts one or more existing files into the master document. + +

New Document

+ Creates and inserts a new sub-document. When you create a new document, you are prompted to enter the file name and the location where you want to save the document. + +

Text

+ Inserts a new paragraph in the master document where you can enter text. You cannot insert text next to an existing text entry in the Navigator.i81372 + +

Save Contents as well

+ Saves a copy of the contents of the linked files in the master document. This ensures that the current contents are available when the linked files cannot be accessed. + + + + Icon + + + Save Contents as well + + +
+ +

Move Up

+ Moves the selection up one position in the Navigator list. You can also move entries by dragging and dropping them in the list. If you move a text section onto another text section, the text sections are merged. + + + + Icon + + + Move Up + + +
+ +

Move Down

+ Moves the selection down one position in the Navigator list. You can also move entries by dragging and dropping them in the list. If you move a text section onto another text section, the text sections are merged. + + + + Icon + + + Move Down + + +
+ +

Delete

+This command is found by right-clicking an item in the Navigator. Deletes the selection from the Navigator list and the master document, but does not delete the subdocument file. +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31e3b4d65 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Links to External Files + /text/shared/01/02180000.xhp + + + + + + + + opening;documents with links + links; updating specific links + updating; links, on opening + links; opening files with + + + +

Edit Links to External Files

+ You can change or remove each link to external files in the current document. You can also update the content of the current file to the most recently saved version of linked external file. This command does not apply to hyperlinks, and is not available if the current document does not contain links to other files. +This command can be used with external file links to sections (place cursor outside of the section), master documents,sheets linked with Sheet - Insert Sheet from File or Sheet - External Links, Function WEBSERVICE, images and OLE objects (when inserted with a link to an external file). + +
+ +
+ + + +

Source file

+ Lists the path to the source file. If the path defines a DDE link, relative paths must be preceded with "file:". +Double-click a link in the list to open a file dialog where you can select another object for this link. +

Element

+ Lists the application (if known) that last saved the source file. +

Type

+ Lists the file type, such as graphic, of the source file. +

Status

+ Lists additional information about the source file. + +

Automatic

+ Automatically updates the contents of the link when you open the file. Any changes made in the source file are then displayed in the file containing the link. Linked graphic files can only be updated manually. This option is not available for a linked graphic file. + The Automatic option is only available for DDE links. You can insert a DDE link by copying the contents from one file and pasting by choosing Edit - Paste Special, and then selecting the Link box. As DDE is a text based linking system, only the displayed decimals are copied into the target sheet.removed Calc switch: this feature can be used wherever a cell area can be pasted: everywhere + +

Manual

+ Only updates the link when you click the Update button. + +

Modify

+ Change the source file for the selected link. + +

Break Link

+ Breaks the link between the source file and the current document. The most recently updated contents of the source file are kept in the current document. + +

Update

+Updates the selected link so that the most recently saved version of the linked file is displayed in the current document. + +When you open a file that contains links, you are prompted to update the links. Depending on where the linked files are stored, the update process can take several minutes to complete. +If you are loading a file that contains DDE links, you are prompted to update the links. Decline the update if you do not want to establish a connection to the DDE server. +Links to remote locations can be constructed that transmit local data to the remote server. Decline the prompt to update if you do not trust the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d833132b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02180100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Modify DDE Links + /text/shared/01/02180100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + DDE links; modifying +changing; DDE links + +Modify DDE Links + Change the properties for the selected DDE link. +
+ +
+Modify Link + Lets you set the properties for the selected link. + +Application +Lists the application that last saved the source file. %PRODUCTNAME applications have the server name soffice. + +File +Path to the source file. Relative paths must be expressed by full URI, for example, with file://. + +Category + Lists the section or object that the link refers to in the source file. If you want, you can enter a new section or object here. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7f4622fd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + OLE Object (Edit) + /text/shared/01/02200000.xhp + + + +
+ +

OLE Object

+Lets you edit a selected OLE object that you inserted from the Insert - OLE Object submenu. +
+
+ +
+ + +
+ +
+ +Resizes the object to the original size. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6eff7e2d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Edit + /text/shared/01/02200100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+objects; editingediting; objects +

Edit

+ Lets you edit a selected OLE object that you inserted with the Insert – OLE Object command. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fb3721397 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02200200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Open + /text/shared/01/02200200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+objects; opening +opening; objects + +

Open

+ Opens the selected OLE object with the program that the object was created in. +
+
+ +
+This menu command is inserted into Edit – Objects submenu by the application that created the linked object. Depending on the application, the Open command for the OLE object might have a different name. +After you have completed your changes, close the source file for the OLE object. The OLE object is then updated in the container document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee52fea7b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02210101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Floating Frame Properties + /text/shared/01/02210101.xhp + + + + + +

Floating Frame Properties

+ Changes the properties of the selected floating frame. Floating frames work best when they contain an html document, and when they are inserted in another html document. +
+ +
+ +Name + Enter a name for the floating frame. The name cannot contain spaces, special characters, or begin with an underscore (_). + +

Contents

+ Enter the path and the name of the file that you want to display in the floating frame. You can also click the Browse button and locate the file that you want to display. For example, you can enter: + + + https://www.example.com + + + file:///C:/Documents/Readme.txtAdolfo: Is the "|" character after the "file:///c" correct? And a user file should *never* be in a root directory anyway.SophiaS: agreed, changed + + + +Browse + Locate the file that you want to display in the selected floating frame, and then click Open. +Scroll Bar + Add or remove a scrollbar from the selected floating frame. + +On + Displays the scrollbar for the floating frame. + +Off + Hides the scrollbar for the floating frame. + +Automatic + Mark this option if the currently active floating frame can have a scrollbar when needed. +Border + Displays or hides the border of the floating frame. + +On + Displays the border of the floating frame. + +Off + Hides the border of the floating frame. +Padding + Define the amount of space that is left between the border of the floating frame and the contents of the floating frame provided that both documents inside and outside the floating frame are HTML documents. + +Width + Enter the amount of horizontal space that you want to leave between the right and the left edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents. + +Default + Applies the default horizontal spacing. + +Height + Enter the amount of vertical space that you want to leave between the top and bottom edges of the floating frame and the contents of the frame. Both documents inside and outside the floating frame must be HTML documents. + +Default + Applies the default vertical spacing. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0e8d6ce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,249 @@ + + + + + + + ImageMap Editor + /text/shared/01/02220000.xhp + + + + + + +

ImageMap Editor

+ Allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a graphic or a group of graphics. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots. +
+ +
+ +You can draw three types of hotspots: rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. When you click a hotspot, the URL is opened in the browser window or frame that you specify. You can also specify the text that appears when your mouse rests on the hotspot. + +

Apply

+ Applies the changes that you made to the image map. + + + + Icon Apply + + + Apply + + +
+ +

Open

+ Loads an existing image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format. + + + + Icon Open + + + Open + + +
+ +

Save

+ Saves the image map in the MAP-CERN, MAP-NCSA or SIP StarView ImageMap file format. + + + + Icon Save + + + Save + + +
+ +

Select

+ Selects a hotspot in the image map for editing. + + + + Icon Select + + + Select + + +
+ +

Rectangle

+ Draws a rectangular hotspot where you drag in the graphic. After, you can enter the Address and the Text Alternative for the hotspot, and then select the Frame where you want the URL to open. + + + + Icon Rectangle + + + Rectangle + + +
+ +

Ellipse

+ Draws an elliptical hotspot where you drag in the graphic. + + + + Icon Ellipse + + + Ellipse + + +
+ +

Polygon

+ Draws a polygonal hotspot in the graphic. Click this icon, drag in the graphic, and then click to define one side of the polygon. Move to where you want to place the end of the next side, and then click. Repeat until you have drawn all of the sides of the polygon. When you are finished, double-click to close the polygon. + + + + Icon Polygon + + + Polygon + + +
+ +

Freeform Polygon

+ Draws a hotspot that is based on a freeform polygon. Click this icon and move to where you want to draw the hotspot. Drag a freeform line and release to close the shape. + + + + Icon Freeform Polygon + + + Freeform Polygon + + +
+ +

Edit Points

+ Lets you change the shape of the selected hotspot by editing the anchor points. + + + + Icon Edit points + + + Edit points + + +
+ +

Move Points

+ Lets you move the individual anchor points of the selected hotspot. + + + + Icon Move Points + + + Move Points + + +
+ +

Insert Points

+ Adds an anchor point where you click on the outline of the hotspot. + + + + Icon Insert Points + + + Insert Points + + +
+ +

Delete Points

+ Deletes the selected anchor point. + + + + Icon Delete Points + + + Delete Points + + +
+ +

Active

+ Disables or enables the hyperlink for the selected hotspot. A disabled hotspot is transparent. + + + + Icon Active + + + + + +
+ +

Macro

+ Lets you assign a macro that runs when you click the selected hotspot in a browser. + + + + Icon Macro + + + Macro + + +
+ +

Properties

+ Allows you to define the properties of the selected hotspot. + + + + Icon PropertiesUFI: see #60783 + + + Properties + + +
+ +

Address:

+ Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to an anchor within the document, the address should be of the form "file:///C:/Documents/document_name#anchor_name"This needs a rework as the document address example seems to be windows only and uses forbidden root directory again.. + +

Text Alternative

+ Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser. If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. +

Frame:

+ Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name from the list. + List of frame types + +

Graphic View

+ don't hide the imagemap if extended tips are onDisplays the image map, so that you can click and edit the hotspots. +
+ Controlling the ImageMap Editor With the Keyboard +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..270f99f7a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02220100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Description + /text/shared/01/02220100.xhp + + + + +hotspots; properties +properties; hotspots +ImageMap; hotspot properties +MW inserted index entries + + +

Description

+ Lists the properties for the selected hotspot. +
+ +
+

Hyperlink

+ Lists the properties of the URL that is attached to the hotspot. + +URL: + Enter the URL for the file that you want to open when you click the selected hotspot. If you want to jump to a named anchor within the current document, the address should be of the form "file:///C:/Documents/[current_document_name]#anchor_name". + +

Text Alternative

+ Enter the text that you want to display when the mouse rests on the hotspot in a browser. If you do not enter any text, the Address is displayed. + +

Frame:

+ Enter the name of the target frame that you want to open the URL in. You can also select a standard frame name that is recognized by all browsers from the list. + +

Name:

+ Enter a name for the image. + +

Description

+ Enter a description for the hotspot. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33d242492 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Track Changes + /text/shared/01/02230000.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Track Changes

+Lists the commands that are available for tracking changes in your file. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + +

Manage

+ + +

Comment

+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac239901f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + Record Changes + /text/shared/01/02230100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Record Changes

+Tracks each change that is made in the current document by author and date. +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+ +If you choose Edit - Track Changes - Show, the lines containing changed text passages are indicated by a vertical line in the left page margin. You can set the properties of the vertical line and the other markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes in the Options dialog box. + +You can set the properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. +The following changes are tracked when the record changes command is active: + + + + + Paste and delete text. + + + + + Move paragraphs. + + + Sort text. + + + Find and replace text. + + + Insert attributes that are one character wide, for example, fields and footnotes. + + + Insert sheets, ranges. + + + Insert document. + + + Insert AutoText. + + + Insert from clipboard. + + + + + + + Change cell contents by insertions and deletions. + + + Insert or delete columns and rows. + + + Insert sheets. + + + Cut, copy and paste through the clipboard. + + + Move by dragging and dropping. + + + + + + +When the record changes command is active, you cannot delete, move, merge, split, or copy cells or delete sheets. + + +removed the note about no-tables-comparing in Writer + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b004d63e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230150.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Protect Changes + /text/shared/01/02230150.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Protect Changes

+Prevents a user from deactivating the record changes feature, or from accepting or rejecting changes unless the user enters a password. +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a1815654 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Show Changes + /text/shared/01/02230200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +changes; showing +hiding;changes +showing; changes + + + + + +
+

Show Track Changes

+Shows or hides recorded changes. + +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+You can change the display properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. + +When you rest the mouse pointer over a change markup in the document, a Tip displays the author and the date and time that the change was made. If the Extended Tips are activated, the type of change and any attached comments are also displayed. + + + + +

Show changes in spreadsheet

+ Shows or hides recorded changes. + + +

Show accepted changes

+ Shows or hides the changes that were accepted. + +

Show rejected changes

+ Shows or hides the changes that were rejected. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17781eec2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Comment + /text/shared/01/02230300.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + + +
+

Insert Track Change Comment

+Enter a comment for the recorded change. + +
+ +
+ +
+You can attach a comment when the cursor is in a changed text passagethe changed cell is selected +, or in the Manage Changes dialog. +Comments are displayed as callouts in the sheet when you rest your mouse pointer over a cell with a recorded change. You can also view comments that are attached to a changed cell in the changes list in the Manage Changes dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74c01210d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Manage changes + /text/shared/01/02230400.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + + +
+

Manage changes

+ Accept or reject recorded changes. +
+ +
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a14aeca21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + List + /text/shared/01/02230401.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

List

+Accept or reject individual changes. +
+
+ +
+The List tab displays all of the changes that were recorded in the current document. If you want to filter this list, click the Filter tab, and then select your filter criteria. If the list contains nested changes, the dependencies are shown regardless of the filter. + +Nested changes occur where changes made by different authors overlap. + +Click the plus sign beside an entry in the list to view all of the changes that were recorded for a cell. + +If one of the nested changes for a cell matches a filter criterion, all of the changes for the cell are displayed. When you filter the change list, the entries in the list appear in different colors according to the following table: + + + + + +Color + + +Meaning + + + + +black + + +The entry matches a filter criterion. + + + + +blue + + +One or more subentries matches a filter criterion. + + + + +gray + + +The subentry does not match a filter criterion. + + + + +green + + +The subentry matches a filter criterion. + + +
+ + + +

Selection field

+Lists the changes that were recorded in the document. When you select an entry in the list, the change is highlighted in the document. To sort the list, click a column heading. Hold down CommandCtrl while you click to select multiple entries in the list. +To edit the comment for an entry in the list, right-click the entry, and then choose Edit - Comment. +After you accept or reject a change, the entries of the list are re-ordered according to "Accepted" or "Rejected" status. + + +

Action

+Lists the changes that were made in the document. +

Position.

+Lists the cells with contents that were changed. + +

Author

+ Lists the user who made the change. + +

Date

+ Lists the date and time that the change was made. + +

Comment

+ Lists the comments that are attached to the change. + + +

Accept

+ Accepts the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document. + + +

Reject

+ Rejects the selected change and removes the highlighting from the change in the document. + +

Accept All

+ Accepts all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document. + +

Reject All

+ Rejects all of the changes and removes the highlighting from the document. + + +To reverse the acceptance or rejection of a change, choose Undo on the Edit menu. + + + +

Undo +

+If you made changes by choosing Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply and Edit Changes, the Undo button appears in the dialog. Reverse the last Accept or Reject command. + There are additional commands in the context menu of the list: + + +

Edit comment

+ Edit the comment for the selected change. +

Sort

+ Sorts the list according to the column headings. + +

Action

+ Sorts the list according to the type of change. + +

Author

+ Sorts the list according to the author. + +

Date

+ Sorts the list according to the date and time. + +

Comment

+ Sorts the list according to the comments that are attached to the changes. + +

Document Position

+ Sorts the list in a descending order according to the position of the changes in the document. This is the default sorting method. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81ea076aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Filter + /text/shared/01/02230402.xhp + + + +
+

Filter

+Set the criteria for filtering the list of changes on the List tab. + + + +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + + + +

Date

+Filters the list of changes according to the date and the time that you specify. + + +

Set Date/Time

+ + + + +Icon Set Date/Time + + +Enters the current date and time into the corresponding boxes. + + +
+ + +

Author

+Filters the list of changes according to the name of the author that you select from the list. + + + + + + + +

Range

+ Filters the list of changes according to the range of cells that you specify. To select a range of cells in your sheet, click the Set Reference button (...). +

Shrink/Max

+ + + + +Icon Shrink/Max + + + Select the range of cells that you want to use as a filter, and then click this button to return to the filter list. + + +
+ + + + +

Action

+ Filters the list of changes according to the type of change that you select in the Action box. + + + + + +

Comment

+Filters the comments of the changes according to the keyword(s) that you enter. +You can also use regular expressions (wildcards) when you filter the comments. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dccf43d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Merge Document + /text/shared/01/02230500.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Merge Document

+Imports changes made to copies of the same document into the original document. Changes made to footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored. Identical changes are merged automatically. +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8fef7ab09 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02240000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Compare Document + /text/shared/01/02240000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Compare Document

+ +Compares the current document with a document that you select. + The contents of the selected document are marked as deletions in the dialog that opens. If you want, you can insert the contents of the selected file into the current document by selecting the relevant deleted entries, clicking Reject, and then clicking Insert. +
+
+ + On the Track Changes toolbar, click + +
+ + + +The contents of footnotes, headers, frames and fields are ignored. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f5ab8924 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02250000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + Bibliography Database + /text/shared/01/02250000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + +Bibliography Database +
+ Insert, delete, edit, and organize records in the bibliography database. +
+ +
+ If the fields in your database are read-only, ensure that the data source view is closed. + The supplied bibliography database contains sample records of books. + Use the toolbar to select a table in the bibliography database, to search for records, or to sort the records using filters. + +Lists the available tables in the current database. Click a name in the list to display the records for that table.removed icons; converted to hidden help text + +Go to the first record in the table. + +Go to the previous record in the table. + +Go to the next record in the table. + +Go to the last record in the table. + +Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. + +Inserting a New Record + Inserts a new record into the current table. To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. + +Select the type of record that you want to create. $[officename] inserts a number in the Type column of the record that corresponds to the type that you select here. + +Enter a short name for the record. The short name appears in the Identifier column in the list of records. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Enter additional information for the selected record. If you want, you can also enter the information in the corresponding field in the table. + Finding and Filtering Records + You can search for records by matching a keyword to a field entry. + +Entering Search key + Type the information that you want to search for, and then press Enter. To change the filter options for the search, long-click the AutoFilter icon, and then select a different data field. You can use wildcards such as % or * for any number of characters, and _ or ? for one character in your search. To display all of the records in the table, clear this box, and then press Enter. + +AutoFilter + Long-click to select the data field that you want to search using the term that you entered in the Search Key box. You can only search one data field. + The list of table records is automatically updated to match the new filter settings. + +Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. + + +To display all of the records in a table, click the Reset Filter icon. + +Deleting a Record + To delete a record in the current table, right-click the row header of the record, and then select Delete. Deletes the selected record. + Changing the data source + +Data Source + Select the data source for the bibliography database. + + + + +Column Arrangement + Lets you map the column headings to data fields from a different data source. To define a different data source for your bibliography, click the Data Source button on the record's Object bar. +Select the data field that you want to map to the current Column name. To change the available data fields, select a different data source for your bibliography. + +Deletes the current record. + Lets you choose a different data source for your bibliography. + +Inserts a new record into the current table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69725b9d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + Zoom & View Layout + /text/shared/01/03010000.xhp + + + + + +
+ + zooming;page views + views; scaling + screen; scaling + pages; scaling + +mw deleted "scaling;" + + + + + +

Zoom & View Layout

+Reduces or enlarges the screen display of %PRODUCTNAME. The current zoom factor is displayed as a percentage value on the Status bar. +
+ +
+ +
+Zooming is handled differently on Unix, Linux, and Windows platforms. A document saved with a 100% zoom factor in Windows is displayed at a larger zoom factor on Unix/Linux platforms. To change the zoom factor, double-click or right-click the percentage value on the Status bar, and select the zoom factor that you want. + +

Zoom factor

+Set the zoom factor at which to display the current document and all documents of the same type that you open thereafter. + + + +

Optimal

+Resizes the display to fit the width of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started.Resizes the display to fit the width of the text in the document at the moment the command is started. + + + +

Fit width and height

+Resizes the display to fit the width and height of the selected cell area at the moment the command is started.Displays the entire page on your screen. + + + +

Fit width

+Displays the complete width of the document page. The top and bottom edges of the page may not be visible. + +
+ + + + +

100 %

+Displays the document at its actual size. +
+ + + +

Variable

+Enter the zoom factor at which you want to display the document. Enter a percentage in the box. + +

View layout

+For text documents, you can set the view layout. Reduce the zoom factor to see the effects of different view layout settings.for this doc or all docs? answer: it's the same as before for the zoom factor. + + +

Automatic

+The automatic view layout displays pages side by side, as many as the zoom factor allows. + + +

Single page

+The single page view layout displays pages beneath each other, but never side by side. + + + +

Columns

+In columns view layout you see pages in a given number of columns side by side. Enter the number of columns. + + +

Book mode

+In book mode view layout you see two pages side by side as in an open book. The first page is a right page with an odd page number. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aba97469d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Standard Bar + /text/shared/01/03020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+standard bar on/off +mw made "standard bar;..." a one level entry + +Standard Bar + Shows or hides the Standard bar. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..915910a56 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Tools Bar + /text/shared/01/03050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+tools bar + + +Tools Bar + Shows or hides the Tools bar. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08f8bd1b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Status Bar + /text/shared/01/03060000.xhp + + + +
+ + status bar on/off + + + +

Status Bar

+ Shows or hides the Status bar at the bottom edge of the window. +
+
+ +
+ +can remove this switch when there are related topics for BASE and DRAW + + + +
+ + + + Status Bar - Overview + Status Bar - Overview + Status Bar - Overview + Status Bar - Overview + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc5c2a17e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Full Screen + /text/shared/01/03110000.xhp + + + +
+ + full screen view + screen; full screen views + complete screen view + views;full screen + + +Full Screen + Shows or hides the menus and toolbars in Writer or Calc. To exit the full screen mode, click the Full Screen button or press the Esc key. +
+
+ +
+ +In Writer and Calc, you can also use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+Shift+J to switch between the normal and full screen mode. +You can still use shortcut keys in Full Screen mode, even though the menus are unavailable. To open the View menu, press Alt+V. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..566b40274 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Color Bar + /text/shared/01/03170000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+
+color bar +paint box + + +

Color Bar

+
+ Show or hide the Color bar. To modify or change the color table that is displayed, choose Format - Area, and then click on the Colors tab. +
+
+ +
+ +To change the fill color of an object in the current file, select the object and then click a color. To change the line color of the selected object, right-click a color. To change the color of text in a text object, double-click the text-object, select the text, and then click a color. +You can also drag a color from the Color bar and drop it on a draw object on your slide to change the fill color. +To detach the Color bar, click on a gray area of the toolbar and then drag. To reattach the Color bar, double click on an gray area of the color bar while pressing the CommandCtrl key. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4e111c6ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/03990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Toolbars + /text/shared/01/03990000.xhp + + + +
+ +Toolbars + Opens a submenu to show and hide toolbars. A toolbar contains icons and options that let you quickly access $[officename] commands. +
+Customize + Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons. + +Reset + Choose View - Toolbars - Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context.UFI: #i63811 +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bff0ada0f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + + + Comments + /text/shared/01/04050000.xhp + + + + + comments;inserting/editing/deleting/printing/resolving + comments;hide resolved + comments;resolve in text documents + inserting; comments + editing; comments + deleting;comments + Navigator;comments + printing;comments + resolving;comments + records; inserting comments + remarks, see also comments + + mw changed "notes;" and added 3 entries +
+ + +

Comment

+ Inserts a comment around the selected text, presentation slide, drawing page or at the current spreadsheet cursor position. +
+
+ + +
+ + The comments by different authors get different colors. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data to enter your name so that it can show up as the comment author. + + +

Comments in spreadsheets

+ When you attach a comment to a cell, a callout appears where you can enter your text. A small square in the upper right corner of a cell marks the position of a comment. To display the comment permanently, right-click the cell, and choose Show Comment. + + Cell with comment displayed + + To change the object properties of a comment, for example the background color, choose Show Comment as above, then right-click the comment. Do not double-click the text! + To edit a shown comment, double-click the comment text. To edit a comment that is not shown permanently, right-click in the cell that contains the comment, and then choose Edit Comment. To specify the formatting of the comment text, right-click the comment text in edit mode. + To change the position or size of a comment, drag a border or corner of the comment box. + To delete a comment, right-click the cell, then choose Delete Comment. + + You can also right-click a comment name in the Navigator window to choose some editing commands. + + To set the printing options for comments in your spreadsheet, choose Format - Page, and then click the Sheet tab. + + +

Inserting Comments in Presentations

+
+ Use the command Insert - Comment or the key combination above to insert a comment anchor to the current slidepage. A colored comment box is shown at the top left corner, to enter the text of the comment. A small colored box - the anchor - in the top left of the slidepage contains the initials of the author name, followed by a sequential number. Click on the anchor to open or close the corresponding comment. + +
+ + Comments in Presentations + + + +

Inserting Comments in Drawings

+ + + Comments in Drawings + + + +

Inserting Comments in Text Documents

issue 113019 112000 + Use the command Insert - Comment or the Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+C key combination to insert a comment anchor at the current cursor position. A colored comment box is shown at the page margin, to enter the text of the comment. A line connects the anchor to the comment box. If a text range is selected, the comment is attached to the text range. The commented text range is shadowed. + + Comments in text documents + +

Editing comments

+ Every user with write permission to the document can edit and delete comments of all authors. You can use the Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+C key combination to edit a comment at the current cursor position. + + + In the Find & Replace dialog of text documents, you can select to include the comments texts in your searches. +

Replying to comments

+ If the comment in a text document was written by another author, there is a Reply command in the context menu. This command inserts a new comment adjacent to the comment to which you want to reply. The comment anchor is the same for both comments. Type your reply text in the new comment. Save and send your document to other authors, then those authors can add replies, too.View - Comments command +
+

Marking comments as resolved

+ When the document has been reviewed and commented and requires your action in its contents, you can mark the comment Resolved or Unresolved. Open the comment context menu or click on the comment dropdown list to mark the Resolved checkbox. When you mark the comment resolved, the word Resolved is inserted under the date in the comment box. When marking unresolved, the word Resolved is removed. + You can toggle the display of all resolved comments in the document. Hidden resolved comments are not displayed in the page margin but are not deleted. You can display back all hidden comments. Choose and mark View - Resolved comments to display the resolved comments. Unmark to hide resolved comments. The default is to display all resolved comments. +
+ +

Navigating from comment to comment in text documents

+ + When the cursor is inside a comment, you can press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Page Down to jump to the next comment, or press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Page Up to jump to the previous comment. + + When the cursor is inside the normal text, press the above mentioned keys to jump to the next or previous comment anchor. + + You can also open the Navigator to see a list of all comments. Right-click a comment name in the Navigator to edit or delete the comment. + + + + + + + + Delete the current comment. + + + Delete all comments by this author in the current document. + + + Delete all comments in the current document. + +

Viewing Comments

+ + + + + + Use View - Comments to show or hide all comments in spreadsheets. + + + Use View - Comments to show or hide all anchor comments on the top of the page. + + + Use View - Comments to show or hide all anchor comments on the top of the slide. + + + Use View - Comments or click on the Comment button on the right of the horizontal ruler to show or hide all comments. + + + +

Printing comments

+ + + You cannot print the comments of the slides. + You can choose to use the Notes view to write a page of notes for every slide. + + + You cannot print the comments of the drawing pages. + + + Comments are printed when they are made visible. + + + To change the printing option for comments for all your text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c1d98a5f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + +Scan +/text/shared/01/04060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Scan

+Inserts a scanned image into your document. + +
+To insert a scanned image, the driver for your scanner must be installed. Under UNIX systems, install the SANE package found at http://www.sane-project.org. The SANE package must use the same libc as $[officename]. + +
+ +
+

Select Source

+ +

Request

+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e9a71461 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Select Source + /text/shared/01/04060100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +

Select Source

+ Selects the scanner that you want to use. + + + + The dialog displays settings for the selected scanner and the scan job. + + +
+ +
+ + +

Sources

+ Displays a list of available scanners detected in your system. Click on a scanner in the list and press Select to open the scanner configuration dialog. The configuration dialog depends on the scanner driver installed. + + +

Scan Area

+

Left, right, top, bottom

+Set the margins of the scan area. +

Preview

+Displays a preview of the scanned image. The preview area contains eight handles. Drag the handles to adjust the scan area or enter a value in the corresponding margin spin box. +

Device used

+Select the scanner device in the list of devices detected by your system. +

Resolution [DPI]

+Select the resolution in dots per inch for the scan job. The available resolutions depends on the scanner driver. +

Show advanced options

+Mark this checkbox to display more configuration options for the scanner device. The set of options is displayed in the Options box and depends on the scanner driver. +

Options

+Displays the list of available scanner driver advanced options. Double click an option to display its contents just below. The option and its values depends on the scanner driver. +

About Device

+Displays a popup window with information obtained from the scanner driver: device address, vendor, scanner model and type of scanner. +

Create preview

+Scans and displays the document in the preview area. Use the Create Preview command to view a sample of the scanned document and set the scan job properties. +

Scan

+Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document and closes the dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a7bb66ffa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04060200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Request + /text/shared/01/04060200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Request

+ Scans an image, and then inserts the result into the document. The scanning dialog is provided by the manufacturer of the scanner. For an explanation of the dialog please refer to the documentation on your scanner. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2cafbf0a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Special Character + /text/shared/01/04100000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Special Character

+ Allows a user to insert characters from the range of symbols found in the installed fonts. +
+
+ +
+When you click a character in the Special Characters dialog, a preview and the corresponding numerical code for the character is displayed. + +

Search

+ Enter the UTF-8 name or part of the name of the character to display the UTF-8 character in the top left square of the grid. The name of the character cannot be translated. For example, enter tilde to display ~ and enter latin capital letter O with circumflex to display Ô. +

Font

+ Select a font to display the special characters that are associated with it. + +

Character block

+Select a Unicode block for the current font. The special characters for the selected Unicode block are displayed in the character table. + +

Character Table

+ Click the special character(s) that you want to insert, and then click Insert. +

Recent Characters

+ Displays the special characters that were inserted recently. +

Favorite Characters

+ Displays the special characters that were chosen with the Add to Favorites button. Up to 16 special characters can be saved as a favorite. + + Double-click on a special character will insert it into the document. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27f19fea9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + Inserting Pictures + /text/shared/01/04140000.xhp + + + + + + +
+

Image

+Opens a file selection dialog to insert an image into the current document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + +

Style

+Select the frame style for the graphic. + + +

Anchor

+ Select the anchor type for the image at the current cell position. + + + + + +

Link

+Inserts the selected graphic file as a link. + + + +

Preview

+Displays a preview of the selected graphic file. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6aa60e3a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + OLE Object (Insert Menu) + /text/shared/01/04150000.xhp + + + +
+ +

OLE Object

+ Inserts an embedded or linked object into your document, including formulas, QR codes, and OLE objects. +
+
+ +
+

Formula Object

+ + +

OLE Object

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e5a031aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Insert OLE Object + /text/shared/01/04150100.xhp + + + +OLE objects; inserting +inserting; OLE objects +objects; inserting OLE objects + + + + +

Insert OLE Object

+ Inserts an OLE object into the current document. The OLE object is inserted as a link or an embedded object. +
+ +
+You cannot use the clipboard or drag and drop to move OLE objects to other files. +Empty and inactive OLE objects are transparent. +

Create new

+ Creates a new OLE object based on the object type that you select. +

Object type

+ Select the type of document that you want to create. +

Create from file

+ Creates an OLE object from an existing file. +

File

+ Choose the file that you want to insert as an OLE object. +

File

+ Enter the name of the file that you want to link or embed, or click Search to locate the file. +

Search...

+ Locate the file that you want to insert, and then click Open. + +

Link to file

+ Enable this checkbox to insert the OLE object as a link to the original file. If this checkbox is not enabled, the OLE object will be embedded into your document.which consequences? cannot find featuremail or spec doc + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..246d42a8a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Formula + /text/shared/01/04160300.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +formulas; starting formula editor +$[officename] Math start +Math formula editor +equations in formula editor +editors;formula editor + + + +Formula + Inserts a formula into the current document. For more information open the $[officename] Math Help. +
+ +
+ + +
+ Formulas +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f7cc60a5d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + +Insert Floating Frame +/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +floating frames in HTML documents +inserting; floating frames + + +

Insert Floating Frame

+Inserts a floating frame into the current document. Floating frames are used in HTML documents to display the contents of another file. +
+ +
+If you want to create HTML pages that use floating frames, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML compatibility, and then select the "MS Internet Explorer" option. The floating frame is bounded by <IFRAME> and </IFRAME> tags. +
+Floating frame properties +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60f92c07b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04180100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Data Sources + /text/shared/01/04180100.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + +Data Sources +Lists the databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME and lets you manage the contents of the databases. +
+ +
+ +
+ +The Data sources command is only available when a text document or a spreadsheet is open. +You can insert fields from a database into your file or you can create forms to access the database. + +
+Table Data bar + +Forms +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..510f4451e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Media + /text/shared/01/04990000.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Media

+The submenu presents various sources that an image, audio or video can be insert from. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..924933b2a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Clear Direct Formatting +/text/shared/01/05010000.xhp + + + +
+ +formatting; undoing when writing +paragraph;clear direct formatting +format;clear direct formatting +direct formatting;clear +hyperlinks; deleting +deleting; hyperlinks +cells;resetting formats + + MW changed "formats;" to "formatting;" + + + + +

Clear Direct Formatting

+Removes direct formatting from the selection. +
+ +Direct formatting is formatting that you applied without using styles, such as setting bold typeface by clicking the Bold icon. +
+ +
+ + + + + + Applied styles (paragraph, character, and other types) are not affected by Clear Direct Formatting, only direct formatting applied on top of the styles. To remove formatting applied by a character or paragraph style, reapply the corresponding Default style. + To stop applying a direct format, such as underlining, while you type new text at the end of a line, press Shift+Ctrl+X. + +Bullets and numbering are properties of lists. Clear Direct Formatting does not clear directly formatted bullets and numbering found in a paragraph. To remove the bullet and numbering applied directly to a paragraph, use the Toggle Unordered List, the Toggle Ordered List or the No List icons on the Formatting toolbar. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..130bce205 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Character + /text/shared/01/05020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Character

+ Changes the font and the font formatting for the selected characters. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hyperlink

+ + + + + + + +
+Character Style +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..521c85517 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Font + /text/shared/01/05020100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +formats; fonts +characters;fonts and formats +fonts; formats +text; fonts and formats +typefaces; formats +font sizes; relative changes +languages; spellchecking and formatting +languages; spelling +characters; enabling CTL and Asian characters + + + +
+

CharactersFont

+Specify the formatting and the font that you want to apply. +
+
+ +
+
+The changes are applied to the current selection, to the entire word that contains the cursor, or to the new text that you type. +
+Depending on your language settings, you can change the formatting for the following font types: + + +Western text font - Latin character sets. + + +Asian text font - Chinese, Japanese, or Korean character sets + + +Complex text layout font - right-to-left text direction + + +To enable support for complex text layout and Asian character sets, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the corresponding area. + + + + +Font dialog +

Font

+Enter the name of an installed font that you want to use, or select a font from the list. + + + + + + + +

Typeface

+Select the formatting that you want to apply. + + + + + + + +

Size

+Enter or select the font size that you want to apply. For scalable fonts, you can also enter decimal values. +If you are creating a style that is based on another style, you can enter a percentage value or a point value (for example, -2pt or +5pt). + + + + + + +

Language

+Sets the language that the spellchecker uses for the selected text or the text that you type. Available language modules have a check mark in front of them. +If the language list consists of an editable combo box, you can enter a valid BCP 47 language tag if the language you want to assign is not available from the selectable list. +For language tag details please see the For users section on the langtag.net web site. + + +You can also change the locale setting for cells (choose Format - Cells - Numbers). + + + + + + + + + + +The following buttons appear only for Paragraph Style and Character Style. + + + + +
+Asian languages support +Complex text layout support +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e714aaf96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ + + + + + + + Font Effects + /text/shared/01/05020200.xhp + + + +
+ +fonts; effects +formatting; font effects +characters; font effects +text; font effects +effects; fonts +underlining; text +capital letters; font effects +lowercase letters; font effects +titles; font effects +small capitals +strikethrough; font effects +fonts; strikethrough +outlines; font effects +fonts; outlines +shadows; characters +fonts; shadows +fonts; color ignored +ignored font colors +colors; ignored text color +ufi inserted "fonts;colors"MW copied two entries about font colors to text/shared/guide/text_colormw added 3 index entries about ignored font colors + + +

Font Effects

+ Specify the font effects that you want to use. +
+
+ +
+ + + +
+

Font Color

+ Sets the color for the selected text. If you select Automatic, the text color is set to black for light backgrounds and to white for dark backgrounds. + + + To change the color of a text selection, select the text that you want to change, and click the Font Color icon. To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. + + + If you click the Font Color icon before you select text, the paint can cursor appears. To change the color of text, select the text with the paint can cursor. To change the color of a single word, double-click in a word. To apply a different color, click the arrow next to the Font Color icon, and then select the color that you want to use. + + + To undo the last change, right-click. + + + To exit the paint can mode, click once, or press the Esc key. + + +
+ + +The text color is ignored when printing, if the Print text in black check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print in the Options dialog box. + + +The text color is ignored on screen, if the Use automatic font color for screen display check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility. + + +Click to apply the current font color to the selected characters. You can also click here, and then drag a selection to change the text color. Click the arrow next to the icon to open the Font color toolbar. + + +

Transparency

+Sets the transparency of the character text. The value 100% means entirely transparent, while 0% means not transparent at all. + + + Transparency cannot be set for Paragraph Style and Character Style. + + +

Text Decoration

+ +Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined. + +

Overlining

+ Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. + +

Overline color

+ Select the color for the overlining. + +

Strikethrough

+ Select a strikethrough style for the selected text. + If you save your document in Microsoft Word format, all of the strikethrough styles are converted to the single line style. + +

Underlining

+ Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. + If you apply underlining to a superscript text, the underlining is raised to the level of the superscript. If the superscript is contained in a word with normal text, the underlining is not raised. + + + +

Underline color

+ Select the color for the underlining. + +

Individual words

+ Applies the selected effect only to words and ignores spaces. + +

Effects

+Select the font effects that you want to apply. + + Calc has no case control + +
+

Case

+ The following capitalization effects are available: + + + Without - No effect is applied. + + + UPPERCASE - Changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters. + + + lowercase - Changes the selected uppercase characters to lower characters. + + + Capitalize Every Word - Changes the first character of each selected word to an uppercase character. + + + Small capitals - Changes the selected lowercase characters to uppercase characters, and then reduces their size. + + +
+ +

Hidden

+ Hides the selected characters. To display the hidden text, ensure that Formatting Marks is selected in the View menu. You can also choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Hidden characters. + + + copies the definitions from previous section + + + +

Relief

+ Select a relief effect to apply to the selected text. The embossed relief makes the characters appear as if they are raised above the page. The engraved relief makes the characters appear as if they are pressed into the page. + +

Outline

+
+ Displays the outline of the selected characters. This effect does not work with every font. + +
+

Shadow

+
+ Adds a shadow that casts below and to the right of the selected characters. +
+ + +

Emphasis mark

+ Select a character to display over or below the entire length of the selected text. + +

Position

+ Specify where to display the emphasis marks. + + +Only Writer has Apply button + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3ad87522 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + Numbers / Format + /text/shared/01/05020300.xhp + + + + +formats; number and currency formats +number formats; formats +currencies;format codes +defaults; number formats + + mw transferred "format codes;" to Calc guide Format_value_userdef.xhp and "numbers;" and "cells;" to Calc guide Format_table.xhp. Changed "currencies;" + + + + +
+ + +

Numbers

+Specify the formatting options for the selected cell(s). + + +

Numbers / Format

+Specify the formatting option for the selected variable. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Category

+ Select a category from the list, and then select a formatting style in the Format box. + + + The default currency format for a cell is determined by the regional settings of your operating system. + + + +

Format

+ Select how you want the contents of the selected cell(s) field to be displayed. The code for the selected option is displayed in the Format code box. + +

Currency category list boxes

+ Select a currency, and then scroll to the top of the Format list to view the formatting options for the currency. +
+ The format code for currencies uses the form [$xxx-nnn], where xxx is the currency symbol, and nnn the country code. Special banking symbols, such as EUR (for Euro), do not require the country code. The currency format is not dependent on the language that you select in the Language box. +
+ +

Language

+ + + + + Specifies the language setting for the selected fields. With the language set to Default, $[officename] automatically applies the number formats associated with the system default language. + + + Specifies the language setting for the selected cells. + + Specifies the language setting for the selected field. + + + + + The language setting ensures that date and currency formats, as well as decimal and thousands separators, are preserved even when the document is opened in an operating system that uses a different default language setting. + + + +

Source format

+ Uses the same number format as the cells containing the data for the chart. + + +

Options

+ Specify the options for the selected format. + +

Decimal places

+ Enter the number of decimal places that you want to display. + +

Denominator places

+ With fraction format, enter the number of places for the denominator that you want to display. + +

Leading zeroes

+ Enter the maximum number of zeroes to display in front of the decimal point. + +

Negative numbers red

+ Changes the font color of negative numbers to red. + +

Thousands separator

+ Inserts a separator between thousands. The type of separator that is used depends on your language settings. + +

Engineering notation

+ With scientific format, Engineering notation ensures that exponent is a multiple of 3. + +

Format code

+ Displays the number format code for the selected format. You can also enter a custom format. The following options are only available for user-defined number formats. + +

Add

+ Adds the number format code that you entered to the user-defined category. + +

Edit Comment

+ Adds a comment to the selected number format. + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected number format. The changes are effective after you restart $[officename]. + +

Name line

+ Enter a comment for the selected number format, and then click outside this box. + +
+ Number format codes: custom format codes defined by user. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cfb83564 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,2583 @@ + + + + + + + Number Format Codes + /text/shared/01/05020301.xhp + + + + + + + format codes; numbers + conditions; in number formats + number formats; codes + currency formats + formats;of currencies/date/time + numbers; date, time and currency formats + Euro; currency formats + date formats + times, formats + percentages, formats + scientific notation, formats + engineering notation, formats + fraction, formats + native numeral + LCID, extended + +mw made "time formats" a two level entry and deleted 2x "formats;" + +Number Format Codes +Number format codes can consist of up to four sections separated by a semicolon (;). + + + + In a number format code with two sections, the first section applies to positive values and zero, and the second section applies to negative values. + + + In a number format code with three sections, the first section applies to positive values, the second section to negative values, and the third section to the value zero. + + + You can also assign conditions to the three sections, so that the format is only applied if a condition is met. + + + Fourth section applies if the content is not a value, but some text. Content is represented by an at sign (@). + + + +Decimal Places and Significant Digits + Use zero (0), the number sign (#) or the question mark (?) as placeholders in your number format code to represent numbers. The # only displays significant digits, while the 0 displays zeroes if there are fewer digits in the number than in the number format. The ? works as the # but adds a space character to keep decimal alignment if there is a hidden non-significant zero. + Use question marks (?), zeroes (0) or number signs (#) to represent the number of digits to include in the numerator and the denominator of a fraction. Fractions that do not fit the pattern that you define are displayed as floating point numbers. +If a number contains more digits to the right of the decimal delimiter than there are placeholders in the format, the number is rounded accordingly. If a number contains more digits to the left of the decimal delimiter than there are placeholders in the format, the entire number is displayed. Use the following list as a guide for using placeholders when you create a number format code: + + + + + Placeholders + + + Explanation + + + + + # + + + Does not display extra zeros. + + + + + ? + + + Displays space characters instead of extra zeros. + + + + + 0 (Zero) + + + Displays extra zeros if the number has less places than zeros in the format. + + +
+ + +Examples + + + + + Number Format + + + Format Code + + + + + 3456.78 as 3456.8 + + + ####.# + + + + + 9.9 as 9.900 + + + #.000 + + + + + 13 as 13.0 and 1234.567 as 1234.57 + + + #.0# + + + + + 5.75 as 5 3/4 and 6.3 as 6 3/10 + + + # ???/??? + + + + + .5 as 0.5 + + + 0.## + + + + + .5 as 0.5   (with two extra spaces at the end) + + + 0.??? + + +
+ + +Thousands Separator +Depending on your language setting, you can use a comma, a period or a blank as a thousands separator. You can also use the separator to reduce the size of the number that is displayed by a multiple of 1000 for each separator. The examples below use comma as thousands separator: + + + + + Number Format + + + Format Code + + + + + 15000 as 15,000 + + + #,### + + + + + 16000 as 16 + + + #, + + +
+ + +Including Text in Number Format Codes + +Text and Numbers +To include text in a number format that is applied to a cell containing numbers, place a double quotation mark (") in front of and behind the text, or a backslash (\) before a single character. For example, enter #.# "meters" to display "3.5 meters" or #.# \m to display "3.5 m". If you use space as thousands separator, you need to insert spaces between quotes in the previous examples: #.#" meters" or #.#\ \m to get the correct result. + +Text and Text +To include text in a number format that is applied to a cell that might contain text, enclose the text by double quotation marks (" "), and then add an at sign (@). For example, enter "Total for "@ to display "Total for December". + +Spaces +To use a character to define the width of a space in a number format, type an underscore (_) followed by the character. The width of the space varies according to the width of the character that you choose. For example, _M creates a wider space than _i. +To fill free space with a given character, use an asterisk (*) followed by this character. For instance: +*\0 +will display integer value (0) preceded by as many as needed backslash characters (\) to fill column width. For accounting representation, you may left align currency symbol with a format similar to: +$_-* 0.--;$-* 0.--;$_-* - + +Color +To set the color of a section of a number format code, insert one of the following color names in square brackets [ ]: + + + + + CYAN + + + GREEN + + + + + BLACK + + + BLUE + + + + + MAGENTA + + + RED + + + + + WHITE + + + YELLOW + + +
+ + +Conditions + +Conditional Brackets +You can define a number format so that it only applies when the condition that you specify is met. Conditions are enclosed by square brackets [ ]. +You can use any combination of numbers and the <, <=, >, >=, = and <> operators. +For example, if you want to apply different colors to different temperature data, enter: +[BLUE][<0]#.0 "°C";[RED][>30]#.0 "°C";[BLACK]#.0 "°C" +All temperatures below zero are blue, temperatures between 0 and 30 °C are black, and temperatures higher than 30 °C are red. + +Positive and Negative Numbers +To define a number format that adds a different text to a number depending on if the number is positive, negative, or equal to zero, use the following format: +"plus" 0;"minus" 0;"null" 0 + +Percentages, Scientific Notation and Fraction Representation + +Percentages +To display numbers as percentages, add the percent sign (%) to the number format. + +Scientific Notation +Scientific notation lets you write very large numbers or very small fractions in a compact form. For example, in scientific notation, 650000 is written as 6.5 x 105, and 0.000065 as 6.5 x 10-5. Translators: use the decimal delimiter of your language (period or comma) for all number format codes in Calc.In %PRODUCTNAME, these numbers are written as 6.5E+5 and 6.5E-5, respectively. To create a number format that displays numbers using scientific notation, enter a # or 0, and then one of the following codes E-, E+, e- or e+. If sign is omitted after E or e, it won't appear for positive value of exponent. To get engineering notation, enter 3 digits (0 or #) in the integer part: ###.##E+00 for instance. + +Fraction Representation +To represent a value as a fraction, format consists of two or three parts: integer optional part, numerator and denominator. Integer and numerator are separated by a blank or any quoted text. Numerator and denominator are separated by a slash character. Each part can consist of a combination of #, ? and 0 as placeholders. +Denominator is calculated to get the nearest value of the fraction with respect to the number of placeholders. For example, PI value is represented as 3 16/113 with format: +# ?/??? +Denominator value can also be forced to the value replacing placeholders. For example, to get PI value as a multiple of 1/16th (i.e. 50/16), use format: +?/16 + +Number Format Codes of Currency Formats +The default currency format for the cells in your spreadsheet is determined by the regional setting of your operating system. If you want, you can apply a custom currency symbol to a cell. For example, enter #,##0.00 € to display 4.50 € (Euros).Translators: use the decimal delimiter of your language (period or comma) for all number format codes in Calc. +You can also specify the locale setting for the currency by entering the locale code for the country after the symbol. For example, [$€-407] represents Euros in Germany. To view the locale code for a country, select the country in the Language list on the Numbers tab of the Format Cells dialog. + + +Date and Time Formats + +Date Formats +To display days, months and years, use the following number format codes. +Not all format codes give meaningful results for all languages. + + + + + Format + + + Format Code + + + + + Month as 3. + + + M + + + + + Month as 03. + + + MM + + + + + Month as Jan-Dec + + + MMM + + + + + Month as January-December + + + MMMM + + + + + First letter of Name of Month + + + MMMMM + + + + + Day as 2 + + + D + + + + + Day as 02 + + + DD + + + + + Day as Sun-Sat + + + NN or DDD or AAA + + + + + Day as Sunday to Saturday + + + NNN or DDDD or AAAA + + + + + Day followed by comma, as in "Sunday," + + + NNNN + + + + + Year as 00-99 + + + YY + + + + + Year as 1900-2078 + + + YYYY + + + + + Calendar week + + + WW + + + + + Quarterly as Q1 to Q4 + + + Q + + + + + Quarterly as 1st quarter to 4th quarter + + + QQ + + + + + Era, abbreviation. On the Japanese Gengou calendar, single character (possible values are: M, T, S, H) + + + G + + + + + Era, abbreviation + + + GG + + + + + Era, full name + + + GGG + + + + + Number of the year within an era, short format + + + E + + + + + Number of the year within an era, long format + + + EE or R + + + + + Era, full name and year + + + RR or GGGEE + + +
+ +The above listed formatting codes work with your language version of %PRODUCTNAME. However, when you need to switch the locale of %PRODUCTNAME to another locale, you need to know the formatting codes used in that other locale. +For example, if your software is set to an English locale, and you want to format a year with four digits, you enter YYYY as a formatting code. When you switch to a German locale, you must use JJJJ instead. The following table lists only the localized differences. + + + + + Locale + + + Year + + + Month + + + Day + + + Hour + + + Day Of Week + + + Era + + + + + English - en + and all not listed locales + + + Y + + + M + + + D + + + H + + + A + + + G + + + + + German - de + + + J + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + + + Netherlands - nl + + + J + + + + + + + U + + + + + + + + + French - fr + + + A + + + + + J + + + + + O + + + + + + + Italian - it + + + A + + + + + G + + + + + O + + + X + + + + + Portuguese - pt + + + A + + + + + + + + + O + + + + + + + Spanish - es + + + A + + + + + + + + + O + + + + + + + Danish - da + + + + + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + Norwegian - no, nb, nn + + + + + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + Swedish - sv + + + + + + + + + T + + + + + + + + + Finnish - fi + + + V + + + K + + + P + + + T + + + + + + +
+ + +Entering Dates +To enter a date in a cell, use the Gregorian calendar format. For example, in an English locale, enter 1/2/2002 for Jan 2, 2002. +All date formats are dependent on the locale that is set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. For example, if your locale is set to 'Japanese', then the Gengou calendar is used. The default date format in %PRODUCTNAME uses the Gregorian Calendar. +To specify a calendar format that is independent of the locale, add a modifier in front of the date format. For example, to display a date using the Jewish calendar format in a non-Hebrew locale, enter: [~jewish]DD/MM/YYYY. +The specified calendar is exported to Microsoft Excel using extended LCID. Extended LCID can also be used in the format string. It will be converted to a calendar modifier if it is supported. See Extended LCID section below. + + + + + Modifier + + + Calendar + + + + + [~buddhist] + + + Thai Buddhist Calendar + + + + + [~gengou] + + + Japanese Gengou Calendar + + + + + [~gregorian] + + + Gregorian Calendar + + + + + [~hanja] or [~hanja_yoil] + + + Korean Calendar + + + + + [~hijri] + + + Arabic Islamic Calendar + + + + + [~jewish] + + + Jewish Calendar + + + + + [~ROC] + + + Republic Of China Calendar + + +
+ +If you perform a calculation that involves one or more cells using a date format, the result is formatted according to the following mappings: + + + + + + + Initial Format + + + Result Format + + + + + Date + Date + + + Number (Days) + + + + + Date + Number + + + Date + + + + + Date + Time + + + Date&Time + + + + + Date + Date&Time + + + Number + + + + + Time + Time + + + Time + + + + + Time + Number + + + Time + + + + + Time + Date&Time + + + Date&Time + + + + + Date&Time + Date&Time + + + Time + + + + + Date&Time + Number + + + Date&Time + + + + + Number + Number + + + Number + + +
+ + + +The Date & Time format displays the date and time that an entry was made to a cell with this format. + + + +By default in %PRODUCTNAME, a date with the value "0" corresponds to Dec 30, 1899. + + + +Time Formats +To display hours, minutes and seconds use the following number format codes: + + + + + Format + + + Format Code + + + + + Hours as 0-23 + + + H + + + + + Hours as 00-23 + + + HH + + + + + Hours as 00 up to more than 23 + + + [HH] + + + + + Minutes as 0-59 + + + M + + + + + Minutes as 00-59 + + + MM + + + + + Minutes as 00 up to more than 59 + + + [MM] + + + + + Seconds as 0-59 + + + S + + + + + Seconds as 00-59 + + + SS + + + + + Seconds as 00 up to more than 59 + + + [SS] + + +
+ +To display seconds as fractions, add the decimal delimiter to your number format code. For example, enter HH:MM:SS.00 to display the time as "01:02:03.45".Translators: use the decimal delimiter of your language (period or comma) for all number format codes in Calc. +Minute time formats M and MM must be used in combination with hour or second time formats to avoid confusion with month date format. +If a time is entered in the form 02:03.45 or 01:02:03.45 or 25:01:02, the following formats are assigned if no other time format has been specified: MM:SS.00 or [HH]:MM:SS.00 or [HH]:MM:SSTranslators: use the decimal delimiter of your language (period or comma) for all number format codes in Calc. + +Displaying Numbers Using Native Characters + +NatNum modifiers +To display numbers using native number characters, use a [NatNum1], [NatNum2], ..., [NatNum11] modifier at the beginning of a number format codes.this will be extended with the libnumbertext work +To spell out numbers in various number, currency and date formats, use a [NatNum12] modifier with the chosen arguments at the beginning of a number format code. See NatNum12 section below. +The [NatNum1] modifier always uses a one to one character mapping to convert numbers to a string that matches the native number format code of the corresponding locale. The other modifiers produce different results if they are used with different locales. A locale can be the language and the territory for which the format code is defined, or a modifier such as [$-yyy] that follows the native number modifier. In this case, yyy is the hexadecimal MS-LCID that is also used in currency format codes. For example, to display a number using Japanese short Kanji characters in an English US locale, use the following number format code: +[NatNum1][$-411]0 +In the following list, the Microsoft Excel [DBNumX] modifier that corresponds to %PRODUCTNAME [NatNum] modifier is shown. If you want, you can use a [DBNumX] modifier instead of [NatNum] modifier for your locale. Whenever possible, %PRODUCTNAME internally maps [DBNumX] modifiers to [NatNumN] modifiers. +Displaying dates using [NatNum] modifiers can have a different effect than displaying other types of numbers. Such effects are indicated by 'CAL: '. For example, 'CAL: 1/4/4' indicates that the year is displayed using the [NatNum1] modifier, while the day and month are displayed using the [NatNum4] modifier. If 'CAL' is not specified, the date formats for that particular modifier are not supported. +[NatNum0] +Try to convert any native number string to ASCII Arabic digits. If already ASCII, it remains ASCII. +[NatNum1] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + Chinese lower case characters + + + + + CAL: 1/7/7 [DBNum1] + + + + + Japanese + + + short Kanji characters + + + [DBNum1] + + + CAL: 1/4/4 [DBNum1] + + + + + Korean + + + Korean lower case characters + + + [DBNum1] + + + CAL: 1/7/7 [DBNum1] + + + + + Hebrew + + + Hebrew characters + + + + + + + + + Arabic + + + Arabic-Indic characters + + + + + + + + + Thai + + + Thai characters + + + + + + + + + Hindi + + + Indic-Devanagari characters + + + + + + + + + Odia + + + Odia (Oriya) characters + + + + + + + + + Marathi + + + Indic-Devanagari characters + + + + + + + + + Bengali + + + Bengali characters + + + + + + + + + Punjabi + + + Punjabi (Gurmukhi) characters + + + + + + + + + Gujarati + + + Gujarati characters + + + + + + + + + Tamil + + + Tamil characters + + + + + + + + + Telugu + + + Telugu characters + + + + + + + + + Kannada + + + Kannada characters + + + + + + + + + Malayalam + + + Malayalam characters + + + + + + + + + Lao + + + Lao characters + + + + + + + + + Tibetan + + + Tibetan characters + + + + + + + + + Burmese + + + Burmese (Myanmar) characters + + + + + + + + + Khmer + + + Khmer (Cambodian) characters + + + + + + + + + Mongolian + + + Mongolian characters + + + + + + + + + Nepali + + + Indic-Devanagari characters + + + + + + + + + Dzongkha + + + Tibetan characters + + + + + + + + + Farsi + + + East Arabic-Indic characters + + + + + + + + + Church Slavic + + + Cyrillic characters + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum2] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + Chinese upper case characters + + + + + CAL 2/8/8 [DBNum2] + + + + + Japanese + + + traditional Kanji characters + + + + + CAL 2/5/5 [DBNum2] + + + + + Korean + + + Korean upper case characters + + + [DBNum2] + + + CAL 2/8/8 [DBNum2] + + + + + Hebrew + + + Hebrew numbering + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum3] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + fullwidth Arabic digits + + + + + CAL: 3/3/3 [DBNum3] + + + + + Japanese + + + fullwidth Arabic digits + + + + + CAL: 3/3/3 [DBNum3] + + + + + Korean + + + fullwidth Arabic digits + + + [DBNum3] + + + CAL: 3/3/3 [DBNum3] + + +
+ +[NatNum4] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + lower case text + + + [DBNum1] + + + + + + + Japanese + + + modern long Kanji text + + + [DBNum2] + + + + + + + Korean + + + formal lower case text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum5] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + Chinese upper case text + + + [DBNum2] + + + + + + + Japanese + + + traditional long Kanji text + + + [DBNum3] + + + + + + + Korean + + + formal upper case text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum6] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + fullwidth text + + + [DBNum3] + + + + + + + Japanese + + + fullwidth text + + + + + + + + + Korean + + + fullwidth text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum7] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + short lower case text + + + + + + + + + Japanese + + + modern short Kanji text + + + + + + + + + Korean + + + informal lower case text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum8] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Chinese + + + short upper case text + + + + + + + + + Japanese + + + traditional short Kanji text + + + [DBNum4] + + + + + + + Korean + + + informal upper case text + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum9] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Korean + + + Hangul characters + + + + + + +
+ +[NatNum10] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Korean + + + formal Hangul text + + + [DBNum4] + + + CAL 9/11/11 [DBNum4] + + +
+ +[NatNum11] + + + + + Transliterations + + + Native Number Characters + + + DBNumX + + + Date Format + + + + + Korean + + + informal Hangul text + + + + + + +
+ + +
+ +Extended LCID +If compatible, native numbering and calendar are exported to Microsoft Excel using extended LCID. Extended LCID can also be used in string format instead of NatNum modifier. +Extended LCID consists of 8 hexadecimal digits: [$-NNCCLLLL], with 2 first digits NN for native numerals, CC for calendar and LLLL for LCID code. For instance, [$-0D0741E] will be converted to [NatNum1][$-41E][~buddhist]: Thai numerals (0D) with Buddhist calendar (07) in Thai locale (041E). +Native Numerals +Two first digits NN represents native numerals: + + + + + NN + + + Numeral + + + Representation + + + Compatible LCID + + + + + 01 + + + Arabic + + + 1234567890 + + + all + + + + + 02 + + + Eastern Arabic + + + ١٢٣٤٥٦٧٨٩٠ + + + 401 + 1401, 3c01, 0c01, 801, 2c01, 3401, 3001, 1001, 1801, 2001, 4001, 2801, 1c01, 3801, 2401 + + + + + 03 + + + Persian + + + ۱۲۳۴۵۶۷۸۹۰ + + + 429 + + + + + 04 + + + Devanagari + + + १२३४५६७८९० + + + 439 + 44E, 461, 861 + + + + + 05 + + + Bengali + + + ১২৩৪৫৬৭৮৯০ + + + 445 + 845 + + + + + 06 + + + Punjabi + + + ੧੨੩੪੫੬੭੮੯੦ + + + 446 + + + + + 07 + + + Gujarati + + + ૧૨૩૪૫૬૭૮૯૦ + + + 447 + + + + + 08 + + + Oriya + + + ୧୨୩୪୫୬୭୮୯୦ + + + 448 + + + + + 09 + + + Tamil + + + ௧௨௩௪௫௬௭௮௯0 + + + 449 + 849 + + + + + 0A + + + Telugu + + + ౧౨౩౪౫౬౭౮౯౦ + + + 44A + + + + + 0B + + + Kannada + + + ೧೨೩೪೫೬೭೮೯೦ + + + 44B + + + + + 0C + + + Malayalam + + + ൧൨൩൪൫൬൭൮൯൦ + + + 44C + + + + + 0D + + + Thai + + + ๑๒๓๔๕๖๗๘๙๐ + + + 41E + + + + + 0E + + + Lao + + + ໑໒໓໔໕໖໗໘໙໐ + + + 454 + + + + + 0F + + + Tibetan + + + ༡༢༣༤༥༦༧༨༩༠ + + + 851 + + + + + 10 + + + Burmese + + + ၁၂၃၄၅၆၇၈၉၀ + + + 455 + + + + + 11 + + + Tigrina + + + ፩፪፫፬፭፮፯፰፱0 + + + 473 + 873 + + + + + 12 + + + Khmer + + + ១២៣៤៥៦៧៨៩០ + + + 453 + + + + + 13 + + + Mongolian + + + ᠑᠒᠓᠔᠕᠖᠗᠘᠙᠐ + + + C50 + 850 + + + + + 1B + + + Japanese + + + 一二三四五六七八九〇 + + + 411 + + + + + 1C + + + (financial) + + + 壱弐参四伍六七八九〇 + + + + + + + 1D + + + (fullwidth Arabic) + + + １２３４５６７８９０ + + + + + + + 1E + + + Chinese - simplified + + + 一二三四五六七八九○ + + + 804 + 1004, 7804 + + + + + 1F + + + (financial) + + + 壹贰叁肆伍陆柒捌玖零 + + + + + + + 20 + + + (fullwidth Arabic) + + + １２３４５６７８９０ + + + + + + + 21 + + + Chinese - traditional + + + 一二三四五六七八九○ + + + C04 + 1404 + + + + + 22 + + + (financial) + + + 壹貳參肆伍陸柒捌玖零 + + + + + + + 23 + + + (fullwidth Arabic) + + + １２３４５６７８９０ + + + + + + + 24 + + + Korean + + + 一二三四五六七八九０ + + + 812 + + + + + 25 + + + (financial) + + + 壹貳參四伍六七八九零 + + + + + + + 26 + + + (fullwidth Arabic) + + + １２３４５６７８９０ + + + + + + + 27 + + + Korean - Hangul + + + 일이삼사오육칠팔구영 + + + + +
+ +Calendar +Two next digits CC are for calendar code. Each calendar is only valid for some LCID. + + + + + CC + + + Calendar + + + Example (YYYY-MM-DD) + + + Supported LCID + + + + + 00 + + + Gregorian + + + 2016-08-31 + + + All + + + + + 03 + + + Gengou + + + 28-08-31 + + + 411 (Japanese) + + + + + 05 + + + Unknown + + + 4349-08-31 + + + Unsupported + + + + + 06 or 17 + + + Hijri + + + 1437-11-28 + + + 401 (Arabic - Saudi Arabia), 1401 (Arabic - Algeria), 3c01 (Arabic - Bahrain), 0c01 (Arabic - Egypt), 801 (Arabic - Iraq), 2c01 (Arabic - Jordan), 3401 (Arabic - Kuwait), 3001 (Arabic - Lebanon), 1001 (Arabic - Libya), 1801 (Arabic - Morocco), 2001 (Arabic - Oman), 4001 (Arabic - Qatar), 2801 (Arabic - Syria), 1c01 (Arabic - Tunisia), 3801 (Arabic - U.A.E.), 2401 (Arabic - Yemen) and 429 (Farsi) + + + + + 07 + + + Buddhist + + + 2559-08-31 + + + 454 (Lao), 41E (Thai) + + + + + 08 + + + Jewish + + + 5776-05-27 + + + 40D (Hebrew) + + + + + 10 + + + Indian + + + 1938-06-09 + + + Unsupported + + + + + 0E, 0F, 11, 12 or 13 + + + Unknown + + + 2016-07-29 + + + Unsupported + + + + + Unsupported + + + Hanja + + + + + 412 (Korean) + + + + + Unsupported + + + ROC + + + 0105-08-31 + + + 404 (Chinese - Taiwan) + + +
+
+ +
+ +NatNum12 modifier + +To spell out numbers in various number, currency and date formats, use a [NatNum12] modifier with the chosen arguments at the beginning of a number format code. + +Common NatNum12 formatting examples + + + + + Formatting code + + + Explanation + + + + + [NatNum12] + + + Spell out as cardinal number: 1 → one + + + + + [NatNum12 ordinal] + + + Spell out as ordinal number: 1 → first + + + + + [NatNum12 ordinal-number] + + + Spell out as ordinal indicator: 1 → 1st + + + + + [NatNum12 capitalize] + + + Spell out with capitalization, as cardinal number: 1 → One + + + + + [NatNum12 upper ordinal] + + + Spell out in upper case, as ordinal number: 1 → FIRST + + + + + [NatNum12 title] + + + Spell out in title case, as cardinal number: 101 → Hundred One + + + + + [NatNum12 USD] + + + Spell out as a money amount of a given currency specified by 3-letter ISO code: 1 → one U.S. dollar + + + + + [NatNum12 D=ordinal-number]D" of "MMMM + + + Spell out as a date in format "1st of May" + + + + + [NatNum12 YYYY=title year,D=capitalize ordinal]D" of "MMMM, YYYY + + + Spell out as a date in format "First of May, Nineteen Ninety-nine" + + + + + [NatNum12 MMM=upper]MMM-DD + + + Display upper case abbreviated month name in format "JAN-01" + + + + + [NatNum12 MMMM=lower]MMMM + + + Display lower case month name in format "january" + + +
+ +Other possible arguments: "money" before 3-letter currency codes, for example [NatNum12 capitalize money USD]0.00 will format number "1.99" as "One and 99/100 U.S. Dollars". + +
+ +
+ +Error Codes + +If the value is outside the limits for the selected format the following error code is shown: + +#FMT + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f1887d0e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + Hyperlink + /text/shared/01/05020400.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +formatting; hyperlinks +characters; hyperlinks +hyperlinks; character formats +text;hyperlinks +links; character formats + + + + +Hyperlink +Assigns a new hyperlink or edits the selected hyperlink. + A hyperlink is a link to a file on the Internet or on your local system. + + +You can also assign or edit a named HTML anchor, or Bookmark, that refers to a specific place in a document. + + +
+ +
+Hyperlink +Specify the properties for the hyperlink. + +URL +Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame. + + +Browse +Locate the file that you want to link to, and then click Open. + +Reference +Enter the text that you want to display for the hyperlink. + +Events +Specify an event that triggers when you click the hyperlink. + +Name +
+Enter a name for the hyperlink. $[officename] inserts a NAME tag in the hyperlink: +<A HREF="http://www.example.com/" NAME="Nametext" TARGET="_blank">Note</A> +
+ +Frame +
+Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window. + +
+
+ + + +Name of Frame + + +Definition + + + + +Named entries + + +File opens in a named frame in the current HTML document. + + + + +_self + + +File opens in the current frame. + + + + +_blank + + +File opens in a new page. + + + + +_parent + + +File opens in the parent frame of the current frame. If there is no parent frame, the current frame is used. + + + + +_top + + +File opens in the topmost frame in the hierarchy. + + +
+
+Character Styles +Specify the formatting options for the hyperlink. + +Visited links +Select a formatting style to use for visited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles icon on the Formatting toolbar. + +Unvisited links +Select a formatting style to use for unvisited links from the list. To add or modify a style in this list, close this dialog, and click the Styles icon on the Formatting toolbar. +
+Hyperlink dialog +Assign macro +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..357a6ab63 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + Font Position + /text/shared/01/05020500.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+positioning; fonts +formats; positions +effects;font positions +fonts; positions in text +spacing; font effects +characters; spacing +pair kerning +kerning; in characters +text; kerning + + + +Font Position +Position +Specify the position, scaling, rotation, and spacing for characters. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + +Position +Set the subscript or superscript options for a character. + + +Superscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. + + +Normal +Removes superscript or subscript formatting. + + +Subscript +Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. + + +Raise/lower by +Enter the amount by which you want to raise or to lower the selected text in relation to the baseline. One hundred percent is equal to the height of the font. + +Relative font size +Enter the amount by which you want to reduce the font size of the selected text. + +Automatic +Automatically sets the amount by which the selected text is raised or lowered in relation to the baseline. +Rotation/scaling + + +Set the rotation and the scaling options for the selected text. + +0 degrees +Does not rotate the selected text. + +90 degrees +Rotates the selected text to the left by 90 degrees. + +270 degrees +Rotates the selected text to the right by 90 degrees. + +Fit to line +Stretches or compresses the selected text so that it fits between the line that is above the text and the line that is below the text. + + + +Scale width +Enter the percentage of the font width by which to horizontally stretch or compress the selected text. +Spacing +Specify the spacing between individual characters. + + +Spacing +Specifies the spacing between the characters of the selected text. Enter the amount by which you want to expand or condense the text in the spin button. +To increase the spacing, set a positive value; to reduce it, set a negative value. + +Pair kerning +Automatically adjust the character spacing for specific letter combinations. +Kerning is only available for certain font types and requires that your printer support this option. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f4ed7f281 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Asian Layout + /text/shared/01/05020600.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+double-line writing in Asian layout +formats; Asian layout +characters; Asian layout +text; Asian layout + + + +Asian Layout +Sets the options for double-line writing for Asian languages. Select the characters in your text, and then choose this command. +
+ +
+ +
+Double-lined +Set the double-line options for the selected text. + +Write in double lines +Allows you to write in double lines in the area that you selected in the current document. +Enclosing characters +Specify the characters to enclose the double-lined area. + +Initial character +Select the character to define the start of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. + +Final character +Select the character to define the end of the double-lined area. If you want to choose a custom character, select Other Characters. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4455f638f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Asian Typography + /text/shared/01/05020700.xhp + + + +
+Asian typography +formatting; Asian typography +paragraphs; Asian typography +typography; Asian + + + +Asian Typography +Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents. +
+
+ +
+Line change +Set the options for line breaks in Asian language documents. +Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line +Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. +Allow hanging punctuation +Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin. +Apply spacing between Asian and non-Asian text +Inserts a space between ideographic and alphabetic text. +
+Enabling Asian language support +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..81156dc74 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Paragraph +/text/shared/01/05030000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

Paragraph

+Modifies the format of the current paragraph, such as indents and alignment. + To modify the font of the current paragraph, select the entire paragraph, choose Format - Character, and then click on the Font tab. +
+ +
+The paragraph style for the current paragraph is displayed at the Formatting toolbar, and is highlighted in the Styles window. +UFI: changed name of bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9375088d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,197 @@ + + + + + + + Indents and Spacing + /text/shared/01/05030100.xhp + + + +
+spacing; between paragraphs in footnotes + line spacing; paragraph + spacing; lines and paragraphs + single-line spacing in text + one and a half line spacing in text + double-line spacing in paragraphs + leading between paragraphs + paragraphs;spacing +mw deleted "footnote spacings" and added "paragraphs;spacing" + + +

Indents and Spacing

+ Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph. +
+ To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General , and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + + +You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. + + +
+ +
+

Indent

+ Specify the amount of space to leave between the left and the right page margins and the paragraph. + +

Before text

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. + +

After text

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to indent the paragraph from the page margin. If you want the paragraph to extend into the page margin, enter a negative number. In Left-to-Right languages, the right edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the right page margin. In Right-to-Left languages, the left edge of the paragraph is indented with respect to the left page margin. + +

First line

+ Indents the first line of a paragraph by the amount that you enter. To create a hanging indent enter a positive value for "Before text" and a negative value for "First line". To indent the first line of a paragraph that uses numbering or bullets, choose "Format - Bullets and Numbering - Position". + +

Automatic

+ Automatically indents a paragraph according to the font size and the line spacing. The setting in the First Line box is ignored. +

Spacing

+ Specify the amount of space to leave between selected paragraphs. + +

Above paragraph

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to leave above the selected paragraph(s). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Below paragraph

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to leave below the selected paragraph(s). + +

Do not add space between paragraphs of the same style

+ Makes any space specified before or after this paragraph not be applied when the preceding and following paragraphs are of the same paragraph style. + +

Line spacing

+ Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. +
+

Single

+ Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. + + + + + Icon Line Spacing 1 + + + + Line Spacing 1 + + +
+
+
+

1.15 lines

+ Sets the line spacing to 1.15 lines. + + + + + Icon Line Spacing 1.15 + + + + Line Spacing 1.15 + + +
+
+
+

1.5 lines

+ Sets the line spacing to 1.5 lines. + + + + + Icon Line Spacing 1.5 + + + + Line Spacing 1.5 + + +
+
+
+

Double

+ Sets the line spacing to two lines. + + + + + Icon Line Spacing 2 + + + + Line Spacing 2 + + +
+
+

Proportional

+ Select this option and then enter a percentage value in the box, where 100% corresponds to single line spacing. +

At Least

+ Sets the minimum line spacing to the value that you enter in the box. + If you use different font sizes within a paragraph, the line spacing is automatically adjusted to the largest font size. If you prefer to have identical spacing for all lines, specify a value in At least that corresponds to the largest font size. +

Leading

+ Sets the height of the vertical space that is inserted between two lines. +

Fixed

+ Sets the line spacing to exactly match the value that you enter in the box. This can result in cropped characters. + + +

of

+ Enter the value to use for the line spacing. + + +

Activate page line-spacing

+ Aligns the baseline of each line of text to a vertical document grid, so that each line is the same height. To use this feature, you must first activate the Use page line-spacing option for the current page style. Choose Format - Page Style, click on the Page tab, and then select the Use page line-spacing box in the Layout settings section. + + + + + +
+ + Printing with Page line-spacing +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..557b654f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + +Tabs +/text/shared/01/05030300.xhp + + + +
+formats; tabulators +fill characters with tabulators +tab stops;settings + + + +Tabs +Set the position of a tab stop in a paragraph. +
+If you want, you can also use the ruler to set the tab positions. +
+ +
+ +Position +Select a tab stop type, enter a new measurement, and then click New. If you want, you can also specify the measurement units to use for the tab (cm for centimeter, or " for inches). Existing tabs to the left of the first tab that you set are removed. +Type +Select the type of tab stop that you want to modify. + + +Left +The name of this tab stop is Left/Top if Asian language support is enabled. +Aligns the left edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the right. + + +Right +This name of this tab stop is Right/Bottom if Asian language support is enabled. +Aligns the right edge of the text to the tab stop and extends the text to the left of the tab stop. + +Center +Aligns the center of the text to the tab stop. + +Decimal +Aligns the decimal separator of a number to the center of the tab stop and text to the left of the tab. +The character that is used as a decimal separator depends on the regional setting of your operating system. + + +Character +Enter a character that you want the decimal tab to use as a decimal separator. +Fill Character +Specify the characters to use as leader to the left of the tab stop. + +None +Inserts no fill characters, or removes existing fill characters to the left of the tab stop. + +....... +Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dots. + +------ +Fills the empty space to the left of the tab stop with dashes. + +______ +Draws a line to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. + + +Character +Allows you to specify a character to fill the empty space to the left of the tab stop. + +New +Adds the tab stop that you defined to the current paragraph. + +Delete all +Removes all of the tab stops that you defined under Position. Sets Left tab stops at regular intervals as the default tab stops. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8053f617d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + Borders + /text/shared/01/05030500.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Borders

+ Sets the border options for the selected objects in Writer or Calc. +
+ +You can specify the border position, size, and style in Writer or Calc. In $[officename] Writer, you can add borders to pages, frames, graphics, tables, paragraphs, characters and to embedded objects. + +
+ +
+ + To modify the border of an entire table, place the cursor in a table cell, right-click, choose Table, and then click the Borders tab. To modify the border of a table cell, select the cell, right-click, choose Table, and then click the Borders tab. + + + +

Line arrangement

+ Select a predefined border style to apply. + Alternatively, use the Borders button on the toolbar to apply predefined border formats. + + + + + The Remove border option in the Adjacent Cells section determines if borders in the edges of the selected range are to be removed. Leave this option unchecked if edge borders should be left unchanged. + Read the help page User Defined Borders in Cells to learn more on how to define custom line arrangements. + + +Line +Click the border style that you want to apply. The style is applied to the borders selected in the preview. + + +Select the line color that you want to use for the selected border(s). +

Padding

+Specify the amount of space that you want to leave between the border and the contents of the selection. +Left +Enter the distance that you want to have between the left border and the contents of the selection. +Right +Enter the distance that you want to have between the right border and the contents of the selection. +Top +Enter the distance that you want to have between the top border and the contents of the selection. +Bottom +Enter the distance that you want to have between the bottom border and the contents of the selection. +Synchronize +Applies the same padding setting to all four borders when you enter a new distance. +shadows; borders +borders; shadows +margins; shadows + +Shadow style +You can also apply a shadow effect to borders. For the best results, only apply this effect when all four borders are visible. +Graphics or objects that are anchored to a frame in the document cannot exceed the size of the frame. If you apply a shadow to the borders of an object that fills an entire frame, the size of the object is reduced to display the shadows. +Position +Click a shadow style for the selected borders. +Distance +Enter the width of the shadow. +Color +Select a color for the shadow. + +Properties +Specifies the properties for the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. +Merge with next paragraph +Merges the border style and the shadow style of the current paragraph with the next paragraph. These styles are only merged if the indent, border, and shadow styles of the next paragraph are the same as the current paragraph. This option is also available for Paragraph Styles.UFI: see spec "spec-merge-borders-and-shadow" +Merge adjacent line styles +Merges two different border styles of adjacent cells in a Writer table into one border style. This property is valid for a whole table in a Writer document. +The rules can be condensed to the statement that the stronger attribute wins. If, for example, one cell has a red border of 2 point width, and the adjacent cell has a blue border of 3 point width, then the common border between these two cells will be blue with 3 point width.UFI: see spec "collapsing_table_borders" + + + +Calc does not have an Apply button + + +
+ + + UFI: moved border_object into Writer switch + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e62370ddc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + +Alignment +/text/shared/01/05030700.xhp + + + +
+aligning; paragraphs +paragraphs; alignment +lines of text; alignment +left alignment of paragraphs +right alignment of paragraphs +centered text +justifying text +MW deleted "text;" + + +

Alignment

+Sets the alignment of the paragraph relative to the margins of page. +
+
+ +
+Options +Set the alignment options for the current paragraph. + +Left +Aligns the paragraph to the left page margin. + If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Left/Top. + + + +Right +Aligns the paragraph to the right page margin. + If Asian language support is enabled, this option is named Right/Bottom. + + + +Centered +Centers the contents of the paragraph on the page. + + + + +Justify +Aligns the paragraph to the left and to the right page margins. + + + + +Last Line + +Specify the alignment for the last line in the paragraph. + + +Expand single word + +If the last line of a justified paragraph consists of one word, the word is stretched to the width of the paragraph. + + +UFI: asian enabled + + +Snap to text grid (if active) +Aligns the paragraph to a text grid. To activate the text grid, choose Format - Page - Text Grid. + +

Text-to-text

+

Alignment

+Select an alignment option for oversized or undersized characters in the paragraph relative to the rest of the text in the paragraph. +
+

Properties

+ + + +
+

Text direction

+Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. +
+
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..303287ff3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + +Crop +/text/shared/01/05030800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+cropping pictures +pictures; cropping and zooming +zooming; pictures +scaling;pictures +sizes; pictures +original size;restoring after cropping + + + +Crop +Trims or scales the selected graphic. You can also restore the graphic to its original size. +
+
+ +
+
+Crop +Use this area to trim or scale the selected graphic, or to add white space around the graphic. + +Keep scale +Maintains the original scale of the graphic when you crop, so that only the size of the graphic changes. + +Keep image size +Maintains the original size of the graphic when you crop, so that only the scale of the graphic changes. To reduce the scale of the graphic, select this option and enter negative values in the cropping boxes. To increase the scale of the graphic, enter positive values in the cropping boxes. + +Left +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the left edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the left of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. + +Right +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the right edge of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space to the right of the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the horizontal scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the horizontal scale of the graphic. + +Top +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the top of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space above the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. + +Bottom +If the Keep Scale option is selected, enter a positive amount to trim the bottom of the graphic, or a negative amount to add white space below the graphic. If the Keep image size option is selected, enter a positive amount to increase the vertical scale of the graphic, or a negative amount to decrease the vertical scale of the graphic. +Scale +Changes the scale of the selected graphic. + +Width +Enter the width for the selected graphic as a percentage. + +Height +Enter the height of the selected graphic as a percentage. +Image size +Changes the size of the selected graphic. + +Width +Enter a width for the selected graphic. + +Height +Enter a height for the selected graphic. + + +Original Size +Returns the selected graphic to its original size. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ccfe8b328 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + Organizer + /text/shared/01/05040100.xhp + + + + +organizing; styles +styles; organizing + + + +
+

Organizer

+Set the options for the selected style. +
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ +

Name

+ Displays the name of the selected style. If you are creating or modifying a custom style, enter a name for the style. You cannot change the name of a predefined style. + + + + +

AutoUpdate

+Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. +Updates the style when you apply direct formatting to a paragraph using this style in your document. The formatting of all paragraphs using this style is automatically updated. + + +

Next Style

+Select an existing style that you want to follow the current style in your document. For paragraph styles, the next style is applied to an empty paragraph that is created when you press Enter at the end of an existing paragraph. For page styles, the next style is applied when a new page is created. + + + + +

Inherit from

+ Select an existing style (or - None -) to provide its definitions to the current style. Use the other tabs to modify the inherited style. + You cannot use this option with a page style or a list style. + +

Edit Style

+Edit the properties of the parent style. +

Category

+ Displays the category for the current style. If you are creating or modifying a new style, select 'Custom Style' from the list. + You cannot change the category for a predefined style. + +

Contains

+ Describes the relevant formatting used in the current style. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ Update Style +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..473fa35f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ + + + + + + +Page +/text/shared/01/05040200.xhp + + + +
+pages;formatting and numbering +formatting;pages +paper formats +paper trays +printers;paper trays +layout;pages +binding space +margins;pages +gutter +changing;page size +changing;page margins +page margins +margins;defining +page size;defining +mw made "binding space;" a one level entry and added "gutter" and "margins;pages" + + +

Page

+Allows you to define page layouts for single and multiple-page documents, as well as a numbering and paper formats. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Paper format

+Select from a list of predefined paper sizes, or define a custom paper format. + +

Format

+Select a predefined paper size, or create a custom format by entering the dimensions for the paper in the Height and Width boxes. + +

Width

+Displays the width of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a width here. + +

Height

+Displays the height of the selected paper format. To define a custom format, enter a height here. +

Orientation

+Select paper orientation for display and print. + +

Portrait

+Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented vertically. + +

Landscape

+Displays and prints the current document with the paper oriented horizontally. + +

Text direction

+Select the text direction that you want to use in your document. The "right-to-left (vertical)" text flow direction rotates all layout settings to the right by 90 degrees, except for the header and footer. + +Text direction only appears if Asian or Complex text layout is set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Setting - Languages. + + +

Paper tray

+Select the paper source for your printer. If you want, you can assign different paper trays to different page styles. For example, assign a different tray to the First Page style and load the tray with your company's letterhead paper.UFI: #i31234# +

Margins

+Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the page and the document text. + +

Left / Inner

+Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner text margin and the inner edge of the page. + +

Right / Outer

+Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the document text. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the outer text margin and the outer edge of the page. + + + + + +

Gutter

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left margin. If you are using the Mirrored page layout, enter the amount of space to leave between the inner page margin and the inner edge of the page. + + + + +

Top

+Enter the amount of space to leave between the upper edge of the page and the document text. + +

Bottom

+Enter the amount of space to leave between the lower edge of the page and the document text. + + +

Layout settings

+ + + + +

Page layout

+ Specify whether the current style should show odd pages, even pages, or both odd and even pages. +

Right and left

+ The current page style shows both odd and even pages with left and right margins as specified. +

Mirrored

+ The current page style shows both odd and even pages with inner and outer margins as specified. Use this layout if you want to bind the printed pages like a book. Enter the binding space as the "Inner" margin. +

Only right

+ The current page style shows only odd (right) pages. Even pages are shown as blank pages. +

Only left

+ The current page style shows only even (left) pages. Odd pages are shown as blank pages. + + + + + +

Slide Numbers

+ Select the slide numbering format that you want to use for the current slide style. + + +

Page Numbers

+ Select the page numbering format that you want to use for the current page style. + + + + + + + +

Reference Style

+ Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. +

Use page line-spacing

+ Aligns the text on the selected Page Style to a vertical page grid. The spacing of the grid is defined by the Reference Style. + Select the Paragraph Style that you want to use as a reference for lining up the text on the selected Page style. The height of the font that is specified in the reference style sets the spacing of the vertical page grid. + +

Gutter position

+ Allows choosing if the current document's gutter shall be positioned at the left of the document's pages (default) or at top of the document's pages when the document is displayed. + + + + + + + +

Table alignment

+ Specify the alignment options for the cells on a printed page. + Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. +

Horizontal

+ Centers the cells horizontally on the printed page. + Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. +

Vertical

+ Centers the cells vertically on the printed page. + + + + + + + + +

Fit object to paper format

+ Resizes the drawing objects so that they fit on the paper format that you select. The arrangement of the drawing objects is preserved. + + + +
+Changing measurement units + + +Printing with Page line-spacing (register-true) + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b6543241 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Header + /text/shared/01/05040300.xhp + + + + + If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a header. + + + + +
+ +
+ To add a header to the current page style, select Header on, and then click OK. + + If you want to extend a header into the page margins, insert a frame into the header. + + +To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press Command +Ctrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. + + +

Header

+ Set the properties of the header. + +

Header on

+ Adds a header to the current page style. + +

Same content left/righti80087

+ Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different header to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. + + +

Same content on first page

+First and even/odd pages share the same content. + +

Left margin

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left page margin and the left edge of the header. + +

Right margin

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the right page margin and the right edge of the header. + +

Spacing

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the header and the top edge of the document text. + +

Use dynamic spacing

+ Overrides the Spacing setting, and allows the header to expand into the area between the header and the document text. + +

Height

+ Enter the height that you want for the header. + +

AutoFit height

+ Automatically adjusts the height of the header to fit the content that you enter. + + +

More

+ Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the header. + +

Edit +

+ Add or edit header text. + Add or edit header text. + +
+ Headers + Changing measurement units + Borders + Area +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1c89a7d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Footer + /text/shared/01/05040400.xhp + + + + +If you want, you can also add borders or a background fill to a footer. + + + + +
+ +
+To insert a footer into the current document, select Footer on, and then click OK. + +If you want to extend a footer into the page margins, insert a frame into the footer. + + +To quickly move the text cursor from the document text to the header or footer, press CommandCtrl+Page Up or Page Down. Press the same key again to move the text cursor back into the document text. + + +

Footer

+Set the properties of the footer. + + +

Footer on

+Adds a footer to the current page style. + + +

Same content left/right

+Even and odd pages share the same content. To assign a different footer to even and odd pages, clear this option, and then click Edit. + + + +

Same content on first page

+First and even/odd pages share the same content. + + +

Left margin

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the page and the left edge of the footer. + + +

Right margin

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the footer. + + +

Spacing

+ Enter the amount of space that you want to maintain between the bottom edge of the document text and the top edge of the footer. + + +

Use dynamic spacing

+ Overrides the Spacing setting and allows the footer to expand into the area between the footer and document text. + + +

Height

+ Enter the height you want for the footer. + + +

AutoFit height

+ Automatically adjusts the height of the footer to fit the content you enter. + + + + +

More

+ Defines a border, a background color, or a background pattern for the footer. + + +

Edit +

+ Add or edit footer text. + Add or edit footer text. + +
+ Footers + Changing measurement units + Borders + Area +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6e7055e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Asian Phonetic Guide +/text/shared/01/05060000.xhp + + + +
+Asian Phonetic Guide +phonetic guide + + + + +Asian Phonetic Guide +Allows you to add comments next to Asian characters to serve as a pronunciation guide. + +
+
+ +
+ + +Select one or more words in the document. + + +Choose Format - Asian Phonetic Guide. + + +Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide in the Ruby text box. + + + + + +Base text +Displays the base text that you selected in the current file. If you want, you can modify the base text by entering new text here. + + + +Ruby text +Enter the text that you want to use as a pronunciation guide for the base text. +Alignment +Select the horizontal alignment for the ruby text. +Position +Select where you want to place the ruby text. +Character Style for ruby text +Select a character style for the ruby text. +Styles +Opens the Styles deck of the Sidebar +Styles deck of the Sidebar where you can select a character style for the ruby text. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab4757d77 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Align Objects +/text/shared/01/05070000.xhp + + + +
+aligning; objects +positioning; objects +ordering; objects + + +

Align Objects

+Aligns selected objects with respect to one another. +
+If one of the selected objects is anchored as a character, some of the alignment options do not work. +
+ +
+Not all types of objects can be selected together. Not all modules (Writer, Calc, Impress, Draw) support all types of alignment. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..781329f52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Left +/text/shared/01/05070100.xhp + + + +
+ + +Align Left +Aligns the left edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the left edge of the object is aligned to the left page margin.UFI: this help id .uno:alignleft is also called from Calc, where it has a different function +
+
+ +
+Objects are aligned to the left edge of the leftmost object in the selection. +To align the individual objects in a group, choose Format - Group - Enter Group +double-click to enter the group, select the objects, right-click, and then choose an alignment option. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..feac83fce --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Center Horizontal + /text/shared/01/05070200.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Center Horizontal

+ Horizontally centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the horizontal center of the page. +
+
+ +
+ The vertical position of the selected objects is not affected by this command. + + + To align the individual objects in a group, choose Format - Group - Enter Group to enter the group, select the objects, right-click, and then choose an alignment option. + + + To align the individual objects in a group, double-click to enter the group, select the objects, right-click, and then choose an alignment option. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67ee6afd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Right +/text/shared/01/05070300.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+Objects are aligned to the right edge of the rightmost object in the selection. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2009480ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Top +/text/shared/01/05070400.xhp + + + +
+ + +Align Top +Vertically aligns the top edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the top edge of the object is aligned to the upper page margin. +
+
+ +
+Objects are aligned to the top edge of the topmost object in the selection. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0abeb02d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Vertical Center +/text/shared/01/05070500.xhp + + + +
+ + +Align Vertical Center +Vertically centers the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the center of the object is aligned to the vertical center of the page. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0b51adde5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Align Bottom +/text/shared/01/05070600.xhp + + + +
+ + +Align Bottom +Vertically aligns the bottom edges of the selected objects. If only one object is selected in Draw or Impress, the bottom edge of the object is aligned to the lower page margin. +
+
+ +
+Objects are aligned to the bottom edge of the bottom most object in the selection. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11d2fa015 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Alignment (Text Objects) +/text/shared/01/05080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+aligning; text objects +text objects; alignment + +Alignment (Text Objects) +Set the alignment options for the current selection. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e1a70137 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Left +/text/shared/01/05080100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Left + Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left page margin. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..24a8c6d90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Right +/text/shared/01/05080200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..24aae3145 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Center +/text/shared/01/05080300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Center + Centers the selected paragraph(s) on the page. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4464934ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Justify +/text/shared/01/05080400.xhp + + + +
+ +Justify +Aligns the selected paragraph(s) to the left and the right page margins. If you want, you can also specify the alignment options for the last line of a paragraph by choosing Format - Paragraph - Alignment. +removed link, see i62789 +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45aef3cc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Font +/text/shared/01/05090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ fonts; text objectstext objects; fontsFont + Set the font options for the selected text. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..47f35b5e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Size +/text/shared/01/05100000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; font sizes +font sizes; text + +Size +Set the font size for the selected text. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5598fc26e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + +Merge Cells +/text/shared/01/05100100.xhp + + + +moved from scalc/01/05100100.xhp and updated for tdf#33749 +
+ + merge/merging cells + + +

Merge Cells

+Combines the contents of the selected cells into a single cell, retaining the formatting of the first cell in the selection.moved from swriter/01/05100100.xhp, see i86644 +
+ + + +
+
+Select the cells to be merged then do one of the following: +In the Formatting toolbar, click: + +Or, right click the selection to open the context menu and choose Merge Cells. If Unmerge Cells is present instead then the cell selection contains merged cells and cannot be merged further. +Or, in the Properties sidebar mark the Merge Cells checkbox. +Or, choose Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Merge Cells. +
+ +
+ + +
+
+Choose Table - Merge Cells.
 +Or, on the Table toolbar click: + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..13c8281e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + +Split Cells +/text/shared/01/05100200.xhp + + + +
+ +unmerge/unmerging cells +split/splitting cells + + + + + + +
+This section moved from /text/calc/01/05100200.xhp and updated for tdf#33749 +

Unmerge Cells

+Divides previously merged cells back to the original cells. If the original cells had content that was kept when merged that content is restored. +
+
+Select the cells to be unmerged then do one of the following: +In the Formatting toolbar click: + +Or, right click the selection to open the context menu and choose Unmerge Cells. If Merge Cells is present instead then the cell selection does not contain any merged cells. +Or, in the Properties sidebar clear the Merge Cells checkbox. +Or, choose Format - Merge and Unmerge Cells - Unmerge Cells +
+ + +
+

Split Cells

+Displays the Split Cells Dialog where the split can be defined as either horizontally or vertically and the number the each cell will be split into. +
+
+Do one of the following: +Choose Table - Split Cells. +Or, on the Table toolbar click: + +
+

Split Cells Dialog

+Enter the number of rows or columns that you want to split the selected cell(s) into. +

Direction

+

Horizontally

+Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of rows that you specify in the Split cell into box. + +

Into equal proportions

+Splits cells into rows of equal height. + +

Vertically

+Splits the selected cell(s) into the number of columns that you specify in the Split cell into box. + + +
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68d0095db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Top +/text/shared/01/05100500.xhp + + + +
+ +Top +Aligns the contents of the cell to the top edge of the cell. +
+
+In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Top + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..75ef4719e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Center (vertical) +/text/shared/01/05100600.xhp + + + +
+ +Center (vertical) +Centers the contents of the cell between top and bottom of the cell. +
+
+In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Center + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e247a6b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bottom +/text/shared/01/05100700.xhp + + + +
+ +Bottom +Aligns the contents of the cell to the bottom edge of the cell. +
+
+In the context menu of a cell, choose Cell - Bottom + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d37c45d39 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Style +/text/shared/01/05110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; font styles +fonts; styles + +Style +Use this command to quickly apply font styles to a text selection. +
+
+ +
+If you place the cursor in a word and do not make a selection, the font style is applied to the entire word. If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e596362e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bold +/text/shared/01/05110100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; bold +bold; text +characters; bold + + +

Bold

+Makes the selected text bold. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made bold. If the selection or word is already bold, the formatting is removed. +
+If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b41ca1ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Italic +/text/shared/01/05110200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; italics +italic text +characters; italics + + +

Italic

+Makes the selected text italic. If the cursor is in a word, the entire word is made italic. If the selection or word is already italic, the formatting is removed. +
+If the cursor is not inside a word, and no text is selected, then the font style is applied to the text that you type. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..528dc23fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Underline +/text/shared/01/05110300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+characters;underliningunderlining;characters +

Underline

+Underlines or removes underlining from the selected text. +
+
+ +
+If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is underlined. +
+

Single Underline

+ +Underlines the selected text with a single line. +
+
+

Double Underline

+ +Underlines the selected text with two lines. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ba165143c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Strikethrough +/text/shared/01/05110400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ strikethrough;characters + +

Strikethrough

+ Draws a line through the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, the entire word. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..854d5c5fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Shadows +/text/shared/01/05110500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+text; shadowed +characters; shadowed +shadows;characters, using context menu + + +Shadows +Adds a shadow to the selected text, or if the cursor is in a word, to the entire word. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..244217567 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Distribute Rows Evenly +/text/shared/01/05110600m.xhp + + + +
+ + + table rows;distribute height equally + row height;distribute equally + +Distribute Rows Evenly +Adjusts the height of the selected rows to match the height of the tallest row in the selection. + +
+
+ + +Choose Table - Size - Distribute Rows Evenly + + + +Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table Bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Distribute Rows Evenly + + +
+ +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f984f536 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Superscript +/text/shared/01/05110700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
UFI. removed 2 help ids +

Superscript

+Reduces the font size of the selected text and raises the text above the baseline. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a162b880 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Subscript +/text/shared/01/05110800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Subscript

+Reduces the font size of the selected text and lowers the text below the baseline. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1d988d36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Line Spacing +/text/shared/01/05120000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+line spacing; context menu in paragraphs +text; line spacing + + +

Line Spacing

+Specify the amount of space to leave between lines of text in a paragraph. +
+
+ +
+ + + +
+Indents and Spacing +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91d039beb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Single Line +/text/shared/01/05120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Single Line

+ Applies single line spacing to the current paragraph. This is the default setting. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..958d738c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +1.5 Lines +/text/shared/01/05120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

1.5 Lines

+Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to one and half lines. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10af87546 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Double (Line) +/text/shared/01/05120300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Double (Line)

+Sets the line spacing of the current paragraph to two lines. +
+
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cba018296 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Distribute Columns Equally +/text/shared/01/05120600.xhp + + + +
+ + + table columns;distribute columns equally + column width;distribute equally + +Distribute Columns Equally +Adjusts the width of the selected columns to match the width of the widest column in the selection. The total width of the table cannot exceed the width of the page. + +
+
+ + +Choose Table - Size - Distribute Columns Equally + + + +Open Optimize Size toolbar from Table Bar, click +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Distribute Columns Equally + + +
+ +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdfb4fead --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + +New Style from Selection +/text/shared/01/05140100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +

New Style from Selection

+ + +Create new paragraph, character, frame, page, list, and table styles from objects that are formatted manually to the new style that you want to create. +Create new cell and page styles from manually modified cell or page formatting. +Create new graphic styles from objects that you have formatted manually to the new style that you want to create. + + +
+ + +For paragraphs only: + Press Shift+F11 + Choose Styles - New Style from Selection. + On the Formatting bar, click the New Style from Selection icon. +For all style categories: + Choose View - Styles or press Command+TF11 to open the Styles sidebar, select the desired style category at the top of Styles deck, then click the Styles action menu icon at the top right corner, and choose New Style from Selection. + + + Choose Styles - New Style from Selection. (cell styles only) + Choose Styles - Manage Styles or press Command+TF11 to open the Styles sidebar, select the desired style category at the top of Styles deck, then click the New Style from Selection icon. + + + Choose View - Styles or press Command+TF11 to open the Styles sidebar, then click the New Style from Selection icon at the top of the Styles deck. + + + + + + +New Style from Selection Icon + + + + New Style from Selection Icon + + +
+
+ +

Enter New Style Name

+ Enter a name for the new Style. +

Custom Styles for Current Document

+ Lists all custom styles in the selected style category forin the selected style category forin the current document. These styles can be overwritten with a new style selection if you want. +
+ + + + + + + + Styles in Calc + + + + Styles in Impress + + + Styles + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..919035861 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Name + /text/shared/01/05190000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +objects; naming +groups;naming +names;objects +ufi: changed names;for groups of objects to names;objects, in cws aw038 + + +
+

Name

+Assigns a name to the selected object, so that you can quickly find the object in the Navigator. +UFI: #i63800 +
+
+ +
+ +The name is also displayed in the Status Bar when you select the object. + + + +

Name

+Enter a name for the selected object. The name will be visible in the Navigator. +Names must be unique between images, OLE objects and frames in the same document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..43d7898f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05190100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Description + /text/shared/01/05190100.xhp + + + +objects;text alternative and description + descriptions for objects + text alternative;objects + + + + +
+

Description

+Assigns a text alternative and a description to the selected object. These texts are available as alternative tags in your document for use by accessibility tools. They are also available as tags for images when you export the document. +
+
+ +
+ +

Text Alternative

+
+Enter a short description of the essential details of the selected object for a person who cannot see the object. This text is available for use by assistive technologies. +
+ +
+

Description

+Enter a longer description of the object, especially if the object is too complex or contains too much detail to be described adequately with the short Text Alternative. Use Description to add additional information to the short description found in Text Alternative. This text is available for use by assistive technologies. + For images, Text Alternative and Description are exported with an appropriate tag in HTML and PDF format (remember to enable the Universal Accessibility (PDF/UA) option in PDF export). +
+
+Options in Object Properties +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96d936732 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Line +/text/shared/01/05200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Line + +Sets the formatting options for the selected line. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e16b9c75b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + +Line +/text/shared/01/05200100.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Line

+Set the formatting options for the selected line or the line that you want to draw. You can also add arrowheads to a line, or change chart symbols. +
+
+ +
+

Line properties

+ + +

Styles

+Select the line style that you want to use. + + + + +

Colors

+Select a color for the line. + + + + +

Widths

+Select the width for the line. You can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. + + + +

Transparency

+Enter the transparency of the line, where 100% corresponds to completely transparent and 0% to completely opaque. + + + +The Line tab of the Data Series dialog is only available if you select an XY Chart type. +

Icon

+Set the options for the data point symbols in your chart. + +

Select

+Select the symbol style that you want to use in your chart. If you select Automatic, $[officename] uses the default symbols for the selected chart type. + +

Width

+Enter a width for the symbol. + +

Height

+Enter a height for the symbol. + +

Keep ratio

+Maintains the proportions of the symbol when you enter a new height or width value. +

Arrow styles

+You can add arrowheads to one end, or both ends of the selected line. To add a custom arrow style to the list, select the arrow in your document, and then click on the Arrow Styles tab of this dialog. + + +

Style

+Select the arrowhead that you want to apply to the selected line. + + +

Width

+Enter a width for the arrowhead. + + +

Center

+Places the center of the arrowhead(s) on the endpoint(s) of the selected line. + +

Synchronize ends

+Automatically updates both arrowhead settings when you enter a different width, select a different arrowhead style,or center an arrowhead. +

Corner and cap styles

+ +

Corner style

+Select the shape to be used at the corners of the line. In case of a small angle between lines, a mitered shape is replaced with a beveled shape. + +

Cap style

+Select the style of the line end caps. The caps are added to inner dashes as well. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6ad692c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + +Line Styles +/text/shared/01/05200200.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Line Styles

+Edit or create dashed or dotted line styles. +
+
+ +
+

Properties

+ +

Line style

+Select the style of line that you want to create. + + +

Type

+Select the combination of dashes and dots that you want. + + +

Number

+Enter the number of times that you want a dot or a dash to appear in a sequence. + + +

Length

+Enter the length of the dash. + +

Spacing

+Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between dots or dashes. + +

Fit to line width

+Automatically adjusts the entries relative to the length of the line. + +

Add

+Creates a new line style using the current settings. Enter a name for the new line style. + +

Modify

+Updates the selected line style using the current settings. To change the name of the selected line style, enter a new name when prompted. + + +

Load line style table

+Imports a list of line styles. + +

Save line style table

+Saves the current list of line styles, so that you can load it again later. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f30b1f52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + +Arrow Styles +/text/shared/01/05200300.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Arrow Styles

+Edit or create arrow styles. +
+You can add arrow styles to the start or end of a line using the Line tab of the Line dialog. +
+ +
+

Manage Arrow Styles

+Lets you add, rename, delete, save and load arrow styles. + +

Style name

+Displays the name of the selected arrow style. + +

Arrow style

+Choose a predefined arrow style symbol from the list box. + +

Add

+To define a custom arrow style, select a drawing object in the document, and then click here. + +

Rename

+Changes the name of the selected arrow style. + + +

Load Arrow Styles

+Imports a list of arrow styles. + +

Save Arrow Styles

+Saves the current list of arrow styles, so that you can load it later. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac2ad7f18 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Area window +/text/shared/01/05210000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + +Area + +Sets the fill properties of the selected drawing object. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9ba99f6b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + +Area tab +/text/shared/01/05210100.xhp + + + +
+ +areas; styles +fill patterns for areas +fill colors for areas +invisible areas +frames; backgrounds +backgrounds; frames/sections/indexes +sections; backgrounds +indexes; backgrounds +footers;backgrounds +headers;backgrounds + + + + +

+BackgroundArea

+Set the fill options for the selected drawing object or document element. +This is not only for drawing objects, but pages, paragraphs and others too. Need better wording +
+You can add custom colors, gradients, hatchings, two color patterns and image patterns to the default lists for later use. +
+ +
+ +

None

+Do not fill the selected object. + + + + + + + + +

Gradient

+Fills the object with a gradient selected on this page. + + + + + + + +

Hatch

+Fills the object with a hatching pattern selected on this page. + +You can quickly select fill options from the list boxes on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. + + +TODO: This para doesn't belong here anymore, but as several places include it, can't remove yet. Find a better place for it in a later commit. + + + +Select the type of fill that you want to apply to the selected drawing object. + + +Chart does not have an Apply button + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..108aa9b62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Colors + /text/shared/01/05210200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +colors;palette +palette;document colors +colors;adding +colors;delete +document colors;palette + +
+

Colors

+ Select a color to apply, save the current color list, or load a different color list. +
+
+ Press the Color button in one of the situations below: + +
+ +

Colors

+

Palette

+ Select the color palette in the list box to pick the color for the selected object. The palette color set displays below. + The Theme colors palette shows the theme colors from the current theme, if the document has any. + The Document colors palette shows the colors used in the current document. +

Recent colors

+ Displays the recent selected colors. +

Custom Palette

+ Click Add to open a dialog to set a name for the custom color. The palette changes to "custom". + Click Delete to delete the color from the custom palette. + You cannot add or delete colors of the palettes provided by your installation. + +

Active

+ Displays the current active color for the object. Red, blue and green components values and the color value in hexadecimal notation are displayed just below. +

New

+ Displays the new color for the object that will be applied when you click OK. +

R, G and B

+ The values of the red, blue and green components of the new color. You can define the new color by entering the red, green and blue values in the respective R, G and B spin boxes. Allowed values are 0 to 255. +

Hex

+ The color value in hexadecimal notation. You can enter the hexadecimal value in the Hex text box. +

Pick

+ Opens the color picker dialog for a graphical selection of the desired color. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc3ffdb49 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Gradient + /text/shared/01/05210300.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Gradients

+ Select a gradient, modify the properties of a gradient, or save a new gradient. +
+
+ +
+

Gradient

+Lists the available gradients. You can also modify or create your own gradients. + +

Add

+ Adds a custom gradient to the current list. Specify the properties of your gradient, and then click this button + +

Modify

+ Applies the current gradient properties to the selected gradient. If you want, you can save the gradient under a different name. +To rename a gradient, select the gradient, right-click and choose Rename. To delete a gradient, select the gradient, right-click and choose Delete. +

Options

+Use the options to define or modify a gradient. + +

Type

+Select the gradient that you want to apply. + +

Center X

+ Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current horizontal location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box. + +

Center Y

+ Enter the vertical offset for the gradient, where 0% corresponds to the current vertical location of the endpoint color in the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box. + +

Angle

+ Enter a rotation angle for the selected gradient. + +

Border

+ Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the area of the endpoint color on the gradient. The endpoint color is the color that is selected in the To Color box. +

From Color

+ +Select a color for the beginning point of the gradient. + +Enter the intensity for the color in the From Color box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. +

To Color

+ +Select a color for the endpoint of the gradient. + +Enter the intensity for the color in the To Color box, where 0% corresponds to black, and 100 % to the selected color. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6df6d0e57 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Hatch +/text/shared/01/05210400.xhp + + + +
+hatching +areas; hatched/dotted +dotted areas + + + +

Hatch

+Set the properties of a hatching pattern, or save a new hatching pattern. +
+
+ + +
+

Hatch

+Lists the available hatching patterns. You can also modify or create your own hatching pattern. + +To rename a hatching pattern, select the pattern, right-click and choose Rename. To delete a hatching pattern, select the pattern, right-click and choose Delete. +

Add

+Adds a custom hatching pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your hatching pattern, and then click this button. + +

Modify

+Applies the current hatching properties to the selected hatching pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. +

Options

+Define or modify a hatching pattern. + +

Spacing

+Enter the amount of space that you want to have between the hatch lines. + +

Angle

+Enter the rotation angle for the hatch lines, or click a position in the angle grid. + +

Line type

+Select the type of hatch lines that you want to use. + +

Line color

+Select the color of the hatch lines. +

Background Color

+To apply a background color, select the Background color box, then select a color. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..772cdbde2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + +Image +/text/shared/01/05210500.xhp + + + +
+ +images; areas +areas; image + + + +

Image

+Select an image that you want to use as a fill image, or add your own image pattern. +
+
+ +
+

Image

+Lists the available images. You can also import images. +To rename an image, select the image, right-click and choose Rename. To delete an image, select the image, right-click and choose Delete. + +

Add/Import

+Locate the image that you want to import, and then click Open. The image is added to the end of the list of available images. + +Imported images are saved in your user profile and can be used in other documents. + +

Options

+ +

Style

+ + + Tiled: Fill the area with the image as tiles. + + + Stretched: Stretch the image to fit the object area. + + + Custom position/size: Set a custom size and position of the image in the object area. + + + + + +

Size

+Size of the tiles and the custom size. + + + Width: Set the width of the tile or custom size. + + + Height: Set the height of the tile or custom size. + + + Scale: Mark to turn the height and width settings relative to original size. + + + +

Position

+Select the anchoring position of the image inside the object area. + + +

Tiling Position

+ + + X-Offset: Set the horizontal image offset value with respect to the anchoring position. + + + Y-Offset: Set the vertical image offset value with respect to the anchoring position. + + + + +

Tiling Offset

+Select the tiles offset in rows or columns. Use the spin button to specify the offset value. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da8d71c12 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + +Shadow +/text/shared/01/05210600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+areas; shadows +shadows; areas + + + +

Shadow

+Add a shadow to the selected drawing object, and define the properties of the shadow. +
+
+ +
+

Properties

+Set the properties of the shadow that you want to apply. + +

Use shadow

+Adds a shadow to the selected drawing object. + +

Position

+Click where you want to cast the shadow. + +

Distance

+Enter the distance that you want the shadow to be offset from the selected object. + +

Color

+Select a color for the shadow. + +

Transparency

+Enter a percentage from 0% (opaque) to 100% (transparent) to specify the transparency of the shadow. + + + +
+

Shadow

+Adds a shadow to the selected object. If the object already has a shadow, the shadow is removed. If you click this icon when no object is selected, the shadow is added to the next object that you draw. + + + + +Icon Add Shadow + + +Shadow + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..34f1007a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Transparency +/text/shared/01/05210700.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+transparency;areas +areas; transparency + + + +

Transparency

+Set the transparency options for the fill that you apply to the selected object. +
+
+ + +
+

Transparency mode

+Specify the type of transparency that you want to apply. + +

No transparency

+Turns off color transparency. This is the default setting. + +

Transparency

+Turns on color transparency. Select this option, and then enter a number in the box, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. + +

Transparency spin button

+Adjusts the transparency of the current fill color. Enter a number between 0% (opaque) and 100% (transparent). + +

Gradient

+Applies a transparency gradient to the current fill color. Select this option, and then set the gradient properties. + +

Type

+Select the type of transparency gradient that you want to apply. + +

Center X

+Enter the horizontal offset for the gradient. + +

Center Y

+Enter the vertical offset for the gradient. + +

Angle

+Enter a rotation angle for the gradient. + +

Border

+Enter the amount by which you want to adjust the transparent area of the gradient. The default value is 0%. + +

Start value

+Enter a transparency value for the beginning point of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. + +

End value

+Enter a transparency value for the endpoint of the gradient, where 0% is fully opaque and 100% is fully transparent. +

Preview

+Use the preview to view your changes before you apply the transparency effect to the color fill of the selected object. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bfdc50bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Pattern + /text/shared/01/05210800.xhp + + + +
+ +pattern;area +pattern;background +background;pattern +background;area + + + +

Pattern

+Fills the object with a simple two color pattern selected on this page. +
+

Pattern

+Lists the available patterns. You can also modify or create your own pattern. + +To rename a pattern, select the pattern, right-click and choose Rename. To delete a pattern, select the pattern, right-click and choose Delete. +

Add

+Adds a custom pattern to the current list. Specify the properties of your pattern, and then click this button. + + +

Modify

+Applies the current pattern properties to the selected pattern. If you want, you can save the pattern under a different name. + +

Options

+Draw or modify a pattern. + + +

Pattern Editor

+ +Draw the pattern in the 8 x 8 pixel board. Click on a pattern pixel to activate it, click again to deactivate it. + + +

Foreground Color

+Set the color of the activated pattern pixels. + + +

Background Color

+Set the color of the deactivated pattern pixels. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32d64678b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Text (Formatting) + /text/shared/01/05220000.xhp + + + +
+text; text/draw objects + draw objects; text in + frames; text fitting to frames + + + + +

Text

+ Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. +
+
+ +
+ The text is positioned relative to the edges of the drawing or text object. +

Drawing Object Text

+ +

Fit width to text

+ Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. + +

Fit height to text

+ Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. + +

Fit to frame

+ Resizes the text to fit the entire area of the drawing or text object. This control is available only when the other "fit" controls are not selected. + +

Adjust to contour

+ Adapts the text flow so that it matches the contours of the selected drawing object. +

Custom Shape Text

+ +

Word wrap text in shape

+ Wraps the text that you add after double-clicking a custom shape to fit inside the shape. + +

Resize shape to fit text

+ Resizes a custom shape to fit the text that you enter after double-clicking the shape. +

Spacing to borders

+ Specify the amount of space to leave between the edges of the drawing or text object and the borders of the text. + +

Left

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the left edge of the drawing or text object and the left border of the text. + +

Right

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the right edge of the drawing or text object and the right border of the text. + +

Top

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the top edge of the drawing or text object and the upper border of the text. + +

Bottom

+ Enter the amount of space to leave between the bottom edge of the drawing or text object and the lower border of the text. +

Text anchor

+ Set the anchor type and the anchor position. + +

Graphic field

+ Click where you want to place the anchor for the text. + +

Full width

+ Anchors the text to the full width of the drawing object or text object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99596483d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Position and Size +/text/shared/01/05230000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Position and Size +Resizes, moves, rotates, or slants the selected object. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8085a1218 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ + + + + + + + Position and Size (Text Box and Shape) + /text/shared/01/05230100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+ + positioning;draw objects and controls + draw objects;positioning and resizing + controls; positions and sizes + sizes;draw objects + anchors;types/positions for draw objects + draw objects; anchoring + + + + + + +

Position and Size

+ Resizes or moves the selected object. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +

Position

+Specify the location of the selected object on the page. + + + + + +Coordinate axes start at column A - row 1. +X-coordinates are negative in a "right-to-left" table. + + DRAW/IMPRESS +Coordinates are relative to the origin. Left/top corner of the page content area is the initial default. + + + + + + +

Position X

+Enter the horizontal coordinate where the selected base point should be placed. + +

Position Y

+Enter the vertical coordinate where the selected base point should be placed. + +

Base point

+The selected base point will be moved to the specified Position Y and Position X. +The base point always returns to the left/top corner on reopening the dialog. + + +

Size

+ + +Specify the size of the selected object. + + +Resize the selected object to the chosen width and height relative to the selected base point. + + + + +

Width

+Enter a width for the selected object. + + +

Height

+Enter a height for the selected object. + + +

Keep ratio

+Maintains the width and height ratio when changing the width or height setting in the dialog box. + + + +Only for shapes. + + + + + + + + + + +

To frame

+Anchors the selection to the surrounding frame. + + + +

Base point

+Click a base point in the grid, and then enter the new size dimensions for the selected object in the Width and Height boxes. +The selected base point remains fixed in the grid. The object is resized relative to that point. + + + +

Protect

+ + +

Position

+Prevents changes to the position and size of the selected object. + + +

Size

+Prevents you from resizing the object. + + + + + + + + + + + + + 2022-05-01: Following two options are not in Image (Type tab for Writer), so not part of sections embedded here. + + + Below page text area: the bottom edge of the page text area to the bottom edge of the page. + + + Above page text area: the top edge of the page to the top of the page text area. + + + + + + +

Adapt

+Specifies, if the size of a drawing object should be adjusted to fit the size of entered text. + +

Fit width to text

+Expands the width of the object to the width of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. + +

Fit height to text

+Expands the height of the object to the height of the text, if the object is smaller than the text. + + + + + Adapt is only available for Text Boxes. To adapt Shapes to text, use Format - Object - Text. + + + Adapt is only available for Text Boxes. To adapt Shapes to text, use Format - Text. + + +
+ + +Positioning Objects + + + +Rotating Objects + + +Rotation +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f3720ac1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Rotation +/text/shared/01/05230300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Rotation

+Rotates the selected object. +
+
+ +
+

Pivot Point

+The selected object is rotated around a pivot point that you specify. The default pivot point is at the center of the object. +If you set a pivot point too far outside of the object boundaries, the object could be rotated off of the page. + + +

Position X

+Enter the horizontal distance from the left edge of the page to the pivot point. + +

Position Y

+Enter the vertical distance from the top edge of the page to the pivot point. + +

Default settings

+Click where you want to place the pivot point. +

Rotation Angle

+Specify the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object, or click in the rotation grid. + +

Angle

+Enter the number of degrees that you want to rotate the selected object. + +

Default settings

+Click to specify the rotation angle in multiples of 45 degrees. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7868ccb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + +Slant & Corner Radius +/text/shared/01/05230400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+slanting draw objects +draw objects; slanting +areas; slanting +shapes; control points +draw objects; control points +mw made "slanting;..." a one level entry + + +

Slant & Corner Radius

+Slants the selected object, or rounds the corners of a rectangular object. +
+
+ +
+ +

Corner Radius

+You can only round the corners of a rectangular object. + +

Radius

+Enter the radius of the circle that you want to use to round the corners. +

Slant

+Slants the selected object along an axis that you specify. + +

Angle

+Enter the angle of the slant axis.. The slant angle relates to how much an object inclines or slants from its normal vertical position. +

Control points 1 and 2

+Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. The control points refers to the X and Y coordinates of the position of these handles. When the object has no handle, the values in these boxes are zero. When the shape has one control point, the coordinates of the other control point are zero. +Enter a value to set the X and Y coordinates of the control points of the object. + + Control points in a shape + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..78061b664 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Callout +/text/shared/01/05230500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+legends; draw objects +draw objects; legends +labels;for draw objects +labels, see also names/callouts +captions, see also labels/callouts +names, see also labels/callouts +mw made "labeling..." a two level entry and added 3 "see also" references +Callout +Specify the properties of the selected callout. +
+
+ +
+ + +These callouts are a legacy of the first versions of %PRODUCTNAME. You must customize a toolbar or menu to insert these callouts. The newer custom shape callouts offer more features, for example a Callouts toolbar +Icon + where you can select the shape. + +Callout Styles +Click the Callout style that you want to apply to the selected callout. + +Spacing +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the end of the callout line, and the callout box. + + + +Extension +Select where you want to extend the callout line from, in relation to the callout box. + +Length +Enter the length of the callout line segment that extends from the callout box to the inflection point of the line. +The Length box is only available if you select the Angled connector line callout style, and leave the Optimal checkbox cleared. + +Optimal +Click here to display a single-angled line in an optimal way. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eda40485f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Flip +/text/shared/01/05240000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+draw objects; flipping +flipping draw objects + + +Flip +Flips the selected object horizontally, or vertically. +
+
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..526544824 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Vertically +/text/shared/01/05240100.xhp + + + +
+ + +Vertically +Flips the selected object(s) vertically from top to bottom. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79070464e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Horizontally +/text/shared/01/05240200.xhp + + + +
+ + +Horizontally +Flips the selected object(s) horizontally from left to right. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f380e709 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Arrange +/text/shared/01/05250000.xhp + + + +
+objects; arranging within stacks +arranging; objects +borders; arranging +pictures; arranging within stacks +draw objects; arranging within stacks +controls; arranging within stacks +OLE objects; arranging within stacks +charts; arranging within stacks +layer arrangement +levels; depth stagger +depth stagger +mw made "layers;..." a one level entry + + + +Arrange +Changes the stacking order of the selected object(s). +
+
+ +
+Layer for text and graphics +Each object that you place in your document is successively stacked on the preceding object. Use the arrange commands to change the stacking order of objects in your document. You cannot change the stacking order of text. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6a4163d9f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bring to Front +/text/shared/01/05250100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Bring to Front + Moves the selected object to the top of the stacking order, so that it is in front of other objects. +
+
+ +
+
+ Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3cee57d77 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Bring Forward +/text/shared/01/05250200.xhp + + + +
+ + +Bring Forward +Moves the selected object up one level, so that it is closer to top of the stacking order. +
+
+ +
+
+Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd9028183 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Send Backward +/text/shared/01/05250300.xhp + + + +
+ + +Send Backward +Moves the selected object down one level, so that it is closer to the bottom of the stacking order. +
+
+ +
+
+Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8af4f5e36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Send to Back +/text/shared/01/05250400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ +Send to Back + Moves the selected object to the bottom of the stacking order, so that it is behind the other objects. +
+
+ +
+
+ Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0b4a5bcc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +To Foreground +/text/shared/01/05250500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +To Foreground + +Moves the selected object in front of text. +
+
+ +
+
+Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bebbd2dc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +To Background +/text/shared/01/05250600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +To Background + +Moves the selected object behind text. +
+
+ +
+
+ +Layer +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18b1377cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + +Anchor +/text/shared/01/05260000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Anchor

+Shows anchoring options for the selected object. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +If the selected object is in a frame, you can also anchor the object to the frame. +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed03e717d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +To Page +/text/shared/01/05260100.xhp + + + +
+ +

To Page

+Anchors the selected object so that it always remains on the current page. +
+
+ +
+Objects with this anchor can be positioned in relation to the entire page or in relation to the page’s text area. +The position of the anchored object on the current page does not change as content and pages are added or removed from the document. + The current page remains in the document, with its current position in the sequence of pages, as long as the object is anchored to that page. +The anchor icon is displayed at the top left corner of the page. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef2b1429b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +To Paragraph +/text/shared/01/05260200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

To Paragraph

+ Anchors the selected object to the current paragraph. +
+
+ +
+ Objects with this anchor can be positioned in relation to the page or its text area, as well as the paragraph or its text area. + The anchor icon is displayed at the left page margin at the beginning of the paragraph. +When a paragraph is used for positioning and the paragraph extends over more than one page or column, then positioning options that refer to a paragraph area or paragraph text area are applied only to the portion of the paragraph in the page or column where the anchor is located. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca836d1ff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + To Character + /text/shared/01/05260300.xhp + + + + + +
+ +

To Character

+Anchors the selected object to a character. Use the mouse to drag the anchor to the desired character. +
+
+ +
+The character immediately before the anchor position is used for positioning in relation to the Character region and the Line of text reference line. + +To align an image, frame, or OLE object relative to the anchored character, right-click the object, and choose Properties. Click the Position and Size tab, and in the Position area, select Character in the to boxes. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96fa1584d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +To Cell +/text/shared/01/05260400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

To Cell

+ Anchors the selected item to a cell. The anchor icon is displayed in the upper left corner of the cell. +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69dd84054 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +To Frame +/text/shared/01/05260500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

To Frame

+Anchors the selected object to a surrounding frame. +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..027eadb2c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +As Character +/text/shared/01/05260600.xhp + + + +
+ + +

As Character

+Anchors the selected object as a character in the current text. The height of the current line of text is extended, if the object is above (and/or below) the border for the highest character or object in the current line of text. +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7555ae02f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Points +/text/shared/01/05270000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Edit Points +Lets you change the shape of the selected drawing object. +
+
+ +
+To edit the shape of a selected drawing object, click the Points icon on the Drawing Bar, and then drag one of the points on the object. +
+ +Edit Points Bar +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2bbae57ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,335 @@ + + + + + +Fontwork +/text/shared/01/05280000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + +

Fontwork Dialog (for putting text along a curve)

+Simple tool for putting text along a curve without any fancy effects.UFI: see "Fontwork_ui" spec doc. +This Fontwork dialog is meant for making text follow a curve. Draw a curve, double-click it and type text into it. With the curve selected, you can now activate the Fontwork command. Access the dialog by choosing Format - Text Box and Shape - FontworkFirst call Tools - Customize to add a menu command or a toolbar button to open the dialog. The Fontwork command is found in the Format category of the Customize dialog. +
+

Alignment icons

+You can make text follow any shape. Most of the custom shapes available in the Drawing toolbar need to be converted to a different type before you can use them with Fontwork. In Impress or Draw, right-click the shape and select Convert - To Curve/Polygon/Contour. If you wish, you can now copy and paste the converted shape into Writer for use with Fontwork. Shapes in the Legacy Circles and Ovals and Legacy Rectangles toolbars do not need to be converted. The Arc included in the basic shapes is also a legacy shape. + +Removes baseline formatting. + + + + +Icon + + + +Off + + +
+ + +Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Rotate + + +
+ + +Uses the top or the bottom edge of the selected object as the text baseline and preserves the original vertical alignment of the individual characters. + + + + +Icon + + + +Upright + + +
+ + +Horizontally slants the characters in the text object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Slant Horizontal + + +
+ + +Vertically slants the characters in the text object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Slant Vertical + + +
+ + +Reverses the text flow direction, and flips the text horizontally or vertically. To use this command, you must first apply a different baseline to the text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Orientation + + +
+ + +Aligns the text to the left end of the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Align Left + + +
+ + +Centers the text on the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Center + + +
+ + +Aligns the text to the right end of the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +Align Right + + +
+ + +Resizes the text to fit the length of the text baseline. + + + + +Icon + + + +AutoSize Text + + +
+ + +Enter the amount of space that you want to leave between the text baseline and the base of the individual characters. + + + + +Icon + + + +Distance + + +
+ + +Enter the amount of space to leave between the beginning of the text baseline, and the beginning of the text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Indent + + +
+ + +Shows or hides the text baseline, or the edges of the selected object. + + + + +Icon + + + +Contour + + +
+ + +Shows or hides the borders of the individual characters in the text. + + + + +Icon + + + +Text Contour + + +
+ + +Removes the shadow effects that you applied to the text. + + + + +Icon + + + +No Shadow + + +
+ + +Adds a shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes. + + + + +Icon + + + +Vertical + + +
+ + +Adds a slant shadow to the text in the selected object. Click this button, and then enter the dimensions of the shadow in the Distance X and the Distance Y boxes. + + + + +Icon + + + +Slant + + +
+ + +

Horizontal Distance

+Enter the horizontal distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. + + + + +Icon + + + +X Distance + + +
+ + +

Vertical Distance

+Enter the vertical distance between the text characters and the edge of the shadow. + + + + +Icon + + + +Y Distance + + +
+ + +

Shadow Color

+Select a color for the text shadow. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6500cf74a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group +/text/shared/01/05290000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Group +Groups keep together selected objects, so that they can be moved or formatted as a single object. +
+
+ +
+Working with groups +To edit the individual objects of a group, select the group, right-click, and then choose Enter Group + +Group - Enter Group +When you are editing a group, the objects that are not part of the group are faded. +Use Tab and Shift+Tab to move forwards and backwards through the objects in a group. +To exit a group, right-click, and then choose Exit Group + +Group - Exit Group +Group + +Ungroup + +Enter Group + +Exit Group + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f6c13b66 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group +/text/shared/01/05290100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Group + Groups the selected objects, so that they can be moved as a single object. +
+ +
+ The properties of individual objects are maintained even after you group the objects. You can nest groups, that is, you can have a group within a group. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa760d4b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Ungroup +/text/shared/01/05290200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Ungroup + Breaks apart the selected group into individual objects. +
+ +
+ To break apart the nested groups within a group, you must repeat this command on each subgroup. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c819247d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Group +/text/shared/01/05290300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Enter Group + Opens the selected group, so that you can edit the individual objects. If the selected group contains nested group, you can repeat this command on the subgroups. This command does not permanently ungroup the objects. +
+ +
+ To select an individual object in a group, hold down CommandCtrl, and then click the object. +
+ Groups + Exit Group +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cc00af87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Exit Group +/text/shared/01/05290400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +Exit Group + Exits the group, so that you can no longer edit the individual objects in the group. If you are in a nested group, only the nested group is closed. +
+ +
+
+ Groups + Enter Group +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ade7f9e73 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Text Animation +/text/shared/01/05320000.xhp + + + +
+ + +Text Animation +Adds an animation effect to the text in the selected drawing object. +
+
+ +
+Text animation effects +Select the effect that you want to apply, and then set the properties of the effect. +Effects +Select the animation effect that you want to apply to the text in the selected drawing object. To remove an animation effect, select No Effect. +To the Left +Scrolls text from right to left. + + + + +Icon + + + +Left arrow + + +
+To the Right +Scrolls text from left to right. + + + + +Icon + + + +Right arrow + + +
+To the Top +Scrolls text from bottom to top. + + + + +Icon + + + +Up arrow + + +
+To the Bottom +Scrolls text from top to bottom. + + + + +Icon + + + +Down arrow + + +
+Properties +Start Inside +Text is visible and inside the drawing object when the effect is applied. +Text visible when exitingi60202 +Text remains visible after the effect is applied. +Animation effects +Set the looping options for the animation effect. +Continuous +Plays the animation effect continuously. To specify the number of times to play the effect, clear this checkbox, and enter a number in the Continuous box. +Continuous box +Enter the number of times that you want the animation effect to repeat. +Increment +Specify the increment value for scrolling the text. +Pixels +Measures increment value in pixels. +Increment box +Enter the number of increments by which to scroll the text. +Delay +Specify the amount time to wait before repeating the effect. +Automatic +$[officename] automatically determines the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. To manually assign the delay period, clear this checkbox, and then enter a value in the Automatic box. +Automatic box +Enter the amount of time to wait before repeating the effect. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c83de7eb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + +Text Columns +/text/shared/01/05320001.xhp + + + +
+ + +Text Columns +Adds columns to the text in the selected drawing object. +
+Number of columns +Specifies how many columns to use to lay out the drawing object's text. +Spacing +Specifies the amount of space between the columns. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92f010043 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + +Theme +/text/shared/01/05320002.xhp + + + +
+ + +Theme +Adds colors to the selected master page. +
+General +Name +Specifies a name for this master page theme. +Color Set +Name +Specifies a name for this set of colors. +Background - Dark 1 +Specifies the first dark color to be used as dark background, typically black. +Text - Light 1 +Specifies the first light color to be used as light text, typically white. +Background - Dark 2 +Specifies the second dark color to be used as dark background. This is typically dark, but not exactly black. +Text - Light 2 +Specifies the second light color to be used as light text. This is typically light, but not exactly white. +Accent 1 +First custom color. This is typically dark enough that light text is readable when the custom color is used as a background color. +Accent 2 +Second custom color. +Accent 3 +Third custom color. +Accent 4 +Fourth custom color. +Accent 5 +Fifth custom color. +Accent 6 +Sixth custom color. +Hyperlink +Color used for non-followed hyperlinks. +Followed Hyperlink +Color used for followed hyperlinks. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e3cb966d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + Row Height + /text/shared/01/05340100.xhp + + + + + + + +Row Height + Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows. + + You can also change the height of a row by dragging the divider below the row header. To fit the row height to the cell contents, double-click the divider. + +
+ +
+ + +Height + Enter the row height that you want to use. + + +Default value + Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6f6d90000 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Column width +/text/shared/01/05340200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + +Column width + Changes the width of the current column, or the selected columns. +
+ +
+ You can also change the width of a column by dragging the divider beside the column header. To fit the column width to the cell contents, double-click the divider. + Width + Enter the column width that you want to use. + Default value Automatic + Automatically adjusts the column width based on the current font. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9f1c6bcb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + + +Alignment +/text/shared/01/05340300.xhp + + + +
+aligning; cells +cells; aligning + + + +Alignment +Sets the alignment options for the contents of the current cell, or the selected cells. +
+
+ +
+ +Horizontal +Select the horizontal alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. +Default +Aligns numbers to the right, and text to the left. +If the Default option is selected, numbers will be aligned to the right and text will be left-justified.UFI: removed two help idsUFI: reason: Help IDs .uno:AlignLeft, AlignRight, AlignBlock, AlignHorizontalCenter are the same for Objects in Draw/Impress and for text alignment in Calc. Unfortunately both sets of files are located in shared folder... Must create a special file in scalc or add those as hidden texts to a file in scalc. +Left +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left. + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Right +Aligns the contents of the cell to the right. + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Center +Horizontally centers the contents of the cell. + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Justified +Aligns the contents of the cell to the left and to the right cell borders. + + + +Filled +Repeats the cell contents (number and text) until the visible area of the cell is filled. This feature does not work on text that contains line breaks. +Distributed +Aligns contents evenly across the whole cell. Unlike Justified, it justifies the very last line of text, too. + +Indent +Indents from the left edge of the cell by the amount that you enter. + +Vertical +Select the vertical alignment option that you want to apply to the cell contents. +Default +Aligns the cell contents to the bottom of the cell.UFI: removed two help ids +Top +Aligns the contents of the cell to the upper edge of the cell. + + + + + + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Bottom +Aligns the contents of the cell to the lower edge of the cell. + + +UFI: removed two help ids +Middle +Vertically centers the contents of the cell. + + + +Justified +Aligns the contents of the cell to the top and to the bottom cell borders. +Distributed +Same as Justified, unless the text orientation is vertical. Then it behaves similarly, than horizontal Distributed setting, i.e. the very last line is justified, too. +Text orientation +Sets the text orientation of the cell contents. + + + + + +Click in the dial to set the text orientation. + +Degrees +Enter the rotation angle from 0 to 360 for the text in the selected cell(s). + +Reference edge +Specify the cell edge from which to write the rotated text. + + + +Text Extension From Lower Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the bottom cell edge outwards. + + + +Text Extension From Upper Cell Border: Writes the rotated text from the top cell edge outwards. + + + +Text Extension Inside Cells: Writes the rotated text only within the cell. + + + +Vertically stacked +Aligns text vertically.UFI: see spec "Shrink to fit" + + +Asian layout mode +This checkbox is only available if Asian language support is enabled and the text direction is set to vertical. Aligns Asian characters one below the other in the selected cell(s). If the cell contains more than one line of text, the lines are converted to text columns that are arranged from right to left. Western characters in the converted text are rotated 90 degrees to the right. Asian characters are not rotated. +Properties +Determine the text flow in a cell. + +Wrap text automatically +Wraps text onto another line at the cell border. The number of lines depends on the width of the cell. To enter a manual line break, press Command +Ctrl+Enter in the cell.conditional switches inside AVIS do not work + + +Hyphenation active +Enables word hyphenation for text wrapping to the next line. + +Shrink to fit cell size +Reduces the apparent size of the font so that the contents of the cell fit into the current cell width. You cannot apply this command to a cell that contains line breaks. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..89a9afd30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,205 @@ + + + + + +Data Sources +/text/shared/01/05340400.xhp + + + +
+data source browser +tables in databases;browsing and editing +databases; editing tables +editing; database tables and queries +queries; editing in data source view +mw deleted "database tables," and changed "tables in databases;" +

Data Sources

+This section contains information on browsing and editing database tables. +
+ +You cannot use the data source browser on a database table that is open in Design view. +

Data source browser

+The commands for the data source browser are found on the Table Data bar and in context menus. +

Selecting records

+To select a record in a database table, click the row header, or click a row header, and then use the Up or Down arrow keys. +Select database records. Drag-and-drop rows or cells to the document to insert contents. Drag-and-drop column headers to insert fields. +The following table describes how to select individual elements in the data source browser: + + + +Selection + + +Action + + + + +Record + + +Click the row header + + + + +Several records or removing a selection + + +Hold down CommandCtrl and click the row header + + + + +Column + + +Click the column header + + + + +Data field + + +Click in the data field + + + + +Entire table + + +Click the row header of the column headings + + +
+

Table Data toolbar (editing table data)

+ + + + +Icon + + + +Allows you to edit, add, or delete records from the database table.removed 3 ancient paras + + +
+

Cutting, copying and pasting data

+You can cut, copy, and paste records in Data Source view. The Data Source browser also supports the dragging and dropping of records, or text and numbers from other $[officename] files. +You cannot drag and drop to Yes/No, binary, image, or counting table fields. +Drag and drop only works in Edit mode. + +

Navigating in the Data Source Browser

+Use the Form Navigation bar at the bottom of the Data Source view to navigate between different records. +

First record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Go to the first record in the table. + + +
+

Previous record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Go to the previous record in the table. + + +
+

Record number

+ +Type the number of the record that you want to display, and then press Enter. +

Next record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Go to the next record in the table. + + +
+

Last record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Go to the last record in the table. + + +
+

New record

+ + + + +Icon + + + + +Inserts a new record into the current table. To create a record, click the asterisk (*) button at the bottom of the table view. An empty row is added at the end of the table. + + +
+

Number of records

+ +Displays the number of records. For example, "Record 7 of 9(2)" indicates that two records (2) are selected in a table containing 9 records, and that the cursor is in record number 7. +

Organizing tables

+To access the commands for formatting the table, right-click a column header, or a row header. +

Table Format

+ +

Row Height

+ + +

Column Format

+ +

Column Width

+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e30751e93 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table format +/text/shared/01/05340402.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + Table format + Formats the selected row(s). +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7890d5597 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete Rows +/text/shared/01/05340404.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Delete Rows +Deletes the selected row(s). +
+
+ +
+This command can be activated only when you select the Edit icon on the Table Data bar or Standard bar. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..187be12c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Column format +/text/shared/01/05340405.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

Column format

+ Formats the selected column(s). +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e80ee7691 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Hide Columns +/text/shared/01/05340500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Hide Columns +Hides the selected column(s). To display hidden columns, right-click any column header, and then choose Show Columns. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..721316944 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Show Columns +/text/shared/01/05340600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Show Columns +Displays hidden columns. Choose the column that you want to display from the list, or click All to display all of the hidden columns. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3e2599f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + +3D Effects +/text/shared/01/05350000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + 3D Effects + + +
+ + + +

3D Effects

+Specifies the properties of 3D object(s) in the current document or converts a 2D object to 3D. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + +
+ +

Apply

+Click here to apply the properties shown in the dialog to the selected object. + + + + + Apply icon + + + + Apply + + +
+ +

Update

+Click here to view in the dialog all the properties of the selected object. + + + + + Update Icon + + + + Update + + +
+ + +

Convert to 3-D

+Use this icon to convert a selected 2D object to a 3D object. You can also select several 2D objects and convert them to one single 3D object. To convert a group of 2D objects to 3D, you must first ungroup the selected objects. + + + + + Icon Convert to 3-D + + + + Convert to 3-D + + +
+ +

Convert to Rotation Object

+Click here to convert a selected 2D object to a 3D rotation object. You can also select several 2D objects and convert them to one single 3D rotation object. To convert a group of 2D objects to 3D, you must first ungroup the selected objects. + + + + + + Icon Convert to Rotation Object + + + + Convert to Rotation Object + + +
+

Perspective On/Off

+Click here to turn the perspective view on or off. + + + + + Icon Perspective On/Off + + + + Perspective On/Off + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed822cb08 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + +Geometry +/text/shared/01/05350200.xhp + + + +
+

Geometry

+Adjusts the shape of the selected 3D object. You can only modify the shape of a 3D object that was created by converting a 2D object. To convert a 2D object to 3D, select the object, right-click, and then choose Convert - To 3D, or Convert - To 3D Rotation Object. + + + + + Geometry Icon + + + + Geometry + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Geometry

+Define the shape properties for the selected 3D object. +

Rounded edges

+Enter the amount by which you want to round the corners of the selected 3D object. +

Scaled depth

+Enter the amount by which to increase or decrease the area of the front side of the selected 3D object. +

Rotation angle

+Enter the angle in degrees to rotate the selected 3D rotation object. +

Depth

+Enter the extrusion depth for the selected 3D object. This option is not valid for 3D rotation objects. +

Segments

+You can change the number of segments that are used to draw a 3D rotation object. +

Horizontal

+Enter the number of horizontal segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object. +

Vertical

+Enter the number of vertical segments to use in the selected 3D rotation object +

Normals

+Allows you to modify the rendering style of the 3D surface. +

Object-Specific

+Renders the 3D surface according to the shape of the object. For example, a circular shape is rendered with a spherical surface. + + + + +Icon + + + +Object-Specific + + +
+

Flat

+Renders the 3D surface as polygons. + + + + +Icon + + + +Flat + + +
+

Spherical

+Renders a smooth 3D surface. + + + + +Icon + + + +Spherical + + +
+

Invert Normals

+Inverts the light source. + + + + +Icon + + + +Invert Normals + + +
+

Double-sided Illumination

+Lights the object from the outside and the inside. To use an ambient light source, click this button, and then click the Invert Normals button. + + + + +Icon + + + +Double-sided illumination + + +
+

Double-Sided

+Closes the shape of a 3D object that was created by extruding a freeform line (Convert - To 3D). + + + + +Icon + + +Double-Sided + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d83dd1698 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Shading +/text/shared/01/05350300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Shading

+Sets the shading and shadow options for the selected 3D object. + + + + + Icon Shading + + + + Shading + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Shading

+Specify the type of shading to apply to the selected 3D object. + +

Mode

+Select the shading method that you want to use. Flat shading assigns a single color to a single polygon on the surface of the object. Gouraud shading blends colors across the polygons. Phong shading averages the color of each pixel based on the pixels that surround it, and requires the most processing power. + +

Shadow

+Adds or removes a shadow from the selected 3D object. + + + + +Icon + + +3D Shadowing On/Off + + +
+ + +

Surface angle

+Enter an angle from 0 to 90 degrees for casting the shadow. +

Camera

+Set the camera options for the selected 3D object. + +

Distance

+Enter the distance to leave between the camera and the center of the selected object. + +

Focal length

+Enter the focal length of the camera, where a small value corresponds to a "fisheye" lens, and a large value to a telephoto lens. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a158cde61 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + +Illumination +/text/shared/01/05350400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Illumination

+Define the light source for the selected 3D object. + + + + + Icon Illumination + + + + Illumination + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Illumination

+Specify the light source for the object, as well as the color of the light source and of the ambient light. You can define up to eight different light sources. + + + + + + + + +

Light source

+Click twice to turn the light source on, and then select a color for the light from the list. If you want, you can also set the color of the surrounding light, by selecting a color from the Ambient light box. You can also press the Spacebar to turn the light source on or off. + + + + +Icon Light is on + + + +Light is on + + +
+ + + + + +Icon Light is off + + + +Light is off + + +
+ + +

Color Selection

+Select a color for the current light source. + +

Select Color in the color dialog

+ + +

Ambient light

+ +

Color Selection

+Select a color for the ambient light. + +

Select Color Through the Color Dialog

+ + +

Preview

+Displays a preview of the light source changes. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c174db79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,239 @@ + + + + + +Textures +/text/shared/01/05350500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Textures

+Sets the properties of the surface texture for the selected 3D object. This feature is only available after you apply a surface texture to the selected object. To quickly apply a surface texture, open the Gallery, hold down Shift+CommandCtrl, and then drag an image onto the selected 3D object. + + + + + Icon Textures + + + + Textures + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Textures

+Sets the texture properties. +

Type

+Set the color properties of the texture. + +

Black & White

+Converts the texture to black and white. + + + + +Icon Black & White + + + +Black & White + + +
+ + +

Color

+Converts the texture to color. + + + + +Icon Color + + + +Color + + +
+ +

Mode

+Show or hide shading. + +

Only Texture

+Applies the texture without shading. + + + + +Icon Only Texture + + + +Only Texture + + +
+ + +

Texture and Shading

+Applies the texture with shading. To define the shading options for the texture, click the Shading button in this dialog. + + + + +Icon Texture and Shading + + + +Texture and Shading + + +
+ +

Projection X

+Set the options for displaying the texture. + +

Object-specific

+Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. + + + + +Icon Object-specific + + + +Object-specific + + +
+ + +

Parallel

+Applies the texture parallel to the horizontal axis. + + + + +Icon + + + +Parallel + + +
+ + +

Circular

+Wraps the horizontal axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. + + + + +Icon Circular + + + +Circular + + +
+ +

Projection Y

+Click the respective buttons to define the texture for the object Y axis. + +

Object-specific

+Automatically adjusts the texture based on the shape and size of the object. + + + + +Icon Object-Specific + + + +Object-specific + + +
+ + +

Parallel

+Applies the texture parallel to the vertical axis. + + + + +Icon Parallel + + + +Parallel + + +
+ + +

Circular

+Wraps the vertical axis of the texture pattern around a sphere. + + + + +Icon Circular + + + +Circular + + +
+ +

Filter

+Filters out some of the 'noise' that can occur when you apply a texture to a 3D object. + +

Filtering On/Off

+Blurs the texture slightly to remove unwanted speckles. + + + + +Icon Filtering On/Off + + + +Filtering On/Off + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f4c96fc9b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + +Material +/text/shared/01/05350600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Material

+Changes the coloring of the selected 3D object. + + + + + Icon Material + + + + Material + + +
+
+
+ +
+

Material

+Assigns a predefined color scheme or lets you create your own color scheme. + +

Favorites

+Select a predefined color scheme, or select User-defined to define a custom color scheme. + +

Object color

+Select the color that you want to apply to the object. + +

Select Color Through the Color Dialog

+ + + +

Illumination color

+Select the color to illuminate the object. + +

Select Color Through the Color Dialog

+ + +

Specular

+Sets the light reflection properties for the selected object. + +

Color

+Select the color that you want the object to reflect. + +

Select Color Through the Color Dialog

+ + + +

Intensity

+Enter the intensity of the specular effect. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af9f8d314 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + +Distribute +/text/shared/01/05360000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +drawing objects;distribute +drawing objects;distribute evenly +distribute objects in drawings +distribute objects vertically +distribute objects;vertically evenly +distribute objects horizontally +distribute objects;horizontally evenly + + +
+

Distribute Selection

+ +Distributes three or more selected objects evenly along the horizontal axis or the vertical axis. You can also evenly distribute the spacing between objects. +
+
+ +
+Objects are distributed with respect to the outermost objects in the selection. + + Original object distribution + +

Horizontally

+Specify the horizontal distribution for the selected objects. + +

Horizontally Left

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the left edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally left + + +

Horizontally Center

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the horizontal centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally center + + +

Horizontally Spacing

+Distributes the selected objects horizontally, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally spaced evenly + + +

Horizontally Right

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the right edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally right + +

Vertically

+Specify the vertical distribution for the selected objects. + +

Vertically Top

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the top edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Distribute objects vertically top + + +

Vertically Center

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the vertical centers of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Distribute objects vertically center + + +

Vertically Spacing

+Distributes the selected objects vertically, so that the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Object distribution horizontally spaced evenly + + +

Vertically Bottom

+Distributes the selected objects, so that the bottom edges of the objects are evenly spaced from one another. + + Distribute objects vertically bottom + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..15aae70bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + +Text Attributes +/text/shared/01/05990000.xhp + + + +
UFI: removed 2 help ids +

Text Attributes

+Sets the layout and anchoring properties for text in the selected drawing or text object. + +
+
+ +
+This command is only available for drawing objects that can contain text, for example for rectangles, but not for lines. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62d5e2b84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Spelling + /text/shared/01/06010000.xhp + + + +
+dictionaries; spellcheck + spellcheck; dialog + dictionaries; spelling + spelling; dialog + languages; spellcheck + languages; spelling + + + + + +

Spelling

+ Checks the document or the current selection for spelling errors. If a grammar checking extension is installed, the dialog also checks for grammar errors. + +
+
+ +
+ The spellcheck starts at the current cursor position and advances to the end of the document or selection. You can then choose to continue the spellcheck from the beginning of the document. + Spelling looks for misspelled words and gives you the option of adding an unknown word to a user dictionary. When the first misspelled word is found, the Spelling dialog opens. + Spelling errors are underlined in red, grammar errors in blue. + + +

Text Language

+ Specifies the language to use to check the spelling. + + +

Not in Dictionary

+ Displays the sentence with the misspelled word highlighted. Edit the word or the sentence, or click one of the suggestions in the text box below. + +

Ignore Once

+ Skips the unknown word and continues with the spellcheck. + This label of this button changes to Resume if you leave the Spelling dialog open when you return to your document. To continue the spellcheck from the current position of the cursor, click Resume. + +

Ignore All

+ Skips all occurrences of the unknown word until the end of the current %PRODUCTNAME session and continues with the spellcheck. + +While performing a grammar check, click Ignore Rule to ignore the rule that is currently flagged as a grammar error. +

Ignore Rule

+ Appears when checking grammar. Click to ignore the suggested grammatical change. + +

Add to Dictionary

+ Adds the unknown word to a user-defined dictionary. + + To add a new dictionary, press Options, then press New. After %PRODUCTNAME is restarted, multiple user-defined dictionaries are shown when Add to Dictionary is pressed. Select which dictionary should receive the added word. +

Suggestions

+ Lists suggested words to replace the misspelled word. Select the word that you want to use, and then click Correct or Correct All. + +

Correct

+ Replaces the unknown word with the current suggestion. If you changed more than just the misspelled word, the entire sentence is replaced. + +

Correct All

+ Replaces all occurrences of the unknown word with the current suggestion. + +

Add to AutoCorrect

+ Adds the current combination of the incorrect word and the selected replacement suggestion to the AutoCorrect replacement table, but does not make any change in the document. + + +

Check grammar

+ Enable to work first on all spelling errors, then on all grammar errors. + +

Options

+ Opens a dialog, where you can select the user-defined dictionaries, and set the rules for the spellchecking. + +

Undo

+ Click to undo the last change in the current sentence. Click again to undo the previous change in the same sentence. +
+ + Spelling Options + AutoCorrect Commands + Thesaurus +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..352c99108 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Writing aids +/text/shared/01/06010101.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Writing aids + Select the user-defined dictionaries and set the rules for the spellchecking. +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2092271b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Language +/text/shared/01/06010500.xhp + + + +
+ +Language +Opens a submenu where you can choose language specific commands. +
+ +Writer menu commands, i80434 + +For Selection +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the selected text.
Choose None to exclude the selected text from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. + +For Paragraph +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for the current paragraph.
Choose None to exclude the current paragraph from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. + +For all Text +Opens a submenu. Choose a language for all text.
Choose None to exclude all text from spellchecking and hyphenation.
Choose More to open a dialog with more options. + + + + + + + + + +Hyphenation +Opens the Format - Cells - Alignment tab page. + + +Hyphenation +Turns hyphenation on and off. + + +Hyphenation +Turns hyphenation on and off. + + + +More Dictionaries Online +Opens the default browser on the dictionaries extension page. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be6f78a9e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chinese Conversion +/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp + + +UFI: former Chinese Translation dialog, issue 58212 + + + +
+Chinese writing systems +simplified Chinese;conversion to traditional Chinese +traditional Chinese;conversion to simplified Chinese + + + + +Chinese Conversion +Converts the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is converted. You can only use this command if you enable Asian language support in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +
+
+ +
+Conversion Direction +Select the conversion direction. + +Traditional Chinese to simplified Chinese +Converts traditional Chinese text characters to simplified Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted. + +Simplified Chinese to traditional Chinese +Converts simplified Chinese text characters to traditional Chinese text characters. Click OK to convert the selected text. If no text is selected, the whole document is converted. +Common Terms +Common terms are words that have the same meaning in traditional and simplified Chinese but are written with different characters. + +Translate common terms +Converts words with two or more characters that are in the list of common terms. After the list is scanned, the remaining text is converted character by character. + +Edit terms +Opens the Edit Dictionary dialog where you can edit the list of conversion terms. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c55cce97 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Dictionary +/text/shared/01/06010601.xhp + + +UFI: Edit Dictionary of Chinese Translation dialog + + + +common terms;Chinese dictionary +dictionaries;common terms in simplified and traditional chinese + + + +Edit Dictionary +Edit the Chinese conversion terms. +
+ +
+You can use this dialog to edit, to add, or to delete entries from the conversion dictionary. The file path name for the conversion dictionary is user/wordbook/commonterms.ctd. You cannot delete the default entries in this file. + +Traditional Chinese to Simplified Chinese +Converts traditional Chinese to simplified Chinese. + +Simplified Chinese to Traditional Chinese +Converts simplified Chinese to traditional Chinese. + +Reverse Mapping +Automatically adds the reverse mapping direction to the list for each modification that you enter. + +Term +Enter the text that you want to replace with the Mapping term. + +Mapping +Enter the text that you want to replace the Term with. + +Property +Defines the class of the selected term. + +Add +Adds the term to the conversion dictionary. If the term is already in the dictionary, the new term receives precedence. + +Modify +Saves the modified entry to the database file. + +Delete +Removes the selected user-defined entry from the dictionary. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab0549fd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + +Thesaurus +/text/shared/01/06020000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Thesaurus

+Opens a dialog box to replace the current word with a synonym, or a related term. +
+
+ +
+ +Thesaurus support is not available for all languages. + +

Current word

+ Displays the current word, or the related term that you selected by double-clicking a line in the Alternatives list. You can also type text directly in this box to look up your text. + +

Arrow left

+ Recalls the previous contents of the "Current word" text box. + +

Alternatives

+ Click an entry in the Alternatives list to copy the related term to the "Replace with" text box. Double-click an entry to copy the related term to the "Current word" text box and to look up that term. + +

Replace with

+ The word or words in the "Replace with" text box will replace the original word in the document when you click the Replace button. You can also type text directly in this box. + +

Language

+Select a language for the thesaurus. You can install languages with a thesaurus library from the Extensions web page. + + + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dbcd9b8b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + +Color Replacer +/text/shared/01/06030000.xhp + + + +
+ + + +Color Replacer +Opens the Color Replacer dialog, where you can replace colors in bitmap and meta file graphics. +
+You can replace up to four different colors at one time. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + +Icon + + + +Color Replacer + + +
+ + +Select one of the four source color boxes. Move the mouse pointer over the selected image, and then click the color that you want to replace. + +Color Replacer color +Displays the color in the selected image that directly underlies the current mouse pointer position. This features only works if the Color Replacer tool is selected. + +Replace +Replaces the selected source colors in the current image with the colors that you specify in the Replace with boxes. +Colors +Lists the source colors and the replacement colors. + + + + +Source color checkbox +Select this checkbox to replace the current Source color with the color that you specify in the Replace with box. + +Source color +Displays the color in the selected image that you want to replace. To set the source color, click here, click the Color Replacer, and then click a color in the selected image. + + + + +Tolerance +Set the tolerance for replacing a source color in the source image. To replace colors that are similar to the color that you selected, enter a low value. To replace a wider range of colors, enter a higher value. + + + + +Replace with +Lists the available replacement colors. To modify the current list of colors, deselect the image, choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. + +Transparency +Replaces transparent areas in the current image with the color that you select. + +Transparency +Select the color to replace the transparent areas in the current image. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b05d02879 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + AutoCorrect + /text/shared/01/06040000.xhp + + + + + + AutoCorrect function;switching on and off + AutoComplete, see also AutoCorrect/AutoInput + + + AutoCorrect + Sets the options for automatically replacing text as you type. +
+ +
+ To apply an AutoCorrect rule, enter the predefined text in the document and press the Spacebar. + + + To turn off AutoCorrect in %PRODUCTNAME Writer choose Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. Refer to the help page Turning Off AutoCorrect to learn more about deactivating AutoCorrect in %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + To apply AutoCorrect to an entire text document, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + + + + To turn off AutoCorrect in %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to Tools - AutoCorrect Options and uncheck all items in the Options and Localized Options tabs. Refer to the help page Turning Off AutoCorrect to learn more about deactivating AutoCorrect in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ AutoCorrect +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca1b2a2ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ + + + + + + + Options (AutoCorrect) + /text/shared/01/06040100.xhp + + + +
+AutoCorrect function; options + replacement options + words; automatically replacing + abbreviation replacement + capital letters; AutoCorrect function + spaces; ignoring double + numbering; using automatically + paragraphs; numbering automatically + tables in text; creating automatically + titles; formatting automatically + empty paragraph removal + paragraphs; removing blank ones + styles; replacing automatically + user-defined styles; automatically replacing + bullets; replacing + paragraphs; joining + joining; paragraphs +removed two bookmarks "automatic..." and two more entries about quotes and 1/2 replacement + + + + +

Options

+ Select the options for automatically correcting errors as you type, and then click OK. +
+
+ +
+ + +In text documents, you can choose to apply [T] AutoCorrect options while you type. Enable this feature by using Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. +You can also apply [M] AutoCorrect options to a selection or a whole document of existing text by using Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. In general, [M] options are applied only to paragraphs with Default Paragraph Style. + All non-empty paragraphs with "Default Paragraph Style" are converted to "Text Body" paragraph style when Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply is used. see i72339Don't use inline switches for notes, tips and warnings. The icon will still show up. + + +

[M] and [T] options

+

Use replacement table

+ If you type a letter combination that matches a shortcut in the replacement table, the letter combination is replaced with the replacement text. +

Correct TWo INitial CApitals

+ If you type two uppercase letters at the beginning of a "WOrd", the second uppercase letter is automatically replaced with a lowercase letter. + No corrections are made to entries found in an applicable spelling dictionary. +

Capitalize first letter of every sentence.

+ Capitalizes the first letter of every sentence + + +The first letter in a Calc cell will never be capitalized automatically.see i78661 + + + +bold; AutoFormat function +bold; using * when typing +underlining; AutoFormat function +underlining; using _ when typing +italic; AutoFormat function +italic; using / when typing +strikeout; AutoFormat function +strikeout; using - when typing + +

Automatic *bold*, /italic/, -strikeout- and _underline_

+ Automatically applies bold, italic, strikethrough or underline formatting to text enclosed by asterisks (*), slashes (/), hyphens (-), and underscores (_), respectively. These characters disappear after the formatting is applied. + This feature does not work if the formatting characters * / - _ are entered with an Input Method Editor. +

URL Recognition

+ Automatically creates a hyperlink when you type a URL. +UFI: moved "replace 1st" to Localized Options tab page, cws cbosdo01 +

Replace DashesUFI: changed switches, added table, #61325#

UFI: see i73558 for name: not the dashes are replaced but the hyphens (or even better the minus signs) +Replaces one or two hyphens with a long dash (see the following table). + Text will be replaced after you type a trailing white space (space, tab, or return). In the following table, the A and B represent text consisting of letters A to z or digits 0 to 9. N represents digits only. + + + + Text that you type: + + + Result that you get: + + + + + A - B (A, space, minus, space, B) + + + A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B) + + + + + A -- B (A, space, minus, minus, space, B) + + + A – B (A, space, en-dash, space, B) + + + + + A--B (A, minus, minus, B) + + + A—B (A, em-dash, B)
(see note below the table) + + + + + N--N (N, minus, minus, N) + + + N–N (N, en-dash, N) + + + + + A-B (A, minus, B) + + + A-B (unchanged) + + + + + A -B (A, space, minus, B) + + + A -B (unchanged) + + + + + A --B (A, space, minus, minus, B) + + + A –B (A, space, en-dash, B) + + +
+ + If the text has the Hungarian or Finnish language attribute, then two hyphens in the sequence A--B are replaced by an en-dash instead of an em-dash.i71908 +

Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph +

+ Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of a paragraph. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. + +

Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line

+ Removes spaces and tabs at the beginning of each line. To use this option, the Apply Styles option must also be selected. + +

[T] options only

+

Ignore double spaces

+ Replaces two or more consecutive spaces with a single space. +

Correct accidental use of cAPS LOCK key

+ Inverts a capitalized word entered with the Caps Lock key enabled, after a space is entered, and disables the Caps Lock key. For example, entering Libre with Caps Lock enabled appears as lIBRE, which is converted automatically to Libre. +

Bulleted and numbered lists. Bullet symbol:

+ Automatically creates a numbered list when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a number followed by a period, a space, and text. If a line starts with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*), followed by a space, and text, a bulleted list is created when you press Enter. + + To cancel automatic numbering when you press Enter at the end of a line that starts with a numbering symbol, press Enter again. + + + +The automatic numbering option is only applied to paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default", "Text body", or "Text body indent" paragraph style. + + + + +

Apply border

+ Automatically applies a border at the base of the preceding paragraph when you type three or more specific characters, and then press Enter. + + + To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores (_), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. + + + The following table summarizes the line thickness for the different characters: + + + + --- + + + 0.05pt single underline + + + + + ___ + + + 1.0pt single underline + + + + + === + + + 1.0pt double underline + + + + + *** + + + 4.0pt thick-thin double underline + + + + + ~~~ + + + 4.0pt thin-thick double underline + + + + + ### + + + 2.5pt double underline + + +
+ + + To modify attributes of a predefined border, such as color, style, width and shadow, click the paragraph above the line, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders tab. + + + To delete the created line, click the paragraph above the line, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders, delete the bottom border. + + + To remove a line created with Apply Border, place the cursor above the line, press CommandCtrl+M. + + + +

Create table +

+ Creates a table when you press Enter after typing a series of hyphens (-) or tabs separated by plus signs, that is, +------+---+. Plus signs indicate column dividers, while hyphens and tabs indicate the width of a column. + + +-----------------+---------------+------+ + + + +

Apply Styles

+ Automatically apply a Heading 1 to Heading 8 paragraph style to a text that starts with an uppercase letter and does not end with a period. + To get a Heading 1 paragraph style, type the text that you want to use as a heading, then press Enter twice. + For other Heading N styles, press the Tab key N-1 times before typing the text to get the desired level. For example, to get a "Heading 4" paragraph style press the Tab key three times, type something, then press Enter twice. + This feature works only with "Default Paragraph Style", "Text Body" and "Text Body Indent" paragraph styles, and there must be one empty paragraph before the text, if the text is not at the top of a page. + + +

[M] options only

+

Remove blank paragraphs +

+Removes empty paragraphs and paragraphs that contain only spaces or tabs from the current document. This option works for any paragraph style. +

Replace Custom Styles +

+ Replaces custom paragraph styles applied in the current document to "Text Body", "Text Body Indent", "First Line Indent" or "Hanging Indent" paragraph style. + +

Replace bullets with +

+ Converts paragraphs that start with a hyphen (-), a plus sign (+), or an asterisk (*) directly followed by a space or a tab, to bulleted lists. This option only works on paragraphs that are formatted with the "Default Paragraph Style". To change the bullet style that is used, select this option, and then click Edit. + +removed "replace standard quotes..." cws cbosdo01 +

Combine single line paragraphs if length greater than... +

+ Combines consecutive single-line paragraphs into a single paragraph. This option only works on paragraphs that use the "Default" paragraph style. If a paragraph is longer than the specified length value, the paragraph is combined with the next paragraph. To enter a different length value, select the option, and then click Edit. + + +Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. +

Edit +

+ Modifies the selected AutoCorrect option. + + + + +
+ AutoCorrect Commands +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..009be7749 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + +Replace +/text/shared/01/06040200.xhp + + + +
+AutoCorrect function; replacement table +replacement table +replacing; AutoCorrect function +text; replacing with format +frames; AutoCorrect function +pictures; inserting automatically +AutoCorrect function; pictures and frames + + + +

Replace

+Edits the replacement table for automatically correcting or replacing words or abbreviations in your document. +
+To enable the replacement table, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options, click the Options tab, and then select Use replacement table. To use the replacement table while you type, check Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing. + +
+ +
+ + +

Replacement table

+Lists the entries for automatically replacing words, abbreviations or word parts while you type. To add an entry, enter text in the Replace and With boxes, and then click New. To edit an entry, select it, change the text in the With box, and then click Replace. To delete an entry, select it, and then click Delete. +You can use the AutoCorrect feature to apply a specific character format to a word, abbreviation or a word part. Select the formatted text in your document, open this dialog, clear the Text only box, and then enter the text that you want to replace in the Replace box. +You can also include frames, graphics, and OLE objects in an AutoCorrect entry, so long as they are anchored as characters in the text. Select the frame, graphic or OLE object and at least one text character in front of and behind the object. Open this dialog, type a name for this AutoCorrect entry in the Replace box, and then click New. + + +

Replace

+Enter the word, abbreviation or word part that you want to replace while you type. +The wildcard character sequence .* can match anything before or after the replace string. For example: + + + Having the replace pattern i18n.* and the with pattern international, the following corrections are made: + + + + + + Enter + + + Autocorrected Result + + + + + i18ns + + + internationals + + + + + i18nization + + + internationalization + + + + + i18nized + + + internationalized + + +
+ + +The replace pattern ....* with the replacement text … finds and replaces the three dots in ...word with …word. + + +To enter time values using the number pad, use the replace pattern .*...* and : as the replacement text. Now 10..30 is replaced automatically with 10:30. + +

With:

+Enter the replacement text, graphic, frame, or OLE object that you want to replace the text in the Replace box. If you have selected text, a graphic, a frame, or an OLE object in your document, the relevant information is already entered here. + +

Text only

+Saves the entry in the With box without formatting. When the replacement is made, the text uses the same format as the document text. + + +

New

+Adds or replaces an entry in the replacement table. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..154becdcf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Exceptions +/text/shared/01/06040300.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Exceptions

+Specify the abbreviations or letter combinations that you do not want $[officename] to correct automatically. +
+The exceptions that you define depend on the current language setting. If you want, you can change the language setting by selecting a different language in the Replacements and exceptions for language box. +
+ +
+
+ +

Replacements and exceptions for language:

+Select the language for which you want to create or edit the replacement rules. $[officename] first searches for exceptions that are defined for the language at the current cursor position in the document, and then searches the remaining languages. +
+ +

Abbreviations (no subsequent capital)

+Type an abbreviation followed by a period, and then click New. This prevents $[officename] from automatically capitalizing the first letter of the word that comes after the period at the end of the abbreviation. + +Lists the abbreviations that are not automatically corrected. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. + +

Words with TWo INitial CApitals or sMALL iNITIAL

+Type the word or abbreviation that starts with two capital letters or a small initial that you do not want $[officename] to change to one initial capital. For example, enter PC to prevent $[officename] from changing PC to Pc. Enter eBook to prevent an automatic change to Ebook. + +Lists the words or abbreviations that start with two initial capitals or small initial that are not automatically corrected. All words which start with two capital letters or small initial are listed in the field. To remove an item from the list, select the item, and then click Delete. + + + +

New

+Adds the current entry to the list of exceptions. + + + +

AutoInclude

+Adds autocorrected abbreviations or autocorrected words that start with two capital letters to the corresponding list of exceptions, if the autocorrection is immediately undone by pressing CommandCtrl+Z. +This feature is relevant when the Capitalize first letter of every sentence option or the Correct TWo INitial CApitals option are selected in the [T] column on the Options tab of this dialog, and Tools - AutoCorrect - While Typing is enabled. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cfcb465c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + +Localized Options +/text/shared/01/06040400.xhp + + + +
+quotes; custom +custom quotes +AutoCorrect function; quotes +replacing;ordinal numbers +ordinal numbers;replacing + + + +Localized Options +Specify the AutoCorrect options for quotation marks and for options that are specific to the language of the text. +
+
+ +
+ + +Select to apply the replacements while you type [T], or when you modify existing text [M]. + +new feature, cws cbosdo01. https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Non_Breaking_Spaces_Before_Punctuation_In_French_(espaces_ins%C3%A9cables) +Add non-breaking space before specific punctuation marks in French text +Inserts a non breaking space before ";", "!", "?", ":" and "%" when the character language is set to French (France, Belgium, Luxembourg, Monaco, or Switzerland) and before ":" only when the character language is set to French (Canada). + +moved two paras from 06040100.xhp, cws cbosdo01 +Format ordinal number suffixes (1st ... 1st) +Formats the text characters of ordinals, such as 1st, 2nd, or 3rd, as superscripts. For example, in English text, 1st will be converted to 1st. +Note that this only applies to languages that have the convention of formatting ordinal numbers as superscript. +Transliterate to Old Hungarian if the text direction is from right to left +Words and numbers are transliterated to Old Hungarian script, if the text direction is from right to left using complex text layout. + +Replace << and >> with angle quotesHungarian translators: use the order >> and <<, according to the orthography of quotations. +Automatically replaces double less-than and greater-than signs with double angle quotes « and » in several languages, and with single angle quotes ‹ and › in Swiss French. + +Single Quotes / Double Quotes +Specify the replacement characters to use for single or double quotation marks. + + +Replace +Automatically replaces the default system symbol for the given type of quotation marks with the special character that you specify. + + +Start quote +Select the special character that will automatically replace the current opening quotation mark in your document when you choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + +End quote +Select the special character that will automatically replace the current closing quotation mark in your document when you choose Tools - AutoCorrect - Apply. + + +Default +Resets the quotation marks to the default symbols. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54be0e695 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect context menu +/text/shared/01/06040500.xhp + + + +AutoCorrect function; context menu +spellcheck; context menus +spelling; context menus + +AutoCorrect context menu +To access this menu, right-click a misspelled word in your document. To view the misspelled words in your document, choose Tools - Automatic Spell Checking. + +<Replacement Suggestions> +Click the word to replace the highlighted word. Use the AutoCorrect submenu for permanent replacement.UFI: see i60431 + + + + +

Spelling

+Opens the Spelling dialog. + + + + +Add +Adds the highlighted word to a user-defined dictionary. + + +Ignore all +Ignores all instances of the highlighted word in the current document. + + + + +AutoCorrect +To always replace the highlighted word, click a word in the list. The word pair is stored in the replacement table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Replace. + +Word is <name of language> +Changes the language settings for the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary. + +Paragraph is <name of language> +Changes the language setting for the paragraph that contains the highlighted word, if the word is found in another dictionary. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3a792c44 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Word Completion + /text/shared/01/06040600.xhp + + + +
+ Word Completion + Set the options for completing frequently occurring words while you type. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + +Enable word completion + Stores frequently used words, and automatically completes a word after you type three letters that match the first three letters of a stored word. + +Append space + If you do not add punctuation after the word, $[officename] adds a space. The space is added as soon as you begin typing the next word. + +Show as tip + Displays the completed word as a Help Tip. + +Collect words + Adds the frequently used words to a list. To remove a word from the Word Completion list, select the word, and then click Delete Entry. + +When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list + When enabled, the list gets cleared when closing the current document. When disabled, makes the current Word Completion list available to other documents after you close the current document. The list remains available until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. + +Accept with + Select the key that you want to use to accept the automatic word completion. + Press Esc to decline the word completion. + +Min. word length + Enter the minimum word length for a word to become eligible for the word completion feature.UFI: changed due to BH phone call. + +Max. entries + Enter the maximum number of words that you want to store in the Word Completion list. + +Word Completion list + Lists the collected words. The list is valid until you close the current document. To make the list available to other documents in the current session, disable "When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list". + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + +Delete Entry + Removes the selected word or words from the Word Completion list. + + + +
+ +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..67d6bc126 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Smart Tags +/text/shared/01/06040700.xhp + + + +
+ + +smart tag configuration +MW moved 2 index entries to the Writer guide smarttags.xhp and added a new oneSmart Tags +When you have installed at least one Smart Tag extension, you see the Smart Tags page. +
+
+ +
+ +Label text with smart tags +Enables Smart Tags to be evaluated and shown in your text document. +Currently installed smart tags +Displays all installed Smart Tags. To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. +Properties +To configure a Smart Tag, select the name of the Smart Tag, then click Properties. Not all Smart Tags can be configured. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bb8d8d21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Bullets and Numbering +/text/shared/01/06050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Bullets and Numbering

+Adds numbering or bullets to the current paragraph or to selected paragraphs, and lets you edit format of the numbering or bullets. + +
+
+ +
+The Bullets and Numbering dialog has the following tabs: + + + + + + + + + +

Remove

+Removes the numbering or bullets from the current paragraph or from the selected paragraphs. + + + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d912826a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + Unordered (Lists) + /text/shared/01/06050100.xhp + + + +
+bullets;paragraphs + paragraphs; inserting bullets + inserting; paragraph bullets + unordered list + + + +

Unordered

+ Displays different bullet types that you can apply to a list. +
+
+ +
+ Bullets and Numbering of paragraphs is supported only in Writer, Impress and Draw. + +

Selection

+ Click the bullet type that you want to use. +
+ Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Customize tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a9e9cd91 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Ordered + /text/shared/01/06050200.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Ordered

+ Displays different numbering schemes that you can apply. +
+
+ +
+ +

Selection

+ Click the numbering that you want to use. +
+ Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Customize tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6e021336 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +Outline (Bullets and Numbering) +/text/shared/01/06050300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + +

Outline

+Displays the different formats that you can apply to a hierarchical list. $[officename] supports up to nine outline levels in a list hierarchy. +
+
+ +
+ +

Selection

+Click the outline format that you want to use. +
+Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be7c326cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + Image + /text/shared/01/06050400.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Image

+ Displays the different graphics that you can use as bullets in an unordered list. +
+
+ +
+ +

Selection

+ Click the graphics that you want to use as bullets. + +

Link graphics

+ If enabled, the graphics are inserted as links. If not enabled, the graphics are embedded into the document. +
+ Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..25460f675 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,229 @@ + + + + + + + Customize (Bullets and Numbering) + /text/shared/01/06050500.xhp + + + +
+numbering;options + bullet lists; formatting options + font sizes;bullets + + + +

Customize

+ Sets the formatting options for ordered or unordered lists. If you want, you can apply formatting to individual levels in the list hierarchy. +
+
+ +
+ Select the level(s) that you want to modify, and then specify the formatting that you want to use. + +

Level

+ Select the level(s) that you want to define the formatting options for. The selected level is highlighted in the preview. +

Numbering

+ +

Number

+ Select a numbering scheme for the selected levels. + + + + Selection + + + Description + + + + + 1, 2, 3, ... + + + Arabic numerals + + + + + A, B, C, ... + + + Capital letters + + + + + a, b, c, ... + + + Lowercase letters + + + + + I, II, III, ... + + + Roman numerals (uppercase) + + + + + i, ii, iii, ... + + + Roman numerals (lowercase) + + + + + 1st, 2nd, 3rd, ... + + + Ordinal numerals + + + + + One, Two, Three, ... + + + Cardinal numerals + + + + + A,... AA,... AAA,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with uppercase letters + + + + + a,... aa,... aaa,... + + + Alphabetical numbering with lowercase letters + + + + + Bullet + + + Adds a character bullet to the beginning of a line. Select this option, use the Character style drop-down menu to choose the bullet character style, and then press the Select button to open the Special Characters dialog to choose the bullet character. + Bullets are resized to fit the current line height. If you want, you can define a Character Style that uses a different font size for bullets. + + + + + + Graphics + + + Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets embedded into the document. + + + + + Linked graphics + + + Displays an image for the bullet. Select this option, and then click Select to locate the image file that you want to use. The image gets inserted as a link to the image file. + + + + + None + + + Does not apply a numbering scheme. + + +
+ + The availability of the following fields depends on the numbering scheme that you select in the Number box. + +

Start at

+ Enter a new starting number for the current level. + +

Character Style +

+ Select the Character Style that you want to use in an ordered list. To create or edit a Character Style, open the Styles window, click the Character Styles icon, right-click a style, and then choose New. + + +

Show sublevels +

+ Enter the number of previous levels to include in the outline format. For example, if you enter "2" and the previous level uses the "A, B, C..." numbering scheme, the numbering scheme for the current level becomes: "A.1". + + +

Before

+ Enter a character or the text to display in front of the number in the list. + +

After

+ Enter a character or the text to display behind the number in the list. If you want to create an ordered list that uses the style "1.)", enter ".)" in this box. + +

Color +Color +

+ + + +Select a color for the current numbering scheme. + +

Relative size +Relative size +

+ + + +Enter the amount by which you want to resize the bullet character with respect to the font height of the current paragraph. + +

Options for graphics:

+ +

Graphics

+ Select the graphic, or locate the graphic file that you want to use as a bullet. + +

Width

+ Enter a width for the graphic. + +

Height

+ Enter a height for the graphic. + +

Keep ratio

+ Maintains the size proportions of the graphic. + +

Alignment

+ Select the alignment option for the graphic. +

All levels +

+ Set the numbering options for all of the levels. + + +

Consecutive numbering +

+ Increases the numbering by one as you go down each level in the list hierarchy. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8bcf41679 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + +Position (Lists) +/text/shared/01/06050600.xhp + + + +
+ + + + +

Position

+Set indent, spacing, and alignment options for numbering symbols, such as numbers or bullets, to ordered and unordered lists. +
+do we have a how-to for numbering/bullets/outlines with/without styles? seems we really need one +
+ +
+
+ + +

Level

+Select the level(s) that you want to modify. To apply the options to all the levels, select “1-10”. + + +
+
+

Position and Spacing

+
+This page shows the position controls used in all versions of %PRODUCTNAME Writer. Some documents (produced by other applications) use another method for positioning and spacing. Opening such documents will show the position controls documented in Position for List styles (legacy).see http://specs.openoffice.org/writer/numbering/NewListLevelAttrs.odt + +

Aligned at

+Enter the distance from the left page margin at which the numbering symbol will be aligned. +
+ + + +
+

Numbering alignment

+
+Set the alignment of the numbering symbols. Select "Left" to align the numbering symbol to start directly at the "Aligned at" position. Select "Right" to align the symbol to end directly before the "Aligned at" position. Select "Centered" to center the symbol around the "Aligned at" position. +
+The Numbering alignment option does not set the alignment of the paragraph. +
+
+

Numbering followed by

+Select the element that will follow the numbering: a tab stop, a space, a line break, or nothing. + +

Tab stop at

+If you select a tab stop to follow the numbering, you can enter a non-negative value as the tab stop position. + + +

Indent at

+Enter the distance from the left page margin to the start of all lines in the numbered paragraph that follow the first line. + +
+ + +

Default

+Resets the indent and the spacing values to the default values. +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + This control appears only when modifying a List style. +
+ + +
+Position for List styles (legacy) +Paragraph alignment +Indenting Paragraphs +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0f3d82a03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +Basic Macros +/text/shared/01/06130000.xhp + + + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Basic Macros

+Opens a dialog to organize macros. +UFI: it is not the dialog to run a macro +
+ +
+ +

Macro name

+Displays the name of the selected macro. To create or to change the name of a macro, enter a name here. + +Lists the macros that are contained in the module selected in the Macro from list. + +

Macro from / Save macro in

+Lists the libraries and the modules where you can open or save your macros. To save a macro with a particular document, open the document, and then open this dialog. + +

Run / Saveunfortunately both have the same Help ID

+Runs or saves the current macro. + +

Assign

+Opens the Customize dialog, where you can assign the selected macro to a menu command, a toolbar, or an event. + + +

Edit

+Starts the $[officename] Basic editor and opens the selected macro or dialog for editing. + +

New / Delete

+Creates a new macro, creates a new module or deletes the selected macro or selected module. +To create a new macro in your document, select the "Standard" module in the Macro from list, and then click New. +To create a new module in a library of the My Macros container, select the proper library and press New. The $[officename] Basic editor opens. +To delete a macro or module, select it, and then click Delete. + +

New Library

+Saves the recorded macro in a new library. + +

New Module

+Saves the recorded macro in a new module. + +

Organizer

+Opens the Macro Organizer dialog, where you can add, edit, or delete existing macro modules, dialogs, and libraries. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9731426c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Macros +/text/shared/01/06130001.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Macros

+Lets you record or organize and edit macros. +
+ + +

Run Macro

+Opens the Macro Selector dialog where you can start a macro. +

Edit Macros

+ + + +

Digital Signature

+Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your macros. You can also use the dialog to view certificates. + +

Organize Dialogs

+Opens the Dialogs tab page of the Macro Organizer. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..efc1e878c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Record Macro +/text/shared/01/06130010.xhp + + + +
+ +Record Macro +Records a new macro. Only available, if macro recording feature is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. +
+
+ +
+ +Stop Recording +Stops recording a macro. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab6052138 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130020.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Basic Macro Selector + /text/shared/01/06130020.xhp + + + + + macro;select macro to run + run macro;select + + + + +
+

Basic Macro selector

+ Selects the Basic macro to run. Locate the macro by selecting the container, library, module and macro name. +
+
+ +
+ +

Library

+ Lists the existing macro containers, Basic macro libraries and Basic modules for the current application and any open documents. + +

Macro name

+ Lists the Basic macros for the selected module. Select a macro and click Run. + +

Description

+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..761acae4f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Scripts +/text/shared/01/06130030.xhp + + + + + javascript scripts;run + beanshell scripts;run + java scripts;run + run scripts;java + run scripts;javascript + run scripts;beanshell + +

Scripts

+
+ + +
+ + +

Macros

+Select a macro or script from My Macros, Application Macros, or an open document. To view the available macros or scripts, double-click an entry. + +

Run

+To run a script, select a script in the list, and then click Run. + +

Create

+Creates a new script. The default script editor opens after you enter a name for the script. +Enter a name for the script.UFI: called from Create and from Rename + +

Edit

+Opens the default script editor for your operating system. + +

Rename

+Opens a dialog where you can change the name of the selected script. + +

Delete

+Prompts you to delete the selected script. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c1587246 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Change Password +/text/shared/01/06130100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Change Password +Protects the selected library with a password. You can enter a new password, or change the current password. +
+ +
+Old password + +Password +Enter the current password for the selected library. +New password + +Password +Enter a new password for the selected library. + +Confirm +Reenter the new password for the selected library. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cffc1827 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Organize Macros +/text/shared/01/06130200.xhp + + +UFI: new menu structure in Tools menu + + + +
+ +macros;organizing +organizing;macros and scripts +script organization + + +

Organize Macros

+Opens a submenu with links to dialogs where you can organize macros and scripts. +
+

%PRODUCTNAME Basic

+Opens a dialog where you can organize %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros. + +

JavaScript

+Opens a dialog where you can organize Javascript scripts. + +

BeanShell

+Opens a dialog where you can organize Java scripts. + +

Python

+Opens a dialog where you can run Python scripts. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..44d2ef09e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + +Basic Organizer +/text/shared/01/06130300.xhp + + + + + Basic macros;organize in libraries + Basic modules;organize in libraries + Basic dialogs;organize in libraries + +

%PRODUCTNAME Basic Library Organizer

+The dialog let you organize %PRODUCTNAME modules and dialogs into libraries. You can also import and export Basic libraries into files or extensions. +
+ +
+

Module and Dialog tab pages

+Lets you manage modules or dialog boxes. + + + + + + +

Module or Dialog

+Lists the existing modules or dialogs. + + +

Edit

+Opens the selected module or dialog for editing. + +

New (module)UFI: i40875

+Opens the editor and creates a new module. +

New (dialog)

+Opens the editor and creates a new dialog. +

Libraries tab page

the three tab pages have no Help button, so no need to have three help pages +Lets you manage the macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. + + + +

Location

+Select the application or the document containing the macro libraries that you want to organize. + +

Library

+Lists the existing macro libraries for the current application and any open documents. + +

Edit

+Opens the $[officename] Basic editor so that you can modify the selected library. + +

Password

+Assigns or edits the password for the selected library. + +

New

+Creates a new library. + + +

Name

+Enter a name for the new library or module. + +

Importchanged in #i64102

+Locate that $[officename] Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. +

Export

+Opens a dialog to export the selected library either as an extension or as a Basic library. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9a967463d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Append libraries +/text/shared/01/06130500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Append libraries +Locate the %PRODUCTNAME Basic library that you want to add to the current list, and then click Open. + + +File name: +Enter a name or the path to the library that you want to append. You can also select a library from the list. +Options + +Insert as reference (read-only) +Adds the selected library as a read-only file. The library is reloaded each time you start %PRODUCTNAME. + +Replace existing libraries +Replaces a library that has the same name with the current library. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26e07b5ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Customize +/text/shared/01/06140000.xhp + + + + + +Customize +Customizes $[officename] menus, context menus, shortcut keys, toolbars, and macro assignments to events. + +
+ +
+You can customize shortcut keys and macro assignments for the current application, or for all $[officename] applications. +You can also save and load individual menu, shortcut key, and toolbar custom settings. + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..201758a87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + Menus (Customizing) + /text/shared/01/06140100.xhp + + + + + You can add new commands, modify existing commands, or rearrange the menu items. You can also add commands executed by macros and apply all kind of styles directly from the menu. +
+ Choose Tools - Customize - Menus tab. +
+ +

Search

+ Enter a string in the text box to narrow the search of commands. + +

Category

+ Select the menu command category in the drop-down list to restrict the search of commands or scroll the list below. Macros and styles commands are in the bottom of the list. + +
+

Available Commands

+ Displays the results of the combination of the search string and category of the desired command. +
+ +

Description

+ The text box contains a short description of the selected command. + +

Scope

+ Select the location where the menu is to be attached. If attached to a %PRODUCTNAME module, the menu is available for all files opened in that module. If attached to the file, the menu will be available only when that file is opened and active. + +

Target

+ Select the menu where the customization is to be applied. + +

Add

+ Click on the gear icon and then choose Add to add a new menu. + + + + +Gear Icon + + + + Gear icon + + +
+ + +

Remove

+ Click on the gear icon and then choose Delete to delete the menu. + You can only delete custom menus and custom menu entries. + +
+

Assigned Commands

+Displays the commands that will be shown in the target menu. + +
+
+

Right Arrow button

+ Click on the right arrow button to select a command on the left display box and copy to the right display box. This will add the command to the selected menu. +
+

Left Arrow button

+ Click on the left arrow button to remove the selected command from the current menu. +
+ + +

Up and Down arrow buttons

+ Click on the Up or Down arrows on the right to move the selected command upward or downward in the list of displayed menu commands. + You can drag and drop the selected command to move it to the position you want. +
+

Customize

+ +

Insert

+ + + Insert Separator: Add a separator mark to improve menu readability and to group commands by subject. + + + Insert Submenu: Insert a submenu entry. Enter a name for the new submenu in the dialog box that follows. The new submenu is automatically available in the menu list for edition. + + + +

Modify

+ + + Rename: Rename the entry. + + + +

Defaults

+ Deletes all changes previously made to this menu. +
+ Customizing %PRODUCTNAME context menus +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08113ad67 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Menu +/text/shared/01/06140101.xhp + + + +

New Menu

+
+ +
+ +

Menu name

+Enter a name for the menu. To specify a letter in the name as an accelerator key, enter a tilde (~) before the letter. + +

Menu position

+Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click the arrow buttons. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca2b0d29c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Move Menu +/text/shared/01/06140102.xhp + + + +

Move Menu

+
+ +
+ + + + +

Menu position

+Moves the selected menu entry up one position or down one position in the menu when you click an arrow button. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d86b23f8b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + +Keyboard +/text/shared/01/06140200.xhp + + + +
+keyboard;assigning/editing shortcut keys +customizing;keyboard +editing;shortcut keys +styles;keyboard shortcuts +MW deleted "modifying;..." + + +

Keyboard

+Assigns or edits the shortcut keys for $[officename] commands, or $[officename] Basic macros. +
+
+ +
+You can assign or edit shortcut keys for the current application or for all $[officename] applications. To assign a key for all applications, choose the %PRODUCTNAME radio button in the top right corner. +To assign or modify a shortcut key: select a command in the Function list, select the key combination to be assigned in the Shortcut Keys list, then click Modify. +If the selected function already has a shortcut key, it is displayed in the Keys list. It is possible to assign the same function to more than one key. +A shortcut key assigned to a particular application overrides the shortcut key setting made in %PRODUCTNAME for all applications. +
+Avoid assigning shortcut keys that are currently used by your operating system. +
+ +

Shortcut keys

+Lists the shortcut keys and the associated commands. +

Functions

+Lists the function categories and the $[officename] functions that you can assign shortcut keys to. + +

Category

+Lists the available function categories. To assign shortcuts to Styles, open the "Styles" category. + +

Function

+Lists functions that can be assigned to a shortcut key. +

Keys

+Displays the shortcut keys that are assigned to the selected function. + + +

$[officename]

+Displays shortcut keys that are common to all $[officename] applications. + +

+ + Writer + Calc + Impress + Draw + Math + +

+Displays shortcut keys for the current $[officename] application. +

Modify

+Assigns the key combination selected in the Shortcut keys list to the command selected in the Function list. + +

Delete

+Deletes the selected element or elements without requiring confirmation. + +

Load

+Replaces the shortcut key configuration with one that was previously saved. + +

Save

+Saves the current shortcut key configuration, so that you can load it later. + + +
+ +Shortcut Keys in %PRODUCTNAME +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b336a58e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Context Menus (Customizing) + /text/shared/01/06140300.xhp + + + +
+ + context menus;customizing + customizing;context menus + editing;context menus + +

Context Menus

+ Lets you customize %PRODUCTNAME context menus for all modules. +
+ You can add new commands, modify existing commands, or rearrange the context menu items. You can also add commands executed by macros and apply all kind of styles directly from the context menu. +
+ Choose Tools - Customize - Context Menus tab. +
+ Search + Enter a string in the text box to narrow the search of commands. + Category + Select the menu command category in the drop-down list to restrict the search of commands or scroll the list below. Macros and styles commands are in the bottom of the list. + + Description + The text box contains a short description of the selected command. + Scope + Select the location where the context menu is to be attached. If attached to a %PRODUCTNAME module, the context menu is available for all files opened in that module. If attached to the file, the context menu will be available only when that file is opened and active. + Target + Select the Context Menu where the customization is to be applied. + + + Left Arrow button + Click on the left arrow button to remove the selected command from the current context menu. + Up and Down arrow buttons + Click on the Up or Down arrows on the right to move the selected command upward or downward in the list of displayed context menus commands. + You can drag and drop the selected command to move it to the position you want. +

Customize

+

Insert

+ + + Insert Separator: Add a separator mark to improve menu readability and to group commands by subject. + + + Insert Submenu: Insert a submenu entry. Enter a name for the new submenu in the dialog box that follows. The new submenu is automatically available in the menu list for edition. + + +

Modify

+ + + Rename: Rename the entry. + + +

Defaults

+ Deletes all changes previously made to this context menu. +
+ Customizing %PRODUCTNAME menus +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bfb6eff03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Toolbars +/text/shared/01/06140400.xhp + + + +
+ +Toolbars +Lets you customize $[officename] toolbars. +
+
+ +
+ +Search +Enter a string in the text box to narrow the search of commands. +Category +Select the command category in the drop-down list to restrict the search of commands or scroll the list below. Macros and styles commands are in the bottom of the list. +Function +Displays the results of the combination of the search string and category of the desired function. +Description +The text box contains a short description of the selected command. +Scope +Select the location where the toolbar is to be attached. If attached to a %PRODUCTNAME module, the toolbar is available for all files opened in that module. If attached to the file, the toolbar will be available only when that file is opened and active. +Target +Select the toolbar where the customization is to be applied. The current set of functions is displayed in the box below. +Add +Click on the gear icon and then choose Add to add a new toolbar. +Delete +Click on the gear icon and then choose Delete to delete the toolbar. +You can only delete custom toolbar and custom toolbar entries. +Right Arrow button +Click on the right arrow button to select a function on the left display box and copy to the right display box. This will add the function to the selected toolbar. +Left Arrow button +Click on the left arrow button to remove the selected command from the current toolbar. +Up and Down Arrow buttons +Click on the Up or Down arrows on the right to move the selected command upward or downward in the list of displayed toolbar commands. +You can drag and drop the selected command to move it to the position you want. +Insert +Insert Separator: Add a separator mark to improve toolbar readability and to group commands by subject. +Modify + + + Rename: Rename the entry. + + + Change Icon: Opens the Change Icon dialog, where you can assign a different icon to the current command. + + + Reset Icon: Resets the icon to the default icon. + + + Restore Default Command: Restores the default command. + + +Defaults +Deletes all changes previously made to this toolbar. + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5337733de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Change Icon +/text/shared/01/06140402.xhp + + + + + +Change Icon +Icons +Displays the available icons in %PRODUCTNAME. To replace the icon that you selected in the Customize dialog, click an icon, then click the OK button. + +Import +Adds new icons to the list of icons. You see a file open dialog that imports the selected icon or icons into the internal icon directory of %PRODUCTNAME. +You can only import icons that are in the PNG file format and that are 16 × 16 or 24 × 24 pixels in size. + +Click to remove the selected icon from the list. Only user-defined icons can be removed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0135c464d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06140500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + Events + /text/shared/01/06140500.xhp + + + +
+ customizing; events + events; customizing + + + + + + + + Events + Assigns macros to program events. The assigned macro runs automatically every time the selected event occurs. +
+
+ + +
+ + + The dialog box has reduced functionality when called from the Edit-Sheet menu of a spreadsheet. + + +Save In +Select first where to save the event binding, in the current document or in %PRODUCTNAME. +A macro that is saved with a document can only be run when that document is opened. + + + +The big list box lists the events and the assigned macros. After you selected the location in the Save In list box, select an event in the big list box. Then click Assign Macro. + + +Assign Macro +Opens the Macro Selector to assign a macro to the selected event. +Assign Component... +Opens the Assign Component dialog to set a custom UNO command for the selected event. +Component assignment is proposed for controls in the Dialog Editor. + + +Remove Macro +Deletes the macro or component assignment for the selected event. +
+List of events + + Creating a Dialog Handler +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06e6fc574 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + +XML Filter Settings +/text/shared/01/06150000.xhp + + + +filters; XML filter settings +XML filters; settings +mw deleted "XSLT based filters;" + + + +
+

XML Filter Settings

+Opens the XML Filter Settings dialog, where you can create, edit, delete, and test filters to import and to export XML files. +
+
+ +
+ +MAC does not have installation options + +Some filters are only available as optional components during the %PRODUCTNAME installation. To install an optional filter, run the %PRODUCTNAME Setup application, select "Modify", and then select the filter that you want in the list of modules. + + +The term XML filter is used in the following as a shortcut for the more exact description as an XSLT based filter. + + + +Term + + +Description + + + + +XML + + +Extensible Markup Language + + + + +XSL + + +Extensible Stylesheet Language + + + + +XSLT + + +Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformation. XSLT files are also called XSLT stylesheets. + + +
+The XHTML export filter produces valid "XHTML 1.0 Strict" output for Writer, Calc, Draw, and Impress documents. + +Filter list +Select one or more filters, then click one of the buttons. +The lists shows the name and the type of the installed filters. + + +Click a filter to select it. + + +Shift-click or CommandCtrl-click to select several filters. + + +Double-click a name to edit the filter. + + + + + +New +Opens a dialog with the name of a new filter. + +Edit +Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file. + +Test XSLTs +Opens a dialog with the name of the selected file. + +Delete +Deletes the selected file after you confirm the dialog that follows. + +Save as Package +Displays a Save as dialog to save the selected file as an XSLT filter package (*.jar). + +Open Package +Displays an Open dialog to open a filter from an XSLT filter package (*.jar). + +Help +Displays the help page for this dialog. + +Close +Closes the dialog. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..864128d69 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +XML Filter +/text/shared/01/06150100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +XML Filter + +View and edit the settings of an XML filter. +
+ +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54110f9cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/01/06150110.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +General + +Enter or edit general information for an XML filter. +
+ +
+ +Filter name +Enter the name that you want to display in the list box of the XML Filter Settings dialog. You must enter a unique name. + +Application +Select the application that you want to use with the filter. + +Name of file type +Enter the name that you want to display in the File type box in file dialogs. You must enter a unique name. For import filters, the name appears in the File type box of Open dialogs. For export filters, the name appears in the File format box of Export dialogs. + +File extension +Enter the file extension to use when you open a file without specifying a filter. $[officename] uses the file extension to determine which filter to use. + +Comments +Enter a comment (optional). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcf4cbdef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Transformation +/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Transformation + Enter or edit file information for an XML filter. +
+ +
+ DocType + Enter the DOCTYPE of the XML file. + The public identifier is used to detect the filter when you open a file without specifying a filter. + + + +Browse + Opens a file selection dialog. + XSLT for export + If this is an export filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for exporting. + XSLT for import + If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing. + Template for import + Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags. + The path to the directory that contains the template must be included in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. When you open an XML file whose filter uses the template, the template opens first. In the template, you can map $[officename] styles to display XML tags in the XML document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..270092f1e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Test XML Filter +/text/shared/01/06150200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Test XML Filter + + + +Tests the XSLT stylesheets used by the selected XML filter. + +
+ +
+Export + +XSLT for export +Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page. + +Transform document +Displays the file name of the document that you want to use to test the XSLT filter. + +Browse +Locate the file that you want to apply the XML export filter to. The XML code of the transformed file is opened in your default XML editor after transformation. + +Current Document +The front-most open file that matches the XML filter criteria will be used to test the filter. The current XML export filter transforms the file and the resulting XML code is displayed in the XML Filter output window. +Import + +XSLT for import +Displays the file name of the XSLT filter that you entered on the Transformation tab page. + +Template for import +Displays the file name of the template that you entered on the Transformation tab page. +Transform file + +Display source +Opens the XML source of the selected document in your default XML editor after importing. + +Browse +Opens a file selection dialog. The selected file is opened using the current XML import filter. + + +Recent File +Re-opens the document that was last opened with this dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72f7452ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +XML Filter output +/text/shared/01/06150210.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + XML Filter output + Lists the test results of an XML filter. +
+ +
+ The test results of an import or export XSLT stylesheet are displayed in the XML Filter output window. If you want, you can also validate the filter output. + Validate + Validates the contents of the XML Filter output window. + The window splits into two areas and the results of the validation are displayed in the lower area. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..934e2e247 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Conversion +/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+converting;Hangul/Hanja +Hangul/Hanja + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Conversion +Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul. The menu command can only be called if you enable Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and if a text formatted in Korean language is selected. +
+
+ +
+ +Original +Displays the current selection. + +Word +Displays the first replacement suggestion from the dictionary. You can edit the suggested word or enter another word. Click the Find button to replace your original word with the corresponding replacement word. + +Find +Finds your Hangul input in the dictionary and replaces it with the corresponding Hanja. Click Ignore to cancel the find function. + + +Suggestions +Displays all available replacements in the dictionary. If the Replace by character box is enabled, you see a grid of characters. If the Replace by character box is not checked, you see a list of words. +Format +Click the format to display the replacements. + +Hangul/Hanja +The original characters are replaced by the suggested characters. + +Hanja (Hangul) +The Hangul part will be displayed in brackets after the Hanja part. + +Hangul (Hanja) +The Hanja part will be displayed in brackets after the Hangul part. + +Hanja as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hangul part. + +Hanja as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hanja part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hangul part. + +Hangul as ruby text aboveTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text above the Hanja part. + +Hangul as ruby text belowTo translators: this describes the visible graphical control - it is not part of the sources +The Hangul part will be displayed as ruby text below the Hanja part. +Conversion +Normally in a mixed text selection made of Hangul and Hanja characters, all Hangul characters will be converted to Hanja and all Hanja characters will be converted to Hangul. If you want to convert a mixed text selection only in one direction, use the following conversion options. + +Hangul only +Check to convert only Hangul. Do not convert Hanja. + +Hanja only +Check to convert only Hanja. Do not convert Hangul. + +Ignore +No changes will be made to the current selection. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. + +Always Ignore +No changes will be made to the current selection, and every time the same selection is detected it will be skipped automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of ignored text is valid for the current $[officename] session. + +Replace +Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. + +Always Replace +Replaces the selection with the suggested characters or word according to the format options. Every time the same selection is detected it will be replaced automatically. The next word or character will be selected for conversion. The list of replacement text is valid for the current $[officename] session. + +Replace by character +Check to move character-by-character through the selected text. If not checked, full words are replaced. + +Options +Opens the Hangul/Hanja Options dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..61d1d7789 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Options +/text/shared/01/06201000.xhp + + +UFI: new Hangul/Hanja Options dialog + + + + + + +Hangul/Hanja Options +Define options for the Hangul/Hanja conversion. + +User-defined dictionaries +Lists all user-defined dictionaries. Select the check box next to the dictionary that you want to use. Clear the check box next to the dictionary that you do not want to use. + +New +Opens the New dictionary dialog box, where you can create a new dictionary. + +Name +Enter a name for the dictionary. To display the new dictionary in the User-defined dictionaries list box, click OK. + +Edit +Opens the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog where you can edit any user-defined dictionary. + +Delete +Deletes the selected user-defined dictionary. +Options +Specifies additional options for all dictionaries. + +Ignore post-positional word +Ignores positional characters at the end of Korean words when you search a dictionary. + +Show entries recently used first +Shows the replacement suggestion that you selected the last time as the first entry on the list. + +Replace all unique entries automatically +Automatically replaces words that only have one suggested word replacement. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23e0c22a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Edit Custom Dictionary +/text/shared/01/06202000.xhp + + + + + +Edit Custom Dictionary +Add and delete entries that are used for the Hangul/Hanja Conversion. +Book +Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit. +Original +Select the entry in the current dictionary that you want to edit. If you want, you can also type a new entry in this box. To move from the Original box to the first text box in the Suggestions area, press Enter. + + + +Suggestions (max. 8) +Type a suggested replacement for the entry that is selected in the Original text box. The replacement word can contain a maximum of eight characters. +New +Adds the current replacement definition to the dictionary. +Delete +Deletes the selected entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc608eafa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Spelling +/text/shared/01/06990000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Spelling

+Checks spelling manually. +
+
+ +
+
+Spelling dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..626196bf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +New Window +/text/shared/01/07010000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+new windows +windows;new + + +New Window +Opens a new window that displays the contents of the current window. You can now view different parts of the same document at the same time. +
+
+ +
+Changes made to a document in one window are automatically applied to all of the windows that are open for that document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..384190e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Document List +/text/shared/01/07080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Document List + Lists the currently open documents. Select the name of a document in the list to switch to that document. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6e1544f60 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML import and export +/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp + + + +importing; HTML with META tags +exporting; to HTML +HTML; importing META tags +HTML documents; META tags in +META tags +tags; META tags + +

HTML import and export

+When you export a file to an HTML document, the description and the user-defined file properties are included as META tags between the HEAD tags of the exported document. META tags are not displayed in a Web browser, and are used to include information, such as keywords for search engines on your Web page. To set the properties of the current document, choose File - Properties, click the Description or Custom Properties tabs, and then type the information you want. +The following file properties are converted to META tags when you export a file as an HTML document: + + + + ODF Property + + + HTML Tags + + + + +Title + + +<TITLE> + + + + +Subject + + +<META NAME="CLASSIFICATION" CONTENT="Field Content"> + + + + +Keywords + + +<META NAME="KEYWORDS" CONTENT="Field Content"> + + + + +Description + + +<META NAME="DESCRIPTION" CONTENT="Field Content"> + + + + +Custom Properties + + +<META NAME="Custom field name" CONTENT="Custom field content"> + + +
+ +When you import an HTML containing these META tags, the contents of the tags are added to the corresponding $[officename] file property box. +Keywords must be separated by commas. A keyword can contain white space characters or semicolons. +

Import Tips

+When you import an HTML document, following META tags are automatically converted to $[officename] fields: <META HTTP-EQUIV="REFRESH"...> and <META NAME="..." ...> , where NAME equals to AUTHOR, CREATED, CHANGED, CHANGEDBY, DESCRIPTION, KEYWORDS or CLASSIFICATION. +Scripts, comments, and META tags that are positioned directly before a TABLE tag are inserted in the first cell of the table. +Scripts and META tags in the header of an HTML document are imported and anchored to the first paragraph in the document. +To set the options for importing HTML tags, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. A known META tag contains either "HTTP-EQUIV" or "NAME", and are imported as $[officename] comments. The only exception is <META NAME="GENERATOR"...>, which is ignored. +

Export Tips

+Comments and script fields at the beginning of the first paragraph in a document are exported to the header of an HTML document. If the document begins with a table, the first paragraph in the first cell of the table is exported to the header of the HTML document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9682ae87e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + Adding Signature Line in Documents + /text/shared/01/addsignatureline.xhp + + + + + + + digital signature;add signature linesignature line;adding + +
+

Signature Line

+ Insert a graphic box representing a signature line of the document. +
+ + + Signature Line Box + + + The signature line displays an horizontal line, a location mark, the name, title and email of signer. +
+ +
+ +

Name

+ Insert the name of the signer. The name is displayed in the signature line graphic box. + +

Title

+ Enter the title of the signer. The title is displayed in the signature line graphic box. + +

Email

+ Enter the email of the signer. The email is not displayed in the signature line graphic box, but is used for the digital signature. + +

Signer can add comments

+ Enable signer to insert comments in the Sign Signature Line dialog at time of signature. + +

Show sign date in signature line

+ Mark this checkbox to display the date of the signature, at the time when the document is digitally signed. + +

Instructions to the signer

+ Insert instructions for the signer. The instructions appears in the Sign Signature Line dialog box, at the time of signature. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..364f41a4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Certificate Paths + /text/shared/01/certificatepath.xhp + + + + + + + + digital signatures;certificate path + certificate path + +
+

Certificate

+ Select or add the correct Network Security Services Certificate directory to use for digital signatures. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Available Certificate Paths

+Shows the list of Network Security Services Certificate directory to use for digital signatures. + + +

Select NSS path

+Opens a file picker dialog to add a new Network Security Services Certificate directory to the list. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e05fd9396 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Classification Bar + /text/shared/01/classificationbar.xhp + + + + + + + classification toolbar;display + +
+

Classification Toolbar

+The Classification bar contains tools to help secure document handling. +The Classification toolbar contains listboxes to help in selecting the security of the document, according to the BAF category policy and BAILS levels. %PRODUCTNAME will add custom fields in the document properties (File - Properties, Custom Properties tab) to store the classification policy as document metadata. +
+
+Choose View - Toolbars - TSCP Classification +
+ +

Levels

+ + + +
+

Manage Document Classification

+Opens the Classification dialog for document classification. +
+

Manage Paragraph Classification

+Opens the Classification dialog for paragraph classification. + + + + + +
+ + +Wiki page on document classification +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa4c71079 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Classification Dialog + /text/shared/01/classificationdialog.xhp + + + + + + + classification;contents + classification;licenses + classification;part numbers + classification;markings + classification;paragraph + paragraph;classification + +
+

Document and Paragraph Classification Dialog

+
+ +Applies classification policy to the current document or paragraph. The dialog helps to assemble the classification policy terms of the document or paragraph by using predefined classification terms or by entering custom classification terms. The dialog display several lists of predefined items, which are loaded from the BAILS-xml TSCP policy file. +
+ Enable the TSCP Classification toolbar in View - Toolbars - TSCP Classification and click on the Manage Document Classification or Manage Paragraph Classification buttons. +
+

Content

+The Content text box displays the classification text created by the dialog and displays the existing document or paragraph classification terms. You can add your own terms in addition to the existing text in the box and the classification terms from the classification policy configuration file. +

Bold icon (document classification only)

+ Apply bold character formatting to the document or paragraph classification terms. +

Sign Paragraph (paragraph classification only)

+ Opens the Select Certification dialog box to choose the certificate to use to sign the paragraph. +

Recently used

+List the recently used classification terms. +

Classification

+The Classification list contains the translated elements of the Business Authorization Identification and Labeling Scheme (BAILS). The %PRODUCTNAME defaults are: + +

International

+The International list are the elements of the BAILS, not localized. The default is: + + + Non-Business + + + General Business + + + Confidential + + + Internal use only + + The Classification and International drop-down lists are actually the same list. A change in one list changes the other. +

Marking

+Display a list of pre-existing markings available to be added to the Contents text box. Double click one entry to have it added to the contents text box at the cursor location. The markings are defined in the classification policy configuration file. +

License

+ Displays the existing intellectual property licenses. Double click the license to have it displayed in the Part text box below. Click the Add button to place the license text in the Content box.The licenses are defined in the classification policy configuration file. +

Part number

+ Displays the existing intellectual property part numbers. Double click the part number to have it displayed in the Part text box below and click the Add button to place the part number in the Content text box. The part numbers are defined in the classification policy configuration file. +

Part text:

+Use this box to enter contents to be added to the Content text box. +

Add

+Click to add the contents of the Part text box to the Content box. +Settings of the Classification dialog are part of the document custom properties. +
+ + +Wiki page on document classification +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c677701b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Digital Signatures + /text/shared/01/digitalsignatures.xhp + + + + + +
+ +

Digital Signatures

+ Adds and removes digital signatures to and from your document. You can also use the dialog to view certificates. +
+
+ +
+ +You must save a file before you can apply a digital signature to the file. +You must save a file in OpenDocument format before you can apply a digital signature to the file. + +

List

+ Lists the digital signatures for the current document. + The Signed icon +Icon + indicates a valid digital signature, while the Exclamation mark icon +Icon + indicates an invalid digital signature. + See also Digital Signatures. + +

Use AdES-compliant signature when there is a choice

+ Prefers creating XAdES signatures for ODF and OOXML, PAdES signatures for PDF. + +

View Certificate

+ Opens the View Certificate dialog. + +

Sign Document

+ Opens the Select Certificate dialog. + +

Remove

+ Removes the selected signature from the list. Removes all subsequent signatures as well, in case of PDF. + +

Start Certificate Manager

+Opens the installed certificate manager of your system. + + On macOS, the default certificate manager is Keychain Access. + On Windows systems, the default certificate manager is Certmgr.msc, a Microsoft Management Console snap-in using Certmgr.exe, and does not manage OpenPGP certificates. To manage both X509 and OpenPGP certificates install the gpg4win tool. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..992423c9d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + Digital Signature in PDF Export + /text/shared/01/digitalsignaturespdf.xhp + + + +

Signing Exported PDF

+
+ +
+ +
+ About Digital Signatures +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8efcf5afc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + +Extension Update +/text/shared/01/extensionupdate.xhp + + + + + + +Extension Update +Click the Check for Updates button in the Extension Manager to check for online updates for all installed extensions. To check for online updates for only the selected extension, right-click to open the context menu, then choose Update. +
+
insert hidden text for Exclude from this update/from all updates/include again, see i115834 - not needed because no Help ID assigned +When you click the Check for Updates button or choose the Update command, the Extension Update dialog is displayed and the check for availability of updates starts immediately. + +While checking for updates, you see a progress indicator. Wait for some messages to show up in the dialog, or click Cancel to abort the update check. +If no updates are available, the message in the dialog tells you there are no updates. Close the dialog. +If updates are available, the updates can either be installed automatically, or you must respond with some action: +The Extension Update dialog may contain entries which are not selectable and hence no automatic update can be performed. + + +Dependencies are not fulfilled (the update needs some more or newer files to be installed). + + +Insufficient user rights (the Extension Manager was started from the menu, but shared extensions can only be modified when %PRODUCTNAME does not run, and only by a user with appropriate rights). See Extension Manager for details. + + +A manual update is necessary. + + +When you click the Install button the Download and Installation dialog is displayed. +All extensions which can be directly downloaded are downloaded now. The progress is shown in the Download and Installation dialog. If an extension cannot be downloaded, a message is displayed. The operation continues for the remaining extensions. +Some extensions may be marked with the phrase "browser based update". These extensions cannot be downloaded by the Extension Manager. A web browser must be opened to download the extension update from a particular web site. That site may require several more user interaction to download the extension. After downloading you must install the extension manually, for example by double-clicking the extension's icon in a file browser. +For extensions marked as "browser based update", the Extension Manager will open your web browser on the respective web site. This happens when you close the dialog, after downloading any other extension updates. If there are no extensions which can be directly downloaded then the web browser is started immediately. +After the last extension has been downloaded, the installation begins. First all installed extensions for which an update could be downloaded successfully, are removed. Then the updated extensions are installed. If an error occurs, a message that the installation failed is displayed, but the operation proceeds. +If all updates have been processed the Download and Installation dialog shows that it has finished. You can abort the download and installation process by clicking the Abort Update button. + +Show all Updates +By default, only the downloadable extensions are shown in the dialog. Mark Show all Updates to see also other extensions and error messages. +
+Extension Manager +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..101d7eade --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/font_features.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + OpenType Font Features + /text/shared/01/font_features.xhp + + + + + font features + font features;OpenType + OpenType;font features + +
+ + + Font Features + Select and apply font typographical features to characters. +
+
+ + Then press Features... +
+ %PRODUCTNAME supports OpenType font format. The two main benefits of the OpenType format are its cross-platform compatibility, and its ability to support widely expanded character sets and layout features, which provide richer linguistic support and advanced typographic control. + The features displayed in the Font Features dialog depends on the selected font. + Font features box + The font features box contains the configurable features available for the font. + Font feature visualization window + The feature visualization window displays a default text where the selected features can be inspected. +
+ Wikipedia on OpenType +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8e62f95e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Formatting Mark + /text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + CTL;(not) wrapping words + words;wrapping in CTL + +MW added 2 index entries because of issue 86750tried to fix i86464 by creating a new file, copy everything over, then save & overwrite as formatting_mark.xhpbut this did not help + +

Formatting Mark

+Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks like non-breaking space, soft hyphen, and optional break. +
+ + +

Non-breaking space

+Inserts a space that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks. + + +

Non-breaking hyphen

+Inserts a hyphen that will keep bordering characters together on line breaks. + + +

Soft hyphen

+Inserts an invisible optional hyphen within a word that will appear and create a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. + + +

No-width optional break

+Inserts an invisible space within a word that will insert a line break once it becomes the last character in a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled. + + +

Word Joiner

+Inserts an invisible space within a word that will keep the word together at the end of a line. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled. + + +

Left-to-right mark

+Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled. + + +

Right-to-left mark

+Inserts a text direction mark that affects the text direction of any text following the mark. Available when complex text layout (CTL) is enabled. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f3dd1d3b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Gallery + /text/shared/01/gallery.xhp + + + + + + +Displays the contents of the Gallery as icons. + +Displays the contents of the Gallery as small icons, with title and path information. + + +You can display the contents of the Gallery as icons, or icons with titles and path information. +To zoom in or zoom out on a single object in the Gallery, double-click the object, or select the object, and then press the Spacebar. + +
+ +
+ +Themes are listed on the left side of the Gallery.Click a theme to view the objects associated with the theme. + +To insert a Gallery object, select the object, and then drag it into the document. + + + + +

Adding a New File to the Gallery

+To add a file to the Gallery, right-click a theme, choose Properties, click the Files tab, and then click Add. You can also click an object in the current document, hold, and then drag it to the Gallery window. + + +

New theme

+Adds a new theme to the Gallery and lets you choose the files to include in the theme. +To access the following commands, right-click a theme in the Gallery: + + + + + +

Properties

+The Properties of (Theme) dialog contains the following tabs: + + +

Files

+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95d69d8e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Files +/text/shared/01/gallery_files.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +Files +Adds new files to the selected theme. + +
+ +
+ +File Type +Select the type of file that you want to add. + +Files found +Lists the available files. Select the file(s) that you want to add, and then click Add. To add all of the files in the list, click Add All. + +Find files +Locate the directory containing the files that you want to add, and then click OK. + +Add +Adds the selected file(s) to the current theme. + +Add all +Adds all of the files in the list to the current theme. + +Preview +Displays or hides a preview of the selected file.UFI: removed help id +Preview box +Displays a preview of the selected file. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..978628751 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Grid + /text/shared/01/grid.xhp + + + + + +
+ + grids;display options (Impress/Draw) + + + + +

Grid

+Sets the display properties of a grid. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+

Display Grid

+Displays or hides grid lines that you can use to align objects such as graphics on a page. +
+ +

Snap to Grid

issue 112000 for new key +Automatically aligns objects to vertical and horizontal grid lines. To override this feature, hold down the Option key +Alt key when you drag an object.UFI: copied from shared\optionen\01050100.xhp +UFI removed GridFront help id + +
+

Grid to Front

+Displays the grid lines in front of the objects on the slide or page. +
+ +
+Set the grid color on %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f50c18ebd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Grid and Help Lines + /text/shared/01/grid_and_helplines.xhp + + + + +
+ + +

Grid and Help Lines

+Toggle the visibility of grid points and guide lines to help object moving and precise position in the current sheet. +
+ + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b7fb01bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/guides.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Snap Guides + /text/shared/01/guides.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + guides;display options (Impress/Draw) + + + + +

Snap Guides

+Specifies the display options for snap guides. +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Display Snap Guides

+Displays or hides snap guides that you can use to align objects on a page. + + +

Snap Guides to Front

+Displays the snap guides in front of the objects on the pageslidepage. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdc1fbeb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + Compress Image + /text/shared/01/image_compression.xhp + + + + + image;compression + image;reduce image size + image;size reduction + image;resize + image;change resolution + +
+ + + Compress Image + Compress the selected image to reduce its data size and resize the image in the document. +
+ + Image compression is a type of data compression applied to digital images, to reduce storage size or transmission time. Compression may take advantage of visual perception and the statistical properties of image data to preserve information quality. + Image compression can be lossless or lossy. Lossless compression allows the original image to be perfectly reconstructed from the compressed data. In contrast, lossy compression permits reconstruction only of an approximation of the original image, therefore with some loss of quality, though usually with improved compression rates (and therefore reduced file sizes). +
+ Select the image, choose Format - Image - Compress. + Select the image, open the context menu and choose Compress. +
+ + + Compression + JPEG Quality + Use the slider to adjust the level of quality of the JPEG compression, from 0 to 100. A value of 100 means no quality loss and a value of 0 may result in a very poor image. The default value of 90 produces very good results and significant image data size reduction. + The compression values are not standardized between different JPEG image compression software. + + PNG Compression + Since PNG compression is lossless, the main reason to use a compression factor less than 9 is when there is absolute need to reduce the size of the document when saving in a slow computer. The uncompress operation does not depend on the compression level. + + Resolution + Reduce image resolution + Check to change the dimensions of the compressed image. + Width, Height + Use the spin buttons to set the new width and height of the compressed image. + Resolution + Select the pixel density (dot per inch - DPI) of the image from the dropdown list. + + Interpolation + Select the algorithm to calculate the interpolated pixels. + + Image Information + Calculate New Size + Click to calculate the size of the image data, based on the settings of the dialog box. +
+ Wikipedia on image file formats. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a65ca5d1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Media Player + /text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp + + + +
+Media Player window + + +Media Player + + Opens the Media Player window where you can preview movie and sound files as well as insert these files into the current document. +
+
+ +
+ The Media Player supports many different media formats. You can also insert media files from the Media Player into your document. + +Open + Opens a movie file or a sound file that you want to preview. + + Apply + Inserts the current movie file or sound file as a media object into the current document. + + Play + Plays the current file. + + Pause + Pauses or resumes the playback of the current file. + + Stop + Stops the playback of the current file. + + Repeat + Plays the file repeatedly. + + Mute + Turns sound off and on. + + Volume slider + Adjusts the volume. + + View + Adjusts the size of the movie playback. + Position slider + Moves to a different position in the file. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eef02d971 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + Find + /text/shared/01/menu_edit_find.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Find +Toggle the visibility of the Find toolbar to search for text or navigate a document by element. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f9a8e5187 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Sidebar + /text/shared/01/menu_view_sidebar.xhp + + + + + + + +The sidebar is docked on the right or left side of the document view area and contains a tab bar with tab buttons, that when clicked show a different tab deck. + +
+Choose View - Sidebar +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8f3ac5db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + Audio or Video + /text/shared/01/moviesound.xhp + + + +
+ +inserting; movies/sounds +sound files +playing movies and sound files +videos +movies +audio +music +UFI: added "music;inserting"MW made "sounds;", "audio;", "music;" one level entries and added "movies" + +Audio or Video + Inserts a video or audio file into your document. +
+
+ + +
+To insert a movie or sound file into your document + + + Click where you want to insert the file. + + + Choose Insert - Media - Audio or Video. For %PRODUCTNAME Impress, choose Insert - Audio or Video. + + + In the File Open dialog, select the file that you want to insert. + The file types that are listed in this dialog are not supported by all operating systems. + + + Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. If it is not checked, the media file will be embedded (not supported with all file formats). + + + Click Open. + + + Alternatively, you can choose Tools - Media Player to open the Media Player. Use the Media Player to preview all supported media files. Click the Apply button in the Media Player window to insert the current media file into your document. +To play a movie or sound file + + + Click the object icon for the movie or sound file in your document. + If the icon is arranged on the background, hold down CommandCtrl while you click. + The Media Playback toolbar is shown. + + + Click Play on the Media Playback toolbar. + + + When you show an Impress presentation, the embedded sound or video on the current slide plays automatically until it's over or until you leave the slide. + You can also use the Media Playback bar to pause, to stop, to loop, as well as to adjust the volume or to mute the playback of the file. The current playback position in the file is indicated on the left slider. Use the right slider to adjust the playback volume. For movie files, the bar also contains a list box where you can select the zoom factor for the playback. +Supported media formats + %PRODUCTNAME relies on the operating system's installed media support. + + + For Microsoft Windows: %PRODUCTNAME can open anything for which DirectShow filters are installed (list of default formats). + + + For GNU/Linux: %PRODUCTNAME uses gstreamer, so whatever you can play using gstreamer can be used with %PRODUCTNAME (list of defined types). + + + For Apple macOS: %PRODUCTNAME uses QuickTime supported media formats (list of media formats). + + +
+ + List of default formats for Microsoft Windows DirectShow. + List of defined types for gstreamer in GNU/Linux. + List of media formats for Apple macOS QuickTime. + “What video formats does Impress support?” on Ask +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70bbf12de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Rename object + /text/shared/01/nav_rename.xhp + + + + + + navigator; rename + rename;objects + + + + + + + +

Rename object

+ Renames the object selected in the Navigator. +
+ Open the context menu for the object - Choose Rename. +
+

New name

+ Enter the new name of the selected object. + Names of objects must be unique in the same document. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d82c7b0f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Using the notebook bar + /text/shared/01/notebook_bar.xhp + + + + + + + + notebook bar;contextual single toolbar + notebook bar;contextual groups + notebook bar;tabbed mode + notebook bar;single toolbar + notebook bar;default layout + notebook bar;layouts + notebook bar;toolbar + notebook bar;sidebar + sidebar;notebook bar + toolbar;notebook bar + + +
+

User Interface

+Opens the Select Your Preferred User Interface dialog to let you choose the user interface layout for %PRODUCTNAME. +
+ +The notebook bar shows a different way to organize controls and icons than a collection of straight rows of icons, displaying contextual groups of commands and contents for a quicker usage and better user experience. + +
+Choose menu View - User Interface +
+ +

User interface layouts

+The User Interface entry defines which user interface elements are visible. + +

Standard toolbar

+Classic mode with two visible toolbars – standard and formatting. The sidebar is partially collapsed and shows only tabs. Intended for users who are familiar with the classic interface. + +

Tabbed

+In this mode, the bar is divided into tabs, where each tab displays a set of icons grouped by context. The context can also change depending on the object selected in the document, for example a table or an image. The Tabbed user interface is the most similar to the Ribbons used in Microsoft Office. It organizes functions in tabs and makes the main menu obsolete. + +

Tabbed compact

+The Tabbed Compact variant aims to be familiar with the Microsoft Office interface, yet occupying less space for smaller screens. + +

Groupedbar compact

+The Groupedbar Compact interface provides access to functions in groups, with icons for most-frequently used features, and dropdown menus for others. This compact variant favors vertical space. + +

Contextual single

+The Contextual Single interface shows functions in a single-line toolbar with context-dependent content. + +

Single toolbar

+Standard user interface but with single-line toolbar. Intended for use on small screens. The sidebar is collapsed. + +

Sidebar

+Standard user interface with expanded sidebar. Expert users who want to quickly change many different properties are advised to use this user interface. + +When user activates additional toolbars, they will be saved in the user profile. Therefore, on returning from the notebook bar mode, all toolbars set visible before will show again. + +The Tabbed and Groupedbar modes are also available as compact variants. +The notebook bar icon size is adjustable in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View - Notebookbar icon size listbox. +The notebook bar cannot be customized. +The current implementation (%PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION) of the notebook bar is common to Writer, Calc, Draw and Impress modules. A change in the notebook bar in one module will affect the notebook bar of the other modules. + +
+Toolbars +View options +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93c9d2b32 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check for Updates + /text/shared/01/online_update.xhp + + + +updates;checking manually + online updates;checking manually + +Check for Updates +UFI: changed name of page, see i76016Next time start download automatically +You can check for updates manually or automatically. + Checking for updates will also look for updates of all installed extensions. + Choose Help - Check for Updates to check manually. + You can disable or enable the automatic check in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. + + + If an update is available, an icon + Update Icon + on the menu bar will notify you of the update. Click the icon to open a dialog with more information. + + + You will see the Check for Updates dialog with some information about the online update of %PRODUCTNAME. + + + Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. + If you need a proxy server, enter the proxy settings in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + + + Choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. + + + If a newer version is available and %PRODUCTNAME is not set up for automatic downloading, then you can select any of the following actions: + + + Download the new version. + + + Install the downloaded files. + + + Abort this check for updates for now. + + + If %PRODUCTNAME is configured to download the files automatically, the download starts immediately. A download continues even when you minimize the dialog. + If automatic downloads are disabled, start the download manually. + If no update was found, you can close the dialog. + You need Administrator rights to update %PRODUCTNAME. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0bd298a4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Check for Updates +/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp + + + + +Check for UpdatesUFI: this is the dialogChecks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update. +Once the download starts, you see a progress bar and three buttons on the dialog. You can pause and resume the download by clicking the Pause and Resume buttons. Click Cancel to abort the download and delete the partly downloaded file. +By default, downloads will be stored to your desktop. You can change the folder where the downloaded file will be stored in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. +After the download is complete, you can click Install to start the installation of the update. You see a confirmation dialog, where you can choose to close %PRODUCTNAME. +Under some operation systems, it may be required to manually go to the download folder, unzip the download file, and start the setup script. +After installation of the update you can delete the download file to save space.Download + +Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.Install +Installs the downloaded update.Pause +Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.Resume +Continues a paused download.Cancel +Aborts the download and deletes the partly downloaded file. +
+Starting online updates +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0287f3e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ + + + + + + +Extension Manager +/text/shared/01/packagemanager.xhp + + + +
+ +UNO components;Extension Manager +extensions;Extension Manager +packages, see extensions + + + + +

Extension Manager

+The Extension Manager adds, removes, disables, enables, and updates %PRODUCTNAME extensions. +
+For security reasons, the installation and removal of extensions are controlled by settings in the Expert Configuration. By default, installation and removal are enabled. +
+
+The following are examples of %PRODUCTNAME extensions: + + +UNO components (compiled software modules) + + +Configuration data (for menu commands) + + +%PRODUCTNAME Basic libraries + + +%PRODUCTNAME dialog libraries + + +Extension files (*.oxt files containing one or more extensions of the above listed types) + + +
+

Extension Scope

+
+Users with administrator or root privileges will see a dialog where they can choose to install extensions "for all users" or "only for me". Normal users without those privileges can install, remove, or modify extensions only for their own use. + + +A user with root or administrator privileges can install an extension as a shared extension that is available to all users. After selecting an extension, a dialog opens and asks whether to install for the current user or all users. + + +A user without root privileges can only install an extension for own usage. This is called a user extension. + +UFI: Extension Guide needed. Until we have that guide, I'll add some more info in this file. +

To install an extension

+An extension is available as a file with the file extension .oxt. + +You can find a collection of extensions on the Web. Click the "Get more extensions online" link in the Extension Manager to open your Web browser and see the https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ page. +

To install a user extension

+Do any of the following: + + +Double-click the .oxt file in your system's file browser. + + +On a web page, click a hyperlink to an *.oxt file (if your web browser can be configured to start the Extension Manager for this file type). + + +Choose Tools - Extension Manager and click Add. + + +

To install a shared extension in text mode (for system administrators)

+ + +As an administrator, open a terminal or command shell. + + +Change to the \ +/program folder in your installation. + + +Enter the following command, using the path and file name of your extension: +unopkg add --shared path_filename.oxt + + + + +Select the extension that you want to remove, enable, or disable. For some extensions, you can also open an Options dialog. + + +

Add

+Click Add to add an extension. +A file dialog opens where you can select the extension that you want to add. To copy and to register the selected extension, click Open. + + + +An extension can show a license dialog. Read the license. Click the Scroll Down button to scroll down if necessary. Click Accept to continue the installation of the extension.insert hidden text for Show License + + +

Remove

+Select the extension that you want to remove, and then click Remove. + + +

Enable

+Select the extension that you want to enable, and then click Enable. + + +

Disable

+Select the extension that you want to disable, and then click Disable. + + +

Update

+Click to check for online updates of all installed extensions. To check for updates of the selected extension only, choose the Update command from the context menu. The check for availability of updates starts immediately. You will see the Extension Update dialog. + + +

Options

+Select an installed extension, then click to open the Options dialog for the extension. + +

Display Extensions

+You can filter the list of displayed extensions by their scope. + + +

Bundled with %PRODUCTNAME

+Bundled extensions are installed by the system administrator using the operating system specific installer packages. These can not be installed, updated or removed here. + + +

Installed for all users

+Filter extensions available for all users of this computer. These can be updated or removed only with administrator or root privileges. + + +

Installed for current user

+Filter extensions only available for the currently logged in user. + +Some additional commands can appear in the context menu of an extension in the Extension Manager window, depending on the selected extension. You can choose to show the license text again. You can choose to exclude the extension from checking for updates or to include an excluded extension. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..feeccb25c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + Password + /text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + Password + Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes. + + + The open password must be entered to open the file. + The permission password must be entered to edit the document. + + + + + + Password + Type a password. A password is case sensitive. + + + + + Confirm + Re-enter the password. + Undoing password protection + To remove a password, open the document, then save without password. + + Click to show or hide the file sharing password options. + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17c9b26f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Master Password + /text/shared/01/password_main.xhp + + + +
+ + + Set Master Password + Assign a master password to protect the access to a saved password. +
+ You can save some passwords for the duration of a session, or permanently to a file protected by a master password. For example, passwords for accessing WebDAV or FTP servers are stored permanently if you enter a master password when prompted. Otherwise, they are only stored for the current session.removed text see i71792 + You must enter the master password to access a file or service that is protected by a saved password. You only need to enter the master password once during a session. +
+
+ You should only use passwords that are hard to find by other persons or programs. A password should follow these rules: + + + Length of eight or more characters. + + + Contains a mix of lower case and upper case letters, numbers, and special characters. + + + Cannot be found in any wordbook or encyclopedia. + + + Has no direct relation to your personal data, e.g., date of birth or car plate. + + +
+Master password + Type a master password to prevent unauthorized users from accessing stored passwords. +Confirm master password + Re-enter the master password. +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0809b6634 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastecolumnleft.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + Paste as Column Before + /text/shared/01/pastecolumleft.xhp + + + +
+ +

Paste as Column Before

+ Insert clipboard table data in a table as new columns before instead of overwriting the content of the original cells of the target table. +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87f4de613 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Paste Nested Table + /text/shared/01/pastenestedtable.xhp + + + + + + paste;nested table + paste special;nested table + paste nested table + +
+

Paste Nested Table

+ Paste clipboard content (including native tables or tables copied from Calc or other spreadsheets) as nested tables in empty cells and at cell starting cursor position. +
+
+ +
+ + Pasting table data in Writer tables overwrites the contents of the existing cells, when the cursor is in an empty cell or at the beginning of the first paragraph of a table cell. + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df55e3112 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + Paste as Row Above + /text/shared/01/pasterowabove.xhp + + + +
+ +

Paste as Row Above

+ Insert clipboard table data in a table as new rows instead of overwriting the content of the original cells of the target table. +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..93c4b8edf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Paste Special + /text/shared/01/pastespecialmenu.xhp + + + +
+

Paste Special

+ Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current file in a format that you can specify. +
+ + + + + + + +paste special;only text (spreadsheet) +paste special;only numbers (spreadsheet) +paste special;only formula (spreadsheet) + + + +

Paste Only Text

+ Paste clipboard text contents only. Numeric and formula values are not pasted and their destination cells contents are deleted. +

Paste Only Numbers

+ Paste clipboard numeric contents only. Text and formulas are not pasted and their destination cells contents are deleted. +

Paste Only Formula

+ Paste clipboard formula contents only. Text and numeric values are not pasted and their destination cells contents are deleted. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cb601129 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + Paste Unformatted Text + /text/shared/01/pasteunformatted.xhp + + + + + +paste;unformatted text +paste special;unformatted text +unformatted text;paste special + +
+

Paste Unformatted Text

+ Paste only the text contents, without any formatting. +
+
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6abb949a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Safe Mode + /text/shared/01/profile_safe_mode.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + + profile;safe mode + + + Safe Mode + Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance. + +
+ +
+ Choose Help - Restart in Safe Mode. + Start %PRODUCTNAME from command line with --safe-mode option + Start %PRODUCTNAME from %PRODUCTNAME (Safe Mode) start menu entry (Windows only) +
+ +What can I do in safe mode? +Once in safe mode, you will be shown a dialog offering three user profile restoration options + + +Continue in Safe Mode +This option will let you work with %PRODUCTNAME as you are used to, but using a temporary user profile. It also means that all configuration changes made to the temporary user profile will be lost after restart. + + +Restart in Normal Mode +Choosing Restart in Normal Mode will discard all changes, terminate safe mode and start %PRODUCTNAME again in normal mode. Use this option if you got here by accident. + + +Apply Changes and Restart +The dialog offers multiple changes to the user profile that can be made to help restoring %PRODUCTNAME to working state. They get more radical from top down so you should try them successively one after another. Choosing this option applies selected changes + + +Restore from backup +%PRODUCTNAME keeps backups of previous configurations and activated extensions. Use this option to return to the previous state if your problems are likely to be caused by recent changes to configuration or extensions. + + +Configure +You can disable all extensions installed by the user. You can also disable hardware acceleration. Activate this option if you experience startup crashes or visual glitches, they are often related to hardware acceleration. + + +Uninstall extensions +Sometimes %PRODUCTNAME cannot be started due to extensions blocking or crashing. This option allows you to disable all extensions installed by the user as well as shared and bundled extensions. Uninstalling shared and bundled extensions should be used with caution. It will only work if you have the necessary system access rights. + + +Reset to factory settings +If all else fails, you can reset your user profile to the factory default. The first option Reset settings and user customizations resets all configuration and UI changes, but keeps things like your personal dictionary, templates etc. The second option will reset your entire profile to the state when you first installed %PRODUCTNAME. + + +If you could not resolve your problem by using safe mode, click on Advanced expander. You will find instructions how to get further help there. +If you want to report a problem with your user profile, by clicking on Create Zip Archive from User Profile you can generate a zip file which can be uploaded to the bug tracking system to be investigated by the developers. +Be aware that the uploaded profile might contain sensitive information, such as your personal dictionary, settings and installed extensions. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90cf95a59 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + Embedding Fonts + /text/shared/01/prop_font_embed.xhp + + + +
+ +embedding fonts in document file +documents; embedding fonts +font embedding; in documents +fonts; embedding +fonts; licensing for embedding +embedding; fonts +embedding licensed fonts + + + +

Font

+ Embed document fonts in the current file. +
+
+ +
+ +

Font embedding

+ Mark this box to embed document fonts into the document file, for portability between different computer systems. The document with embedded fonts has a larger size and the fonts are used on the target computer for better rendering of the document layout. + Consider embedding fonts when your document use rare or custom fonts not generally available in other computers. + Font licenses may restrict embedding fonts in documents. Font files contain flags that indicate if and how they can be embedded within a document file. %PRODUCTNAME parses these flags and determines if and how it may be embedded in a document file, and when you open a document containing embedded fonts, it will also look at these flags to determine if and how a document can be viewed or edited. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fdfed4828 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + Export as EPUB + /text/shared/01/ref_epub_export.xhp + + + + + +
+ + EPUB;export + electronic publication + exporting;to EPUB + + + + + +

Export as EPUB

+Export the current file to EPUB. + +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + +

General

+ + +

Version

+Sets the version of the resulting EPUB file. + + +

Split method

+Select the type of start of the next EPUB section. + + + Heading: Starts the next section on headings, according to the document outline numbering. + + + Page break: Starts the new section on a page break. + + + + +

Layout method

+Determines if a reflowable or a fixed layout EPUB will be generated. + + + Reflowable: The content flows, or reflows, to fit the screen and to fit the needs of the user. This also means that page style information (for example page size or header/footer content) is not exported. + + + Fixed: Gives greater control over presentation when a reflowable EPUB is not suitable for the content. + + + + +

Custom cover image

+Enter the full path of the custom cover image file. If the entry is empty, the exporter takes the cover image in the media directory (see below) when the name is one of the following: cover.gif, cover.jpg, cover.png or cover.svg. +The custom cover image is embedded in the EPUB file. + + +

Custom media directory

+ +Enter the custom media directory for the EPUB file. The media directory may contain a cover image as seen above, custom metadata and image links. + +By default, the exporter looks for custom media and custom metadata in the current document directory inside a folder with the same name of the document file name. For example, if the document name is MyText.odt, the default media folder for cover and metadata is MyText in the current directory. + +For custom metadata, you must provide a file with same name as the original filename and with extension as ".xmp". The provided metadata will override the internal document metadata. In the example above, the custom metadata must exist in the MyText directory as MyText.xmp. + +Image links mean that if you create relative links on images or text and they link an image that's available in the media directory, then this media will be available in the EPUB export result as a popup. + + +

Metadata

+Enter the custom metadata to override the document default metadata. These text fields can be left empty. + + +

Identifier

+Enter a unique identifier for the publication. + + +

Title

+Enter the title of the publication. + + +

Author

+Enter the Author of the publication. + + +

Language

+Language of the publication (see RFC4646 and ISO 639 for possible values). + + +

Date

+Last modification date for the publication. The value of this property must be an XML Schema dateTime conformant date in the form: CCYY-MM-DDThh:mm:ssZ. Default is the date and time when the export dialog opened. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08cca8e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + Export as PDF + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp + + + + + + +
+ +PDF;export +portable document format +exporting;to PDF + +MW made "PDF export a two level entry"UFI: write guide and move bookmarks there + + +

Export as PDF

+Saves the current file to Portable Document Format (PDF) version 1.4. A PDF file can be viewed and printed on any platform with the original formatting intact, provided that supporting software is installed. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + +

Export button

+Exports the current file in PDF format. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8fff630a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export Digital Signature + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_digital_signature.xhp + + + + +PDF export;digital signature +PDF export;sign PDF document +PDF export;time stamp + +
+ + +

Digital Signatures

+ This tab contains the options related to exporting to a digitally signed PDF. +
+ +
+ +
+ Digital signatures are used to ensure that the PDF was really created by the original author (i.e. you), and that the document has not been modified since it was signed. + The signed PDF export uses the keys and X.509 certificates already stored in your default key store location or on a smartcard. + + + + The key store to be used can be selected under %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences + Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - Certificate Path. + + + When using a smartcard, it must already be configured for use by your key store. This is usually done during installation of the smartcard software. + + + + +

Certificate

+ +

Use this certificate to digitally sign PDF documents

+ Allows you to select a certificate to be used for signing this PDF export. + + +

Select

+ Opens the Select Certificate dialog. + All certificates found in your selected key store are displayed. If the key store is protected by a password, you are prompted for it. When using a smartcard that is protected by a PIN, you are also prompted for that. + Select the certificate to use for digitally signing the exported PDF by clicking on the corresponding line, then click OK. + All other fields on the Digital Signatures tab will be accessible only after a certificate has been selected. + + +

Certificate password

+ Enter the password used for protecting the private key associated with the selected certificate. Usually this is the key store password. + If the key store password has already been entered in the Select Certificate dialog, the key store may already be unlocked and not require the password again. But to be on the safe side, enter it nevertheless. + When using a smartcard, enter the PIN here. Some smartcard software will prompt you for the PIN again before signing. This is cumbersome, but that's how smartcards work. + + + + +

Location, Contact information, Reason

+ These three fields allow you to optionally enter additional information about the digital signature that will be applied to the PDF (Where, by whom and why it was made). It will be embedded in the appropriate PDF fields and will be visible to anyone viewing the PDF. Each or all of the three fields may be left blank. + + +

+ During the PDF signing process, the TSA will be used to obtain a digitally signed timestamp that is then embedded in the signature. This (RFC 3161) timestamp will allow anyone viewing the PDF to verify when the document was signed. + If no TSA URL is selected (the default), the signature will not be timestamped, but will use the current time from your local computer. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08ff8827c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export General + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_general.xhp + + + + +PDF export;general options +hybrid PDF +PDF forms + +
+ + +

General

+ Sets the general options for exporting your document to a PDF file. Range, images, watermark, forms and other parameters. +
+
+ +
+ +

Range

+ Sets the export options for the pages included in the PDF file. + + +

All

+ Exports all defined print ranges. If no print range is defined, exports the entire document. + + + +

Pages

+ Exports the pages you type in the box. + To export a range of pages, use the format 3-6. To export single pages, use the format 7;9;11. If you want, you can export a combination of page ranges and single pages, by using a format like 3-6;8;10;12. + + +

Selection

+ Exports the current selection. + + +

View PDF after export

+ Open the exported document in the system default PDF viewer. + +

Images

+ Sets the PDF export options for images inside your document. + + + +

Lossless compression

+ Selects a lossless compression of images. All pixels are preserved. + + +

JPEG compression

+ Select a JPEG compression level. With a high quality level, almost all pixels are preserved. With a low quality level, some pixels are lost and artifacts are introduced, but file sizes are reduced. + + +

Quality

+ Enter the quality level for JPEG compression. + + +

Reduce image resolution

+ Select to resample or down-size the images to a lower number of pixels per inch. + + Select the target resolution for the images. + + EPS images with embedded previews are exported only as previews. EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders. + +

Watermark

+ Add a centered, vertical, light green watermark text to the page background. The watermark is not part of the source document. +

Sign with watermark

+ Check to enable the watermark signature. +

Text

+ Insert the text for the watermark signature. + You cannot adjust the position, orientation and size of the watermark. The watermark is not stored in the source document. +

General

+ Sets general PDF export options. + + +

Hybrid PDF (embed ODF file)

+ This setting enables you to export the document as a .pdf file containing two file formats: PDF and ODF. In PDF viewers it behaves like a normal .pdf file and it remains fully editable in %PRODUCTNAME. + + +

Archive (PDF/A, ISO 19005)

+ Converts to the PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2b, or PDF/A-3b format. All fonts used in the source document are embedded in the generated PDF file, and PDF tags are written. The primary purpose is to create an electronic document whose appearance is device and application independent, making it suitable for long term preservation. + PDF/A-2b is recommended for most users, because it allows for layers and transparency with shapes and images. It also compresses better (JPEG 2000) than PDF/A-1b, usually producing smaller files. PDF/A-3b is identical to PDF/A-2b, but also accepts embedding of other file formats. + + + + + +

Tagged PDF (add document structure)

+ Select to write PDF tags. This can increase file size by huge amounts. + Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document contents. This can help to display the document on devices with different screens, and when using screen reader software. + + +

Create PDF form

+ Choose to create a PDF form. This can be filled out and printed by the user of the PDF document. + + +

Submit format

+ Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file. + Select the format of the data that you will receive from the submitter: FDF (Forms Data Format), PDF, HTML, or XML. + This setting overrides the control's URL property that you set in the document. + + +

Allow duplicate field names

+ Allows you to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names. +

Structure

+Sets options for diverse features such as bookmarks, comments, page layout. + +

Export outlines

+ Select to export bookmarks of Writer documents as PDF bookmarks. Bookmarks are created for all outline paragraphs (Tools - Chapter Numbering) and for all table of contents entries for which you did assign hyperlinks in the source document. + Only paragraphs with Outline level 1 - 10 will be exported. The name of the Paragraph Style is irrelevant. For example, the default version of Paragraph Style Title is not exported when its Outline level is Text Body. To see a paragraph’s Outline level, choose Format - Paragraph - Outline & Numbering tab. + + + +

Export Placeholders

+ Export the placeholders fields visual markings only. The exported placeholder is ineffective. + + + + +

Comments as PDF annotations

+ Select to export comments of Writer and Calc documents as PDF annotations. + To export comments of Writer documents as they are shown in %PRODUCTNAME, choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences + Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print and select the In margins option in the Comments area. The exported pages will be scaled down and the comments will be placed into their margins. + + + + +

Export Notes Page

+ Export also the Notes pages view at the end of the exported PDF presentation document. + + +

Export only notes page

+ Exports only the Notes page views. + + +

Export hidden pages

+ Exports the document’s hidden slides. + + + + + +

Whole sheet export

+ Ignores each sheet’s paper size, print ranges and shown/hidden status and puts every sheet (even hidden sheets) on exactly one page, which is exactly as small or large as needed to fit the whole contents of the sheet. + + + + +

Export automatically inserted blank pages

+ If switched on, automatically inserted blank pages are exported to the PDF file. This is best if you are printing the pdf file double-sided. Example: In a book a chapter paragraph style is set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to export that even numbered page or not. + + +

Use reference XObjects

+ This option affects how PDF images are exported back to PDF. When this option is disabled, then the first page of the PDF data is included in the output. The PDF export merges the used images, fonts and other resources during export. This is a complex operation, but the result can be viewed in various viewers. When the option is enabled, then the reference XObject markup is used: this is a simple operation, but viewers have to support this markup to show vector images. Otherwise a fallback bitmap is shown in the viewer. +
+ +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0240ba70 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export Initial View + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_initial_view.xhp + + + + +PDF export;initial document view + +
+ + +

Initial View

+ Sets the options for the initial view of the PDF file in the external PDF viewer. +
+
+ +
+ +

Panes

+ + +

Page only

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows only the page contents. + + +

Outline and page

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows a bookmarks palette and the page contents.UFI: Adobe reader help names the panes as "palettes" + + +

Thumbnails and page

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows a thumbnails palette and the page contents. + + +

Open on page

+ Select to show the given page when the reader opens the PDF file. + +

Magnification

+ + +

Default

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page contents without zooming. If the reader software is configured to use a zoom factor by default, the page shows with that zoom factor. + + +

Fit in window

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit entirely into the reader's window. + + +

Fit width

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. + + +

Fit visible

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the text and graphics on the page zoomed to fit the width of the reader's window. + + + +

Zoom factor

+ Select a given zoom factor when the reader opens the PDF file. + +

Page layout

+ + +

Default

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows the pages according to the layout setting of the reader software. + + +

Single page

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows one page at a time. + + +

Continuous

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages in a continuous vertical column. + + +

Continuous facing

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right. + + +

First page is left

+ Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialog box. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fcafe8f33 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export Links + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_links.xhp + + + + +PDF export;links + + +
+ +
+ +

General

+

Export outlines as named destinations

+ The bookmarks (targets of references) in PDF files can be defined as rectangular areas. Additionally, bookmarks to named objects can be defined by their names. Enable the checkbox to export the names of objects in your document as valid bookmark targets. This allows you to link to those objects by name from other documents. + + +

Convert document references to PDF targets

+ Enable this checkbox to convert the URLs referencing other ODF files to PDF files with the same name. In the referencing URLs the extensions .odt, .odp, .ods, .odg, and .odm are converted to the extension .pdf. + + +

Export URLs relative to file system

+ Enable this checkbox to export URLs to other documents as relative URLs in the file system. See "relative hyperlinks" in the Help. + +

Cross-document links

+ Specify how to handle hyperlinks from your PDF file to other files. + + +

Default mode

+ Links from your PDF document to other documents will be handled as it is specified in your operating system. + + +

Open with PDF reader application

+ Cross-document links are opened with the PDF reader application that currently shows the document. The PDF reader application must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. + + +

Open with Internet browser

+ Cross-document links are opened with the Internet browser. The Internet browser must be able to handle the specified file type inside the hyperlink. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..50bbaedff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export Security + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_security.xhp + + + + +PDF export;security + +
+ + +

Security

+ Specifies the security options of the exported PDF file. +
+
+ +
+ + + The document permission restrictions set by password will be observed only by PDF readers compliant with the version 1.5 of the format. Thus, in older PDF readers, the restrictions may have no effect. +

Set passwords

+ Click to open a dialog where you enter the passwords. + You can specify a password needed to view the PDF. You can enter an optional password that allows the person viewing the PDF to edit and/or print the document. + +

Printing

+ + +

Not permitted

+ Printing the document is not permitted. + + +

Low resolution (150 dpi)

+ The document can only be printed in low resolution (150 dpi). Not all PDF readers honor this setting. + + +

High resolution

+ The document can be printed in high resolution. + +

Changes

+ + +

Not permitted

+ No changes of the content are permitted. + + +

Inserting, deleting, and rotating pages

+ Only inserting, deleting, and rotating pages is permitted. + + +

Filling in form fields

+ Only filling in form fields is permitted. + + +

Commenting, filling in form fields

+ Only commenting and filling in form fields is permitted. + + +

Any except extracting pages

+ All changes are permitted, except extracting pages. + + +

Contents

+ +

Enable copying of content

+ Select to enable copying of content to the clipboard. + + +

Enable text access for accessibility tools

+ Select to enable text access for accessibility tools. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..73dd4560b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Universal Accessibility (PDF Export) + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_universal_accessibility.xhp + + + + +PDF export;Universal Accessibility + +
+

Universal Accessibility (PDF/UA)

+Creates a universal accessibility-complying PDF file that follows the requirements of PDF/UA (ISO 14289) specifications. +
+ +
+ +then choose Universal Accessibility (PDF/UA). +
+ +The specification defines the required structure and formatting of a document and PDF features that are better suited for accessibility. This specification can also be used to produce documents that achieve W3C's Web Content Accessibility Guidelines 2.0 (WCAG 2.0). + +The present implementation (January 2020) checks the following: + + + + The document title is set. + + + The document language is set, or all styles in use have the language property set. + + + All images, graphics, OLE objects have an alternate (alt) text or a title. + + + Tables do not contain split or merged cells. + + + Only integrated numbering is used, no manual numbering. For example, do not type "1.", "2.", "3." at the beginning of paragraphs. + + + Hyperlink texts without the underlying hyperlinks. + + + The contrast between text and the background meets the WCAG specification. + + + No blinking text. + + + No footnotes or endnotes. + + + Headings must increase sequentially with no skips, for example, you cannot have Heading 1, Heading 3, and no Heading 2. + + + Text does not convey additional meaning with (direct) formatting. + + +You can check the document accessibility compliance before exporting with Tools - Check Accessibility + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bc83f27d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + PDF Export User Interface + /text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export_user_interface.xhp + + + + +PDF export;user interface + +
+ + +

User Interface

+ Specifies the options for the external PDF viewer user interface. +
+
+ +
+ +

Window options

+ + +

Resize window to initial page

+ Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a window displaying the whole initial page. + + +

Center window on screen

+ Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a reader window centered on screen. + + +

Open in full screen mode

+ Select to generate a PDF file that is shown in a full screen reader window in front of all other windows. + + +

Display document title

+ Select to generate a PDF file that is shown with the document title in the reader's title bar. + +

User interface options

+ + +

Hide menu bar

+ Select to hide the reader's menu bar when the document is active. + + +

Hide toolbar

+ Select to hide the reader's toolbar when the document is active. + + +

Hide window controls

+ Select to hide the reader's controls when the document is active. + +

Transitions

+ + +

Use transition effects

+ Select to export Impress slide transition effects to respective PDF effects. + +

Collapse Outlines

+ + +

Show All

+ Select to show all outline levels as bookmarks when the reader opens the PDF file. + + + +

Visible levels

+ Select to show bookmarks down to the selected level when the reader opens the PDF file. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..79aa0678c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Email as PDF +/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_send_as.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Email as PDF +UFI: name changed with #i46895 +Shows the Export as PDF dialog, exports the current document to Portable Document Format (PDF), and then opens an email sending window with the PDF as an attachment. +see i70482 +
+ +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ce927cd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Security Warning +/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp + + +UFI: Security Warning dialog on loading untrusted macro + + + +security;warning dialogs with macros +macros;security warning dialog + + + + +Security Warning + +When you open a document that contains an unsigned macro, or a signed macro from an unknown source, the Security Warning dialog opens. +Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options. +View Signature +Opens a dialog where you can view the signature. +Always trust macros from this source +Adds the current macro source to the list of trusted sources. +Enable Macros +Allows macros in the document to run. +Disable Macros +Does not allow macros in the document to run. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b9951e84 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +Select Certificate +/text/shared/01/selectcertificate.xhp + + + + + +

Select Certificate

+Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with. +
+ + +
+ + +

List

+Select the certificate that you want to digitally sign the current document with. + +

View Certificate

+Opens the View Certificate dialog where you can examine the selected certificate. + +

Description

+Type a purpose for the signature. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1570d30e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + Signing Existing PDF + /text/shared/01/signexistingpdf.xhp + + + + + digital signature;signing existing PDF + + Signing Existing PDF files + %PRODUCTNAME can digitally sign an existing PDF document. +
+ +
+ The file opens in %PRODUCTNAME Draw in read only mode. + Sign the PDF document as usual. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06663c442 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Signing the Signature Line + /text/shared/01/signsignatureline.xhp + + + + + + + digital signature;sign signature linesignature line;signing + +

Digitally Signing the Signature Line

+ %PRODUCTNAME lets you sign digitally a signature line in your document. + On signing a signature line, %PRODUCTNAME fills the line with the name of signer, adds the digital certificate issuer information and optionally insert the date of signature. +
+ Select the signature line graphic object context menu. Choose Sign Signature Line. +
+ +

Your Name

+ Enter your name as signer of the document. Your name will be inserted above the signature horizontal line. + +

Certificate

+ Click on the Select Certificate button to open the Select Certificate dialog box, where your certificates are listed. Select the certificate suitable for signing the document. + The information of the certificate issuer is inserted in the bottom of the Signature Line object. +

Instructions from the document creator

+ + This area displays the instructions entered by the document creator when adding the signature line. + +

Add comments

+ Enter comments about the signature. The comments are displayed in the Description field of the certificate. + If enabled when the signature line was created, the date of signature is inserted on the top right of the signature line object. + + Signed Signature Line + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..905680abd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Time Stamp Authorities for Digital Signatures + /text/shared/01/timestampauth.xhp + + + + + time stamp;digital signature + digital signature;time stamp + time stamp authority + TSA + time stamp for PDF digital signature + + +
+ +

Time Stamp Authority

+ Time Stamp Authorities (TSA) issue digitally signed timestamps (RFC 3161) that are optionally used during signed PDF export. +
+Adding a trusted timestamp to an electronic signature provides a digital seal of data integrity and a trusted date and time of when the transaction took place. Recipients of documents with a trusted timestamp can verify when the document was digitally or electronically signed, as well as verify that the document was not altered after the date the timestamp vouches for. +
+Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - TSAs +
+ +

List of Time Stamp Authorities

+Display the list of existing TSAs. + +

Add

+Opens the Name dialog to enter a new Time Stamping Authority URL. + +

Delete

+ Deletes the selected entry in the list. Deletion is immediate and does not display a confirmation dialog. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5f55e678 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Preview in Web Browser +/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp + + + +
+
+Preview in Web Browser +Creates a temporary copy of the current document in HTML format, opens the system default Web browser, and displays the HTML file in the Web browser. +
+
+
+ +
+The HTML formatted copy is written to the temporary files folder that you can select in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. When you quit %PRODUCTNAME, the HTML file will be deleted. +You can set the HTML export filter options by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5a3d3e26 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Data Navigator + /text/shared/01/xformsdata.xhp + + + +
+data structure of XForms + deleting;models/instances + models in XForms + Data Navigator;display options +MW made "Data Navigator.." a two level entry + + + + + +Data Navigator + + Specifies the data structure of the current XForms document. +
+ +Model name + Selects the XForms model that you want to use. + +Models + Adds, renames, and removes XForms models. + + +Add + Opens the Add Model dialog where you can add an XForm model. + +Enter the name. + +Model data updates change document's modification status + When enabled, the document status will be set to "modified" when you change any form control that is bound to any data in the model. When not enabled, such a change does not set the document status to "modified". + +Remove + Deletes the selected XForm model. You cannot delete the last model. + +Rename + Renames the selected Xform model. + +Show Details + Switches the display to show or hide details.UFI: not explained in spec +Instance + Lists the items that belong to the current instance. +Submissions + Lists the submissions.UFI. it's not in the spec + Bindings + Lists the bindings for the XForm.UFI. it's not in the spec + +Instances + This button has submenus to add, edit or remove instances. + +Add + Opens a dialog where you can add a new instance. + +Edit + Opens a dialog where you can modify the current instance. + +Remove + Deletes the current instance. You cannot delete the last instance. + Show data types + Switches the display to show more or less details.UFI: not explained in spec + + + + + + +Add + Opens a dialog to add a new item (element, attribute, submission, or binding) as a sub-item of the current item. + + +Edit + Opens a dialog to edit the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding). + + +Delete + Deletes the selected item (element, attribute, submission, or binding). + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18d488204 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Add / Edit +/text/shared/01/xformsdataadd.xhp + + + + + + + + +read-only items in Data Navigator +Data Navigator;adding/editing items + + MW added a new entry and deleted "editing;" and "adding;" + Add / Edit + Adds a new item or edits the selected item in the XForms Data Navigator. Items can be elements, attributes, submissions, or bindings. + %PRODUCTNAME inserts a new item directly after the currently selected item in the Data Navigator. A new attribute is added to the currently selected element. + + + Name + Enter the name of the item. + The attribute names must be unique within the same group. + + + Default value + Enter a default value for the selected item. + Settings + Specifies the properties of the selected item. + + + Data type + Select the data type for the selected item. + + + + Required + Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. + + +
+ The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter used namespaces and full XPath expressions. +
+ + + + Relevant + Declares the item as relevant. + + + + + + + Constraint + Declares the item as a constraint. + + + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can specify the constraint condition. + + + + Read-only + Declares the item as read-only. + + + + + + + Calculate + Declares that the item is calculated. + + + The Condition button opens the Add Condition dialog where you can enter the calculation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..706be0bc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Add Condition +/text/shared/01/xformsdataaddcon.xhp + + + + + + +conditions;items in Data Navigator +XForms;conditions + + + + Add Condition + Add a condition in this subdialog of the Add Item / Edit Item dialog of the Data Navigator. + + + Condition + Enter a condition.examples? + + Result + Displays a preview of the result. + + + Edit Namespaces + Opens the Form Namespaces dialog where you can add, edit, or delete namespaces. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58ce03d0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Change Data Binding +/text/shared/01/xformsdatachange.xhp + + + +editing;data binding of XForms +data binding change in XForms +MW deleted "changing;"Change Data Binding +Edit the data binding in the XForms Data Navigator.UFI: called from the control's context menuUFI: cannot find it in m145 +Model +Select the name of the XForms model.UFI: ?? not in spec +Item list +Displays the data binding for the selected form control. To change the data binding, select another item in the list click OK. To access the Add and Properties commands for an item, right-click the item. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06cf4d69b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Form Namespaces +/text/shared/01/xformsdataname.xhp + + + + + + +deleting;namespaces in XForms +organizing;namespaces in XForms +namespace organization in XForms +XForms;adding/editing/deleting/organizing namespaces + + MW deleted "editing;" and "adding;" and added "XForms;" + Form Namespaces + Use this dialog to organize namespaces. You can access this dialog through the Add Condition dialog of the Data Navigator. + + + Namespaces + Lists the currently defined namespaces for the form. + + + Add + Adds a new namespace to the list. + Use the Add Namespace dialog to enter the Prefix and URL. + + + Edit + Edits the selected namespace. + Use the Edit Namespace dialog to edit the Prefix and URL. + + + Delete + Deletes the selected namespace. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9718a620f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + Data (for XML Form Documents) + /text/shared/01/xformsdatatab.xhp + + + +
+ Data (for XML Form Documents) + The Data tab page of the Properties dialog for an XML Form document offers some XML forms settings. +
+
+ +
+ The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context. The following fields are available: + +XML data model + Select a model from the list of all models in the current document. + +Binding + Select or enter the name of a binding. Selecting the name of an existing binding associates the binding with the form control. Entering a new name creates a new binding and associates it with the form control. + +Binding expression + Enter the DOM node what's a DOM node? spec doesn't tellto bind the control model towhat's a control model? spec doesn't tell. may be a typo in spec: control's model?. Click the ... button for a dialog to enter the XPath expression. + +Required + Specifies if the item must be included on the XForm. + +Relevant + Declares the item as relevant. + +Read-only + Declares the item as read-only. + +Constraint + Declares the item as a constraint. + +Calculation + Declares that the item is calculated. + +Data type + Select a data type which the control should be validated against. + +x + Select a user-defined data type and click the button to delete the user-defined data type. + ++ + Click the button to open a dialog where you can enter the name of a new user-defined data type. The new data type inherits all facets from the currently selected data type. + The following lists all facets that are valid for data types. Some facets are only available for some data types. + +Whitespaces + Specifies how whitespaces are to be handled when a string of the current data type is being processed. Possible values are "Preserve", "Replace", and "Collapse". The semantics follow the definition at https://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/#rf-whiteSpace. + +Pattern + Specifies a regular expression pattern. Strings validated against the data type must conform to this pattern to be valid. The XSD data type syntax for regular expressions is different from the regular expression syntax used elsewhere in %PRODUCTNAME, for example in the Find & Replace dialog. + +Digits (total) + Specifies the maximum total number of digits that values of the decimal data type can have. + +Digits (fraction) + Specifies the maximum total number of fractional digits that values of the decimal data type can have. + +Max. (inclusive) + Specifies an inclusive upper bound for values. + +Max. (exclusive) + Specifies an exclusive upper bound for values. + +Min. (inclusive) + Specifies an inclusive lower bound for values. + +Min. (exclusive) + Specifies an exclusive lower bound for values. + +Length + Specifies the number of characters for a string. + +Length (at least) + Specifies the minimum number of characters for a string. + +Length (at most) + Specifies the maximum number of characters for a string. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..df313347a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + Print File Directly + /text/shared/02/01110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +If you select text or a graphic and click the Print File Direct icon, you are prompted to print the selection or the document. +
+ + + + +Print File Directly Icon + + + + Print File Directly + + +
+
+ + +If the current document uses a printer that is not the default printer for your operating system, the Print File Direct icon opens the Print dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8842c8ba2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,284 @@ + + + + + + + Show Draw Functions + /text/shared/02/01140000.xhp + + + + +Drawing bar +lines; draw functions +polygon drawing +freeform lines; draw functions +text boxes; positioning +headings; entering as text box +text objects; draw functions +ticker text +text; animating +vertical callouts +vertical text boxes +cube drawing +triangle drawing +ellipse drawing +rectangle drawing +shapes +MW moved "frames;" and "selecting;" to the shared guide groups.xhpMW added 5 entries + +
+ +

Show Draw Functions

+Click to open or close the Drawing bar, where you can add shapes, lines, text, and callouts to the current document. +
+You can switch on and off the Drawing toolbar of Writer and Calc documents using an icon on the Standard toolbar. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Show Draw Functions + + +
+
+You can change which buttons are visible in the toolbars. Right-click a toolbar to access the Visible Buttons command. +

Selection

+ + + + Icon + + + Lets you select objects in the current document. To select an object, click the object with the arrow. To select more than one object, drag a selection frame around the objects. To add an object to a selection, press Shift, and then click the object. + + +
+ +

Line

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a straight line where you drag in the current document. To constrain the line to 45 degrees, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+To enter text on a line, double-click the line and type or paste your text. The text direction corresponds to the direction you dragged to draw the line. To hide the line, select Invisible in the Line Style box on the Drawing Object Properties bar. + +

Rectangle

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a rectangle where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to place a corner of the rectangle, and drag to the size you want. To draw a square, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ +

Ellipse

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws an oval where you drag in the current document. Click where you want to draw the oval, and drag to the size you want. To draw a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ +

Polygon

+
+ + + + Icon + + +
+ Draws a line composed of a series of straight line segments. Drag to draw a line segment, click to define the endpoint of the line segment, and then drag to draw a new line segment. Double-click to finish drawing the line. To create a closed shape, double-click the starting point of the line. + Hold the Shift key while drawing a polygon to position new points at 45 degree angles. + The Edit Points mode enables you to interactively modify the individual points of the polygon. +
+ + +
+
+ +

Curve

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a smooth Bezier curve. Click where you want the curve to start, drag, release, and then move the pointer to where you want the curve to end and click. Move the pointer and click again to add a straight line segment to the curve. Double-click to finish drawing the curve. To create a closed shape, double click the starting point of the curve. The arc of the curve is determined by the distance you drag. + + +
+ +

Freeform Line

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a freeform line where you drag in the current document. To end the line, release the mouse button. To draw a closed shape, release the mouse button near the starting point of the line. + + +
+ +

Arc

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws an arc in the current document. To draw an arc, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the arc. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw an arc that is based on a circle, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ +

Ellipse Pie

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of an oval and two radius lines in the current document. To draw an ellipse pie, drag an oval to the size you want, and then click to define the first radius line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the second radius line and click. You do not need to click on the oval. To draw a circle pie, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ +

Circle Segment

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a filled shape that is defined by the arc of a circle and a diameter line in the current document. To draw a circle segment, drag a circle to the size you want, and then click to define the starting point of the diameter line. Move your pointer to where you want to place the endpoint of the diameter line and click. You do not need to click on the circle. To draw an ellipse segment, hold down Shift while you drag. + + +
+ + +

Text Box

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a text box with horizontal text direction where you drag in the current document. Drag a text box to the size you want anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. Rotate the text box to get rotated text. + + +
+ + +

Text Animation

+ + + + Icon + + + Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. Drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. To assign an animation effect, choose Format - Text - Text Animation. Inserts animated text with horizontal text direction into the current document. + + +
+ +

Callouts

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with horizontal text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Points

+Enables you to edit points on your drawing. + + +

From File

+ + +

Extrusion On/Off

+Switches the 3D effects on and off for the selected objects. + +
+ +

Vertical Callouts

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a line that ends in a rectangular callout with vertical text direction from where you drag in the current document. Drag a handle of the callout to resize the callout. To add text, click the edge of the callout, and then type or paste your text. To change a rectangular callout to a rounded callout, drag the largest corner handle when the pointer changes to a hand. Only available when Asian language support is enabled. + + +
+
+
+ +

Vertical Text

+ + + + Icon + + + Draws a text box with vertical text direction where you click or drag in the current document. Click anywhere in the document, and then type or paste your text. You can also move the cursor to where you want to add the text, drag a text box, and then type or paste your text. Only available when Asian language support is enabled. + + +
+
+
+Tips for working with the Drawing bar. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..442bd3e0b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,565 @@ + + + + + + + Form Controls + /text/shared/02/01170000.xhp + + + + +form controls;toolbars +inserting; form fields +form fields +command button creation +buttons; form functions +controls; inserting +push buttons;creating +radio button creation +check box creation +labels; form functions +fixed text; form functions +text boxes;form functions +list box creation +picklist creation +drop-down lists in form functions +combo box creation +selecting;controls +controls; select mode +MW deleted "option field creation", changed "option button" to "push button" and "selections;" to "selecting;" + +
+

Form Controls

+The Form Controls toolbar or sub-menu contains tools that you need to create an interactive form. You can use the toolbar or sub-menu to add controls to a form in a text, drawing, spreadsheet, presentation, or HTML document, for example a button that runs a macro. +
+
+Choose View - Toolbars - Form Controls. +Icon on the Insert toolbar (you may need to enable this initially invisible icon): +
+ + + + Icon Select + + + Form Controls + + +
+
+
+XML Form documents (XForms) use the same controls. +To create a form, open a document and use the Form Controls toolbar to add and define the form controls. If you want, you can also link the form to a database, so that you can use the controls to manipulate a database. +When you create a form in an HTML document, you can use the form to send data over the Internet. +

To add a control to a document

+ + + On the Form Controls toolbar, click the icon of the control that you want to add. + + + Then click in the document, and drag to create the control. + To create a square control, hold down the Shift key while you drag. + + +To add a field from the field list of a table or query to a form, drag a cell into the form. In a text document, you can also drag a column header to add a field to a form. To include a label for the field, hold down CommandCtrl+Shift when you drag a column head. +

Modifying a Control

+ + + Right-click the control and choose Control Properties. A dialog opens where you can define the properties of the control. + + + To specify a accelerator key for a control, add a tilde (~) in front of the character in the label for the control. + + + You can drag and drop controls from one document to another document. You can also copy and paste controls between documents. When you insert a control from another document, $[officename] analyzes the data source, content type, and content properties of the control so that the control fits the logical structure in the target document. For example, a control that displays contents from an address book continues to display the same contents after you copy the control to a different document. You can view these properties on the Data tab page of the Form properties dialog. + + +
+

Selectcontrols and design bars

+ + + + Icon Select + + + This icon switches the mouse pointer to the select mode, or deactivates this mode. The select mode is used to select the controls of the current form. + + +
+ + + +
+ +
+

Wizards On/OffControls bar

+ + + + Icon Toggle Form Control Wizards + + + Turns on and turns off the automatic form controls wizards. + These wizards help you to enter the properties of list boxes, table controls, and other controls. + + +
+
+ + +

Form DesignControls bar

+ + + + + Icon Form Design Tools + + + + Opens the Form Design toolbar. + + +
+ +
+ +

Label Fieldcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Label Field + + + Creates a field for displaying text. These labels are only for displaying predefined text. Entries cannot be made in these fields. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Text Boxcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Text Box + + + Creates a text box. Text boxes are fields in which the user can enter text. In a form, text boxes display data or allow for new data input. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Check Boxcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Check Box + + + Creates a check box. Check boxes allow you to activate or deactivate a function in a form. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Option Buttoncontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Option Button + + + Creates an option button. Option buttons enable the user to choose one of several options. Option buttons with the same functionality are given the same name (Name property). Normally, they are given a group box. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

List Boxcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon List Box + + + Creates a list box. A list box lets users select an entry from a list. If the form is linked to a database and the database connection is active, the List Box Wizard will automatically appear after the list box is inserted in the document. This wizard helps you create the list box. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Combo Boxcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Combo Box + + + Creates a combo box. A combo box is a single-line list box with a drop-down list from which users choose an option. You can assign the "read-only" property to the combo box so that users cannot enter other entries than those found in the list. If the form is bound to a database and the database connection is active, the Combo Box Wizard will automatically appear after you insert the combo box in the document. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Push Buttoncontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Push Button + + + Creates a push button. This function can be used to execute a command for a defined event, such as a mouse click. + You can apply text and graphics to these buttons. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Image Buttonmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon image button + + + Creates a button displayed as an image. Aside from the graphic representation, an image button has the same properties as a "normal" button. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Formatted Fieldcontrols bar

+ + + + Icon Formatted Field + + + Creates a formatted field. A formatted field is a text box in which you can define how the inputs and outputs are formatted, and which limiting values apply. + A formatted field has special control properties (choose Format - Control). + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Date Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Date Field + + + Creates a date field. If the form is linked to a database, the date values can be adopted from the database. + If you assign the "Dropdown" property to the date field, the user can open a calendar to select a date under the date field. This also applies to a date field within a Table Control field. + Date fields can be easily edited by the user with the up arrow and down arrow keys. Depending on the cursor position, the day, month, or the year is can be increased or decreased using the arrow keys. + Specific Remarks on Date Fields. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Numerical Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Numerical Field + + + Creates a numerical field. If the form is linked to a database, the numerical values in the form can be adopted from the database. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Group Boxmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Group Box + + + Creates a frame to visually group several controls. Group boxes allow you to group option buttons in a frame. + If you insert a group frame into the document, the Group Element Wizard starts, which allows you to easily create an option group. +Note: When you drag a group box over already existing controls and then want to select a control, you have to first open the context menu of the group box and choose Arrange - Send to Back. Then select the control while pressing CommandCtrl. +Group boxes are used only for a visual effect. A functional grouping of option fields can be made through the name definition: under the Name properties of all option fields, enter the same name in order to group them. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Time Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Time Field + + + Creates a time field. If the form is linked to a database, the time values for the form can be adopted from the database. + Time fields can be easily edited by the user with the up and down arrow keys. Depending on the cursor position, the hours, minutes, or the seconds are increased or decreased using the arrow keys. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Currency Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Currency Field + + + Creates a currency field. If the form is linked to a database, the currency field contents for in the form can be adopted from the database. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Pattern Fieldmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Pattern Field + + + Creates a pattern field. Pattern fields consist of an edit mask and a literal mask. The edit mask determines which data can be entered. The literal mask determines the contents of the pattern field when loading the form. + Please note that pattern fields are not exported into HTML format. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Table Controlmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Table Control + + + Creates a table control to display a database table. If you create a new table control, the Table Element Wizard appears. + Special information about Table Controls. + + +
+
+ + + +
+ +

Image Controlmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Image Control + + + Creates an image control. It can only be used to add images from a database. In the form document, double-click one of these controls to open the Insert Graphic dialog to insert the image. There is also a context menu (not in design mode) with commands for inserting and deleting the image. + Images from a database can be displayed in a form, and new images can be inserted in the database as long as the image control is not write-protected. The control must refer to a database field of the image type. Therefore, enter the data field into the properties window on the Data tab page. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

File Selectionmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon File Selection + + + Creates a button that enables file selection. + + +
+
+ +
+ +

Spin Buttonmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Spin Button + + + Creates a spin button. + + +
+If you add a spin button to a Calc spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between the spin button and a cell. As a result, when you change the contents of a cell, the contents of the spin button are updated. Conversely, if you change the value of the spin button, the contents of the cell are updated.UFI: see spec doc spinbutton_form_control.sxw +
+ +
+ +

Scrollbarmore controls bar

+ + + + Icon Scrollbar + + + Creates a scrollbar. + + +
+You can specify the following properties for a scrollbar: + + + + UI name + + + Semantics + + + + + Scroll value min + + + Specifies the minimum height or the minimum width of a scrollbar. + + + + + Scroll value max + + + Specifies the maximum height or the maximum width of a scrollbar. + + + + + Default scroll value + + + Specifies the default value of a scrollbar, used when the form is reset. + + + + + Orientation + + + Specifies the orientation of a scrollbar, that is, horizontal or vertical. + + + + + Small change + + + Specifies the minimum amount by which you can scroll a scrollbar, for example, by clicking an arrow. + + + + + Large change + + + Specifies the amount that a large step scrolls a scrollbar, for example, when you click between the scrollbar thumb and a scrollbar arrow. + + + + + Delay + + + Specifies the delay in milliseconds between scrollbar trigger events. For example, the delay that occurs when you click an arrow button on the scrollbar and hold down the mouse button. + + + + + Symbol color + + + Specifies the color of the arrows on the scrollbar. + + + + + Visible Size + + + Specifies the size of the scrollbar thumb in "value units". For example, a value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min.") / 2 results in a scrollbar thumb that occupies half of the scrollbar. + To make the width of the scrollbar equal to the height of the scrollbar, set the Visible Size to zero. + + +
+In a Calc spreadsheet, you can use the Data tab page to create a two-way link between a scrollbar and a cell.UFI: see spec doc scrollbar_form_control.sxw +
+
+ Context Menu Commands +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5dd71eb31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Context Menu of a Control Field + /text/shared/02/01170001.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Context Menu of a Control Field +The context menu of a control field has the following commands. + +Replace with +Calls a submenu where you can select a control type to replace the control selected in the document. As many properties as possible are adopted. + +Text box +The selected control is transformed into a text box. + +Button +The selected control is transformed into a button. + +Label field +The selected control is transformed into a label. + +List Box +The selected control is transformed into a list box. + +Check Box +The selected control is transformed into a check box. + +Radio Button +The selected control is transformed into an option button. + +Combo Box +The selected control is transformed into a combo box. + +Image Button +The selected control is transformed into an image button. + +File Selection +The selected control is transformed into a file selection. + +Date Field +The selected control is transformed into a date field. + +Time Field +The selected control is transformed into a time field. + +Numerical Field +The selected control is transformed into a numerical field. + +Currency Field +The selected control is transformed into a currency field. + +Pattern Field +The selected control is transformed into a pattern field. + +Image Control +The selected control is transformed into an image control. + +Formatted Field +The selected control is transformed into a formatted field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e43002ac0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Special properties of a formatted field + /text/shared/02/01170002.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +formatted fields; properties +fields; formatted fields +controls; formatted fields + +Special properties of a formatted field + +Formatting: You can set the Formatting property by clicking the ... button in the Formatting line of the Properties: Formatted Field dialog. The Number Format dialog appears. +If the formatted field is connected to the text field of a database, the entries in this field will be treated as text. If the formatted field is connected to a field of the database that can be displayed as a number, the input is treated as numbers. The date and time are also handled internally as numbers. + +Min. value and Max. value: You can enter the minimum and maximum numeric value for a formatted field. The min and max values determine the output of existing data (Example: Min. value is 5, the connected database field contains the integer value 3. The output is 5, but the value in the database is not modified) and the input of new data (Example: Max. value is 10 and you enter 20. The input is corrected and 10 is written in the database). If the fields are not filled in for Min. value and Max. value, no limits will be applied. For formatted fields that are connected to a database text field, these two values and the Default value do not apply. + +Default value: This value is set for new records as the default value. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6ad9fe89d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + Special Tips for Date Fields + /text/shared/02/01170003.xhp + + + +date fields; propertiesSpecial Tips for Date Fields +When you enter a year using two digits, the corresponding four digit value is determined by a setting in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. For example, if 1935 is set as the lower limiting value and you enter 34 as a date value, then the result is 2034 instead of 1934. +The pre-set limit value will be saved for each document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e97eef837 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170004.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Special Tips for Table Controls + /text/shared/02/01170004.xhp + + + +table controls; properties +controls; properties of table controls +table controls;keyboard-only edit mode + +Special Tips for Table Controls +You can define a table control to display the records as you like. In other words you can define data fields for displaying or editing data like in a database form. +The following fields are possible in a table control: text, date, time and currency field, numeric field, pattern field, check box and combo box. In the case of combined date/time fields, two columns are created automatically. +The number of selected lines, if any are selected, is in parentheses after the total number of records. +To insert columns into the table control, click in the column heads and bring up the context menu. The following commands are available: +Insert Column +Calls a submenu to select a data field to adopt it in the table control. +Configure the table control using drag and drop: Open the data source browser and drag the desired fields out of the data source browser and on to the column heads of the table control. A pre-configured column is created. +Replace with +Opens a submenu to select a data field to replace the data field selected in the table control. +Delete Column +Deletes the currently selected column. +Column +Opens the properties dialog of the selected column. +Hide Columns +Hides the selected column. Its properties are not changed. +Show columns +Calls a submenu where you can select the columns to show again. To show only one column, click the column name. You see only the first 16 hidden columns. If there are more hidden columns, choose the More command to call the Show Columns dialog. +More +Calls the Show Columns dialog. + + +In the Show Columns dialog you can select the columns to be shown. Hold down the Shift or CommandCtrl key to select multiple entries. +All +Click All if you want to show all columns. +Keyboard-only control of Table Controls +If you use the keyboard only to travel through controls in your document, you will find one difference to the other types of controls: the Tab key does not move the cursor to the next control, but moves to the next column inside the table control. Press CommandCtrl+Tab to move to the next control, or press Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab to move to the previous control. +To enter the special keyboard-only edit mode for Table Controls: +The form document must be in Design mode. + + + Press CommandCtrl+F6 to select the document. + + + Press Shift+F4 to select the first control. If the Table Control is not the first control, press Tab until it is selected. + + + Press Enter to enter the edit mode. The handles are shown farther out from the control border. + + + In the edit mode, you can open the edit mode context menu by pressing Shift+F10. + + + If you want to edit columns, press Shift+Space to enter column edit mode. Now you can rearrange the order of columns with CommandCtrl+Arrow keys. The Delete key deletes the current column. + + + Press the Esc key to exit the edit mode. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..415a7cf34 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Control Properties + /text/shared/02/01170100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+controls; properties of form controls +properties; form controls + + + +

Control Properties

+ Opens a dialog for editing the properties of a selected control. +
+
+ +
+You can only call the Properties dialog when in the Design mode with a control selected. +
+If you enter data in the Properties dialog, note that multiline input is possible for certain drop-down combo boxes. This concerns all fields in which an SQL statement can be entered, as well as the properties of text boxes or label fields. You can open these fields and enter text in the opened list. The following shortcut keys are valid: + + + + Keys + + + Effect + + + + + OptionAlt+Down Arrow: + + + Opens the combo box. + + + + + OptionAlt+Up Arrow: + + + Closes the combo box. + + + + + Shift+Enter + + + Inserts a new line. + + + + + Up Arrow + + + Places the cursor into the previous line. + + + + + Down Arrow + + + Places the cursor into the next line. + + + + + Enter + + + Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. + + +
+As with list boxes or combo boxes, you can open or close the list with a mouse click at the arrow on the right end of the field. However, the input here can be entered either in the opened list or in the top text field. An exception is the properties that expect a list representation, for example, the property "List Entries", which can be set for the control fields List Box and Combo Box. Here, you can only edit the entries when the field is opened. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6b316f2fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,821 @@ + + + + + + + General + /text/shared/02/01170101.xhp + + + +
+

General

UFI: had to remove all internal links to this file because all the targets vanished and no time to reinsert them all + This General tab enables you to define the general properties of a form control. These properties differ, depending on the control type. Not all of the following properties are available for every control. +
+
+ +
+If you export the current form document to HTML format, the default control values are exported, not the current control values. Default values are determined - depending on the type of control - by the properties' Default value (for example, in text fields), Default status (for check boxes and option fields), and Default selection (for list boxes). + +
+ +

Enabled

+ If a control field has the property "Enabled" (Yes), the form user can use the control field. Otherwise (No), it is disabled and greyed out. +
+
+ +

Line count

+ Specifies how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. This setting is only active if you chose "Yes" in the Dropdown option. For combo boxes with the "Dropdown" property, you can specify how many lines should be displayed in the dropdown list. With control fields which do not have the Dropdown option, the line's display will be specified by the size of the control field and the font size. +
+
+ +

ActionUFI: renamed from Button type to Action, see dba.features: Form navigation functionality for command buttons

+ The "Action" property determines the action that occurs when you activate a button. You can use navigation actions to design your own database navigation buttons. +The following table describes the actions that you can assign to a button: + + + + Action + + + Description + + + + + None + + + No action occurs. + + + + + Submit form + + + Sends the data that is entered in other control fields of the current form to the address that is specified in Form Properties under URL. + Enter the URL into the form's data property "URL" text box when you export to a PDF file.UFI: see #i36574# + + + + + Reset form + + + Resets the settings in other control fields to the predefined defaults: Default Status, Default Selection, Default Value. + + + + + Open document / web page + + + Opens the URL that is specified under URL. You can use Frame to specify the target frame. + + + + + First record + + + Moves the current form to the first record. + + + + + Previous record + + + Moves the current form to the previous record. + + + + + Next record + + + Moves the current form to the next record. + + + + + Last record + + + Moves the current form to the last record. + + + + + Save record + + + Saves the current record, if necessary. + + + + + Undo data entry + + + Reverses the changes in the current record. + + + + + New record + + + Moves the current form to the insert row. + + + + + Delete record + + + Deletes the current record. + + + + + Refresh form + + + Reloads the most recently saved version of the current form. + + +
+
+
+ +

Dropdown

+ Specifies whether the combo box should dropdown (Yes) or not (No). A control field with the dropdown property has an additional arrow button which opens the list of the existing form entries per mouse click. Under Line count, you can specify how many lines (or rows) should be displayed in the dropdown state. Combination fields can have the dropdown property. + Combo boxes that were inserted as columns in a table control are always dropdown as the default. +
+
+ + +

Alignment / Graphics alignment

+Specifies the alignment option for text or graphics that are used on a control. The alignment options are left-aligned, right-aligned, and centered. These options are available for the following elements: + + + Title of Label fields, + + + Content of text fields, + + + Content of table fields in the columns of a table control, + + + Graphics or text that are used in buttons. + The Alignment option for buttons is called Graphics alignment. + + +
+
+ +

AutoFill

+ Assigns the AutoFill function to a combo box. The AutoFill function displays a list of previous entries after you start to type an entry.UFI: changed AutoComplete to AutoFill (got changed by error in the UI, so we stay with it now, according to FS) +
+
+ +

Label field

+ Specifies the source for the label of the control. The text of the label field will be used instead of the name of a database field. For example, in the Filter Navigator, Search dialog, and as a column name in the table view. + To define one character of the label as a mnemonic, so that the user can access this control by pressing the character on the keyboard, insert a tilde (~) character in front of the character in the label. + Only the text of a group frame can be used as the label field when using radio buttons. This text applies to all of the radio buttons of the same group. + If you click on the ... button next to the text field, you will see the Label Field Selection dialog. Select a label from the list. + Check the No assignment box to remove the link between a control and the assigned label field. +
+
+ +

Width

+ Sets the column width in the table control field. Sets the column width in the table control field in the units that are specified in the %PRODUCTNAME module options. If you want, you can enter a value followed by a valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. +
+
+ +

RepeatUFI: see spec spinbutton_form_control.sxw

+ Specifies if the action of a control such as a spin button repeats when you click the control and hold the mouse button down. +
+
+ +

Delay

+ Specifies the delay in milliseconds between repeating events. A repeating event occurs when you click an arrow button or the background of a scrollbar, or one of the record navigation buttons of a Navigation bar, and you keep the mouse button pressed for some time. You can enter a value followed by a valid time unit, for example, 2 s or 500 ms. +
+
+ +

Record marker

+ Specifies whether the first column is displayed with row labels, in which the current record is marked by an arrow. +
+
+ +

Date format

+ Here you can determine the format you want for the date readout. With date fields you can determine the format for the date readout. + All format fields (date, time, currency, numeric) are formatted automatically in the selected format as soon as you leave them regardless of how you entered the input. +
+
+ +

Spin Button

+ The "Yes" option transforms the control field into a spin button, where corresponding arrow buttons are added. Numerical fields, currency fields, date and time fields can be introduced as spin buttons in the form. +
+
+ +

Tristate

+ Specifies whether a check box can also represent ZERO values of a linked database apart from the TRUE and FALSE values. This function is only available if the database accepts three states: TRUE, FALSE and ZERO. + The "Tristate" property is only defined for database forms, not for HTML forms. +
+
+ +

Printable

+ Specifies whether you want the control field to appear in a document's printout. +
+
+ +

PositionX

+ Defines the X position of the control, relative to the anchor. +
+
+ +

PositionY

+ Defines the Y position of the control, relative to the anchor. +
+
+ +

Anchor

+ Defines where the control will be anchored. +
+
+ +

Width

+ Defines the width of the control. +
+
+ +

Height

+ Defines the height of the control. +
+
+ +

Edit mask

+ Defines the edit mask. By specifying a character code you can determine what the user can enter in the control field. By specifying the character code in pattern fields, you can determine what the user can enter in the pattern field. + The length of the edit mask determines the number of the possible input positions. If the user enters characters that do not correspond to the edit mask, the input is rejected when the user leaves the field. You can enter the following characters to define the edit mask: + + + + Character + + + Meaning + + + + + L + + + A text constant. This position cannot be edited. The character is displayed at the corresponding position of the Literal Mask. + + + + + a + + + The characters a-z and A-Z can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. + + + + + A + + + The characters A-Z can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + + + + + c + + + The characters a-z, A-Z, and 0-9 can be entered. Capital characters are not converted to lowercase characters. + + + + + C + + + The characters A-Z and 0-9 can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + + + + + N + + + Only the characters 0-9 can be entered. + + + + + x + + + All printable characters can be entered. + + + + + X + + + All printable characters can be entered. If a lowercase letter is entered, it is automatically converted to a capital letter. + + +
+For the literal mask "__.__.2000", for example, define the "NNLNNLLLLL" edit mask so that the user can only enter four digits when entering a date. +
+
+ +

Strict format

+ You can have a format check with control fields that accept formatted contents (date, time, and so on). If the strict format function is activated (Yes), only the allowed characters are accepted. For example, in a date field, only numbers or date delimiters are accepted; all alphabet entries typed with your keyboard are ignored. +
+
+ +

Frame

+ Specifies the target frame to display the document that is opened by the "Open document / web page" action. You can also specify the target frame to display a URL that you open when you click a button that has been assigned to the "Open document or web page" action. +
+If you click the field, you can select an option from the list that specifies into which frame the next document should be loaded. The following possibilities exist: + + + + Entry + + + Meaning + + + + + _blank + + + The next document is created in a new empty frame. + + + + + _parent + + + The next document is created in a parent frame. If no parent exists, the document is created in the same frame. + + + + + _self + + + The next document is created in the same frame. + + + + + _top + + + The next document is created in a top-level window, that is, in the highest frame of the hierarchy; if the current frame is already a top window, the document is created in the current frame. + + +
+
+ The "Frame" property is relevant for HTML forms, but not for database forms. +
+
+ +

Graphics

+ An image button has a "Graphics" property. The "Graphics" property specifies the graphic's path and file name that you want to have displayed on the button. If you select the graphic file with the ... button, the path and file name will be automatically included in the text box. +
+
+ +

Help text

+ Provides the option of entering a help text that will be displayed as a tip on the control. The tip shows the text in user mode when the mouse is moved over the control. + For URL type buttons, the help text appears as the extended tip instead of the URL address entered under URL. +
+
+ +

Help URL

+ Specifies a batch label in URL spelling which refers to a help document and which can be called with the help of the control field. The help for the control field help can be opened if the focus is positioned on the control field and the user presses F1. +
+
+ +

Background color

+ Sets the background color of the control field. A background color is available for most control fields. If you click on Background color, a list will open which enables you to select among various colors. The "Standard" option adopts the system setting. If the desired color is not listed, click the ... button to define a color in the Color dialog. +
+
+ + + +

Scrollbar

+ Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. Adds the scrollbar type that you specify to a text box. +
+
+ +

Incr./decrement value

+ Determines intervals to add or subtract with each activation of the spin button control. +
+
+ +

Value step

+ Determines spin button intervals. You can preset the value intervals for numerical and currency spin buttons. Use the up and down arrows of the spin button to increase or decrease the value. +
+
+ +

List entries

+ Defines the list entries visible in the document. Open this list and type your text. Use Shift+Enter for a new line. With list and combo boxes, you can define the list entries that will be visible in the document. Open the List entries field and type your text. Please note the tips referring to the keyboard controls. + The predefined default list entry is entered into the Default selection combo box. + Note that the list entries entered here are only incorporated into the form if, on the Data tab under List Content Type, the option "Value List" is selected. + If you do not want the list entries to be written to the database or transmitted to the recipient of the Web form, but rather assigned values that are not visible in the form, you can assign the list entries to other values in a value list. The value list is determined on the Data tab. Under Type of List Contents, select the option "Value List". Then enter the values under List Contents that are to be assigned to the corresponding visible list entries of the form. For the correct assignment, the order in the value list is relevant. + For HTML documents, a list entry entered on the General tab corresponds to the HTML tag <OPTION>; an entry of the value list entered on the Data tab under List Contents corresponds to the <OPTION VALUE=...> tag. +
+
+ +

Date max

+ Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. Determines a date which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. +
+
+ +

Max text length

+ Defines the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. For text and combo boxes, you can define the maximum number of characters that the user can enter. If this control field property is uncertain, the default setting will be zero. + If the control is linked to a database and the text length is to be accepted from the field definition of the database, you must not enter the text length here. The settings are only accepted from the database if the control property was not defined ("Not Defined" state). +
+
+ + + +

Value max

+ Defines a value for the control field which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. For numerical and currency fields, you can determine the maximum value that the user can enter. +
+
+ +

Time max

+ Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. Determines a time which can not be exceeded by another value introduced by the user. +
+
+ +

Multiselection

+ Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. Allows you to select more than one item in a list box. +
+
+ +rich text control +controls; rich text control + + + +

Text typeUFI: now renamed to Text Type, see #i24386#UFI: see dba spec prop_browser_enhancements.sxw

+ Allows you to use line breaks and formatting in a control field, such as a text box or label. To manually enter a line break, press the Enter key. Select "Multi-line with formatting" to enter formatted text. + If you select the text type "Multi-line with formatting", you cannot bind this control to a database field. + This control is named "Multiline input" for a text column inside a table control. +
+
+ +

Word breakUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Displays text on more than one line. Allows you to use line breaks in a text box, so that you can enter more than one line of text. To manually enter a line break, press Enter. +
+
+ +

ToggleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Specifies if a Push button behaves as a Toggle Button. If you set Toggle to "Yes", you can switch between the "selected" and "not selected" control states when you click the button or press the Spacebar while the control has the focus. A button in the "selected" state appears "pressed in". +
+
+ +

Take Focus on ClickUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ If you set this option to "Yes", the Push button receives the focus when you click the button. +
+
+ +

Hide selectionUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Specifies whether a text selection on a control remains selected when the focus is no longer on a control. If you set Hide selection to "No", the selected text remains selected when the focus is no longer on the control that contains the text. +
+
+ +

StyleUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Specifies whether Check boxes and Option buttons are displayed in a 3D look (default) or a flat look. +
+
+ +

Border colorUFI: see dba spec form_controls_interop_1.sxw

+ Specifies the border color for controls that have the "Border" property set to "flat". +
+
+ +

Symbol color

+ Specifies the color for symbols on controls, for example the arrows on a scrollbar. +
+
+ +

Date min

+ Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. Determines the earliest date that a user can enter. +
+
+ + + +

Value min

+ You can determine here a value for the control field to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. For numerical and currency fields you can determine a minimum value to prevent the user from entering a smaller value. +
+
+ +

Time min

+ Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. Determines the minimum time that a user can enter. +
+
+ +

Decimal accuracy

+ Determines the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. With numerical and currency fields you can determine the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point. +
+
+ +

Name

+ On the Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the control field. On the Form Properties tab page, this option specifies the name for the form. Each control field and each form has a "Name" property through which it can be identified. The name will appear in the Form Navigator and, using the name, the control field can be referred to from a macro. The default settings already specify a name which is constructed from using the field's label and number. +If you work with macros, make sure that the names of the controls are unique. + +controls; grouping +groups; of controls +forms; grouping controls +mw changed "grouping;" to "groups;" +The name is also used to group different controls that belong together functionally, such as radio buttons. To do so, give the same name to all members of the group: controls with identical names form a group. Grouped controls can be represented visually by using a Group Box. +
+
+ +

Navigation bar

+ Specifies whether to display the Navigation bar on the lower border of the table control. +
+
+ +

Read-only

+ Determines if the control is read-only ("Yes") or if it can be edited ("No"). The "Read-only" property can be assigned to all controls in which the user can enter text. If you assign the read-only property to an image field which uses graphics from a database, the user will not be able to insert new graphics into the database. +
+
+ +

Border

+ Determines if the field's border should be displayed "Without frame", with a "3-D look" or "Flat". With control fields that have a frame, you can determine the border display on the form using the "Border" property. You can select among the "Without frame", "3-D look" or "Flat" options. +
+
+ +

Tab order

+ The "Tab order" property determines the order in which the controls are focused in the form when you press the Tab key. In a form that contains more than one control, the focus moves to the next control when you press the Tab key. You can specify the order in which the focus changes with an index under "Tab order". + The "Tab order" property is not available to Hidden Controls. If you want, you can also set this property for image buttons and image controls, so that you can select these controls with the Tab key. + When creating a form, an index is automatically assigned to the control fields that are added to this form; every control field added is assigned an index increased by 1. If you change the index of a control, the indices of the other controls are updated automatically. Elements that cannot be focused ("Tabstop = No") are also assigned a value. However, these controls are skipped when using the Tab key. + You can also easily define the indices of the different controls in the Tab Order dialog. +
+
+ +

Mouse wheel scroll

+ Sets whether the value changes when the user scrolls a mouse wheel. Never: No change of the value. When focused: (default) The value changes when the control has the focus and the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled. Always: The value changes when the wheel is pointing at the control and gets scrolled, no matter which control has the focus. +
+
+ +

Default status

+ Specifies whether an option or a check box is selected by default. + For a reset type button, you can define the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. + For grouped option fields, the status of the group corresponding to the default setting is defined by the "Default Status" property.UFI: what does this mean? Cannot understand that sentence. +
+
+ +

Default selection

+ Specifies the list box entry to mark as the default entry. + For a Reset type button, the Default selection entry defines the status of the list box if the reset button is activated by the user. + For a List box that contains a value list, you can click the ... button to open the Default selection dialog. + In the Default selection dialog, select the entries that you want to mark as selected when you open the form that contains the list box. +
+
+ + +

Default value

+ Sets the default value for the control field. For example, the default value will be entered when a form is opened. + For a Reset type button, the Default value entry defines the status of the control if the reset button is activated by the user. +
+
+ +

Default scroll value

+ Sets the default value for the scrollbar. +
+
+ +

Scroll value max.

+ Specify the maximum value of a scrollbar control. +
+
+ +

Scroll value min.

+ Specify the minimum value of a scrollbar control. +
+
+ +

Small change

+ Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks the Arrow icon on the scrollbar. +
+
+ +

Large change

+ Specify the value to add or subtract when the user clicks next to the slider on the scrollbar. +
+
+ +

Default time

+ Sets the default time. +
+
+ +

Default date

+ Sets the default date. +
+
+ +

Default text

+ Sets the default text for a text box or a combo box. +
+
+ +

Default button

+ The "Default button" property specifies that the corresponding button will be operated when you press the Return key. If you open the dialog or form and do not carry out any further action, the button with this property is the default button. + This property should be assigned only to a single button within the document. + When using Web page forms, you might come across this property in search masks. These are edit masks that contain a text field and a Submit type button. The search term is entered in the text field and the search is started by activating the button. If the button is defined as the default button, however, simply hit Enter after entering the search term in order to start the search. +
+
+ +

Prefix symbol

+ Determines if the currency symbol is displayed before or after the number when using currency fields. The default setting is currency symbols are not prefixed. +
+
+ +

Tabstop

+ The "Tabstop" property determines if a control field can be selected with the Tab key. The following options are available:UFI: Default entry row deleted from table + + + + No + + + When using the Tab key, focusing skips the control. + + + + + Yes + + + The control can be selected with the Tab key. + + +
+
+
+ +

Thousands separator

+ Inserts a thousands separator. With numerical and currency fields you can determine whether thousands separators are used. +
+
+ +

Label

+ The "Label" property sets the label of the control field that is displayed in the form. This property determines the visible label or the column header of the data field in table control forms. + When you create a new control, the description predefined in the "Name" property is used as the default for labeling the control. The label consists of the control field name and an integer numbering the control (for example, CommandButton1). With the "Title" property, you can assign another description to the control so that the label reflects the function of the control. Change this entry in order to assign an expressive label to the control that is visible to the user. + +multi-line titles in forms +names; multi-line titles +controls; multi-line titles + +To create a multi-line title, open the combo box using the Arrow button. You can enter a line break by pressing Shift+CommandCtrl+Enter. +The "Title" property is only used for labeling a form element in the interface visible to the user. If you work with macros, note that at runtime, a control is always addressed through the "Name" property. +
+
+ +

URL

+ Specifies the URL address that opens when you click an Open document / web page button. Enter the URL address for a Open document or web page button type in the URL box. The address opens when you click the button. + If you move the mouse over the button in User mode, the URL appears as the extended tip, provided that no other Help text was entered. +
+
+ +

Currency symbol

+ You can enter a character or a string for the currency symbol. In a currency field, you can predefine the currency symbol by entering the character or string in the "Currency symbol" property. +
+
+ +

Value

+ You can enter the data that is inherited by the hidden control. In a hidden control, under Value, you can enter the data which is inherited by the hidden control. This data will be transferred when sending the form. +
+
+ +

Password characters

+ If the text box is used as a password input, enter the ASCII code of the display character. This character is displayed instead of the characters typed by the user for the password. If the user enters a password, you can determine the characters that will be displayed instead of the characters typed by the user. Under Password character, enter the ASCII code of the desired character. You can use the values from 0 to 255. +The characters and their ASCII codes can be seen in the Special Characters dialog (Insert - Special Character). +
+
+ +

Literal mask

+ Defines the literal mask. The literal mask contains the initial values and is always visible after downloading a form. With masked fields you can specify a literal mask. A literal mask contains the initial values of a form, and is always visible after downloading a form. Using a character code for the Edit mask, you can determine the entries that the user can type into the masked field. +The length of the literal mask should always correspond to the length of the edit mask. If this is not the case, the edit mask is either cut off or filled with blanks up to the length of the edit mask. +
+
+ +

FontUFI: dba.features "Character set property renamed to Font"

+ Select the font for the text that is in the control field. For control fields which have visible text or titles, select the display font that you want to use. To open the Font dialog, click the ... button. The selected font is used in control fields names and to display data in table control fields. +
+
+ +

Row height

+ Specifies the row height of a table control field. In table controls, enter a value for the row height. If you want, you can enter a value followed by valid measurement unit, for example, 2 cm. +
+
+ +

Text lines end with

+ For text fields, select the line end code to be used when writing text into a database column.UFI: spec dba-features: "form text fields: New property Text lines end with" +
+
+ +

Time format

+ You can define the desired format for the time display. +
+
+ +

Help text

+ Specifies additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. In each control field you can specify additional information or a descriptive text for the control field. This property helps the programmer to save additional information that can be used in the program code. This field can be used, for example, for variables or other evaluation parameters. +
+
+ +

Formatting

+ Specifies the format code for the control. Click the ... button to select the format code. +
+
+ +

Scale

+ Resizes the image to fit the size of the control. +
+
+ +

Acting on a record

+ Specifies to show or hide the action items in a selected Navigation bar control. Action items are the following: Save record, Undo, New record, Delete record, Refresh. +
+
+ +

Positioning

+ Specifies to show or hide the positioning items in a selected Navigation bar control. Positioning items are the following: Record label, Record position, Record count label, Record count. +
+
+ +

Navigation

+ Specifies to show or hide the navigation items in a selected Navigation bar control. Navigation items are the following: First record, Previous record, Next record, Last record. +
+
+ +

Filtering/Sorting

+ Specifies to show or hide the filtering and sorting items in a selected Navigation bar control. Filtering and sorting items are the following: Sort ascending, Sort descending, Sort, Automatic filter, Default filter, Apply filter, Reset filter/sort. +
+
+ +

Icon Size

+ Specifies whether the icons in a selected Navigation bar should be small or large. +
+
+ +

Visible

+ Defines whether the control will be visible in live mode. In design mode, the control is always visible. + Note that if this property is set to "Yes" (the default), this does not necessarily mean the control will really appear on the screen. Additional constraints are applied when calculating a control's effective visibility. For instance, a control placed in a hidden section in Writer will never be visible at all, until at least the section itself becomes visible. + If the property is set to "No", then the control will always be hidden in live mode. + Older OpenOffice.org versions up to 3.1 will silently ignore this property when reading documents which make use of it. +
+
+ +

Visible size

+ Specifies the size of scrollbar thumb in "value units". A value of ("Scroll value max." minus "Scroll value min." ) / 2 would result in a thumb which occupies half of the background area. + If set to 0, then the thumb's width will equal its height. +
+
+ +

Orientation

+ Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation for a scrollbar or spin button. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..65a442d86 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170102.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,694 @@ + + + + + + + Data + /text/shared/02/01170102.xhp + + + +
+controls; reference by SQL +bound fields; controls +controls; bound fields/list contents/linked cells +lists;data assigned to controls +cells;linked to controls +links;between cells and controls +controls;assigning data sources +MW made "cells..." a two level entry, changed "linked cells;" to "links;" and "list contents" to "lists;" +

Data

+The Data tab page allows you to assign a data source to the selected control. +
+
+ +
+For forms with database links, the associated database is defined in the Form Properties. You will find the functions for this on the Data tab page. +The possible settings of the Data tab page of a control depend on the respective control. You will only see the options that are available for the current control and context.
The following fields are available: + +
+ +

Reference value (off)

+ Check boxes and radio buttons in spreadsheets can be bound to cells in the current document. If the control is enabled, the value you enter in Reference value (on) is copied to the cell. If the control is disabled, the value from Reference value (off) is copied to the cell. +
+
+ +

Reference value (on)UFI: moved section from 01170101, changed name

+ You can enter a reference value for the web form, which will be remitted to a server when sending the form. With database forms, the value entered is written in the database field, assigned to the control field. You can assign a reference value to option buttons and check boxes. The reference value will be remitted to a server when sending the web form. With database forms the value entered here will be written in the database assigned to the control field. + Reference values for web forms + Reference values are useful if you design a web form and the information on the status of the control is to be transmitted to a server. If the control is clicked by the user, the corresponding reference value is sent to the server. + For example, if you have two control fields for the options "feminine" and "masculine", and assign a reference value of 1 to the field "feminine" and the value 2 to the "masculine" field, the value 1 is transmitted to the server if a user clicks the "feminine" field and value 2 is sent if the "masculine" field is clicked. + Reference values for database forms + For database forms, you can also characterize the status of an option or a check box by a reference value, storing it in the database. If you have a set of three options, for example "in progress", "completed", and "resubmission", with the respective reference values, "ToDo", "OK", and "RS", these reference values appear in the database if the respective option is clicked. +
+
+ +

Data field

+ Specifies the field of the data source table to which the control refers. With database forms, you can link controls with the data fields. + You have several possibilities: + + + First case: There is only one table in the form. + Under Data field, specify the field of the data source table whose contents you want to be displayed. + + + Second case: The control belongs to a subform that is created by an SQL query. + Under Data field, specify the field of the SQL statement whose contents you want to be displayed. + + + + + Third case: Combo Boxes + For combo boxes, the field of the data source table in which the values entered or selected by the user should be stored is specified under Data field. The values displayed in the list of the combo box are based on an SQL statement, which is entered under List content. + + + Fourth case: List Boxes + The data source table does not contain the data to be displayed, but rather a table linked to the data source table through a common data field. + If you want a list box to display data from a table that is linked to the current data source table, under Data field specify the field of the data source table to which the content of the list box refers. Or you can specify the database field that controls the display of the data in the form. This data field provides the link to the other table if both tables can be linked through a common data field. It is usually a data field in which unique identification numbers are stored. The data field whose contents are displayed in the form is specified by an SQL statement under List content. + + +List boxes work with references. They can either be implemented with linked tables by SQL statements (fourth case) or through value lists: +References through linked tables (SQL statements) +If you want a list box to display data from a database table that is linked by a common data field to the table on which the form is based, the link field of the form table is specified under Data field. +The link is created with an SQL Select, which, if you selected "SQL" or "Native SQL", is specified under Type of list contents in the field List content. As an example, a table "Orders" is linked to the current form control, and in the database a table "Customers" is linked to the "Orders" table. You can use an SQL statement as follows: +SELECT CustomerName, CustomerNo FROM Customers, +where "CustomerName" is the data field from the linked table "Customers", and "CustomerNo" is the field of the table "Customers" that is linked to a field of the form table "Orders" specified under Data field. +References Using Value Lists +For list boxes, you can use value lists. Value lists are lists that define reference values. In this way, the control in the form does not directly display the content of a database field, but rather values assigned in the value list. +If you work with reference values of a value list, the contents of the data field that you specified under Data Field in the form are not visible, but rather the assigned values. If you chose "Valuelist" on the Data tab under Type of list contents and assigned a reference value to the visible list entries in the form under List entries (entered in the General tab), then the reference values are compared with the data content of the given data field. If a reference value corresponds to the content of a data field, the associated list entries are displayed in the form. +
+
+ +

Bound field

+ Use an index to specify the table field or table SQL query to link to the field that is provided under Data field. Valid values for this property are 1, 2, 3, and so on.UFI: issue #i32749# + If you delete the contents of the Bound field cell in the property browser, the first field of the result set is used to display and to exchange data.UFI: issue #i32749# + This property for list boxes defines which data field of a linked table is displayed in the form. + If a list box in the form is to display contents of a table linked to the form table, then define in the Type of list contents field if the display is determined by an SQL command or the (linked) table is accessed. With the Bound field property, you use an index to specify to which data field of the query or of the table the list field is linked. + The property Bound field is only for forms that are used to access more than one table. If the form is based on only one table, the field to be displayed in the form is specified directly under Data field. However, if you want the list box to display data from a table that is linked to the current table over a common data field, the linked data field is defined by the property Bound field. + If you selected "SQL" under Type of list contents, the SQL command determines the index to be specified. Example: If you specify an SQL command such as "SELECT Field1, Field2 FROM tablename" under List content, refer to the following table: + + + + Bound field + + + Link + + + + + -1since LibreOffice 4.1 + + + The index of the selected entry in the list is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + {empty} or 0 + + + The database field "Field1" is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + 1 + + + The database field "Field2" is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + +
+If you selected "Table" under Type of list contents, the table structure defines the index to be specified. Example: If a database table is selected under List content, refer to the following table: + + + + Bound field + + + Link + + + + + -1since LibreOffice 4.1 + + + The index of the selected entry in the list is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + {empty} or 0 + + + The 1st column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + 1 + + + The 2nd column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + + + + 2 + + + The 3rd column of the table is linked to the field specified under Data field. + + +
+
+
+ +

Type of list contents

+ Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes. Determines the data to fill the lists in list and combo boxes. + With the "Valuelist" option, all entries entered in the List entries field of the General tab appear in the control. For database forms, you can use reference values (see the References Using Value Lists section). + If the content of the control is read from a database, you can determine the type of the data source with the other options. For example, you can choose between tables and queries. +
+
+ +

List content

+ With database forms, specifies the data source for the list content of the form-element. This field can be used to define a value list for documents without a database connection. + In the case of database forms, the data source determines the entries of the list or combo box. Depending on the selected type, you have a choice between different data sources under List content, provided that these objects exist in your database. All available database objects of the type selected under Type of list contents are offered here. If you have selected the "Value List" option as the type, you can use references for database forms. If the display of the control is controlled by an SQL command, the SQL statement is entered here. + Examples of SQL statements: + For list boxes, an SQL statement may have the following form: + SELECT field1, field2 FROM table, + Here "table" is the table whose data is displayed in the list of the control (list table). "field1" is the data field that defines the visible entries in the form; its content is displayed in the list box. "field2" is the field of the list table that is linked to the form table (value table) through the field specified under Data field if Bound field = 1 was selected. + For combo boxes, an SQL statement may take the following form: + SELECT DISTINCT field FROM table, + Here "field" is a data field from the list table "table" whose content is displayed in the list of the combo box. + Value lists for HTML documents + For HTML forms, you can enter a value list under List content. Select the option "Valuelist" under Type of list contents. The values entered here will not be visible in the form, and are used to assign values to the visible entries. The entries made under List content correspond to the HTML tag <OPTION VALUE=...>. + In the data transfer of a selected entry from a list box or a combo box, both the list of the values displayed in the form, which was entered on the General tab under List entries, and the value list entered on the Data tab under List content, are taken into consideration: If a (non-empty) text is at the selected position in the value list (<OPTION VALUE=...>), it will be transmitted. Otherwise, the text displayed in the (<OPTION>) control is sent. + If the value list is to contain an empty string, enter the value "$$$empty$$$" under List content at the corresponding position (note uppercase/lowercase). $[officename] interprets this input as an empty string and assigns it to the respective list entry. + The following table shows the connections between HTML, JavaScript, and the $[officename] field List content using an example list box named "ListBox1". In this case, "Item" designates a list entry visible in the form: + + + + HTML Tag + + + JavaScript + + + Entry in value list of the control (List content) + + + Transmitted data + + + + + <OPTION>Item + + + Not possible + + + "" + + + the visible list entry ("ListBox1=Item") + + + + + <OPTION VALUE="Value">Item + + + ListBox1.options[0].value="Value" + + + "Value" + + + The value assigned to the list entry ("ListBox1=Value") + + + + + <OPTION VALUE="">Item + + + ListBox1.options[0].value="" + + + "$$$empty$$$" + + + An empty string ("ListBox1=") + + +
+
+
+ +

Empty string is NULL

+ Defines how an empty string input should be handled. If set to "Yes", an input string of length zero will be treated as a value NULL. If set to "No", any input will be treated as-is without any conversion. + An empty string is a string of length zero (""). Normally, a value NULL is not the same as an empty string. In general, a term NULL is used to denote an undefined value, an unknown value, or "no value has been entered yet." + Database systems vary and they might handle a value NULL differently. Refer to documentations of the database that you are using. +
+
+ +

Filter proposal

+ While designing your form, you can set the "Filter proposal" property for each text box in the Data tab of the corresponding Properties dialog. In subsequent searches in the filter mode, you can select from all information contained in these fields. The field content can then be selected using the AutoComplete function. Note, however, that this function requires a greater amount of memory space and time, especially when used in large databases and should therefore be used sparingly. +
+
+ +

Linked cell

+ Specifies the reference to a linked cell on a spreadsheet. The live state or contents of the control are linked to the cell contents. The following tables list the controls and their corresponding link type: +

Check box with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Select the check box: + + + TRUE is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Deselect the check box: + + + FALSE is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Tri-state check box is set to "undetermined" state: + + + #NV is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell: + + + If entered value is TRUE or not 0: Check box is selected.
If entered value is FALSE or 0: Check box is deselected. + + + + + Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error: + + + Check box is set to "undetermined" state if it is a tri-state check box, else check box is deselected. + + + + + Select the box. The Reference value box contains text:UFI: sc.features "eforms2 option buttons check boxes now also exchanging text" + + + The text from the Reference value box is copied to the cell. + + + + + Deselect the box. The Reference value box contains text: + + + An empty string is copied to the cell. + + + + + The Reference value box contains text. Enter the same text into the cell: + + + The check box is selected. + + + + + The Reference value box contains text. Enter another text into the cell: + + + The check box is deselected. + + +
+

Option button (radio button) with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Select the option button: + + + TRUE is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Option button is deselected by selecting another option button: + + + FALSE is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell: + + + If entered value is TRUE or not 0: Option button is selected.
If entered value is FALSE or 0: Option button is deselected. + + + + + Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error: + + + Option button is deselected. + + + + + Click the option button. The Reference value box contains text: + + + The text from the Reference value box is copied to the cell. + + + + + Click another option button of the same group. The Reference value box contains text: + + + An empty string is copied to the cell. + + + + + The Reference value box contains text. Enter the same text into the cell: + + + The option button is selected. + + + + + The Reference value box contains text. Enter another text into the cell: + + + The option button is cleared. + + +
+

Text box with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Enter text into the text box: + + + Text is copied into the linked cell. + + + + + Clear the text box: + + + Linked cell is cleared. + + + + + Enter text or a number in the linked cell: + + + Text or number is copied into the text box. + + + + + Enter a formula into the linked cell: + + + Formula result is copied into the text box. + + + + + Clear the linked cell: + + + Text box is cleared. + + +
+

Numerical field and formatted field with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Enter a number into the field: + + + Number is copied into the linked cell. + + + + + Clear the field: + + + Value 0 is set in the linked cell. + + + + + Enter a number or a formula that returns a number in the linked cell: + + + Number is copied into the field. + + + + + Clear the linked cell, or enter text, or enter a formula that returns text or an error: + + + Value 0 is set in the field. + + +
+

List box with linked cell

+ List boxes support two different linking modes, see the property "Contents of the linked cell". + + + Linked contents: Synchronize the text contents of the selected list box entry with the cell contents. + + + Linked selection position: The position of the single selected item in the list box is synchronized with the numerical value in the cell. + + + + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Select a single list item: + + + Contents are linked: Text of the item is copied into the linked cell. + Selection is linked: Position of the selected item is copied into the linked cell.
For example, if the third item is selected, the number 3 will be copied. + + + + + Select several list items: + + + #NV is entered into the linked cell. + + + + + Deselect all list items: + + + Contents are linked: Linked cell is cleared. + Selection is linked: Value 0 is entered in the linked cell. + + + + + Enter text or a number into the linked cell: + + + Contents are linked: Find and select an equal list item. + Selection is linked: The list item at the specified position (starting with 1 for the first item) is selected. If not found, all items are deselected. + + + + + Enter a formula into the linked cell: + + + Find and select a list item that matches the formula result and link mode. + + + + + Clear the linked cell: + + + Deselect all items in the list box. + + + + + Change the contents of the list source range: + + + List box items are updated according to the change. The selection is preserved. This may cause an update to the linked cell. + + +
+

Combo box with linked cell

+ + + + Action + + + Result + + + + + Enter text into the edit field of the combo box, or select an entry from the drop-down list: + + + Text is copied into the linked cell. + + + + + Clear the edit field of the combo box: + + + Linked cell is cleared. + + + + + Enter text or a number into the linked cell: + + + Text or number is copied into the edit field of the combo box. + + + + + Enter a formula into the linked cell: + + + Formula result is copied into the edit field of the combo box. + + + + + Clear the linked cell: + + + Edit field of the combo box is cleared. + + + + + Change the contents of the list source range: + + + Drop-down list items are updated according to the change. The edit field of the combo box and the linked cell are not changed. + + +
+
+
+ +

Contents of the linked cell

+ Select the mode of linking a list box with a linked cell on a spreadsheet. + + + Linked contents: Synchronize the text contents of the selected list box entry with the cell contents. Select "The selected entry". + + + Linked selection position: The position of the single selected item in the list box is synchronized with the numerical value in the cell. Select "Position of the selected entry". + + +
+
+ +

Source cell rangeUFI: in the spec, this is "Source range of the list". Named it as seen in 680m38

+ Enter a cell range that contains the entries for a list box or combo box on a spreadsheet. If you enter a multi-column range, only the contents of the leftmost column are used to fill the control. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..366b987ea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170103.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + Events + /text/shared/02/01170103.xhp + + + +
+ +controls; events +events; controls +macros; assigning to events in forms + +

Events

+ On the Events tab page you can link macros to events that occur in a form's control fields. +
+When the event occurs, the linked macro will be called. To assign a macro to an event, press the ... button. The Assign Action dialog opens. +
+ +
+Depending on the control, different events are available. Only the available events for the selected control and context are listed on the Events tab page.
The following events are defined: + + + +

Approve actionrenamed from Before commencing, issue 97356

+ This event takes place before an action is triggered by clicking the control. For example, clicking a "Submit" button initiates a send action; however, the actual "send" process is started only when the When initiating event occurs. The Approve action event allows you to kill the process. If the linked method sends back FALSE, When initiating will not be executed. + +

Execute actionrenamed from When initiated, issue 97356

+ The Execute action event occurs when an action is started. For example, if you have a "Submit" button in your form, the send process represents the action to be initiated. + +

Changed

+The Changed event takes place when the control loses the focus and the content of the control has changed since it lost the focus. + +

Text modified

+ The Text modified event takes place if you enter or modify a text in an input field. + +

Item status changed

+ The Item status changed event takes place if the status of the control field has changed, for example, from checked to unchecked. + +

When receiving focus

+ The When receiving focus event takes place if a control field receives the focus. + +

When losing focus

+ The When losing focus event takes place if a control field loses the focus. + +

Key pressed

+ The Key pressed event occurs when the user presses any key while the control has the focus. This event may be linked to a macro for checking entries. + +

Key released

+ The Key released event occurs when the user releases any key while the control has the focus. + +

Mouse inside

+ The Mouse inside event takes place if the mouse is inside the control field. + +

Mouse moved while key pressed

+ The Mouse moved while key pressed event takes place when the mouse is dragged while a key is pressed. An example is when, during drag-and-drop, an additional key determines the mode (move or copy). + +

Mouse moved

+ The Mouse moved event occurs if the mouse moves over the control. + +

Mouse button pressed

+ The Mouse button pressed event occurs if the mouse button is pressed while the mouse pointer is on the control. + Note that this event is also used for notifying requests for a popup context menu on the control. + +

Mouse button released

+ The Mouse button released event occurs if the mouse button is released while the mouse pointer is on the control. + +

Mouse outside

+ The Mouse outside event takes place when the mouse is outside the control field. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2e00c97ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Form Properties +/text/shared/02/01170200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ forms; propertiesproperties; forms + +Form Properties + In this dialog you can specify, among others, the data source and the events for the whole form. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17a2dcf1e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/02/01170201.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+submitting forms +get method for form transmissions +post method for form transmissions + +General +
+
+ +
+A form is a text document or spreadsheet with different form controls. If you create a form for a Web page, the user can enter data into it to send over the Internet. The data from the form controls of a form is transmitted to a server by specifying a URL and can be processed on the server. +Name +Specifies a name for the form. This name is used to identify the form in the Form Navigator. +URL +Specifies the URL to which the data of the completed form is to be transmitted. +Frame +Defines the target frame in which the loaded URL is to appear. + + +Type of submission +Specifies the method to transfer the completed form information. +Using the "Get" method, the data of every control is transmitted as an environment variable. They are appended to the URL in the form "?Control1=Content1&Control2=Content2&..."; the character string is analyzed by a program on the recipient's server. +Using the "Post" method, a document is created from the content of the form that is sent to the specified URL. + +Submission encoding +Specifies the type for encoding the data transfer. +Data transfer of control information +When sending a form, all controls available in $[officename] are taken into consideration. The name of the control and the corresponding value, if available, are transmitted. +Which values are transmitted in each case depends on the respective control. For text fields, the visible entries are transmitted; for list boxes, the selected entries are transmitted; for check boxes and option fields, the associated reference values are transmitted if these fields were activated. +How this information is transmitted depends on the selected transfer method (Get or Post) and the coding (URL or Multipart). If the Get method and URL encoding are selected, for example, value pairs in the form <Name>=<Value> are sent. +In addition to the controls that are recognized in HTML, $[officename] offers other controls. It should be noted that, for fields with a specific numerical format, the visible values are not transmitted but rather fixed default formats. The following table shows how the data of the $[officename]-specific controls is transmitted: + + + +Control + + +Value Pair + + + + +Numeric field, currency field + + +A decimal separator is always displayed as a period. + + + + +Date field + + +The date format is sent in a fixed format (MM-DD-YYYY), regardless of the user's local settings. + + + + +Time field + + +The time format is sent in a fixed format (HH:MM:SS), regardless of the user's local settings. + + + + +Pattern field + + +The values of pattern fields are sent as text fields, that is, the value visible in the form is sent. + + + + +Table control + + +From the table control, the individual columns are always transmitted. The name of the control, the name of the column, and the value of the column are sent. Using the Get method with URL encoding, the transmission is done in the form <Name of the table control>.<Name of the column>=<Value>, for example, with the value being dependent on the column. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..13a93e6c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170202.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ + + + + + + + + + Database Form Events + /text/shared/02/01170202.xhp + + + +
+ forms; events + events;in database forms + forms;database events + + Database Form Events + The Events tab page, allows you to assign a macro to certain events which occur in a database form. +
+
+ +
+ To link an event with a macro, first write a macro that contains all the commands to be executed when the event happens. Then assign this macro to the respective event by clicking the ... button beside the corresponding event. The Assign Macro dialog opens, where you can select the macro. + The following actions can be configured individually, meaning that you can use your own dialogs to depict an action: + + + Displaying an error message, + + + Confirming a delete process (for data records), + + + Querying parameters, + + + Checking input when saving a data record. + + + For example, you can issue a "confirm deletion" request such as "Really delete customer xyz?" when deleting a data record. + + The events that are shown in the Events dialog cannot be edited directly. You can remove an event from the list by pressing the Del key. + + The following lists and describes all events in a form that can be linked to a macro: + + + +
+ + + API;XUpdateListener + +

Before update

+ The Before update event occurs before the control content changed by the user is written into the data source. The linked macro can, for example, prevent this action by returning FALSE. + +

After update

+ The After update event occurs after the control content changed by the user has been written into the data source. + + + API;XResetListener + +

Prior to reset

+ The Prior to reset event occurs before a form is reset. Returning True approves the reset, returning False cancels the operation. + A form is reset if one of the following conditions is met: + + + The user presses an (HTML) button that is defined as a reset button. + + + A new and empty record is created in a form that is linked to a data source. For example, in the last record, the Next Record button may be pressed. + + + +

After resetting

+ The After resetting event occurs after a form has been reset. +
+ +
+ + + API;XSubmitListener + API;XSubmissionVetoListener + +

Before submitting

+ The Before submitting event occurs before the form data is sent. Returning True approves the submission, False stops it. +
+
+ + + API;XLoadListener + +

When loading

+ The When loading event occurs directly after the form has been loaded. +
+
+ +

Before reloading

+ The Before reloading event occurs before the form is reloaded. The data content has not yet been refreshed. +
+
+ +

When reloading

+ The When reloading event occurs directly after the form has been reloaded. The data content has already been refreshed. +
+
+ +

Before unloading

+ The Before unloading event occurs before the form is unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. +
+
+ +

When unloading

+ The When unloading event occurs directly after the form has been unloaded; that is, separated from its data source. +
+
+ + + API;XConfirmDeleteListener + +

Confirm deletion

+ The Confirm deletion event occurs as soon as data has been deleted from the form. Return True to allow row deletion, False otherwise. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. +
+
+ + + API;XRowSetApproveListener + +

Before record action

+ The Before record action event occurs before the current record or record set are changed. Return True when changing is allowed, otherwise False. For example, the linked macro can request confirmation in a dialog. +
+
+ + + API;XRowSetListener + +

After record action

+ The After record action event occurs directly after the current record has been changed. +
+
+ +

Before record change

+ The Before record change event occurs before the current record pointer - SQL cursor - is changed. Return True when moving is allowed, otherwise False. +
+
+ +

After record change

+ The After record change event occurs directly after the current record pointer has been changed. +
+
+ + + API;XDatabaseParameterListener + +

Fill parameters

+ The Fill parameters event occurs when the form to be loaded has parameters that must be filled out. For example, the data source of the form can be the following SQL command: + SELECT * FROM address WHERE name=:name + Here :name is a parameter that must be filled out when loading. The parameter is automatically filled out from the parent form if possible. If the parameter cannot be filled out, this event is called and a linked macro can fill out the parameter. Return True when the execution of the parametrized statement should continue, False otherwise. +
+
+ + + API;XSQLErrorListener + +

Error occurred

+ The Error occurred event is activated if an error occurs when accessing the data source. This applies to forms, list boxes and combo boxes. +
+ + +

Vetoable events

+Macros can interrupt event execution when they return a boolean value: True allows the execution of the event to continue and False stops the event execution. + + The following events are interruptable by returning False: + + Before record action + Before record change + Before submitting + Before update + Fill parameters + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5df43b4fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + +Data +/text/shared/02/01170203.xhp + + + +
+forms; data +data; forms and subforms +forms; subforms +subforms; description + +

Data

+The Data tab page defines the form properties that refer to the database that is linked to the form. +
+Defines the data source on which the form is based, or specifies whether the data can be edited by the user. Apart from the sort and filter functions, you will also find all the necessary properties to create a subform. +
+ +
+ +
+

Data sourceUFI: was Database

+Defines the data source to which the form should refer. If you click the ... button, you call the Open dialog, where you can choose a data source. +
+
+

ContentUFI: was Data source

+Determines the content to be used for the form. The content can be an existing table or a query (previously created in the database), or it can be defined by an SQL-statement. Before you enter a content you have to define the exact type in Content type. +If you have selected either "Table" or "Query" in Content type, the box lists all the tables and queries set up in the selected database. +
+
+

Content type

+Defines whether the data source is to be an existing database table or query, or if the form is to be generated based on an SQL statement. +If you choose "Table" or "Query", the form will refer to the table or query that you specify under Content. If you want to create a new query or a subform, then you have to choose the "SQL" option. You can then enter the statement for the SQL query or the subform directly in the List content box on the Control properties Data tab page. +
+
+

Analyze SQL command

+Specifies whether the SQL statement is to be analyzed by %PRODUCTNAME. If set to Yes, you can click the ... button next to the Content list box. This will open a window where you can graphically create a database query. When you close that window, the SQL statement for the created query will be inserted in the Content list box. +
+
+ +

Filter

+Enter the required conditions for filtering the data in the form. The filter specifications follow SQL rules without using the WHERE clause. For example, if you want to display all records with the "Mike" forename, type into the data field: Forename = 'Mike'. You can also combine conditions: Forename = 'Mike' OR Forename = 'Peter'. All records matching either of these two conditions will be displayed. +The filter function is available in user mode through the AutoFilter and Default Filter icons on the Form Navigation Bar. +
+
+

Sort

+Specifies the conditions to sort the data in the form. The specification of the sorting conditions follows SQL rules without the use of the ORDER BY clause. For example, if you want all records of a database to be sorted in one field in an ascending order and in another field in a descending order, enter Forename ASC, Name DESC (presuming Forename and Name are the names of the data fields). +The appropriate icons on the Form Navigation Bar can be used in User mode to sort: Sort Ascending, Sort Descending, Sort. +
+
+

Add data only

+Determines if the form only allows the addition of new data (Yes) or if it allows other properties as well (No). +If Add data only is set to "Yes", changing or deleting data is not possible. +
+
+

Navigation bar

+Specifies whether the navigation functions in the lower form bar can be used. +The "Parent Form" option is used for subforms. If you choose this option for a subform, you can navigate using the records of the main form if the cursor is placed in the subform. A subform is linked to the parent form by a 1:1 relationship, so navigation is always performed in the parent form. +
+
+

Cycle

+Determines how the navigation should be done using the tab key. Using the tab key, you can move forward in the form. If you simultaneously press the Shift key, the navigation will follow the opposite direction. If you reach the last (or the first) field and press the tab key again, it can have various effects. Define the key control with the following options: + + + +Option + + +Meaning + + + + +Default + + +This setting automatically defines a cycle which follows an existing database link: If the form contains a database link, the Tab key will, by default, initiate a change to the next or previous record on exit from the last field (see All Records). If there is no database link the next/previous form is shown (see Current Page). + + + + +All records + + +This option applies to database forms only and is used to navigate through all records. If you use the Tab key to exit from the last field of a form, the current record is changed. + + + + +Active record + + +This option applies to database forms only, and is used to navigate within the current record. If you use the Tab key to exit from the last field of a form, the current record is changed. + + + + +Current page + + +On exit from the last field of a form, the cursor skips to the first field in the next form. This is standard for HTML forms; therefore, this option is especially relevant for HTML forms. + + +
+
+
+

Allow additions

+Determines if data can be added. +
+
+

Allow modifications

+ Determines if the data can be modified. +
+
+

Allow deletions

+Determines if the data can be deleted. +
+
+

Link master fields

+If you create a subform, enter the data field of the parent form responsible for the synchronization between parent and subform. To enter multiple values, press Shift + Enter after each input line.UFI: fixes #i22439# +The subform is based on an SQL query; more specifically, on a Parameter Query. If a field name is entered in the Link master fields box, the data contained in that field in the main form is read to a variable that you must enter in Link slave fields. In an appropriate SQL statement, this variable is compared to the table data that the subform refers to. Alternatively, you can enter the column name in the Link master fields box. +Consider the following example: +The database table on which the form is based is, for example, a customer database ("Customer"), where every customer has been given a unique number in a data field named "Cust_ID". A customer's orders are maintained in another database table. You now want to see each customer's orders after entering them into the form. In order to do this you should create a subform. Under Link master fields enter the data field from the customer database which clearly identifies the customer, that is, Cust_ID. Under Link slave fields enter the name of a variable which is to accept the data of the field Cust_ID, for example, x. +The subform should show the appropriate data from the orders table ("Orders") for each customer ID (Customer_ID -> x). This is only possible if each order is uniquely assigned to one customer in the orders table. Alternatively, you can use another field called Customer_ID; however, to make sure that this field is not confused with the same field from the main form, the field is called Customer_Number. +Now compare the Customer_Number in the "Orders" table with the Customer_ID from the "Customers" table, which can be done, for example, using the x variable with the following SQL statement: +SELECT * FROM Orders WHERE Customer_Number =: x (if you want the subform to show all data from the orders table) +or: +SELECT Item FROM Orders WHERE Customer_Number =: x (if you want the subform from the orders table to show only the data contained in the "Item" field) +The SQL statement can either be entered in the Data source field, or you can create an appropriate parameter query, which can be used to create the subform. +
+
+

Link slave fields

+If you create a subform, enter the variable where possible values from the parent form field can be stored. If a subform is based on a query, enter the variable that you defined in the query. If you create a form using an SQL statement entered in the Data source field, enter the variable you used in the statement. You can choose any variable name. If you want to enter multiple values, press Shift + Enter. +If, for example, you specified the Customer_ID database field as a parent field under Link master fields, then you can define under Link slave fields the name of the variable in which the values of the Customer_ID database field are to be stored. If you now specify an SQL statement in the Data source box using this variable, the relevant values are displayed in the subform. +
+ +

What is a subform?

+Forms are created based on a database table or database query. They display the data in a visually pleasant fashion and can be used to enter data or edit data. +If you require a form that can refer to the data in a table or query and can additionally display data from another table, you should create a subform. + For example, this subform can be a text box that displays the data of another database table. +A subform is an additional component of the main form. The main form can be called the "parent form" or "master". Subforms are needed as soon as you want to access more than one table from a form. Each additional table requires its own subform. +After creating a form, it can be changed into a subform. To do this, enter Design Mode, and open the Form Navigator. In the Form Navigator, drag a form (that will become a subform) onto any other form (that will become a master). +The user of your document will not see that a form has subforms. The user only sees a document in which data is entered or where existing data is displayed. +Specify the Link master field from the data fields in the master form. In the subform, the Link slave field can be set as a field which will be matched to the contents of the Link master field. +When the user navigates through the data, the form always displays the current data record. If there are subforms defined, the contents of the subforms will be displayed after a short delay of approximate 200 ms. This delay enables you to quickly browse through the data records of the master form. If you navigate to the next master data record within the delay limit, the subform data need not be retrieved and displayed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2824f0bd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +Activation Order +/text/shared/02/01170300.xhp + + + +
+ + + +

Activation Order

+Opens the Tab Order dialog so you can modify the order in which control fields get the focus when the user presses the tab key. +the button Activation Order on Form Design toolbar opens the Tab Order dialog +
+
+ +
+If form elements are inserted into a document, %PRODUCTNAME automatically determines in which order to move from one control to the next when using the Tab key. Every new control added is automatically placed at the end of this series. In the Tab Order dialog, you can adapt the order of this series to your individual needs. +You can also define the index of a control through its specific properties by entering the desired value under Order in the Properties dialog of the control. +A radio button inside a group can only be accessed by the Tab key when one of the radio buttons is set to "selected". If you have designed a group of radio buttons where no button is set to "selected", then the user will not be able to access the group or any of the radio buttons by keyboard. +

Controls

+Lists all controls in the form. These controls can be selected with the tab key in the given order from top to bottom. Select a control from the Controls list to assign the desired position in the tab order. +

Move Up

+Click the Move Up button to shift the selected control one position higher in the tab order. +

Move Down

+Click the Move Down button to shift the selected control one position lower in the tab order. +

Automatic Sort

+Click the Automatic Sort button to automatically sort the controls according to their position in the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6df2946e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +Add Field +/text/shared/02/01170400.xhp + + + + + +database field;add to form +forms;add database field +database field;add to report +report;add database field + +
+

Add Field

+ Opens a window where you can select a database field to add to the form or report.same help id used for forms and reports +
+
+ +
+ +The field selection window lists all database fields of the table or query that was specified as the data source in the Form Properties. +You can insert a field into the current document by dragging and dropping. A field is then inserted which contains a link to the database. +If you add fields to a form and you switch off the Design Mode, you can see that $[officename] adds a labeled input field for every inserted database field.may be different for reports + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..23029402e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Design Mode On/Off +/text/shared/02/01170500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Design Mode On/Off +Toggles the Design mode on or off. This function is used to switch quickly between Design and User mode. Activate to edit the form controls, deactivate to use the form controls. +
+
+ +
+Please note the Open in Design Mode function. If Open in Design Mode is activated, the document is always opened in Design mode, regardless of the state in which it is saved. +If your form is linked to a database and you turn off the Design mode, the Form Bar is displayed at the lower margin of the document window. You can edit the link to the database in the Form Properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f74cf75ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + +Form Navigator +/text/shared/02/01170600.xhp + + + +
+controls;arranging in forms +forms;Navigator +Form Navigator +subforms; creating +controls; hidden +hidden controls in Form Navigator + + +

Form Navigator

+Opens the Form Navigator. The Form Navigator displays all forms and subforms of the current document with their respective controls. +
+When using several forms, the Form Navigator gives an overview of all forms, and also provides various functions for editing them. +
+ +
+The Form Navigator contains a list of all created (logical) forms with the corresponding control fields. You can see whether a form contains control fields by the plus sign displayed before the entry. Click the plus sign to open the list of the form elements. +You can change how the different controls are arranged by dragging and dropping them in the Form Navigator. Select one or more controls and drag them into another form. Alternatively use CommandCtrl+X or the context menu command Cut to move a control to the clipboard and CommandCtrl+V or the command Insert to insert the control into another position. +To edit the name in the Form Navigator, click on the name and enter a new name, or use the command in the context menu. +If you select a control in the Form Navigator, the corresponding element is selected in the document. +If you call the context menu of a selected entry, the Form Navigator offers the following functions: +

New

+Adds new elements to the form. The Add function can only be called if a form is selected in the Form Navigator. +

Form

+Creates a new form in the document. To create a subform, add the new form under the desired parent form. +

Hidden Control

+Creates a hidden control in the selected form that is not displayed on the screen. A hidden control serves to include data that is transmitted together with the form. It contains additional information or clarifying text that you can specify when creating the form through the Special Properties of the control. Select the entry of the hidden control in the Form Navigator and select the Properties command. +You can copy controls in the document through the clipboard (shortcut keys CommandCtrl+C for copying and CommandCtrl+V for inserting). You can copy hidden controls in the Form Navigator by using drag-and-drop while keeping the CommandCtrl key pressed. +Drag and drop to copy controls within the same document or between documents. Open another form document and drag the hidden control from the Form Navigator into the Form Navigator of the target document. Click a visible control directly in the document, rest the mouse for a moment so that a copy of the control is added to the drag-and-drop clipboard, then drag the copy into the other document. If you want a copy in the same document, press CommandCtrl while dragging. + +

Delete

+Deletes the selected entry. This allows you to delete individual form components as well as whole forms with one mouse click. +
+

Tab order

+When a form is selected, it opens the Tab Order dialog, where the indices for focusing the control elements on the Tab key are defined. + +
+

Rename

+Renames the selected object. + +

Properties

+Starts the Properties dialog for the selected entry. If a form is selected, the Form Properties dialog opens. If a control is selected, the Control Properties dialog opens. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5c988d37c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +HTML Filters and Forms +/text/shared/02/01170700.xhp + + + +forms; HTML filters + +HTML Filters and Forms +You can use all control elements and form events in HTML documents. There have been numerous events to date (for example, focus events), which have not been changed. They will continue to be imported and exported as ONFOCUS, ONBLUR, and so on for JavaScript and as SDONFOCUS, SDONBLUR, and so on for $[officename] Basic. +Generic names that consist of the Listener interface and the method name of the event are used for all other events: An event registered as XListener::method is exported as +SDEvent-XListener-method = "/* event-code */" +Note that the XListener- and method components of this option are case sensitive. +Event handling of controls is performed using the $[officename] API. If you assign an event to a control, an object registers itself internally as a "Listener" for a specific control event. To do this, the object must use a specific interface, for example the XFocusListener Interface, so that it can react to focus events. When the event occurs, the control then invokes a special method of the Listener interface when the control receives the focus. The internally registered object then invokes the JavaScript or $[officename] Basic code, which was assigned to the event. +The HTML filter now uses precisely these listener interfaces and method names so that it can import and export events as desired. You can register a focus event through +<INPUT TYPE=text ONFOCUS="/* code */" +rather than through the +<INPUT TYPE=text SDEvent-XFocusListener-focusGained="/* code */" +register. Events can therefore be registered as desired, including those not offered in the list boxes. To define the script language of events, you can write the following line in the document header: +<META HTTP-EQUIV="content-script-type" CONTENT="..."> +As CONTENT you can, for example, use "text/x-StarBasic" for $[officename] Basic or a "text/JavaScript" for JavaScript. If no entry is made, JavaScript is assumed. +During exporting, the default script language will be defined based on the first module found in macro management. For events, only one language can be used per document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a37aec435 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table Element Wizard +/text/shared/02/01170800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Table Element Wizard +If you insert a table control in a document, the Table Element Wizard starts automatically. In this wizard, you can interactively specify which information is displayed in the table control. +
+ +
+You can use the Wizards On/Off icon to keep the wizard from starting automatically. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e1552fc49 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table Element / List Box / Combo Box Wizard: Data +/text/shared/02/01170801.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Table Element / List Box / Combo Box Wizard: Data +Select the data source and table to which the form field corresponds. If you insert the form field in a document that is already linked to a data source, this page becomes invisible. +
+
+ +
+Data source +Specifies the data source that contains the desired table. +Table +Specifies the desired table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2061563d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + +Table Element Wizard: Field Selection +/text/shared/02/01170802.xhp + + + +
+ + +Table Element Wizard: Field Selection +Specifies which fields in the table control field should be displayed. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + +Selected Fields +Displays the data fields that are accepted into the form field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e39f2106d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combo Box/List Box Wizard +/text/shared/02/01170900.xhp + + + +forms; Combo Box/List Box Wizard + +Combo Box/List Box Wizard +If you insert a combo box or a list box in a document, a wizard starts automatically. This wizard allows you to interactively specify which information is shown. +
+ +
+You can use the Wizards On/Off icon to keep the wizard from starting automatically. +The wizards for combo boxes and list boxes differ from each other in their final step. This is because the nature of control fields: + +List Boxes + +In the case of a list box, the user selects one entry from a list of entries. These entries are saved in a database table and cannot be modified through the list box. +As a general rule, the database table that contains the visible list entries in the form is not the table on which the form is based. The list boxes in a form work by using references; that is, references to the visible list entries are located in the form table (values table) and are also entered as such in the values table if the user selects an entry from the list and saves it. Through reference values, list boxes can display data from a table linked to the current form table. Thus the List Box Wizard allows two tables of a database to be linked, so that the control field can display a detailed list of a database field that is located in a different table from the one to which the form refers. +In the other tables the required field is searched for by using the field names (ControlSource) and then the fields will be completed accordingly. If the field name is not found, the list will remain empty. When list fields contain linked columns, the first column of the other table will be used without a query being shown first. +If an article table contains, for example, the number of a supplier, the list box can use the "Supplier number" link to display the name of the supplier from the supplier table. On the Field links page the Wizard will ask you about all the settings required for this link. + +Combo Boxes + +In the case of combo boxes, users can select one entry from the list entries or enter text themselves. The entries, which are offered as a list from which users can select, may originate from any database table. The entries that users select or enter so that they can be saved can be saved either in the form only, or in a database. If they are saved in a database, they will be written to the database table on which the form is based. +Combo boxes can display the data of any table. A direct link between the current form table and the table whose values are to be displayed in the combo box (list table) is not required. Combo boxes do not work with references. If the user enters or selects a value and saves it, the value actually displayed will be entered in the form table. As there is no link between the form table and the list table, the Field Link table does not appear here. +In the case of a list box, you select entries from the list, and these are saved in the list table. In the case of a combo box, you can add additional text that can be written to the current database table of the form (values table) and stored there as desired. For this function, the Combo Box Wizard has the Data Processing page as the last page, whereas in the case of list boxes this page does not exist. Here you can enter whether and where text that has been entered is to be saved in the values table. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a9b42495e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combo Box / List Box Wizard: Table Selection +/text/shared/02/01170901.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Combo Box / List Box Wizard: Table Selection +Specifies a table from the available database tables that contains the data field whose content should be displayed as a list entry. +
+
+ +
+For list boxes, a table that can be linked with the current form table is indicated. The link table must have at least one field in common with the table of the current form. This makes it possible to establish an unambiguous reference. +For combo boxes, there must be a relationship between the form table and the table containing the data to be displayed in the combo box. +Table +In the Table field, select the table containing the data field whose content should be displayed in the control field. +The table given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b21fc31a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Combo/List Box Wizard: Field Selection +/text/shared/02/01170902.xhp + + + +
+Combo/List Box Wizard: Field Selection +Select the data field specified in the table on the previous page, whose contents should be displayed in the list or combo box. +
+
+ +
+Available Fields +Displays all table fields chosen on the previous Wizard page. +Display Field +Specifies the field whose data are to be shown in the combo or list boxes. +The field name given here appears in the Control properties as an element of an SQL statement in the List Contents field. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..95a5515a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +List Box Wizard: Field Link +/text/shared/02/01170903.xhp + + + +
+ + +List Box Wizard: Field Link +Indicates through which fields tables of values and list tables are linked. +
+The value table is the table of the current form where the list field is inserted. The list table is the table whose data is to be shown in the list field. Both tables must be linked over a mutual data field. These links are to be entered on this page of the wizard. The field names must not necessarily be the same (this depends upon how the field names are defined in both tables), but both fields must have the same field type. +
+ +
+Value table field +Specifies the current form data field which should be related to a field in the linked table. In addition, click the desired data field in the list field below. +In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. +List table field +Specifies the linked table data field, which is related to the specified value table field. In addition, click the data field in the lower list field. +In Control - Properties, the specified field will appear in the Data tab page of a SQL statement under List Contents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cf171216a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Combo Box Wizard: Database Field +/text/shared/02/01170904.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Combo Box Wizard: Database Field +With the combination fields, you can either save the value of a field in a database or display this value in a form. +
+The user values entered in the combination field or selected in the list can be saved in the database table that is accessed in the form. Note that the saving of values in another table is not possible. If the values are not to be saved in a database, they will be saved only in the form. This is especially helpful in HTML forms, where the user's entered or selected values are to be assigned to a server. +
+ +
+Do you want to save the value in a database field? +Two options are available for this question: +Yes, I want to save it in the following database field +Specifies whether the user's entered or selected combination field value should be saved in a database field. Several database table fields are offered which can be accessed in the current form. +In Control - Properties the selected field appears as an entry in the Data tab page under Data field. +List field +Specifies the data field where the combination field value should be saved. +No, I only want to save the value in the form +Specifies that the value of this combination field will not be written in the database and will only be saved in the form. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f4929cfaf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + +Open in Design Mode +/text/shared/02/01171000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+forms; opening in design mode +controls; activating in forms +design mode after saving +documents; opening in design mode +edit mode; after opening + + +

Open in Design Mode

+Opens forms in Design Mode so that the form can be edited. +
+You cannot activate the controls of the form or edit contents of database records in Design Mode. However, you can change the position and size of the controls, edit other properties, and add or delete controls in Design Mode. +
+ +
+After you have finished editing your form, right-click "Forms" in the Form Navigator and deselect Open in Design Mode. Save your form when you are finished. +If the form document is write-protected, the Open in Design Mode command is ignored. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c171e9b83 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Wizards On/Off +/text/shared/02/01171100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Wizards On/Off +Specifies whether to start the wizard automatically when inserting a new control. This setting applies globally to all documents. +
+
+ +
+There are wizards for inserting a list box or combo box, a table element and group boxes. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a5fb9cfa7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + +Display Grid +/text/shared/02/01171200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + +UFI: removed help ids +

Display Grid

+ + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + +Icon Display Grid + + +Display Grid + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e68601db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Snap to Grid +/text/shared/02/01171300.xhp + + + +

Snap to Grid

+Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. +
+ + + + +Icon Snap to Grid + + +Snap to Grid + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14e63f228 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01171400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Helplines While Moving + /text/shared/02/01171400.xhp + + + + +UFI: removed help ids + +
+ +

Helplines While Moving

+ + + +
+ + + + Icon Helplines While Moving + + + Helplines While Moving + + +
+
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1f31b170 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01220000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Navigator + /text/shared/02/01220000.xhp + + + + +You can also call the Navigator by selecting +View - Navigator +View - Navigator +View - Navigator +View - Navigator +View - Navigator. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Navigator On/Off + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a61d21a1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01230000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Styles (icon) + /text/shared/02/01230000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

StylesStylesStyles

+Specifies whether to show or hide the Styles window, which is where you can assign and organize styles. +
+Each $[officename] application has its own Styles window. Hence there are separate windows for text documents +text documents, for spreadsheets +spreadsheets and for presentations/drawing documents +presentations/drawing documents +presentations/drawing documents. +
+ + + + Icon Styles + + + Styles + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e73dbd1ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Set Paragraph Style + /text/shared/02/02010000.xhp + + + + + + +
+Set Paragraph Style +Assigns a style to the current paragraph, selected paragraphs, or to a selected object. +
+To reset the selected objects to the default paragraph style, select Clear formatting. Select More Styles to open the Styles window. +Clicking on the Down Arrow button on the right of a style name shows a pop-up menu that allows you to update the style from the current selection or to edit the style. +
+ + + + Set Paragraph Style + + + Set Paragraph Style + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7ee25b43f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Font Name + /text/shared/02/02020000.xhp + + + +
+fonts; specifying several +alternative fonts +characters; alternative fonts + + + +Font Name +Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly. +You can enter several fonts, separated by semicolons. $[officename] uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available. +
+Any font changes apply to the selected text or word in which the cursor is positioned. If no text has been selected, the font applies to text typed afterwards. +The last five font names that have been selected are shown in the top part of the combo box. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Font Name + + +
+
+In $[officename] you see the available fonts only if a printer is installed as the default printer in your system. In order to install a printer as the default printer please refer to your operating system documentation. +You can see the name of the fonts formatted in their respective font if you mark the Show preview of fonts field in $[officename] - View in the Options dialog box. + + +If you receive an error message that states that certain fonts have not been found, you can install them with $[officename] Setup in the Repair mode if it is a $[officename] font. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9965554f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + Font Size + /text/shared/02/02030000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Font Size +Allows you to choose between different font sizes from the list, or to enter a size manually. +
+
+ + + + + Icon + + + Font Size + + +
+ + + + + + Icon + + + Font Size + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9be679f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Text running from left to right + /text/shared/02/02040000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Text running from left to right

+Specifies the horizontal direction of the text. +
+
+ + + + Icon Text direction from left to right + + + Text direction from left to right + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8f7316d4a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Text running from top to bottom + /text/shared/02/02050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Text running from top to bottom

+Specifies the vertical direction of the text. +
+
+ + + + Icon Text direction from top to bottom + + + Text direction from top to bottom + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9e001110c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + Decrease Indent + /text/shared/02/02130000.xhp + + + +
+ + +paragraphs;decreasing indents of +decrease indent of paragraph + +

Decrease Indent

+ Click the Decrease Indent icon to reduce the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the previous default tab position. +
+ If you previously increased the indentation for several collectively selected paragraphs, this command can decrease the indentation for all of the selected paragraphs.The cell content refers to the current value under Format - Cells - Alignment. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Decrease Indent + + +
+
+ If you click the Decrease Indent icon while holding down the CommandCtrl key, the indent for the selected paragraph is moved by the default tab stop that has been set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3de6d3bb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + Increase Indent + /text/shared/02/02140000.xhp + + + +
+ +paragraphs; increasing indents of +increase indent of paragraph + + +

Increase Indent

+ Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next default tab position. +
+ If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is increased. + The cell content refers to the current value under Format - Cells - Alignment tab. + +
+ + + + Icon + + + Increase Indent + + +
+
+ Click the Increase Indent icon while holding down the CommandCtrl key to move the indenting of the selected paragraph by the default tab distance set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. + Example: + The indents of two paragraphs are moved with the Increase Indent function to a standard tab distance of 2 cm: + + + + + + Original indent + + + Indent increased + + + Indent increased by the amount with the CommandCtrl key. + + + + + 0.25 cm + + + 2 cm + + + 2.25 cm + + + + + 0.5 cm + + + 2 cm + + + 2.5 cm + + +
+ + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..411189d3e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + Character Highlighting Color + /text/shared/02/02160000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Highlighting

+Applies current highlighting color to the character style or text selection. +
+
+ + + +Choose Format - Character - Highlighting tab. + + + + +When editing a character style, choose Highlighting tab. + + +Click the Character Highlighting Color icon on the Formatting bar, Text Object bar or Character section of Properties Sidebar.Text Formatting bar. +
+ + + + Character Highlighting Color Icon + + + Character Highlighting Color icon + + +
+
+
+To change the highlighting color, click the arrow next to the Character Highlighting Color icon, and then click the color that you want. +

Apply Highlighting

+

To a Text Selection

+ + + Select the text that you want to highlight. + + + Click the Character Highlighting Color icon on the Formatting or Text ObjectText Formatting bar. + + + To type after the selection without highlighting, click CommandCtrl+M. + + + + +

For Multiple Selections

UFI: see #112387# + + + Start with no text selected. + + + On the Formatting bar, click the Character Highlighting Color icon. + + + The mouse cursor changes to the Apply Highlighting cursor. + + + + + Apply Highlighting Icon + + + Apply Highlighting cursor + + +
+ + + Use the Apply Highlighting cursor to select text that you want to highlight. + + + To turn off highlighting cursor, click the Character Highlighting Color icon again, or press Esc. + + + + +To apply highlighting to a single word, double-click the word; for a sentence use triple-click, and quadruple-click for a paragraph. +

To Remove Highlighting

+ + + Select the highlighted text. + + + On the Text Formatting bar, click the arrow next to the Character Highlighting Color icon, and then click No Fill. + + + + + + + For multiple selections, click the Character Highlighting Color icon with No Fill, select highlighting to remove, then finish by clicking the icon again or pressing Esc. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c6655d6b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Background color/Paragraph background + /text/shared/02/02170000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Background Color

+Click to open a toolbar where you can click a background color for a paragraph. The color is applied to the background of the current paragraph or the selected paragraphs. +
+ +
+ + + + Icon Background color + + + Background Color + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f620fd361 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Increase Spacing + /text/shared/02/03110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Increase Spacing +Click the Increase Spacing icon to increase the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Increase Spacing + + +
+
+You can make additional adjustments to the spacing by selecting Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..597837199 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Decrease Spacing + /text/shared/02/03120000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Decrease Spacing +Click the Decrease Spacing icon to decrease the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Decrease Spacing + + +
+
+You can make additional adjustments to the spacing by selecting Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35e74c129 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Borders + /text/shared/02/03130000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Borders +Click the Borders icon to open the Borders toolbar, where you can modify the border of a sheet area or an object. +
+ +This object can be the border of a frame, a graphic or a table. The icon will only be visible if a graphic, table, object or frame has been selected. +To apply a particular type of border to a single cell, position the cursor in the cell, open the Border toolbar and select a border. + Whenever you insert graphics or tables, they already have a complete border. To remove that border, select the graphic object or the entire table and click the no border icon on the Border toolbar. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Borders + + +
+
+Further information can be found in the Help in Borders. You can also find information on how to format a text table with the Borders icon. +
+ +UFI: moved border_object into Writer switch + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0b824ac19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + Line Style + /text/shared/02/03140000.xhp + + + +
+ +Line Style +Click this icon to open the Line Style toolbar, where you can modify the border line style. +
+This border can be the border of a frame, graphic or table. The Line Style icon will only be visible if a graphic, table, chart object or frame has been selected. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Line Style + + +
+
+For more information, see the Borders section of the Help. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f54a3ea30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Border Color + /text/shared/02/03150000.xhp + + + +
+ +Border Color +Click the Line Color (of the border) icon to open the Border Color toolbar, which enables you to change the border color of an object. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Line Color (of the border) + + +
+
+For more information, see the Borders section in the Help. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3f0e1b37b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/03200000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Anchor (menu) + /text/shared/02/03200000.xhp + + + +
+anchors; changing + + +

Anchor

+
+Allows you to switch between anchoring options. + The Anchor icon is only visible when an object such as a graphic or control field or frame is selected. +Further information about the anchoring is contained in the Anchoring help section. + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33f6771fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/04210000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Optimize Size + /text/shared/02/04210000.xhp + + + +
+ +Optimize Size +Opens a toolbar that contains functions for optimizing the rows and columns in a table. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Optimize Size + + +
+
+You can select from the following functions: + + + + + + +Optimal Height + + +Optimal Column Width + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0530ff4ba --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Arrow Style + /text/shared/02/05020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Arrow Style

+Opens the Arrowheads toolbar. Use the symbols shown to define the style for the end of the selected line. +
+The Arrow Style icon is only displayed when you create a drawing with the drawing functions. For more information, see the Line Styles section of the Help. +
+ + + + Icon Line Ends + + + Arrow Style + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4d0c79b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Rotate + /text/shared/02/05090000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Rotate +Rotates the selected object. +
+Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing toolbar. +Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing toolbar. +Select an object and click the Rotate icon on the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. Drag a corner handle of the object in the direction you want to rotate it. +
+ + + + Icon + + + Rotate + + +
+
+
+Format - Position and Size - Rotate. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..28ba50594 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/05110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Alignment + /text/shared/02/05110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Alignment +Modifies the alignment of selected objects. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Alignment + + +
+
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70941518a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Demote Outline Level + /text/shared/02/06050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Demote Outline Level

+Moves a chapter heading where the cursor is located, or selected chapter headings, down one outline level. Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected list paragraphs, down one list level.UFI: need two files for numbering and outline, also for 06060000.xhp +
+The Demote Outline Level icon is on the Bullets and Numbering bar, which appears when the cursor is positioned on a numbered chapter heading or a list paragraph. +The Demote icon is on the Outline bar, which appears when working in the outline view. This function can also be called by pressing Alt+Shift+Right Arrow. +
+ + + + Icon Demote + + + Demote Outline LevelDemote + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..45b26e90f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Promote Outline Level + /text/shared/02/06060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Promote Outline Level

+Moves a chapter heading where the cursor is located, or selected chapter headings, up one outline level. Moves a list paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected list paragraphs, up one list level. +
+The Promote Outline Level icon is on the Bullets and Numbering bar, which appears when the cursor is positioned on a numbered chapter heading or a list paragraph.The Promote icon is on the Outline bar, which appears when working in the outline view. This function can also be called by pressing Alt+Shift+Left Arrow. +
+ + + + Icon Promote + + + Promote Outline LevelPromote + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec2ad6835 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Move Up + /text/shared/02/06100000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Move Item UpMove Up

+Moves the paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected paragraphs, to before the previous paragraph. +
+ + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use the Move Item Up command, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. +The Move Item Up icon appears on the Bullets and Numbering bar. +The Move Item Up command is always active. This function can also be called by pressing CommandCtrl+Alt+Up Arrow. + + + If you have numbered paragraphs and use the Move Up command, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. +The Move Up icon appears on the Outline bar. +The Move Up command is always active. This function can also be called by pressing Alt+Shift+Up Arrow. + + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use Move Down, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. + + +No shortcut keys or toolbars for CALC and DRAW + + +
+ + + + Icon Move Up + + + Move Item UpMove Up + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d99053de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + Move Down + /text/shared/02/06110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Move Item DownMove Down

+Moves the paragraph where the cursor is located, or selected paragraphs, to after the next paragraph. +
+ + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use Move Item Down, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. +The Move Item Down icon appears on the Bullets and Numbering bar. +The Move Item Down command is always active. This function can also be called by pressing CommandCtrl+Alt+Down Arrow. + + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use Move Down, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. +The Move Down icon appears on the Outline bar. +The Move Down command is always active. This function can also be called by pressing Alt+Shift+Down Arrow. + + +If you have numbered paragraphs and use Move Down, then the numbers are adjusted automatically to the current order. + + +No shortcut keys or toolbars for CALC and DRAW. + + +
+ + + + Icon Move Down + + + Move Item DownMove Down + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..09826d05e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/06120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Toggle Unordered List + /text/shared/02/06120000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Toggle Unordered List

+Assigns bullet points to the selected paragraphs, or removes them from bulleted paragraphs. +
+Bullet options such as type and position are defined in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. To open this dialog, click the Bullets and Numbering icon on the Bullets and Numbering bar. +Bullet options such as type and position are defined in the Bullets and Numbering dialog. To open this dialog, click the Bullets and Numbering icon on the Text Formatting bar. +In the Web Layout, some numbering/bullet options are not available. +The distance between the text and the left text box and the position of the bullets can be determined in the dialog under Format - Paragraph by entering the left indent and the first-line indent. +
+ + + + Icon Unordered List + + + Toggle Unordered List + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6921a10dd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Load URL + /text/shared/02/07010000.xhp + + + +
+ +Load URL +Loads a document specified by an entered URL. You can type a new URL, edit an URL, or select one from the list. Displays the full path of the current document. +Enable Load URL with the Visible Buttons command (right-click the toolbar).i73505 +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..08d64a67a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Reload + /text/shared/02/07060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+reloading; documentsdocuments; reloadingloading; reloading + +Reload +Replaces the current document with the last saved version. +
+Any changes made after the last save will be lost. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f486e28ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Edit File + /text/shared/02/07070000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+write protection on/off +protected documents +documents; read-only +read-only documents; editing +cursor;in read-only text +read-only documents;cursor +Edit Mode icon +mw inserted "Edit File icon" entry + +

Edit Mode

+Enables you to edit a read-only document or database table. Use the Edit Mode icon to activate or deactivate the edit mode. +
+
+ + + + Edit Mode Icon + + + Edit Mode + + +
+
+
+ + +You can enable a selection cursor in a read-only text document or in the Help. Choose Edit - Select Text or open the context menu of a read-only document and choose Select Text. The selection cursor does not blink. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..338cb3548 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Data + /text/shared/02/07070100.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Edit Data +read-only documents; database tables on/off +protected database tables +data; read-only + +Turns the edit mode for the current database table on or off. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Edit Data + + +
+
+Editing Databases in Networks +To make changes in a database used by more than one person, you must have the appropriate access rights. When you edit an external database, there is no intermediate storage by $[officename] of the changes made. They are sent directly to the database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06ca1721f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Save Record + /text/shared/02/07070200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Save Record +records; saving + +Saves the current database table record. The Save Record icon is found on the Table Data bar. +
+ +Changes to the contents of a record are automatically saved as soon as you select another record. To save changes without selecting another record, click the Save Record icon. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3004adbe1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Stop Loading + /text/shared/02/07080000.xhp + + + +
+ + +Stop Loading +Click to interrupt the current loading process, CommandCtrl+click to interrupt all loading processes. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6f9728c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/07090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Export Directly as PDF + /text/shared/02/07090000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Export Directly as PDF +Exports the current document directly as PDF. No settings dialog is shown. +
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9813017a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Document Information + /text/shared/02/08010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Document Information +Displays information about the active %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The names of the document, the library, and the module are displayed, separated by dots. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c58048d4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/08020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Position in Document + /text/shared/02/08020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Position in Document +Displays the current cursor position in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic document. The row number is specified, then the column number. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71c4605c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Hyperlink Dialog + /text/shared/02/09070000.xhp + + + + +
+Choose Insert - Hyperlink. +Choose Edit - Hyperlink, when the cursor is placed in a hyperlink. +On Standard bar, click +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Hyperlink Dialog + + +
+
+ +Select the type of hyperlink to be inserted. + +Opens the hyperlink in your default web browser. + +Opens the Hyperlink dialog. + +Copies the URL to the clipboard. + +Removes the hyperlink, leaving plain text. + + + + + +

Apply

+Applies the data to your document. + +

Close

+Closes the dialog without saving. +

Help

+Opens the Help. + +

Reset

+Resets the entries in the dialog to their original state. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f1ac31d90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Internet + /text/shared/02/09070100.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Internet

+Use the Internet page of the Hyperlink dialog to edit hyperlinks with WWW or FTP addresses. +
+
+ +
+ +The fields for the login name, password and anonymous user are only available for FTP addresses. +

Type of hyperlink

+

Web

+Creates an "http://" hyperlink. +

FTP

+Creates an "FTP://" hyperlink. +

URL

+Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame.see i48946 + + +Specifies the position in the target document where you wish to jump to. +Inserts the target in the Target field of the Hyperlink dialog. +Once the hyperlink has been completely entered, click on Close to set the link and leave the dialog. +

Login name

+Specifies your login name, if you are working with FTP addresses. +

Password

+Specifies your password, if you are working with FTP addresses. +

Anonymous user

+Allows you to log in to the FTP address as an anonymous user. +
+

Further settings

+ + + +

Frame

+Enter the name of the frame that you want the linked file to open in, or select a predefined frame from the list. If you leave this box blank, the linked file opens in the current browser window. + + + +

Form

+Specifies whether the hyperlink is inserted as text or as a button. + + + +

Events

+Opens the Assign Macro dialog, in which you can give events such as "mouse over object" or "trigger hyperlink" their own program codes. + + + +

Text

+Specifies the visible text or button caption for the hyperlink. + + + +

Name

+Enter a name for the hyperlink. $[officename] inserts a NAME tag in the hyperlink. +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9858b5574 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + Mail + /text/shared/02/09070200.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Mail

+On the Mail page in the Hyperlink dialog you can edit hyperlinks for email addresses. +
+
+ +
+ +

Mail

+

Recipient

+Assigns the specified email address to the hyperlink. Clicking the new hyperlink in the document will open a new message document, addressed to the receiver specified in the Recipient field. +

Data Sources

+Hides or shows the data source browser. Drag the receiver's Email data field from the data source browser into the Recipient text field. +

Subject

+Specifies the subject that is inserted in the subject line of the new message document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..29de0ff1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + Document + /text/shared/02/09070300.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Document

+Hyperlinks to any document or targets in documents can be edited using the Document tab from the Hyperlink dialog. +
+
+ +
+ +

Document

+ + hyperlinks;to files + hyperlinks;to folders + +

Path

+Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. If you do not specify a target frame, the file opens in the current document or frame. +If the URL refers to a folder, the standard file manager in your operating system opens showing the contents of the specified folder. +

Open File

+Opens the Open dialog, where you can select a file. +

Target in document

+

Target

+Specifies a target for the hyperlink into the document specified under Path. +

Target in Document

+Opens the Target in Document dialog. +

URL

+Specifies the URL, which results from the entries in Path and Target. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d51548670 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09070400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + New Document + /text/shared/02/09070400.xhp + + + +
+ + +

New Document

+Use the New Document tab from the Hyperlink dialog to set up a hyperlink to a new document and create the new document simultaneously. +
+
+ +
+ +

New Document

+Specifies the name, path and type of the new document in this area. +

Edit now

+Specifies that the new document is created and immediately opened for editing. +

Edit later

+Specifies that the document is created but it is not immediately opened. +

File

+Enter a URL for the file that you want to open when you click the hyperlink. +

Select Path

+Opens the Select Path dialog, where you can select a path. +

File type

+Specifies the file type for the new document. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5b03db67 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Previous Page + /text/shared/02/10010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Previous Page

+Moves back to the previous page in the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +
+
+ + + + Icon Previous Page + + + Previous Page + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bd5fa882a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Next Page + /text/shared/02/10020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Next Page

+Moves forward to the next page in the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +
+
+ + + + Icon Next Page + + + Next Page + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ce4ba3f4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + To Document Begin/First Page + /text/shared/02/10030000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

To Document Begin First Page

+Moves to the first page of the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +
+
+ + + + Icon First Page + + + To Document Begin First Page + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc570578e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + To Document End/Last Page + /text/shared/02/10040000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

To Document EndLast Page

+Moves to the last page of the document. This function is only active when you select the Print Preview function on the File menu. +
+
+ + + + Icon Last Page + + + To Document EndLast Page + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e86f5b7e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/10100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Close Window + /text/shared/02/10100000.xhp + + + +
+ +Close Window +Closes the current window. Choose Window - Close Window, or press CommandCtrl+F4. In the print preview of $[officename] Writer and Calc, you can close the current window by clicking the Close Preview button. +
+If additional views of the current document were opened by Window - New Window, this command will close only the current view. +
+Close the current document +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6546d6f5c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Explorer On/Off +/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp + + + +
+ +Explorer On/Off +Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer. The Explorer On/Off icon is visible on the Table Data bar. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + +Explorer On/Off + + +
+ +
+ +In the data source explorer you see the data sources registered in $[officename] with their queries and tables. + +Establishing a connection - As soon as you select an individual table or query, a connection to the data source is established. Once the connection is opened, the name of the data source, the Queries or Tables entry, and the name of the query or table selected is shown in bold type. + +Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box. + +To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled. + +Opens the selected database file for editing.i66574 new command "Database Registrations" / but name in UI is "Registered databases" + +Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2f045429 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Sort Ascending +/text/shared/02/12010000.xhp + + + +
+

Sort Ascending

+Sorts the data of the selected field in ascending order. Text fields are sorted alphabetically, numerical fields are sorted by number.UFI: Help ID .uno:Sortup is found in text/sdatabase/11090000.xhp so I deleted it here +
+
+ + + + + +
+Data of the currently selected field are always sorted. A field is always selected as soon as you place the cursor in the field. To sort within tables, you can also click the corresponding column header. + +To sort more than one data field, choose Data - Sort, then choose the Sort Criteria tab, where you can combine several sort criteria. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e15cf5871 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + +Sort Descending +/text/shared/02/12020000.xhp + + + +
+ +

Sort Descending

+Sorts the data of the selected field in descending order. Text fields are sorted alphabetically, number fields are sorted by number. +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5faf2c589 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + +AutoFilter +/text/shared/02/12030000.xhp + + + +
+ +

AutoFilter

+Filters the records, based on the content of the currently selected data field. +
+
+ + + + +Icon AutoFilter + + +AutoFilter + + +
+
+Place the cursor in a field name whose content you want to filter and then click the AutoFilter icon. Only those records with content identical to the selected field name are visible. +For example, to view all the customers from New York, click a field name with the entry "New York". AutoFilter then filters all customers from New York from the database. +You can remove the current AutoFilter with the Reset Filter/Sorting icon or with Data - Filter - Reset Filter. +To filter with several field names simultaneously, click the Default Filter icon. The Default Filter dialog appears, in which you can combine several filter criteria. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2ca975cb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Reset Filter/Sorting +/text/shared/02/12040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Reset Filter/Sorting + Cancels the filter settings and displays all of the records in the current table. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Reset Filter/Sorting + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1e7955917 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + +Refresh +/text/shared/02/12050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Refresh

+Refreshes the displayed data. In a multi-user environment, refreshing the data ensures that it remains current. +
+
+ + + + +Icon Refresh + + +Refresh + + +
+ +
+Click the arrow next to the Refresh icon to open a submenu with the following commands: + + + + +Refresh - Displays the refreshed contents of the database table. + + + +Rebuild - Rebuilds the view of the database table. Use this command when you have changed the structure of the table. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..738ee5f8e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Insert Database Columns +/text/shared/02/12070000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Insert Database Columns +Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. + The icon is only visible if the current document is a text document or a spreadsheet. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Data to Text + + +
+ +
+In the data source browser, select the record that you want to insert into the document and then click the Data to Text icon. The record is inserted in the document at the cursor position, with the contents of each individual field of the record copied to a table column. You can also select multiple records and transfer them into the document by clicking the Data to Text icon. Each individual record is then written to a new row. + +In the data source browser, select the records that you want to insert into the document and then click the Data to Text icon, or drag-and-drop data from the data source browser into the document. This opens the Insert Database Columns dialog. Select whether the data should be inserted as a table, as fields or as text. + +The preferences you set in the Insert Database Columns dialog are saved and will be active the next time the dialog is called. This save process is independent of the database and can record the preferences for a maximum of 5 databases. + +If data is inserted into the document as a table, the table properties are not saved along with the data in the document. If you select the AutoFormat function for formatting the table, $[officename] will note the name of the format template. This template will then be used automatically if you insert data as a table again, unless the preferences have been changed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..002d84302 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Table +/text/shared/02/12070100.xhp + + + + + +Table +database contents; inserting as tables + +Inserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as a table. In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Table option to insert the selected data into the document as a table. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text table is formatted. +Table +In the Table area, use the arrow keys to select the columns of the database table that you want to apply to the text table. +Database columns +Specifies the database columns to be inserted into the text table. All database table columns that have not been accepted in the Table column(s) list box are listed here. The entries are sorted alphabetically. +Table column(s) +Lists all database columns to be inserted into the document. A column will be assigned to each corresponding entry in the table. The entry order in the Table column(s) list box determines the data order in the text table. +>> +Moves all listed database fields into the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. +> +Moves the selected database field into the Table column(s) list box. You can also double click an entry to move it to the Table column(s) list box. All fields listed in the Table column(s) list box are inserted into the document. +< +Removes the selected database field from the Table column(s) list box The removed field is not inserted into the document. +<< +Removes all database fields from the Table column(s) list box. +
+Format +Specifies the format for inserting the database fields into the document. +From database +Accepts the database formats. + +Select +Specifies a format from the list, if the format information of certain data fields is not accepted. The formats supplied here are only available for certain database fields, such as numeric or Boolean fields. If you select a database field in text format, you will not be able to select any format from the selection list, since the text format will be automatically maintained. +If the format you want is not listed, select "Other Formats..." and define the desired format in the Number Format dialog. +The number format assigned using the selection list always refers to the database field selected in the Database columns list box. +
+To insert the data into the document in the form of a table, the correct Table option must be active. You can then select a database field from the Table column(s) list box to define the formatting of the database field. The changes to the number formats will be applied to the last selection. It does not matter whether the database field was selected from the Database columns list box or from the Table column(s) list box. +Insert table heading +Specifies whether to insert a heading line for the columns in the text table. +Apply column name +Uses the field names of the database table as headings for each of the text table columns. +Create row only +Inserts an empty heading line into the text table. Using the Create row only option, you can define headings in the document, which do not correspond to the database field names. +Properties +Opens the Table Format + +Table Format dialog, which enables you to define the table properties such as borders, background, and column width. +AutoFormat +Opens the AutoFormat + +AutoFormat dialog, in which you can select format styles that are immediately applied when inserting the table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aa7d7ffd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Fields +/text/shared/02/12070200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + Fields + database contents; inserting as fieldsInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as fields. In the Insert Database Columns dialog, select the Fields to insert the selected data into the document as fields. These database fields work as wildcards for the individual database columns and can be used for form letters. Click the Data to Fields icon to match the contents of the fields to the currently selected record. + If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. Also, a field command such as "Next record" will be inserted automatically between individual field command blocks. + The Insert Database Columns dialog lets you define which database fields to insert into the document and how to format the paragraphs. + Fields + In the Fields area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents. +
+ Database columns + Lists all columns of the database table, which can be accepted in the selection list box to insert them into the document. Select the database columns that you want to insert it in the document. + > + Moves the fields that you selected in the Database columns list box into the selection field. You can also double-click the entry to select it. + Select + Lists the database columns that you selected to be inserted into the document. You can also enter text here. This text will be also inserted into the document. The entries' order in the selection field corresponds to the data order in the document. + + Paragraph Style + By default, the inserted paragraphs are formatted with the current Paragraph Styles. This format corresponds to the "none" entry in the Paragraph Style list box. This is where you can select other Paragraph Styles to apply to the paragraph you want to insert into the document. The list box displays the available Paragraph Styles defined in %PRODUCTNAME and managed in the Style Catalog. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3338e0b90 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Text +/text/shared/02/12070300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Text + database contents; inserting as textInserts data selected from the data source browser into the document as text. If you select the Text option in the Insert Database Columns dialog, the content of the data selected in the data source browser is inserted into the document as text. In the dialog, you can decide which database fields or columns are transferred, and how the text is formatted. + If several records are selected when you choose the Data to Text function, the mail merge fields will be inserted according to the number of records. + Text + In the Text area, use the arrow button to select the database table columns into which you want to insert field contents. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8fcf4e72b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Data to Fields +/text/shared/02/12080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Data to Fields +Updates the contents of the existing database fields by the marked records. The Data to Fields icon is only available if the current document is a text document. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Data to Fields + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ff7eaf6c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + Standard Filter + /text/shared/02/12090000.xhp + + + +
+default filters, see standard filters + databases; standard filters + standard filters;databases +mw converted "standard filters..." into a two level entry and "default filters;" into a cross reference + + +Standard Filter + Allows you to set the filtering options. + +
+ Use the Standard Filter to refine and to combine AutoFilter search options. +
+ + + + +Icon + + + + Standard Filter + + +
+ +
+
+ $[officename] saves the current filter settings for the next time that you open this dialog. +
+ To remove the current filter, click Reset Filter/Sorting icon. +
+ AutoFilter +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8830deef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Standard Filter + /text/shared/02/12090100.xhp + + + + + + + + +

Standard Filter

+ Specifies the logical conditions to filter your table data. This dialog is available for spreadsheet documents, database tables and database forms. The dialog for databases does not contain the More Options button. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + +Filter criteria + You can define a filter by indicating the type of line, the name of the field, a logical condition and a value or a combination of arguments. + + + + +Operator + For the following arguments, you can choose between the logical operators AND / OR. + + + + + + +Field name + Specifies the field names from the current table to set them in the argument. You will see the column identifiers if no text is available for the field names. + + + + + + +Condition + Specifies the comparative operators through which the entries in the Field name and Value fields can be linked. + + + + + + +Value + Specifies a value to filter the field. + The Value list box contains all possible values for the specified Field name . Choose the value to be used in the filter. You can also choose the - empty - or -not empty - entries.. + If you use the filter function in database tables or forms, then type the value in the Value text box to be used for filtering. + + +Options + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be3438209 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12090101.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + + Comparison Operators + /text/shared/02/12090101.xhp + + + +comparisons;operators in standard filter dialog + operators;standard filters + standard filters;comparison operators + filters; comparison operators + equal sign, see also operators +mw added "equal sign,..."MW changed "default filters;" into "standard filters;"mw changed "comparisons;" and "operators;" +

Comparison Operators

+ The following comparative operators can be set under Condition in the Standard Filter dialog. + + + + + Comparative operator + + + + + Effect + + + + + + Equal (=) + + + Shows values equal to the condition. + + + + + Less than (<) + + + Shows values less than the condition. + + + + + Greater than (>) + + + Shows values greater than the condition. + + + + + Less than or equal to (< =) + + + Shows values that are less than or equal to the condition. + + + + + Greater than or equal to (> =) + + + Shows values that are greater than or equal to the condition. + + + + + Not equal (< >) + + + Shows the values not equal to the condition. + + + + + Largest + + + Shows the N (numeric value as parameter) largest values. + + + + + Smallest + + + Shows the N (numeric value as parameter) smallest values. + + + + + Largest % + + + Shows the largest N% (numeric value as parameter) of the total values. + + + + + Smallest % + + + Shows the smallest N% (numeric value as parameter) of the entire values. + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58f48d45e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Sort Order + /text/shared/02/12100000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Sort Order

+ + + + Icon Sort Order + + + Sort Order + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9bb2ad344 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Sort Order + /text/shared/02/12100100.xhp + + + +sorting; databases +databases; sorting + + + + +
+

Sort Order

+Specifies the sort criteria for the data display. +
+
+ +
+While the functions Sort in Ascending Order and Sort in Descending Order sort by one criterion only, you can combine several criteria in the Sort Order dialog. +You can remove a sorting that has been performed with the Reset Filter/Sorting icon. +

Sorting

+Use this area to enter sorting criteria. If you enter additional sorting criteria under and then, the data matching the content of the higher-order criterion is ordered according to the next criterion. +If you sort the field name "First name" in ascending order and the field name "Last name" in descending order, all records will be sorted in ascending order by first name, and then within the first names, in descending order by last name. +

Field name

+Specifies the data field name whose content will determine the sort order. +

Order

+Specifies the sort order (either ascending or descending). +

and then

+Specifies additional subordinate sort criteria from the other fields. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..250f0a538 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,297 @@ + + + + + + + Find Record + /text/shared/02/12100200.xhp + + + + +tables in databases; searching +forms; browsing +records; searching in databases +searching; databases +databases; searching records +mw changed" database tables;" to "tables in databases;" + + +
+

Find Record

+Searches database tables and forms. In forms or database tables, you can search through data fields, list boxes, and check boxes for specific values. +
+
+ +
+When searching a table, the data fields of the current table are searched. When searching in a form, the data fields of the table linked with the form are searched. +The search described here is carried out by %PRODUCTNAME. If you want to use the SQL server to search in a database, then you should use the Form-based Filters icon on the Form bar. +The search function is also available for table controls. When calling the search function from a table control, you can search each column of the table control corresponding to the database columns of the linked database table. +

Search for

+Specifies the type of search. + + +

Text:

+Enter the search term in the box or select it from the list. The text under the cursor is already copied into the Text combo box. Note that while running a search in a form, tabs and line breaks cannot be processed. +Your search terms will be saved as long as the table or the form document is open. If you are running more than one search and you would like to repeat the search term, you can select a previously used search term from the combo box. + +

Field content is NULL

+Specifies that fields will be found that contain no data. + +

Field content is not NULL

+Specifies that fields will be found that contain data. +

Where to search

+Specifies the fields for the search. + +

Form

+Specifies the logical form in which you want the search to take place. +The Form combo box is only visible if the current document is a form document with more than one logical form. It does not appear during a search in tables or queries. +Form documents may contain multiple logical forms. These are individual form components, which are each linked to a table. +The Form combo box contains the names of all logical forms for which controls exist. + +

All Fields

+Searches through all fields. If you are running a search in a table, all fields in the table will be searched. If you are running a search in a form, all fields of the logical form (entered under Form) will be searched. If you are running a search in a table control field, all columns that are linked to a valid database table field will be searched. +Note that the fields of the current logical form do not have to be identical to the fields of the form document. If the form document contains fields that point to multiple data sources (that is, multiple logical forms), the All Fields option will only search for the fields linked to data sources in the form document. + + +

Single field

+Searches through a specified data field. +

Settings

+Defines settings to control the search. + +

Position

+Specifies the relationship of the search term and the field contents. The following options are available: + + + + anywhere in the field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern anywhere in the field. + + + + + beginning of field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the beginning of the field. + + + + + end of field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern at the end of the field. + + + + + entire field + + + Returns all fields containing the search pattern as an exact match to the contents of the field. + + +
+If the Wildcard expression check box is marked, this function is not available. + +

Apply field format

+Specifies that all field formats are considered when searching in the current document. Field formats are all visible formats that are created using the following possibilities: + + + in table design mode for field properties, + + + in data source view on column formatting, + + + in forms on control properties. + + +If the Apply field format box is marked, the data source view of the table or form is searched using the formatting set there. If the box is not marked, the database is searched using the formatting saved in the database. +Example: +You have a date field, which is saved in "DD.MM.YY" format in the database (for example, 17.02.65). The format of the entry is changed in the data source view to "DD MMM YYYY" (17 Feb 1965). Following this example, a record containing February 17 is only found when the Apply field format option is on: + + + + Apply field format + + + Search pattern + + + + + on + + + "Feb" is returned, but not "2". + + + + + off + + + "2" is returned, but not "Feb". + + +
+It is recommended that you always search using field formatting. +The following examples show possible issues when searching without field formatting. These issues depend on the database used and only occur for certain internal default formatting: + + + + Search results + + + Cause + + + + + "5" returns "14:00:00" as a time. + + + Time fields are not defined for dBASE databases and must be simulated. To internally display the time "14:00:00", a "5" is necessary. + + + + + "00:00:00" returns all records of a standard date field. + + + The database stores a date value internally using a combined date/time field. + + + + + "45.79" does not return "45.79" although the entire field option is selected under Position. + + + The view shown does not match what is stored internally. For example, if value "45.789" is stored in the database as a field of type "Number/Double" and the shown formatting is set to display only two decimals, "45.79" is only returned in searches with field formatting. + + +
+In this case, standard formatting is formatting that refers to the internally stored data. It is not always visible to the user, especially if it is used for simulating data types (for example, time fields in dBASE databases). This depends on the database used and the individual data type. Searching with field formatting is appropriate if you only want to find what is actually shown. This includes fields of type Date, Time, Date/Time and Number/Double. +However, searching without Apply field format is appropriate for larger databases with no formatting issues, because it is faster. +If you are searching the values of check boxes, and Apply field format is on, then you will receive a "1" for marked check boxes, a "0" for unmarked check boxes, and an empty string for undefined (tristate) check boxes. If the search has been carried out with Apply field format set to off, you will see the language-dependent default values "TRUE" or "FALSE". +If you use Apply field format when searching in list boxes, you find the text displayed in list boxes. If you do not use Apply field format, you will find the contents corresponding to the standard field format. + +

Match case

+Specifies that upper and lower case are taken into consideration during the search. + +

Search backwards

+Specifies that the search process will run in reverse direction, from the last to the first record. + +

From top / From bottom

+Restarts the search. A forward search restarts with the first record. A backwards search restarts with the last record. + +

Wildcard expression

+Allows a search with a * or ? wildcard. You can use the following wildcards: + + + + Wildcards + + + Meaning + + + Example + + + + + ? + + + for exactly one arbitrary character + + + "?loppy" returns "Floppy" + "M?ller" returns, for example, Miller and Moller + + + + + * + + + for 0 or more arbitrary characters + + + "*-*" returns "ZIP-Drive" and "CD-ROM" + "M*er" returns all entries starting with an "M" and ending in "er" (for example, Miller, Moller, Mather) + + +
+If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, precede them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. + +

Regular expression

+Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAME Find & Replace dialog. +Searching with regular expressions offers more options than searching with wildcard expressions. If you search with regular expressions, the following characters correspond to those used in searches with wildcards: + + + + Search with wildcard expression + + + Search with regular expressions + + + + + ? + + + . + + + + + * + + + .* + + +
+ + + + + + + +

State

+The State line shows the records returned by the search. If the search reaches the end (or the beginning) of a table, the search is automatically continued at the other end. +In very large databases, finding the record in reverse search order can take some time. In this case, the status bar informs you that the records are still being counted. + +

Search/Cancel

+Starts or cancels the search. If the search is successfully completed, the corresponding field in the table is highlighted. You can continue the search by clicking the Search button again. You can cancel a search process by clicking the Cancel button. + +

Close

+Closes the dialog. The settings of the last search will be saved until you quit %PRODUCTNAME. +If several tables or forms are open, you can set different search options for each document. When you close the documents only the search options of the document last closed are saved. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..46f7932f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Form-based Filters + /text/shared/02/12110000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +
+

Form-based Filters

+Prompts the database server to filter the visible data by specified criteria. +
+Unlike the normal search, which is activated by the Find Record icon on the Form bar, you can search more quickly by using the form-based filter. Usually a quick database server is charged with the search. Also, you can enter more complex search conditions. +
+ + + + Icon Form Filter + + + Form-based Filters + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..364410a83 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Apply Filter + /text/shared/02/12120000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Apply Filter

+Switches between the filtered and unfiltered view of the table. +
+
+ + + + Icon Form Filter + + + Apply Filter + + +
+
+The Apply Filter function retains form-based filters that have been set. You do not need to redefine them. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..655d18521 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Data source as table + /text/shared/02/12130000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+data sources; as tables + + +

Data source as table

+Activates an additional table view when in the form view. When the Data source as table function is activated, you see the table in an area above the form. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Data source as table + + +
+
+The Table view and Form view reflect the same data. Changes made in the table are also visible in the form, and changes to the form are visible in the table. +If there are several logical forms in a document, the table is only able to show one at a time.UFI removed two paras, see #60894 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4af6c441a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Data Source of Current Document + /text/shared/02/12140000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+data sources; displaying current + + + +Data Source of Current Document +Displays, in the data source browser, the table that is linked to the current document. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Data Source of Current Document + + +
+
+Choose Edit - Exchange Database to select another table. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcb170ae0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Tabs + /text/shared/02/13010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Setting Tabs +On the ruler, set the tabs for the current paragraph, or all selected paragraphs, using the mouse. +
+Initially the default tabs are shown on the horizontal ruler. Once you set a tab, only the default tabs to the right of the tab that you have set are available. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..03d38f6d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/13020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns + /text/shared/02/13020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+margins; setting with the mouse +columns; setting with the mouse +paragraphs; indents, margins and columns + + + + +cell widths; using ruler +cell widths; using mouse + + + +

Setting Indents, Margins, and Columns

+You can define the indents and margins for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, using the mouse. +
+If you split the page into columns, or the cursor is placed in a multiple-column frame, you can change the column width and the column spacing by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. +When an object, an image, or a draw object is selected, you will see the borders of the object in the ruler. You can change the borders by dragging them on the ruler with the mouse. +If the cursor is placed in a table cell, you can change the indents for the contents of the cell by dragging them with the mouse on the ruler. You can change the boundary lines of the table on the ruler or by dragging the actual boundary line. + + + + Icon + + + These icons mark the left indent for the first line of the current paragraph (top triangle) and the left indent for the other lines of the paragraph (bottom triangle). + + + + + Icon + + + This icon on the right of the ruler marks the right indent of the current paragraph. + + +
+ + + + Task + + + Procedure + + + + + Set left indent + + + Drag the bottom left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button. + + + + + Set left indent of first line + + + Drag the top left mark to the right while pressing the mouse button. + + + + + Set right indent + + + Drag the mark on the right to the left while pressing the mouse button. + + +
+In order to change the left indent starting with the second line of a paragraph, hold down the CommandCtrl key, click the triangle on the bottom left, and drag it to the right. +Tabs that have been set are not changed when indenting a paragraph. If the set tabs end up outside the margins of the paragraph, they are no longer displayed, but they still exist. + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..826e223ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Run + /text/shared/02/14010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Run Query

+Runs the SQL query and displays the query result. The Run Query function does not save the query. +
+The Run Query function allows you to check the query. When you save the query, it is stored in the Query tab page. +Choose View - Preview to run the query from the menu bar of a query design window.UFI: see dba-features "Querydesign: Close preview has moved" +
+ + + + Run Query Icon + + + Run Query + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36fd6d826 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Clear query + /text/shared/02/14020000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Clear query

+Clears the query and removes all tables from the design window. +
+
+ + + + Clear Query Icon + + + Clear query + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cfd8116d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + Add Tables + /text/shared/02/14020100.xhp + + + +tables in databases; adding to queries + + + +Add Tables +Specifies the tables to be inserted into the design window. In the Add Tables dialog, select the tables you need for your current task. + When creating a query or a new table presentation, select the corresponding table to which the query or table presentation should refer. When working with relational databases, select the tables between which you want to build relationships. +The inserted tables appear in a separate window in the query design or relational windows, along with a list of the fields contained in the table. You can determine the size and order of this window. +
+ +
+Table + +Shows only tables. + +Shows only queries. +Table name +Lists the available tables. To insert a table, select one from the list and click Add. You can also double-click the table name, and a window will be displayed containing the table fields at the top of the query design or the relational window. + +Add +Inserts the currently selected table. + +Close +Closes the Add Tables dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e9d93dace --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Switch Design View On/Off + /text/shared/02/14020200.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Switch Design View On/Off

+Displays the design view or the SQL view of the query. +
+
+ + + + Switch Design View On/Off Icon + + + Switch Design View On/Off + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd15006c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Run SQL command directly + /text/shared/02/14030000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Run SQL command directly

+In Native SQL mode you can enter SQL commands that are not interpreted by $[officename], but are instead passed directly to the data source. If you do not display these changes in the design view, you cannot change back to the design view. +
+For native SQL, the SQL string is forwarded directly to the connected database system without a previous evaluation by $[officename]. For example, if you access a database through an ODBC interface, the SQL string is passed to the ODBC driver and processed by it. +
+ + + + Run SQL command directly Icon + + + Run SQL command directly + + +
+
+Click the icon again to return to normal mode, in which the changes in the New Query Design are synchronized with the permitted changes through SQL. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b8b1ca31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Functions + /text/shared/02/14040000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Functions

+Displays the Function row in the lower part of the design view of the Query Design window. +
+
+ + + + Functions Icon + + + Functions + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..220e432ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Table Name + /text/shared/02/14050000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Table Name +Displays the Table row in the lower part of the Query Design. +
+
+ + + + Table Name Icon + + + Table Name + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..db7ef69a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Alias + /text/shared/02/14060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Alias

+Displays the Alias row in the lower part of the Query Design. +
+
+ + + + Alias Icon + + + Alias + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3fe2ee672 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/14070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Distinct Values + /text/shared/02/14070000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+SQL; DISTINCT parameter +distinct values in SQL queries + + +

Distinct Values

+Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT. The consequence is that identical values occurring multiple times are listed only once. +
+
+ + + + Distinct Values Icon + + + Distinct Values + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0e8d7e2da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + Selection + /text/shared/02/18010000.xhp + + + +
+ +Selection +Allows you to select objects in the current document. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Selection + + +
+
+To select an object, click the object with the arrow. To select more than one object, drag a selection frame around the objects. To add an object to a selection, press Shift, and then click the object. + + + +The objects selected together can then be defined as a group, turning them into a single group object. + + + + +You can edit individual elements of a group. You can also delete elements from a group with Command +Shift+click. + + + + +You can select single objects from a group by double-clicking, if you first disable the Double-click to edit Text icon on the Option bar. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1557389b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/18030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Automatic Spell Checking On/Off + /text/shared/02/18030000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Automatic Spell Checking On/Off

+ +
+
+ + + + Automatic Spell Checking On/Off + + + Automatic Spell Checking On/Off + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d7aebad0e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/19090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + HTML Source + /text/shared/02/19090000.xhp + + + +
+ + HTML documents;source text + + + +HTML Source +Displays the source text of the current HTML document. This view is available when creating a new HTML document or opening an existing one. +
+
+ +
+In HTML Source mode, you can view and edit the tags of HTML. Save the document as a plain text document. Assign an .html or .htm extension to designate the document as HTML.UFI: is this so? test it + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d9f606950 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + Current Page Style + /text/shared/02/20020000.xhp + + + +
+page styles;editing/applying with statusbar + + + + +Current Page Style +Displays the current Page Style. Double-click to edit the style, right-click to select another style. +
+Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. In the context menu of this field, you can apply a page style. +Double-click the Page Style field to open the Page Style dialog, in which you can edit the style for the current page. +Double-click this field to open the Available Master Slides dialog in which you can select the style for the current slide. You can select a different paper format or background. +Double-click this field to open the Available Master Slides dialog in which you select the style for the current page. You can select a different paper format or background. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b07ac037 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + Zoom + /text/shared/02/20030000.xhp + + + +
+
+zooming; status bar +mw deleted "scaling;" + +

Zoom

+Specifies the current page display zoom factor. +
+Click this field to open the Zoom dialog, where you can change the current zoom factor. +Right-click to open the context menu on this field to see a selection of available zoom factors. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b927bdf7c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + Insert Mode + /text/shared/02/20040000.xhp + + + +
+ +Insert Mode +Displays the current insert mode. You can toggle between INSRT = insert and OVER = overwrite. This field is only active if the cursor is in the input line of the formula bar or in a cell. +
+Click in the field to toggle the modes (except in the $[officename] Basic IDE, where only the Insert mode is active). If the cursor is positioned in a text document, you may also use the Insert key (if available on your keyboard) to toggle the modes. + + + + Mode + + + Result + + + + + INSRT + + + In the insert mode, new text is inserted at the cursor position and the following text is shifted to the right. The cursor is displayed as a vertical line. + + + + + OVER + + + In the overwrite mode, any existing text is replaced by new text. The cursor is displayed as a thick vertical line. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..53911bb64 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Selection Mode + /text/shared/02/20050000.xhp + + + + +
+ + selection modes in text + text; selection modes + extending selection mode + adding selection mode + block selection mode + + + +

Selection Mode

+ Switches between different selection modes. +
+Click this field to open a popup menu with the following options: + + + + Mode + + + Effect + + + + + Standard selection + + + This is the default selection mode for text documents. With the keyboard, selections can be performed by Shift+navigation key (arrows, Home, End, Page Up, Page Down). With the mouse, click in the text where the selection is to start, hold the left mouse button and move to the end of the selection. Release the mouse key to end selection. + + + + + Extending selection + + + Use the mouse, arrow keys or the Home and End keys to extend or crop the current selection. Clicking anywhere in the text selects the region between the current cursor position and the click position. + Hold the Shift key to temporarily activate the Extending selection mode. + + + + + Adding selection (Shift+F8) + + + Use this mode to select multiple ranges of text. Each new selection using the mouse or keyboard is added as a new selection. + Hold the Ctrl key to temporarily activate the Adding selection mode. + + + + + Block selection (CommandCtrl+Shift+F8) + + + Use this mode to select a non-contiguous block of text. + Hold the Alt key to temporarily activate the Block selection mode. + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b3e69291 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Document Modification + /text/shared/02/20060000.xhp + + + +
+ + +Document Modification +If changes to the document have not yet been saved, a "*" is displayed in this field on the Status bar. This also applies to new, not yet saved documents. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0ac22ff87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Time + /text/shared/02/20090000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Time +Displays the current time. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88f8baebe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/20100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Date + /text/shared/02/20100000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Date +Displays the current date. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..965277e20 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ + + + + + + + Image Filter Bar + /text/shared/02/24010000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Image Filter Bar +This icon on the Image bar opens the Image Filter bar, where you can use various filters on the selected picture. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Filter + + +
+
+ +Invert +Inverts the color values of a color image, or the brightness values of a grayscale image. Apply the filter again to revert the effect. + + + + Icon + + + Invert + + +
+ + + +Smooth +Softens or blurs the image by applying a low pass filter.low pass filter with a kernel of: 1-2-1, 2-5-2, 1-2-1 + + + + Icon + + + Smooth + + +
+ +Sharpen +Sharpens the image by applying a high pass filter.high pass filter with a kernel of: -1/-1/-1, -1/16/-1, -1/-1/-1 + + + + Icon + + + Sharpen + + +
+ +Remove Noise +Removes noise by applying a median filter.See i70055 + + + + Icon + + + Remove Noise + + +
+ + + +Solarization +Opens a dialog for defining solarization. Solarization refers to an effect that looks like what can happen when there is too much light during photo development. The colors become partly inverted. + + + + Icon + + + Solarization + + +
+Parameters +Specifies the degree and type of solarization. + +Threshold Value +Specifies the degree of brightness, in percent, above which the pixels are to be solarized. + +Invert +Specifies to also invert all pixels. + + + +Aging +All pixels are set to their gray values, and then the green and blue color channels are reduced by the amount you specify. The red color channel is not changed. + + + + Icon + + + Aging + + +
+ +Aging Degree +Defines the intensity of aging, in percent. At 0% you see the gray values of all pixels. At 100% only the red color channel remains.ufi: cannot see any difference between 0% and 100% aging here... + + + +Posterize +Opens a dialog to determine the number of poster colors. This effect is based on the reduction of the number of colors. It makes photos look like paintings. + + + + Icon + + + Posterize + + +
+ +Poster Colors +Specifies the number of colors to which the image is to be reduced. + +Pop Art +Converts an image to a pop-art format. + + + + Icon + + + Pop Art + + +
+ +Charcoal Sketch +Displays the image as a charcoal sketch. The contours of the image are drawn in black, and the original colors are suppressed. + + + + Icon + + + Charcoal Sketch + + +
+ + + +Relief +Displays a dialog for creating reliefs. You can choose the position of the imaginary light source that determines the type of shadow created, and how the graphic image looks in relief. + + + + Icon + + + Relief + + +
+Light Source +Specifies the light source position. A dot represents the light source. + + + +Mosaic +Joins small groups of pixels into rectangular areas of the same color. The larger the individual rectangles are, the fewer details the graphic image has. + + + + Icon + + + Mosaic + + +
+Element resolution +Determines the number of pixels to be joined into rectangles. + +Width +Defines the width of the individual tiles. + +Height +Defines the height of the individual tiles. + +Enhance edges +Enhances, or sharpens, the edges of the object. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ba30d1f36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + Graphics Mode + /text/shared/02/24020000.xhp + + + +
+ +Graphics Mode +Lists view attributes for the selected graphic object. The embedded or linked graphic object in the current file will not be changed, only the view of the object. +
+
+ + + + Cell Styles + + + Graphics mode + + +
+
+Default +The view of the graphic object is not changed. +Grayscale +The graphic object is shown in grayscale. A color graphic object can become monochrome in grayscale. You can also use the color sliders to apply a uniform color to the monochrome graphic object. +Black and White +The graphic object is shown in black and white. All brightness values below 50% will appear black, all over 50% will appear white. +Watermark +The graphic object is raised in brightness and reduced in contrast so that it can be used in the background as a watermark.UFI: #i45972# + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b2deff09e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Red + /text/shared/02/24030000.xhp + + + +
+ +Red +Specifies the proportion of red RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no red) to +100% (full red) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Red + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b5fa8fbf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Green + /text/shared/02/24040000.xhp + + + +
+ +Green +Specifies the proportion of green RGB color components for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (no green) to +100% (full green) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Green + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..37eaec6d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Blue + /text/shared/02/24050000.xhp + + + +
+ +Blue +Specifies the proportion of blue RGB color components for the selected graphic. Values from -100% (no blue) to +100% (full blue) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Blue + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..90a2dd254 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Brightness + /text/shared/02/24060000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Brightness

+Specifies the brightness for the selected graphic object. Values from -100% (only black) to +100% (only white) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon Brightness + + + Brightness + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dbe6c0b5b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Contrast + /text/shared/02/24070000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +

Contrast

+Specifies the contrast for viewing the selected graphic image. Values from -100% (no contrast at all) to +100% (full contrast) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Contrast + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..012f7a6ac --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Gamma + /text/shared/02/24080000.xhp + + + +
+ +Gamma +Specifies the gamma value for the view of the selected object, which affects the brightness of the midtone values. Values from 0.10 (minimum Gamma) to 10 (maximum Gamma) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Gamma + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb73e2670 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Transparency + /text/shared/02/24090000.xhp + + + +
+ +Transparency +Specifies the transparency in the graphic object. Values from 0% (fully opaque) to +100% (fully transparent) are possible. +
+
+ + + + Icon + + + Transparency + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dd401518e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/24100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + Crop + /text/shared/02/24100000.xhp + + + +
+ +Crop +Allows to crop the display of an inserted picture. Only the display gets cropped, the inserted picture is not changed. A picture must be selected to enable cropping. + +In Impress and Draw no dialog is shown when you click the icon, but you see eight cropping handles. Open the context menu of a selected picture and choose Crop Image, if you want to use the dialog for cropping. +Drag any of the eight cropping handles to crop the picture. +
+
+ + + + icon + + + Crop + + +
+
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8f11ae5f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Basic Shapes +/text/shared/02/basicshapes.xhp + + + +
+ +Basic Shapes +Opens the Basic Shapes toolbar which you can use to insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon on the Basic Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..54df440bd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Block Arrows +/text/shared/02/blockarrows.xhp + + + +
+ +Block Arrows +Opens the Block Arrows toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon from the Block Arrows toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96763d917 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Callouts +/text/shared/02/callouts.xhp + + + +
+callouts; drawings +speech bubbles +mw moved "legends;drawings" to draw guide text_enter.xhp + +Callouts +Opens the Callouts toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + +Click an icon from the Callouts toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aada8ab18 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Color +/text/shared/02/colortoolbar.xhp + + +Color toolbar from Image bar + + + +
+ +Color +With the Color toolbar you can edit some properties of the selected object. +
+To open the Color toolbar, click the Color icon on the Image toolbar. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e96b25db0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Flowchart +/text/shared/02/flowcharts.xhp + + + +
+ +Flowchart +Opens the Flowchart toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon from the Flowchart toolbar, then drag in the document to draw the shape. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f75ce5e79 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Fontwork + /text/shared/02/fontwork.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +

Fontwork

+Opens the Fontwork dialog from which you can insert styled text not possible through standard font formatting into your document. +
+ +
+ + +
+ +

Fontwork Gallery

+The Fontwork Gallery displays previews of Fontwork objects. To insert an object into your document, select the object, and then click OK. + +
+ +Fontwork toolbar +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9378df9ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/limit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ + + + + + + + + Limit + /text/shared/02/limit.xhp + + + +SQL; LIMIT clause + +Limit + +Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query by the LIMIT X clause. This can be used to limit your SQL Query results to those that fall within the first X number of it. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4bb6b0438 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + + + + Enter Name + /text/shared/02/namedialog.xhp + + + + + + +
+

Enter Name Dialog

+Enter a name or any requested text on the label. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3029a80f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + +Clone Formatting +/text/shared/02/paintbrush.xhp + + + +
+
+ +

Clone Formatting

+First select some text or an object, then click this icon. Then click on or drag across other text or click an object to apply the same formatting.i93691 +
+
+Click the Clone Formatting icon Icon on the Standard toolbar. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Clone Formatting + + +
+ +
+
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fd87ca7ee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + Query Properties Dialog + /text/shared/02/querypropdlg.xhp + + + +queries; set properties + + + +Query Properties Dialog + In the Query Properties dialog you can set two properties of the SQL Query, i.e. whether to return distinct values, and whether to limit the result set. +
+ In the Query Design View, choose Edit - Query Properties. + +
+ Distinct Values + +Use distinct values in query. + +Not use distinct values in query. + Expands the created select statement of the SQL Query in the current column by the parameter DISTINCT. The consequence is that identical values occurring multiple times are listed only once. + + +Limit + Adds a Limit to set the maximum number of records to return. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..006da45ed --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/stars.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Stars and Banners +/text/shared/02/stars.xhp + + + +
+ +Stars and Banners +Opens the Stars and Banners toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon on the Stars and Banners toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a5576c47 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + +Symbol Shapes +/text/shared/02/symbolshapes.xhp + + + +
+ +

Symbol Shapes

+Opens the Symbol Shapes toolbar from which you can insert graphics into your document. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Click an icon on the Symbol Shapes toolbar, and then drag in the document to draw the shape. +Some shapes have a special handle which you can drag to change the properties of the shape. The mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol over these special handles. + + Control points in a shape + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7bcbd011c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,989 @@ + + + + + + + General Shortcut Keys in $[officename] + /text/shared/04/01010000.xhp + + + +
+ +keyboard; general commands +shortcut keys; general +text input fields +AutoComplete function in text and list boxes +macros; interrupting +Unicode; input with keyboard +Unicode; shortcut keys +shortcut keys; Unicode + +

General Shortcut Keys in $[officename]

+
+ +

Using Shortcut Keys

+ A great deal of your application's functionality can be called up by using shortcut keys. For example, the Command+O +Ctrl+O shortcut keys are shown next to the Open entry in the File menu. If you want to access this function by using the shortcut keys, press and hold down Command +Ctrl and then press the O key. Release both keys after the dialog appears. + When operating your application, you can choose between using the mouse or the keyboard for almost all of the operations available. + + + + +

Calling Menus with Mnemonics

+ Some of the characters shown on the menu bar are underlined. You can access these menus directly by pressing the underlined character together with the Alt key. Once the menu is opened, you will again find underlined characters. You can access these menu items directly by simply pressing the underlined character key. + + +
+

Entering Unicode Characters

+You can enter arbitrary Unicode characters in the document typing the Unicode hexadecimal code point and then pressing Command+Option+XAlt+X (default). Type the Unicode hexadecimal notation and press Command+Option+XAlt+X to toggle between the Unicode character and its hexadecimal notation. Selection is not necessary but the conversion will apply to the selected characters. Toggling occurs on the characters prior to the cursor position when these characters form a valid Unicode hexadecimal point. Hexadecimal code points with value in the range U+0000 to U+0020 are not converted. +The default Unicode conversion shortcut is Command+Option+XAlt+X and Command+Option+CAlt+C in some locales where the default Unicode shortcut interferes with the main menu shortcut. To reassign the shortcut, choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard and select Category:Options with Function:Toggle Unicode Notation. +
+

Using Shortcut Keys to Control Dialogs

+ There is always one element highlighted in any given dialog - usually shown by a broken frame. This element, which can be either a button, an option field, an entry in a list box or a check box, is said to have the focus on it. If the focal point is a button, pressing Enter runs it as if you had clicked it. A check box is toggled by pressing the Spacebar. If an option field has the focus, use the arrow keys to change the activated option field in that area. Use the Tab key to go from one element or area to the next one, use Shift+Tab to go in the reverse direction. + Pressing Esc closes the dialog without saving changes. +If you place the focus on a button, not only will you see the dotted line framing the name of the button, but also a thicker shadow under the button selected. This indicates that if you exit the dialog by pressing the Enter key, it is the equivalent of pressing that button itself. +

Shortcut Keys for Mouse Actions

+ If you are using drag-and-drop, selecting with the mouse or clicking objects and names, you can use the keys Shift, Command +Ctrl and occasionally Option +Alt to access additional functionality. The modified functions available when holding down keys during drag-and-drop are indicated by the mouse pointer changing form. When selecting files or other objects, the modifier keys can extend the selection - the functions are explained where applicable. + +

Practical Text Input Fields

+ + + You can open a context menu, which contains some of the most often-used commands. + + + Use CommandCtrl+A to select the entire text. Use the right or left arrow key to remove the selection. + + + Double-click a word to select it. + + + A triple-click in a text input field selects the entire field. A triple-click in a text document selects the current sentence. + + + Use CommandCtrl+Del to delete everything from the cursor position to the end of the word. + + + By using CommandCtrl and right or left arrow key, the cursor will jump from word to word; if you also hold down the Shift key, one word after the other is selected. + + + INSRT is used to switch between the insert mode and the overwrite mode and back again. + + + Drag-and-drop can be used within and outside of a text box. + + + The CommandCtrl+Z shortcut keys are used to undo modifications one step at a time; the text will then have the status it had before the first change. + + +
+ + + $[officename] has an AutoComplete function which activates itself in some text and list boxes. For example, enter +c:\a~/a into the URL field and the AutoComplete function displays the first file or first directory found on the C: drive +in your home folder that starts with the letter "a". + + + Use the Down Arrow key to scroll through the other files and directories. Use the Right Arrow key to also display an existing subdirectory in the URL field. Quick AutoComplete is available if you press the End key after entering part of the URL. Once you find the document or directory you want, press Enter. + + +
+

Interrupting Macros

+If you want to terminate a macro that is currently running, press Command +Ctrl+Shift+Q. +

List of General Shortcut Keys in $[officename]

+ The shortcut keys are shown on the right hand side of the menu lists next to the corresponding menu command. (Not all of the mentioned keys for controlling dialogs are available on macOS.) +

Shortcut keys for controlling dialogs

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + Enter key + + + Activates the focused button in a dialog. + + + + + Esc + + + Terminates the action or dialog. If in $[officename] Help: goes up one level. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Toggles the focused check box in a dialog. + + + + + Arrow keys + + + Changes the active control field in an option section of a dialog. + + + + + Tab + + + Advances focus to the next section or element in a dialog. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Moves the focus to the previous section or element in a dialog. + + + + + OptionAlt+Down Arrow + + + Opens the list of the control field currently selected in a dialog. These shortcut keys apply not only to combo boxes but also to icon buttons with pop-up menus. Close an opened list by pressing the Esc key. + + +
+

Shortcut keys for controlling documents and windows

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + CommandCtrl+O + + + Opens a document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+S + + + Saves the current document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+N + + + Creates a new document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+N + + + Opens the Templates dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+P + + + Prints document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F + + + Activates the Find toolbar. + + + + + CommandCtrl+H + + + Calls the Find & Replace dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+F + + + Searches for the last entered search term. + + + + + Ctrl+Shift+J + + + Toggles the view between fullscreen mode and normal mode in Writer or Calc. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+R + + + Redraws the document view. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+I + + + Enable or disable the selection cursor in read-only text. + + + + + F1 + + + Starts the $[officename] Help. + In the $[officename] Help: jumps to main help page. + + + + + Shift+F1 + + + Context Help + + + + + Shift+F2 + + + Turns on Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + + + + + F6 + + + Sets focus in next visible subwindow, including menu bar, toolbars, windows such as Sidebar and Navigator, and document canvas/data source. + + + + + Shift+F6 + + + Sets focus in previous subwindow. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F6 + + + Sets focus in the document canvas/data source. + + + + + F10 + + + Activates the first menu (File menu). + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens the context menu. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+F10 + + + Docks and undocks floating subwindows such as unlocked toolbars, Sidebar and Navigator. + + + + + Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Home + + + Shows/hides main menu. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F4 or OptionAlt+F4 + + + Closes the current document. Closes $[officename] when the last open document is closed. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Q + + + Exits application. + + +
+

Shortcut keys for editing or formatting documents

+ + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + + When positioned at the start of a header, a tab is inserted. + + + + + Enter (if an OLE object is selected) + + + Activates the selected OLE object. + + + + + Enter (if a drawing object or text object is selected) + + + Activates text input mode. + + + + + CommandCtrl+X + + + Cuts out the selected elements. + + + + + CommandCtrl+C + + + Copies the selected items. + + + + + CommandCtrl+V + + + Pastes from the clipboard. + + + + + Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V + + + Pastes unformatted text from the clipboard. The text is pasted using the format that exists at the insertion point. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+V + + + Opens the Paste Special dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+A + + + Selects all. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Z + + + Undoes last action. + + + + + Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y + + + Redoes last action. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Y + + + Repeats last command. + + + + + CommandCtrl+I + + + The "Italic" attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also marked in italic. + + + + + CommandCtrl+B + + + The "Bold" attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also put in bold. + + + + + CommandCtrl+U + + + The "Underlined" attribute is applied to the selected area. If the cursor is positioned in a word, this word is also underlined. + + + + + CommandCtrl+M + + + Removes direct formatting from selected text or objects (as in Format - Clear Direct Formatting). + + +
+

Shortcut keys in the Gallery

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Tab + + + Moves between areas. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Moves backwards between areas. + + +
+

Shortcut keys in the New Theme area of the Gallery:

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Up Arrow + + + Moves the selection up one. + + + + + Down Arrow + + + Moves the selection down. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Enter + + + Opens the Properties dialog. + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens a context menu. + + + + + CommandCtrl+U + + + Refreshes the selected theme. + + + + + CommandCtrl+R + + + Opens the Enter Title dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+D + + + Deletes the selected theme. + + + + + Insert + + + Inserts a new theme. + + +
+

Shortcut keys in the Gallery Preview area:

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Home + + + Jumps to the first entry. + + + + + End + + + Jumps to the last entry. + + + + + Left Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element on the left. + + + + + Right Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element on the right. + + + + + Up Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element above. + + + + + Down Arrow + + + Selects the next Gallery element below. + + + + + Page Up + + + Scrolls up one screen. + + + + + Page Down + + + Scrolls down one screen. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Insert + + + Inserts the selected object as a linked object into the current document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+I + + + Inserts a copy of the selected object into the current document. + + + + + CommandCtrl+T + + + Opens the Enter Title dialog. + + + + + CommandCtrl+P + + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Enter + + + Switches between themes view and object view. + + + + + Step backward (only in object view). + + + Switches back to main overview. + + +
+
+

Selecting Rows and Columns in a Database Table (opened by CommandCtrl+Shift+F4 keys)

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Spacebar + + + Toggles row selection, except when the row is in edit mode. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Spacebar + + + Toggles row selection. + + + + + Shift+Spacebar + + + Selects the current column. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Page Up + + + Moves pointer to the first row. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Page Down + + + Moves pointer to the last row. + + +
+
+
+

Shortcut Keys for Drawing Objects

+ + + + Shortcut keys + + + Effect + + + + + Select the toolbar with F6. Use the Down Arrow and Right Arrow keys to select the desired toolbar icon and press CommandCtrl+Enter. + + + Inserts a Drawing Object. + + + + + Select the document with CommandCtrl+F6 and press Tab. + + + Selects a Drawing Object. + + + + + Tab + + + Selects the next Drawing Object. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Selects the previous Drawing Object. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Home + + + Selects the first Drawing Object. + + + + + CommandCtrl+End + + + Selects the last Drawing Object. + + + + + Esc + + + Ends Drawing Object selection. + + + + + Esc (in Handle Selection Mode) + + + Exits Handle Selection Mode and return to Object Selection Mode. + + + + + Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow + + + Moves the selected point (the snap-to-grid functions are temporarily disabled, but end points still snap to each other). + + + + + OptionAlt+Up/Down/Left/Right Arrow + + + Moves the selected drawing object one pixel (in Selection Mode). + Resizes a drawing object (in Handle Selection Mode). + Rotates a drawing object (in Rotation Mode). + Opens the properties dialog for a drawing object. + Activates the Point Selection mode for the selected drawing object. + + + + + Spacebar + + + Selects a point of a drawing object (in Point Selection mode) / Cancel selection. + The selected point blinks once per second. + + + + + Shift+Spacebar + + + Selects an additional point in Point Selection mode. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + + Selects the next point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode). + In Rotation mode, the center of rotation can also be selected. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Tab + + + Selects the previous point of the drawing object (Point Selection mode) + + + + + CommandCtrl+Enter + + + A new drawing object with default size is placed in the center of the current view. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Enter at the Selection icon + + + Activates the first drawing object in the document. + + + + + Esc + + + Leaves the Point Selection mode. The drawing object is selected afterwards. + Edits a point of a drawing object (Point Edit mode). + + + + + Any text or numerical key + + + If a drawing object is selected, switches to edit mode and places the cursor at the end of the text in the drawing object. A printable character is inserted. + + + + + OptionAlt key while creating or scaling a graphic object + + + The position of the object's center is fixed. + + + + + Shift key while creating or scaling a graphic object + + + The ratio of the object's width to height is fixed. + + +
+
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..85c5e41af --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,272 @@ + + + + + + + Database Shortcut Keys + /text/shared/04/01020000.xhp + + + +
+shortcut keys; in databases +databases; shortcut keys + +Database Shortcut Keys + The following is a list of shortcut keys available within databases. + The general shortcut keys in $[officename] also apply. + +
+
+Shortcut keys for databases +In the query design + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + F6 + + + Jump between the query design areas. + + + + + Delete + + + Deletes a table from the query design. + + + + + Tab + + + Selects the connection line. + + + + + Shift+F10 + + + Opens the context menu. + + + + + F4 + + + Shows a Preview. + + + + + F5 + + + Runs query. + + + + + F7 + + + Adds table or query. + + +
+Control Properties Window + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + OptionAlt+Down Arrow + + + Opens the combo box. + + + + + OptionAlt+Up Arrow + + + Closes the combo box. + + + + + Shift+Enter + + + Inserts a new line. + + + + + Up arrow + + + Positions the cursor in the previous line. + + + + + Down arrow + + + Puts the cursor into the next line. + + + + + Enter + + + Completes the input in the field and places the cursor into the next field. + + + + + CommandCtrl+F6 + + + Sets the focus (if not in design mode) to the first control. The first control is the first one listed in the Form Navigator. + + +
+Shortcuts for creating Basic dialogs + + + + Shortcut Keys + + + Effect + + + + + CommandCtrl+PgUp + + + Jumps between tabs. + + + + + CommandCtrl+PgDn + + + Jumps between tabs. + + + + + F6 + + + Jumps between windows. + + + + + Tab + + + Selection of the control fields. + + + + + Shift+Tab + + + Selection of the control fields in opposite direction. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Enter + + + Inserts the selected control. + + + + + Arrow key + CommandCtrl+arrow key + + + Moves the selected control in steps of 1 mm in the respective direction. In point edit mode, it changes the size of the selected control. + + + + + CommandCtrl+Tab + + + In point edit mode, jumps to next handle. + + + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab + + + In point edit mode, jumps to previous handle. + + + + + Esc + + + Leaves the current selection. + + +
+
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2cf89e9a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000001.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Getting Support + /text/shared/05/00000001.xhp + + + +
+ +support on the Web +getting support +forums and support +Web support + +Getting Support + You can find support on the %PRODUCTNAME website. + For a summary of the current support services refer to the Readme file in the %PRODUCTNAME folder. +Local language support pages + The %PRODUCTNAME localization projects offer support pages in various languages. Find an overview of the native language projects at the %PRODUCTNAME website. You can find English-language help and support on the %PRODUCTNAME website as well. +Mailing lists + Ask about %PRODUCTNAME, find help by volunteers, and discuss topics on the public mailing lists. You can find many general and specialized mailing lists on the %PRODUCTNAME website at www.libreoffice.org. +Forum + You can access web forums to ask and answer questions about %PRODUCTNAME. Choose Help – Get Help Online to access the forum in your language. +Security + In case you are concerned about any security issue with using this software, you can contact the developers on the public mailing list. If you want to discuss any issue with other users, send an email to the public mailing list users@global.libreoffice.org. +Downloads + You can download the latest version of %PRODUCTNAME at www.libreoffice.org/download/. +Documentation + You can download documentation as PDF files, how-tos, and guides from the %PRODUCTNAME documentation website at documentation.libreoffice.org. You can also access the documentation website choosing the menu Help – User Guides. +Participate and give back + If you want to take an active role in the worldwide %PRODUCTNAME community, you are very welcome to give feedback, discuss features, propose enhancements, write your own article in an FAQ, how-to, manual, create a video tutorial, etc. + Visit the Get involved page on the website and follow the links for contributors. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4d697c96 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000002.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + Icons in the Documentation + /text/shared/05/00000002.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +Icons in the Documentation +
+Icons in the Documentation + There are three icons used to call your attention to additional helpful information. + The Important! icon points out important information regarding data and system security. + The Note icon points out extra information: for example, alternative ways to reach a certain goal. + The Tip icon points out tips for working with the program in a more efficient manner. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ae3c7298 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + + <filename>/text/shared/05/00000100.xhp</filename> + </topic> +</meta> +<body> +<section id="help"><comment>this section is displayed on all module main pages above the other "Help about Help" links.</comment> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150699" xml-lang="en-US">The Help references the default settings of the program on a system that is set to defaults. Descriptions of colors, mouse actions, or other configurable items can be different for your program and system.</paragraph> +</section> + <paragraph role="paragraph" id="par_id3150618" xml-lang="en-US">The <emph>$[officename] Help system</emph> provides easy access to information and support. There are several ways to find what you are looking for in the <link href="text/shared/05/00000110.xhp" name="Help environment"><emph>Help environment</emph></link>: You can search for a specific keyword in the <link href="text/shared/05/00000130.xhp" name="Index"><emph>Index</emph></link>, carry out a full-text search under <link href="text/shared/05/00000140.xhp" name="Find"><emph>Find</emph></link>, or look through a hierarchical list of the <link href="text/shared/05/00000160.xhp" name="Topics"><emph>Topics</emph></link>.</paragraph> +</body> +</helpdocument> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32fb87dde --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000110.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> +<helpdocument version="1.0"> +<!-- + * This file is part of the LibreOffice project. + * + * This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public + * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this + * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. + * + * This file incorporates work covered by the following license notice: + * + * Licensed to the Apache Software Foundation (ASF) under one or more + * contributor license agreements. See the NOTICE file distributed + * with this work for additional information regarding copyright + * ownership. The ASF licenses this file to you under the Apache + * License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file + * except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of + * the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 . + --> + +<meta> + <topic id="textshared0500000110xml" indexer="include" status="PUBLISH"> + <title xml-lang="en-US" id="tit">The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window + /text/shared/05/00000110.xhp + + + + + + +The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window + The Help system for all versions of the software is based on the same source files. Some of the functions described in Help may not be included in this particular distribution. Some features specific to a distribution may not be mentioned in this Help. + Provides an overview of the Help system. The Help window shows the currently selected Help page. + + The Toolbar contains important functions for controlling the Help system: + + + + Icon + + + + Hides and shows the navigation pane. + + + + + Icon + + + + Moves back to the previous page. + + + + + Icon + + + + Moves forward to the next page. + + + + + Icon + + + + Moves to the first page of the current Help topic. + + + + + Icon + + + + Prints the current page. + + + + + Icon + + + + Adds this page to your bookmarks. + + + + + Search icon + + + + Opens the Find on this page dialog. + + +
+These commands can also be found in the context menu of the Help document. +Help Page + You can copy from the Help Viewer to the clipboard on your operating system with standard copy commands. For example: + + + On a Help page, select the text that you want to copy. + + + Press CommandCtrl+C. + + +To search the current Help page: + + + Click the Find on this Page icon. + The Find on this Page dialog opens. + You can also click in the Help page and press CommandCtrl+F. + + + In the Search for box, enter the text that you want to find. + + + Select the search options that you want to use. + + + Click Find. + To find the next occurrence of the search term on the page, click Find again. + + + +Enter the text that you want to search for or select a text entry in the list. + +Finds complete words only. + +Distinguishes between uppercase text and lowercase text. + +Searches the entire Help page, starting at the current position of the cursor. + +Searches backwards from the current position of the cursor. + +Finds the next occurrence of the search term. +Navigation Pane + +The navigation pane of the Help window contains the tab pages Contents, Index, Find and Bookmarks. + +The list box located at the very top is where you can select other %PRODUCTNAME Help modules. The Index and Find tab pages only contain the data for the selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + Contents + + + Displays an index of the main topics of all modules. + + + + + Index + + + Displays a list of index keywords for the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + + Find + + + Allows you to carry out a full-text search. The search will include the entire Help contents of the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME module. + + + + + Bookmarks + + + Contains user-defined bookmarks. You can edit or delete bookmarks, or click them to go to the corresponding pages. + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..313a9e510 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + Tips and Extended Tips + /text/shared/05/00000120.xhp + + + +Help; Help tipstooltips; help + + +Tips and Extended Tips + Tips and Extended Tips provide help while you work. +Tips + Tips provide you with the names of toolbar buttons. To display a tip, rest the pointer over a toolbar button until the name of the button appears. + Tips are also displayed for some elements in a document, such as chapter names when you scroll through a long document. + Tips are always enabled. +Extended Tips + Extended Tips provide a brief description about buttons and commands. To display an extended tip, press Shift+F1, then point to a button or command. + If you always want extended tips instead of tips, enable the extended tips on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7448f64f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000130.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Index - Keyword Search in the Help + /text/shared/05/00000130.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Index tab in Help +Help; keywords + + +Index - Keyword Search in the Help + +Double-click an entry or type the word you want to find in the index. + +Click to display the selected topic. +You can search for a specific topic by typing a word into the Search term text box. The window contains an alphabetical list of index terms. +If the cursor is in the index list when you type the search term, the display will jump directly to the next match. When you type a word in the Search term text box, the focus will jump to the best match in the index list. +The index and full-text searches always apply to the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME application. Select the appropriate application using the list box on the help viewer's toolbar. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8364126d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000140.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Find - The Full-Text Search + /text/shared/05/00000140.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Find tab in Help +Help; full-text search +full-text search in Help + + +Find - The Full-Text Search + +Enter the search term here. The search is not case-sensitive. + +Click to start a full-text search for the term you entered. + +Lists the headings of the pages found in your full-text search. To display a page, double-click its entry. + +Specifies whether to carry out an exact search for the word you entered. Incomplete words will not be found. + +Specifies whether to only search in document headings for the search term. + +Displays the entry selected in the list. +The full text search function in $[officename] Help allows you to find Help documents that contain any combination of search terms. To do this, type one or more words into the Search term text field. +The Search term text field stores the words you entered last. To repeat a previous search, click the arrow icon and select the term from the list. +After the search has been carried out, the document headings of the results appear in a list. Either double-click an entry, or select it and click Display to load the corresponding Help document. +Use the check box Find in headings only to limit the search to document headings. +The Complete words only check box allows you to perform an exact search. If this box is marked, incomplete words will not be found. Do not mark this check box if the search term you enter should also be found as part of a longer word. +You can enter any combination of search terms, separated by spaces. Searching is not case-sensitive. +The index and full-text searches always apply to the currently selected %PRODUCTNAME application. Select the appropriate application using the list box on the help viewer's toolbar. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..85e9c9843 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000150.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Managing Bookmarks + /text/shared/05/00000150.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + Help; bookmarksbookmarks; Help + +

Managing Bookmarks

+ + + Displays the name of the bookmarked page. You can also type a new name for the bookmark. + + + + Icon + + + Use the Add to Bookmarks icon to set a bookmark for the current page shown in the Help. + + +
+ You can find the bookmarks on the Bookmarks tab page. + + + + Double-clicking a bookmark or pressing the Return key opens the assigned page in Help. A right-click opens the context menu. + + + Use the Del key to delete a selected bookmark. + + + The following commands are on the context menu of a bookmark: + + + + + + Display - displays the selected help subject. + + + Rename - opens a dialog for entering another name for the bookmark. + + + Delete - deletes the selected bookmark. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b8a77d958 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000160.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Contents - The Main Help Topics + /text/shared/05/00000160.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Help; topics +tree view of Help + + + +Contents - The Main Help Topics + Displays the main help themes, arranged in a similar way to folders in a file manager. + + + + Icon + + + Double-click a closed folder to open it and display the subfolders and Help pages. + + + + + Icon + + + Double-click an open folder to close it and hide the subfolders and Help pages. + + + + + Icon + + + Double-click a document icon to display the corresponding Help page. + + +
+ Use the arrow keys in combination with the Return key to drop down and roll up entries and to open documents. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8a9fd295 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/err_html.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Help Page Not Found + /text/shared/05/err_html.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Could not find Help page (404).

+ That is an error. Possible causes are: + + + The page does not exist and must be created. + + + The page exists, but the Help ID is wrong or missing. + + +Use the Module, Contents, Index and Search selectors to find the right page. + +The following data could be helpful in locating the error: +Help ID: + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca21fd884 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/new_help.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + The %PRODUCTNAME Help Window + /text/shared/05/new_help.xhp + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME Help + Help pages;Index + Help pages;search in index + search;Help index + Help pages;contents + + + +

The %PRODUCTNAME Help

+ + + %PRODUCTNAME Help pages are displayed in your system default web browser. + + The Help system for all versions of the software is based on the same source files. Some of the functions described in Help may not be included in this particular distribution. Some features specific to a distribution may not be mentioned in this Help. + Provides an overview of the Help system. + Help pages of %PRODUCTNAME Extensions still use the old Help system. The old Help system help pages are available from here. +

The %PRODUCTNAME Help pages features

+

The Module List

+ Located on the top of the page, click to open the drop-down list and select the %PRODUCTNAME module to display the module Help main entry page. +

The Language List (Help online only).

+ Available only in the online version, select the language to display the current help page. + +
+

The Help Index

+ The Help Index displays a list of keywords for all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Click on any keyword in the list to open the linked Help page. +

Searching the Help Index

+ Type the keyword in the Search text box. The search is performed immediately, while you type the keyword. + The search results are displayed as a filtered list of matches grouped by module name. The search results also include near matches. The matching parts of the search term are highlighted in each result. + The GLOBAL heading indicates a match for keywords relevant to more than one %PRODUCTNAME module. For example, cell borders applies to spreadsheets cells as well as text and presentation table cells or frames. + Use the arrow icons on the bottom of the Index to scroll forward or backward the Index entries or filtered result list. +
+ +
+

Contents - The Main Help Topics

+ Displays an index of the main topics of all modules. + + + Click a closed folder (⊞) to open it and display the subfolders and Help pages. + + + Click an open folder (⊟) to close it and hide the subfolders and Help pages. + + + Click a link to display the corresponding Help page. + + +
+

Using the browser for %PRODUCTNAME Help

+

Navigating in Help pages

+ Use the Back and Forward buttons of the browser to navigate between pages. In most browsers, a long click on the Back button displays a dropdown list of previously visited pages and a long click on the Forward button display a list of visited pages after the current one. + +
+

Bookmarking Help pages

+ Use the bookmark feature of the browser for quick access to relevant Help pages. To bookmark a page in most browsers: + + + Open the Bookmark menu of the browser, + + + select Add bookmark, or + Press + CommandCtrl+D on most browsers. + + + Enter the name, folder and meaningful tags for the bookmark. + + + Close the bookmark dialog of the web browser. + + +
+ +

Help Pages Navigation History

+ Each Help page visited is recorded in the web browser history. To open the navigation history: + + + Choose the History menu of the web browser, + + + Select Show History. + + + Click on any entry of the history main window to open the corresponding help page. + + + +

Copying Help contents to clipboard

+ You can copy contents from the Help page to the clipboard on your operating system with standard copy commands. For example: + + + On a Help page, select the text that you want to copy. + + + Press CommandCtrl+C. + + + Some contents in help pages can be copied to the system clipboard with only one mouse click. In these cases a tooltip appears when hovering the mouse on the copy-enabled contents. For example, the following line is copy-enabled: + =SUM(A1:A10) +

Searching in current page

+ To search in the current Help page: + + + Open the View menu of your default web browser and choose Find on this Page entry. + You can also press CommandCtrl+F. + + + In the Search for box, enter the text that you want to find. + + + Select the search options that you want to use. + + + Press Enter. + + + To find the previous occurrence of the search term on the page, click on the Up arrow. To find the next occurrence, click on the Down arrow. +

Contents general information

+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c16471aa6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + Filter screenshots + /text/shared/06/filter_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + PDF Export General Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export Links Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export View Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export User Interface Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export Digital Signature Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + PDF Export Security Options Dialog Image + +
+
+ + EPUB dialog box + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d280db38 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Options Screenshots + /text/shared/06/optionen_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + Options View Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Load/Save Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options HTML Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Accessibility Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Save Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Advanced Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Asian Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options CTL Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Security Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options Language Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Options General Dialog Image + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0505be0e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + + Calc Screenshots + /text/shared/06/sc_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + XML Source Dialog + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a677a3252 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + Shared CUI Screenshots + /text/shared/06/shared_cui_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + Font Effects Page Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Hyperlink Doc Page Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Hyperlink Internet Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Hyperlink Mail Dialog Image + +
+
+ + Hyperlink New Document Dialog Image + +
+
+ + The Pick a Color window + +
+
+ Color page dialog +
+
+ Page format tab page +
+
+ Slant and Corner Radius tab page +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1ab3ac12d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Impress Screenshots + /text/shared/06/simpress_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + Impress General Options Dialog + +
+
+ + Impress View Options Dialog + +
+
+ + Impress Print Options Dialog + +
+
+ + Impress Photo Album Dialog + +
+
+ + Presentation Dialog + +
+
+ + Slide Design Dialog + +
+
+ + Header Footer Dialog + +
+
+ + Master Layout Dialog + +
+
+ Custom Slide Shows Dialog +
+
+ Define Custom Slide Show Dialog +
+
+ Enhanced Animation Effects Dialog +
+
+ Text Animation Dialog +
+
+ Custom Animation Timing Dialog +
+
+ + Alternate mode: all slide thumbnails for direct selection or jumping. The current slide has a red selection cursor + +
+
+ + Impress Remote: initial thumbnail shown + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1966d126 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ + + + + + + + SVX Screenshots + /text/shared/06/svx_screenshots.xhp + + + +
+ + Compress Image Dialog + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..298682104 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ + + + + + + + YouTube Videos + /text/shared/06/youtubevideos.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a3630f2e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/07/09000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + Web Pages + /text/shared/07/09000000.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Web Pages + To create a new web page for the Internet, open a new HTML Document by choosing File - New. +
+A tool for creating new web pages is the Web Layout mode, which you enable with View - Web. +Creating a New Web Page + + + Switch to the web layout mode by choosing View - Web or by opening a new HTML document. + + + To create an HTML page from your $[officename] document, save the page using one of the "HTML Document" file types. + +deleted remaining outdated content, see #i62014 + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d03b20666 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +TWo INitial CApitals have been corrected +Typing errors such as "WOrd" have been corrected and replaced by the AutoCorrect function to "Word". +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4359cbc9c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/02000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Start each sentence with a capital letter +Your text was corrected with AutoCorrect so that the current word began with a capital letter. AutoCorrect changes words at the beginning of a paragraph, and words after the character at the end of a sentence (period, exclamation point, question mark). +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3fc8e4a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/03000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Two capital letters at the beginning of a word and a sentence have been corrected to one capital letter +AutoCorrect has modified your text so that a word beginning with two capital letters at the beginning of a sentence now starts with one capital letter. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4cb9277da --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/04000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +A replacement has been carried out +AutoCorrect has replaced a word. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d849041cc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/05000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +AutoCorrect has performed a replacement. The beginning of the sentence now starts with a capital letter +AutoCorrect has performed a replacement, and the beginning of the sentence now starts with a capital letter. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b41b75119 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/06000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Double quotation marks (") have been replaced +Your text was corrected by Autocorrect so that double quotation marks were replaced by typographical quotation marks. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..26b8a8b05 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/07000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Single quotes have been replaced +Your text was corrected by Autocorrect so that single quotation marks were replaced by typographical quotation marks. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..96350addb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/08000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +An URL has been detected and a hyperlink attribute has been set +AutoCorrect has modified your text. A string has been detected as an URL and is now shown as a hyperlink. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..27b7c2e64 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/09000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Double spaces have been ignored +AutoCorrect has corrected your text so that the multiple spaces you have entered have now been reduced to one single space. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..383f9300b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/10000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Bold and underline attributes have been recognized and applied +AutoCorrect has modified your text, and the bold and/or underline text attributes have been automatically applied. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8728b8886 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/12000000.xhp + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +Minus signs have been replacedi73558 +AutoCorrect has modified your text, and minus signs have been replaced with dashes. +
+ +
+
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..05fc50950 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +/text/shared/autokorr/13000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +AutoCorrect has been activated +1st ... has been replaced with 1st ... +AutoCorrect has corrected your text so that ordinal number suffixes have been superscripted. +
+ +
+
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..da445c909 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01000000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+
+wizards; overview +AutoPilots, see wizards + + +Wizards +Guides you through creating business and personal letters, faxes, agendas, presentations, and more. +
+
+
+ +
+Letter + +Fax + +Agenda + +Document Converter + +Euro Converter + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6fa08d1f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01010000.xhp + + + +wizards; letters +Letter Wizard +templates;letters +mw made "letters;..." a one level entry + + +Letter Wizard +Starts the wizard for a letter template. + You can use this template for both business and personal correspondence. +
+ +
+$[officename] comes with sample templates for personal or business letters, which you can customize to your own needs with the help of the wizard. The wizard leads you step-by-step in creating a document template and offers numerous layout and design options. The preview gives you an impression of how the finished letter will appear according to the settings you choose. +Within the wizard, you can modify your entries and options at any time. You may also skip an entire page or even all the wizard pages, in which case the current (or default) settings will remain in effect. + +If you are creating a business letter, you can select a variety of elements to include in your document, which usually do not apply to personal letters, such as a subject line. If you choose the Personal letter option, some pages which contain elements specific to business letters will not be included in the wizard dialog. + + + + + +
+ + + +Back +Allows you to view the selections that you made on the previous steps. The current settings will be saved. +
+
+ + + +Next +Saves the current settings and continues to the next page. +
+ +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a new document template and saves it on your hard disk. $[officename] creates a new document based on the existing templates with the "Untitled X" name (X stands for the consecutive numbering) and displays it on the work area. +$[officename] saves the current settings in the wizard according to the chosen template. These settings are used as the default settings the next time you activate the wizard. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4a7a9b33f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Page design +/text/shared/autopi/01010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Page design +Specifies whether you want to create a personal or a business letter. The available options on the following pages vary depending on your choice. +
+
+ +
+Please choose the type of letter and page design +Specify whether you want to create a business or personal letter template. + +Business letter +Specifies that you want to create a business letter template. + +Formal personal letter +Specifies that you want to create a formal personal letter. + +Personal letter +Specifies that you want to create a personal letter. + + + +Page design +Select the design for your letter template. + +Use letterhead paper with pre-printed elements +Specifies whether paper is used that already contains an imprinted logo, address, or footer line. The Wizard shows the Letterhead layout page next. +Go to Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cdf4a3386 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout +/text/shared/autopi/01010200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Letterhead layout +Allows you to specify the elements that are already imprinted on your letterhead paper. Those elements are not printed, and the space they occupy is left blank by the printer. +
+
+ +
+Specify items already on your letterhead paper + +Logo +Specifies that a logo is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a logo. + + +Height +Defines the height of the object. + + +Width +Defines the width of the object. + + +Spacing to left margin +Sets the object distance from the left page margin. + + +Spacing to top margin +Sets the object distance from the top page margin. + +Own address +Specifies that an address is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address. + +Return address in envelope window +Specifies that your own address is already imprinted in small size above the area of the recipient's address. %PRODUCTNAME does not print an address in small size. + +Footer +Specifies that a footer area is already printed on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print a footer. + +Height +Enter the height of the footer area that is already imprinted on your letterhead paper. %PRODUCTNAME does not print in that area. +Go to Letter Wizard - Printed items + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a59471116 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Printed items +/text/shared/autopi/01010300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Printed items +Defines the items to be included in the letter template. +
+
+ +
+ +Logo +Includes a logo on the letter template. + +Return address in envelope window +Includes a small size return address on the letter template. + +Letter signs +Includes a line with references to a business letter on the letter template. + +Subject line +Includes a subject line on the letter template. + + +Salutation +Includes a salutation on the letter template. Select the salutation from the list box. + +Fold marks +Includes fold marks on the letter template. + + +Complimentary close +Includes a complimentary close on the letter template. Select the text from the list box. + +Footer +Includes a footer on the letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..deb1c7172 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender +/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Recipient and sender +Specifies the sender and recipient information. +
+
+ +
+Sender's address +Specifies your address information. + +Use user data for return address +Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box. + +New sender address +Use the address data from the following text boxes. + +Name +Specifies the name of the sender. + +Street +Specifies the street address of the sender. + + + +Postcode/State/City +Specifies the address data of the sender. +Recipient's address +Specifies the recipient's address information. + +Use placeholders for recipient's address +Specifies that placeholder fields are inserted into the letter template. + +Use address database for mail merge +Address database fields are inserted into the letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Footer + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..33cff460e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Footer +/text/shared/autopi/01010500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Footer +Specifies the information to include in the footer space. +
+
+ +
+ +Footer +Enter the text for the footer lines. + +Include only on second and following pages +Select to suppress the footer on the first page. + +Include page numbers +Includes page numbers in your letter template. +Go to Letter Wizard - Name and location + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..643a83564 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Letter Wizard - Name and Location +/text/shared/autopi/01010600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Letter Wizard - Name and Location +Specifies where and under which name you want to save the document and template. +
+
+ +
+ +Template name +Specifies the title of the document template. + + +Path +Enter the path and file name for the template, or click the ... button to select the path and file name. + +Create a letter from this template +Saves and closes the template, and then opens a new untitled document based on the template. + +Make manual changes to this letter template +Saves the template and keeps it open for editing. +Letter Wizard overview + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f5ca71ce8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01020000.xhp + + + +wizards;faxes +faxes;wizards +templates;faxes + + + +Fax Wizard +Opens the wizard for faxes. The wizard can help you create document templates for fax documents. You can then print the fax documents to a printer or to a fax machine, if fax driver software is available. + +
+ +
+$[officename] comes with a template for fax documents, which you can modify with the wizard to suit your own needs. The wizard leads you step-by-step in creating a document template, and offers numerous layout and design options. The document preview gives you an impression of how the finished fax will appear. +Within the dialog you can modify your entries and options at any time. You can also skip an entire page or even all the wizard pages, in which case the current (or default) settings will remain in effect. + + + + + + +Back +Click the Back button to view the settings chosen on the previous page. The current settings will not be modified or deleted if you click this button. Back will be active from the second page onwards. + +Next +The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. The Next button will become inactive once you have reached the last page. + +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX". + +Dialog ID must be below any <avis> tag + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..826368905 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Page Design +/text/shared/autopi/01020100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Page Design +Defines the style of your fax document. +
+
+ +
+ +Business Fax +Creates a fax template for a business-style fax. + +Style +Specifies the predefined style. + +Private Fax +Creates a fax template for a private fax. + +Style +Specifies the predefined style. +Go to Fax Wizard - Items to include + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4330db9a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Items to include +/text/shared/autopi/01020200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Items to include +Specifies the fax elements to be printed. +
+
+ +
+ +Logo +Includes a company logo. + +Date +Includes a date field. +Type of message + + +Includes a communication type line. Select the line from the list box. + +Subject line +Includes a subject line. + + +Salutation +Includes a salutation. Select the salutation from the list box. + + +Complimentary close +Includes a greeting. Select the greeting from the list box. + +Footer +Includes a footer. +Go to Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11fca6781 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient +/text/shared/autopi/01020300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Sender and Recipient +Specifies the receiver and sender information for the fax. +
+
+ +
+ +Use user data for return address +Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. + +New return address +Select to enter the address data in the following text boxes. The data is inserted as normal text in the fax document. + + + + + + +(Address data fields) +Enter the sender address data. + +Use placeholders as receiver address +Inserts placeholders for the address on the fax template. Later in the fax document, click the placeholder to enter the actual data. + +Use address database for mail merge +Inserts database fields for a later mail merge with the fax document. +Go to Fax Wizard - Footer + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..21fc708df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Footer +/text/shared/autopi/01020400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Footer +Specifies the footer data. +
+
+ +
+ +Footer +Specifies the text to be printed in the footer area. + +Include only on second and following pages +Suppresses the footer on the first page of a multipage fax document. + +Include page number +Prints a page number in the footer area. +Go to Fax Wizard - Name and location + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35ef9685d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Fax Wizard - Name and location +/text/shared/autopi/01020500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ +Fax Wizard - Name and location +Defines the template name and location. +
+
+ +
+ +Template name +Enter the name of the fax template. + +... +Click to enter or select the complete path, including the file name of the fax template. + +Create a fax from this template +Creates and saves the fax template, then opens a new fax document based on that template. + +Make manual changes to this fax template +Creates and saves the fax template, then opens the template for further editing. +Go to Fax Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d7c1a50f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01040000.xhp + + + +wizards;agendas +Agenda Wizard +templates;agendas + + +Agenda Wizard +Starts the wizard to help you create an agenda template. + You can use an agenda to specify discussion topics for conferences and meetings. +
+ +
+$[officename] comes with a sample template for agendas that you can modify to suit your own needs. The wizard offers numerous layout and design options for creating document templates. The preview gives you an impression of how the finished agenda will appear. +Within the wizard, you can modify your entries at any time. You may also skip an entire page or even all the pages, in which case the current (or default) settings remain in effect. + + + + + + +Back +Returns to the selections made on the previous page. The current settings remain in effect. This button only becomes active after the first page. +Next +The wizard saves the current settings and goes to the next page. Once you reach the last page, this button will become inactive. +Finish +According to your selections, the wizard creates a document template and saves it on your hard disk. A new document based on the template appears in the work area, with the filename "UntitledX" (X stands for an automatic number). + +$[officename] saves the current settings in the wizard according to the selected document template. These will be used as the default settings the next time you activate the wizard. +Dialog ID here, below any <avis> tags (else the tagged text will be shown on the buttons) + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b57d44c8a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Page Design +/text/shared/autopi/01040100.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Page Design +Specifies a page design for the agenda. +
+
+ +
+Page design +Select the page design from the list box. +Include form for recording minutes +Prints out a page on which you can write down the minutes during the meeting. +Go to Agenda Wizard - General information + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4f9cddcf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - General Information +/text/shared/autopi/01040200.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - General Information +Specifies the date, time, title, and location of the meeting. +
+
+ +
+ +Date +Specifies the date of the meeting. + +Time +Specifies the time of the meeting. + +Title +Specifies the title of the meeting. + +Location +Specifies the location of the meeting. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Headings to include + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..62fd0e3df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Headings to include +/text/shared/autopi/01040300.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Headings to include +Specifies the headings that you want to include in the agenda. +
+
+ +
+Type of meeting +Specifies whether to print the type of meeting line. +Please read +Specifies whether to print a Please read line. +Please bring +Specifies whether to print a Please bring line. +Notes +Specifies whether to print a Notes line. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Names + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..00fe3dc1f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Names +/text/shared/autopi/01040400.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Names +Specifies the names to be printed on the agenda. +
+
+ +
+Meeting called by +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the person who called the meeting. +Chairperson +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the chairperson. +Minute keeper +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the minute keeper. +Moderator +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the moderator. +Attendees +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the attendees. +Observers +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the observers. +Facility personnel +Specifies whether to print a line where you can enter the facility personnel. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0a1c8b8f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items +/text/shared/autopi/01040500.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Agenda Items +Specifies the topics to be printed on the agenda template. +
+
+ +
+ + +Topics +Enter the agenda topics. Use the Move up and Move down buttons to sort the topics. +Insert +Inserts a new empty topic row above the current row. +Remove +Removes the current topic row. +Move up +Moves the current topic row up. +Move down +Moves the current topic row down. +Go to Agenda Wizard - Name and location + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b17dc1b33 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Agenda Wizard - Name and Location +/text/shared/autopi/01040600.xhp + + + +
+Agenda Wizard - Name and Location +Choose the title and location for the agenda template. +
+
+ +
+Template title +Specifies the name of the agenda template. + +Path +Specifies the complete path, including the file name of the agenda template. +Create an agenda from this template +Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens a new agenda document based on that template. +Make manual changes to this template +Creates and saves the agenda template, then opens the template for further editing. +Go to Agenda Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..38c5ab213 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01090000.xhp + + + + +forms;wizards +wizards;forms + +Form Wizard +Activates the Wizard for creating forms. + +
+ +
+Select the form properties using the following steps: + + + + + + + + + + + +Click to create the form without answering further pages. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3930c2947 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Field Selection +/text/shared/autopi/01090100.xhp + + + +
+Form Wizard - Field Selection +On this page of the Form Wizard, you can specify the table or query that you need to create the form as well as the fields that you want to include in the form. +
+
+ +
+ + +Tables or queries +Specifies the table or query that you want to create the form for. +
+ + + + + + +Available fields +Lists the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or hold down the Shift or the CommandCtrl key while you click to select more than one field. +
+
+ + + + + + + +> +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to.i73704 +
+
+ + + + + +>> +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+ + + + + + +< +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+ + + + + + +<< +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +^ +Click to move the selected field up one entry in the list. + + + + + + + + + +v +Click to move the selected field down one entry in the list. +
+ + +Fields in the form +Displays the fields that are in the new form. +Form Wizard - Set up a subform + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..248d5f2c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Set up a Subform +/text/shared/autopi/01090200.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 2 + + + +
+Form Wizard - Set up a Subform +Specify if you want to use a subform and enter the subform's properties. A subform is a form that is inserted in another form. +
+
+ +
+ +Add subform +Select to add a subform. + +Sub form based on existing relation +Click to add a subform based on an existing relation. + +Which relation do you want to add? +Select the relation on which the subform is based. + +Sub form based on manual selection of fields +Click to add a subform based on a manual selection of fields. +Form Wizard - Add subform fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c66108e03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields +/text/shared/autopi/01090210.xhp + + + +
+Form Wizard - Add Subform Fields +Specify the table or query you need to create the subform, and which fields you wish to include in the subform. +
+
+ +
+ +Tables or queries +Specifies the table or query for which the subform is to be created. + + + + + + + +Fields in my subform +Displays all fields that will be included in the new subform. +Form Wizard - Get joined fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70c10b19c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields +/text/shared/autopi/01090220.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 4 + + + +
+Form Wizard - Get Joined Fields +If you chose in step 2 to set up a subform based on manual selection of fields, you can select the joined fields on this wizard page. +
+
+ +
+ +First joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +First joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Second joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Second joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Third joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Third joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Fourth joined subform field +Select the subform field that is joined to the main form field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. + +Fourth joined main form field +Select the main form field that is joined to the subform field, which you select in the list box next to this list box. +Form Wizard - Arrange controls + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3e8e38a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Arrange Controls +/text/shared/autopi/01090300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Form Wizard - Arrange Controls +On this page of the Wizard, you can select the layout of the created form. +
+
+ +
+Label placement + +Align left +The labels are left-aligned. + +Align right +The labels are right-aligned. +Arrangement of the main form + +Columnar - Labels Left +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields. + +Columnar - Labels on Top +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field. + +As Data Sheet +Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. + +In Blocks - Labels Above +Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. +Arrangement of the subform + +Columnar - Labels Left +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels to the left of the fields. + +Columnar - Labels on Top +Aligns the database fields column-wise with the labels above the field. + +As Data Sheet +Aligns the database fields in a tabular form. + +In Blocks - Labels Above +Arranges the labels above the corresponding data. +Form Wizard - Set data entry + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..87da06426 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Set Data Entry +/text/shared/autopi/01090400.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard + + + +
+Form Wizard - Set Data Entry +Specifies the data handling mode for the new form. +
+
+ +
+ +The form is to be used for entering new data only. Existing data will not be displayed +Creates a form that is only used for entering new data. + +The form is to display all data +Creates a form that can be used to display existing data and to enter new data. + +Do not allow modification of existing data +Select to disallow editing data. + +Do not allow deletion of existing data +Select to disallow deleting data. + +Do not allow addition of new data +Select to disallow adding new data. +Form Wizard - Apply styles + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7d5efb93 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Apply Styles +/text/shared/autopi/01090500.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 7 + + + +
+Form Wizard - Apply Styles +Specifies the form style. +
+
+ +
+ +Apply styles +Specifies the page style for the form. + +Field border +Specifies the field border style. + +No border +Specifies that the fields have no border. + +3D look +Specifies that the field borders have a 3D look. + +Flat +Specifies that the field borders look flat. +Form Wizard - Set name + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c18f2a8a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Form Wizard - Set Name +/text/shared/autopi/01090600.xhp + + +UFI: new Form Wizard page 8 + + + +
+Form Wizard - Set Name +Specifies the name of the form and how to proceed. +
+
+ +
+ +Name of the form +Specifies the name of the form. + +Work with the form +Saves the form, and opens it as a form document to enter and display data. + +Modify the form +Saves the form, and opens it in edit mode to change the layout. +Form Wizard + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2fe9ca5e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01100000.xhp + + + + +Report Wizard +Activates the wizard for creating reports. + +
+ +
+UFI: added Help ID, see #i61571 + +Select the report properties. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10795d1a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Field Selection +/text/shared/autopi/01100100.xhp + + + +
+Report Wizard - Field Selection +Specifies the table or query for which you are creating the report, and which fields you wish to include in the report. +
+
+ +
+Tables or queries +Select the table or query for which the report is to be created. +
+Available fields +Displays the names of the data base fields in the selected table or query. Click to select a field or press the Shift or CommandCtrl key while clicking to select multiple fields. +
+Fields in report +Displays all fields that are included in the new report. +
+> +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+>> +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+< +Click to move the selected field(s) to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+
+<< +Click to move all fields to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +
+More about Report Wizard - Labeling Fields + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f370eb8a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Labeling Fields +/text/shared/autopi/01100150.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Report Wizard - Labeling Fields +Specifies how you want to label the fields. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + +Field list +Displays the names of the fields to be included in the report. At the right you can enter a label for each field that will be printed in the report. +More about Report Wizard - Grouping + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3c0a4a22 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Grouping +/text/shared/autopi/01100200.xhp + + + +
+Report Wizard - Grouping +You can group records in a report based on the values in one or more fields. Select the fields by which the resulting report will be grouped. You can group up to four fields in a report. When you group more than one field, $[officename] nests the groups according to their group level. +
+
+ +
+Fields +Lists the fields from your selection on the previous page of the Wizard. To group the report by a field, select the field name, then click the > button. You may select up to four levels of grouping. +Groupings +Lists the fields by which the report will be grouped. To remove one level of grouping, select the field name, then click the < button. You may select up to four levels of grouping. +> +Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +< +Click to move the selected field to the box that the arrow is pointing to. +More about Report Wizard - Sort Options + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cd4be63ec --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Sort Options +/text/shared/autopi/01100300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Report Wizard - Sort Options +Select the fields by which to sort the report. Fields can be sorted by up to four levels, each either ascending or descending. Grouped fields can only be sorted within each group. +
+
+ +
+ +Sort by +Select the first field by which to sort the report. + + + +Then by +Select an additional field by which to sort the report. + + + + +Ascending +Sorts the field contents in ascending order. + + + + +Descending +Sorts the field contents in descending order. +More about Report Wizard - Choose Layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0cc315d00 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Choose Layout +/text/shared/autopi/01100400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Report Wizard - Choose Layout +Choose the layout from different templates and styles, and choose landscape or portrait page orientation. +
+
+ +
+ +Layout of data +Defines a set of styles for the report. The styles assign fonts, indents, table background, and more. + +Layout of headers and footers +Defines a page layout for the report. The page layouts are loaded from template files, which assign a header, footer, and page background. +Orientation +Choose the page orientation for the report. + +Landscape +Selects a landscape page orientation for the report. + +Portrait +Selects a portrait page orientation for the report. +More about Report Wizard - Create Report + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..128d13dbc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Report Wizard - Create Report +/text/shared/autopi/01100500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Report Wizard - Create Report +You can create the report as a static or dynamic report. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents. When you open a static report, it will always display the same data from the time when the static report was created. +
+
+ +
+ +Title of report +Specifies the title that is printed at the title line of each page. + +Static report +Saves the report as a static report. When you open a static report, it will always display the data from the time the report was created. + +Dynamic report +Saves the report as a template. When you open a dynamic report, it will display with the current data contents. + +Modify report layout +When you click Finish, the report will be saved and opened for edit. + +Create report now +When you click Finish, the report will be saved. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32cbb514b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +HTML Export +/text/shared/autopi/01110000.xhp + + + + +HTML Export +Determines the settings for publishing $[officename] Draw or $[officename] Impress documents in HTML format. +
+ +
+The pages displayed differ depending on what you select on the second page of the Wizard. + + + + + + +< Back +Returns to the selections made on the previous page. The current settings remain saved. You can select this button once you are in the second editing step. +Next > +Saves the current settings and moves to the next page. This button becomes inactive on the last page of the dialog. + +Create +Creates new documents according to your selections and saves the documents. +$[officename] saves the current Wizard settings and uses them as default the next time that you open the Wizard. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b7b38dbf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 1 +/text/shared/autopi/01110100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +inserted this dialog id, see i72163 +HTML Export - Page 1 +On the first page you can select an existing design or create a new one. +
+The settings you select for the export will be automatically saved as a design for other exports. You can enter the design name after clicking Create. +
+ +
+Assign design +In this area, you can choose to create a new design and select or delete an existing design. +If you delete a design, you will only delete the design information in the Wizard. An export file will not be deleted by this action. + +New design +Creates a new design in the next pages of the Wizard. + +Existing Design +Loads an existing design from the design list to use as a starting point for the steps to follow on the next pages of the Wizard. + +Design list +Displays all existing designs. + +Delete Selected Design +Deletes the selected design from the design list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec17292ab --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 2 +/text/shared/autopi/01110200.xhp + + + +
+kiosk export +HTML; live presentations +live presentations on the Internet +showing;live presentations on the Internet +presentations; live on the Internet +Internet; presentations +WebCast export +changed "in the Internet" to "on the Internet", see i73714 +inserted this dialog id, see i72163HTML Export - Page 2 +Determines the type of publication. +
+You can specify if you want to include frames, create a title, or display presentation notes. +
+ +
+Publication type +Defines the basic settings for the intended export. +Standard HTML format +Creates standard HTML pages from export pages. +Standard HTML with frames +Creates standard HTML pages with frames. The exported page will be placed in the main frame, and the frame to the left will display a table of contents in the form of hyperlinks. +Create title page +Creates a title page for your document. +Show notes + +Specifies that your notes are also displayed. +Automatic +Creates a default HTML presentation as a kiosk export, in which the slides are automatically advanced after a specified amount of time. +As stated in document +The slide transition depends on the timing that you set for each slide in the presentation. If you set a manual page transition, the HTML presentation introduces a new page by pressing any key from your keyboard. +Automatic +The page transition takes place automatically after the specified period of time elapses and does not depend on the presentation's contents. +Slide view time +Defines the amount of time for each slide display. +Endless +Automatically restarts the HTML presentation after the last slide has been displayed. +WebCast +In a WebCast export, automatic scripts will be generated with Perl or ASP support. This enables the speaker (for example, a speaker in a telephone conference using a slide show on the Internet) to change the slides in the audience's web browsers. You will find more information on WebCast later in this section. +Active Server Pages (ASP) +When you select the ASP option, the WebCast export creates ASP pages. Note that the HTML presentation can only be offered by a web server supporting ASP. +Perl +Used by WebCast export to create HTML pages and Perl scripts. +URL for listeners +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) to be entered by the viewer in order to see the presentation. +URL for presentation +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative), where the created HTML presentation on the web server has been saved. +URL for Perl scripts +Specifies the URL (absolute or relative) for the generated Perl scripts. +More Information on WebCast Export +There are two possible options for exporting $[officename] Impress presentations using WebCast technology: Active Server Pages (ASP) and Perl. +In either case, the WebCast needs an HTTP server offering either Perl or ASP as scripting. Therefore, the exporting option depends on the HTTP server used. +WebCast in ASP +Exporting + + +To export to ASP, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. You then see the Export dialog in which you select HTML Document as the file type. Once you have selected a directory and entered a file name, click Export. For export as ASP, we recommend selecting a "secret" file name for the HTML file (see below for more details). You then see the HTML Export dialog. Several files will be written to the directory you have just selected. + + +The presenter uses the entered file name to change between the slides viewed by the audience. You can save the WebCast files locally or save them directly to an HTTP server. You can later transfer locally saved files to the HTTP server by FTP. Note that WebCast only works if the files are requested over an HTTP server. + + +Do not use the same directory for two different HTML exports. + + +Select WebCast as a publishing type on the second page of the HTML Export Wizard. + + +In the options area for WebCast, select the Active Server Pages (ASP) option. You can now continue defining other settings or start the export by clicking the Create button. + + +Using ASP WebCast +You can use WebCast as soon as the exported files can be accessed from an HTTP server. + +Example: +Let's assume that you installed the Microsoft Internet Information Server on your computer. You entered the "c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation" directory as an HTML output directory during the IIS setup. The URL of your computer is assumed as follows: "http://myserver.com". + + +You have saved the files that have been created during the Export process in the c:\Inet\wwwroot\presentation\ directory. In this directory, the Export creates an HTML file that can be named, for example, as "secret.htm". You entered this name in the Save dialog (see above). The presenter can now browse to the HTML Export files by entering the http://myserver.com/presentation/secret.htm URL in any HTTP Browser having JavaScript support. The presenter is now able to modify the page using some form controls. + + +The audience can now view the slide selected by the presenter through the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/webcast.asp. They cannot move to other slides found at this URL, unless the file names are known. Please ensure that the HTTP server does not show the directory listing. +WebCast over Perl +Exporting + + +To export, in a $[officename] Impress document choose File - Export. This opens the Export dialog, in which you select HTML Document as the file type. After selecting a folder and entering a file name, click Save. This opens the HTML Export Wizard. This will write some files to the folder you have just selected. + + + + +The entered file name will be used by the presenter to switch through the slides. Please select an empty directory. + + +In the second page of the HTML Export, select WebCast as the publication type. + + +In the option area for WebCast, select Perl. + + +In the URL for listeners text box, enter the file name of the HTML document that will be used by the audience. In URL for presentation, enter the URL of the directory that will be used for the presentation and, in URL for Perl scripts, enter the URL for the CGI script directory. You can now define further settings on the following pages of the Wizard or start the export process by clicking the Create button. + + +Using Perl WebCast +The files that have been created during the export must now be set up in the Perl enabled HTTP server. This cannot be done automatically because of the variety of different HTTP servers having Perl support. The steps to follow will be described next. Please refer to your server manual or ask your network administrator how to apply these steps on your server. + + +You should first move the files that have been created during the export into the correct directory on the HTTP server. + + + + +Move all files having the htm, jpg and gif extensions into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the text box URL for presentation. + + +All files having the pl and txt extensions have to be moved into the directory on your HTTP server that has been referred to in the URL for Perl scripts text box. This directory has to be configured in a way that the Perl scripts contained there can also be run by an HTTP request. + + +On UNIX systems grant the files with the pl extension the rights to be executable by the HTTP server. Normally, this is done with the chmod command. The rights of the currpic.txt file must be set to be writable by the HTTP server. + + +Now you should be able to use WebCast. + +Example: +In this example, you have a Linux computer with an HTTP server. The URL of your HTTP server is http://myserver.com and the output directory of your HTML documents is the //user/local/http/ directory. Your Perl scripts are contained in the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. Enter secret.htm as an export file name and presentation.htm as URL for listeners. In the URL for presentation text box enter http://myserver.com/presentation/ and for the URL for Perl scripts enter http://myserver.com/cgi-bin/. + + +Now, copy all *.htm, *.jpg and *.gif files from the directories that were specified during the export into the //user/local/http/presentation/ directory on your HTTP Server and copy all files with the *.pl and *.txt extensions into the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. + + +Login on your server as root and switch to the //user/local/http/cgi-bin/ directory. You can define the corresponding rights using the chmod command. + + +Once you have finished installing the Perl files, the presenter will be able to give the presentation. The listeners can view this presentation under the URL http://myserver.com/presentation/presentation.htm. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e4f7e133c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 3 +/text/shared/autopi/01110300.xhp + + + +
+inserted this dialog id, see i72163HTML Export - Page 3 +Specifies the graphics type and the target screen resolution. +
+
+ +
+Save images as +Determines the image format. You can also define the compression value for the export. +PNG - Portable Network Graphics format +The files are exported as PNG files. PNG files are compressed without loss of data, and can contain more than 256 colors. +GIF - Graphics Interchange Format +The files are exported as GIF files. GIF files are compressed without loss of data, and have a maximum of 256 colors. +JPG - Compressed file format +The files are exported as JPEG files. JPEG files are compressed, with adjustable compression and can contain more than 256 colors. +Quality +Specifies the compression factor of the JPEG graphic. A 100% value offers the best quality for a large data range. The 25% factor indicates small files with inferior image quality. +Monitor resolution +Defines the resolution for the target screen. Depending on the selected resolution, the image will be displayed in a reduced size. You can specify a reduction of up to 80% from the original size. +Low resolution (640x480 pixels)see i73719Select the low resolution to keep the file size small, even for presentations with many slides. +Medium resolution (800x600 pixels) +Select the medium resolution for a medium-sized presentation. +High resolution (1024x768 pixels) +Select a high resolution for a high quality slide display. +Export +Export sounds when slide advances +Specifies that the sound files that are defined as an effect for slide transitions are exported. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8978a1814 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 4 +/text/shared/autopi/01110400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserted this dialog id, see i72163 +HTML Export - Page 4 +Specifies the information to be displayed on the title page of the publication. +
+You can skip this page if you unmark the Create title page option, or if you select Automatic or WebCast, in previous pages of the Wizard. +
+ +
+Information for the title page + +Author +Specifies the name of the publication's author. + +Email address +Specifies the email address. + +Your homepage +Specifies your homepage. A hyperlink will be inserted in the publication. + +Additional information +Specifies additional text to appear on the title page. + +Link to a copy of the original presentation + +Inserts a hyperlink to download a copy of the presentation file. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c26fc30c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 5 +/text/shared/autopi/01110500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserted this dialog id, see i72163 +HTML Export - Page 5 +Defines a button style for navigation through the presentation slides. +
+This page is not visible if you have unmarked the Create title page check box, or if you have selected either automatic or WebCast export. +
+ +
+Select button style +Specifies whether you want to insert navigation buttons in your presentation. You can also select the style of the buttons. + +Text only +Inserts only text hyperlinks instead of buttons. +Selection field +Displays the available button styles. Click on a button style to select it. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..04f39f95c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Export - Page 6 +/text/shared/autopi/01110600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserted this dialog id, see i72163 +HTML Export - Page 6 +Defines the colors for the publication. +
+Text formatting is obtained from the drawing or presentation. This page is skipped if you unmark the Create title page check box or if you select automatic or WebCast export. +
+ +
+Select color scheme +Determines the color scheme and the colors for text and background. + +Apply color scheme from document +Determines the colors from the styles used in the current document. + +Use browser colors +Uses the default colors of the viewer's Web Browser. + +Use custom color scheme +Allows you to define your own colors for some presentation objects. + +Text +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the text color of the presentation. + +Hyperlink +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the hyperlink color of the presentation. + +Active Link +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the active link color of the presentation. + +Visited Link +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the visited link color of the presentation. + +Background +Opens the Color dialog, where you can select the background color of the presentation. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83d876e4b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01120000.xhp + + + +Group Element Wizard +The Group Element Wizard starts automatically when you insert a Group Box into a document. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + +Create +Creates the object. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d0deab228 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Data +/text/shared/autopi/01120100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + Group Element Wizard: Data + Specifies which option fields are contained inside the group box. +
+
+ +
+ Which names do you want to give the option fields? + Specifies the respective label for each option field. You will see the label of the option field in the form. This entry corresponds to the Label property of the option field. + Accept + + + + + + + >> + + + Confirms the current label and copies the label to the Option fields list. + + + +
+ Enter the label for each option field of the group that you want to create and copy the label to the list by clicking the arrow button. Repeat this procedure until all the option fields are defined. + Option fields + Displays all option fields which have to be included in the group box. + Remove + + + + + + + << + + + Removes the selected option fields from the list. + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3ddd319f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Default Field Selection +/text/shared/autopi/01120200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + + Group Element Wizard: Default Field Selection + Determines that you want one option field to be selected as the default choice. +
+ The default settings will be accepted if you open the form in the user mode. With these settings you determine the control property Default Status. +
+ +
+ Should one option field be selected as a default? + Specifies whether you want to set default settings for the option box. + Yes, the following: + Specifies that you want an option field to be selected as a default after opening the form. Choose the option field from the box. + List box + Select the option field that you want to have as the default when opening the form. + No, one particular field is not going to be selected + Specifies that you do not want any option field to be the default choice. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6d65e0d74 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Field Values +/text/shared/autopi/01120300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Group Element Wizard: Field Values + Assigns a reference value to each option field. +
+ Select a field from the option fields list and enter the corresponding reference value. +
+ +
+ Which value do you want to assign to each option? + Select a number or a text as a reference value for the selected option field. + Option fields + Select the option field for which you want to assign the reference value. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..511b5b0b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Database Field +/text/shared/autopi/01120400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Group Element Wizard: Database Field +This page is only visible if the document is linked to a database. It specifies whether the reference values should be saved in the database. +
+Indicate where to save the reference values. A reference value can represent the current state of the group box in a database. +
+ +
+This page is only displayed if the document is already linked to a database. +Do you want to save the value in a database field?UFI: removed three help ids +Yes, I want to save it in the following database field: +Specifies that you want to save the reference values in a database. The values are written in the data field selected in the list box. The list box displays all the field names from the database table that the form is linked to. +List box +Select the data field in which the reference values have to be saved. +No, I only want to save the value in the form. +Specifies that you want to save the reference values in the form only, and not in the database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b432bc851 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Group Element Wizard: Create Option Group +/text/shared/autopi/01120500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ Group Element Wizard: Create Option Group + Specifies a label for the option group. +
+
+ +
+ Which caption is to be given to your option group? + Specifies the label for the option box. You will see the label of the group box displayed in the form. The text you enter here will correspond to the Label property of the group box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c395ee580 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Document Converter +/text/shared/autopi/01130000.xhp + + +mw deleted all index entries because of guide import_ms.xhp + + + + +Document Converter +Copies and converts documents into the OpenDocument XML format used by $[officename]. + +
+ +
+The wizard converts documents from Microsoft Word, Excel and PowerPoint. The source files are only read, not edited. New target files are written with the new file name extension in the same or a new folder. +The Document Converter Wizard contains the following pages: + + +Document Converter Summary +Displays a summary which shows what will be converted when you click Convert. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2ac1e3758 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Document Converter Page 1 +/text/shared/autopi/01130100.xhp + + + +
+Document Converter Page 1 +Specifies the type of Microsoft Office documents that will be converted. +
+
+ +
+Microsoft Office +Converts Microsoft Office documents into the OpenDocument format. +Word documents +Converts documents in Microsoft Word format *.doc into OpenDocument *.odt documents. +Excel documents +Converts documents in Microsoft Excel format *.xls into OpenDocument *.ods documents. +PowerPoint documents +Converts documents in Microsoft PowerPoint format *.ppt into OpenDocument *.odp documents. +Create Log file +Creates a log file in your work directory showing which documents have been converted. +Continue to the next page of the Document Converter. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f98e128a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Document converter continuation pages +/text/shared/autopi/01130200.xhp + + + +
+Document converter continuation pages +Specifies, for each template type and document type, the directory to be read from and the directory to be written to. +
+
+ +
+Templates +Determines whether templates are to be converted, and how they are converted. +Text templates +Note that the "Text templates" label can change, depending on the selections from the previous page. For example, if Microsoft Word documents have been selected, the label reads "Word templates". +Specifies that templates are to be converted. +
+ +Including subdirectories +Indicates that the subdirectories of the selected directory are also searched for matching files. + +Import from +Specifies the directory containing the source files. + +Save to +Specifies the directory to which the destination files are written. + +... +Opens a dialog to select the desired path. +
+Documents +Determines whether and how documents are converted. +Text documents +Note that the "Text documents" label can change, depending on the selections from the previous page. For example, if Microsoft Word documents have been selected, the label reads "Word documents". +Indicates that the documents are to be converted. + +Here you can return to the main page of the Document Converter Wizard. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..419edf9df --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Euro Converter Wizard +/text/shared/autopi/01150000.xhp + + + +Euro; Euro Converter Wizard +wizards; Euro Converter +converters; Euro converter +currencies; converters + + + + +Euro Converter Wizard +Converts the currency amounts found in $[officename] Calc documents and in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents into euros. + +Only closed files are converted. It is possible, however, to use the Euro Converter in an open $[officename] Calc document. In this case, a separate dialog opens. This dialog is described at the end of this section. +
+ +
+Only the currencies of the countries participating in the European Monetary Union are converted. +Extent +Single $[officename] Calc document +Converts a single $[officename] Calc file. To convert fields and tables in $[officename] Writer, first mark the Also convert fields and tables in text documents check box. +Complete Directory +Converts all $[officename] Calc and $[officename] Writer documents and templates in the selected directory.Currencies +Specifies the currency to be converted into euros. +Source directory / Source Document +Indicates the directory or the name of the single document to be converted. +... +Opens a dialog to select the desired directory or document. +Including Subfolders +Specifies whether all subfolders of the selected directory are included. +Also convert fields and tables in text documents +Converts currency amounts found in fields and tables of $[officename] Writer documents. +Values in the text document that are not in fields or tables are not converted. +Temporarily unprotect sheet without query +Specifies that sheet protection will be disabled during conversion and thereafter re-enabled. If sheet protection is covered by a password, you will see a dialog for entering the password. +Target Directory +Specifies the folder and path in which the converted files are to be saved. + +... + +Opens a dialog in which you can select a directory to hold the converted files. +Cancel +Closes the Euro Converter. +Help +Activates the help for the dialog. +Convert +Starts the conversion. +During conversion, a page showing the progress status is displayed. +Back +Returns to the first page of the Euro Converter. +
+If the current document is a $[officename] Calc document or template, you can call up the Euro Converter using the corresponding icon in the Tools bar. This icon is hidden by default. To display the Euro Converter icon, click the arrow at the end of the Tools bar, select the Visible Buttons command and activate the Euro Converter icon. +
+
+ + + + +Icon + + + +Euro Converter + + +
+
+The Euro Converter dialog contains the following functions: +Entire document +Converts the entire document. +Currencies +Specifies the currency to be converted into euros. +Selection +Select the cells you want to convert in this range, if you did not mark the Entire document check box. Select an option and then click the desired entries in the Templates / Currency ranges field. The selected range will be visible as such in the document. Click Convert to carry out the conversion. +Cell Styles +All cells with the selected Cell Styles are converted. +Currency cells in the current sheet +All currency cells in the active spreadsheet will be converted. +Currency cells in the entire document +All currency cells in the active document will be converted. +Selected range +All currency cells in the range selected before the converter was called will be converted. All cells must have the same format so that they can be recognized as a selected range. +Templates / Currency ranges +Displays the ranges to be converted from the list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..02d0f29f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Address Data Source +/text/shared/autopi/01170000.xhp + + + +
+ + + + + + +

Address Data Source

+This wizard registers an existing address book as a data source in $[officename]. +
+
+ +
+You can register address data and other data sources in $[officename] at any time: + +

Please select the type of your external address book

+Not all types are available on all systems. + +

Thunderbird

+Select this option if you already use an address book in Thunderbird or Icedove. + +

KDE Address book

+Select this option if you already use an address book in KDE Address book. + +

macOS Address book

+Select this option if you already use an address book in macOS Address book. + +

Evolution

+Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution. + +

Evolution LDAP

+Select this option if you already use an address book in Evolution LDAP. + +

Groupwise

+Select this option if you already use an address book in Groupwise. + +

Other external data source

+Select this option if you want to register another data source as address book in $[officename]. + +

Cancel

+Exits the wizard without implementing any changes. + +Go to previous step. + +Go to next step. + +

Create

+Establishes the connection to the data source and closes the dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7a28c06cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + +Additional Settings +/text/shared/autopi/01170200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Additional Settings

+Allows you to enter additional settings for other external data sources. +
+
+ +
+ +

Settings

+Calls a dialog in which you can enter additional settings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..959ad6b36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select Table +/text/shared/autopi/01170300.xhp + + + +
+ + +Select Table +Specifies a table from the Seamonkey / Netscape address book source that is used as the address book in $[officename]. +
+
+ +
+All tables from the first user profile will be registered for this data source in $[officename]. You must specify one as the table that will be used in the $[officename] templates. + +List box +Specifies the table that is to serve as the address book for the $[officename] templates. +You can make changes to the templates and documents at a later time by choosing Edit - Exchange Database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9b8420960 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Data Source Title +/text/shared/autopi/01170400.xhp + + + +
+ + +Data Source Title +Specifies a location for the address book file and a name under which the data source will be listed in the data source explorer. +
+
+ +
+ +Location +Specifies the location of the database file. + +Browse +Specifies the location using a file dialog. +Make this address book available to all modules in %PRODUCTNAME +Registers the newly created database file in %PRODUCTNAME. The database will then be listed in the Data sources pane (CommandCtrl+Shift+F4). If this check box is cleared, the database will be available only by opening the database file. +Address book name +Specifies the data source name. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2829f24fb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Field Assignment +/text/shared/autopi/01170500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Field Assignment +Opens a dialog that allows you to specify the field assignment. +
+
+ +
+ +Field Assignment +Opens the Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f42674ce3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + Find Bar + /text/shared/find_toolbar.xhp + + + + + + Find toolbar + + + + +
+

Find Bar

+ The Find toolbar can be used to quickly search the contents of %PRODUCTNAME documents. +
+ Use the shortcut CommandCtrl + F to quickly open the Find toolbar. + +

Find Text

+ Enter the text to be searched in the document. Press Enter to perform the search. + +

Find Previous

+ Moves the cursor and selects the previous match of the search text. + + + + +Find Previous Icon + + + + Find Previous Icon + + +
+ +

Find Next

+ Moves the cursor and selects the next match of the search text. + + + + +Find Next Icon + + + + Find Next Icon + + +
+ +

Find All

+ Highlights all matches in the document. + +

Match Case

+ Choose this option to perform case-sensitive search. + + + +

Formatted Display

+ Performs the search considering the formatted value in a cell. + + + +

Find and Replace

+ Opens the Find and Replace dialog, which provides more options for searching the document. + + + + +Find and Replace Icon + + + + Find and Replace Icon + + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2f816685b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fontwork + /text/shared/fontwork_toolbar.xhp + + + +
+

Fontwork

+ The Fontwork toolbar opens when you select a Fontwork object. +
+

Fontwork Gallery

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Gallery + + + + Opens the Fontwork Gallery where you can select another preview. Click OK to apply the new set of properties to your Fontwork object. + + +
+ + +

Fontwork Shape

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Shape + + + + Opens the Fontwork Shape toolbar. Click a shape to apply the shape to all selected Fontwork objects. + + +
+ + +

Fontwork Same Letter Heights

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Same Letter Height + + + + Switches the letter height of the selected Fontwork objects from normal to the same height for all objects. + + +
+ + +

Fontwork Alignment

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Alignment + + + + Opens the Fontwork Alignment window. + Click to apply the alignment to the selected Fontwork objects. + + +
+ + +

Fontwork Character Spacing

+ + + + + Icon Fontwork Character Spacing + + + + Select the character spacing values to apply to the Fontwork object. + Custom: Opens the Fontwork Character Spacing dialog where you can enter a new character spacing value. + + + Value: enter the Fontwork character spacing value. + + +
+

Toggle Extrusion

+ + + + + Icon Toggle Extrusion + + + + Switches the 3D effects on and off for the Fontwork objects. + + +
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eda6b989d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +First Steps +/text/shared/guide/aaa_start.xhp + + + +samples and templates +templates; new documents from templates +business cards; using templates + +

First Steps

+

How to simplify your work using samples and templates

+ +%PRODUCTNAME includes many sample documents and ready-to-use templates. You can access these by choosing File - New - Templates, or press Shift+CommandCtrl+N. +When you open one of the templates, a new document is created based on this template. +Click the Browse online templates button in the dialog to select and download more templates. +You can also use the various wizards (under the File - Wizards menu) to create your own templates, which you can use as a basis for further documents. +
+Working with %PRODUCTNAME +Working with Templates + +Working with Text Documents + +Working with Spreadsheets + +Working with Presentations + +Working with Drawings + +Working with Formulas + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..248de3bae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + +Accessibility in %PRODUCTNAME +/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp + + + + +accessibility; %PRODUCTNAME features + +

Accessibility in %PRODUCTNAME

+ The following accessibility features are part of %PRODUCTNAME: + + + Support of external devices and applications + + + Access to all functions by keyboard. The keys that replace the mouse actions are listed in the %PRODUCTNAME Help + + + Improved readability of screen contents + + + Zooming of on-screen user interface for menus, icons, and documents + The user interface is scalable through your Window Manageroperating system settings. The default font size for dialogs is 12pt, corresponding to a scale of 100%. You can also change the font size for dialogs in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View. The zoom factor of a document can be changed in View - Zoom, or by double-clicking the zoom factor displayed in the Status Bar. + + + Please note that accessibility support relies on Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools. This means that the first program startup may take a few seconds longer, because the Java runtime environment has to be started as well. +
+ + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b047530f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Turning Extended Tips On and Off +/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Help; extended tips on/off +extended tips in Help +tips;extended tips in Help +tooltips;extended tips +activating;extended help tips + +Turning Extended Tips On and Off + + +Extended tips provide a brief description of the function of a particular icon, text box or menu command when you rest your cursor on that item. +To turn Extended Tips on and off: + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General, and check Extended tips. +A check mark indicates that the extended tips are activated. + + +To turn Extended Tips on temporarily: + + +Press the shortcut keys Shift+F1 to activate extended tips once. +A question mark appears beside the mouse pointer. You can move this Help Mouse Pointer over all controls, icons and menu commands to obtain a description of the command. The Help Mouse Pointer is disabled the next time you click the mouse. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8505f56fa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer +/text/shared/guide/activex.xhp + + + +ActiveX control +installing;ActiveX control +Internet; Internet Explorer for displaying $[officename] documents +$[officename] documents;viewing and editing in Internet Explorer +viewing;%PRODUCTNAME documents in Internet Explorer +editing;%PRODUCTNAME documents in Internet Explorer + +ActiveX Control to Display Documents in Internet Explorer + +Under Windows only, you can view any $[officename] document in a window of the Microsoft Internet Explorer. Install the ActiveX control in the $[officename] Setup program. +Installing the ActiveX control + + +Close $[officename] and the Quickstarter. + + +Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar. Choose Settings. + + +In Settings, click Apps. + + +In the Apps & features list, click %PRODUCTNAME, then click Change. + + +In the Installation Wizard, select Modify. + + +Open the Optional Components entry and find the ActiveX Control entry. Open the sub menu of the icon and select to install the feature. + + +Click Next and Install. + + +Viewing $[officename] documents + + +In Internet Explorer, browse to a web page that contains a link to a $[officename] Writer document, for example. + + +Click the link to view the document in the Internet Explorer window. +You may still right-click the link to save the file on your harddisk. + + +Editing $[officename] documents +The $[officename] document inside the Internet Explorer shows a set of read-only toolbar icons. + + +Click the Edit file icon in the document's toolbar to open a copy of the document in a new $[officename] window. + + +Edit the copy of the document. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..710b79fb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Assistive Tools in $[officename] +/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp + + + +accessibility; $[officename] assistive technology +assistive technology in $[officename] +screen readers +screen magnifiers +magnifiers + +Assistive Tools in $[officename] + +$[officename] supports some assistive technology tools like screen magnification software, screen readers, and on-screen keyboards. +A current list of supported assistive tools can be found on the Wiki at https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Accessibility. +Supported Input Devices +$[officename] provides the ability to use alternative input devices for access to all functions of $[officename]. + + +Screen magnification software allow users with low vision to work in $[officename] with caret and focus tracking. + + +On-screen keyboards enable users to perform almost all data input and commands with a mouse. + + +Screen readers allow visually impaired users to access $[officename] with text-to-speech and Braille displays. + + +
+ +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Application Colors +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1b61e109a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + Automatic Redaction + /text/shared/guide/auto_redact.xhp + + + + + spreadsheet; auto-redact + presentations; auto-redact + text documents; auto-redact contents + automatic redaction + + +
+ + +

Auto-Redact

+ Use automatic redaction to define words and patterns that are automatically marked for redaction. +
+ Automatic redaction makes it easier to redact %PRODUCTNAME documents that have multiple portions of text that need to be hidden due to sensitivity or privacy issues. +
+ Choose Tools - Auto-Redact +
+ This feature comes in handy in documents that have multiple occurrences of names and other personal information (e.g. credit cards, phone numbers, etc). Redacting all these portions of the document manually would required significant effort, but with Automatic Redaction this task can be automated in a more efficient manner. +

Creating Targets

+ Targets are rules and patterns used by Automatic Redaction to find portions of the document to be automatically marked for redaction. + To create a new target, click the Add Target button. + The Add Target dialog appears, to let you define a Name for the new target, as well as to choose its Type and Content. There are three types of targets to choose from in the Type dropdown list: + + + Text: Automatic Redaction will look for all occurrences of the specified text and mark them for redaction. + + + Regular expression: Define a regular expression to use to search the document. All matches will be marked for redaction. + + + Predefined: Choose predefined regular expressions to automatically redact contents, such as credit card numbers, email addresses and so on. + + + + Add all targets that you want to apply to your document and click OK. This opens the document as a drawing in %PRODUCTNAME Draw with all targets automatically redacted with the Rectangle Redaction tool. + Continue redacting other portions of the generated document and then print or export it to PDF. + Refer to the help page List of Regular Expressions to learn more about how to use regular expressions in %PRODUCTNAME. +

Exporting and Importing Targets

+ Click the Save Targets button to save all defined targets in the document as a JSON (JavaScript Object Notation) file. + Click the Load Targets button to import and apply the targets defined in a JSON file to another %PRODUCTNAME document. + The document automatic redaction targets are saved alongside the document. Hence, they are available in the document after you save and close it. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..630010dfc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + Turning off Automatic URL Recognition + /text/shared/guide/autocorr_url.xhp + + + +AutoCorrect function; URL recognition + recognizing URLs automatically + automatic hyperlink formatting + URL;turning off URL recognition + hyperlinks;turning off automatic recognition + links;turning off automatic recognition + predictive text, see also AutoCorrect function/AutoFill function/AutoInput function/word completion/text completion + +

Turning off Automatic URL Recognition +

+ When you enter text, $[officename] automatically recognizes a word that may be a URL and replaces the word with a hyperlink. $[officename] formats the hyperlink with direct font attributes (color and underline) the properties of which are obtained from certain Character Styles. + +The following texts are changed to hyperlinks: + +Empty tablecells used for formatting + + + + Text + + + Autocorrected hyperlink + + + + + Email addresses + + + x@x, mailto:x + + + + + Web addresses + + + http://x, https://x, www.x.x + + + + + File addresses + + file://x, ftp://x, smb://x + + +
+where x is one or more characters. + + If you do not want $[officename] to automatically recognize URLs as you are typing, there are several ways of turning off this feature. +

Undo URL Recognition

+ + + When you are typing and notice that a text has just been automatically converted into a hyperlink, press Command +Ctrl+Z to undo this formatting. + + + If you do not notice this conversion until later, select the hyperlink, open the context menu and choose Remove Hyperlink. + + +

Turn off URL Recognition

+ + + Load a document of the type for which you want to modify the URL recognition. + If you want to modify the URL recognition for text documents, open a text document. + + + Choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options. + + + In the AutoCorrect dialog, select the Options tab. + + + If you unmark URL Recognition, words will no longer be automatically replaced with hyperlinks. + In $[officename] Writer there are two check boxes in front of URL Recognition. The box in the first column is for later post-editing and the box in the second column is for AutoCorrect as you type. + + +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..20c0e1264 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows +/text/shared/guide/autohide.xhp + + + +Gallery; hiding/showing +data source view; showing +Navigator; docking +Styles window; docking +windows; hiding/showing/docking +docking; windows +undocking windows +showing;docked windows +hiding;docked windows + + +Showing, Docking and Hiding Windows + +Some windows in $[officename] are dockable, such as the Navigator window. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. +Docking and Undocking Windows +To dock a window, do one of the following: + + +Drag the window by its title bar to the side, or + + +Double-click inside a vacant area of the window while holding down the CommandCtrl key. In the Styles window, double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons while holding down the CommandCtrl key. Alternatively, press CommandCtrl+Shift+F10. + + +These methods can also be used to undock a currently docked window. +Showing and Hiding Docked Windows + + + + +Icon + + + +Click the button on the edge of the docked window to show or hide the docked window. The AutoHide function allows you to temporarily show a hidden window by clicking on its edge. When you click in the document, the docked window hides again. + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..730a8c763 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + +Defining Background Colors or Background Graphics +/text/shared/guide/background.xhp + + + +backgrounds; defining colors/pictures +colors; backgrounds +pictures; backgrounds +pages; backgrounds in all applications +watermarks +text, see also text documents, paragraphs and characters + + MW deleted 6 entries and changed "pages;" +

Defining Graphics or Colors in the Background of Pages (Watermark) +

+ + + Choose Format - Page Style. + + + On the Area tab page, select a background color or a background graphic. + + + In spreadsheets this background appears only in the print behind the cells not formatted elsewhere. +
+ + + + + + Area tab page + Backgrounds in Text + Backgrounds in Spreadsheets +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3e349d64a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Defining Borders for Paragraphs +/text/shared/guide/border_paragraph.xhp + + + + + + +borders, see also frames +paragraphs; defining borders +borders; for paragraphs +frames; around paragraphs +inserting;paragraph borders +defining;paragraph borders + + mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" + Defining Borders for Paragraphs + + Setting a Predefined Border Style + + + Place the cursor in the paragraph for which you want to define a border. + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders. + + + Select one of the default border styles in the Default area. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the paragraph contents in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + + Setting a Customized Border Style + + + Choose Format - Paragraph - Borders. + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + Select a line style, width and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the paragraph contents in the Padding area. You can only change distances to edges that have a border line defined. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..178ea9457 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + +Defining Borders for Tables and Table Cells +/text/shared/guide/border_table.xhp + + + + +tables in text; defining borders +tables in spreadsheets;defining borders +borders; for tables +frames; around tables +defining;table borders + + mw deleted "adding;" +

Defining Borders for Tables and Table Cells +

+

Setting a Predefined Border Style

+ + + Select the table cells that you want to modify. + + + Click the Borders icon on the Table toolbar (Writer) or on the Line and Filling bar to open the Borders window. + + + Click one of the predefined border styles. + This adds the selected style to the current border style of the table cells. Select the blank border style at the top left of the Borders window to clear all border styles. + + +

Setting a Customized Border Style

+ + + Select the table cells that you want to modify. + + + Choose Table - Properties - Borders (Writer) or Format - Cells - Borders (Calc). + + + In the User-defined area select the edge(s) that you want to appear in a common layout. Click on an edge in the preview to toggle the selection of an edge. + + + If you select more than one row or column, you can change the middle lines between rows or columns. Select the middle markers in the User-defined area. + + + + Select a line style and color for the selected border style in the Line area. These settings apply to all border lines that are included in the selected border style. + + + Repeat the last two steps for every border edge. + + + Select the distance between the border lines and the page contents in the Padding area. + + + Click OK to apply the changes. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e98110b42 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting Line Breaks in Cells + /text/shared/guide/breaking_lines.xhp + + + +line breaks; in cells + cells; line breaks + text flow; in cells + text breaks in cells + wrapping text; in cells + words; wrapping in cells + automatic line breaks + new lines in cells + inserting;line breaks in cells + tables;inserting line breaks + +

Inserting Line Breaks in Cells +

+

Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Calc spreadsheet cells

+To insert a line break in a spreadsheet cell, press the CommandCtrl+Enter keys. +This will work only with the text edit cursor inside the cell, not at the input line. So first double-click the cell, then single-click at the text position where you want the line break. +You can search for a newline character in the Find & Replace dialog by searching for \n as a regular expression. You can use the text function CHAR(10) to insert a newline character into a text formula. +

Formatting $[officename] Calc cells for automatic line wrapping

+ + + Select the cells for which you want an automatic line break. + + + Choose Format - Cells - Alignment. + + + Select Wrap text automatically. + + + +

Inserting line breaks in $[officename] Writer text document tables

+ To insert a line break in a text document table cell, press the Enter key. + An automatic line break will be performed while you type across the end of each cell. +
+ Alignment +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d5bfcf881 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing the Title of a Document +/text/shared/guide/change_title.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+titles; changing +changing;document titles +documents; changing titles + +Changing the Title of a Document + +You can specify a title for your document. Some file manager utilities can display the titles next to the filenames of your documents. +How to change the title of the current document + + +Choose File - Properties. This opens the Document Properties dialog. + + +Select the Description tab. + + +Type the new title in the Title box and click OK. + + +
+
+Document Properties +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6b6c48eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing Chart Axes +/text/shared/guide/chart_axis.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; editing axes +axes in charts +editing; chart axes +formatting; axes in charts + +Editing Chart Axes + +To edit the axes of a chart that you have inserted: + + +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. + + +Choose Format - Axis, then select the axis (or axes) that you would like to edit. A dialog appears. + + +Select from the available sections and make the required changes (for example, select the Scale tab if you want to modify the scale of the axis). + + +Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode. + + +
+Format - Object properties + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5b421d441 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Adding Texture to Chart Bars +/text/shared/guide/chart_barformat.xhp + + + + + + +charts; bars with textures +textures;on chart bars +inserting;textures on chart bars + + MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" + Adding Texture to Chart Bars + + You can add texture to the bars in a graph or chart (instead of the default colors) via graphics: + + + Enter edit mode by double-clicking on the chart. + + + Click on any bar of the bar series you want to edit. All bars of this series are now selected. + If you want to edit only one bar, click again on that bar. + + + In the context menu choose Object Properties. Then choose the Area tab. + + + Click on Image. In the list box select an image as a texture for the currently selected bars. Click OK to accept the setting. + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3b2e07f10 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Charts +/text/shared/guide/chart_insert.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; inserting +plotting data as charts +inserting; charts +spreadsheets; inserting charts +charts; editing data +editing; chart data +moved many index entries to new schart/01 files +Inserting Charts + +Different methods exist to start a chart: + + +Insert a chart based on data from cells in Calc or Writer. +These charts update automatically when the source data changes.currently only in Calc. Writer: bug? + + +Insert a chart with a default data set, and then use the Data Table dialog to enter your own data for that chart. +These charts can be created in Writer, Impress and Draw. is this "not in Calc" a bug or a design philosophy thing? + + +Copy a chart from Calc or Writer into another document. +These charts are snapshots of the data at the time of copying. They do not change when the source data changes. + + +In Calc, a chart is an object on a sheet that can be copied and pasted on another sheet of the same document, the data series will stay linked to the range on the other sheet. If it is pasted on another Calc document, it has its own chart data table and is no more linked to the original range. +Chart in a Calc spreadsheet + + +Click inside the cell range that you want to present in your chart. + + +Click the Insert Chart icon on the Standard toolbar. +You see a chart preview and the Chart Wizard. + + +Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart. + + +Chart in a Writer text document +In a Writer document, you can insert a chart based on the values in a Writer table. + + +Click inside the Writer table. + + +Choose Insert - Chart. +You see a chart preview and the Chart Wizard.no live preview - is this a bug? + + +Follow the instructions in the Chart Wizard to create the chart. + + +Chart based on values of its own + + +In Writer, Draw or Impress, choose Insert - Chart to insert a chart based on default data. + + +You can change the default data values by double-clicking on the chart and then choosing View - Chart Data Table. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c6c95d76e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing Chart Legends +/text/shared/guide/chart_legend.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; editing legends +legends; charts +editing; chart legends +formatting; chart legends + +Editing Chart Legends + +To edit a chart legend: + + +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. + + +Choose Format - Legend or double-click on the legend. This opens the Legend dialog. + + +Choose from the available tabs to make modifications, then click OK. + + +To select the legend, first double-click on the chart (see step 1), then click on the legend. You can now move the legend within the chart using the mouse.ufi: removed an obsolete note +
+Format - Object Properties + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e3bf5d588 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Editing Chart Titles +/text/shared/guide/chart_title.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts; editing titles +editing; chart titles +titles; editing in charts + +Editing Chart Titles + +To edit a chart title that you have inserted into a $[officename] document: + + +Double-click on the chart. +A gray border appears around the chart and the menu bar now contains commands for editing the objects in the chart. + + +Double-click on an existing title text. A gray border appears around the text and you can now make changes. Press Enter to create a new line. +If no title text exists, choose Insert - Titles to enter the text in a dialog. + + +A single-click on the title allows you to move it with the mouse. + + +If you want to change the formatting of the main title, choose Format - Title - Main Title. This opens the Title dialog. + + +Select one of the available tabs in the dialog to make modifications. + + +Click OK. In your document, click outside the chart to exit chart editing mode. + + +
+Format - Object properties + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e90ec8875 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/classification.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + Document Classification + /text/shared/guide/classification.xhp + + + + + +

Document Classification

+ + classification;BAILS levels + classification;BAF category + classification;security levels + classification;document + classification;classification bar + document;classification + + +Document classification and security is an important issue for businesses and governments. +Information is exchanged between users and organizations that collaborate to pursue a business goal. Where sensitive information is involved, it is assumed that the parties will have agreed what information is sensitive and how such information will be identified and handled. Any recipient of a resource will rely upon the provider of the information to follow the agreed procedures to identify the sensitivity of the information. +%PRODUCTNAME provides standardized means for such sensitivity information to be expressed and may be used between parties if interoperable systems are to be implemented. It provides a set of standard “fields” that can be used to hold sensitivity information. It does not attempt to define what the contents of these “fields” should be. This approach is an improvement upon the only alternative that exists at the moment, which is for the provider to use an arbitrary means to express sensitivity that may not be useful to a recipient. +While this standard has been developed with the intent that it would be applicable in any domain of activity, %PRODUCTNAME retained the aerospace and defense industry nomenclature and categories, where sensitivity marking results from national security, export control and intellectual property policies. +%PRODUCTNAME implemented the open standards produced by TSCP (Transglobal Secure Collaboration Participation, Inc.) independent of a specific vendor. Two of them are interesting: + + + + Business Authentication Framework (BAF) specifies how to describe the existing policy (which is probably some legal text) in a machine-readable format. + + + Business Authorization Identification and Labeling Scheme (BAILS) specifies how to refer to such a BAF policy in a document. The concepts in BAILS are so generic that they can be applied to any format that supports document-level user-defined properties. + + +

BAF Categories

+ + classification;displayed in user interface + classification;headers and footers + classification;watermark + classification;categories + + +The default BAF categories for %PRODUCTNAME are listed below. +Only the "Intellectual Properties" category will modify the layout of the document with a watermark, fields in the header and footer and an information bar on top of the document area. Each item inserted in the document is controlled by the classification configuration file. +

Intellectual Property

+Intellectual property is a generic term for the nature of the contents of the document. Select this category for general purpose document classification. +

National Security

+Selects the category of this document for the national security policy type. The selected category is saved together with the document as BAILS metadata in the file properties and no modifications is carried in the document layout or the user interface. +

Export Control

+Selects the category of this document for the export control policy type. The selected category is saved together with the document as BAILS metadata in the file properties and no modifications is carried in the document layout or the user interface. +Refer to your corporate data security policy and information security officers for support in document classification. + +
+

Default levels of classification

+ + classification levels;Internal use only + classification levels;Confidential + classification levels;General Business + classification levels;Non-Business + + +%PRODUCTNAME provides default levels of document classification (BAILS) shown below, sorted by increasing level of business sensitivity: +
+ + + Non-Business: Information in document has no impact in business, if made public. + + + General Business: Minor impact. Information has impact in business, can generate embarrassments, minor damage in brand image, if made public. + + + Confidential: Modest impact. Information disclosed can damage business brand, can generate negative media coverage and loss of revenue. + + + Internal use only: Major damage. Negative national media, lawsuits, fines, long term brand damages. + +
+
+
+

Customizing classification levels.

+ + custom;classification levels + classification levels;customizing + + +%PRODUCTNAME allows customization of the levels of classification for your business. To customize the number and the name of the levels, copy the file example.xml located in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths - Classification into a local folder and edit the contents. +Use the file with your %PRODUCTNAME locale in the name as example. +Save the file and make the adequate changes to the classification path above to access the file. +Your system administrator can place the file in a network folder and make all users access the classification settings file. +
+

Pasting contents in documents with different levels of classification.

+ + document classification;pasting contents + +To prevent a breach in the security policy, contents with high classification level pasted to documents with lower classification level are not allowed. %PRODUCTNAME will display a warning message wherever it detects that the contents of the clipboard have higher security classification than the target document. + +
+ + + TSCP (Transglobal Secure Collaboration Participation, Inc.) website. + + + Business Authentication Framework (BAF) document (PDF) + + + Business Authorization Identification and Labeling Scheme (BAILS) document (PDF) + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..88dbcc40a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ + + + + + + + Using Remote Files + /text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files-setup.xhp + + + + +
+ + + + remote file service;setup + + +

Setting up a remote file service connection

+
+ +
+To enable a remote server connection, use one of these methods: + + + + Click on the Remote Files button in the Start Center. + + + Select File - Open Remote + + + Select File - Save Remote + + Then press Add Service button in the dialog to open the File Services dialog. +
+ + WebDAV;remote file service setup + remote file service setup;WebDAV + + +

Connecting to a WebDAV server

+In the File Services dialog, set: + + + + Type: WebDAV + + + Host: the server URL, usually in the form file.service.com + + + Port: port number (usually 80) + + + Select Secure Connection checkbox to access the service through https protocol and port 443 + + + Label: give a name for this connection. This name will show in the Service listbox of the Open or Save remote files dialog. + + + Root: enter the path to the root URL of your account. + +Note: the root of the file service is provided by the file service administrator and may consists of scripts files, parameters and paths. +Once the connection is defined, click OK to connect. The dialog will dim until the connection is established with the server. A dialog asking for the user name and the password may pop up to let you log in the server. Proceed entering the right user name and password. + + SSH;remote file service setup + FTP;remote file service setup + remote file service setup;FTP + remote file service setup;SSH + + +

Connecting to FTP and SSH servers

+ + + + + Type: FTP or SSH + + + Host: the server URL, usually in the form file.service.com + + + Port: port number (usually 21 for FTP and 22 for SSH). + + + User, Password: the username and password of the FTP service. + + + Remember password: Check to store the password in %PRODUCTNAME’s user profile. The password will be secured by the master password in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - Internet passwords. + + + + + + + + + +

Connecting to a Windows share

+ + remote file service;Windows share + Windows share;remote file service + Windows share;remote file service setup + remote file service setup;Windows share + + + + + + + Type: Windows Share + + + Host: the server URL, usually in the form file.service.com + + + Share: The Windows share. + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Connecting to Google Drive

+ + remote file service;Google Drive + Google Drive;remote file service + Google Drive;remote file service setup + remote file service setup;Google Drive + + + + + + + Type: Google Drive. + + + User, Password: the username and password of the Google account. + + + + + + + + + +

Connecting to a CMIS server

+ + remote file service setup;other file services + remote file service setup;Lotus + remote file service setup;SharePoint + remote file service setup;IBM + remote file service setup;Nuxeo + remote file service setup;Alfresco + remote file service setup;CMIS server + + + + + + + Type: Select the type of server in the list. + + + Host: the server URL. A URL default template is provided according to the server type. Set data accordingly. + + + User, Password: the username and password of the CMIS service. + + + + + + Repository: select the files repository in the drop-down list. + + + Refresh button: click to refresh the contents of the repository list. + + + + + + + + +
+ +Opening and saving documents in remote file servers +Checking-in and checking-out documents +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3be11e54 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + Using Remote Files + /text/shared/guide/cmis-remote-files.xhp + + + + +
+ + +

Opening and saving files on remote servers

+Remote Files Service User Guide +%PRODUCTNAME can open and save files stored on remote servers. Keeping files on remote servers allows to work with the documents using different computers. For example, you can work on a document in the office during the day and edit it at home for last-minute changes. Storing files on a remote server also protects them from computer loss or hard disk failure. Some servers are also able to check in and check out files, thus controlling their usage and access. +%PRODUCTNAME supports many document servers that use well known network protocols such as FTP, WebDAV, Windows share, and SSH. It also supports popular services like Google Drive as well as commercial and open source servers that implement the OASIS CMIS standard. +To work with a remote file service you must first setup a remote file connection. +
+ + + opening;CMIS remote file + opening;remote file + remote file service;opening file + opening remote file + + +

To open a file in a remote file service

+ + + + Do one of the following: + + + + + + Choose File - Open Remote in any %PRODUCTNAME module + + + Click the Remote Files button the Start Center + + + The Remote Files dialog appears. + + + + Select the file and click Open or press Enter. + + +The Remote Files dialog which then appears has many parts. The upper list box contains the list of remote servers you have previously defined. The line below the list box shows the path to access the folder. On the left is the folder structure of the user space in the server. The main pane displays the files in the remote folder. + +
+ + remote file service;file lock + remote file service;version control + remote file service;working copy + remote file service;checkout + remote file service;checkin + + +

Checking out and checking in files

+The Check Out and Check In actions control updates to the document and prevent unwanted overwrites in a CMIS remote service. +Checking out a document locks it, preventing other users from writing changes to it. Only one user can have a particular document checked out (locked) at any time. Checking in a document or canceling the checkout unlocks the document. +There are no checkin/checkout controls for remote files in Windows Shares, WebDAV, FTP and SSH services. +When a file is open from a CMIS remote file service, %PRODUCTNAME displays a Check Out button on the top message area. Click the Check Out button to lock the file in the server to prevent edition by another user. Alternatively choose File - Check Out. +%PRODUCTNAME creates a working copy of the file in the server (and inserts the string (Working Copy) in the file name) when a file is checked out. Every edition and save operation is done in the working copy. You can save your file as many times you want. When you finished your changes, check in the file. +To check in the file, choose File - Check In. A dialog opens to insert comments about the last edition. These comments are recorded in the CMIS server for version control. The working copy replaces the existing file and its version number is updated. +To cancel a checkout, choose File - Cancel Checkout. A warning message will inform that the latest edition will be discarded. If confirmed, no version updates occurs. +Remember to check in the file when finishing using it. Not doing so will lock the file and no other user will be allowed to modify it. +
+ + remote file service;saving to remote server + remote file service;saving + + +

To save a file in a remote file server

+ + + + Do one of the following + + + + + + If the file was opened from a CMIS server, choose File - Save, click on the Save button or hit Ctrl + S. + + + If the file is not stored in a CMIS server, choose File - Save Remote or long-click the Save icon and select Save Remote File. + + + The Remote files dialog appears. Select the remote file server. + + + + In the Filter list box, select the desired format. + + + Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. + + + When you finish working with the file, check it in. To do so, choose File - Check In. + + + + remote file service;CMIS properties + remote file service;file properties + + +

Properties of files stored in CMIS servers

+Files stored in CMIS server have properties and metadata not available in a local storage. These metadata are important for controls and debugging of the CMIS connection and server implementation. All parameters displayed are read-only. +Choose File - Properties, CMIS tab. + +
+Setting up a remote file service +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3d9515b35 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + +Collaboration +/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp + + + + +sharing documents +collaboration +file locking with collaboration +locked documents +MW changed the index entries to one level entries.MW added two index entries with "lock" +

Collaboration

+In %PRODUCTNAME Writer, Impress, and Draw, only one user at a time can open any document for writing. In Calc, many users can open the same spreadsheet for writing at the same time.Tools - Share Document menu + + + +Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document.Share Document dialog - Share this spreadsheet with other users + +Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document. +

Collaboration in Calc

+In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, document sharing allows simultaneous write access for many users. Every user who wants to collaborate should enter a name on the %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data tab page. +Some commands are not available (grayed out) when change tracking or document sharing is activated. For a new spreadsheet you cannot apply or insert the grayed out elements. Spec Doc owner told me that this is work in progress and may change any time +

Creating a new spreadsheet

+User A creates a new spreadsheet document. The following conditions can apply: + + +The user does not want to share the spreadsheet for collaboration. +User A opens, edits, and saves the document as described above for Writer, Impress, and Draw document. + + +The user wants to share the document for collaboration. +The user chooses Tools - Share Document to activate the collaboration features for this document. A dialog opens where the user can choose to enable or disable sharing. If the user enables sharing, the document will be saved in shared mode, which is also shown on the title bar. + +The Tools - Share Document command can be used to switch the mode for the current document from unshared mode to shared mode. If you want to use a shared document in unshared mode, you would save the shared document using another name or path. This creates a copy of the spreadsheet that is not shared. +

Opening a spreadsheet

+User A opens a spreadsheet document. The following conditions can apply: + + +The spreadsheet document is not in shared mode. +The user can open, edit, and save the document as described above for Writer, Impress, and Draw documents. + + +The spreadsheet document is in shared mode. +The user sees a message that the document is in shared mode and that some features are not available in this mode. The user can disable this message for the future. After clicking OK, the document is opened in shared mode. +Resolve Conflicts dialog + + +If the same contents are changed by different users, the Resolve Conflicts dialog opens. For each conflict, decide which changes to keep.Keep Mine + +Keeps your change, voids the other change.Keep Other + +Keeps the change of the other user, voids your change.Keep All Mine + +Keeps all your changes, voids all other changes.Keep All Others + +Keeps the changes of all other users, voids your changes. +

Saving a shared spreadsheet document

+User A saves a shared document. The following conditions can apply: + + +The document was not modified and saved by another user since user A opened the document. +The document is saved. + + +The document was modified and saved by another user since user A opened the document. +If the changes do not conflict, the document is saved. +If the changes conflict, the Resolve Conflicts dialog will be shown. User A must decide for the conflicts which version to keep, "Keep Mine" or "Keep Other". When all conflicts are resolved, the document is saved. While user A resolves the conflicts, no other user is able to save the shared document. + + +Another user tries to save the shared document and resolves conflicts in this moment. +User A sees a message that a merge-in is in progress. User A can choose to cancel the save command for now, or retry saving some time later. + +When a user successfully saves a shared spreadsheet, the document will be reloaded after the save command, so that the spreadsheet shows the latest version of all changes that got saved by all users. A message shows that "foreign changes have been added" when another user did change some contents. +

Collaboration in Writer, Impress, and Draw

+For all modules Writer, Impress, Draw, and for Calc when document sharing is not enabled, a file locking is possible. This file locking is available even when accessing the same document from different operating systems: +User A opens a document. The following conditions can apply: + + +The document is not locked by any other user. +This document will be opened for read and write access by user A. The document will be locked for other users until user A closes the document. + + +The document is marked as "read-only" by the file system. +This document will be opened in read-only mode. Editing is not allowed. User A can save the document using another document name or another path. User A can edit this copy. + + +The document is locked by another user. +User A sees a dialog that tells the user the document is locked. The dialog offers to open the document in read-only mode, or to open a copy for editing, or to cancel the Open command. + +

User access permissions and sharing documents

+Some conditions must be met on operating systems with a user permission management. + + +The shared file needs to reside in a location which is accessible by all collaborators. + + +The file permissions for both the document and the corresponding lock file need to be set so that all collaborators can create, delete, and change the files. + +Write access also enables other users to (accidentally or deliberately) delete or change a file. +
+Save As +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7293d8094 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Configuring $[officename] +/text/shared/guide/configure_overview.xhp + + + +configuring; $[officename] +customizing; $[officename] + +Configuring $[officename] + +
+You can customize your $[officename] to suit your needs. + + +You are free to change the items on the menu bar. You can delete items, add new ones, copy items from one menu to another, rename them, and so on. + + +The toolbars may be freely configured. + + +You can change the shortcut keys. + + +To change these, choose Tools - Customize to open the Customize dialog. +
+
+Tools - Customize +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e072fee62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Using Context Menus +/text/shared/guide/contextmenu.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +context menus +menus;activating context menus +opening; context menus +activating;context menus + +Using Context Menus + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7008777c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,2002 @@ + + + + + + File Conversion Filters Tables + /text/shared/guide/convertfilters.xhp + + + +
+ + filters;document conversion + document conversion;filters + convert-to;filters + command line document conversion;filters + module file filters + +

+ File Conversion Filter Names +

+ + + Tables with filter names for command line document conversion. + + +
+

Usage

+Filter names are used when importing and exporting files in alien formats and converting files formats through the command line. +soffice --convert-to OutputFileExtension[:OutputFilterName[:OutputFilterParams[,param]]] [--outdir output_dir] + +soffice --infilter="InputFilterName[:InputFilterParams[,param]]" +--infilter="Text (encoded):UTF8,LF,Liberation Mono,en-US". + + + + Filter Name + API Name + Media Type (Extension) + + +
+ + command line document conversion; filters for WRITER + +

Filters for WRITER

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + HTML Document (Writer) + + + "HTML (StarWriter)" + + + text/html (html xhtml htm) + + + + + Microsoft WinWord 1/2/5 + + + "MS WinWord 5" + + + application/msword (doc) + + + + + Microsoft Word 6.0 + + + "MS WinWord 6.0" + + + application/msword (doc) + + + + + Microsoft Word 95 + + + "MS Word 95" + + + application/msword (doc) + + + + + Microsoft Word 95 Template + + + "MS Word 95 Vorlage" + + + application/msword (dot) + + + + + Word 97–2003 + + + "MS Word 97" + + + application/msword (doc wps) + + + + + Word 97–2003 Template + + + "MS Word 97 Vorlage" + + + application/msword (dot wpt) + + + + + Flat XML ODF Text Document + + + "OpenDocument Text Flat XML" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text-flat-xml (fodt odt xml) + + + + + Rich Text + + + "Rich Text Format" + + + application/rtf (rtf) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Text Document + + + "StarOffice XML (Writer)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.writer (sxw) + + + + + WordPerfect Document + + + "WordPerfect" + + + application/vnd.wordperfect (wpd) + + + + + Microsoft Works Document + + + "MS_Works" + + + application/vnd.ms-works (wps) + + + + + Microsoft Write + + + "MS_Write" + + + application/x-mswrite (wri) + + + + + Microsoft Word for DOS + + + "DosWord" + + + None (doc) + + + + + ClarisWorks/AppleWorks Text Document + + + "ClarisWorks" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + Microsoft Word for Mac (v1 - v5) + + + "Mac_Word" + + + application/msword (doc) + + + + + Microsoft Works for Mac Text Document (v1 - v4) + + + "Mac_Works" + + + application/vnd.ms-works (wps) + + + + + MacWrite Document + + + "MacWrite" + + + application/macwriteii (mw mcw) + + + + + Mariner Write Mac Classic v1.6 - v3.5 + + + "Mariner_Write" + + + (mwd) + + + + + WriteNow Document + + + "WriteNow" + + + (wn nx^d) + + + + + AbiWord Document + + + "AbiWord" + + + application/x-abiword (abw zabw) + + + + + T602 Document + + + "T602Document" + + + application/x-t602 (602) + + + + + Lotus WordPro Document + + + "LotusWordPro" + + + application/vnd.lotus-wordpro (lwp) + + + + + Text + + + "Text" + + + text/plain (csv tsv tab txt) + + + + + Text - Choose Encoding + + + "Text (encoded)" + + + text/plain (csv tsv tab txt) + + + + + Hangul WP 97 + + + "writer_MIZI_Hwp_97" + + + application/x-hwp (hwp) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Text Document Template + + + "writer_StarOffice_XML_Writer_Template" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.writer.template (stw) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "writer_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + ODF Text Document + + + "writer8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text (odt) + + + + + ODF Text Document Template + + + "writer8_template" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text-template (ott) + + + + + Word 2007–365 + + + "MS Word 2007 XML" + + + application/msword (docx) + + + + + Word 2007–365 Template + + + "MS Word 2007 XML Template" + + + application/msword (dotx dotm) + + + + + Word 2007–365 VBA + + + "MS Word 2007 XML VBA" + + + application/msword (docm) + + + + + Office Open XML Text (Transitional) + + + "Office Open XML Text" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.wordprocessingml.document (docx docm) + + + + + Office Open XML Text Template (Transitional) + + + "Office Open XML Text Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.wordprocessingml.template (dotx dotm) + + + + + Writer Layout XML + + + "writer_layout_dump" + + + None (xml) + + + + + Writer Indexing Export XML + + + "writer_indexing_export" + + + None (xml) + + + + + BroadBand eBook + + + "BroadBand eBook" + + + application/x-sony-bbeb (lrf) + + + + + FictionBook 2.0 + + + "FictionBook 2" + + + application/x-fictionbook+xml (fb2 zip) + + + + + PalmDoc eBook + + + "PalmDoc" + + + application/x-aportisdoc (pdb) + + + + + Plucker eBook + + + "Plucker eBook" + + + application/prs.plucker (pdb) + + + + + Apple Pages + + + "Apple Pages" + + + application/x-iwork-pages-sffpages (pages) + + + + + Legacy Mac Text Document + + + "MWAW_Text_Document" + + + None (*) + + + + + Palm Text Document + + + "Palm_Text_Document" + + + application/vnd.palm (pdb) + + + + + Legacy StarOffice Text Document + + + "StarOffice_Writer" + + + None (sdw) + + + + + EPUB Document + + + "EPUB" + + + application/epub+zip (epub) + + + + + Pocket Word + + + "PocketWord File" + + + application/x-pocket-word (psw) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for CALC + +

Filters for CALC

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Data Interchange Format + + + "DIF" + + + None (dif) + + + + + HTML Document (Calc) + + + "HTML (StarCalc)" + + + text/html (html xhtml htm) + + + + + Flat XML ODF Spreadsheet + + + "OpenDocument Spreadsheet Flat XML" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet-flat-xml (fods ods xml) + + + + + Lotus 1-2-3 + + + "Lotus" + + + application/vnd.lotus-1-2-3 (wk1 wks 123) + + + + + Quattro Pro 6.0 + + + "Quattro Pro 6.0" + + + None (wb2) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 4.0 + + + "MS Excel 4.0" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xls xlw xlc xlm) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 4.0 Template + + + "MS Excel 4.0 Vorlage/Template" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xlt) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 5.0 + + + "MS Excel 5.0/95" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xls xlc xlm xlw) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 5.0 Template + + + "MS Excel 5.0/95 Vorlage/Template" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xlt) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 95 + + + "MS Excel 95" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xls xlc xlm xlw) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 95 Template + + + "MS Excel 95 Vorlage/Template" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xlt) + + + + + Excel 97–2003 + + + "MS Excel 97" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xls xlc xlm xlw xlk et) + + + + + Excel 97–2003 Template + + + "MS Excel 97 Vorlage/Template" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel (xlt ett) + + + + + Rich Text Format (Calc) + + + "Rich Text Format (StarCalc)" + + + application/rtf (rtf) + + + + + SYLK + + + "SYLK" + + + text/spreadsheet (slk sylk) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Spreadsheet + + + "StarOffice XML (Calc)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.calc (sxc) + + + + + Text CSV + + + "Text - txt - csv (StarCalc)" + + + text/plain (csv tsv tab txt) + + + + + Web Page Query (Calc) + + + "calc_HTML_WebQuery" + + + text/html (html xhtml htm) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Spreadsheet Template + + + "calc_StarOffice_XML_Calc_Template" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.calc.template (stc) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "calc_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + dBASE + + + "dBase" + + + None (dbf) + + + + + ODF Spreadsheet + + + "calc8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet (ods) + + + + + ODF Spreadsheet Template + + + "calc8_template" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.spreadsheet-template (ots) + + + + + Gnumeric Spreadsheet + + + "Gnumeric Spreadsheet" + + + application/x-gnumeric (gnumeric gnm) + + + + + Excel 2007–365 + + + "Calc MS Excel 2007 XML" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.sheet (xlsx) + + + + + Excel 2007–365 (macro-enabled) + + + "Calc MS Excel 2007 VBA XML" + + + application/vnd.ms-excel.sheet.macroEnabled.12 (xlsm) + + + + + Excel 2007–365 Template + + + "Calc MS Excel 2007 XML Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.template (xltx xltm) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 2007 Binary + + + "Calc MS Excel 2007 Binary" + + + None (xlsb) + + + + + Office Open XML Spreadsheet + + + "Calc Office Open XML" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.sheet (xlsx xlsm) + + + + + Office Open XML Spreadsheet Template + + + "Calc Office Open XML Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.spreadsheetml.template (xltx xltm) + + + + + Microsoft Works Document + + + "MS_Works_Calc" + + + None (wks wdb) + + + + + Lotus Document + + + "WPS_Lotus_Calc" + + + None (wk1 wk3 wk4 123) + + + + + QuattroPro Document + + + "WPS_QPro_Calc" + + + None (wb1 wb2 wq1 wq2) + + + + + ClarisWorks/AppleWorks Spreadsheet + + + "ClarisWorks_Calc" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + ClarisResolve Document + + + "Claris_Resolve_Calc" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + Microsoft Works for Mac Spreadsheet (v1 - v4) + + + "Mac_Works_Calc" + + + application/vnd.ms-works (wps) + + + + + Apple Numbers + + + "Apple Numbers" + + + application/x-iwork-numbers-sffnumbers (numbers) + + + + + Legacy Mac Database + + + "MWAW_Database" + + + None (*) + + + + + Legacy Mac Spreadsheet + + + "MWAW_Spreadsheet" + + + None (*) + + + + + Legacy StarOffice Spreadsheet + + + "StarOffice_Spreadsheet" + + + None (sdc) + + + + + Microsoft Multiplan + + + "Microsoft Multiplan" + + + None (mp) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for IMPRESS + +

Filters for IMPRESS

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Apple Keynote + + + "Apple Keynote" + + + application/x-iwork-keynote-sffkey (key) + + + + + PowerPoint 97–2003 + + + "MS PowerPoint 97" + + + application/vnd.ms-powerpoint (ppt dps) + + + + + PowerPoint 97–2003 AutoPlay + + + "MS PowerPoint 97 AutoPlay" + + + application/vnd.ms-powerpoint (pps) + + + + + PowerPoint 97–2003 Template + + + "MS PowerPoint 97 Vorlage" + + + application/vnd.ms-powerpoint (pot dpt) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Drawing (Impress) + + + "impress_StarOffice_XML_Draw" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.draw (sxd) + + + + + Flat XML ODF Presentation + + + "OpenDocument Presentation Flat XML" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.presentation-flat-xml (fodp odp xml) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Presentation + + + "StarOffice XML (Impress)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.impress (sxi) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Presentation Template + + + "impress_StarOffice_XML_Impress_Template" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.impress.template (sti) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "impress_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + ODF Presentation + + + "impress8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.presentation (odp) + + + + + ODF Presentation Template + + + "impress8_template" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.presentation-template (otp) + + + + + ODF Drawing (Impress) + + + "impress8_draw" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.graphics (odg) + + + + + PowerPoint 2007–365 + + + "Impress MS PowerPoint 2007 XML" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.presentation (pptx) + + + + + PowerPoint 2007–365 AutoPlay + + + "Impress MS PowerPoint 2007 XML AutoPlay" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.slideshow (ppsx) + + + + + PowerPoint 2007–365 Template + + + "Impress MS PowerPoint 2007 XML Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.template (potx potm) + + + + + PowerPoint 2007–365 VBA + + + "Impress MS PowerPoint 2007 XML VBA" + + + application/vnd.ms-powerpoint.presentation.macroEnabled.main+xml (pptm) + + + + + Office Open XML Presentation + + + "Impress Office Open XML" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.presentation (pptx pptm) + + + + + Office Open XML Presentation Template + + + "Impress Office Open XML Template" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.template (potx potm) + + + + + Office Open XML Presentation AutoPlay + + + "Impress Office Open XML AutoPlay" + + + application/vnd.openxmlformats-officedocument.presentationml.slideshow (ppsx) + + + + + ClarisWorks/AppleWorks Presentation + + + "ClarisWorks_Impress" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + Legacy StarOffice Presentation + + + "StarOffice_Presentation" + + + None (sdd) + + + + + Legacy Mac Presentation + + + "MWAW_Presentation" + + + None (*) + + + + + Microsoft PowerPoint 1-4 and 95's + + + "PowerPoint 3" + + + None (ppt pot) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for DRAW + +

Filters for DRAW

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Flat XML ODF Drawing + + + "OpenDocument Drawing Flat XML" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.graphics-flat-xml (fodg odg xml) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Drawing + + + "StarOffice XML (Draw)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.draw (sxd) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Drawing Template + + + "draw_StarOffice_XML_Draw_Template" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.draw.template (std) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "draw_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + ODF Drawing + + + "draw8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.graphics (odg) + + + + + ODF Drawing Template + + + "draw8_template" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.graphics-template (otg) + + + + + WordPerfect Graphics + + + "WordPerfect Graphics" + + + image/x-wpg (wpg) + + + + + Microsoft Visio 2000-2013 + + + "Visio Document" + + + application/vnd.visio (vdx vsd vsdm vsdx) + + + + + Microsoft Publisher 98-2010 + + + "Publisher Document" + + + application/x-mspublisher (pub) + + + + + Corel Draw + + + "Corel Draw Document" + + + application/vnd.corel-draw (cdr) + + + + + Corel Presentation Exchange + + + "Corel Presentation Exchange" + + + image/x-cmx (cmx) + + + + + Adobe/Macromedia Freehand + + + "Freehand Document" + + + image/x-freehand (fh fh1 fh2 fh3 fh4 fh5 fh6 fh7 fh8 fh9 fh10 fh11) + + + + + ClarisWorks/AppleWorks Drawing + + + "ClarisWorks_Draw" + + + application/clarisworks (cwk) + + + + + Adobe PageMaker + + + "PageMaker Document" + + + application/x-pagemaker (p65 pm pm6 pmd) + + + + + QuarkXPress + + + "QXP Document" + + + None (qxd qxt) + + + + + Zoner Callisto/Draw + + + "ZMF Document" + + + None (zmf) + + + + + Legacy Mac Bitmap + + + "MWAW_Bitmap" + + + None (*) + + + + + Legacy Mac Drawing + + + "MWAW_Drawing" + + + None (*) + + + + + Legacy StarOffice Drawing + + + "StarOffice_Drawing" + + + None (sda) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for MATH + +

Filters for MATH

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + MathML 2.0 + + + "MathML XML (Math)" + + + application/mathml+xml (mml) + + + + + MathType3.x + + + "MathType 3.x" + + + None (xxx) + + + + + OpenOffice.org 1.0 Formula + + + "StarOffice XML (Math)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.math (sxm) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "math_pdf_Export" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + ODF Formula + + + "math8" + + + application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.formula (odf) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for BASE + +

Filters for BASE

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ODF Database + + + "StarOffice XML (Base)" + + + application/vnd.sun.xml.base (odb) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for GRAPHICFILTER + +

Filters for GRAPHICFILTER

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + JPEG - Joint Photographic Experts Group + + + "writer_jpg_Export" + + + image/jpeg (jpg jpeg jfif jif jpe) + + + + + PNG - Portable Network Graphics + + + "writer_png_Export" + + + image/png (png) + + + + + SVG - Scalable Vector Graphics + + + "writer_svg_Export" + + + image/svg+xml (svg svgz) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for PDFIMPORT + +

Filters for PDFIMPORT

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format (Draw) + + + "draw_pdf_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format (Impress) + + + "impress_pdf_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format (Writer) + + + "writer_pdf_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "writer_pdf_addstream_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "impress_pdf_addstream_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "draw_pdf_addstream_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + + + + PDF - Portable Document Format + + + "calc_pdf_addstream_import" + + + application/pdf (pdf) + + +
+
+
+ + command line document conversion; filters for XSLTFILTER + +

Filters for XSLTFILTER

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ADO Rowset XML + + + "ADO Rowset XML" + + + None (xml) + + + + + DocBook + + + "DocBook File" + + + application/docbook+xml (xml) + + + + + Microsoft Excel 2003 XML + + + "MS Excel 2003 XML" + + + None (xml xls) + + + + + Word 2003 XML + + + "MS Word 2003 XML" + + + None (xml doc) + + + + + XHTML + + + "XHTML Calc File" + + + application/xhtml+xml (html xhtml) + + + + + XHTML + + + "XHTML Draw File" + + + application/xhtml+xml (html xhtml) + + + + + XHTML + + + "XHTML Impress File" + + + application/xhtml+xml (html xhtml) + + + + + XHTML + + + "XHTML Writer File" + + + application/xhtml+xml (html xhtml) + + + + + Unified Office Format text + + + "UOF text" + + + None (uot;uof) + + + + + Unified Office Format spreadsheet + + + "UOF spreadsheet" + + + None (uos;uof) + + + + + Unified Office Format presentation + + + "UOF presentation" + + + None (uop;uof) + + +
+
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cac529d16 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Copying Drawing Objects Into Other Documents +/text/shared/guide/copy_drawfunctions.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +draw objects; copying between documents +copying; draw objects between documents +pasting;draw objects from other documents +mw added "pasting;" +Copying Drawing Objects Into Other Documents + +In $[officename] it is possible to copy drawing objects between text, spreadsheets and presentation documents. + + +Select the drawing object or objects. + + +Copy the drawing object to the clipboard, for example, by using CommandCtrl+C. + + +Switch to the other document and place the cursor where the drawing object is to be inserted. + + +Insert the drawing object, for example, by using CommandCtrl+V. + + +Inserting into a text document +An inserted drawing object is anchored to the current paragraph. You can change the anchor by selecting the object and clicking the Change Anchor icon on the OLE Object toolbar or the Frame toolbar. This opens a popup menu where you can select the anchor type. +Inserting into a spreadsheet +An inserted drawing object is anchored to the current cell. You can change the anchor between cell and page by selecting the object and clicking the Change Anchor icon +Icon + . +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8a036be8d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Data From Spreadsheets +/text/shared/guide/copytable2application.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +charts;copying with link to source cell range +inserting; cell ranges from spreadsheets +pasting;cell ranges from spreadsheets +presentations;inserting spreadsheet cells +text documents;inserting spreadsheet cells +tables in spreadsheets;copying data to other applications +mw deleted "tables;" and added "charts;" and "tables in spreadsheets;" +Inserting Data From Spreadsheets + + + +Use the clipboard to copy the contents of a single cell. You can also copy a formula from a cell into the clipboard (for example, from the input line of the formula bar) so that the formula can be inserted into a text. + + +To copy a cell range into a text document, select the cell range in the sheet and then use either the clipboard or drag-and-drop to insert the cells into the text document. You will then find an OLE object in the text document, which you can edit further. + + +If you drag cells to the normal view of a presentation document, the cells will be inserted there as an OLE object. If you drag cells into the outline view, each cell will form a line of the outline view. + + +When you copy a cell range from $[officename] Calc to the clipboard, the drawing objects, OLE objects and charts within this range are also copied. + + +If you insert a cell range with an enclosed chart, the chart will keep its link to the source cell range only if you copied the chart and the source cell range together. + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2cd158c08 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Data From Text Documents +/text/shared/guide/copytext2application.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +sending; AutoAbstract function in presentations +AutoAbstract function for sending text to presentations +outlines; sending to presentations +text; copying by drag and drop +drag and drop; copying and pasting text +inserting;data from text documents +copying;data from text documents +pasting;data from text documents +mw added "pasting; and changed "drag and drop;"" +Inserting Data From Text Documents + +You can insert text into other document types, such as spreadsheets and presentations. Note that there is a difference between whether the text is inserted into a frame, a spreadsheet cell, or into the outline view of a presentation. + + +If you copy text to the clipboard, you can paste it with or without text attributes. Use the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+C to copy and CommandCtrl+V to paste. + + + + + + +Icon + + + +To select the format in which the clipboard contents will be pasted, click the arrow next to the Paste icon on the Standard bar, or choose Edit - Paste Special, then select the proper format. + + +
+ + +If a text document contains headings formatted with the Heading Paragraph Style, choose File - Send - Outline to Presentation. A new presentation document is created, which contains the headings as an outline. + + +If you want to transfer each heading together with its accompanying paragraphs, select the File - Send - AutoAbstract to Presentation command. You must have formatted the headings with a corresponding Paragraph Style to be able to see this command. + + +Copying Text Using Drag-and-Drop + + +If you select text and drag it into a spreadsheet with drag-and-drop, it will be inserted as text into the cell where you release the mouse. + + +If you drag text to the normal view of a presentation, an OLE object is inserted as a $[officename] plug-in. + + +If you drag the text to the outline view of a presentation, it will be inserted at the cursor location. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cc49b5ba7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,287 @@ + + + + + + + CSV Filter parameters + /text/shared/guide/csv_params.xhp + + + + + CSV;filter options + CSV;separator specification line + CSV;import options + CSV;export options + CSV;command line filter options + +
+

CSV Filter Options

+ The CSV filter accepts an option string containing five to thirteen tokens, separated by commas. Tokens 6 to 13 are optional. +
+ + Import from UTF-8, Language German, Comma separated, Text delimiter ", Quoted field as text. CSV file has columns formatted as date, number, number, number: + soffice --infilter="Text - txt - csv (StarCalc):44,34,76,1,1/5/2/1/3/1/4/1,1031,true,true" test.csv + Export to Windows-1252, Field delimiter : comma, Text delimiter : quote, Save cell contents as shown: + soffice --convert-to "Text - txt - csv (StarCalc):44,34,ANSI,1,,0,false,true,true" --outdir=/home/user test.ods + + + + Token Position + + + Definition + + + Meaning and Example of Token + + + + + 1 + + + Field Separator + + + Field separator(s) as ASCII values. Multiple values are separated by the slash sign ("/"), that is, if the values are separated by semicolons and horizontal tabulators, the token would be 59/9. To treat several consecutive separators as one, then append '/MRG' to the token. If the file contains fixed width fields, then use 'FIX'. Example: 44 (,) + + + + + 2 + + + Text Delimiter + + + The text delimiter as ASCII value, like 34 for double quotes and 39 for single quotes. Example: 34 ("). + + + + + 3 + + + Character Set + + + The character set code used in the file as described in the table below. Example: 0 (System). + + + + + 4 + + + CSV Import + + + + + N Line number to start reading. Example: 3 (start from third line). + + + + + + + 5 + + + Cell Format Codes for Each Column + + + A sequence of column/formatting code, where the formatting code is given in the table below. Example: "1/5/2/1/3/1/4/1". + If value separators are used, the form of this token is column/format[/column/format/…] where column is the number of the column, with 1 being the leftmost column. The format code is detailed below. + If the first token is FIX it has the form start/format[/start/format/…], where start is the number of the first character for this field, with 0 being the leftmost character in a line. The format is explained below. + + + + + 6 + + + Language identifier + + + String expressed in decimal notation. This token is the equivalent of the "Language" listbox in the user interface for CSV import. If the value is 0 or omitted, the language identifier of the user interface is used. The language identifier is based on the Microsoft language identifiers. + + + + + 7 + + + CSV Import, CSV Export + + + String, either false or true. Default value: false. This token is the equivalent of the check box "Quoted field as text". + + + + + 8 + + + CSV Import, CSV Export + + + Import: String, either false or true. Default value: false. This token is the equivalent of the check box "Detect special numbers". + Export: String, either false or true. Default value: true. This token has no UI equivalent. If true, the number cells are stored as numbers. If false, the numbers are stored as text, with text delimiters. + + + + + 9 + + + CSV Export + + + String, either false or true. Default value:true. This token is the equivalent of the check box "Save cell contents as shown". + + + + + 10 + + + CSV Export + + + String, either false or true. Default value: false. Export cell formulas. + + + + + 11 + + + CSV Import + + + String, either false or true. Default value: false. Remove spaces. Trim leading and trailing spaces, when reading the file. + + + + + 12 + + + CSV Export + + + Export the entire document to individual sheets .csv files or a specified sheet. + + + 0 or absent means the default behaviour, first sheet from command line, or current sheet in macro filter options, exported to sample.csv + + + -1 for all sheets, each sheet is exported to an individual file of the base file name concatenated with the sheet name, for example sample-Sheet1.csv, sample-Sheet2.csv and sample-Sheet3.csv + + + N export the N-th sheet within the range of number of sheets. Example: to export the second sheet, set 2 here to get sample-Sheet2.csv + + + + + + + 13 + + + CSV Import + + + String, either false or true. Default value: false. Determines whether formula expressions starting with a = equal sign character are to be evaluated as formulas or imported as textual data. If true evaluate formulas on input. If false formulas are input as text. If omitted (not present at all), the default value is true to keep the behaviour of old versions' options string that didn't have this token at all. If present and empty (or any other value than true) the default value is false. + + +
+

Special case of CSV files with separator defined in the first line

+ + CSV import and export support a sep= and "sep=" field separator setting. When reading a CSV document, the separator is taken from the initial sep= or "sep=" single field, if that is the only line content. + + When reading a CSV file, the quoted form is preserved as (unquoted) cell content. You see sep=| when | is the separator in the first line. In the unquoted form, the separator is discarded because it is a real field separator in the context. You see sep= in the first line. + + When writing a CSV file, the existing single top left cell's content such as sep=| is adapted to the current separator with the quoted form of "sep=|" (if quotes / text delimiters aren't set empty and | is the separator) and always uses the ASCII " double quote character. + + If the line containing the sep=| is not to be imported as data, remember to set the From row number in the dialog to 2. Note that this line will not be preserved when re-saving. + + + + + sep=| + "LETTER"|"ANIMAL" + "a"|"aardvark" + "b"|"bear" + "c"|"cow" + + +

Formatting Codes for Token 5

+ + + + Meaning + + + Code + + + + Standard + 1 + + + Text + 2 + + + MM/DD/YY + 3 + + + DD/MM/YY + 4 + + + YY/MM/DD + 5 + + + - + 6 + + + - + 7 + + + - + 8 + + + Ignore field (do not import) + 9 + + + US-English + 10 + +
+

Character Set Codes for Token 3

+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..099ce00ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Languages Using Complex Text Layout +/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp + + + +CTL;complex text layout languages +languages;complex text layout +text;CTL languages +text layout for special languages +right-to-left text +entering text from right to left +bi-directional writing +Hindi;entering text +Hebrew;entering text +Arabic;entering text +Thai;entering text +mw made "text layout;" a one level entry +Languages Using Complex Text Layout + +Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. +If you select the text flow from right to left, embedded Western text still runs from left to right. The cursor responds to the arrow keys in that Right Arrow moves it "to the text end" and Left Arrow "to the text start". +You can change the text writing direction directly be pressing one of the following keys: + + +CommandCtrl+Shift+D or CommandCtrl+Right Shift Key - switch to right-to-left text entry + + +CommandCtrl+Shift+A or CommandCtrl+Left Shift Key - switch to left-to-right text entry + + +The modifier-only key combinations only work when CTL support is enabled. + + +In multicolumn pages, sections or frames that are formatted with text flow from right to left, the first column is the right column and the last column is the left column. +In $[officename] Writer text formatted in Thai language has the following features: + + +In paragraphs with justified alignment, the characters are stretched to flush the lines at the margins. In other languages the spaces between words are stretched. + + +Use the Delete key to delete a whole composite character. Use the Backspace key to delete the last part of the previous composite character. + + +Use the Right or Left Arrow key to jump to the next or previous whole composite character. To position the cursor into a composite character, use OptionAlt+Arrow key. + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Complex Text Layout + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f6d4b0381 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Registering an Address Book +/text/shared/guide/data_addressbook.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +data sources; registering address books +address books; registering +system address book registration +registering; address books + + +Registering an Address Book + +
+In %PRODUCTNAME you can register different data sources. The contents of the data fields are then available to you for use in various fields and controls. Your system address book is such a data source. + +%PRODUCTNAME templates and wizards use fields for the contents of the address book. When activated, the general fields in the templates are automatically replaced with the fields from the data source of your address book. +
+In order for the replacement to take place, you must tell %PRODUCTNAME which address book you use. The wizard asking for this information appears automatically the first time you activate, for example, a business letter template. You can also call the wizard by following the steps listed below. +The address book data is read-only in %PRODUCTNAME Base. It is not possible to add, edit, or delete address data from within Base. +Address Data Source Wizard +To call the Address Data Source wizard, choose File - Wizards - Address Data Source. +Registering An Existing Address Book Manually + + +Choose Tools - Address Book Source. The Templates: Address Book Assignment dialog appears. + + +In the Data source combo box, select the system address book or the data source you want to use as an address book. + + +If you have not yet registered the system address book in %PRODUCTNAME as the data source, click the Address Data Source ... button. This takes you to the Address Book Data Source Wizard, in which you can register your address book as a new data source in %PRODUCTNAME. + + +In the Table combo box, select the database table you want to use as the address book. + + +Under Field assignment, match the fields for first name, company, department, and so on to the actual field names used in your address book. + + +When finished, close the dialog with OK. + + +Now your data source is registered in %PRODUCTNAME as the address book. If you now open a template from the Business Correspondence category, %PRODUCTNAME can automatically insert the correct fields for a form letter. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a352b229f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format +/text/shared/guide/data_dbase2office.xhp + + + +databases; text formats +text formats; databases +importing; tables in text format +exporting; spreadsheets to text format + +Importing and Exporting Data in Text Format + +If you want to exchange data with a database that does not have an ODBC link and does not allow dBASE import and export, you can use a common text format. +Importing Data into $[officename] +To exchange data in a text format use the $[officename] Calc import/export filter. + + +Export the desired data from the source database in a text format. The CSV text format is recommended. This format separates data fields by using delimiters such as commas or semi-colons, and separates records by inserting line breaks. + + +Choose File - Open and click the file to import. + + +Select "Text CSV" from the File type combo box. Click Open. + + +The Text Import dialog appears. Decide which data to include from the text document. + + +Once the data is in a $[officename] Calc spreadsheet, you can edit it as needed. Save the data as a $[officename] data source: + + +Save the current $[officename] Calc spreadsheet in dBASE format in the folder of a dBASE database. To do this, choose File - Save As, then select the File type "dBASE" and the folder of the dBASE database. + + +Exporting in CSV Text Format +You can export the current $[officename] spreadsheet in a text format which can be read by many other applications. + + +Choose File - Save as. + + +In File type select the filter "Text CSV". Enter a file name and click Save. + + +This opens the Export of text files dialog, in which you can select the character set, field delimiter and text delimiter. Click OK. A warning informs you that only the active sheet was saved. + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c7268b251 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Executing SQL Commands + /text/shared/guide/data_enter_sql.xhp + + + +SQL; executing SQL commands + queries;creating in SQL view + commands;SQL + executing SQL commands +mw changed "SQL;executing commands"mw made "executing;" a one level entry +Executing SQL Commands + + With the help of SQL commands you can control the database directly, and can also create and edit tables and queries. + Not all database types support all SQL instructions. If necessary, find out which SQL commands are supported by your database system. + To execute an SQL statement directly + + + Choose File - Open to open a database file. + + + Choose Tools - SQL. + + + Click the Create Query in SQL View icon +Icon + or + Select an existing query from the list and click the Edit icon +Icon + . + + + In the Query window, choose View - Switch Design View On/Off. Edit the SQL command. + + + Click the Run icon +Icon + . The result of the query is displayed in the upper window. + + + Click the Save or Save As icon +Icon + to save the query. + + +
+ Query Design + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..217017994 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Working with Forms +/text/shared/guide/data_forms.xhp + + + +opening;forms +forms;creating +design view;creating forms + +Working with Forms + +Using forms, you can define how to present the data. Open a text document or a spreadsheet and insert the controls such as push buttons and list boxes. In the properties dialogs of the controls, you can define what data the forms should display. +Creating a New Form With the Form Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME, you can create a new form using the Form Wizard: + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new form. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Forms icon. + + +Click Use Wizard to Create Form. + + +Creating a New Form Manually + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new form. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Forms icon. + + +Click Create Form in Design View. + + +A new text document opens. Use the Form Controls to insert form controls. +Click the Forms icon to access all forms that were created from within the current database window. In addition, you can use the Form Controls icons to add database form controls to any Writer or Calc document, but these documents will not be listed in the database window. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c610286d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + +Importing and Exporting Data in Base +/text/shared/guide/data_im_export.xhp + + + +databases;importing/exporting +importing;databases +copying; datasource records in spreadsheets +inserting; datasource records in spreadsheets +spreadsheets;inserting database records +data sources;copying records to spreadsheets +pasting;from data sources to %PRODUCTNAME Calc +MW reduced "databases;" entries into one entry and deleted "exporting;from.."

Importing and Exporting Data in Base +

+An easy method to import and export database tables uses Calc as a "helper application". +

Exporting data from Base

+You copy a table from Base to a new Calc sheet, then you can save or export the data to any file format that Calc supports. + + +Open the database file that contains the database table to be exported. Click Tables to view the tables, or click Queries to view the queries. + + +Choose File - New - Spreadsheet. + + +In the Base window, right-click the name of the table to export. Choose Copy from the context menu. + + +Click cell A1 in the new Calc window, then choose Edit - Paste. + + +Now you can save or export the data to many file types. +

Importing data to Base

+You can import text files, spreadsheet files, and your system address book in read-only mode only. +When you import from a text or spreadsheet file, the file must have a first row of header information. The second row of the file is the first valid data row. The format of every field in the second row determines the format for the entire column. Any format information from a spreadsheet file gets lost when importing to Base. +For example, to ensure the first column has a text format, you must make sure that the first field of the first valid data row contains text. If a field in the first valid data row contains a number, the whole column is set to number format, and only numbers, no text, will be shown in that column. + + +Open a Base file of the database type that you want. +Either create a new Base file using the Database Wizard, or open any existing Base file that is not read-only. + + +Open the Calc file that contains the data to be imported to Base. You can open a *.dbf dBASE file or many other file types. + + +Select the data to be copied to Base. +You can enter a range reference like A1:X500 in the Name Box if you don't want to scroll. +If you copy a dBASE sheet, include the top row that contains the header data. + + +Choose Edit - Copy. + + +In the Base window, click Tables to view the tables. + + +In the Base window, choose Edit - Paste. + + +You see the Copy Table dialog. Most databases need a primary key, so you may want to check the Create primary key box. + + +On Windows systems, you can also use drag-and-drop instead of Copy and Paste. Also, for registered databases, you can open the datasource browser (press CommandCtrl + Shift + F4 keys) instead of opening the Base window. +
+ + + + + +ufi: removed switches for calc + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c334ced60 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Creating a New Database +/text/shared/guide/data_new.xhp + + +create a new database + + + +databases;creating +new databases +mw deleted "creating;" +

Creating a New Database +

+ + +Choose File - New - Database. +This opens the Database Wizard, where you create a new database file. + + +In the Database Wizard, select the type of database, and select the option to open the Table Wizard as the next wizard. +The Table Wizard helps you to add a table to the new database file. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..82ab19059 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + +Working with Queries +/text/shared/guide/data_queries.xhp + + +Working with Queries + + + +databases;creating queries +filtering;data in databases +queries;defining (Base) +defining;queries (Base) +wizards;database queries +Query Wizard (Base) +MW added (Base) to 3 entries +Working with Queries + +If you often want to access only a subset of your data that can be well defined by a filter condition, you can define a query. This is basically a name for the new view at the filtered data. You open the query and see the current data in the table layout that you defined. +Creating a New Query With the Query Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME you can create a new query using the Query Wizard: + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new query. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Queries icon. + + +Click Use Wizard to Create Query. + + +Creating a New Query With the Design View + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new query. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Queries icon. + + +Click Create Query in Design View. + + +You see the Query Design window. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cbeaf9cb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Registering and Deleting a Database +/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp + + + +databases;registering (Base) +registering;databases (Base) +deleting;databases (Base) +databases;deleting (Base) +lists;registered databases (Base) +mw deleted "removing;...". New entry "lists;" from shared/optionen/01160200.xhpRegistering and Deleting a Database + +Data from any database file can be registered to the installed instance of %PRODUCTNAME. To register means to tell %PRODUCTNAME where the data is located, how it is organized, how to get that data, and more. Once the database is registered, you can use the menu command View - Data source to access the data records from your text documents and spreadsheets. +To register an existing database file: + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. + + +Click New and select the database file.i60224 + + +To remove a registered database from %PRODUCTNAME + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. + + +Select the database file and click Delete. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91389473c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Using and Editing Database Reports +/text/shared/guide/data_report.xhp + + + +database reports +data sources;reports +reports;opening and editing +editing;reports +opening;reports +templates;database reports +reports;templates + + +Using and Editing Database Reports + +Using a Report +%PRODUCTNAME stores the information about the created reports in the database file. + + +Choose File - Open and select the database file. + + +In the database file window, click the Reports icon. + + +Double-click one of the report names to open the report. +These links are added automatically when you create a new report by the Report Wizard or in the Report Builder window. + + +Editing a Report Created in the Report Builder Window + + +Right-click the name of a report in the database file window, then choose Edit. + + +The Report Builder window opens with the report's information loaded. +Use the toolbars and menu commands and drag-and-drop to edit the report as stated in the Report Builder guide. +Execute the report to see the resulting report document. +Editing a Report Created by the Report Wizard + + +On the last dialog page of the Report Wizard, you can choose to edit the report template before you use the report. + + +You can edit the page styles for the first page and the following pages of the report as well as the paragraph styles, the number formats, the printed field labels, and more. +Unless you have a thorough understanding of the database the report accesses, do not edit the SQL statement, database name, the hidden form controls, or the related information on the report. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..92dd0b9ce --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Creating Reports +/text/shared/guide/data_reports.xhp + + + +databases;creating reports +reports;creating +wizards;reports + +Creating Reports + +A report is a Writer text document that can show your data in an organized order and formatting. In %PRODUCTNAME Base, you have a choice to create a report either manually using drag-and-drop in the Report Builder window, or semi-automatic by following a series of dialogs in the Report Wizard. +The following list gives you some information to decide which method to use for your data: + + + +Report Builder + + +Report Wizard + + + + +Started by "Create Report in Design View" command. + + +Started by "Use Wizard to Create Report" command. + + + + +Full flexibility to use report headers and footers, page headers and footers, multi-column reports. + + +Uses a Writer template to generate a report document. + + + + +Use drag-and-drop to position the record fields or other design elements like pictures or lines. + + +Select from several given choices to arrange the data records. + + + + +Generates a one-time snapshot of the data. To see an updated report, execute the same report again to create a Writer document with the updated data. + + +You can choose to generate a one-time snapshot with fixed data, or a "live" report with links to the current data at the time when you open the Base file. + + + + +Saves the report as a Writer text document. Stores the information how to create the report inside the Base file. + + +Saves the report and the information how to create the report inside the Base file. + + + + +Choose Open in the context menu or double-click the report name to create a new report with the current data. + + +Choose Open in the context menu or double-click the report name to either see again the static snapshot of the data from first creation time, or to create a new report with the current data. This depends on your choice on the last page of the wizard. + + + + +Choose Edit in the context menu of a report name to open the Report Builder window, with the report's information loaded. + + +Choose Edit in the context menu of a report name to edit the Writer template file that was used to create the report. + + +
+Creating a New Report Manually In Design View + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new report. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Reports icon. + + +Click Create Report in Design View. + + +Follow the instructions in the Report Builder guide. + + +Creating a New Report With the Report Wizard + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new report. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Reports icon. + + +Click Use Wizard to Create Report. + + +Follow the steps of the Report Wizard to create the report. + + +
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9356b22a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Searching Tables and Form Documents +/text/shared/guide/data_search.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +finding;records in form documents +forms;finding records +searching;tables and forms + +Searching Tables and Form Documents + + + + + +Icon + + + +In spreadsheets and documents in which form controls are used, you can click the Find Record icon on the form bar to open a dialog to find any text and values. + + +
+ +You can search in one or in all data fields. You can select whether the text must be at the beginning, end or any location of the data field. You also can use the ? and * wildcards, as in the Find & Replace dialog. You can find additional information about the database search function in the $[officename] Help. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..bcfbe5d5c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Searching With a Form Filter +/text/shared/guide/data_search2.xhp + + + +form filters +databases;form filters +searching; form filters +removing;form filters +filtering; data in forms +data;filtering in forms +forms; filtering data +data, see also values +MW inserted a cross-referenceSearching With a Form Filter + + + +Open a form document that contains database fields. +As an example, open an empty text document and press CommandCtrl + Shift + F4 keys. Open the bibliography database table biblio in the data source view. While pressing Shift+CommandCtrl, drag a few column headers into the document so that the form fields are created. + + +On the Form Controls toolbar, click the Design Mode On/Off icon +Icon + to turn off the design mode. + + +On the Form Navigation toolbar, click the Form-Based Filters icon +Icon + . The current document is displayed with its form controls as an empty edit mask. The Form Filter toolbar appears. + + +Enter the filter conditions into one or several fields. Note that if you enter filter conditions into several fields, all of the entered conditions must match (Boolean AND). + + +More information about wildcards and operators can be found in Query Design. + +If you click the Apply Form-Based Filter icon on the Form Filter toolbar, the filter will be applied. You see the Form Navigation toolbar and can browse through the found records. + +If you click on the Close button on the Form Filter toolbar, the form is displayed without a filter. +Click the Apply Filter icon +Icon + on the Form Navigation toolbar to change to the filtered view. +The filter that has been set can be removed by clicking Reset Filter/Sort icon +Icon + . + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1f0f1656 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + Table Design + /text/shared/guide/data_tabledefine.xhp + + + +tables in databases; creating in design view (manually) + designing; database tables + properties;fields in databases + fields;database tables + AutoValue (Base) + primary keys;design view +MW deleted "database tables;" and changed "tables in databases;"UFI added AutoValue and Primary Key entry - i48831MW changed Tables in databases, AutoValue and Primary Key entries + + Table Design + + This section contains information about how to create a new database table in the design view. + Open the database file of the database where you want a new table. Click the Tables icon. Choose Create Table in Design View to create a new table. + In the Design view, you can now create the fields for your table. + + + Enter new fields in rows from top to bottom. Click the Field Name cell and enter a field name for each data field. + + + Include a "primary key" data field. Base needs a primary key to be able to edit the table contents. A primary key has unique contents for each data record. For example, insert a numerical field, right-click the first column, and choose Primary Key from the context menu. Set AutoValue to "Yes", so Base can automatically increment the value for each new record. + + + In the next cell to the right, define the Field Type. When you click in the cell, you can select a field type in the combo box. + + + Each field can only accept data corresponding to the specified field type. For example, it is not possible to enter text in a number field. Memo fields in dBASE III format are references to internally-managed text files which can hold up to 64 kB text. + You can enter an optional Description for each field. The text of the description will appear as a tip on the column headings in the table view. + Field Properties + Enter properties for each selected data field. Depending on the database type, some input facilities may not be available. + In the Default value box, enter the default contents for every new record. This contents can be edited later. + In the Entry required box, specify whether or not the field may remain empty. + For the Length box, a combo box may be shown that provides the available choices. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..76e92039b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + +Working with Tables +/text/shared/guide/data_tables.xhp + + +Working with Tables + + + +tables in databases;creating +databases;creating tables +table views of databases +mw changed" database tables;" to "tables in databases;" +Working with Tables + +Data is stored in tables. As an example, your system address book that you use for your email addresses is a table of the address book database. Each address is a data record, presented as a row in that table. The data records consist of data fields, for example the first and the last name fields and the email field. +Creating a New Table With the Table Wizard +In %PRODUCTNAME you can create a new table using the Table Wizard: + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new table. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. + + +Click Use Wizard to Create Table. + + +Creating a New Table With the Design View + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new table. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. + + +Click Create Table in Design View. + + +You see the Table Design window. +Creating a New Table View +Some database types support table views. A table view is a query that is stored with the database. For most database operations, a view can be used as you would use a table. + + +Open the database file where you want to create the new table view. + + +In the left pane of the database window, click the Tables icon. + + +Click Create Table View. + + +You see the View Design window, which is almost the same as the Query Design window. +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3572ac9f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Viewing a Database +/text/shared/guide/data_view.xhp + + +viewing a database + + + +opening;database files +viewing; databases +data sources;viewing +databases;viewing + +Viewing a Database + +There are two different methods of viewing a database in %PRODUCTNAME. + + +Choose File - Open to open the database file. +The database file gives you full access to tables, queries, reports, and forms. You can edit the structure of your tables and change the contents of the data records. + + +Choose View - Data source to view the registered databases. +The data source view can be used to drag-and-drop table fields from registered databases into your documents and to produce mail merges. + + +
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ec874dc4e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + +Database Overview +/text/shared/guide/database_main.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +databases; overview +data source view; overview +data source explorer +explorer of data sources + + +

Database Overview +remove this file when all links are resolved

+Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +

Data Source View

+Choose View - Data Sources or press CommandCtrl + Shift + F4 keys to call the data source view from a text document or spreadsheet. +On the left you can see the Data source explorer. If you select a table or query there, you see the contents of this table or query on the right. At the top margin is the Table Data bar. +

Data Sources

+Address book as data source +View data source contents +Menu bar of a database file +

Forms and Reports

+Create new form document, edit form controls, Form Wizard +Entering data versus editing form +Report Wizard + +

Queries

+Create new query or table view, edit query structure +Query Wizard +Enter, edit and copy records +

Tables

+Create new table, edit table structure, index, relations +Table Wizard +Enter, edit and copy records + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5463a7312 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ + + + + + + + Development Tools + /text/shared/guide/dev_tools.xhp + + + + + development tools + object inspector + + + +
+

Development Tools

+ Inspects objects in %PRODUCTNAME documents and shows supported UNO services, as well as available methods, properties and implemented interfaces. +
+ This feature also allows to explore the document structure using the Document Object Model (DOM). +
+ Choose Tools - Development Tools + + + + + Icon Development Tools + + + + Development Tools + + +
+
+ The Development Tools are visible in all documents of %PRODUCTNAME Writer, Calc, Impress and Draw. The display is persistent and remain visible until deselected. + When Development Tools is enabled, a dockable window is shown at the bottom of the screen. This window has two sections: + + + Document Object Model tree view: Displays document portions according to the Document Object Model (DOM). Use this section to choose the object to inspect. + + + Object inspection panel: Displays the available services, methods, properties and interfaces of the selected object. + + + This feature is available since %PRODUCTNAME 7.2 for Writer, Calc, Impress and Draw. +

Document Model Tree View

+ The left side of the window contains a Current Selection toggle button, a Refresh button and a tree view that displays all objects in the document. + The behavior of the tree view depends on the status of the Current Selection toggle button: + + + Click on Current Selection to display the properties of the object currently selected in the document. Hence, clicking any item in the tree view have no effect. + + + Click on Current Selection again to display any item in the tree view and update the contents of the Object Inspection Panel. + + + The types of objects displayed by the Document Model Tree View depend on the %PRODUCTNAME application being used: + + + + %PRODUCTNAME application + + + Supported objects + + + + + Writer + + + Paragraphs
Text Portions in a Paragraph
Shapes
Tables
Frames
Graphic Objects
Embedded Objects (OLE)
Style Families and Styles + + + + + Calc + + + Sheets
Shapes per sheet
Charts per sheet
Pivot tables per sheet
Style Families and Styles + + + + + Impress + + + Slides
Shapes per slide
Master slides
Style Families and Styles + + + + + Draw + + + Pages
Shapes per page
Style Families and Styles + + +
+

Object Inspection Panel

+ The right side of the window is the Object Inspection Panel that displays information about the object being inspected. + Class Name: is the name of the object class. + Use the class name to search more information in the API documentation. For example, the top-level object in a Writer document is an instance of the class SwXTextDocument, which is documented at SwXTextDocument Class Reference. + You can inspect the object further by using the four tabs available that display its Interfaces, Services, Properties and Methods. + The information about the object is organized in columns in each tab. The set of columns displayed depend on the selected tab. +

Interfaces tab

+ Contains a single column presenting the list of interfaces implemented by the object. +

Services tab

+ Contains a single column presenting the list of services supported by the object. +

Properties tab

+ Contains four columns that describe the properties of the object: + + + Property: Shows the names of the object properties. + + + Value: Displays a textual representation of the current property value. + + + Type: Shows the property type. + + + Info: display relevant information about the property. For example, a read-only property displays "read-only" in this column. + + + The Properties tab also includes a text box on the bottom to display the full textual representation of the property value. +

Methods tab

+ Contains four columns that describe the combined list of methods that can be called by the current object: + + + Method: Shows the names of all methods of the object. + + + Return type: Displays the return type of the object methods. Methods that do not return any value are marked as "void" in this column. + + + Parameters: Shows the list of parameters that are required by the method as well as their respective types. + + + Implementation class: Displays the name of the class where the method is implemented. + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c57804bb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + About Digital Signatures + /text/shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp + + + +certificates + digital signatures;overview + security;digital signatures +mw moved 1 entry to digitalsign_send.xhp and made "digital signatures" a two level entry and added a new entry +

About Digital Signatures +

+ In %PRODUCTNAME, you can digitally sign your documents and macros. +

Certificates

+ To sign a document digitally, you need a personal key, the certificate. A personal key is stored on your computer as a combination of a private key, which must be kept secret, and a public key, which you add to your documents when you sign them. +

Save and sign the document

+ When you apply a digital signature to a document, a kind of checksum is computed from the document's content plus your personal key. The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document. +

Open a signed document

+ When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of %PRODUCTNAME, the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum. If both are the same, the program will signal that you see the original, unchanged document. In addition, the program can show you the public key information from the certificate. + You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority. + Whenever someone changes something in the document, this change breaks the digital signature. After the change, there will be no sign that you see the original document. + The result of the signature validation is displayed in the status bar and within the Digital Signature dialog. Several documents and macro signatures can exist inside an ODF document. If there is a problem with one signature, then the validation result of that one signature is assumed for all signatures. That is, if there are ten valid signatures and one invalid signature, then the status bar and the status field in the dialog will flag the signature as invalid. + You can see any of the following icons and messages when you open a signed document. + + + + Icon in Status bar + + + Signature status + + + + + +Icon + + + + The signature is valid. + + + + + +Icon + + + + The signature is OK, but the certificates could not be validated. + The signature and the certificate are OK, but not all parts of the document are signed. (For documents that were signed with old versions of the software, see note below.) + + + + + +Icon + + + + The signature is invalid. + + +
+ +

Signatures and software versions

+ The signing of contents got changed with OpenOffice.org 3.2 and StarOffice 9.2. Now all contents of the files, except the signature file itself (META-INF/documentsignatures.xml) are signed. + When you sign a document with OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2 or a later version, and you open that document in an older version of the software, the signature will be displayed as "invalid". Signatures created with older versions of the software will be marked with "only parts of the document are signed" when loaded in the newer software. + When you sign an OOXML document, then the signature will be always marked with "only parts of the document are signed". Metadata of OOXML files are never signed, to be compatible with Microsoft Office. + When you sign a PDF document, then this marking is not used. Signing only parts of the document is simply an invalid signature. + Signing other document formats is not supported at the moment. + When you load an ODF document, you might see an icon in the status bar and the status field in the dialog that indicates that the document is only partially signed. This status will appear when the signature and certificate are valid, but they were created with a version of OpenOffice.org before 3.2 or StarOffice before 9.2. In versions of OpenOffice.org before 3.0 or StarOffice before 9.0, the document signature was applied to the main contents, pictures and embedded objects only and some contents, like macros, were not signed. In OpenOffice.org 3.0 and StarOffice 9.0 the document signature was applied to most content, including macros. However, the mimetype and the content of the META-INF folder were not signed. And in OpenOffice.org 3.2, StarOffice 9.2, and all versions of LibreOffice all contents, except the signature file itself (META-INF/documentsignatures.xml), are signed. +

Security Warnings

+ When you receive a signed document, and the software reports that the signature is valid, this does not mean that you can be absolutely sure that the document is the same that the sender has sent. Signing documents with software certificates is not a perfectly secure method. Numerous ways are possible to circumvent the security features. + Example: Think about someone who wants to camouflage his identity to be a sender from your bank. He can easily get a certificate using a false name, then send you any signed email pretending he is working for your bank. You will get that email, and the email or the document within has the "valid signed" icon. + Do not trust the icon. Inspect and verify the certificates. + The validation of a signature is not a legally binding guarantee of any kind. + On Windows operating systems, the Windows features of validating a signature are used. On Solaris and Linux systems, files that are supplied by Thunderbird, Mozilla or Firefox are used. You must ensure that the files that are in use within your system are really the original files that were supplied by the original developers. For malevolent intruders, there are numerous ways to replace original files with other files that they supply. + The messages about validation of a signature that you see in %PRODUCTNAME are the messages that the validation files return. The %PRODUCTNAME software has no way to ensure that the messages reflect the true status of any certificate. The %PRODUCTNAME software only displays the messages that other files that are not under control of %PRODUCTNAME report. There is no legal responsibility of %PRODUCTNAME that the displayed messages reflect the true status of a digital signature. +
+ + English Wiki page on digital signatures + + Opening a document using WebDAV over HTTPS +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ae690d7d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Opening a Document Using WebDAV over HTTPS +/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp + + + + + + +opening;documents on WebDAV server +WebDAV over HTTPS +digital signatures;WebDAV over HTTPS + + mw added 3 index entries + Opening a Document Using WebDAV over HTTPS + + MW created this file by splitting shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp + In %PRODUCTNAME, you can open and save documents that are stored on a WebDAV server, using the secure HTTPS protocol. + You must use the %PRODUCTNAME file dialogs to use WebDAV over HTTPS. + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Ensure that Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs is enabled. Click OK to close the dialog box. + + + Choose File - Open. + + + In the File name box, enter the path to the WebDAV folder. For example, enter https://192.168.1.1/webfolder to open a secure connection to the WebDAV server at the IP address 192.168.1.1, and to list the contents of the webfolder folder. + + + The first time you connect to a WebDAV server, you see the "Website Certified by an Unknown Authority" dialog. + You should click the Examine Certificate button and examine the certificate. + If you accept the certificate, choose "Accept this certificate temporarily for this session" and click OK. Now you can open and save files from the WebDAV server without further questions, until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. + If you do not trust the certificate, click Cancel. + + + If you did accept the certificate, you can now select the file name or file names you want to open and click Open. + + + If there is a mismatch of the domain name given in the certificate and the domain name you entered in the file dialog, then you see a dialog that allows you to choose from any of the following options: + + + View Certificate - Opens the View Certificate dialog. + + + Continue - If you are sure both domains are the same, click the Continue button. + Cancel Connection - Cancels the connection. + If you click Continue, you may see a dialog that asks you to enter your user name and password. + user name + + + Enter your user name to log on to the WebDAV server. + password + + + Enter your password. + remember password till end of session + + + If you enable Remember password till end of session, your password will be remembered for subsequent WebDAV connections until you exit %PRODUCTNAME. +
+ + English Wiki page on digital signatures + About digital signatures + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..998faee4f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Applying Digital Signatures + /text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp + + + +signing documents with digital signatures + digital signatures;getting/managing/applying +mw transferred one entry from digital_signatures.xhp and added a new entry +

Applying Digital Signatures +

MW created this file by splitting shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp +

Getting a Certificate

+You can get a certificate from a certification authority. No matter if you choose a governmental institution or a private company it is common to be charged for this service, for example when they certify your identity. Few other authorities issue certificates free of costs, like the Open Source Project CAcert which is based on the well-known and reliable Web of Trust model and is of growing popularity. +

Managing your Certificates

+ + + If you are using Linux, macOS or Solaris, you must install a recent version of Thunderbird or Firefox. %PRODUCTNAME will then access their certificate storage. + If you have created different profiles in Thunderbird or Firefox and you want to use certificates from one specific user profile, select the profile in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Security - Certificate Path. Alternatively, you can set the environment variable MOZILLA_CERTIFICATE_FOLDER to point to the folder containing that profile. + + + Open your web browser’s preferences, select the Advanced section, click on the Certificates tab, and then choose View Certificates. The Certificate Manager dialog will appear. + + + Import your new root certificate, then select and edit the certificate. Enable the root certificate to be trusted at least for web and email access. This ensures that the certificate can sign your documents. You may edit any intermediate certificate in the same way, but it is not mandatory for signing documents. + + + When you have edited the new certificates, restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + + + + On Windows systems, %PRODUCTNAME will access the system certificate storage. + Your private key for the digital signature will usually be generated and securely stored by Windows as part of the signature-issuance process. Once the issuing Certificate Authority is satisfied that your computer produced the private key and you have satisfied any other identification requirements, the corresponding public key is signed by the Certificate Authority. For personal keys obtained over the Internet, the private key is generated by your browser and it is not shared with the Certificate Authority. + If a private key is received by other means or you transfer it from another computer, you can install it on your Windows PC by double-clicking on the private key certificate and providing any required password. This private key may be known to others (such as an organizational or governmental security administration) depending on how it was issued to you. + Public keys of other people used to verify document digital signatures, or encrypt documents for their eyes only, are usually stored in your system with digital certificate-management applications. In some cases you will need to manage those public-key certificates yourself. + The general management of public and private keys on your PC will vary depending on the version of Windows you are operating. For more information, use the "Help and Support" topic of your Windows version and search for "digital signature". + + +

Signing a document

+ + + Choose File - Digital Signatures - Digital Signatures. + + + A message box advises you to save the document. Click Yes to save the file. + + + After saving, you see the Digital Signatures dialog. Click Add to add a public key to the document. + + + In the Select Certificate dialog, select your certificate and click OK. + + + You see again the Digital Signatures dialog, where you can add more certificates if you want. Click OK to add the public key to the saved file. + + + A signed document shows an icon +Icon in the status bar. You can double-click the icon in the status bar to view the certificate. + The result of the signature validation is displayed in the status bar and within the Digital Signature dialog. Several documents and macro signatures can exist inside an ODF document. If there is a problem with one signature, then the validation result of that one signature is assumed for all signatures. That is, if there are ten valid signatures and one invalid signature, then the status bar and the status field in the dialog will flag the signature as invalid. +

Signing the macros inside a document

+ Normally, macros are part of a document. If you sign a document, the macros inside the document are signed automatically. If you want to sign only the macros, but not the document, proceed as follows: + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Digital Signature. + + + Apply the signature as described above for documents. + + + When you open the Basic IDE that contains signed macros, you see an icon +Icon in the status bar.
You can double-click the icon in the status bar to view the certificate.WebDAV see issue 32935main dialog IDs are here to lead the user initially to this help pageExamine certificate button + +Click to open the View Certificate dialog.Accept this certificate temporarily for this session radio button + +Choose this setting to accept the certificate until you exit %PRODUCTNAME.Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site radio button + +Choose this setting to cancel the connection. +
+ English Wiki page on digital signatures + About digital signatures +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b00429e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Saving Documents Automatically +/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+documents; saving automatically +saving;documents, automatically +automatic saving +backups;automatic +files; saving automatically +text documents; saving automatically +spreadsheets; saving automatically +drawings; saving automatically +presentations; saving automatically + + +Saving Documents Automatically + +To create a backup file every time you save a document + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +Mark Always create backup copy. + + +If the Always create backup copy option is selected, the old version of the file is saved to the backup directory whenever you save the current version of the file. + + +You can change the backup directory by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, then change the Backups path in the dialog. + + +The backup copy has the same name as the document, but the extension is .BAK. If the backup folder already contains such a file, it will be overwritten without warning. + + +To save recovery information automatically every n minutes + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and select the time interval. + + +This command saves the information necessary to restore the current document in case of a crash. Additionally, in case of a crash %PRODUCTNAME tries automatically to save AutoRecovery information for all open documents, if possible. +
+
+ + +Save As +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General +Error Report Tool +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7161b37ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Opening Documents + /text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp + + + + + + + opening; documents + documents; opening + files; opening + loading; documents + spreadsheets;creating/opening + presentations;creating/opening + new documents + empty documents + text documents;creating/opening + drawings; creating/opening + HTML documents; new + formulas; new + + mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw made one entry out of two for "spreadsheets;", "presentations;" and "text (documents);" + + Opening Documents + + Opening an existing document + + Do one of the following: + + + Choose File – Open + + + Choose File – Open Remote + + + Do a long click in the Open icon on the standard toolbar and select Open Remote File in the bottom of the list. + + + Select the file you want to open and click Open. + + Restrict Files to Display + To restrict the display of files in the Open dialog to a certain type select the corresponding File type from the list. Select All Files to display all files. + + Cursor Position + In general, all documents open with the cursor at the start of the document. + One exception appears when the author of a Writer text document saves and reopens a document: The cursor will be at the same position where it has been when the document was saved. This only works when the name of the author was entered in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data. + + Press Shift+F5 to set the cursor to the last saved position. + + Opening an Empty Document + Click the New icon on the Standard bar or choose File - New. This opens a document of the document type specified. + If you click the arrow next to the New icon, a submenu opens in which you can select another document type. + +
+ + File - Open + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..30c0a6cdd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Saving Documents +/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp + + + +documents; saving +saving; documents +backups; documents +files; saving +text documents; saving +spreadsheets; saving +drawings; saving +presentations; saving +FTP; saving documents +mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw changed "text;" to "text documents;"Saving Documents + + + +Click the Save icon or press the shortcut keys CommandCtrl+S. + + + + + + +This icon is for tips on how to use the program more effectively. + + +The document is saved under its path and name on the current local data medium or network drive or on the Internet, overwriting any file of the same name. + + +
+When you save a new file for the first time, the Save As dialog opens, in which you can enter a name, folder and drive or volume for the file. To open this dialog, choose File - Save As. +You can set the automatic creation of a backup copy under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Automatic extension to the file name +When saving a file, %PRODUCTNAME always appends an extension to the file name, except when the file name already has an extension that matches the file type. See the list of ODF extensions. +Some examples for the automatic extensions are listed in the following table: + + + +You enter this file name + + +You select this file type + + +File is saved with this name + + + + +my file + + +ODF Text + + +my file.odt + + + + +my file.odt + + +ODF Text + + +my file.odt + + + + +my file.txt + + +ODF Text + + +my file.txt.odt + + + + +my file.txt + + +Text (.txt) + + +my file.txt + + +
+
+ + + +Save As + +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..edc25b968 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + +Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +drag and drop;overview +mouse; pointers when using drag and drop +links;by drag and drop +copying;by drag and drop + + +Dragging and Dropping Within a $[officename] Document + +There are many options for moving or copying objects using drag-and-drop. Text sections, drawing objects, graphics, form controls, hyperlinks, cell ranges, and many more can be moved or copied with the mouse. +Note that the mouse pointer displays a plus sign when copying and an arrow when creating a link or hyperlink. + + + +Mouse Pointer + + +Description + + + + + +Mouse pointer moving data + + + +Moving + + + + + +Mouse pointer copying data + + + +Copying + + + + + +Mouse pointer inserting link + + + +Creating a link + + +
+ +If you press CommandCtrl or Shift+CommandCtrl while releasing the mouse button, you can control whether the object is copied, moved, or a link is created. + + + + +Icon + + + +If you drag objects out of the Navigator, you can specify in the submenu of the Navigator's Drag Mode icon whether to copy the object, insert it as a link or insert it as a hyperlink. + + +
+ +You can cancel a drag-and-drop operation in $[officename] at any time by pressing the Esc key before releasing the mouse button. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2ef53609 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Drag-and-Drop With the Data Source View +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_beamer.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +drag and drop; data source view +data source view; drag and drop +copying;from data source view +pasting;from data source view +mw added "pasting;" +Drag-and-Drop With the Data Source View + +A fast way of copying from a data source into a text or spreadsheet document, or of creating forms based on a data source, is by drag-and-drop. + + + + +Mouse pointer copying data + + + +Copying with Drag-and-Drop + + +
+ +If you want to reverse a drag-and-drop, position the cursor in your document and choose Edit - Undo. +It is also possible to copy by drag-and-drop from a document into a data source: +A text table or the selected range of a spreadsheet can be dragged using drag-and-drop to a table container in the data source explorer. +Plain text can be copied using drag-and-drop from one document to a data field in the data source view. +Using data in a text document +You can insert a database field in a text document by dragging a field name from the column header of the data source view into the document. This is especially useful when designing form letters. Simply drag the desired fields - home address, form of address, and so on - into your document. +To insert a complete record, select the corresponding header and drag it into the document. When you release the mouse button, the Insert database columns dialog appears, in which you can decide whether to use all database fields, and whether to copy the data into the document as text, a table or fields. All currently selected records will be inserted. +Applying data to a table document +You can insert one or more records into the current sheet of a spreadsheet by selecting the rows in the data source view and dragging and dropping them into the spreadsheet. The data is inserted at the place where you release the mouse button. +Inserting controls in a text form +When you create a text form linked to a database, you can generate controls by drag-and-drop from the data source view. +When you drag a database column into the text document, you insert a field. If you hold down Shift+CommandCtrl while dragging, a text field is inserted, grouped with an appropriate label field. The text field already contains all the database information that you need for the form. + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..60b2828d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Copying Graphics From the Gallery +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_fromgallery.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Gallery;dragging pictures to draw objects +draw objects;dropping Gallery pictures +drag and drop;from Gallery to draw objects +mw deleted "Gallery;copying..." and copied "copying;..." to Shared guide gallery_insert.xhp. +Copying Graphics From the Gallery + +If you drag a graphic from the Gallery into a text, spreadsheet or presentation document, the graphic will be inserted there. +
+
+If you release the graphic directly on a draw object, please note the following: + + +If you move the graphic (drag it without pressing any key, in which case no additional symbol appears next to the mouse pointer), only the attributes are copied from the graphic and applied to the draw object on which you release the mouse button. + + +If you copy the graphic (drag it while holding down the CommandCtrl key, in which case a plus sign appears next to the mouse pointer), the graphic will be inserted as an object. + + +If you create a hyperlink (drag while holding down Shift and CommandCtrl, in which case a linking arrow appears next to the mouse pointer), the drawing object is replaced by the graphic from the Gallery, but the position and size of the replaced draw object are retained. + + +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e0eba5bee --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Adding Graphics to the Gallery +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_gallery.xhp + + + + + + +drag and drop;to Gallery +copying;to Gallery +Gallery; adding pictures +pictures;adding to Gallery +inserting;pictures in Gallery +pasting;to Gallery + + mw changed "adding;" to "inserting;" + Adding Graphics to the Gallery + + You can place a graphic from a document such as an HTML page in the Gallery by drag-and-drop. + + + Display the Gallery theme to which you want to add the graphic. + + + Position the mouse pointer above the graphic, without clicking. + + + If the mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol, the graphic refers to a hyperlink. In this case, click the graphic while pressing the OptionAlt key to select it without executing the respective link. + If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol, you can simply click the graphic to select it. + + + Once the graphic is selected, release the mouse button. Click again on the graphic image, keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds. The graphic image is copied to the internal memory. + + + Without releasing the mouse button, drag the graphic into the Gallery. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ca3136cae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Copying Graphics Between Documents +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_graphic.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +drag and drop; pictures +pictures; drag and drop between documents +copying;pictures, between documents +pasting;pictures from other documents +mw added "pasting;" +Copying Graphics Between Documents + +You can copy a graphic from one document to another by drag-and-drop. If you plan to publish your document, please observe copyright laws and obtain the consent of the authors. + + +Open the document in which you want to insert the graphic object. + + +Open the document from which you want to copy the graphic. + + +Click the graphic while pressing the OptionAlt key, to select it without executing any hyperlinks it may refer to. + + +Keep the mouse button pressed and wait a moment while the object is copied to an internal memory. + + +Drag the graphic into the other document. If the documents are not visible side by side, first move the mouse pointer to the button of the target document while keeping the mouse button pressed. The document in question is then displayed and you can move the mouse pointer into the document. + + + +Release the mouse button as soon as the gray text cursor indicates the position where you want to insert a copy of the picture. + + +If the graphic is connected with a hyperlink, the hyperlink and not the graphic is inserted. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b6375d6d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copying Spreadsheet Areas to Text Documents +/text/shared/guide/dragdrop_table.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +spreadsheets; copying areas to text documents +copying; sheet areas, to text documents +pasting;sheet areas in text documents +mw added "pasting;" +

Copying Spreadsheet Areas to Text Documents

+ + +Open both the text document and the spreadsheet. + + +Select the sheet area you want to copy. + + +Point to the selected area and press the mouse button. Keep the mouse button pressed for a moment, then drag the area into the text document. +If the documents are not visible next to each other, first drag the mouse pointer to the destination document button. Continue to hold down the mouse button. The document is displayed, and you can move the mouse pointer within the document. + + + +Once the cursor is located in the place where you want to insert the sheet area, release the mouse button. The sheet area is inserted as an OLE object. + + +You can select and edit the OLE object at any time. + + +To edit the OLE object, double-click on it. +Alternatively, select the object and choose Edit - OLE Object - Edit or choose Edit from the context menu. You edit the object in its own frame within the text document, but you see the icons and menu commands needed for spreadsheets. + + +Choose Open to open the source document of the OLE object. + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..71c649e01 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Adding Buttons to Toolbars +/text/shared/guide/edit_symbolbar.xhp + + + +customizing; toolbars +buttons;toolbars +toolbars;adding buttons +configuring; toolbars +editing; toolbars +inserting;buttons in toolbars + + + +

Adding Buttons to Toolbars

+
+

To make a button visible on a toolbar

+Open the context menu of the toolbar (right click) and choose Visible Buttons and then select the button you want to display. +
+Opens a dialog where you can add, edit, and remove icons. +

To add a button to a toolbar

+ + +Choose Tools - Customize, and click on the Toolbars tab. + + +In the Target box, select the toolbar you want to change. + + +Select the command to be added in the Available Commands box. (Use the Category and/or Search boxes to restrict possibilities.) + + +Click the Right Arrow icon to add the selected command. + + +The check box in the Assigned Commands list controls whether the command is visible on the toolbar. + + +You can rearrange the Assigned Commands list by selecting a command name and clicking Move Up and Move Down. + + +Click OK. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3c7907f49 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Sending Documents as Email +/text/shared/guide/email.xhp + + + +
+documents; sending as email +sending; documents as email +email attachments +files; sending as email +text documents;sending as email +spreadsheets; sending as email +drawings; sending as email +presentations; sending as email +attachments in emails + +Sending Documents as Email +Working in $[officename], you can send the current document as an email attachment. + + +Choose File - Send - Email Document. +$[officename] opens your default email program. If you want to send the current document with another email program, you can select the program to use with Internet - Email in the Options dialog box. + + +In your email program, enter the recipient, subject and any text you want to add, then send the email. + + +In case you want to send the email to a recipient who only has software that cannot read the OpenDocument format, you can send the current document in an often used proprietary format.
For a text document, choose File - Send - Email as Microsoft Word. For a spreadsheet, choose File - Send - Email as Microsoft Excel. And for a presentation, choose File - Send - Email as Microsoft PowerPoint.
If you want to send the document as a read-only file, choose File - Send - Email as PDF.
These commands do not change your current document. Only a temporary copy is created and sent. +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6574a0d13 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + Crash Report Tool + /text/shared/guide/error_report.xhp + + + + + + + Crash Report Tool + reports;crash reports + crash reports + activating;Crash Report Tool + + +

Crash Report Tool

+The Crash Report Tool starts automatically after a program crash occurs. +The Crash Report Tool gathers necessary information that can help the program developers to improve the code, so that in later versions this error can possibly be avoided. Please help us to improve the software and send the generated crash report. + +

Starting the Crash Report Tool

+With most program crashes the Crash Report Tool will start automatically. + +

Sending the Crash Report

+Select the checkbox if you want to restart %PRODUCTNAME in safe mode. Then click the Send Crash Report button. +If a crash report is sent successfully, then a dialog box will provide a URL for the report. To see the report, copy the URL and paste into a webbrowser. + +You will not get an answer to your crash report. If you need support, please visit Community Assistance for an overview of different possibilities. + +

What Data are Sent?

+The crash report sends information about the error type that caused the crash and the process memory contents at the time of the crash. The memory contents include: a list of loaded libraries and their version number; a list of the current threads with the contents of their stack memory and processor register states. The memory trace is gathered locally by standard system tools: dbghelp.dll on Windows systems; clone(), ptrace() and /proc directory on Linux systems; Apple's Crash Reporter on Mac systems. + +Information is also sent about the %PRODUCTNAME version, the operating system name and version, and the computing hardware (CPU type and features; total RAM memory size; graphics device and driver). + +The crash report is anonymous. No identification information is sent and no document content is sent. The report data are sent as a multipart HTTP POST request. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1474a5751 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Saving Documents in Other Formats +/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp + + + +
+documents; saving in other formats +saving; documents in other formats +files; saving in other formats +text documents;saving in other formats +spreadsheets; saving in other formats +drawings; saving in other formats +presentations; saving in other formats +exporting; to Microsoft Office formats +Word documents; saving as +Excel; saving as +PowerPoint export +mw made "PowerPoint;..." a one level entry +Saving Documents in Other Formats + + + +Choose File - Save as. You will see the Save as dialog. + + +In the Save as type or File type list box, select the desired format. + + +Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. + + +If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format area. +
+ + +Save As + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..768bdeeff --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sending Faxes and Configuring $[officename] for Faxing +/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +faxes; sending +faxes;configuring $[officename] +sending; documents as faxes +configuring;fax icon + +Sending Faxes and Configuring $[officename] for Faxing + +To send a fax directly from $[officename], you need a fax modem and a fax driver that allows applications to communicate with the fax modem. +Sending a Fax Through the Print Dialog + + +Open the Print dialog by choosing File - Print and select the fax driver in the Name list box. + + +Clicking OK opens the dialog for your fax driver, where you can select the fax recipient. + + +Configuring $[officename] a Fax Icon +You can configure $[officename] so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax: + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + + +Select the fax driver from the Fax list box and click OK. + + +Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard bar. In the drop-down menu, choose Customize. +The Toolbars tab page of the Customize dialog appears. + + +Click Add Commands. + + +Select the "Documents" category, then select the "Send Default Fax" command. + + +Click Add and then Close. + + +On the Toolbars tab page, click the down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it. Click OK. +Your Standard bar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af587350d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using the Filter Navigator +/text/shared/guide/filternavigator.xhp + + +UFI: Filter navigator from Filter bar in Forms documents + + + +filters; Navigator +filter conditions;connecting + +Using the Filter Navigator + + +To connect several filter conditions with Boolean OR, click the Filter navigation icon on the filter bar. The Filter navigator window appears. + +The filter conditions that have been set appear in the Filter navigator. As soon as a filter is set, you see a blank filter entry at the bottom of the Filter navigator . You can select this entry by clicking the word "Or". Once you have selected the blank filter entry, you can enter additional filter conditions in the form. These conditions are linked by Boolean OR to the previously defined conditions. +The context menu can be called for each entry in the Filter navigator. You can edit the filter conditions in this area directly as text. If you wish to check if a field has content or no content, you can select the filter conditions "empty" (SQL:"Is Null") or "not empty" (SQL: "Is not Null"). It is also possible to delete the entry by using the context menu. +You can move filter conditions in the Filter navigator by dragging and dropping, or use the keys CommandCtrl+Alt+Up Arrow or CommandCtrl+Alt+Down Arrow. To copy filter conditions, drag them while holding down the CommandCtrl key. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..51b640cc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + +Searching for Attributes +/text/shared/guide/find_attributes.xhp + + +UFI: Attributes dialog of Find and Replace dialog + + + + +fonts;finding +font attributes;finding +text attributes;finding +attributes; finding +Find & Replace;attributes +finding; attributes +resetting;Find & Replace mode + +

Searching for Attributes +

+Searching for attributes is available in the Find & Replace dialog for text documents. +You can search for text with attributes that are applied either by direct formatting or by styles. For example, if you search for the Font attribute, all instances of text that do not use the default font are found. All text that has a directly coded font attribute, and all text where a style switches the font attribute, are found. +If you want to find text with any font by name, click the Format button in the Find & Replace dialog of %PRODUCTNAME Writer. +After you select the attributes that you want to search for, the Paragraph Styles box in the Other options area of the %PRODUCTNAME Writer Find & Replace dialog changes to Including Styles. +If you want to search for text in which attributes were set by using direct formatting and styles, select the Including Styles box. +The search criteria for attributes are listed below the Find box. +

To search for all font changes

+ + +Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + + +Clear the Find text box if necessary. + + +Click Attributes. + + +In the Attributes dialog, select the Font check box, and click OK. +In the Find & Replace dialog, you now can read "Font" below the Find text box. + + +Click Find Next. + + +All places where a font change was applied, either directly or by assigning an appropriate style, are found. +

To reset the Find & Replace mode

+To stop searching for the current attributes, reset the Find & Replace dialog to normal mode. + + +Click No Format. + + +
+Find & Replace dialog +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef4eaeca4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Changing Icon Views +/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +buttons; big/small +views; icons +icon sizes +changing;icon sizes +large icons +small icons + +Changing Icon Size + +You can change the icon view between small and large icons. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename]. + + +On the View tab page, select the Toolbar icon size. + + +Click OK. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a4dfb82f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Using Toolbars + /text/shared/guide/floating_toolbar.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + toolbars;docking/undocking + toolbars;viewing/closing + toolbars;locking/unlocking + closing;toolbars + docking;toolbars + fixing toolbars + detaching toolbars + placing toolbars + positioning;toolbars + moving;toolbars + attaching toolbars + floating toolbars + windows;docking + viewing;toolbars + showing;toolbars + icon bars, see toolbars + button bars, see toolbars + + +

Using Toolbars

+Toolbars in %PRODUCTNAME can be either docked as part of the main window, or floating as a separate window. By default, the visible toolbars and the ones you open with View – Toolbars are docked, and their positions are locked. +Some toolbar icons, for example the Font Color icon, can open another toolbar. Click the arrow next to the icon to open a toolbar containing further icons. +You now have a choice: either click the icon that you want to activate, or seize the toolbar by its title bar and drag it while holding down the mouse button. + +

Context of Toolbars

+Some toolbars open automatically depending on the context. For example, when you click inside a table in a text document, the Table toolbar opens. When you click inside a numbered paragraph, the Bullets and Numbering toolbar opens. +Toolbars are hidden by default when the Notebook bar is active. + +

To Close a Toolbar Temporarily

+Click the icon in the toolbar's title bar, or choose Close Toolbar from the context menu. The toolbar will be shown automatically again when the context becomes active again. + +

To Close a Toolbar Permanently

+While the toolbar is visible, choose View – Toolbars and click the name of the toolbar to remove the check mark. + +

To Show a Closed Toolbar

+ + + + Choose View – Toolbars and click the name of the toolbar. + + + Choose View – Toolbars – Reset to reset the toolbars to their default context sensitive behavior. Now some toolbars will be shown automatically, dependent on the context. + + +

To Unlock a Docked Toolbar

+Right-click the toolbar and choose Lock Toolbar Position from the context menu so that it is unchecked. A small vertical handle appears at the start of an unlocked toolbar, which you can use to move the toolbar. + +

To Lock a Docked Toolbar

+You can lock the position of a toolbar by choosing Lock Toolbar Position again from the context menu, so that it is checked. + +

To Make a Toolbar a Floating Toolbar

+Click the toolbar handle and drag the toolbar into the document. + +

To Reattach a Floating Toolbar

+ + + + Drag the title bar of the toolbar to an edge of the document window. + + + To reattach a floating window, drag-and-drop the window's title bar to an edge of the document window. The mouse pointer should be very close to the document window's edge when you release the mouse button. + + + Depending on your system's window manager settings, you may also double-click an empty place on the toolbar or window, while holding down the Command +Ctrl key. Or double-click the title bar of the floating toolbar or window. + + +
+Docking toolbars and windows by drag-and-drop depends on your system's window manager settings. You must enable your system to show the full window contents when you move a window, instead of showing just the outer frame. +
+
+ +
+ +Notebook bar +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..70fe8f9ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fontwork For Graphical Text Art + /text/shared/guide/fontwork.xhp + + + +graphical text art + designing; fonts + TextArt, see Fontwork + WordArt, see Fontwork + Fontwork + text effects + effects; Fontwork icons + text; Fontwork icons + 3D text creation + rotating;3D text + editing;Fontwork objects + inserting;Fontwork objects + + + +Fontwork For Graphical Text Art + +You can use Fontwork to create graphical text art objects. + To create a Fontwork object + + + If you don't see the Drawing toolbar or the Fontwork toolbar, choose View - Toolbars to enable the toolbar. + + + On the Drawing toolbar or on the Fontwork toolbar, click the Fontwork Gallery icon. +Icon + + + + + +Select a Fontwork style and click OK to insert the Fontwork into your document. Double-click or CommandCtrl+double-click the Fontwork in your document to enter text edit mode and change the text. + + In the Fontwork Gallery dialog, select a Fontwork style and click OK. + The Fontwork object is inserted into your document. Fontwork objects are Custom Shapes. Using the 3D Settings toolbar, you can switch the view at any time from 2D to 3D and back. + + + Double-click the object to enter text edit mode. + + + Replace the default Fontwork text with your own text. + + + Press Esc to exit text edit mode. + + + To edit a Fontwork object + + + Click the Fontwork object. If the Fontwork object is inserted in the background, hold down the CommandCtrl key while you click. + The Fontwork toolbar is displayed. If you do not see the Fontwork toolbar, choose View - Toolbars - Fontwork. + + + Click an icon in the Fontwork toolbar. + The following icons are available: + + + + + Fontwork Gallery - adds another Fontwork object + + + Fontwork Shape - edits the shape + + + Fontwork Same Letter Heights - changes the height of characters + + + Fontwork Alignment - aligns the text + + + Fontwork Character Spacing - changes the character spacing and kerning + + + To edit more Fontwork attributes + + + Click the Fontwork object. If the Fontwork object is inserted in the background, hold down the CommandCtrl key while you click. + + + Select the properties from the Drawing Object Properties toolbar. You can change the line width, line color, fill color, fill style, and more. + + +
+ Fontwork toolbar + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5e249e6cd --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Inserting and Editing Buttons + /text/shared/guide/formfields.xhp + + + +command buttons, see push buttons + controls;adding to documents + inserting;push buttons + keys;adding push buttons + buttons;adding push buttons + press buttons, see push buttons + push buttons;adding to documents +MW changed "adding;" to "inserting;" +Adding a Command Button to a Document + + You can use the Form Controls toolbar to add checkboxes, buttons, tables showing data records, and other controls to a document. + To Add a Button to a Document + + + Choose View - Toolbars - Form Controls. + + + + + + + Push Button Icon + + + + On the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon. + + +
+ The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair. + + + In the document, drag to draw the button. + + + Right-click the button and choose Control Properties. + + + Specify the properties of the button. + + + To change the button label, click the General tab, and edit the text in the Label box. + + + To attach a macro to the button, click the Events tab, and click the ... button beside the button action that you want to run the macro. In the Assign Macro dialog, locate the macro that you want to use, and then click OK.UFI: see #i34509# + + + Close the Properties dialog. + + + (Optional) Specify the properties of the form that the button belongs to. + + + Right-click the button and choose Form Properties. + + + The Form Properties dialog opens. + + + Specify the properties for the form and then close the dialog. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aaa8cebb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Objects From the Gallery +/text/shared/guide/gallery_insert.xhp + + + + + + +Gallery; inserting pictures from +pictures; inserting from Gallery +objects; inserting from Gallery +patterns for objects +textures;inserting from Gallery +backgrounds;inserting from Gallery +inserting;objects from Gallery +copying;from Gallery + + mw deleted "adding;" + Inserting Objects From the Gallery + + You can insert an object in a document either as a copy or as a link. A copy of an object is independent of the original object. Changes to the original object have no effect on the copy. A link remains dependent on the original object. Changes to the original object are also reflected in the link. + Inserting an object as a copy + + + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + + + Select a theme. + + + Select an object using a single click. + + + Drag the object into the document, or right-click to open the context menu and select Insert and Copy. + + + Inserting an object as a link + + + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by choosing Insert - Media - Gallery. + + + Select a theme. + + + Select an object by a single click. + + + Drag the object into the document while pressing the Shift and CommandCtrl keys, or right-click to open the context menu and select Insert and Link. + + + Inserting an object as a background graphic + + + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + + + Select a theme. + + + Select an object by a single click. + + + Open the context menu and choose Insert - Background - Page or Paragraph. + + + Inserting an object as a texture (pattern) for another object + + + Open the Gallery by clicking the Gallery icon on the Standard bar, or by selecting Tools - Gallery. + + + Select a theme. + + + Select an object by a single click. + + + Drag the object on to the other object in the document while pressing CommandCtrl. + + +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..11e48dc55 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Working with Groups +/text/shared/guide/groups.xhp + + + + + + +groups;entering/exiting/ungrouping +frames; selection frames +selecting;objects +exiting;groups +entering groups +ungrouping groups +selection frames +multiple selection +marking, see selecting + + mw copied "frames;" and "selecting;" from shared/02/01140000.xhp; and deleted "selecting;group objects"; added 2 new entries and a see-reference + Working with Groups + + You can combine several graphic objects into a group so that you can use them like a single object. + You can move, transform, resize, distort, or convert all objects in a group together, and you can enter the group any time to change the individual objects. + You can change the properties (line size, fill color, and more) of all objects in a group together, and you can enter the group and change the individual objects. + Groups can also be nested to form groups within other groups. + To group objects + + + Select the objects together that you want to group. Hold down Shift while you click the individual objects. + + + Right-click any of the selected objects to open the context menu. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + + + Choose Group. + To select the objects, you can also drag a selection frame around the objects. + + + For example, you can group all of the objects in a company logo to move and resize the logo as a single object. + After you have grouped objects, selecting any part of the group selects the entire group. + To enter a group + + + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + + + Choose Enter Group. + + + Now you can select and edit a single object in the group. + + + You can add or delete objects to and from a group in this mode. + The objects that are not part of the group are shown with dimmed colors. + To exit a group + + + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + + + Choose Exit Group. + + + To exit a group in Draw or Impress, you can also double-click anywhere outside the group. + To ungroup a group + + + Right-click any object of the group. In Calc or Writer, commands are in a submenu Group, while in Impress or Draw, they are at the toplevel of the context menu. + + + Choose Ungroup. + + + Now you can select and edit all objects as individual objects. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..720d3b0c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Editing Hyperlinks +/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_edit.xhp + + + +hyperlinks; editing +links; editing hyperlinks +editing; hyperlinks +text attributes; hyperlinks +buttons;editing hyperlink buttons +URL;changing hyperlink URLs +MW deleted "changing;" +

Editing Hyperlinks

+When you CommandCtrl-click a hyperlink in a Writer document, your web browser opens with the requested web address. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the hyperlink and open the context menu by Shift+F10, then choose Open Hyperlink. +

Changing the text of a hyperlink

+ +In Writer documents, you can click anywhere into a hyperlink and edit the visible text. +If you leave the hyperlink by positioning the cursor elsewhere, only the visible text changes. +If you leave the hyperlink by entering a space character directly following the last character, the AutoCorrect - if enabled - will change the target URL to be the same as the visible text. +In all document types, you can open the Hyperlink dialog to edit a hyperlink. First set the cursor into the hyperlink or directly in front of the hyperlink, then click the Hyperlink icon on the Standard bar. +

Changing the URL of a hyperlink

+ + +As described above, open Hyperlink Dialog. + + +

Changing the attribute of all hyperlinks

+ + +Open the Styles window. + + +Click the Character Styles icon. + + +Right-click the "Internet Link" or "Visited Internet Link" character style, and choose Modify. + + +In the dialog, select the new attributes, and click OK. + + + +

Editing a hyperlink button

+Hyperlink buttons must be edited in Form design mode. + + + Select menu Form - Design mode or choose View - Toolbars and enable the Form Controls toolbar, click on the Design Mode icon and click on the button. The button handles shows. + + + Open context menu and select Control Properties. + + + Edit the property in the control dialog box. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f243a177a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Hyperlinks +/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_insert.xhp + + + +hyperlinks; inserting +links; inserting +inserting; hyperlinks + +Inserting Hyperlinks + +You can insert hyperlinks in two ways: as text or as a button. In both cases, the visible text can be different from the URL. +Place the text cursor in the document at the point where you want to insert the hyperlink or select the text that you want to put the hyperlink on. Select Hyperlink command from the Insert menu. Alternatively click on the Icon Hyperlink icon on the Standard toolbar. The Hyperlink dialog appears. + + +To jump to a specific line in a text document, first enter a bookmark at that position (Insert - Bookmark). + + +To jump to a cell in a spreadsheet, first enter a name for the cell (Sheet - Named Ranges and Expressions - Define). + + +Hyperlinks can also be inserted by drag-and-drop from the Navigator. Hyperlinks can refer to references, headings, graphics, tables, objects, directories or bookmarks. +If you wish to insert in a text a hyperlink that refers to Table 1, drag the entry Table 1 from the Navigator and drop it in the text. To do this, the Insert as Hyperlink drag mode must be selected in the Navigator. +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..32503d609 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Relative and Absolute Links +/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp + + + +absolute hyperlinks +relative hyperlinks +hyperlinks; relative and absolute +hyperlinks, see also links + +Relative and Absolute Links + +When you include hyperlinks, two factors must be taken into account: whether they are set as relative or absolute on saving, and whether or not the file is present. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and specify in the Save URLs relative to field if $[officename] creates relative or absolute hyperlinks. Relative linking is only possible when the document you are working on and the link destination are on the same drive. + + +You should create the same directory structure on your hard disk as that which exists in the web space hosted by your Internet provider. Call the root directory for the homepage on your hard disk "homepage", for example. The start file is then "index.html", the full path being "C:\homepage\index.html" (assuming Windows operating system). The URL on your Internet provider's server might then be as follows: "http://www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html". With relative addressing, you indicate the link relative to the location of the output document. For example, if you placed all the graphics for your homepage in a subfolder called "C:\homepage\images", you would need to give the following path to access the graphic "picture.gif": "images\picture.gif". This is the relative path, starting from the location of the file "index.html". On the provider's server, you would place the picture in the folder "mypage/images". When you transfer the document "index.html" to the provider's server through the File - Save As dialog, and if you have marked the option Copy local images to Internet under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, $[officename] will automatically copy the graphic to the correct directory on the server. + + +An absolute path such as "C:\homepage\graphics\picture.gif" would no longer function on the provider server. Neither a server nor the computer of a reader needs to have a C hard drive: operating systems such as Unix or macOS do not recognize drive letters, and even if the folder homepage\graphics existed, your picture would not be available. It is better to use relative addressing for file links. + + +A link to a web page, for example, "www.example.com" or "www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html" is an absolute link. + + +$[officename] also reacts differently, depending on whether the file referred to in the link exists, and where it is located. $[officename] checks every new link and sets a target and protocol automatically. The result can be seen in the generated HTML code after saving the source document. + + +The following rules apply: A relative reference ("graphic/picture.gif") is only possible when both files exist on the same drive. If the files are on different drives in your local file system, the absolute reference follows the "file:" protocol ("file:///data1/xyz/picture.gif"). If the files are on different servers or if the target of the link is not available, the absolute reference uses the "http:" protocol ("http://data2/abc/picture.gif"). + + +Be sure to organize all files for your homepage on the same drive as the start file of the homepage. In this way, $[officename] can set the protocol and target so that the reference on the server is always correct. + + +When you rest your mouse on a hyperlink, a help tip displays the absolute reference, since $[officename] uses absolute path names internally. The complete path and address can only be seen when you view the result of the HTML export, by loading the HTML file as "Text" or opening it with a text editor. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f3f4611c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adding Clickable Hotspots to Images + /text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp + + + +ImageMap; editor + editors; ImageMap editor + images; ImageMap + pictures; ImageMap + hotspots;adding to images + URL;in pictures +mw added 2 index entriesMW made "hotspots" a two level entry +Adding Clickable Hotspots to Images + + An ImageMap allows you to attach URLs to specific areas, called hotspots, on a picture in your document. An image map is a group of one or more hotspots. + You can draw three types of hotspots: rectangles, ellipses, and polygons. When you click a hotspot, the URL is opened in the browser window or frame that you specify. You can also specify the text that appears when your mouse rests on the hotspot. + To add a clickable hotspot to an image + + + Position the cursor where you want the ImageMap in your document. + + + Choose Insert - Image, select and insert a bitmap image. + + + With the image selected, choose Edit - ImageMap in Writer and Calc or Tools - ImageMap in Impress and Draw. You see the ImageMap Editor, which displays the image at the background. + + + Use the icons in the ImageMap Editor to draw a hotspot shape, for example a rectangle, over the image at the background. + You can see an extended help text on the functions of each icon when you enable Extended Help in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. + + + Enter the "Address" URL that will be shown in a Web browser when the user clicks the hotspot. + + + Optionally, enter the "Text" that will be shown as a tip when the user points the mouse to the hotspot. + + + Click the Apply button to apply your changes, and close the ImageMap Editor. + + + Save the document in the %PRODUCTNAME or HTML format. + + + You may save the ImageMap as a file and upload that file to a Web server, for example. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..48056d273 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Opening documents saved in other formats + /text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp + + + +
+Microsoft Office;opening Microsoft documents + documents; importing + importing; documents in other formats + opening; documents from other formats + loading; documents from other formats + converting;Microsoft documents + saving; default file formats + defaults;document formats in file dialogs + file formats; saving always in other formats + Microsoft Office; as default file format + files;importing + XML converters + converters; XML + Document Converter Wizard + wizards; document converter + converters; document converter + files, see also documents +MW inserted cross-reference "files, see also documents"MW changed "defaults;..."ufi added "converters;document converter" +Opening documents saved in other formats + +You can open a document saved in another format by using the following procedure: + + +Choose File - Open. + + +Select a format from the Files of type list. + + +Select a file name and click Open. + + +If you always want the file dialogs to show another format by default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select that format as Default file format. +Converting all documents of a folder +Open the wizard, which guides you through the operation, to copy and convert all documents from Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel or Microsoft PowerPoint into OpenDocument file format documents. You can select a source and target directory, specify whether to convert documents and/or templates, and more besides. + + +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter. + + + + +Opening HTML files in Writer + + + Choose the file type "HTML Document" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. This is the default for HTML documents in %PRODUCTNAME. + All the options of %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web are now available to you, such as Show HTML source. + + + Choose "HTML Document (%PRODUCTNAME Writer)" to open in %PRODUCTNAME Writer. + All the options of %PRODUCTNAME Writer are now available to you. Not all options that %PRODUCTNAME Writer offers for editing of documents can be saved in HTML format. + + + + +
+
+ + + + + Working with VBA code + Setting the default file format + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d40579549 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps +/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp + + + +graphics, see also pictures +images, see also pictures +images; inserting and editing bitmaps +illustrations, see pictures +bitmaps; inserting and editing +pixel graphics; inserting and editing +exporting; bitmaps +importing; bitmaps +pictures; editing +editing; pictures +invert filter +smoothing filter +sharpening filter +remove noise filter +solarization filter +aging filter +posterizing filter +pop-art filter +charcoal sketches filter +mosaic filter +pictures;filters +filters;pictures +mw made "illustrations,..." a see-reference +

Inserting, Editing, Saving Bitmaps Images +

+

Inserting Bitmaps

+A bitmap image can be inserted in $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress documents. + +
+ + +Choose Insert - Image. + + +Select the file. In the File type box you can restrict the selection to certain file types. + + +Select the frame style for the image.Select the anchor type for the image at the current cell position.Check below. + + +Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. +If the Link box is marked, whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded. The editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re-applied and the image is displayed. +If the Link box is not marked, you are always working with the copy created when the graphic was first inserted. +To embed graphics that were first inserted as links, go to Edit - Links and click the Break Link button. + + +Click Open to insert the image. + + +
+

Editing Bitmaps

+

Icons on the Image bar

+When you select the bitmap image, the Image Bar offers you the tools for editing the image. Only a local copy is edited in the document, even if you have inserted an image as a link. +The Image Bar may look slightly different depending to the module you are using. +A number of filters are located on the Image Filter toolbar, which you can open with the icon on the Image Bar. +The original image file will not be changed by the filters. Filters are applied to an image only inside the document. +Some of the filters open a dialog, which you can use to select, for example, the intensity of the filter. Most filters can be applied multiple times to increase the filter effect. +In $[officename] Draw and $[officename] Impress, you can add text and graphics, select these objects together with the bitmap, and export the selection as a new bitmap image. +

The Image dialog

+ + +Right-click the image and choose Image from the submenu to open a properties dialog. + + +Change the properties of the selected image, then click OK. + + +

Saving Bitmaps

+If you want to save in a format such as GIF, JPEG or TIFF, you must select and export the bitmap image. +To export a bitmap in Draw or Impress: + + +Select the bitmap image. You can also select additional objects, such as text, to be exported with the image by pressing the shift key while selecting or by opening a selection frame around all objects. + + +Choose File - Export. The Export dialog opens. +The Export command writes the image with all applied filter effects to a file. The Save Image command in the context menu saves the image without any filter effects, if the image was inserted as a linked image. An embedded image will always be saved or exported with filters applied.see i70055 + + +In the File format field, select the file format you want, for example GIF or JPEG. + + +If you only want to export the selected objects, mark the Selection box. +If Selection is not marked, the entire page of the document is exported. + + +Enter a name for the file and click Export. + + + +To export a bitmap in Writer: Right-click the bitmap, choose Save Graphics. You see the Image Export dialog. Enter a file name and select a file type. +
+ + + +Image Filter Bar from the Image Bar + + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5953a3966 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing Graphic Objects + /text/shared/guide/insert_graphic_drawit.xhp + + + +resizing, see also scaling/zooming + scaling, see also zooming + drawings, see also draw objects + graphic objects, see draw objects + text; drawing pictures + inserting; drawings + pictures; drawing + objects; copying when moving in presentations + draw objects; adding/editing/copying + circle drawings + square drawings + handles; scaling + scaling; objects + objects;moving and resizing with mouse + resizing;objects, by mouse + copying; draw objects + pasting;draw objects + editing;draw objects + pictures;scaling/resizing +MW added "graphic objects, see also..." +Editing Graphic Objects + + Choose View - Toolbars - Drawing to open the Drawing toolbar, if it is not already open. + Drawing objects can be subsequently edited and modified. Drawing objects created in this way are vector graphics, which you can scale freely without any loss of quality. + To create a rectangle, click the rectangle icon and move your cursor to the place in the document where you want one corner of the rectangle to be. Press the mouse button and hold it down while dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle. When you release the mouse button, the rectangle is inserted in the document. It is selected, and you can edit its properties through the context menu. + + + To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. +To draw multiple objects of the same type, double-click the icon. +Draw multiple objects of the same type. Click the document without moving the mouse to stop drawing objects. + + + If you want to open up draw objects from the center instead of dragging from one corner to the other, hold down the Option +Alt key while dragging. With some window managers, you may need to hold down also the meta key. + + + + Holding down the Shift key while dragging restricts the created object. For example, instead of a rectangle you get a square, instead of an ellipse you get a circle. When you drag a handle of an existing object with Shift held down, the aspect ratio of the object is retained. + + + To scale the objects, first select them by clicking on them with the selection tool. You then see eight handles around the object. When you drag one of the four corner handles, the opposite corner remains fixed while the other three corners move. When you drag one of the side handles, the opposite side remains fixed. + + + To scale a draw object using the keyboard, first select the object, then press Command +Ctrl+Tab repeatedly to highlight one of the handles. Then press an arrow key. To scale in smaller steps, hold down the Option +Alt key while pressing an arrow key. Press Esc to leave the point edit mode. + + + To move draw objects, first select them. To select more than one object, press the Shift key while clicking. Select text objects by clicking exactly on their edge. While holding down the mouse button, drag the objects to the new location. + + + To move a draw object using the keyboard, first select the object, then press an arrow key. To move in smaller steps, hold down the Option +Alt key while pressing an arrow key. + + + To enter text to be a part of a graphics object, select the object and start typing your text. Click outside the object to end entering text. Double-click text inside an object to edit the text. + + + To revert to normal mode after creating and editing draw objects, click in an area of the document containing no objects. If you see a drawing cursor, first exit this mode by clicking the Select icon. +
+ Information about the individual icons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..59d385b4c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Inserting Special Characters +/text/shared/guide/insert_specialchar.xhp + + + +characters; special +inserting; special characters +special characters +text; inserting special characters +accents +compose key to insert special characters + +Inserting Special Characters + +This function allows you to insert special characters, such as check marks, boxes, and telephone symbols, into your text. + + +To view a repertoire of all characters, choose Insert - Special Character. + + +In the large selection field double-click on the desired character, which is inserted in the current document. + + +In any text input field (such as the input fields in the Find & Replace dialog) you can press Shift+CommandCtrl+S to open the Special Characters dialog. + + +At present there are three ways of entering letters with accents directly from the keyboard. + +Solaris: Using a Sun keyboard. First press the Compose key to the right of the space bar, then enter the first and second modifiers. + +Linux / NetBSD: Using the dead-keys. In an xterm window first press the (´) or (`) key. The character should not appear on the screen. Now press a letter, such as "e". The e is given an accent, é or è. If not, then check in the XF86Config file if a "nodeadkeys" XkbdVariant has been loaded there and replace it. You may also have set the environment variable SAL_NO_DEADKEYS, which deactivates the dead-keys. + +All Unix systems: (Alt Graph) as additional compose key. The (Alt Graph) key can work in $[officename] like the Compose key, if you set the environment variable SAL_ALTGR_COMPOSE. The (Alt Graph) key must trigger a mode_switch, so, for example, xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_R = Mode_switch" must be set. First press (Alt Graph), then the first modifier, then the second modifier. The characters are combined as described on a Solaris system in the file /usr/openwin/include/X11/Suncompose.h. + + +Special Characters +AutoCorrect + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5a709a6c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Integrating new UNO components +/text/shared/guide/integratinguno.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +add-ons, see UNO components +UNO components;integrating new +installing;UNO components + +Integrating new UNO components + +Programmers can write and integrate their own UNO (Universal Network Objects) components to $[officename]. Those new components can be added to the $[officename] menus and toolbars; we call them "Add-Ons". +The integration of new components is supported by some tools and services. Details can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. The three main steps are as follows: + + +Register the new components within $[officename]. This can be accomplished using the tool unopkg, which can be found in {installpath}/ +\program. + + +Integrate the new components as services. The ProtocolHandler and JobDispatch services assist you; more information can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + +Change the user interface (menus or toolbars). This can be done almost automatically by writing an XML text file that describes the changes. More information can be found in the $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + +The Add-Ons can extend the functionality of $[officename]. They are not related to the Add-Ins +Add-Ins that provide new functions for $[officename] Calc. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..253aea1aa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,408 @@ + + + + + + + + + Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) + /text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp + + + +accessibility;general shortcuts + shortcut keys; %PRODUCTNAME accessibility + +Shortcuts (%PRODUCTNAME Accessibility) + + You can control %PRODUCTNAME without using a mouse device, using only the keyboard. + On each module's main help page (for example, the %PRODUCTNAME Writer or %PRODUCTNAME Calc main help page) there is a link to access the keyboard shortcuts' help for that module. + In addition, under the keyword "Accessibility" you find step-by-step instructions about how to control the selected module without a mouse device. + + Working with the %PRODUCTNAME user interface without mouse + Activating menu bar, toolbars, windows, and document + Repeatedly pressing F6 switches the focus and circles through the following objects: + + + menu bar, + + + every toolbar from top to bottom and from left to right, + + + every free window from left to right, + + + document + + +Press Shift+F6 to switch through objects in the opposite direction. + Press Command +Ctrl+F6 to switch to the document. + Press F10 to switch to the menu bar and back. + Escape closes an open submenu, a toolbar, or the current free window. + Calling a menu command + Press Option +Alt or F6 or F10 to select the first menu (the File menu). With right arrow, the next menu to the right is selected; with left arrow, the previous menu. + Arrow down opens a selected menu. Any additional arrow down and up arrow move the selection through the menu commands. With right arrow you open any existing submenus. + Press Enter to execute the selected menu command. + Executing an icon command + Press F6 repeatedly until the first icon on the toolbar is selected. Use the right and left arrows to select an icon on a horizontal toolbar. Similarly, use the up and down arrows to select an icon on a vertical toolbar. The Home key selects the first icon on a toolbar and the End key, the last. + Press Enter to execute the selected icon. If the selected icon normally demands a consecutive mouse action, such as inserting a rectangle, then pressing the Enter key is not sufficient: in these cases press Command +Ctrl+Enter. + + + Pressing Command +Ctrl+Enter on an icon for creating a draw object. A draw object will be placed into the middle of the view, with a predefined size. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+Enter on the Selection tool to select the first draw object in the document. If you want to edit, size, or move the selected draw object, first use Command +Ctrl+F6 to set the focus into the document. + + + If a toolbar is longer than can be displayed on screen, it shows an icon at the right or lower edge. Select the toolbar and press PageUp or PageDown to display the remaining icons. + Special hints for toolbars + Press the down arrow or right arrow to open the selected toolbar. This is equivalent to a mouse click. In the toolbar use the right arrow and left arrow keys. The Home and End keys select the first and last icon in the toolbar, respectively. + Close the toolbar with Esc. It is not possible to move the toolbar without a mouse. + Selection from a combo box + + + + +Combo box + + + + Select the combo box. Press Enter. + Use the down arrow or Page Down key to scroll down the combo box entries, or the up arrow or Page Up key to scroll upwards. The Home key takes you to the first entry and the End key takes you to the last entry. + Press Enter to execute the selected entry. + + +
+ + Selection in Tables + In several windows, dialogs, and in the table control field, there are tables to select data, for instance, in the right part of the Data Source View. The following keys are used for selections in these tables: + + + Spacebar: switches from selection of the current row and cancellation of any selection, but not if the current cell is in edit mode. + + + Command +Ctrl+spacebar: switches between selection of the current row and cancellation of this selection. + + + Command +Ctrl+Shift+spacebar: switches between selection of the current column and cancellation of this selection. + + + Option +Alt+Up Arrow or Option +Alt+Down Arrow: moves the window separator between table and form, for instance in the bibliography database. + + + In a table control or in the data source view, the Tab key moves to the next column. To move to the next control, press Command +Ctrl+Tab. To move to the previous control, press Shift+Command +Ctrl+Tab. + + + Size and Position of Windows and Dialogs + + + First press Option +Alt+spacebar. + A system menu opens with menu commands like Move, Resize and Close. + + + Choose a command (down arrow, then Enter). + + + Now you can use the arrow keys to move or resize the dialog or window. + + + Press Enter to accept the change. Press Escape to cancel the changes. + + + Docking and Undocking Windows and Toolbars + + + Press F6 until the window or toolbar is selected. + + + Press Command +Ctrl+Shift+F10. + + + Selecting objects + Press Shift+F4 to select the first object in the current document. When an object is selected, press Tab to select the next object, or press Esc to go back to the text. + Edit Objects + A selected OLE object can be activated with the Enter key. + Edit Position and Size of Objects + + + Use the arrow keys to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + Set the grid resolution unit with %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid in the Resolution area. If you enter a number greater than 1 in the Subdivision area, you must press the arrow key as often as the number states to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + + + Use the Option +Alt and arrow keys to move the selected object by one pixel. + + + Use Command +Ctrl+Tab to enter the handle edit mode. The upper left handle is the active handle, it starts blinking. Use Command +Ctrl+Tab to select the next handle. Press Escape to exit the handle edit mode. + + + In the handle edit mode, the arrow keys move the selected handle, which changes the object size. + + + Edit the Anchors of Objects + You can move the anchor of an object with the arrow keys. First enter the handle edit mode and select the anchor. Depending on the type of anchor, you can then move the anchor in different directions. + + + Select the object. + + + Enter the handle edit mode with Command +Ctrl+Tab. + + + The upper left handle starts blinking. Press Command +Ctrl+Tab several times, until no handle blinks. This signals that now the anchor of the object is activated. In text documents you can press Shift+Command +Ctrl+A to activate the anchor directly. + + + + Use the arrow keys to move the anchor. The object follows the anchor as appropriate. + + + You can change the anchor of the selected object for example in the object's context menu. + + + If the object is anchored To Paragraph, the arrow keys move the object to the previous or next paragraph. + + + If the object is anchored To page, the keys Page Up or Page Down move it to the previous or next page. + + + If the object is anchored To character, the Arrow keys move it through the current paragraph. + + + If the object is anchored As character, no anchor icon exists. You cannot move the object. + + + If the object is anchored To frame, the Arrow keys move it to the next frame in the respective direction. + + + Controlling the Dividing Lines + Documents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc, %PRODUCTNAME Draw, and %PRODUCTNAME Impress can be split horizontally and vertically into separate views. Each view can show other parts of the document. Using the mouse, you can drag a dividing line from the scrollbar into the document. + + + Shift+Command +Ctrl+F6: shows the dividing lines at default positions and focus a line. + + + Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a big step in the arrow direction. + + + Shift+Arrow keys: moves the current dividing line a small step in the arrow direction. + + + Delete: deletes the current dividing line + + + Shift+Delete: deletes both dividing lines + + + Enter: fixes the current position of the dividing lines + + + Escape: resets the current dividing line to its default position + + +
+ Controlling the Data Source View + CommandCtrl + Shift + F4 opens and closes the data source view. + F6: switches between document and toolbars. + + (plus key): expands the selected entry in the data source explorer. + - (minus key): collapses the selected entry in the data source explorer. + Command +Ctrl+Shift+E: switches between data source explorer and table. + Shortcuts in the Query Design Window + F6: switches between object bar, table view, and selection area. + Option +Alt+Up arrow or Option +Alt+Down arrow: moves the border between table view and selection area up or down. + Keys in the Table View (upper area of the query design) and in the Relations window + Command +Ctrl+Arrow key: moves the selected table in the direction of the arrow. + Command +Ctrl+Shift+Arrow key: resizes the selected table in the table view. + Del: removes the selected table or connection from the table view. + Tab: switches between tables and connections in the table view. + Enter: when a connection is selected, the Enter key opens the Properties dialog of the connection. + Enter: when a table is selected, the Enter key enters the first data field from the list box into the selection area. + Keys in the Selection Area (bottom area of the query design) + Command +Ctrl+Left Arrow or Right Arrow: moves the selected column to the left or to the right. + Keys in the Table Design Window + F6: switches between toolbar, column view, and properties area. +
+
+ Controlling the ImageMap Editor + + + Press Tab to select an icon. If you selected one of the icons from Rectangle to Freeform Polygon and you press Command + Ctrl+Enter, an object of the selected type is created in default size. + + + If you press Enter while the icon Select is selected, the focus is set into the image window of the ImageMap Editor. Press Esc to set the focus back to the icons and input boxes. + + + If the Select icon is selected and you press CommandCtrl+Enter, the first object in the image window gets selected. + + + Use the icon Edit Points to switch into the point edit mode for polygons and back. + + + Use CommandCtrl+Tab in the image window to select the next point. Use Shift+CommandCtrl+Tab to select the previous point. + + + Use the Delete key with the focus in the image window to delete the selected object. + + +
+ Controlling the Help + Press Shift+F1 to display the Extended Tips for the currently selected command, icon or control. + Navigating the main help pages + + + In the main help pages, use Tab to jump to the next hyperlink or Shift+Tab to jump to the previous link. + + + Press Enter to execute the selected hyperlink. + + + Press Backspace above the Enter key to return to the previous help page. + + + Controlling the Text Import dialog (CSV file import) + Ruler + + + Left or Right Arrow: go one position to the left or to the right + + + CommandCtrl+Left Arrow or CommandCtrl+Right Arrow: jump to the previous or to the next split + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Left Arrow or CommandCtrl+Shift+Right Arrow: move a split one position to the left or to the right + + + Home or End: jump to the first or the last possible position + + + CommandCtrl+Home or CommandCtrl+End: jump to the first or the last split + + + Shift+CommandCtrl+Home or Shift+CommandCtrl+End: move split to the first or to the last position + + + Space key: insert or remove a split + + + Insert key: insert a split (leave existing splits unchanged) + + + Delete key: delete a split + + + Shift+Delete: delete all splits + + + Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row + + + Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page + + + Escape key (during mouse drag): cancel drag, move split to old position + + + Preview + + + Left Arrow or Right Arrow: select left or right column and clear other selections + + + CommandCtrl+Left Arrow or CommandCtrl+Right Arrow: move focus to the left or to the right column (does not change selection) + + + Shift+Left Arrow or Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Left Arrow or CommandCtrl+Shift+Right Arrow: expand or shrink the selected range (does not change other selections) + + + Home or End: select the first or the last column (use Shift or CommandCtrl as with cursor keys) + + + Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column + + + CommandCtrl+Shift+Space key: select the range from the last selected column to the current column (does not change other selections) + + + CommandCtrl+A: select all columns + + + Shift+F10: open a context menu + + + CommandCtrl+1 ... CommandCtrl+7: set the 1st ... 7th column type for the selected columns + + + Up Arrow or Down Arrow: scroll table down or up one row + + + Page Up or Page Down: scroll table down or up one page + + + CommandCtrl+Home or CommandCtrl+End: scroll to the top or bottom of a table + + + Controlling the Insert - Special Character Dialog + + + Tab switches through all controls in the dialog. + + + Option +Alt+Down Arrow opens a combo box. Enter selects the current entry in the combo box. + + + Arrow buttons move through the main selection area. Spacebar adds the current character to the list of characters to be inserted. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2faefa486 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards +/text/shared/guide/labels.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +labels; creating and synchronizing +business cards; creating and synchronizing +synchronizing;labels and business cards +mw made "synchronizing..." a two level entry +Creating and Printing Labels and Business Cards + +Designing Business Cards Through a Dialog +Choose File - New - Business Cards to open the Business Cards dialog, which allows you to choose how your business cards will look. +Designing Labels and Business Cards +You can design both labels and business cards through the Labels dialog. + + +Choose File - New - Labels to open the Labels dialog. + + +On the Labels tab, under Format, define the label format. +$[officename] Writer contains many formats of commercially available sheets for labels, badges, and business cards. You can also add other, user-defined formats. + + +On the Labels tab, under Inscription, you can choose what you want written on the labels. +This often involves database fields, so that the labels can be printed with varying content, when sending "Form Letters" for example. It is also possible to have the same text printed on every label. +Use the Database and Table list boxes to select the database and table from which the data fields are obtained. Click on the arrow button to transfer the selected data field into the inscription area. Press Enter to insert a line break. You can also enter spaces and any other fixed text. +On the Format tab you can define your own label formats, not covered by the predefined formats. To do this, select "User" from the Type list box. On the Options tab, you can specify whether all labels or only certain ones are to be created. + + +On the Options tab page, make sure that the Synchronize contents box is selected. If this is selected, a label only has to be entered (on the top left label) and edited once. + + +Click on New Document to create a new document with the settings you have entered. + + +As soon as you click on New Document, you will see a small window with the Synchronize Labels button. Enter the first label. When you click on the Synchronize Labels button, the current individual label is copied to all the other labels on the sheet. + + + + + +Business Cards + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6102fa582 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing Address Labels + /text/shared/guide/labels_database.xhp + + + +address labels from databases + labels; from databases + stickers + databases;creating labels +mw deleted "creating;" +Printing Address Labels + + + + Choose File - New - Labels to open the Labels dialog. + + + On the Labels tab page, select the format of the label sheets you want to print on. + + + Choose the database and table from which to get the data. + + + Select a database field of which you want to print the contents. Click the button that shows a left arrow to insert the database field into the Label Text box. + Continue to select and insert database fields if you want more fields on every label. You can press Enter to insert a new line, and you can type any character to insert fixed text. + + + Optionally, if you want to type more text, apply formatting, or insert images and line art, you should enable Synchronize contents on the Options tab. If you enable this, once you leave the Labels dialog box a small window opens with a Synchronize button. Now you only need to work on the first label on the labels document, then click the Synchronize button to copy your work to every label of the document. + + + Click New Document. + + + When you see the label document, you might want to temporarily enable View - Field Names. This displays the fields in a more visible manner, so that you can arrange and edit label contents more easily. + + + You can save and/or print the label document. + + + When you choose to print the document, you will be asked if you want to print a form letter. Answer Yes to open the Mail Merge dialog. In the Mail Merge dialog, you can select the records for which you want to print labels. +
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..83f1827ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,208 @@ + + + + + + + Selecting the Document Language + /text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp + + + +languages; selecting for text + documents; languages + characters; language selection + character styles;language selection + text; language selection + paragraph styles; languages + drawings; languages + defaults;languages + spellcheck; default languages + spelling; default languages + dictionaries, see also languages +mw deleted "applying;" and changed "languages;" +Selecting the Document Language + + The language you select for your document determines the dictionary used for spellcheck, thesaurus and hyphenation, the decimal and thousands delimiter used and the default currency format. + + + The language you select applies to the whole document. + + + Within the document, you can apply a separate language to any paragraph style. This has priority over the language of the whole document. + + + You can assign a language to selected pieces of text in a paragraph, either by direct formatting or with a character style. This assignment has priority over the paragraph style and document language. + + + Selecting a language for the whole document + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. Go to Language Settings - Languages. + + + Under Default languages for documents, select the document language for all newly created documents. If you mark For the current document only, your choice will only apply to the current document. Close the dialog with OK. + + + Selecting a language for a Paragraph Style + + + Place the cursor in the paragraph whose paragraph style you want to edit. + + + Open the context menu and select Edit Paragraph Style. This opens the Paragraph Style dialog. + + + Select the Font tab. + + + Select the Language and click OK. + All paragraphs formatted with the current paragraph style will have the selected language. + + + Applying a language directly to selected text + + + Select the text to which you want to apply a language. + + + Choose Format - Character. This opens the Character dialog. + + + Select the Font tab. + + + Select the Language and click OK. + + + In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, choose Format - Cells and proceed accordingly. + Selecting a language for a Character Style + + + Open the Styles window and click on the Character Styles icon. + + + Click on the name of the character style to which you want to apply a different language. + + + Then open the context menu in the Styles window and select Modify. This opens the Character Style dialog. + + + Select the Font tab. + + + Select the Language and click OK. + Now you can apply the character style to your selected text. + + UFI: see i76182 +Adding More Text Languages + + + Dictionaries are supplied and installed as extensions. Choose Tools - Language - More Dictionaries Online to open the dictionaries page in your default web browser. + + + Select a dictionary in the list of descriptions. Click the heading in a dictionary description that you want to get. + + + In the next page, click the Get It icon to download the dictionary extension. Note the folder name to which your browser downloads the file. Download additional dictionaries as you like. + + + In %PRODUCTNAME, choose Tools - Extension Manager and click Add to install the downloaded extensions. + + + After you installed the extensions, you should close %PRODUCTNAME (including the Quickstarter), and restart. + + + Setting UI Language + A standard installation of %PRODUCTNAME software will give you a user interface (UI) of your chosen language. + Most users download the American English version, which gives you English menu commands and English application help. If you want another language for the menus (and for the application help, if available in that language), change the UI language as follows. + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + + + Select another UI language in the "User interface" listbox. + + + Click OK and restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + + If the listbox doesn't list the language that you want, see "Adding More UI Languages". + + + Adding More UI Languages + + + + + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + + + Run %PRODUCTNAME installer, choose Modify, then select the language that you would like to install from the Additional user interface languages group. + + + + + If you use %PRODUCTNAME packages maintained by your Linux distribution, follow the steps below. + + + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + + + Open your favourite package manager, look for %PRODUCTNAME language packs, and install the languages that you would like to use. + + + If you downloaded %PRODUCTNAME packages from the main %PRODUCTNAME Web site, follow the steps below. + + + Open your web browser and enter https://www.libreoffice.org/download/. + + + Select and download the correct language pack for your version of %PRODUCTNAME software. + + + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + + + Install the language pack. Unpack tar.gz file and install the packages according to standard practice on your platform. + + + + + + + Open your web browser and enter https://www.libreoffice.org/download/. + + + Select and download the correct language pack for your version of %PRODUCTNAME software. + + + Close %PRODUCTNAME software (also close the Quickstarter, if you enabled it). + + + Install the language pack by double-clicking the dmg file. + + + + + + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + Format - Character - Font + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06575b389 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drawing Lines in Text +/text/shared/guide/line_intext.xhp + + + +arrows; drawing in text +indicator lines in text +lines; drawing in text +lines; removing automatic lines +deleting; lines in text +drawing lines in text +automatic lines/borders in text + +Drawing Lines in Text + +You can incorporate lines into your text with custom angles, width, color, and other attributes. +To define the line attributes and direction, use the Line drawing object as follows: + + + + +Icon + + +Icon + + + +1. + + +On the Standard bar, click the Show Draw Functions icon to open the Drawing toolbar, and click the Line icon. The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair symbol with a line beside it. + + + + + + +2. + + +In your document, click where the line should begin. Hold down the mouse button and drag to the point where you want the line to end. If you also hold down the Shift key, you can draw only horizontal, vertical, and diagonal lines. + + + + + +Icon + + + +3. + + +Release the mouse button once the line has the desired direction and length. You can then draw more lines. End this function by pressing the Esc key or by clicking the Select icon from the Drawing bar. + + + + + + +4. + + +After clicking the Select icon, you can select all of the lines at the same time by clicking each line while holding down the Shift key. This multiple selection enables you to assign all of them a common color, width or other attribute. + + +
+ + + +Create a horizontal line by applying the preset Paragraph Style Horizontal Line. Click into an empty paragraph, and double-click the Horizontal Line Style in the Styles window. If the entry for horizontal lines is not visible in the list of Paragraph Styles, select "All Styles" in the lower listbox. + + +You can draw a line above, beside or below a paragraph in a Writer text document by choosing Format - Paragraph - Borders. + + +Automatic lines in Writer + + +If you start a new line in a Writer text document by typing three or more hyphen characters and press the Enter key, the characters are removed and the previous paragraph gets a line as a bottom border. +To create a single line, type three or more hyphens (-), or underscores (_), and then press Enter. To create a double line, type three or more equal signs (=), asterisks (*), tildes (~), or hash marks (#), and then press Enter. + + +To remove an automatically drawn border, choose Format - Paragraph - Borders and select no border. + + +To undo an automatic border replacement once, choose Edit - Undo. + + +To disable the automatic borders, choose Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options and clear Apply border. + + +The lines and other drawing objects that you insert in text are not defined in HTML, and are therefore not exported directly into HTML format. Instead, they are exported as graphics. +When you enter a line width, you can append a measurement unit. A zero line width results in a hairline with a width of one pixel of the output medium. + +Format - Paragraph - Borders + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..791e02aa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + +Defining Arrow Styles +/text/shared/guide/lineend_define.xhp + + + +defining; arrowheads and other line ends +arrows; defining arrow heads +lines;defining ends + +

Defining Arrow Styles

+You can define any shape to be included in the list of available arrow styles. Only the form of the shape is added as a black filled arrowhead. + + +Use the draw functions to create the shape to be used as an arrow style. + + +Select the shape and choose Format - Text Box and Shape - Line. + + +In the dialog, click the Arrow Styles tab. + + +Click Add and assign a name to the new arrow style. + + +Click OK to close the dialog. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..834b3e654 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Defining Line Styles +/text/shared/guide/linestyle_define.xhp + + + +line styles;defining +defining;line styles + +Defining Line Styles + + + +Select a line drawing object in a document. + + +Choose Format - Drawing Object - Graphic - Line and click the Line Styles tab. + + +Specify the line options that you want. +To specify the length of the line as a percentage of the line width, select Fit to line width. + + +Click Add. + + +Enter a name for the line style and click OK. +To save the line style in a custom line style list, click the Save Line Styles icon. + + +Click Close to close the dialog. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c24942c2c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Applying Line Styles +/text/shared/guide/linestyles.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +separator lines; defining +reference lines +arrows; defining arrow lines +line styles; applying + +Applying Line Styles Using the Toolbar + +The Drawing Object Properties toolbar contains icons and combo boxes to define various line attributes. + + +Click the Line icon +Icon + to open the Line dialog. + + +Click the Arrow Styles icon +Icon + to select an arrow style for the right and left ends of a line. + + +Select a style from the Line Style box and specify the width in the Line Width box. A width of 0 corresponds to 1 pixel. + + +Select the line and arrow color in the Line Color box. + + +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d23eb1356 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + Lotus, dBase and Diff filter parameters + /text/shared/guide/lotusdbasediff.xhp + + + + source: https://wiki.documentfoundation.org/Documentation/DevGuide/Spreadsheet_Documents#Filter_Options + +Lotus;command line filter options +dBase;command line filter options +Diff;command line filter options + +
+

Lotus, dBase and Diff filter parameters

+ The Lotus, dBase and Diff filters accept a string containing the numerical index of the used character set for single-byte characters, that is, 0 for the system character set. The numerical indexes assigned to the character sets are in the table below. +
+ + To import file myLotus.wk3 with DOS/OS2-850/International (Western) character set. + soffice --infilter="Lotus:4" myLotus.wk3 +
+ + + + Character set + + + Index + + + Unknown 0 + Windows-1252/WinLatin 1 (Western) 1 + Apple Macintosh (Western) 2 + DOS/OS2-437/US (Western) 3 + DOS/OS2-850/International (Western) 4 + DOS/OS2-860/Portuguese (Western) 5 + DOS/OS2-861/Icelandic (Western) 6 + DOS/OS2-863/Canadian-French (Western) 7 + DOS/OS2-865/Nordic (Western) 8 + System default 9 + Symbol 10 + ASCII/US (Western) 11 + ISO-8859-1 (Western) 12 + ISO-8859-2 (Central European) 13 + ISO-8859-3 (Latin 3) 14 + ISO-8859-4 (Baltic) 15 + ISO-8859-5 (Cyrillic) 16 + ISO-8859-6 (Arabic) 17 + ISO-8859-7 (Greek) 18 + ISO-8859-8 (Hebrew) 19 + ISO-8859-9 (Turkish) 20 + ISO-8859-14 (Western) 21 + ISO-8859-15/EURO (Western) 22 + DOS/OS2-737 (Greek) 23 + DOS/OS2-775 (Baltic) 24 + DOS/OS2-852 (Central European) 25 + DOS/OS2-855 (Cyrillic) 26 + DOS/OS2-857 (Turkish) 27 + DOS/OS2-862 (Hebrew) 28 + DOS/OS2-864 (Arabic) 29 + DOS/OS2-866/Russian (Cyrillic) 30 + DOS/OS2-869/Modern (Greek) 31 + DOS/Windows-874 (Thai) 32 + Windows-1250/WinLatin 2 (Central European) 33 + Windows-1251 (Cyrillic) 34 + Windows-1253 (Greek) 35 + Windows-1254 (Turkish) 36 + Windows-1255 (Hebrew) 37 + Windows-1256 (Arabic) 38 + Windows-1257 (Baltic) 39 + Windows-1258 (Vietnamese) 40 + Apple Macintosh (Arabic) 41 + Apple Macintosh (Central European) 42 + Apple Macintosh/Croatian (Central European) 43 + Apple Macintosh (Cyrillic) 44 + Not supported: Apple Macintosh (Devanagari) 45 + Not supported: Apple Macintosh (Farsi) 46 + Apple Macintosh (Greek) 47 + Not supported: Apple Macintosh (Gujarati) 48 + Not supported: Apple Macintosh (Gurmukhi) 49 + Apple Macintosh (Hebrew) 50 + Apple Macintosh/Icelandic (Western) 51 + Apple Macintosh/Romanian (Central European) 52 + Apple Macintosh (Thai) 53 + Apple Macintosh (Turkish) 54 + Apple Macintosh/Ukrainian (Cyrillic) 55 + Apple Macintosh (Chinese Simplified) 56 + Apple Macintosh (Chinese Traditional) 57 + Apple Macintosh (Japanese) 58 + Apple Macintosh (Korean) 59 + Windows-932 (Japanese) 60 + Windows-936 (Chinese Simplified) 61 + Windows-Wansung-949 (Korean) 62 + Windows-950 (Chinese Traditional) 63 + Shift-JIS (Japanese) 64 + GB-2312 (Chinese Simplified) 65 + GBT-12345 (Chinese Traditional) 66 + GBK/GB-2312-80 (Chinese Simplified) 67 + BIG5 (Chinese Traditional) 68 + EUC-JP (Japanese) 69 + EUC-CN (Chinese Simplified) 70 + EUC-TW (Chinese Traditional) 71 + ISO-2022-JP (Japanese) 72 + ISO-2022-CN (Chinese Simplified) 73 + KOI8-R (Cyrillic) 74 + Unicode (UTF-7) 75 + Unicode (UTF-8) 76 + ISO-8859-10 (Central European) 77 + ISO-8859-13 (Central European) 78 + EUC-KR (Korean) 79 + ISO-2022-KR (Korean) 80 + JIS 0201 (Japanese) 81 + JIS 0208 (Japanese) 82 + JIS 0212 (Japanese) 83 + Windows-Johab-1361 (Korean) 84 + GB-18030 (Chinese Simplified) 85 + BIG5-HKSCS (Chinese Traditional) 86 + TIS 620 (Thai) 87 + KOI8-U (Cyrillic) 88 + ISCII Devanagari (Indian) 89 + Unicode (Java's modified UTF-8) 90 + Adobe Standard 91 + Adobe Symbol 92 + PT 154 (Windows Cyrillic Asian codepage developed in ParaType) 93 + Unicode UCS4 65534 + Unicode UCS2 65535 +
+
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fe2c4ea56 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + Recording a Macro + /text/shared/guide/macro_recording.xhp + + + + + macros; recording + recording; macros + Basic; recording macros + + Recording a Macro + + %PRODUCTNAME can record commands executed with the keyboard and mouse in Writer and Calc + + + Open the document for which you want to record a macro. + + + Choose Tools - Macros - Record Macro. + If Tools - Macros - Record Macro menu item is missing, make sure that macro recording feature is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced. + You see the small Recording dialog with just one button called Stop Recording. + + + Perform the actions you want to be recorded in the document. + Press the Escape key to deselect an object, as the macro recorder currently does not record this action by mouse click. + + + Click Stop Recording. + The Macro dialog appears, in which you can save and run the macro. + If you want to abort the recording without saving a macro, click the Close button of the Recording dialog. + + + To save the macro, first select the object where you want the macro to be saved in the Save macro in list box. + + + If you want the macro to be saved into a new library or module, click the New Library or New Module button and enter a name for the library or module. + + + Enter a name for the new macro in the Macro name text box. Do not use Basic keywords as a name. + + + Click Save. + + + + macro recording;limitations + + Limitations of the macro recorder + The following actions are not recorded: + + + Opening of windows is not recorded. + + + Actions carried out in another window than where the recorder was started are not recorded. + + + Window switching is not recorded. + + + Actions that are not related to the document contents are not recorded. For example, changes made in the Options dialog, macro organizer, customizing. + + + Selections are recorded only if they are done by using the keyboard (cursor traveling), but not when the mouse is used. + + + The macro recorder works only in Calc and Writer. + + +
+ Macro +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a3f45acf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/main.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ + + + + + + + General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/main.xhp + + + + + + + instructions; general + + +

General Instructions for %PRODUCTNAME

+ +

Opening and Saving Documents and Templates

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Windows, Menus and Icons

+ + + + + + + + + +

Accessibility

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copying Data by Drag and Drop or Menu Commands

+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Sources

+Working with databases in %PRODUCTNAME +Table Wizard +Query Wizard +Forms Wizard +Report Wizard + + + + + + + + + + + +

Recording Changes (Revision Marking)

+ + + + + + + + +

Configuring and Modifying %PRODUCTNAME

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Charts

+ + + + + + +

Miscellaneous

+General Terminology +Internet Terminology + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5cf2239c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Working with Templates in Template Manager + /text/shared/guide/manage_templates.xhp + + + + +paths;template files +categories;in templates +file extensions;in templates + + +

Templates in the Template Manager

+The recommended method for working with templates is to use the Template Manager and the commands in the File - Templates submenu, Edit Template and Save as Template. These commands are sufficient for basic management of templates in %PRODUCTNAME. +This guide explains how the file system interacts with the Template Manager. This information is particularly useful if you want to manage directories directly, but still be coordinated with the Template Manager. + +

Working with Template Files

+The Template Manager recognizes template files by their file extension. The following extensions are recognized: + + + + Application + + + Extensions + + + + + Writer + + + .ott .otm .oth .stw .dot .dotx + + + + + Calc + + + .ots .stc .xlt .xltm .xltx + + + + + Impress + + + .otp .pot .potm .potx .sti + + + + + Draw + + + .otg .std + + +
+For information about the meaning of the extensions see Filter Conversion. +

Working with Template Names

+The Template Manager shows the Title field of a document as the Template Name. As long as the Title field is not empty, the filename has no consequences for the Template Name shown in the Template Manager. If the Title field is empty, the filename, without extension, is shown as the Template Name. +If two templates have the exact same entry in the Title field and belong to the same Category, then only one template appears in the Template Manager. +Titles are case-sensitive. For example, if one template in category My Templates has the title a4 and another has the title A4, then both templates appear in the Template Manager. If both templates have the title A4, then only one appears. +If templates have the same title, but belong to different categories, then all appear in the Template Manager. For example, if three templates have the title A4, and each template belongs to a different category, then all three templates appear with the Template Name A4. +You can edit the Title field by choosing File - Properties - Description. If you change the Title field, then the new title also appears as the Template Name in the Template Manager. Alternatively, if you use the Rename command in the context menu for a template, then the Title field of the template is changed to the new Template Name. +If you use the File - Save as Template dialog, then the name entered in that dialog is used as the filename and entered into the Title field. If you change the filename later, the template will still appear in the Template Manager according to the entry in the Title field. + +The Title field of a template is included in the Title field of new documents created from the template. + +

Controlling which Files Appear in the Template Manager

+The Template Manager displays templates located in the directories defined in the Paths dialog for Templates. The dialog is found by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths, selecting Templates, and clicking Edit. + + +

Internal Paths

+ +The Internal Paths directories cannot be changed. They identify the location of the predefined templates. These templates are always shown in the Template Manager. + +
+

User Paths

+The default setting for User Path is the template subdirectory in the user profile directory. +Templates in the directories specified in User Path and its subdirectories are shown in the Template Manager. Subdirectories within subdirectories are not recognized. +You can add additional directories to the User Path. There has to be at least one directory in User Path, but there are no limits on where it is located. +It is not a good idea to add a root Document directory, or other high-level directory, to your template User Path. All subdirectories in a User Path directory appear in the Template Manager as Categories. +If you have more than one directory in the User Path, then you must select which directory will be used to save a document as a template when the File - Save as Template command is used. +The Default button resets User Path to the initial setting when %PRODUCTNAME was installed. +
+ +
+

Working with Categories

+The names of subdirectories in the user-defined directories appear as Category names in the Template Manager. If you rename a category, the subdirectory continues to be used, with the new category name stored in groupuinames.xml in the selected Default Path. + +When a Category is selected, then all templates in that subdirectory are shown in the Template Manager, if All Applications is the Filter selection. + A category can only show templates in its own subdirectory, with two exceptions. + + + All Categories shows all templates, relative to the Filter selection. + + + My Templates shows all templates in the directories specified in User Path, relative to the Filter selection. + + +Categories within a Category are not possible, because subdirectories within subdirectories are not recognized. +You can only rename and delete categories in the Default Path selected in the Edit Paths dialog. + If you delete a Category whose subdirectory is in the selected Default Path, then the subdirectory associated with the Category name and any files in the subdirectory are deleted. +
+ +
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..156859f35 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Selecting Measurement Units +/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +documents;measurement units in +measurement units;selecting +units;measurement units +centimeters +inches +distances +selecting;measurement units + +Selecting Measurement Units + +You can select separate measurement units for $[officename] Writer, $[officename] Writer/Web, $[officename] Calc, $[officename] Impress and $[officename] Draw documents. + + +Open a document of the type for which you want to change the measurement units. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. + + +In the left pane of the dialog, double-click the application for which you want to select the measurement unit. +Double-click %PRODUCTNAME Writer if you want to select the measurement units for text documents. + + +Click on General. + + +On the General tab page, select the measurement unit. Close the dialog with OK. + + + +Entering measurement units directly +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ac9cb0de --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ + + + + + + + + +Comparing Microsoft Office and $[officename] Terms +/text/shared/guide/microsoft_terms.xhp + + + +Microsoft Office;feature comparisons + +Comparing Microsoft Office and $[officename] Terms + +The following table lists Microsoft Office features and their $[officename] equivalents. + + + +Microsoft Office XP + + +$[officename] + + + + +AutoShapes + + +Gallery Objects
Shapes are on the Drawing toolbar (menu View - Toolbars - Drawing) + + + + +Change Case + + +Case/Characters + + + + +Click and Type + + +Direct Cursor + + + + +Compare and Merge Documents + + +Compare + + + + +Document Map + + +Navigator + + + + +Formula Auditing + + +Detective + + + + +Lines and Page Breaks + + +Text Flow + + + + +Page setup + + +Format - Page +For spreadsheets see also View - Page Break Preview + + + + +Markup + + +Track Changes - Show + + + + +Refresh Data (in Excel) + + +Refresh Range + + + + +Replace text as you type + + +AutoCorrect + + + + +Show/Hide + + +Nonprinting Characters, Hidden Paragraphs + + + + +Spelling and Grammar + + +Spelling + + + + +Track changes + + +Changes - Record + + + + +Validation + + +Validity + + + + +Workbook + + +Spreadsheet + + + + +Worksheet + + +Sheet + + + + +Shared Workbooks + + +Collaboration + + +
+ +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..06d277b27 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changing the Association of Microsoft Office Document Types +/text/shared/guide/ms_doctypes.xhp + + + +Microsoft Office;reassigning document types +file associations for Microsoft Office +changing;file associations in Setup program + +Changing the Association of Microsoft Office Document Types + +To change the association of Microsoft Office file name extensions to open the files either in $[officename] or in Microsoft Office, using Microsoft Windows: +
+ + +In Windows’ File Explorer, right-click a file of the type that you want to assign to another application. + + +In the context menu, choose Open with - Choose another app. + + +In the list of applications that appears, select the program that should open the current type of files. Make sure that “Always use this app” is checked. +If these steps do not apply to your brand of Microsoft Windows, search your Microsoft Windows Help for instructions how to change the file associations. + + +
+
+ + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3be46e308 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + + + + + + + + About Converting Microsoft Office Documents + /text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp + + + +Microsoft Office;document import restrictions + import restrictions for Microsoft Office + Microsoft Office;importing password protected files +MW moved "Microsoft Office;" from shared/guide/protection.xhp + +About Converting Microsoft Office Documents +$[officename] can automatically open Microsoft Office 97/2000/XP documents. However, some layout features and formatting attributes in more complex Microsoft Office documents are handled differently in $[officename] or are unsupported. As a result, converted files require some degree of manual reformatting. The amount of reformatting that can be expected is proportional to the complexity of the structure and formatting of the source document. $[officename] cannot run Visual Basic Scripts, but can load them for you to analyze. +The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load and save the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. +The following lists provide a general overview of Microsoft Office features that may cause conversion challenges. These will not affect your ability to use or work with the content of the converted document. +Microsoft Word + + +AutoShapes + + +Revision marks + + +OLE objects + + +Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields + + +Indexes + + +Tables, frames, and multi-column formatting + + +Hyperlinks and bookmarks + + +Microsoft WordArt graphics + + +Animated characters/text + + +Microsoft PowerPoint + + +AutoShapes + + +Tab, line, and paragraph spacing + + +Master background graphics + + +Grouped objects + + +Certain multimedia effects + + +Microsoft Excel + + +AutoShapes + + +OLE objects + + +Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields + + +Pivot tables + + +New chart types + + +Conditional formatting + + +Some functions/formulas (see below) + + +One example of differences between Calc and Excel is the handling of boolean values. Enter TRUE to cells A1 and A2. + + +In Calc, the formula =A1+A2 returns the value 2, and the formula =SUM(A1;A2) returns 2. + + +In Excel, the formula =A1+A2 returns 2, but the formula =SUM(A1,A2) returns 0.in SUM(A1<limiter>A2), use the Excel limiter comma , in English and semicolon ; in German + + +For a detailed overview about converting documents to and from Microsoft Office format, see the Migration Guide. +Opening Microsoft Office Documents That Are Protected With a Password +%PRODUCTNAME can open the following Microsoft Office document types that are protected by a password. + + + +Microsoft Office format + + +Supported encryption method + + + + +Word 6.0, Word 95 + + +Weak XOR encryption + + + + +Word 97, Word 2000, Word XP, Word 2003 + + +Office 97/2000 compatible encryption + + + + +Word XP, Word 2003 + + +Weak XOR encryption from older Word versions + + + + +Excel 2.1, Excel 3.0, Excel 4.0, Excel 5.0, Excel 95 + + +Weak XOR encryption + + + + +Excel 97, Excel 2000, Excel XP, Excel 2003 + + +Office 97/2000 compatible encryption + + + + +Excel XP, Excel 2003 + + +Weak XOR encryption from older Excel versions + + +
+Microsoft Office files that are encrypted by AES128 can be opened. Other encryption methods are not supported. +
+ + + Setting the default file format +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc9cffe50 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] +/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp + + + +Office;Microsoft Office and $[officename] +Microsoft Office;new users information +opening;Microsoft Office files +saving;in Microsoft Office file format +macros; in MS Office documents + +Using Microsoft Office and $[officename] + +$[officename] can open and save documents in the Microsoft Office file formats, including Microsoft Office Open XML formats. +Opening a Microsoft Office File + + +Choose File - Open. Select a Microsoft Office file in the $[officename] file open dialog. + + + + + +MS Office file... + + +...will open in $[officename] module + + + + +Microsoft Word, *.doc, *.docx + + +$[officename] Writer + + + + +Microsoft Excel, *.xls, *.xlsx + + +$[officename] Calc + + + + +Microsoft PowerPoint, *.ppt, *.pps, *.pptx + + +$[officename] Impress + + +
+ +Saving as a Microsoft Office File + + +Choose File - Save As. + + +In the File type box, select a Microsoft Office file format. + + +Saving Documents by Default in Microsoft Office Formats + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. + + +In the Default file format and ODF settings area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. + + +From now on, if you save a document, the File type will be set according to your choice. Of course, you still can select another file type in the file save dialog. + + +Opening Microsoft Office Files by Default + + + +Converting Many Microsoft Office Files into OpenDocument Format +The Document Converter Wizard will copy and convert all Microsoft Office files in a folder into $[officename] documents in the OpenDocument file format. You can specify the folder to be read, and the folder where the converted files are to be saved. + + +Choose File - Wizards - Document Converter to start the wizard. + + +Macros in Microsoft Office and $[officename] +With a few exceptions, Microsoft Office and $[officename] cannot run the same macro code. Microsoft Office uses VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code, and $[officename] uses Basic code based on the $[officename] API (Application Program Interface) environment. Although the programming language is the same, the objects and methods are different. +The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can run some Excel Visual Basic scripts if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. +If you use macros in one of the applications and want to use the same functionality in the other application, you must edit the macros. $[officename] can load the macros that are contained within Microsoft Office files and you can then view and edit the macro code in the $[officename] Basic IDE editor. +You can choose to preserve or delete VBA macros +Open a Microsoft Office document that contains VBA macro code. Change only the normal contents (text, cells, graphics), and do not edit the macros. Save the document as a Microsoft Office file type. Open the file in Microsoft Office, and the VBA macros will run as before. +You may delete the VBA macros from the Microsoft Office file on loading or on saving. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename]. + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..467dd52b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + +Navigator for Document Overview +/text/shared/guide/navigator.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +documents; contents as lists +Navigator; contents as lists + +

Navigator for Document Overview +

+All contents of the Navigator window are referred to here as "categories," whether headings, sheets, tables, frames, graphics, OLE objects, sections, hyperlinks, references, indexes, comments, or drawing objects. +The Navigator displays types of objects contained in a document. If a plus sign appears next to a category, this indicates that at least one object of this kind exists. If you rest the mouse pointer on the category name, the number of objects is displayed in an extended tip. +Open a category by clicking on the plus sign. If you only want to view the entries in a certain category, select the category and click the Content Navigation View icon. Until you click the icon again, only the objects of this category will be displayed. +You may dock the Navigator to any document border or turn it back into a free window (double click on the gray area). You can change the size of the Navigator when it is a free window. +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2d70a769 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects +/text/shared/guide/navigator_setcursor.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Document Map, see Navigator +cursor;quickly moving to an object +objects;quickly moving to +navigating;in documents +Navigator;working with + +Navigation to Quickly Reach Objects + +This is a common use of the Navigator. + + +Double-click an object in the Navigator to jump directly to the position of the object in the document. + + +You can use the Navigation toolbar to scroll to the previous or next object of a specific category. + + + + +Open the toolbar using the Navigation icon below the vertical scroll bar of a text document, or in the Navigator window. + + +On the Navigation toolbar, you first select the category, then click on one of the buttons, Previous Object or Next Object. The names of the buttons refer to the category, for example, the button "Next Object" is named "Next Page" or "Next Bookmark" according to the category. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..659ce4c2d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Showing Navigation Pane of the Help +/text/shared/guide/navpane_on.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Help; navigation pane showing/hiding +hiding;navigation pane in Help window +indexes;showing/hiding Help index tab + + +Showing Navigation Pane of the Help + +In the Help window, you can show or hide the navigation pane as needed. + + + + +Icon + + + +On the toolbar of the Help window, click the left icon to show or hide the navigation pane. + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d1b1f62ea --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + Turning off Bullets and Numbering for Individual Paragraphs + /text/shared/guide/numbering_stop.xhp + + + +numbering; turning off +bullets; turning off +removing, see also deleting +removing;bullets and numbering +keyboard;removing numbering + +

Turning off Bullets and Numbering for Individual Paragraphs

+ + no bullets for Calc + Bullets and Numbering of paragraphs is supported only in Writer, Impress and Draw. + + no bullets for Mathdon't care for Math by now. Issue 98726 + + + For the current paragraph or selected paragraphs you can switch off the automatic numbering or listing. Click the No List icon in the Formatting bar. The list indenting is also removed. + + + + + No List icon + + + No List icon + + +
+ + Impress, Draw + If the cursor is located within a numbered or bulleted list, you can turn off automatic numbers or bullets for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs by clicking the Toggle Unordered List icon on the Text Formatting bar. + + + + + Toggle Unordered List icon + + + + Toggle Unordered List icon + + +
+ + + + + To remove a number or bullet from a paragraph while preserving the list indenting: + + + Place the cursor at the beginning of a paragraph in a list and press the Backspace key. + + + The numbering of the paragraph disappears and is removed from the numbering sequence. Numbering resumes in the following paragraph. + + + Press Shift+Backspace at the beginning of a list paragraph to return the number or bullet. + Press the Enter key in an empty numbered paragraph to stop the numbering. +
+ Format - Bullets and Numbering + + + + + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f53e4e772 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + OpenPGP + /text/shared/guide/openpgp.xhp + + + + + OpenPGP;document encryption + file encryption;OpenPGP + public key;file encryption + private key;file encryption + file encryption;symmetric keys + +
+

Encrypting Documents with OpenPGP

+ %PRODUCTNAME can encrypt documents using OpenPGP public key cryptography. The document is encrypted using a symmetric encryption algorithm. +
+ According to https://bugs.documentfoundation.org/show_bug.cgi?id=125636#c16 , only ODF files can be signed with GPG + GPG signing only works for ODF documents. +
+ Choose menu File - Save as, select Encrypt with GPG key, Click Save. +
+ %PRODUCTNAME can encrypt documents confidentially using OpenPGP. The document is encrypted using a symmetric encryption algorithm, which requires a symmetric key. Each symmetric key is used only once and is also called a session key. The document and its session key are sent to the recipient. The session key must be sent to the recipients so they know how to decrypt the document, but to protect it during transmission it is encrypted with the recipient's public key. Only the private key belonging to the recipient can decrypt the session key. + + %PRODUCTNAME uses the OpenPGP software installed in your computer. If no OpenPGP software is available you must download and install one suitable for your operating system, likely from your application store or software distribution channel. + Here are some external GPG applications known to work with %PRODUCTNAME: + + + gpg4win on Windows + + + GPGTools on MacOS + + + On Linux, usually already installed: + gnupg - a command line utility for signing, encrypting and key management. + Graphical applications for gnupg such as Seahorse (gnome), Kleopatra and KGpg (KDE). + gpgme - an application program interface (API) to develop applications with GPG. + + + You must define a personal pair of cryptography keys with the OpenPGP application. Refer to the OpenPGP software installed on how to create a pair of keys, it is usually the first step to execute after the software installation. +

%PRODUCTNAME Encryption Setup

+ + Choose menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options – User Data. In the Cryptography area: + +

Encrypting documents

+ OpenPGP encryption requires the use of the public key of the recipient and this key must be available in the OpenPGP key chain stored in your computer. To encrypt a document: + + + Choose File – Save As, + + + Enter a name for the file. + + + Mark the Encrypt with GPG key checkbox. + + + Click Save. %PRODUCTNAME opens the OpenPGP public key selection dialog. + + + Choose the public key of the recipient. You can select multiple keys at the time. + + + Click OK to close the dialog and save the file. + + + The file is saved encrypted with the selected public keys. + Only the private key belonging to the recipient can decrypt the document, unless you also encrypt for yourself. +

Decrypting documents

+ You can only decrypt documents that have been encrypted with your public key. To decrypt a document: + + + Open the document. An Enter password prompt shows. + + + Enter the password of the OpenPGP private key. The document is decrypted and the contents is available. + + +

Difference between document encryption with OpenPGP and Save with password

+ + Both commands address confidentiality, but in different ways. + + When you save a document with a password, you must remember the password inserted to open the document later. Anyone else that needs to open the document must also know the password used at save time. Therefore, the Save password must be transmitted to be known by other users. + + Files encrypted with the save password cannot be decrypted unless the save password is supplied. + + With document OpenPGP encryption, you define the set of users that can decrypt the document and you don’t need to send passwords through channels which security is unknown. Besides, the OpenPGP application manages the key chain of public keys more efficiently. +
+ + Wikipedia on OpenPGP +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c8349f37 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Selecting the Maximum Printable Area on a Page +/text/shared/guide/pageformat_max.xhp + + + +page formats; maximizing +formats; maximizing page formats +printers; maximum page formats + +Selecting the Maximum Printable Area on a Page + +Not all printers can print a paper up to its edges. Most of them leave an unprinted margin. +$[officename] offers a semi-automatic feature that enables you to print as close to the paper's edge as is possible. + + +Make sure that your printer has been setup under File - Printer Settings. + + +Make sure that the Web in the View menu is not selected. + + +Select the Format - Page command, and go to the Page tab. + + +Under Margins you can define the maximum or minimum possible value for the page margins (left, right, top, and bottom). Click into the respective control, then press the Page Up or Page Down key. The preview displays a dashed line around the printable range. + + +Click OK to close the dialog. + + + + + + + +Printing + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8131e9888 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + Copying Attributes With the Clone Formatting Tool + /text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp + + + + +
+ Format Paintbrush + clone formatting + formatting;copying + copying;formatting + Paintbrush + + Copying Formatting With the Clone Formatting Tool +
+ Use the Clone Formatting tool to copy formatting from a text selection or from an object and apply the formatting to another text selection or object. + + + Select the text or object whose formatting you want to copy. + + + On the Standard Bar, click the Clone Formatting icon. The mouse cursor will change to a paint bucket. + + + Select or click the text or object that you want to apply the formatting to. + + + If you want to apply the formatting to more than one selection, double-click the Clone Formatting icon Icon. After you apply all the formatting, click the icon again. + By default only the character formatting is copied ; to include paragraph formatting, hold down CommandCtrl when you click. To copy only the paragraph formatting, hold down CommandCtrl+Shift when you click. + In Calc, the Clone Formatting tool only copies formatting applied using the Format - Cells dialog or other equivalent methods. Therefore, any formatting applied directly to characters by selecting text inside a cell and then going to the Format - Character dialog will not be copied using the Clone Formatting tool. + The paragraph formats are the formats applied to the whole paragraph. The character formats are those applied to a portion of the paragraph. For example, if you apply the bold format to a whole paragraph the bold format is a paragraph format. Then if you unbold a portion of this paragraph, the bold format is still a paragraph format but the portion you unbold has a "not bold" character format. + The following table describes the formatting attributes that the Clone Formatting tool can copy: + + + + Type of Selection + + + Comment + + + + + Nothing selected, but cursor is inside a text passage + + + Copies the formatting of the current paragraph and the character formatting of the next character in the text flow direction. + + + + + Text is selected + + + Copies the formatting of the last selected character and of the paragraph that contains the character. + + + + + Frame is selected + + + Copies the frame attributes that are defined in Format - Frame and Object - Properties dialog. The contents, size, position, linking, hyperlinks, and macros in the frame are not copied. + + + + + Object is selected + + + Copies the object formatting that is defined in the Format - Graphics or Format - Drawing Object dialogs. The contents, size, position, hyperlinks, and macros in the object are not copied. + + + + + Form control is selected + + + Not supported + + + + + Drawing object is selected + + + Copies all formatting attributes. In Impress and Draw, the text contents of the object is also copied. + + + + + Text within Calc cells is selected + + + Not supported + + + + + Writer table or cells are selected + + + Copies the formatting that is specified in Table, Text Flow, Borders, and Background tab pages in the Format - Table dialog. The paragraph and character formatting are also copied. + + + + + Calc table or cells are selected + + + Copies cell formatting specified using the Format - Cells dialog. + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..144382fe9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + Loading Color, Gradient, and Hatching Palettes + /text/shared/guide/palette_files.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +colors;loading lists +gradients;loading lists +hatching;loading lists +loading;colors/gradients/hatchings + +

Loading Color, Gradient, and Hatching Palettes

+ You can use %PRODUCTNAME extensions to add colors palettes, gradients lists, or hatching patterns lists. +

To load a color palette:

+
+

Directly from the Extension Manager

+ If you have a custom palette available as an extension, use the Extension Manager to load the palette in %PRODUCTNAME: + + + Open the Extension Manager. + + + Click Add + + + Select the extension file (usually a file with oxt file extension) + + + Click OK. You will be asked to restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + +
+ +

From the Area dialog box

+ Loading color palettes from the Area dialog box brings a dialog with all color palettes available in the %PRODUCTNAME Extension Website. + + + Choose Format - Area, and then click the Colors tab. + + + Click the Add color palette via extensions button. A dialog with all available color palettes in the %PRODUCTNAME extension site will appear. + + + Locate the color list that you want to load, and then click Install. + + + Close the Extension dialog.You will be asked to restart %PRODUCTNAME. + + + + +colors; default colors +colors; %PRODUCTNAME colors +%PRODUCTNAME colors +colors; HLC colors +Material Design colors +colors; web +colors; freieFarbe + +

About the Default Color palettes:

+ The freieFarbe HLC color list is based on the CIELAB model and is optimized for professional CMYK printing. + The colors in the Compatibility and HTML palettes are optimized for displays using a resolution of 256 colors. + The palettes “LibreOffice” and “Material” contain the official %PRODUCTNAME and Material Design palettes respectively. + The "tonal" palette provides a set of colors organized by luminance contrast that work across different hardware. +

To load a gradient and hatching palette:

+ +
+ Extensions Website. + Format - Area + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c2e4e3a13 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + +Pasting Contents in Special Formats +/text/shared/guide/pasting.xhp + + + +clipboard;pasting formatted/unformatted text +inserting;clipboard options +pasting;formatted/unformatted text +text formats;pasting +formats;pasting in special formats +mw changed "pasting;..." and "clipboard;..." and added two index entries +Pasting Contents in Special Formats + +Contents that are stored on the clipboard can be pasted into your document using different formats. In %PRODUCTNAME you can choose how to paste the contents using a dialog or a drop-down icon. +The available options depend on the contents of the clipboard. + +In Writer text documents, you can press Command+OptionCtrl+Alt+Shift+V to paste the contents of the clipboard as unformatted text. + +Pasting clipboard contents using an icon menu + + +Click the arrow next to the Paste icon on the Standard Bar to open the menu. + + +Select one of the options. + + +If you do not like the result, click the Undo icon and then paste again with another option. + +Pasting clipboard contents using a dialog + + +Choose Edit - Paste special. + + +Select one of the options and click OK. + + +If you are in a spreadsheet and the contents of the clipboard are spreadsheet cells, then a different Paste Special dialog appears. Use the Paste Special dialog to copy cells using basic or advanced options. + + + +Transpose: swaps the rows and the columns of the cell range to be pasted. + + + +Link: pastes the cell range as a link. If the source file changes, the pasted cells change also. + + +The other options are explained in the help, when you call the Paste Special dialog from within %PRODUCTNAME Calc.UFI: the text is switched to "Calc" there. + + +
+Paste Special +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f8eadbb21 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing in Black and White + /text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp + + + +printing; black and white + black and white printing + colors; not printing + text; printing in black + +Printing in Black and White + + Printing Text and Images in Black and White + + + Choose File - Print. The General tab page of the dialog opens. + + + Click on Properties. This opens the Properties dialog for your printer. + + + Select the option to print in black and white. For further information, refer to the user's manual of your printer. + + + Confirm the Properties dialog and click Print. + The current document will be printed in black and white. + + + Printing in Black and White in %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw, as appropriate. + + + Then choose Print. + + + Under Quality, select either Grayscale or Black & white and click OK. + When either of these options is selected, all presentations or drawings will be printed without color. If you only want to print in black for the current print job, select the option in File - Print - %PRODUCTNAME Draw/Impress. + + Grayscale converts all colors to a maximum of 256 gradations from black to white. All text will be printed in black. A background set by Format - Page - Background will not be printed. + + Black & white converts all colors into the two values black and white. All borders around objects are printed black. All text will be printed in black. A background set by Format - Page - Background will not be printed. + + + Printing Only Text in Black and White + In %PRODUCTNAME Writer you can choose to print color-formatted text in black and white. You can specify this either for all subsequent text documents to be printed, or only for the current printing process. + Printing All Text Documents with Black and White Text + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web. + + + Then choose Print. + + + Under Contents, mark Print black and click OK. + All text documents or HTML documents will be printed with black text. + + + Printing the Current Text Document with Black and White Text + + + Choose File - Print. Then click the %PRODUCTNAME Writer tab. + + + Choose Print text in black and click Print. + + + + + + Printing dialogs + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options dialog + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..032f4b056 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Printing with Reduced Data +/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp + + +UFI: on request of some users + + + +gradients off for faster printing +bitmaps;off for faster printing +resolution when printing bitmaps +transparency;off for faster printing +reduced printing +speed of printing +printing speed +printing;transparencies +printing;faster +faster printing +mw made "reduced printing;..." and "speed of printing;..." a one level entry +Printing faster with Reduced Data + +You can decide to reduce the data necessary to print your document. The settings can be defined differently for printing directly to the printer or for printing to a file. + + +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print. + + +Click one of the following settings options: +Printer - to define options for reducing data while printing directly to a printer +Print to file - to define options for reducing data while printing to a file + + +Select any combination of the four options, then click OK. +All documents that you print from now on will use the changed options. + + +Print your document. + + +You can reduce data for transparency, for gradients, or for bitmaps. When you reduce the data, on many printers you will not see a reduction of printing quality. But the printing time is substantially shorter, and when you print to a file, the file size is much smaller. +
+Print options + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cb8a3f5eb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/protection.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + Protecting Content in %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/protection.xhp + + + + + protecting; contents + protected contents + contents protection + encryption of contents + passwords for protecting contents + security;protecting contents + form controls; protecting + draw objects;protecting + OLE objects;protecting + graphics;protecting + frames;protecting + +

Protecting Contents in %PRODUCTNAME +

+ The following is an overview of the different ways of protecting contents in %PRODUCTNAME from being modified, deleted or viewed. +

Protecting Documents With Passwords When Saving

+ All documents that are saved in OpenDocument format can be saved with a password. Documents that are saved with a password cannot be opened without the password. The content is secured so that it cannot be read with an external editor. This applies to content, graphics and OLE objects. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose File - Save As and mark the Save with password check box. Save the document. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Open the document, entering the correct password. Choose File - Save As and clear the Save with password check box. + + +
+ It is possible to use OpenPGP to define private and public keys to be used to encrypt %PRODUCTNAME documents. Read Encrypting Documents with OpenPGP to learn more on how to set up OpenPGP encryption keys. +

Protecting Revision Marking

+ With every change made in %PRODUCTNAME Calc and %PRODUCTNAME Writer, the review function records who made the change. This function can be turned on with protection, so that it can only be turned off when the correct password is entered. Until then, all changes will continue to be recorded. Acceptance or rejection of changes is not possible. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect. Enter and confirm a password of at least one character. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect. Enter the correct password. + + +
+

Protecting Frames, Graphics, and OLE Objects

+ You can protect the content, position and size of inserted graphics. The same applies to frames (in Writer) and OLE objects. + + + + Turning on protection + + + For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Image - Properties - Options tab. Under Protect, mark Contents, Position and/or Size. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + For example, for graphics inserted in Writer: Choose Format - Image - Properties - Options tab. Under Protect, unmark as appropriate. + + +
+

Protecting Drawing Objects and Form Objects

+ The draw objects that you insert into your documents with the Drawing toolbar can be protected from being accidentally moved or changed in size. You can do the same with form objects inserted with the Form Controls toolbar. + + + + Turning on protection + + + Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Mark the Position or Size check box. + + + + + Turning off protection + + + Choose Format - Object - Position and Size - Position and Size tab. Unmark the Position or Size check box. + + +
+
+ + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9864ab8fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + QR and Barcode + /text/shared/guide/qrcode.xhp + + + + + QR code;barcode + +
+

QR and Barcode

+ + + Generate linear and matrix codes for any text or URL. +
+ The QR and Barcode generation feature allows you to encode any text string or URL as a barcode or a QR code and insert it as a graphical object in a document for scanning. +
+ +
+

URL or text

+ + The text from which to generate the code. +

Error correction

+ The error correction value for the QR Code that is to be created. The error correction of a QR code is a measure that helps a QR code to recover if it is damaged. + There are four standard error correction values. + + + + + + + Low: 7% of codewords can be restored. + + + Medium: 15% of codewords can be restored. + + + Quartile: 25% of codewords can be restored. + + + High: 30% of codewords can be restored. + + +

Margin

+ + The width of the margin surrounding the code. +

Example

+ The QR code below was generated for the text www.libreoffice.org: + + QR code example + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..851834bd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + Redaction + /text/shared/guide/redaction.xhp + + + + + spreadsheet; redacting contents + presentations; redacting contents + text documents; redacting contents + redaction + +
+ +

Redaction

+ Redacting documents blocks out words or portions of a document for authorized use or viewing. +
+ Redaction protects sensitive information and helps enterprises and organizations to comply with regulations on confidentiality or privacy. +
+ Choose Tools - Redact +
+

How redaction works in %PRODUCTNAME?

+ The current document is exported to a drawing document edited in %PRODUCTNAME Draw. The redacted text or contents is removed from the drawing document and replaced by the redaction block of pixels, preventing any attempt to restore or copy the original contents. The redacted drawing document is often exported to PDF for publication or sharing. + When redacting, the redaction shapes are transparent and in gray so the user can see what is being redacted. + The source document (text, spreadsheet or presentation) is not affected by redaction and can continue to be edited. + Save and share the in-redaction copies of the document with peers either in the modifiable (drawing) or the verbatim (PDF) format at your option. +

The redaction toolbar

+ The redaction toolbar consist of four tools + + + + + Rectangle Redaction tool icon + + + + The Rectangle Redaction tool is used to mark the content for redaction by drawing transparent rectangles covering the content. Use the handles to resize the redaction rectangle. + + +
+ + + + + Freeform Redaction tool icon + + + + The Freeform Redaction tool allows the user to mark the content for redaction by drawing free-form lines or polygons covering the content. + + +
+ + + + + White Redacted Export tool icon + Black Redacted Export tool icon + + + + The Redacted Export button box has two options: + + + Redacted Export (Black): finalize your document by converting the semitransparent redaction shapes to opaque black and export as pixels in the PDF file. + + + Redacted Export (White): finalize your document by converting the semitransparent redaction shapes to opaque white shapes, and export as pixels in the PDF file. + + + + +
+ + + + + Direct Export to PDF icon + + + + Direct Export to PDF: Makes an in-redaction copy of the document in PDF to share as a verbatim copy for review + + +
+
+ + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..724029a74 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + + Recording and Displaying Changes + /text/shared/guide/redlining.xhp + + + +marking changes + highlighting changes + changes; review function + review function; recording changes example + Track Changes, see review function + +

Recording and Displaying Changes +

+ The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + When several authors are working on the same text or spreadsheet, the review function records and displays who made the various changes. On the final edit of the document, it is then possible to look at each individual change and decide whether it should be accepted or rejected. + For example: You are an editor and are delivering your latest report. But before publication the report must be read by the senior editor and the proofreader, and both will add their changes. The senior editor writes "clarify" after one paragraph and crosses out another entirely. The proofreader corrects the spelling of your document. + The edited document comes back to you, and you can incorporate or ignore the suggestions of the two reviewers. + Let's say you also emailed a copy of the report to a good friend and colleague who has done research on a similar topic in the past. You asked for a few suggestions, and the document is now returned by email with your colleague's suggestions. + As all your colleagues and the managers in your company work with $[officename], you can produce a final version of the document from the results you get back. +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d2d59ac30 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + Accepting or Rejecting Changes + /text/shared/guide/redlining_accept.xhp + + + + + + changes; accepting or rejecting + review function;accepting or rejecting changes + +

Accepting or Rejecting Changes

+ The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + + +In Writer text documents you can also accept or reject changes by choosing commands from the context menu. + + +When you edit a document in which others have made changes, you can accept or reject the changes individually or all together. + + +If you have put multiple copies of the document in circulation, first merge these into one document (see Merging Versions). + + +Open the document and choose Edit - Track Changes - Manage. The Manage Changes dialog appears. + + +Select a change on the List tab. The change is selected and displayed in the document and you can now enter your decision with one of the buttons. + + +If one author has modified another author's change, you will see the changes hierarchically arranged with a plus sign for opening up the hierarchy. +If the list of changes is too long, you can switch to the Filter tab in the dialog and specify that you only want to see the changes of certain authors, or only the changes of the last day, or that you want the list to be restricted in some other way. +Color-coded entries display the result of the filter that is set. Entries in black can be accepted or rejected and match the filter criteria. Entries in blue do not themselves match the filter criteria, but have subentries that are included by the filter. Gray entries cannot be accepted or rejected and do not match the filter criterion. Green entries do match the filter but cannot be accepted or rejected. + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3f9161a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + +Comparing Versions of a Document +/text/shared/guide/redlining_doccompare.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +documents; comparing +comparisons;document versions +versions; comparing documents +changes;comparing to original +review function; comparing documents +mw made "comparing..." a two level entry +

Comparing Versions of a Document +

+The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. +Imagine you have some co-authors or reviewers who collaborate with you writing your original document. One day you send out copies of your document to all reviewers. You ask them to edit the copy and send it back. +Normally, the reviewers enable change tracking by Edit - Track Changes - Record and you can easily see the changes. +If one of the authors has made changes to a document without recording them, you can compare the changed document to your original document. + + +Open the reviewer's document and then choose Edit - Track Changes - Compare Document.changed workflow, see i72652 +You should always start with opening the newer document and compare it with the older document. + + +A file selection dialog appears. Select your older original document and confirm the dialog. + +%PRODUCTNAME combines both documents into the reviewer's document. All text passages that occur in the reviewer's document but not in the original are identified as having been inserted, and all text passages that got deleted by the reviewer are identified as deletions. + + +You can now accept or reject the insertions and deletions. At the end you may save the reviewer's document as a new original with a new name. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3a31a80dc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + +Merging Versions +/text/shared/guide/redlining_docmerge.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +documents; merging +merging; documents +versions;merging document versions + +

Merging Versions +

+The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. +When a document has been edited by more than one person, it is possible to merge the edited copies into the original. The only requirement is that the documents differ only and exclusively in the recorded changes - all other original text must be identical. + + +Open the original document into which you want to merge all copies. + + +Choose Edit - Track Changes - Merge Document. A file selection dialog appears. + + +Select the copy of the document from the dialog. If there have been no subsequent changes to the original document, the copy is merged into the original. +If changes have been made to the original document, an error dialog appears that informs you that the merge is unsuccessful. + + +After you merge the documents you will see the recorded changes from the copy in the original document. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dc8a94a03 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + Recording Changes + /text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp + + + +changes; recording + recording; changes + comments; on changes + review function;tracking changes +UFI: deleted index review function;recording changesMW changed "settings;tracking changes" +

Recording Changes +

+ The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + Not all changes are recorded. For example, the changing of a tab stop from align left to align right is not recorded. However, all usual changes made by a proofreader are recorded, such as additions, deletions, text alterations, and usual formatting. + + + To start recording changes, open the document to be edited and choose Edit - Track Changes and then choose Record. + + + Now start making your changes. You will note that all new text passages that you enter are underlined in color, while all text that you delete remains visible but is crossed out and shown in color. + + + If you move to a marked change with the mouse pointer, you will see a reference to the type of change, the author, date and time of day for the change in the Help Tip. If the Extended Tips are also enabled, you will also see any available comments on this change. + + + +Changes in a spreadsheet document are highlighted by a border around the cells; when you point to the cell you can see more detailed information on this change in the Help Tip. +You can enter a comment on each recorded change by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit - Track Changes - Comment. In addition to Extended Tips, the comment is also displayed in the list in the Manage Changes dialog. +To stop recording changes, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record again. The check mark is removed and you can now save the document. +In a text document, you can highlight all lines that you have changed with an additional colored marking. This can be in the form of a red line in the margin, for example. +To change the settings for tracking changes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes or on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..455005b6c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + Navigating Changes + /text/shared/guide/redlining_navigation.xhp + + + Muhammad Haggag. + + + + + changes; navigating + review function; navigating changes + +

Navigating Changes

+ This feature is Writer-specific. + There are two available commands to navigate changes in a Writer document: + + + + + Edit - Track Changes - Next: Jumps to and selects the next change in the document, if any. + + + Edit - Track Changes - Previous: Jumps to and selects the previous change in the document, if any. + + + Using these commands in conjunction with the Accept and Reject commands allows navigating, accepting and rejecting changes without invoking the Edit - Track Changes - Manage dialog. +
+ + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..014357029 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + +Protecting Records +/text/shared/guide/redlining_protect.xhp + + + + + + +changes; protecting +protecting; recorded changes +records; protecting +review function;protecting records + + mw added an index entry +

Protecting Changes +

+ The review function is available in %PRODUCTNAME for text documents and spreadsheet documents. + To protect the changes made in a document during editing, choose Edit - Track Changes - Protect. To turn off the function or to accept or reject changes it is necessary to enter the correct password first. + + + Choose Protect. This opens the Password dialog. + + + Enter a password consisting of at least one character and confirm it. Click OK. + + +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8b86ac495 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + +Version Management +/text/shared/guide/redlining_versions.xhp + + + +versions; of a document +documents; version management +version management + +

Version Management +

+The File menu contains a Versions command that enables you to save multiple versions of a document in the same file. +You can choose to view individual versions of a document, or you can display the differences between versions with color markings. +In the dialog to open a document, you can select from a combo box which version of this document you want to open. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3efdffd88 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Creating Round Corners +/text/shared/guide/round_corner.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +corner roundings +rectangles with round corners +legends;rounding corners +round corners +customizing;round corners +mw made "rectangles;..." a one level entry +Creating Round Corners + +When you insert a rectangle or a callout box using the drawing functions and activate the Points icon on the Drawing toolbar, you see a small frame at the upper left corner of the object. The frame indicates the amount by which the corners are rounded. When the frame is positioned at the top left corner, no rounding occurs. When the frame is positioned on the handle centered at the top of the object, the corners are rounded as much as possible. You adjust the degree of rounding by moving the frame between these two positions. + + + + +Mouse pointer as hand + + + +If you place the cursor on the box it changes to a hand symbol. You can now drag the box to change the amount of rounding. An outline shows a preview of the result. + + +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac9b091ae --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,217 @@ + + + + + + + + Scripting %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp + + + +assigning scripts + programming;scripting + form controls;assigning macros + pictures;assigning macros + hyperlinks;assigning macros + shortcut keys;assigning macros + controls;assigning macros (Basic) + menus;assigning macros + events;assigning scripts +MW deleted "programming;...", "scripting in programming", "BeanShell scripting", "Basic;..." and "java;..."MW added "controls;..", "menus;..." and "events;..." +Assigning Scripts in %PRODUCTNAME + + You can assign custom scripts (macros) to menu items, icons, dialog controls, and events in %PRODUCTNAME. + %PRODUCTNAME internally supports the following scripting languages: + + + %PRODUCTNAME Basic + + + JavaScript + + + BeanShell + + + Python + + + In addition, developers can use high-level languages, for example Java programming language, to control %PRODUCTNAME externally. The API reference is online at api.libreoffice.org. + To assign a script to a new menu entry + + + Choose Tools - Customize, and click the Menus tab. + + + Click Add. + + + In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "Application Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "Application Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select a script. + + + A list of the script functions appears in the Commands list box. Select a function. + + + Click Add to create a new menu assignment. The new menu entry appears in the Entries list box. + + + To assign a script to a key combination + + + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard. + + + In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "Application Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "Application Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Commands list box. Select any function. + + + Click the option button for %PRODUCTNAME or Writer (or whichever application is currently open). + Selecting the option button sets the scope of the new key combination to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. + + + Select a key combination from the Shortcut keys list box and click Modify. + + + To assign a script to an event + + + Choose Tools - Customize - Events. + + + Click Macro button. + + + In the Library list box, scroll down and open the "Application Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "Application Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Assigned Action list box. Select any function. + + + Select to save in %PRODUCTNAME or current document. + This sets the scope of the new event assignment to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. + + + Select an event from the list and click OK. + + + To assign a script to an event for an embedded object + + + Select the embedded object, for example a chart, in your document. + + + Choose Format - Frame and Object - Properties - Macro. + + + In the Macros list box, open the %PRODUCTNAME Scripts entry. + + + You see entries for share (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), user (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Existing macros in list box. Select any function. + + + Select an event from the list and click OK. + + + To assign a script to a hyperlink + + + Position the cursor inside the hyperlink. + + + Choose Insert - Hyperlink. + + + Click the Events button. + + + Select and assign as stated above. + + + To assign a script to a graphic + + + Select the graphic in your document. + + + Choose Format - Image - Properties - Macro. + + + Select and assign as stated above. + + + To assign a script to a form control + + + Insert a form control, for example a button: Open the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon, drag open a button on your document. + + + With the form control selected, click Control on the Form Controls toolbar. + + + Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. + + + Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. + + + To assign a script to a control in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog + + + Open the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog editor, then create a dialog with a control on it. + + + Right-click the control, then choose Properties. + + + Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. + + + Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e415a6f45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting Non-breaking Spaces, Hyphens and Soft Hyphens +/text/shared/guide/space_hyphen.xhp + + + +protected spaces;inserting +non-breaking spaces;inserting +spaces; inserting protected spaces +soft hyphens;inserting +hyphens;inserting custom +conditional separators +separators; conditional +dashes +non-breaking hyphens +replacing;dashes +protected hyphens +exchanging, see also replacing + +Inserting Non-breaking Spaces, Hyphens and Soft Hyphens + +Non-breaking spaces +To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line, hold down the Command key +Ctrl key and the Shift key when you type a space between the words. +In Calc, you cannot insert non-breaking spaces. +Non-breaking hyphen +An example of a non-breaking hyphen is a company name such as A-Z. Obviously you would not want A- to appear at the end of a line and Z at the beginning of the next line. To solve this problem, press Shift+CommandCtrl+ minus sign. In other words, hold down the Shift and CommandCtrl keys and press the minus key. +Replacing hyphens by dashes +In order to enter dashes, you can find under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options - Options the Replace dashes option. This option replaces one or two hyphens under certain conditions with an en-dash or an em-dash (see AutoCorrect Options). +For additional replacements see the replacements table under Tools - AutoCorrect - AutoCorrect Options +- Replace. Here you can, among other things, replace a shortcut automatically by a dash, even in another font. +Soft hyphen +To support automatic hyphenation by entering a soft hyphen inside a word yourself, use the keys Command +Ctrl+minus sign. The word is separated at this position when it is at the end of the line, even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off. + +Special characters + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..12275cf25 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Configuring Printer and Fax Under UNIX Based Platforms +/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp + + + +
+ +printers; adding, UNIX +default printer; UNIX +standard printer under UNIX +faxes; fax programs/fax printers under UNIX +printers; faxes under UNIX + + +Setting up Printer and Fax Under UNIX Based Platforms + +
+%PRODUCTNAME uses the installed fonts of your system. In a text document you can select from all printable fonts. In an HTML document or in Web layout, only fonts that are visible on screen are offered. In spreadsheets and drawings you can select from all installed fonts. + +Changing Printer Settings +In the Print dialog or the Printer Settings dialog, select the printer from the printers list box and click Properties. The Properties dialog appears containing several tab pages. This is where you can make settings that are used according to the PPD file of the selected printer. + + +On the Paper tab page, you can define the paper format and paper tray to be used as the default settings for this printer. + + +On the Device tab page, you can activate the special options for your printer. If your printer can only print in black and white, choose "grayscale" under Color, otherwise choose "color". If switching to grayscale leads to unfavorable results, you can also select "color" under Color and see how the printer or PostScript emulator applies it. Furthermore, on this tab page you can set the precision with which colors are described as well as the PostScript level. + + +Selecting a Default Printer + + +To make the printer selected from the Installed printers list box the default printer, double-click its name or click the Default button. + + + +Using Fax Functionality +If you have installed fax4CUPS on your computer you can send faxes with the $[officename] software. +A dialog prompting you for the phone numbers to send the fax to will appear after the printout when printing to a fax4CUPS printer. Multiple numbers can be entered separated by ; +In $[officename] you can also activate an icon for sending faxes to a default fax. To do this, choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars, click Add Commands and add from "Documents" the Send Default Fax icon. You can set which fax is used when this button is pressed under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +Remember to create one separate print job for each fax, otherwise, the first recipient will receive all the faxes. In the Tools - Mail Merge dialog select the Printer option and then select the Single print jobs check box. + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..74a7f95f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + +Creating and Changing Default and Custom Templates +/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp + + + +modifying, see changing +changing, see also editing and replacing +default templates; changing +default templates; creating +defaults;documents +custom templates +updating; templates +editing;templates +templates;editing and saving +saving;templates +resetting;templates + +

Creating and Changing Default and Custom Templates +

+
+When you open a new document with File - New, a blank document appears based on a $[officename] template. You can edit, modify, or replace this template so that the new document contains your customized Styles or other contents. +You can define document templates for each $[officename] application. +

Creating a Default Template

+ + +First, open either an existing $[officename] template and modify it, or open a new document and edit it as necessary to create the desired template. + + +Save the document by choosing File - Templates - Save as Template, then enter the template name, click the Set as default template checkbox, and save in the My Templates category. + + +The next time you open a new text document, the new document will be based on this new default template. + + +

Modifying a Default Template

+ + +Choose File - Templates - Manage Templates. + + + +Use Filter to select the type of document. + + + +The default template is marked with a green check mark. Right-click that template and choose Edit. + + +Make desired changes, choose File - Save, and close the document. + + + When you open a new document, the modified default template will be used. + + + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME provides built-in presentation templates, which cannot be edited, renamed, or deleted. To modify a built-in presentation template, open a document using the template, modify, then save as a new template. + + +%PRODUCTNAME provides built-in templates for Writer, which cannot be edited, renamed, or deleted. To modify a built-in template, open a document using the template, modify, then save as a new template. + + + + +

Setting a Template as Default

+ + + + + + Right-click on template to be made default, choose Set as Default. + + + +

Creating a Custom Template

+ + + + + + Choose File - Templates - Save As Template, then enter the template name, choose a Template category, and save. + + + +

Modifying a Custom Template

+ + + + + + Right-click on the template to be modified, and choose Edit. + + + + + + + +

Saving a Template in the Template Folder

+You can save any document as a template by selecting "Template" file type in the Save dialog. To access the template from the Template Manager, save the template in the User Paths directory specified for Templates in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. It is often easier to save a document with File - Templates - Save As Template, because it automatically places the template in the appropriate directory. + +The Template Manager is the preferred method for working with templates. File - New - Templates and File - Templates - Manage Templates are equivalent for opening the Template Manager. CommandCtrl+Shift+N is the predefined shortcut key. +
+
+ + + + + +Templates +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6cfe595e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,640 @@ + + + + + + Starting $[officename] Software With Parameters + /text/shared/guide/start_parameters.xhp + + + +
+ + start parameters + command line parameters + parameters;command line + arguments in command line + +

Starting $[officename] Software With Parameters

+ By starting $[officename] software from the command line you can assign various parameters, with which you can influence the performance. The use of command line parameters is only recommended for experienced users. + For normal handling, the use of command line parameters is not necessary. A few of the parameters require a deeper knowledge of the technical background of $[officename] software technology. +

Starting $[officename] Software From the Command Line

+ + + + + Search for Run in the Windows Start menu. + + + Type the following text in the Open text field and click OK. + + + "{install}\program\soffice.com" {parameter} + Replace {install} with the path to your installation of %PRODUCTNAME software (for example, C:\Program Files\%PRODUCTNAME). Use soffice.exe instead of soffice.com, when you do not need console (e.g., you do not use command-line interface for headless operations). + + + + + + + Open a shell under Linux, *BSD, or macOS platforms. + + + Type the following line of text, then press Return: + {install}/program/soffice {parameter} + Replace {install} with the path to your installation of %PRODUCTNAME software (for example, /opt/%PRODUCTNAME in UNIX) + + + + +

Valid Command Line Parameters

+

Using without special arguments

+ Using without any arguments opens the start center. + + + + {file} + + + Tries to open the file (files) in the components suitable for them. + + + + + {file} macro:///[Library.Module.MacroName] + + + Opens the file and applies specified macros from the file. + + +
+

Getting help and information

+ + + + Parameter + + + Meaning + + + + + --help / -h / -? + + + Lists the available command line parameters to the console. + + + + + --helpwriter + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Writer. + + + + + --helpcalc + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Calc. + + + + + --helpdraw + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Draw. + + + + + --helpimpress + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Impress. + + + + + --helpbase + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Base. + + + + + --helpbasic + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Basic scripting language. + + + + + --helpmath + + + Opens $[officename] built-in or online Help on Math. + + + + + --version + + + Shows $[officename] version and quits. + + + + + --nstemporarydirectory + + + (macOS sandbox only) Returns path of the temporary directory for the current user and exits. Overrides all other arguments. + + +
+ +

General arguments

+ + + + + + + + + + + + --quickstart[=no] + + + Activates[Deactivates] the Quickstarter service. It can take only one parameter no which deactivates the Quickstarter service. Without parameters this service is activated. + + + + + --nolockcheck + + + Disables check for remote instances using the installation. + + + + + --infilter=InputFilterName
[:InputFilterParam[,param]] + + + Forces an input filter type, if possible. For example: + --infilter="Calc Office Open XML" + --infilter="Text (encoded):UTF8,LF,Liberation Mono,en-US". + + + + + + + --pidfile={file} + + + Store soffice.bin pid to {file}. + + + + + --display {display} + + + Sets the DISPLAY environment variable on UNIX-like platforms to the value {display}. This parameter is only supported by the start script for $[officename] software on UNIX-like platforms. + + +
+ +

User/programmatic interface control

+ + + + + + + + + + + + --nologo + + + Disables the splash screen at program start. + + + + + --minimized + + + Starts minimized. The splash screen is not displayed. + + + + + --nodefault + + + Starts without displaying anything except the splash screen. + + + + + --invisible + + + Starts in invisible mode. + Neither the start-up logo nor the initial program window will be visible. $[officename] software can be controlled, and documents and dialogs can be controlled and opened via the API. + Using the parameter, $[officename] can only be ended using the taskmanager (Windows) or the kill command (UNIX-like systems). + It cannot be used in conjunction with --quickstart. + More information is found in $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + + + + --headless + + + Starts in "headless mode" which allows using the application without user interface. + This special mode can be used when the application is controlled by external clients via the API. + + + + + --norestore + + + Disables restart and file recovery after a system crash. + + + + + --safe-mode + + + Starts in a safe mode, i.e. starts temporarily with a fresh user profile and helps to restore a broken configuration. + + + + + --accept={UNO} + + + Notifies $[officename] software that upon the creation of "UNO Acceptor Threads", a "UNO Accept String" will be used. + UNO-URL is string the such kind uno:connection-type,params;protocol-name,params;ObjectName. + More information is found in $[officename] Developer's Guide. + + + + + --unaccept={UNO-URL} + + + Closes an acceptor that was created with --accept={UNO-URL}. Use --unaccept=all to close all open acceptors. + + + + + --language={lang} + + + Uses specified language, if language is not selected yet for UI. The lang is a tag of the language in IETF language tag. + + +
+ +

Developer arguments

+ + + + + + + + + + + + --terminate_after_init + + + Exit after initialization complete (no documents loaded). + + + + + --eventtesting + + + Exit after loading documents. + + +
+ + + Unix and Linux user can invoke %PRODUCTNAME with these additional parameters for debugging purposes. + + + + Parameter + + + Meaning + + + + + --record + + + An enhanced debugger. + + + + + --backtrace + + + Prints the backtrace of the entire stack. + + + + + --strace + + + strace is a diagnostic, debugging and instructional userspace utility for Linux. + + + + + --valgrind + + + Automatically detect many memory management and threading bugs, and profile the program in detail. + + +
+ The debug options --record, --backtrace, --strace and --valgrind cannot be used together. Please use them one by one. + + + +

New document creation arguments

+ The arguments create an empty document of specified kind. Only one of them may be used in one command line. If filenames are specified after an argument, then it tries to open those files in the specified component. + + + + + + + + + + + + --writer + + + Starts with an empty Writer document. + + + + + --calc + + + Starts with an empty Calc document. + + + + + --draw + + + Starts with an empty Draw document. + + + + + --impress + + + Starts with an empty Impress document. + + + + + --math + + + Starts with an empty Math document. + + + + + --global + + + Starts with an empty Writer master document. + + + + + --web + + + Starts with an empty HTML document. + + +
+

File open arguments

+ The arguments define how following filenames are treated. New treatment begins after the argument and ends at the next argument. The default treatment is to open documents for editing, and create new documents from document templates. + + + + + + + + + + + + -n + + + Treats following files as templates for creation of new documents. + + + + + -o + + + Opens following files for editing, regardless whether they are templates or not. + + + + + --pt {Printername} + + + Prints the following files to the printer {Printername} and ends. The splash screen does not appear. + If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. + If used multiple times, only last {Printername} is effective for all documents of all --pt runs. + Also, --printer-name argument of --print-to-file switch interferes with {Printername}. + + + + + -p + + + Prints following files to the default printer, after which those files are closed. The splash screen does not appear. + If the file name contains spaces, then it must be enclosed in quotation marks. + + + + + --view + + + Opens following files in viewer mode (read-only). + + + + + --show + + + Opens and starts the following presentation documents of each immediately. Files are closed after the showing. Files other than Impress documents are opened in default mode , regardless of previous mode. + + + + + --convert-to OutputFileExtension
[:OutputFilterName
[:OutputFilterParams[,param]]]
[--outdir output_dir] + + +
+ If --convert-to is used more than once, last value of OutputFileExtension[:OutputFilterName[:OutputFilterParams]] is effective. If --outdir is used more than once, only its last value is effective. For example: + --convert-to pdf *.doc + --convert-to pdf:writer_pdf_Export --outdir /home/user *.doc + --convert-to "html:XHTML Writer File:UTF8" *.doc + --convert-to "txt:Text (encoded):UTF8" *.doc +
+
+ See the list of document filters for file conversion. + The list of filter options for Lotus, dBase and Diff files. + The list of filter options for CSV files. +
+ + + + + --print-to-file [--printer-name printer_name] [--outdir output_dir] + + + Batch print files to file. If --outdir is not specified, then current working directory is used as output_dir. + If --printer-name or --outdir used multiple times, only last value of each is effective. Also, {Printername} of --pt switch interferes with --printer-name. For example: + --print-to-file *.doc + --print-to-file --printer-name nasty_lowres_printer --outdir /home/user *.doc + + + + + --cat + + + Applies filter "txt:Text" to the following text documents and dump text content to console (implies --headless). Cannot be used with --convert-to. + + + + + -env:VAR[=VALUE] + + + Set a bootstrap variable. For example, to set a non-default user profile path: + + + soffice.com -env:UserInstallation=file:///c:/my-test-profile + open LibreOffice.app -env:UserInstallation=file:///tmp/test + soffice -env:UserInstallation=file:///tmp/test + + + + +
+

Ignored switches

+ + + + + + + + + + + + -psn + + + Ignored (macOS only) + + + + + -Embedding + + + Ignored (COM+ related; Windows only) + + + + + --nofirststartwizard + + + Does nothing, accepted only for backward compatibility. + + + + + --protector {arg1} {arg2} + + + Used only in unit tests and should have two arguments. + + +
+
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..747a2b92f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Start Center + /text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp + + + +backing window + start center + + + + + +

Start Center

+Welcome to %PRODUCTNAME. Thank you for using the %PRODUCTNAME application help. Press F1 whenever you need help using %PRODUCTNAME. +You see the Start Center when no document is open in %PRODUCTNAME. It is divided into two panes. Click a button on the left pane to open a new document or a file dialog. +

Open existing files

+ +The Open File button presents a file open dialog. + +The Remote Files button presents a Remote files dialog to open files stored on remote servers. + + + +Click the Recent Documents button to show thumbnails of the most recent documents you opened in the right side of the window. Hover your mouse over the thumbnail to highlight the document, display a tip about the document location and display an icon on the top right to delete the thumbnail from the pane and from the recent files list. Click on the thumbnail to open the document underneath. +You can remove an item from the Recent Documents list by clicking the button in the upper-right corner of the icon. The document itself is not deleted. You can remove all items on the Recent Documents list by pressing the Recent Documents dropdown button and selecting Clear Recent Documents. + +

Working with Templates

+Click the Templates button to display templates for all applications in the right side of the window. +Click the down arrow after the Templates button to open a menu where you can select a filter to display templates by application type or open the Template Manager dialog. +Right click on a template in the right pane to open a menu where you can either open the template to create a new document based on the template or edit the template itself. +

Create:

+ + + + + + +The document buttons each open a new document of the specified type. + + + + Writer Document opens %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + + Calc Spreadsheet opens %PRODUCTNAME Calc + + + + Impress Presentation opens %PRODUCTNAME Impress + + + + Draw Drawing opens %PRODUCTNAME Draw + + + + Math Formula opens %PRODUCTNAME Math + + + + Base Database opens %PRODUCTNAME Base + + + + +The Extensions button opens the https://extensions.libreoffice.org/ page, where you can download templates and additional features for %PRODUCTNAME. + +Encrypted files will not display a thumbnail image of its content. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5ae535ee7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inserting and Editing Tab Stops +/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +tab stops; inserting and editing +paragraphs; tab stops +defaults;tab stops in text +editing; tab stops +inserting;tab stops +decimal tab stops +deleting;tab stops +moving;tab stops on ruler +rulers; default settings +rulers; measurement units +measurement units; changing on rulers +MW deleted "text;" +Inserting and Editing Tab Stops + + + + + +On the horizontal ruler you can see the tab stops for the current paragraph. If you want to change the tab stops, you should first consider the scope to which you want to change tab stops as follows: + + + Change the default tab stops for all documents: Use the menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. + + +Change the tab stops for all paragraphs using the current Paragraph Style: Right-click the paragraph to open the context menu, choose Edit Paragraph Style, click Tabs. + + +Change the tab stops for one or more paragraphs: Select the paragraphs, then click inside the ruler. + + +In the following, you find instructions for all above mentioned tasks. +You can set a tab stop by clicking on the ruler or by selecting Format - Paragraph - Tabs. Both methods affect the current paragraph or all selected paragraphs. +Click the ruler once to set a left-justified tab. Right-click a tab icon on the ruler to see the context menu in which you can change the tab type. +To set several decimal tabs one after the other, keep clicking the icon to the left of the ruler until the desired tab type is shown, then click on the ruler. + + + +Selection + + +Description: + + + + + +Icon + + + +Setting left tabs + + + + + +Icon + + + +Setting right tabs + + + + + +Icon + + + +Setting decimal tabs + + + + + +Icon + + + +Setting centered tabs + + +
+ +Double-click the ruler to open the Paragraph dialog. +Double-click the white area of the ruler to set one tab. The Paragraph dialog appears with the Tabs tab page open. +Moving Tabs on the Ruler + + +Move individual tab stops on the ruler using the mouse. + + +To move several tab stops on the ruler, press the Shift key before you click a tab. Drag one tab while continuing to press Shift to move that tab as well as all the tabs to the right of it. The spacing between those tabs remains the same. + + +Press Command +Ctrl when you drag a tab on the ruler to move that tab and all the tabs to the right of it. This results in the spacing between those tabs changing proportionally to their distance from the margin. + + +Changing the Properties of Tabs +To change tab type, click the tab you want to change on the ruler, then right-click to open the context menu. +Deleting Tabs +To delete a tab, hold down the mouse button while you drag the tab outside the ruler. + + +Changing the Defaults +If you want to change the settings of your default tab stops, you will find further information under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General +%PRODUCTNAME Calc - General +%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General +%PRODUCTNAME Impress - General +(module name) - General in the Options dialog box. + + + + + The context menu of the ruler allows you to change the displayed units of measurement. These changes are only valid until you exit $[officename], and they only apply to the ruler on whose context menu you made the change. If you want to change the ruler measurement units permanently, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - [Document type] - View and change the measurement unit there. + + + + +
+Ruler +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e6eef9ae6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,359 @@ + + + + + + + Template Manager + /text/shared/guide/template_manager.xhp + + + + + +
+ + + + template manager;filter + template manager;category + template manager;set as default + template manager;import + template manager;export + template manager;settings + templates;template manager + + +

Manage Templates

+The Template Manager dialog makes it easy to manage templates and allows you to start new documents using templates. +
+ +
+Choose menu File - New – Templates. +Choose menu File – Template – Manage Templates. +Enter CommandCtrl+Shift+N in any %PRODUCTNAME module. +Press the Templates button in the Start Center. +Select any template type from the Templates button of the Start Center. +
+ +Templates save editing time by starting new documents with pre-filled contents and formatting. The Template Manager allows you to access and organize templates in %PRODUCTNAME. +%PRODUCTNAME comes with a set of built-in templates that can be used to create documents, presentations, spreadsheets or drawings. You may use templates available in the template manager, create your own templates or browse online for additional templates. + +Make use of categories to organize your templates. Create new templates or download templates and organize in the Template Manager. Use templates to save time for repetitive documents. + +

Main Window – Template Choices

+Previews of available templates show up in the main window based on your search and filtering choices. Double-click on any template icon to open a new document with the contents and formatting of the template. +Choose Thumbnail View or List View, at the bottom left, to change how the templates are displayed. + + + + +Thumbnail View Icon + + + + Thumbnail View + + +
+ + + + +List View Icon + + + + Listview + + +
+ +To show templates from another folder in the My Templates category, choose %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences - Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, select Templates, press Edit, then press Add to open the file dialog for selecting the folder to add. + + +

Search

+You may search for a template by entering text in the search box at the top left. The Main window shows the templates found. + + +

Filter

+You may filter for: All Applications, Text Documents, Spreadsheets, Presentations or Drawings by choosing an option from the dropdown box at the top-center. The main window displays the filtered templates. + + +

Categories

+Categories are folders where you place your templates. All templates are placed in a category, and can only be placed in one category. You may choose from the default categories: All Categories, My Templates, Business Correspondence, MediaWiki, Other Business Documents, Personal Correspondence and Documents, Presentations or Styles. You may also create new categories for your personal use. Press Manage at the top right corner of the Template Manager, then select New Category to create a new category. +It is possible to move user-defined templates and copy built-in templates to another category. Use the Move option, found by right-clicking an individual template. +Categories inside a category are not allowed. + + +

Manage

+Press Manage at the top right corner to open the Manage menu. The options are: New Category, Import, and Extensions. If a template is set as default, then the option Reset Default appears. If a user-defined category is selected, then Rename Category and Delete Category also appear. + +

New Category

+If you want to create a new category to place a template, then select this option. + + + + + +New Category Icon + + + + New Category + + +
+ +

Reset Default

+This option appears only if you have set a template as default. Use this command to remove that setting. Use Filter to specify which application template will be reset. Select All Applications in Filter to reset templates for all applications. + + +

Import

+If you want to import one or more templates into the Template Manager, then select Import, choose the Category where the imported templates should be placed, then select the files to be imported. + + + + +Import Icon + + + + Import + + +
+ + +

Extensions

+To browse for more templates online, choose Extensions to open a search window. You can also search for templates at https://extensions.libreoffice.org. + + + + +Extensions Icon + + + + Extensions + + +
+ +

Actions with Individual Templates

+ +

Open

+Select a template in the main window and right-click and then choose Open, press Enter or double click to open a new document using that template. +You can also use the Open button on the bottom right to open a new document using the selected template. + + + + +Open Icon + + + + Open + + +
+ +

Edit

+Select a template in the main window and right-click and then choose Edit to edit the template. For built-in templates, it is possible to edit a copy. + + + + + +Edit Icon + + + + Edit + + +
+ +

Set as Default

+Select a template in the main window and right-click and then choose Set as Default to set the template as the default template. This will cause a green tick to appear next to the selected template and the template will automatically load when a new document is created using the matching application. + + + + +Set as Default Icon + + + + Set as Default + + +
+ +

Rename

+Select a template in the main window and right-click and then choose Rename to rename the template. This will cause a dialog box to appear where a new name may be chosen for the template. Type in the name and then choose OK or choose Cancel to revert to the name that is already set. + + + + + +Rename Icon + + + + Rename + + +
+ +

Delete

+Select one or more templates to delete in the main window and press the Delete key, or right-click then choose Delete to delete the selected template(s). A dialog box will appear requesting confirmation. Choose Yes to delete or No to cancel. + + + + + +Delete Icon + + + + Delete + + +
+ +Built-in templates cannot be edited, renamed or deleted. + + +

Move

+If you want to move templates to a different category, then choose a template, or use CommandCtrl+click to select additional templates, then right-click and choose Move to open a dialog box, where you can choose to move your selection to a different category or to a new category. Built-in templates cannot be moved, but copies can be created in other categories. + + + + + +Move Icon + + + + Move + + +
+ + +

Export

+Choose a template in the main window, or use CommandCtrl+click to select additional templates, and then right-click and select Export to export your selection to a folder on your computer. + + + + +Export Icon + + + + Export + + +
+To move or export all templates in a Category, press CommandCtrl+A, then choose Move or Export. + +

Examples

+ +

Example 1 – Creating a Business Letter

+ + + + Open %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + Press CommandCtrl+Shift+N or choose File - New - Templates to open the Template Manager + + + Type “business letter” into the search box + + + Choose one of the templates from the main window by double-clicking on it or select and press Enter. + + + A new document using that template is created in a new instance of %PRODUCTNAME Writer + + + Change text and logo as needed + + + +

Example 2 – Import Template – Personal Budget Spreadsheet

+ + + + Open %PRODUCTNAME Calc + + + Press CommandCtrl+Shift+N or choose File - New - Templates to open the Template Manager + + + Click on Manage and choose Extensions to browse for online templates. + + + Search for the Personal Budget Template, then download it + + + Open Template Manager and choose the Import button + + + Select a category to save the new template in, for example, My Templates, and press OK. + + + Browse to the folder where you downloaded the template, select it and press Open + + + The Template is now available in the category you chose. + + + +

Example 3 – %PRODUCTNAME Impress – Presentation Template

+ + + + Open %PRODUCTNAME Impress + + + The Template Manager opens automatically when you open %PRODUCTNAME Impress + + + Choose a template for your presentation, filter by categories or search + + + You may also use the context menu, import a template, or search online for a template. + + + A few features in the Template Manager are not available when first opened automatically. After starting %PRODUCTNAME Impress you may run the Template Manager again to access all features. + + + +
+Refer to https://extensions.libreoffice.org for templates to download. +See Chapter 3 – Using Styles and Templates in the Getting Started Guide. +See Creating a Document Template for related information. +See Templates and Styles for related information. + +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f21424b18 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing the Color of Text + /text/shared/guide/text_color.xhp + + + +text; coloring + characters; coloring + colors; fonts + fonts;colors +MW added two entries from text/shared/01/05020200.xhp and deleted "colors;fill format" +Changing the Color of Text + + Click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to activate a toolbar from which you can choose from a range of colors. + + + + +Icon + + + + Font Color + + +
+ + + + + +Icon + + + +paint can symbol + +The following only applies to %PRODUCTNAME Writer: If you click the icon with a short-click while no text is selected, then the mouse pointer changes its appearance and is displayed as a paint can. Use this paint can symbol with the mouse key pressed to drag across a text area. This text area takes the selected color. The function remains active for as long as the icon is pressed, or until you click without dragging, or until you press the Escape key. + + +
+ + The following applies to all modules (%PRODUCTNAME Writer, Calc, Draw, Impress): Select the text that is to take another color, then click the color you want on the toolbar. + + + Font color + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a15381b89 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode + /text/shared/guide/textmode_change.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + text; overwriting or inserting + overwrite mode + insert mode for entering text + +

+ + Switching Between Insert Mode and Overwrite Mode + +

+ + + +

With the keyboard:

+ Press Insert to toggle between overwrite mode and insert mode. The current mode is displayed on the Status Bar. + The text cursor must be enabled in the cell or in the input line. + + + +

With the mouse:

+ On the Status Bar, click on the area indicating the current mode in order to switch to the other mode: + + + + Insert + + + + Insert mode is active. + The area in the status bar is blank, when Insert mode is active. + The text cursor is a blinking vertical line. Click on the area to activate the overwrite mode. + + + + + + + Overwrite + + The overwrite mode is active. The text cursor is a blinking block. Click on the area to activate insert mode. + + + + + Keyboard commands + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..927f18f76 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + Tip of the day + /text/shared/guide/tipoftheday.xhp + + + + + +tip of the day + +
+ +

Tip of the Day

+ The Tip of the Day dialog displays useful tips for the user. +
+
+Choose Help - Show Tip of the day. +
+ +The set of tips is collected from several %PRODUCTNAME community web pages, and is updated on each new release of the software. +The tip of the day is not specific to the current module. +

Show tips on startup

+Displays a dialog with a random tip on %PRODUCTNAME startup. + +

Next Tip

+Displays another tip of the day in the same dialog. + +

OK

+Close the Tip of the Day dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c295dd1b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + +Undoing Direct Formatting for a Document +/text/shared/guide/undo_formatting.xhp + + +undoing direct formatting in the whole document + + + +undoing;direct formatting +direct formatting;undoing all +deleting;all direct formatting +text attributes;undoing +formatting;undoing +restoring;default formatting +MW deleted "removing;..." +Undoing Direct Formatting for a Document + +You can undo all formatting that has not been made by styles in a few steps. + +Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Writer Document + + + Press CommandCtrl+A to select the whole text. + + +Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + + +Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Calc Spreadsheet + + +While pressing the Shift key click the first and then the last sheet tab to select all sheets. + + +Press CommandCtrl+A to select the whole text. + + +Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + + +Removing all Direct Formatting in a $[officename] Presentation + + +Click the Outline tab to open outline view. + + +Press CommandCtrl+A to select the whole text. + + +Choose Format - Clear Direct Formatting. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..eaa75da29 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + Versions and Build Numbers + /text/shared/guide/version_number.xhp + + + + +versions; $[officename] +build numbers of $[officename] +copyright for $[officename] + +Versions and Build Numbers + + + Choose Help - About $[officename]. This opens a dialog containing information about the program. + + + See lists of code and Wiki contributors on the LibreOffice website. + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5bc8d566b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Viewing File Properties +/text/shared/guide/viewing_file_properties.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+properties;files +files;properties +viewing;file properties + +Viewing File Properties + + +File properties, such as author name, subject, and keywords, help you manage and identify your documents. $[officename] also tracks file statistics, including the number of words and the number of pages in a document, and automatically adds the statistics as part of the file property. +You can view file properties for the current document or for a document in the Windows File Open dialog +. +To view file properties for the current document: + + +Choose File - Properties. + + + + +To view file properties for a document listed in the Windows File Open dialog + + +Choose File - Open. + + +Select a file in the list. + + +Right-click and choose Properties. + + + + +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e83e2768e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing Your Working Directory + /text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp + + + +
+working directory change + My Documents folder;changing work directory + paths; changing work directory + pictures; changing paths + changing;work directory +work --> working, i85615 +Changing Your Working Directory + + When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your working directory. To change this directory: + + + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. + + + Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. + + + In the Select Path dialog, choose the working directory you want and click Select. + + + You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Images, then follow step 3. +
+ + Paths + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b0520242 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + +XML Form Documents (XForms) +/text/shared/guide/xforms.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +web documents;XForms +forms;XForms +XML Forms, see XForms +XForms;opening/editing +editing;XForms +opening;XForms + + MW made a cross-reference of "XML Forms" and made a two level entry of "XForms" + XML Form Documents (XForms) + XForms are a new type of web form that was developed by the World Wide Web Consortium. The XForm model is defined in Extensible Markup Language (XML). The model uses separate sections to describe what a form does and what a form looks like. You can view the specification for XForms at: https://www.w3.org/MarkUp/Forms/. + +
+ Working with XForms + In %PRODUCTNAME, an XForms document is a special type of Writer document. The Design Mode for an XForm document has additional toolbars and panes. + After you create and save an XForms document, you can open the document, fill out the form, and submit the changes to a server. + What's the role of UBL?We do not officially support exporting to XHTML - but should be possible using XSLT + To Create a New XForms Document + + + Choose File - New - XML Form Document. + The XForms design window opens in an empty Writer document. + + + Design your form. + + + + + Insert a control, select the default model in the property browser, and enter a binding statement. + + + In the Data Navigator, add an element to the instance. + + + Load a new instance from an XML file and add controls to the relevant XML elements or attributes. + + + To Open an XForms Document + + + Choose File - Open and select the XForms document. An XForm document has the same extension as a Writer text document (*.odt). + + + To Edit an XForms Document + Open the XForms document and use the following toolbars and windows: + + + Form Design toolbar + + + Form Controls toolbar + + + Data Navigator + + + Form Navigator + + + UFI: currently only StarOffice can render and evaluate our XForms docs. Mozilla has announced a planned support recently. There may be plugins for other browsers. Should we tell the user? + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..72d536859 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Working With %PRODUCTNAME XML Filters +/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter.xhp + + + + + + +saving;to XML loading;XML files importing;from XML exporting;to XML file filters;XML +XSLT filters, see also XML filters + + mw moved 2 index entries to the new file xsltfilter_distribute.xhp and 2 entries to new file xsltfilter_create.xhp + About XML Filters + + %PRODUCTNAME stores documents in XML format. You can create customized filters that convert the native OpenDocument XML file format used by %PRODUCTNAME into another format. These filters can be integrated into %PRODUCTNAME seamlessly so that you can save or load these formats transparently. + To create an XML filter, you must have a good understanding of XML and XSLT concepts. These concepts are beyond the scope of this help. + An XML filter contains stylesheets that are written in the XSLT language. The stylesheets define the transformation from the OpenDocument file format to another XML format through export and import filters. There are three types of XML filters: + + + Import Filters - load external XML files and transform the format of the files into the OpenDocument XML file format. After you install an import filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog. + + + Export Filters - transform OpenDocument XML files and save the files to a different XML format. After you install an export filter, the name of the filter is added to the list of file types in the Export dialog. + + + Import/Export Filters - load and save OpenDocument XML files into a different XML format. After you install these filters, the names of the filters are added to the list of file types in the File Open dialog and the File Save As dialog. + + +
+ + World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Stylesheet Language (XSL) + World Wide Web Consortium Pages on Extensible Markup Language (XML) + + Distributing XML filters + Creating and Testing XML filters + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c789d1f31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + Creating XML Filters + /text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_create.xhp + + + + +testing XML filters +XML filters; creating/testing + + mw moved 2 index entries from xsltfilter.xhp, then changed "XML filters;" +Creating XML Filters +Creating an XML Filter for %PRODUCTNAME + When you create an XML filter for %PRODUCTNAME, you need to design an XSLT stylesheet that can convert to and from the OpenDocument XML file format. + For more information about the OpenDocument XML format, go to https://www.openoffice.org/xml/. + If you want, you can include a template with your filter to apply %PRODUCTNAME styles to an XML document that you import. +To Create an XML Filter + + + Create an XSLT transformation stylesheet that maps the elements of the external XML format to the elements of the OpenDocument XML file format and back again. + + + Create a template that assigns %PRODUCTNAME styles to elements in the external XML format when you import a file in this format into %PRODUCTNAME. + + + In %PRODUCTNAME Writer, create a text document, and choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + Click New. + + + In the XML Filter dialog, click the General tab, and define the properties of the filter. + + + + + In the Filter Name box, enter a name for the XML filter. + This name is displayed in the XML Filter Settings dialog. + + + In the Application box, select the %PRODUCTNAME application that the filter is for. + + + In the Name of File Type box, enter the file type that the filter is for. + This name is displayed in the list of file types in the Open, Export, and Save As dialogs. + + + In the File extension box, enter the extension for the exported file. + To differentiate the file from other XML files, enter an extension other than *.xml. + + + + + On the Transformation tab page, define the transformation properties for the filter. + + + + + (Optional) In the DocType box, enter the document type identifier for the external file format. + This identifier is used to detect the file type on import. + + + In the XSLT for export box, enter the path and file name of the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from OpenDocument format to the external format. + + + In the XSLT for import box, enter the path and file name to the XSLT stylesheet that defines the transformation from the external format to OpenDocument format. + + + (Optional) In the Template for import box, enter the path and name of the template that defines the %PRODUCTNAME styles that are used in the imported file. + The files that are specified on the Transformation tab page are copied to the local %PRODUCTNAME users directory. + + + + + Click OK. + + +To Test an XML Filter + You can perform basic tests on a custom XML filter in %PRODUCTNAME. + The document is not altered by these tests. + + + Create or open a text document. + + + Choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + In the list of filters, select the filter that you want to test, and click Test XSLTs. + + + To test an Export filter, do one of the following in the Export area of the dialog: + + + + + Click Browse, select the %PRODUCTNAME document that you want to test, and click Open. + + + To test the current document, click Current Document. + + + + + To test an Import filter, click Browse in the Import area of the dialog, select a document, and click Open. + + +
+ About XML Filters + Distributing XML filters +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..63c9eb425 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Distributing an XML filter as package +/text/shared/guide/xsltfilter_distribute.xhp + + + + + + +distributing XML filters +deleting;XML filters +XML filters;saving as package/installing/deleting +installing;XML filters + + mw moved 2 index entries from xsltfilter.xhp and added 2 entries + Distributing An XML Filter As Package + + You can distribute an XML filter to multiple users using a special package format. + To Save an XML Filter as a Package + The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is open. + + + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + Select the filter that you want to distribute and click Save As Package. + + + To Install an XML Filter from a Package + The XML Filter Settings dialog is only available when a text document is opened. + + + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + Click Open Package and select the package file with the filter you want to install. + + + To Delete an Installed XML Filter + + + In Writer, choose Tools - XML Filter Settings. + + + Select the filter you want to delete and click Delete. + + +
+ + About XML Filters + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c14ea4a62 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + Help Page Strings + /text/shared/help/browserhelp.xhp + + + + Module + Language + Contents + Index + Search in all modules + Search in chosen module + + %PRODUCTNAME %PRODUCTVERSION Help + Click on text to copy to clipboard + Select Module + Select Language + Search help contents + Enable JavaScript in the browser to display %PRODUCTNAME Help pages. + + + English (USA) + Amharic + Arabic + Asturian + Bulgarian + Bengali + Bengali (India) + Tibetan + Bosnian + Catalan + Valencian Catalan + Czech + Danish + German + Dzongkha + Greek + English (UK) + English (SA) + Esperanto + Spanish + Estonian + Basque + Finnish + French + Galician + Gujarati + Hebrew + Hindi + Croatian + Hungarian + Indonesian + Icelandic + Italian + Japanese + Georgian + Khmer + Korean + Lao + Lithuanian + Latvian + Macedonian + Norwegian Bokmål + Nepali + Dutch + Norwegian Nynorsk + Oromo + Polish + Portuguese + Brazilian Portuguese + Romanian + Russian + Sinhala + Sidama + Slovak + Slovenian + Albanian + Swedish + Tamil + Tajik + Turkish + Uyghur + Ukrainian + Vietnamese + Chinese (Simplified) + Chinese (Traditional) + + Next + Previous + Modified: + Searching $nice{$dbsize} documents + All $nice{$msize} matches + Search took $time seconds + No documents match your query + Matching all words + Matching any words + of about $nice{$msize} matches + of exactly $nice{$msize} matches + Term frequencies: + matching: + Mark this document as relevant + Did you mean: +

External video

+ Please accept this video. By accepting you will be accessing content from YouTube, a service provided by an external third party. + + Accept YouTube Content + YouTube Privacy Policy + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef54e2ff9 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Help + /text/shared/main0108.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Help

+The Help menu allows you to start and control the $[officename] Help system. +
+ +
+ +

$[officename] Help

+Opens the main page of the $[officename] Help for the current application. You can scroll through the Help pages and you can search for index terms or any text. +
+ +
+ + + + Icon Help + + + %PRODUCTNAME Help + + +
+
+ + + + +

User Guides

+Opens the documentation page in the web browser, where users can download, read or purchase %PRODUCTNAME user guides, written by the community. + + +

Get Help Online

+Opens the community support page in the web browser. Use this page to ask questions on using %PRODUCTNAME. For professional support with service level agreement, refer to the page of professional %PRODUCTNAME support. + + + +

Send Feedback

+Opens a feedback form in the web browser, where users can report software bugs. + + +

Restart in Safe Mode

+ Safe mode is a mode where %PRODUCTNAME temporarily starts with a fresh user profile and disables hardware acceleration. It helps to restore a non-working %PRODUCTNAME instance. + + +

Get Involved

+ Opens the community Get Involved page in the web browser. The page describe areas of interest where you can collaborate with the %PRODUCTNAME community. + +

Donate to %PRODUCTNAME

+%PRODUCTNAME is Free Software and is made available free of charge. +Your donation, which is purely optional, supports our worldwide community. +If you like the software, please consider a donation. + + +

License Information

+Displays the Licensing and Legal information dialog. + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Credits

+Displays the CREDITS.odt document which lists the names of individuals who have contributed to OpenOffice.org source code (and whose contributions were imported into %PRODUCTNAME) or %PRODUCTNAME since 2010-09-28. + + +

Check for Updates

+Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. + + +

About $[officename]

+Displays general program information such as version number and copyrights. +
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..10dfacdb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + +Standard Bar +/text/shared/main0201.xhp + + + +
+ +

Standard Bar

+The Standard bar is available in every $[officename] application. +
+ + +

Open File

+ + + + +

Save As

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Spelling

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Insert Chart

+Creates a chart in the current document. + +

Sort Descending / Sort Ascending

+Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value using the column that contains the cursor. + + + +

Chart

+Creates a chart in the current document. + + + +

Display Grid

+ + + + +

Chart

+Creates a chart in the current document. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Icon + + +Zoom + + +
+ + +
+ +

What’s This?

+Enables extended help tips under the mouse pointer until the next click. +
+ + + + +Icon “What’s This?” + + +What’s This? + + +
+
+
+
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e06961ffa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0204.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + +Table Bar +/text/shared/main0204.xhp + + + +
+ +

Table Bar

+The Table Bar contains functions you need when working with tables. It appears when you move the cursor into a table. +
+ + + + + + + + +

Area Style / Filling

+ +

Merge Cells

+ + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete Row

+ + +

Delete Column

+ + +following only optional, ext.help is available: Select Table Select Column Select Row + +

Table Design

+Opens the Table Design. Double-click a preview to format the table. +
+ + + + +Icon + + +Table Design + + +
+
+

Table Properties

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..be505447d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0208.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Status Bar in $[officename] Basic Documents +/text/shared/main0208.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+Status Bar in $[officename] Basic Documents +The Status Bar displays information about the current $[officename] Basic document. +
+ + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..506d56dbb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Table Data Bar + /text/shared/main0212.xhp + + + +
+ Table Data Bar + Use the Table Data bar to control the data view. +
+ The filtered data view is active until you change or cancel the sorting or filtering criteria. If a filter is active, the Apply Filter icon on the Table Data bar is activated. + + + + + +Icon + + + + Save Record + + +
+ + + + + + + +Icon + + + + Undo: Data Input + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Data to Text + Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. + + + +Help ID is here because we need it in shared since the F4 browser has another context "sdatabase" so I had to move the Help ID from the swriter folder +Mail Merge + Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters. + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c8e2370c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0213.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,206 @@ + + + + + + Form Navigation Bar + /text/shared/main0213.xhp + + + Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +toolbars; Form Navigation bar +Navigation bar;forms +sorting; data in forms +data; sorting in forms +forms;sorting data +MW changed "toolbars;..." +

Form Navigation Bar

+ The Form Navigation bar contains icons to edit a database table or to control the data view. The bar is displayed at the bottom of a document that contains fields that are linked to a database. + You can use the Form Navigation bar to move within records as well as to insert and to delete records. If data is saved in a form, the changes are transferred to the database. The Form Navigation bar also contains sort, filter, and search functions for data records. + You can use the Navigation bar icon on the More Controls bar to add a Navigation bar to a form. + The Navigation bar is only visible for forms connected to a database. In the Design view of a form, the Navigation bar is not available. See also Table Data bar. + You can control the view of data with the sorting and filtering functions. Original tables are not changed. + The current sort order or filter is saved with the current document. If a filter is set, the Apply Filter icon on the Navigation bar is activated. Sorting and filtering features in the document can also be configured in the Form Properties dialog. (Choose Form Properties - Data - properties Sort and Filter). + If an SQL statement is the basis for a form (see Form Properties - tab Data - Data Source), then the filter and sort functions are only available when the SQL statement refers to only one table and is not written in the native SQL mode. + +

Find Record

+ + + + +

Absolute Record

+ Shows the number of the current record. Enter a number to go to the corresponding record. + + +

First Record

+ + + + Icon First Record + + + Takes you to the first record. + + +
+ + +

Previous Record

+ + + + + Icon Previous Record + + + + Takes you to the previous record. + + +
+ + +

Next Record

+ + + + + Icon Next Record + + + Takes you to the next record. + + +
+ + +

Last Record

+ + + + + Icon Last Record + + + Takes you to the last record. + + +
+ + +

New Record

+ + + + + Icon New Record + + + Creates a new record. + + +
+ + +

Save Record

+ + + + + Icon + + + Saves a new data entry. The change is registered in the database. + + +
+ + +

Undo: Data entry

+ + + + + Icon Undo Data Entry + + + Allows you to undo a data entry. + + +
+ + +

Delete Record

+ + + + + Icon Delete Record + + + Deletes a record. A query needs to be confirmed before deleting. + + +
+ + + + +

Refresh Control

+ + + + Icon Refresh Control + + + Refresh current control + + +
+ +

Sort

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8261b30db --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0214.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Query Design Bar +/text/shared/main0214.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Query Design Bar

+When creating or editing an SQL query, use the icons in the Query Design Bar to control the display of data. +
+Depending on whether you have created the query or view in the Design or SQL tab page, the following icons appear: + + + + + + +Add Tables + + + + + + + + + + +The following icon is on the SQL tab page: + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a57050d26 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0226.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + +Form Design Toolbar +/text/shared/main0226.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +

Form Design Toolbar

+The Form Design toolbar becomes visible as soon as you select a form object when working in the design mode. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Field

+ + + + + + + + + +
+ +

Automatic Control Focusdesign bar

+ + + + Icon + + + If Automatic Control Focus is activated, the first form control will be selected when you open the document. If the button is not activated, the text will be selected after opening. The Tab Order that you have specified determines which is the first form control. + + +
+
+ + + + +

Display Grid

+ + + + +

Snap to Grid

+Specifies that you can move objects only between grid points. + + +

Helplines While Moving

+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8dc5a252a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,216 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Edit Points Bar +/text/shared/main0227.xhp + + + +
+lines; editing points +curves; editing points +Edit Points bar +mw deleted "points;editing" +Edit Points Bar +The Edit Points Bar appears when you select a polygon object and click Edit Points. +
+ + + + + + +The functions provided allow you to edit the points of a curve or an object converted to a curve. The following icons are available: +Edit Points +The Edit Points icon allows you to activate or deactivate the edit mode for Bézier objects. In the edit mode, individual points of the drawing object can be selected. + + + + +Icon + + + +Edit Points + + +
+ +Move Points +Activates a mode in which you can move points. The mouse pointer displays a small empty square when resting on a point. Drag that point to another location. The curve on both sides of the point follows the movement; the section of the curve between the next points changes shape. +Point at the curve between two points or within a closed curve and drag the mouse to shift the entire curve without distorting the form. + + + + +Icon + + + +Move Points + + +
+ +Insert Points +Activates the insert mode. This mode allows you to insert points. You can also move points, just as in the move mode. If, however, you click at the curve between two points and move the mouse a little while holding down the mouse button you insert a new point. The point is a smooth point, and the lines to the control points are parallel and remain so when moved. +If you wish to create a corner point you must first insert either a smooth or a symmetrical point which is then converted to a corner point by using Corner Point. + + + + +Icon + + + +Insert Points + + +
+ +Delete Points +Use the Delete Points icon to delete one or several selected points. If you wish to select several points click the appropriate points while holding down the Shift key. +First select the points to be deleted, and then click this icon, or press Del. + + + + +Icon + + + +Delete Points + + +
+ +Split Curve +The Split Curve icon splits a curve. Select the point or points where you want to split the curve, then click the icon. + + + + +Icon + + + +Split Curve + + +
+ +Convert To Curve +Converts a curve into a straight line or converts a straight line into a curve. If you select a single point, the curve before the point will be converted. If two points are selected, the curve between both points will be converted. If you select more than two points, each time you click this icon, a different portion of the curve will be converted. If necessary, round points are converted into corner points and corner points are converted into round points. +If a certain section of the curve is straight, the end points of the line have a maximum of one control point each. They cannot be modified to round points unless the straight line is converted back to a curve. + + + + +Icon + + + +Convert To Curve + + +
+ +Corner Point +Converts the selected point or points into corner points. Corner points have two movable control points, which are independent from each other. A curved line, therefore, does not go straight through a corner point, but forms a corner. + + + + +Icon + + + +Corner Point + + +
+ +Smooth Transition +Converts a corner point or symmetrical point into a smooth point. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel, and can only be moved simultaneously. The control points may differentiate in length, allowing you to vary the degree of curvature. + + + + +Icon + + + +Smooth Transition + + +
+ +Symmetric Transition +This icon converts a corner point or a smooth point into a symmetrical point. Both control points of the corner point are aligned in parallel and have the same length. They can only be moved simultaneously and the degree of curvature is the same in both directions. + + + + +Icon + + + +Symmetric Transition + + +
+ +Close Bézier +Closes a line or a curve. A line is closed by connecting the last point with the first point, indicated by an enlarged square. + + + + +Icon + + + +Close Bézier + + +
+ +Eliminate Points +Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion. This happens in the event that the point is located on a straight line. If you convert a curve or a polygon with the Convert to Curve icon into a straight line or you change a curve with the mouse so that a point lies on the straight line, it is removed. The angle from which the point reduction is to take place can be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid in the Options dialog boxcan be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid in the Options dialog boxis 15° by default. + + + + +Icon + + + +Eliminate Points + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9de8d025b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Shortcut Keys +/text/shared/main0400.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Shortcut Keys

+ This section contains descriptions of frequently used shortcut keys in $[officename]. +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2f7c9488 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + + +Glossaries +/text/shared/main0500.xhp + + + + + + Glossaries + This section provides a general glossary of technical terms used in $[officename], along with a list of Internet terms. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c50c21440 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Java Platform Support +/text/shared/main0650.xhp + + + +
+Java Platform Support +$[officename] supports the Java platform for running applications and components based on the JavaBeans architecture. +
+For $[officename] to support the Java platform, you must install the Java 2 Runtime Environment software. When you installed $[officename], you automatically received the option to install these files if they were not yet installed. You can also install these files now if required. +The Java platform support needs to be activated under $[officename] to run Java applications. + + +Enable Java platform support by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced. + + +Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. +Your modifications at the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Advanced tab page will be used even if the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) has been started already. After any modifications to the ClassPath you must restart $[officename]. The same is true for modifications under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. Only the boxes "HTTP Proxy" and "FTP Proxy" and their ports do not require a restart—they will be evaluated when you click OK. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ffe79351a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +$[officename] and the Internet +/text/shared/main0800.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+$[officename] and the Internet +This section provides information on the subject of the Internet. An Internet glossary explains the most important terms. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dfb906c58 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/forms.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Forms submenu + /text/shared/menu/forms.xhp + + + +
+ +

Forms Submenu

+ +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..007be8f45 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + Chart + /text/shared/menu/insert_chart.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +Chart +Inserts a chart based on data from a cell or table range or with default data. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..68a85f329 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Form Control Menu + /text/shared/menu/insert_form_control.xhp + + + + +
+ +

Form Control

+ This submenu contains form controls like a textbox, checkbox, option button, and listbox that can be inserted into the document. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9d3e8fd52 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + Shape + /text/shared/menu/insert_shape.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + +

Shape

+This submenu contains common shapes like a line, circle, triangle, and square, or a symbol shape like a smiley face, heart, and flower that can be inserted into the document. +
+ + +

Line

+This submenu contains straight, freeform, curved and polygon line shapes. + +

Line

+ + +

Basic

+This submenu contains basic shapes like rectangles, circles, triangles, pentagon, hexagon, octagon, cylinder, and cube. + +

Symbol

+This submenu contains symbols shapes like smiley face, heart, sun, moon, flower, puzzle, beveled shapes, and brackets. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dae5465fc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + Save Image + /text/shared/menu/save_image.xhp + + + + + page;save background image + slide;save background image + page background image;save + slide background image;save + +
+ +

Save Background Image

+ Saves the background image of the current slidepage. + +
+
+ Choose SlidePage - Save Background Image. +
+ Opens the Export Image dialog to save the background image of the current slidepage. Select the image file format in the Filter box, enter a file name for the image and click Save. + Depending on the file format chosen, a dialog appears to set the image format properties. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..812e69a4d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + Set Image Background + /text/shared/menu/set_image_background.xhp + + + + +page;set background image +slide;set background image +page background image;set +slide background image;set + +
+ +

Set Background Image

+ Set the image background of the slidepage. +
+
+ Choose SlidePage - Set Background Image. +
+ Opens the Set Image Background dialog to set the background image of the current slidepage. Select image file and press Open. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7f245319b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/need_help.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ + + + + + + + We Need Your Help + /text/shared/need_help.xhp + + + + +
+ This help page needs further work for correctness and completion. Please join the LibreOffice project and help us out to write the missing information. Visit our web page on writing Help contents. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e60ae3bc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Options + /text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp + + + +
+options; tools + defaults; program configuration + settings; program configuration +mw changed "settings;options" and "defaults;..." + +

Options

+ This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration. +
+ All your settings are saved automatically. To expand an entry either double click this entry or click the plus sign. To collapse the entry, click the minus sign or double click the entry. + You see only the entries that are applicable to the current document. If the current document is a text document, you see the %PRODUCTNAME Writer entry, and so on for all modules of %PRODUCTNAME. + +Select an entry to edit. +
+ %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options +
+ +

Help

+ Opens the help contents for the Options page displayed. +

%PRODUCTNAME

+ +

Load/Save

+ +

Language Settings

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Writer

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Calc

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Impress

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Draw

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Math

+ +

%PRODUCTNAME Base

+ +

Charts

+ +

Internet

+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9f88bbcaa --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + $[officename] + /text/shared/optionen/01010000.xhp + + + +$[officename] + Use this dialog to create general settings for working with $[officename]. The information covers topics such as user data, saving, printing, paths to important files and directories. These settings are saved automatically. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..35ed809b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + + + +User Data +/text/shared/optionen/01010100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+data; user data +user data; input +personal data input + + + +User Data +Use this tab page to enter or edit user data. Some of the data may have already been entered by the user or system administrator when installing $[officename]. +
+
+ +
+User data is used by templates and Wizards in $[officename]. For example, the "First name" and "Last name" data fields are used to automatically insert your name as the author of a new document. You can see this under File - Properties. +Some of the user data is included automatically in an internal dictionary so that it is recognized by the spellchecker. If typing errors are made, the program can use this data to suggest replacements. Note that changes to data take effect only after $[officename] is restarted. +User data is also used when commenting and in tracking changes mode, to identify comments/edits author; and to mark last edit position in document, so that when author opens the document later, it opens at the last edit position. +Address +Use the Address field to enter and edit your personal user data. +
+ + +Company +Type the name of your company in this field. +
+
+ + + + +First name +Type your first name. + + + + +Last name +Type your last name. + + + + +Initials +Type your initials. +
+
+ + + +Street +Type the name of your street in this field. + + + + +ZIP +Type your ZIP in this field. + + + + +City +Type the city where you live. + + + + +State +Type your state. +
+
+ + +Title +Type your title in this field. +
+
+ + +Position +Type your position in the company in this field. +
+ +Tel. (Home) +Type your private telephone number in this field. + +Tel. (Work) +Type your work number in this field. +
+ + + +Fax +Type your fax number in this field. +
+
+ + + +Email +Type your email address. For example, my.name@my.provider.com +
+

Cryptography

+
+Set the preferred public key for OpenPGP encryption and digital signature. These preferred keys will be pre-selected in key selection dialog every time you sign or encrypt a document, so you don't have to select it yourself when signing with one specific key frequently. +
+
+ +

OpenPGP signing key

+ Select your OpenPGP key from the drop-down list for signing ODF documents. + +

OpenPGP encryption key

+ Select your OpenPGP key from the drop-down list for encrypting ODF documents. + +

When encrypting documents, always encrypt to self

+ Mark this checkbox to also encrypt the file with your public key, so you can open the document with your private key. + Keep this option selected, if you ever want to be able to decrypt documents you've encrypted for other people. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c709475bf --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ + + + + + + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp + + + +
+ +saving; options +defaults;of saving +URL; saving absolute/relative paths +relative saving of URLs +absolute saving of URLs + + + + +

General

+ In the General section, you can select default settings for saving documents, and can select default file formats. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Load

+ +

Load user-specific settings with the document

+ Loads the user-specific settings saved in a document with the document. + If Load user-specific settings with the document is not selected, the following user-specific settings still apply: + + + Settings available in File - Print - Options, + + + Name of Fax, + + + Spacing options for paragraphs before text tables, + + + Information about automatic updating for links, field functions and charts, + + + Information about working with Asian character formats. + + + The following settings are always loaded with a document, whether or not this option is marked: + + + Data source linked to the document and its view. + + + +

Load printer settings with the document

+ If enabled, the printer settings will be loaded with the document. This can cause a document to be printed on a distant printer, if you do not change the printer manually in the Print dialog. If disabled, your standard printer will be used to print this document. The current printer settings will be stored with the document whether or not this option is checked. +

Save

+ + +

Edit document properties before saving

+ Specifies that the Properties dialog will appear every time you select the Save As command. + +

Always create backup copy

+ Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK. + To change the location of the backup copy, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths, and then enter a new path for the backup file. + +

Save AutoRecovery information every

+ Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves the information needed to restore all open documents in case of a crash. You can specify the saving time interval. + +

Minutes

+ Specifies the time interval in minutes for the automatic recovery option. + +

Automatically save the document too

+ Specifies that %PRODUCTNAME saves all open documents when saving auto recovery information. Uses the same time interval as AutoRecovery does. +

Save URLs relative to file system

+ This option allows you to select the default for relative addressing of URLs in the file system and on the Internet. Relative addressing is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive. + A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located. In contrast, absolute addressing always starts from a root directory. The following table demonstrates the difference in syntax between relative and absolute referencing: + + + + Examples + + + File system + + + Internet + + + + + relative + + + ../images/img.jpg + + + ../images/img.jpg + + + + + absolute + + + file:///C:/work/images/img.jpg + + + https://myserver.com/work/images/img.jpg + + +
+ The Help tip always displays an absolute path. However, if a document is saved in HTML format, %PRODUCTNAME will enter a relative path if the appropriate check box is selected. + +Select this box for relative saving of URLs in the file system. + +

Save URLs relative to internet

+ Select this box for relative saving of URLs to the Internet. +

Default file format and ODF settings

+ +

ODF format version

+ LibreOffice 7.0 supports the OpenDocument format (ODF) version 1.3. The prior versions of LibreOffice support the file format ODF 1.2. Prior file formats cannot store all new features of the new software. + OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9 introduced new features which have to be saved using the OpenDocument format (ODF) version 1.2. The prior versions of OpenOffice.org 2 and StarOffice 8 support the file formats ODF 1.0/1.1. Those prior file formats cannot store all new features of the new software. + Current %PRODUCTNAME versions can open documents in ODF formats 1.0/1.1, 1.2, and 1.3. + When you save a document, you can select whether to save the document in the format ODF 1.3, ODF 1.3 Extended, ODF 1.2, ODF 1.2 Extended, ODF 1.2 Extended (compatibility mode), or in the prior format ODF 1.0/1.1. + Currently, the ODF 1.2 (Extended) or newer formats enable files of Draw and Impress to contain comments. Those comments can be inserted by Insert - Comment in the latest software version. The comments get lost when loading files into prior software versions that were saved by the latest software version. + Some companies or organizations may require ODF documents in the ODF 1.0/1.1, or ODF 1.2 format. You can select these format to save in the listbox. These older formats cannot store all new features, so the new format ODF 1.3 (Extended) is recommended where possible. + The ODF 1.2 Extended (compatibility mode) is a more backward-compatible ODF 1.2 extended mode. It uses features that are deprecated in ODF 1.2 and/or it is 'bug-compatible' to older OpenOffice.org versions. It may be useful if you need to interchange ODF documents with users who use pre-ODF 1.2 or ODF 1.2-only legacy applications. + + +

Warn when not saving in ODF or default format

+ You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box. + You can choose which file format will be applied as the default when saving documents of various document types. If you always exchange your documents with other persons who use Microsoft Office, for example, you may specify here that %PRODUCTNAME only uses the Microsoft Office file formats as a default. + +

Document type

+ Specifies the document type for which you want to define the default file format. + +

Always save as

+ Specifies how documents of the type selected on the left will always be saved as this file type. You may select another file type for the current document in the Save as dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..86f01a108 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ + + + + + +Paths +/text/shared/optionen/01010300.xhp + + + +
+paths; defaults +variables; for paths +directories;directory structure +files and folders in $[officename] + + + +

Paths

+This section contains the default paths to important folders in $[officename]. These paths can be edited by the user. +
+
+ +
+

Paths used by %PRODUCTNAME

+To modify an entry in this list, click the entry and click Edit. You can also double click the entry. +

Default

+The Default button resets the predefined paths for all selected entries. +

Edit

+Click to display the Select Path or Edit Paths dialog. +You can change the sequence of entries by clicking the bar in the Type column. The column width can be changed by moving the separator between the columns with the mouse. +The {user profile} directory and its subdirectories contain user data.The location of the {user profile} directory is determined when %PRODUCTNAME is installed. See the Default location section in the Wiki page about LibreOffice user profile for more information about typical locations of the user profile in different operating systems. + The following list shows the default predefined paths for storing user data, and explains what type of user data is stored in each path. Use the Edit dialog to change, add, or delete paths for the different types. + + + + +Type + + +Default Path + + +Description + + + + +AutoCorrect + + +{user profile}/user/autocorr +{user profile}/user/autocorr +{user profile}\user\autocorr + + +This folder stores your own AutoCorrect texts. + + + + +AutoText + + +{user profile}/user/autotext +{user profile}/user/autotext +{user profile}\user\autotext + + +This folder stores your own AutoText texts. + + + + +Backups + + +{user profile}/user/backup + +{user profile}/user/backup +{user profile}\user\backup + + +Automatic backup copies of documents are stored here. + + + + +Dictionaries + + +{user profile}/user/wordbook +{user profile}/user/wordbook +{user profile}\user\wordbook + + +This folder stores files with words in your custom dictionaries. + + + + +Gallery + + +{user profile}/user/gallery +{user profile}/user/gallery +{user profile}\user\gallery + + +New Gallery themes are stored in this folder. + + + + +Images + + +{user profile}/user/gallery +{user profile}/user/gallery +{user profile}\user\gallery + + +This folder is displayed when you first call the dialog for opening or saving a graphic object. + + + + +Templates + + +{user profile}/user/template +{user profile}/user/template +{user profile}\user\template + + +In this folder you can store your own templates. + + + + +Temporary files + + +{user profile}/user/temp +{user profile}/user/temp +{user profile}\user\temp + + +This is where $[officename] puts its temporary files. + + + + +My Documents + + +Default document folder of your system + + +You can see this folder when you first call the Open or Save dialog. + + + + +Classification + + +{install}/share/classification/example.xml{install}/share/classification/example.xml{install}\share\classification\example.xml + + +$[officename] reads the TSCP BAF policy from this file. + + +
+Internal Paths shows the paths where predefined content for %PRODUCTNAME is installed. These paths cannot be edited in this dialog box. +The paths refer to subdirectories in {install}\/share. These subdirectories are read-only and contain content shown to all users. The location of the {install} directory is determined when %PRODUCTNAME is installed. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fae9c3c61 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +Edit Paths +/text/shared/optionen/01010301.xhp + + + +

Edit Paths

+In the Edit Paths dialog, you can select some folders that are available in $[officename]. +
+ +
+ + + + +

Paths

+Contains a list of the paths that have already been added. Mark the default path for new files. + + +

Add

+Opens the Select Path dialog to select another folder or the Open dialog to select another file. + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2b0193e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + + +Writing Aids +/text/shared/optionen/01010400.xhp + + + +
+writing aids options +custom dictionaries; editing +user-defined dictionaries; editing +dictionaries; editing user-defined +exceptions; user-defined dictionaries +user-defined dictionaries; dictionary of exceptions +spellcheck; dictionary of exceptions +ignore list for spellcheck +spellcheck; ignore list +spelling; dictionary of exceptions +ignore list for spelling +spelling; ignore list +hyphenation; minimal number of characters + + + +removed "german" references, i78879 +

Writing Aids

+Specifies the properties of the spelling, thesaurus and hyphenation. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Available Language Modules

+Contains the installed language modules. +A language module can contain one, two or three submodules: Spelling, hyphenation and thesaurus. Each sub-module can be available in one or more languages. If you click in front of the name of the module, you activate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you remove a set mark, you deactivate all the available sub-modules simultaneously. If you wish to activate or deactivate individual sub-modules, click the Edit button to open the Edit Modules dialog. +The configuration allows two different directories: one folder where the user has write permissions, and one without write permissions. The user can only edit and delete the user dictionaries that are located in the writable path. Other dictionaries can be read only. + +

Edit

+To edit a language module, select it and click Edit. The Edit Modules dialog appears. +
+ +

User-defined dictionaries

+Lists the available user dictionaries. Mark the user dictionaries that you want to use for spelling and hyphenation. + +

New

+Opens the New Dictionary dialog, in which you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. + + +

New Dictionary

+In the Dictionary section you can name a new user-defined dictionary or dictionary of exceptions and specify the language. + +

Name

+Specifies the name of the new custom dictionary. The file extension "*.DIC" is automatically appended. + +

Language

+By selecting a certain language you can limit the use of the custom dictionary. By selecting All the custom dictionary is used independently of the current language. + +

Exceptions (-)

+Specifies whether you wish to avoid certain words in your documents. In this way, you can create a custom dictionary of all the words to be avoided. If this exception dictionary is activated, during spellchecking you receive a corresponding note about any words which should be avoided. + +

Edit

+Opens the Edit custom dictionary dialog, in which you can add to your custom dictionary or edit existing entries. + + +In the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog you have the option to enter new terms or edit existing entries. If you edit an exception dictionary, the dialog has the added facility of defining an exception for a word. During the spellcheck this exception is then listed as a suggestion. +When a dictionary is edited, a check is made on the status of the file. If the file is write-protected, it cannot be changed. The buttons New and Delete are then deactivated. + +

Book

+Specifies the book to be edited. +The List of Ignored Words (All) includes all words that have been marked with Ignore during spellcheck. This list is valid only for the current spellcheck. +The IgnoreAllList entry cannot be selected and cannot be deleted. Only the words included as content can be deleted. This happens automatically each time that $[officename] is closed. + +

Language

+Assigns a new language to the current custom dictionary. + +

Word

+You can type a new word for inclusion in the dictionary. In the list below you will see the contents of the current custom dictionary. If you select a word from this list it is displayed in the text field. If you type a word with a trailing = character, such as "AutoComplete=", the word is never automatically hyphenated and no hyphenation is suggested. Typing "Auto=Complete" results in the word being hyphenated, or a hyphenation suggested, where you insert the = sign. +You can use a [] block instead of the = sign to specify character changes before the hyphenation break. Possible character changes: (1) Extra characters, for example tug[g]gumi results the correct hyphenation “tugg- gummi” of the Swedish word “tuggummi”. (2) Character removing specified by a digit, for example paral·[1]lel results correct hyphenation “paral- lel” of the Catalan word “paral·lel”, removing one character before the break point. (3) Both removed and extra characters, for example cafee[2é]tje results correct hyphenation “café- tje” of the Dutch word “cafeetje”, removing two characters before the break point, and adding an extra one. + +

Replace By or Grammar By

+This input field is only available if you are editing an exception dictionary or a language-dependent custom dictionary. In exception dictionaries, the field shows the alternative suggestion for the current word in the "Word" text box. In language-dependent custom dictionaries, the field contains a known root word, as a model of affixation of the new word or its usage in compound words. For example, in a German custom dictionary, the new word “Litschi” (lychee) with the model word “Gummi” (gum) will result recognition of “Litschis” (lychees), “Litschibaum” (lychee tree), “Litschifrucht” (lychee fruit) etc. + +

New

+Adds the word in the Word text field to your current custom dictionary. The word in the Suggestion field is also added when working with exception dictionaries. + +Removes the marked word from the current custom dictionary. + +Deletes the selected dictionary after a confirmation, provided it is not write-protected. +
+
+ +

Options

+Defines the options for the spellcheck and hyphenation. + +

Edit

+If you want to change a value, select the entry and then click Edit. You will see a dialog for entering a new value. +

Check uppercase words

+Specifies that capitalization is checked during spellcheck. +

Check words with numbers.

+Specifies that words that contain numbers as well as letters are to be checked. +

Check special regions

+Specifies that special regions, such as drawing text, are checked during spellcheck.UFI: doesn't work in versions up to OOo 2.4 + +

Check spelling as you type

+Automatically checks spelling as you type, and underlines errors. + +
+Typing errors are highlighted in the document with a red underline. If you place the cursor over a word marked in this way, you can open the context menu to obtain a list of corrections. Select a correction to replace the word. If you make the same mistake again while editing the document, it will be marked as an error again.UFI: changed para, removed note, see i60431 +To place the word pair in the AutoCorrect replacement table, open the AutoCorrect context menu and choose AutoCorrect. Make your selection from the submenu. The word is replaced and at the same time the word pair is placed in the replacement table. +
+ +

Minimal number of characters for hyphenation

+Specifies the minimum number of characters required for automatic hyphenation to be applied. + +

Characters before line break

+Sets the minimum number of characters of the word to be hyphenated that must remain at the end of the line. + +

Characters after line break

+Specifies the minimum number of characters of a hyphenated word required at the next line. +

Hyphenate without inquiry

+Specifies that you will never be asked for a manual hyphenation. If the field is not marked, when a word is not recognized you will be presented with a dialog for entering hyphens. +

Hyphenate special regions

+Specifies that hyphenation will also be carried out in footnotes, headers and footers. +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b27f0a16b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + +Edit module +/text/shared/optionen/01010401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +spellcheck; activating for a language +spelling; activating for a language +hyphenation; activating for a language +thesaurus; activating for a language +languages; activating modules +dictionaries;creating +user-defined dictionaries;creating + + +
+

Edit module

+
+
+ +
+ +

Options

+Specifies the language and the available spelling, hyphenation and Thesaurus sub-modules for the selected module. You can arrange the sub-modules by priority. + + +Select the language from the Language list. + + +Mark all modules that are to be activated for this language under the headings Spelling, Hyphenation and Thesaurus. + + +As long as you have more than one sub-module available for one area, the sub-modules for spelling and the Thesaurus are processed in the sequence in which they are listed. You can change the sequence using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. + + +Only one sub-module can be activated under Hyphenation. + + + +

Language

+Specifies the language of the module. +For all language selection fields in %PRODUCTNAME, the following applies: +A language entry has a check mark in front of it if the spellcheck is activated for this language. + + +

Move up

+Increases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. + +

Move down

+Decreases the priority of the module selected in the list box by one level. + +

Back

+Click here to undo the current changes in the list box. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aba083d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + Selecting a new color + /text/shared/optionen/01010501.xhp + + + + + +pick color +color selector + + + +

Selecting a new color

+%PRODUCTNAME lets you define custom colors using a two-dimensional graphic and numerical gradient chart of the Pick a Color dialog. + +
+ +
+ +

The Pick a Color Window

+ +The Pick a Color dialog consists of four main areas. + + + + The radio buttons select the color component of the color. This color component can be expressed in either RGB (Red, Green, Blue) or HSB (Hue, Saturation, Brightness) color models. The CMYK color model is not selectable and is provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. + + + The spin buttons are for entering the numerical value of the color component. + + + With the vertical color component slider you can modify the value of each component of the color. With the large colored square you can select the color component approximately. + + + The horizontal bottom color bar shows the current color and the new color, side by side. + + +Click in the big color area on the left to select a new color. Using this selector area you can modify two components of the color as represented in the RGB or HSB color models. Note that these are the two components not selected with the radio buttons on the right side of the dialog. + +In the right part of the bottom bar, you will see the original color from the parent tab, Colors. + +In the left part of the bottom bar, the current result of your work in this dialog is visible. +%PRODUCTNAME uses only the RGB color model for printing in color. The CMYK controls are provided only to ease the input of color values using CMYK notation. + +

RGB

+ +

Red

+ +Sets the Red component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Green and Blue components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255. +Set the Red color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255. + +

Green

+ +Sets the Green component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Red and Blue components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255. +Set the Green color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255. + +

Blue

+ +Sets the Blue component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Green and Red components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Allowed values are 0 to 255. +Set the Blue color value directly. Allowed values are 0 to 255. + + +

Hex #

+Displays and sets the color value in the RGB color model expressed as a hexadecimal number. + +

HSB

+ +

Hue

+ +Sets the Hue component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Saturation and Brightness components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in degrees from 0 to 359. +Set the Hue directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in degrees from 0 to 359. + +

Saturation

+ +Sets the Saturation component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Hue and Brightness components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100). +Set the Saturation directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100). + +

Brightness

+ +Sets the Brightness component modifiable on the vertical color slider, and the Hue and Saturation components in the two-dimensional color picker field. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100). +Set the Brightness directly in the HSB color model. Values are expressed in percent (0 to 100). + +

CMYK

+ + +

Cyan

+Set the Cyan color value as expressed in the CMYK color model. + + +

Magenta

+Set the Magenta color value as expressed in the CMYK color model. + + +

Yellow

+Set the Yellow color value as expressed in the CMYK color model. + + +

Key

+Set the Black color value or key (black) as expressed in the CMYK color model. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3bf8a3a5c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp + + + +opening; dialog settings + saving; dialog settings + years; 2-digit options + + + + +
+

General

+ Specifies the general settings for $[officename]. +
+
+ +
+ +

Help

+ Specifies the behavior of the installed help. + +

Extended tips

+ Displays a help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control on a dialog. +

Document status

+ +

Printing sets "document modified" status

+ Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. + + +
+

Year (two digits)

+ Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year. +
+ In $[officename], years are indicated by four digits, so that the difference between 1/1/99 and 1/1/01 is two years. This Year (two digits) setting allows the user to define the years in which two-digit dates are added to 2000. To illustrate, if you specify a date of 1/1/30 or later, the entry "1/1/20" is recognized as 1/1/2020 instead of 1/1/1920. +
+
+ +

Help Improve %PRODUCTNAME

+

Send crash reports to The Document Foundation

+Send crash reports to help developers improve the software’s reliability. Whenever %PRODUCTNAME crashes, you can opt to send reports containing certain debugging information, useful to help track down the cause of the bug and fix it eventually. + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Quickstarter

+

Load %PRODUCTNAME during system start-up

+If enabled, loads %PRODUCTNAME into memory when the computer is booted, or when %PRODUCTNAME is restarted. When loaded, it reduces the time for opening %PRODUCTNAME. An icon is also added to the system tray. Right-click on the icon to show a menu for opening new or existing documents, and for stopping the quickstarter. +

%PRODUCTNAME File Associations

+

Windows Default Apps

+Call Windows file associations management. This button behaves according to Microsoft file association management policy, which is to open "Default apps" on Windows 7, 8, and 8.1; and to show a message telling user how to open that applet manually in Windows 10. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..967018c72 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Fonts +/text/shared/optionen/01010700.xhp + + + +
+HTML;fonts for source display +Basic; fonts for source display +fonts;for HTML and Basic + + + +Fonts +Substitutes a font with a font of your choice. The substitution replaces a font only when it is displayed on screen, or on screen and when printing. The replacement does not change the font settings that are saved in the document. +
+If you want, you can override the default substitution font that your operating system uses when it encounters an unavailable font in a document. +
+ +
+Font replacement also affects the display of fonts on the $[officename] user interface. + + +Apply replacement table +Enables the font replacement settings that you define. + +Replacement table +Lists the original font and the font that will replace it. Select Always to replace the font, even if the original font is installed on your system. Select Screen only to replace the screen font only and never replace the font for printing. + + + +Always checkbox + + +Screen only checkbox + + +Replacement action + + + + +checked + + +blank + + +Font replacement on screen and when printing, whether the font is installed or not. + + + + +checked + + +checked + + +Font replacement only on screen, whether the font is installed or not. + + + + +blank + + +checked + + +Font replacement only on screen, but only if font is not available. + + + + +blank + + +blank + + +Font replacement on screen and when printing, but only if font is not available. + + +
+ + +Font +Enter or select the name of the font that you want to replace. + +Replace with +Enter or select the name of the replacement font. + +Apply +Applies the selected font replacement. + + + + +Icon + + + +Apply + + +
+ + +Delete +Deletes the selected font replacement. + + + + +Icon + + + +Delete + + +
+ +Font settings for HTML and Basic sources +Select the font and font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. + +Fonts +Select the font for the display of HTML and Basic source code. Select Automatic to detect a suitable font automatically. + +Non-proportional fonts only +Check to display only non-proportional fonts in the Fonts list box. + +Size +Select a font size for the display of HTML and Basic source code. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8e8c78258 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + + View + /text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp + + + + +
+ + views; defaults + defaults; views + settings; views + icons; sizes + icons; styles + WYSIWYG in fonts lists + previews; fonts lists + font lists + font name box + mouse; positioning + mouse; middle button + clipboard; selection clipboard + selection clipboard + Skia;settings + Skia;graphics output + notebook bar;icon size + + + + + +

View

+Specifies view options. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +

Icon Theme

+Specifies the icon style for icons in toolbars and dialogs. + +

Icon Size

+ + +

Toolbar

+Specifies the display size of toolbar icons. + + +

Notebookbar

+Specifies the display size of notebook bar icons. + + +

Sidebar

+Specifies the display size of sidebar icons. + +

Visibility

+ + +

Menu icons

+Displays icons next to the corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide" and "Show". "Automatic" displays icons according to system settings and themes. + +

Shortcuts

+Displays shortcut keys next to corresponding menu items. Select from "Automatic", "Hide", and "Show". "Automatic" displays shortcut keys according to system settings. + +

Mouse

+ +

Positioning

+Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs. + + +

Middle button

+Defines the function of the middle mouse button. + + + + Automatic scrolling - dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view. + + + Paste clipboard - pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the "Selection clipboard" at the cursor position. + + +The "Selection clipboard" is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit - Copy/Cut /Insert or the respective keyboard shortcuts. Clipboard and "Selection clipboard" can contain different contents at the same time. + + + + + + + Clipboard + + + Selection clipboard + + + + + Copy content + + + Edit - Copy CommandCtrl+C. + + + Select text, table, object. + + + + + Paste content + + + Edit - Paste CommandCtrl+V pastes at the cursor position. + + + Clicking the middle mouse button pastes at the mouse pointer position. + + + + + Pasting into another document + + + No effect on the clipboard contents. + + + The last marked selection is the content of the selection clipboard. + + +
+ +Press Shift+CommandCtrl+R to restore or refresh the view of the current document. +

Graphics Output

+ + + +

Use hardware acceleration

+Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display. The support for hardware acceleration is not available for all operating systems and platform distributions of %PRODUCTNAME. + + +

Use Anti-Aliasing

+When supported, you can enable and disable anti-aliasing of graphics. With anti-aliasing enabled, the display of most graphical objects looks smoother and with less artifacts. + +Only WIN gets Skia controls in 7.1 + + +

Use Skia for all rendering (on restart)

+Use the high performance Skia graphics engine to render all visual elements of the application, including windows, menus, toolbars and icons. Skia uses the computer graphics device to accelerate the graphics rendering. + +

Force Skia software rendering (on restart)

+Select this control to disable Skia's use of the computer graphics device. +During installation, %PRODUCTNAME chooses the best options for configuring the Skia graphics engine. Normally you do not need to change the default settings if Skia is enabled. +If you experience graphical display problems (e.g., with the appearance of toolbar icons or drawing objects) and Skia is enabled, then you can try to disable Force Skia software rendering or disable Skia entirely. + + + +

Font Lists

+ + +

Show preview of fonts

+Displays the names of selectable fonts in the corresponding font, for example, fonts in the Font box on the Formatting bar. + +

Screen font antialiasing

+Select to smooth the screen appearance of text. + +

from

+Enter the smallest font size to apply antialiasing to. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b23553bcc --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Print Options +/text/shared/optionen/01010900.xhp + + + +
+printing; colors in grayscale +grayscale printing +colors; printing in grayscale +printing; warnings +paper size warning + + + +Print Options +Specifies the print setting options. +
+
+ +
+ +Reduce print data +You can reduce the amount of data to be sent to the printer. Reducing the print data increases the print speed because the print files are smaller. This makes it easier for printers with a smaller memory to print. Reducing print data can result in slightly lower print quality. + +Settings for +Specifies whether the print settings apply to direct printing or to printing to a file. +Reduce transparency +If you mark this field the transparent objects will be printed like normal, non-transparent objects, depending on your selection in the following two option buttons. +
+Transparency cannot be output directly to a printer. The areas of the document in which transparency is to be visible must therefore always be calculated as bitmaps and sent to the printer. Depending on the size of the bitmaps and the print resolution a large amount of data may result. +
+Automatically +Specifies that the transparency is only printed if the transparent area covers less than a quarter of the entire page. +No transparency +With this option transparency is never printed. +Reduce bitmaps +Specifies that bitmaps are printed with reduced quality. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. + +High/normal print quality +High print quality corresponds to a resolution of 300dpi. Normal print quality corresponds to a resolution of 200dpi. + +Resolution +Specifies the maximum print quality in dpi. The resolution can only be reduced and not increased. +Include transparent objects +If this field is marked, the reduction in print quality for bitmaps also applies to the transparent areas of objects. +Reduce gradient +If this field is marked, gradients are printed with reduced quality. + +Gradient stripes +Specifies the maximum number of gradient stripes for printing. +Intermediate color +Specifies that gradients are only printed in a single intermediate color. +Convert colors to grayscale +Specifies that all colors are printed only as grayscale. +Printer warnings +Defines which warnings appear before printing begins. +Paper size +Mark this check box if a certain paper size is needed for printing the current document. If the paper size used in the document is not provided by the current printer, you will receive an error message. +Paper orientation +Mark this check box if you need a certain paper orientation for printing the current document. If the format used by the current document is not available from the printer, an error message will appear. +Transparency +Mark this check box if you always want to be warned if transparent objects are contained in the document. If you print such a document, a dialog appears in which you can select if the transparency is to be printed in this print instruction. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d84cad3d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Application Colors +/text/shared/optionen/01012000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+colors; appearance +options; appearance +appearance options +colors; applications + + + +Application Colors +Sets the colors for the $[officename] user interface. You can save the current settings as color scheme and load them later. +
+
+ +
+ +Color scheme +Save and delete color schemes. + +Scheme +Selects the color scheme you want to use. + +Save +Saves the current settings as a color scheme that you can reload later. The name is added to the Scheme box. + +Name of color scheme +Enter a name for the color scheme. + +Delete +Deletes the color scheme shown in the Scheme box. You cannot delete the Default scheme. + +Custom Colors +Select the colors for the user interface elements. +To apply a color to a user interface element, ensure that the box in front of the name is checked. To hide a user interface element, clear the check box. + Some user interface elements cannot be hidden. +To enhance cursor visibility, set the application background color between 40% and 60% gray, it is automatically changed to 40% gray. +The Automatic color setting changes the user interface element to the preset color from the color scheme. +The color settings for "Visited links" and "Unvisited links" only apply to documents created after the settings are applied. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ead062060 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + +Accessibility +/text/shared/optionen/01013000.xhp + + + +
+disabled persons +text colors for better accessibility +animations; accessibility options +Help tips; hiding +high contrast mode +accessibility; options +options; accessibility + + + +

Accessibility

+Sets options that make %PRODUCTNAME programs more accessible for users with reduced sight, limited dexterity or other disabilities. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Miscellaneous options

+Sets accessibility options. +

+Support assistive technology tools (program restart required)

+ +Allows you to use assistive tools, such as external screen readers, Braille devices or speech recognition input devices. The Java Runtime Environment must be installed on your computer before you can enable assistive support. +

Use text selection cursor in read-only text document

+Displays cursor in read-only documents. +

Allow animated images

+Previews animated graphics, such as GIF images, in %PRODUCTNAME. +

Allow animated text

+Previews animated text, such as blinking and scrolling, in %PRODUCTNAME. +

Options for high contrast appearance

+High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability. You can decide how %PRODUCTNAME uses the high contrast settings of the operating system. +Cell borders and shadows are always shown in text color when high contrast mode is active. The cell background color is ignored then. +

Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system

+Switches %PRODUCTNAME into high contrast mode when the system background color is very dark. +

Use automatic font color for screen display

+Displays fonts in %PRODUCTNAME using the system color settings. This option only affects the screen display. +

Use system colors for page previews

+Applies the high contrast settings of the operating system to page previews. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4821b155d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Load/Save options +/text/shared/optionen/01020000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + + Load/Save options + Specifies general Load/Save settings. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a82b40e42 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Proxy +/text/shared/optionen/01020100.xhp + + + +
+settings; proxies +proxy settings + + + +Proxy +
+Proxy servers for accessing the Internet can be set up manually as needed. +
+ +
+ +Settings +Defines the settings for the proxy server. +Proxy server +Specifies the type of proxy definition. +None +Accesses the Internet without a proxy server. Allows you to set up a connection directly on your computer to an Internet provider that does not use a proxy. +Manual +Lets you enter the proxy server manually. Specify the proxy servers in accordance with your Internet service. Ask your system administrator for the proxies and ports to enter. +Type server names without the protocol prefix. For example, type www.example.com, not http://www.example.com. +System +On Windows or UNIX systems using GNOME or KDE, this option tells %PRODUCTNAME to use the system settings. You must restart %PRODUCTNAME to initiate this setting.UFI: see spec "System-Settings" +HTTP proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for HTTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. +HTTPS proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for HTTPS. Type the port in the right-hand field. +FTP proxy +Type the name of the proxy server for FTP. Type the port in the right-hand field. +No proxy for +Specifies the names of the servers that do not require any proxy servers, separated by semicolons. These are servers addressed in your local network, and servers used for video and audio streaming, for example. +You can also use placeholders for the names of hosts and domains. For example, type *.sun.com to address all the hosts in the sun.com domain without proxy. + + + +Type the port for the corresponding proxy server. The maximum value of a port number is fixed at 65535. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4f9e01434 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Email +/text/shared/optionen/01020300.xhp + + + +
+Email +
+ + +On UNIX systems, specifies the email program to use when you send the current document as email. + + +Email program +Enter the email program path and name. +Browse +Opens a file dialog to select the email program. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e83543310 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + Internet options + /text/shared/optionen/01030000.xhp + + + + Internet options + Specifies Internet settings. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a8ff8dd82 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + +Security +/text/shared/optionen/01030300.xhp + + + +
+macros;selecting security warnings +security;options for documents with macros +macros;security + + + +

Security

+Defines the security options for saving documents, for web connections, and for opening documents that contain macros. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Security Options and Warnings

+Opens the "Security Options and Warnings" dialog. + +

Passwords for web connections

+You can enter a master password to enable easy access to sites that require a user name and password. +

Persistently save passwords for web connections

+If enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will securely store all passwords that you use to access files from web servers. You can retrieve the passwords from the list after you enter the master password. + +

Protected by a master password (recommended)

+Check to enable all connections' passwords to be protected by a master password. +

Master Password

+Opens the Enter Master Password dialog. + +Enter the master password. +Enter the master password again. + +Enter the master password to continue. +

Connections

+Asks for the master password. If master password is correct, shows the Stored Web Connection Information dialog. + + +The Stored Web Connection Information dialog shows a list of web sites and user names that you entered previously. You can select any entry and remove it from the list. You can view the password for the selected entry.Remove +Removes the selected entry from the list.Remove All +Removes all entries from the list.Change Password +Opens a dialog where you can view and change the password for the selected entry. +

Macro security

+Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted macro authors. + +

Macro Security

+Opens the Macro Security dialog. + +

Certificate Path

+Allows you to choose between different installed key store locations to use when signing ODF documents or exporting signed PDF. (Only on systems that use the Network Security Services NSS.) +

Certificate

+Opens the Certificate Path dialog. + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b83606ce8 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + +HTML compatibility +/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp + + + +
+$[officename] Basic scripts in HTML documents +HTML;compatibility settings + + + +

HTML compatibility

+Defines settings for HTML pages. +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + +

Font sizes

+Use the spin buttons Size 1 to Size 7 to define the respective font sizes for the HTML <font size=1> to <font size=7> tags. +

Import

+Defines the settings for importing HTML documents. + +

Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers

+When importing numbers from an HTML page, the decimal separator and the thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page. The clipboard however contains no information about the locale. For example, the characters "1.000" copied from a German Web page most possibly mean "one thousand" because the period is the thousands separator in a German locale. If copied from an English Web page, the same characters stand for the number 1 as in "one dot zero zero zero". +If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale. + +

Import unknown HTML tags as fields

+Mark this check box if you want tags that are not recognized by $[officename] to be imported as fields. For an opening tag, an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name. For a closing tag, an HTML_OFF will be created. These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export. + +

Ignore font settings

+Mark this check box to ignore all font settings when importing. The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be the fonts that will be used. + +

$[officename] Basic

+Mark this check box to include the $[officename] Basic instructions when exporting to HTML format. +You must activate this option before you create the $[officename] Basic Script, since otherwise it will not be inserted. $[officename] Basic Scripts must be located in the header of the HTML document. Once you have created the macro in the $[officename] Basic IDE, it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header. + +

Display warning

+If this field is marked, when exporting to HTML a warning is shown that %PRODUCTNAME Basic macros will be lost. + +

Print layout

+If you mark this field, the print layout of the current document (for example, table of contents with justified page numbers and dot leaders) is exported as well. It can be read by $[officename], Mozilla Firefox, and MS Internet Explorer. +The HTML filter supports CSS2 (Cascading Style Sheets Level 2) for printing documents. These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated. + +

Copy local images to Internet

+Mark this check box to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP. Use the Save As dialog to save the document and enter a complete FTP URL as the file name in the Internet. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9cf83e19e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + +Text Document Options +/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +

%PRODUCTNAME Writer Options

+These settings determine the way text documents that are created in $[officename] are handled. It is also possible to define settings for the current text document. + The global settings are automatically saved. +
+ +
+ + + + +

Basic Fonts (Western)

+Specifies the settings for the basic fonts. +

Basic Fonts (Asian)

+Specifies the settings for the basic Asian fonts if Asian language support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + +

Basic Fonts (CTL)

+Specifies the settings for basic fonts for complex text layout languages if their support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..31fe317e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + +View +/text/shared/optionen/01040200.xhp + + + +
+ +snap lines; showing when moving frames (Writer) +scrollbars; horizontal and vertical (Writer) +horizontal scrollbars (Writer) +vertical scrollbars (Writer) +smooth scrolling (Writer) +displaying; pictures and objects (Writer) +pictures; displaying in Writer (Writer) +objects; displaying in text documents +displaying; tables (Writer) +tables in text; displaying +limits of tables (Writer) +borders;table boundaries (Writer) +boundaries of tables (Writer) +showing; drawings and controls (Writer) +drawings; showing (Writer) +controls; showing (Writer) +displaying; comments in text documents + + + +

View

+Defines the default settings for displaying objects in your text documents and also the default settings for the window elements. +
+
+ +
+

Guides

+Specifies settings that refer to the representation of boundaries. + +

Helplines While Moving

+Displays snap lines around the frames when frames are moved. You can select the Helplines While Moving option to show the exact position of the object using lineal values. +

Display

+Defines which document elements are displayed. + +

Images and objects

+Specifies whether to display images and objects on the screen. + If these elements are hidden, you will see empty frames as placeholders. +You can also control the display of graphics through the Images and Charts icon. If a text document is open, this icon is displayed on the Tools bar. +If the Images and objects option is not selected, no graphics will be loaded from the Internet. Graphics within a table and without an indication of their size can cause display problems when using an older HTML standard on the browsed page. + +

Tables

+Displays the tables contained in your document. +To display the table boundaries, right-click any table and choose Table Boundaries, or choose Table - Table Boundaries in a Writer document. +

Drawings and controls

+Displays the drawings and controls contained in your document. +

Comments

+Displays comments. Click a comment to edit the text. Use the context menu in Navigator to locate or delete a comment. Use the comments's context menu to delete this comment or all comments or all comments of this author. +

Display fields

+ +

Hidden textUFI: this is the old "Hidden text" control renamed

+Displays text that is hidden by Conditional Text or Hidden Text fields. + +

Hidden paragraphs

+Display paragraphs that contain a Hidden Paragraph field. This option has the same function as the menu command View - Field Hidden ParagraphsView - Hidden Paragraphs. +

View

+Specifies whether scrollbars and rulers are displayed. + +

Horizontal ruler

+Displays the horizontal ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. + +

Vertical ruler

+Displays the vertical ruler. Select the desired measurement unit from the corresponding list. + +

Smooth scroll

+Activates the smooth page scrolling function. The scrolling speed depends of the area and of the color depth display. + +

Right-aligned

+ +Aligns the vertical ruler with the right border. +
+ + + +outline folding buttons;settings + +

Outline folding

+ +

Show outline-folding buttons

+ Displays outline folding buttons on the left of the outline headings. +

Include sub levels

+ Also displays the folding buttons of the outline sub levels. +
+

Settings (for HTML document only)

+ +

Measurement unit

+Specifies the Unit for HTML documents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c4dbd4419 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Basic Fonts +/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+fonts;default settings +defaults;fonts +basic fonts +predefining fonts +fonts;changing in templates +templates;changing basic fonts +paragraph styles;modifying basic fonts + + + +

Basic Fonts

+Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents. +
+You can also change the basic fonts for Asian and complex text layout languages if their support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +These settings define the basic fonts for the predefined templates. You can also modify or customize the default text templates. +
+ +
+

Basic fonts

+ +

Default

+Specifies the font to be used for the Default Paragraph Style. The Default Paragraph Style font is used for nearly all Paragraph Styles, unless the Paragraph Style explicitly defines another font. + + + + + +

Size

+Specifies the size of the font. + +

Heading

+Specifies the font to be used for headings. + +

List

+Specifies the font and font size for the List paragraph style, which is inherited by all derived paragraph styles. +When you choose Format - Bullets and Numbering + +Format - Bullets and Numbering to format a paragraph with numbers or bullets in a text document, the program assigns these Paragraph Styles automatically. + +

Caption

+Specifies the font used for the captions of images and tables. + +

Index

+Specifies the font used for indexes, alphabetical indexes, and tables of contents. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a4fd5606f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + Print (Options) + /text/shared/optionen/01040400.xhp + + + +
+pictures; printing +tables in text; printing +drawings; printing in text documents +controls; printing +backgrounds; printing +printing; elements in text documents +text documents; print settings +printing; text always in black +black printing in Calc +printing; left/right pages +even/odd pages;printing +printing; text in reverse order +reversing printing order +brochures; printing several +printing; brochures +comments; printing in text +printing; creating individual jobs +faxes;selecting a fax machine +mw made "fax machine selection" a two level entry + + +

Print

+Specifies print settings within a text or HTML document. +
+
+ +
+The print settings defined on this tab page apply to subsequent new documents, until you change the settings again. If you want to change the settings for the current print job only, use the File - Print dialog. +

Contents

+Specifies which document contents are to be printed. + + +

Images and objects

+Specifies whether the graphics of your text document are printed. + + +

Form controls

+ Specifies whether the form control fields of the text document are printed. + + +

Page background

+ Specifies whether to include colors and objects that are inserted to the background of the page (Format - Page - Background) in the printed document.UFI: fixes #i21977# + + +

Print text in black

+ Specifies whether to always print text in black. + + +

Hidden text

+ Enable this option to print text that is marked as hidden. The following hidden text is printed: text that is formatted as hidden by Format - Character - Font Effects - Hidden, and the text fields Hidden text and Hidden paragraphs.UFI: sorry, due to a bug no links allowed in extended help text + + +

Text placeholder

+ Enable this option to print text placeholders. Disable this option to leave the text placeholders blank in the printout.Text placeholders are fields. +

Pages

+ Defines the print order for $[officename] Writer documents with multiple pages. + +

Left pages (not for HTML documents)

+ Specifies whether to print all left (even numbered) pages of the document. + +

Right pages (not for HTML documents)

+ Specifies whether to print all right (odd numbered) pages of the document. + +

Brochure

+ Select the Brochure option to print your document in brochure format. The brochure format is as follows in $[officename] Writer: +
+ If you print a document in portrait on a landscape page, two opposing sides in a brochure will be printed next to each other. If you have a printer with double-sided printing capability, you can create an entire brochure from your document without having to collate the pages later. If you have a printer that only has single-sided printing capability, you can achieve this effect by first printing the front pages with the "Front sides / right pages /odd pages" option marked, then re-inserting the entire paper stack in your printer and printing all the back pages with the "Back pages / left pages / even pages" option marked. +
+ +

Right to left

+ Check to print the pages of the brochure in the correct order for a right-to-left script. +This control appears only if Complex text layout is set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +

Other

+ + +

Print automatically inserted blank pages

+If this option is enabled, automatically-inserted blank pages are being printed. This is best if you are printing double-sided. For example, in a book, a "chapter" paragraph style has been set to always start with an odd numbered page. If the previous chapter ends on an odd page, %PRODUCTNAME inserts an even numbered blank page. This option controls whether to print that even numbered page or not. + +

Paper tray from printer settings

+ For printers with multiple trays, the "Paper tray from printer settings" option specifies whether the paper tray used is specified by the system settings of the printer. + +

Fax

+ If you have installed fax software on your computer and wish to fax directly from the text document, select the desired fax machine. +

Comments

+ + + + + + + Specifies whether comments in your document are printed. +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..379af95e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + +Table (Options) +/text/shared/optionen/01040500.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+inserting; new text tables defaults +tables in text; default settings +aligning;tables in text +number formats; recognition in text tables + + + +

Table

+Defines the attributes of tables in text documents. +
+Specifies the default settings for columns and rows and the table mode. Also specifies the standard values for moving and inserting columns and rows. For further information see Editing Tables Using the Keyboard + in the $[officename] Writer Help. +
+ +
+
+

Default

+Defines the defaults for all newly created text tables in text documents. +
+
+ +

Heading

+Specifies that the first row of the table is formatted with the "Table heading" Paragraph Style. +
+
+ +

Repeat on each page

+Specifies whether the table heading is carried over onto the new page after a page break. +
+ +

Do not split (not in HTML)

+Specifies that tables are not split by any type of text flow break. You can also find this option in menu Table - Properties - Text Flow. +
+ +

Border

+Specifies that table cells have a border by default. +
+
+

Input in tables

+
+
+ + +

Number recognition

+
+Specifies that numbers entered into a text table cell are recognized and formatted as numbers. Table cells in %PRODUCTNAME Writer can recognize a number when it is represented in one of the number formats available in categories of Numbers, Percent, Currency, Date, Time, Scientific, Fraction and Boolean. +
+ +The recognized number is displayed with default number format for table cells, and sets the cell format to the recognized category. For example, if a number is recognized as Date, the cell format category is set to Date. You can set a specific number format for the cell, for example, a date entered as 8/3/2018 displays as Thursday March 8, 2018 when the cell number format is set to "Friday, December 31, 1999" in the Number Format dialog. + +Recognized Date and Time numbers are converted to internal date and time serial values. Percent numbers are converted internally to their numeric values. Boolean values are converted internally to 0 or 1. +
+When an input cannot be recognized as a number, the number category changes to Text and the input is not changed. + +If Number recognition is not marked, numbers are saved in text format and are automatically left-aligned. +
+
+
+ +

Number format recognition

+If Number format recognition is not marked, only input in the format that has been set at the cell is accepted. Any other input resets the format to Text. + +For example, if a cell contains a date value and has its cell format as date, a new input of a percent value in the cell set the cell format to Text and the percent input number is not recognized. + +When Number format recognition is marked, input numbers sets the cell format to the recognized number category. +
+
+ +

Alignment

+Specifies that numbers are always bottom right aligned in the cell. If this field is not marked numbers are always top left aligned in the cell. +Direct formatting is not influenced by the Alignment field. If you center align the cell contents directly, they remain centered irrespective of whether text or numbers are involved. +
+

Keyboard handling

+Move cells +Defines the default settings for moving rows and columns with the keyboard. + +Row +Specifies the value to be used for moving a row. + +Column +Specifies the value to be used for moving a column. +

Insert cell

+Specifies the default settings for inserting rows and columns with the keyboard. + +Row +Specifies the default value for inserting rows. + +Column +Specifies the default value for inserting columns. +Behavior of rows/columns +Determines the relative effect of rows and columns on adjacent rows or columns, as well as on the entire table. + +Fixed +Specifies that changes to a row or column only affect the corresponding adjacent area. + +Fixed, proportional +Specifies that changes to a row or column have an effect on the entire table. + +Variable +Specifies that changes to a row or column affect the table size. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..58ca4d557 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + +Formatting Aids +/text/shared/optionen/01040600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+non-printing characters (Writer) +formatting marks (Writer) +displaying; non-printing characters (Writer) +displaying; formatting marks (Writer) +paragraph marks; displaying (Writer) +characters; displaying only on screen (Writer) +optional hyphens (Writer) +soft hyphens (Writer) +hyphens; displaying custom (Writer) +custom hyphens (Writer) +spaces; displaying (Writer) +spaces; showing protected spaces (Writer) +protected spaces; showing (Writer) +non-breaking spaces (Writer) +tab stops; displaying (Writer) +break display (Writer) +hidden text;showing (Writer) +hidden fields display (Writer) +paragraphs; hidden paragraphs (Writer) +cursor; allowing in protected areas (Writer) + + + +

Formatting Aids

+In $[officename] text and HTML documents, defines the display for certain characters and for the direct cursor. +
+
+ +
+

Display formatting

+Defines which formatting marks are visible on screen. Activate the Formatting Marks icon on the Standard bar. All characters that you have selected on the Formatting Aids tab page will be displayed. + +

Paragraph end

+Specifies whether paragraph delimiters are displayed. The paragraph delimiters also contain paragraph format information. + +

Soft hyphens

+Specifies whether soft hyphens (called also as optional or discretionary hyphens) are displayed. These are hidden user-defined delimiters that you enter within a word by pressing Command+Hyphen(-) +Ctrl+Hyphen(-). Words with soft hyphens are only separated at the end of a line at the point where a soft hyphen has been inserted, irrespective of whether the automatic hyphenation is activated or deactivated. + +

Spaces

+Specifies whether to represent every space in the text with a dot. + +

Non-breaking spaces

+Specifies that non-breaking spaces are shown as gray boxes. Non-breaking spaces are not broken at the end of a line and are entered with the Command+Shift+Spacebar +Ctrl+Shift+Spacebar shortcut keys. + +

Tabs

+Specifies that tab stops are displayed as small arrows. + +

Breaks

+Displays all line breaks inserted with the Shift+Enter shortcut. These breaks create a new line, but do not start a new paragraph. + +

Hidden charactersUFI: new, although name of control is re-used, see spec "Hidden Text in Writer"

+Displays text that uses the character format "hidden", when View - Formatting Marks is enabled. +

Bookmarks

+Specifies that bookmark indicators are shown. | indicates the position of a point bookmark. [ ] indicates the start and end of a bookmark on a text range. + +The following controls appear only for Writer documents, not for HTML documents. + +

Protected Areas

+

Enable cursor

+Specifies that you can set the cursor in a protected area, but cannot make any changes. +

Direct cursor

+Defines all the properties of the direct cursor. + +

Direct cursor

+Activates the direct cursor. You can also activate this function by clicking the Toggle Direct Cursor Mode icon on the Tools bar or by choosing the Edit - Direct Cursor Mode command in a text document. +

Insert

+Defines the insert options for the direct cursor. If you click at any position in your document, a new paragraph can be written or inserted exactly at this position. The properties of this paragraph depend on the selected option. You can select from the following options: + +

Tabs

+When the direct cursor is used, as many tabs as necessary are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached. + +

Tabs and Spaces

+When the Direct Cursor is used, a corresponding number of tabs and spaces are inserted in the new paragraph as necessary until the clicked position is reached. + +

Spaces

+When the direct cursor is used, spaces are added in the new paragraph until the clicked position is reached. +

Left paragraph margin

+When the direct cursor is used, the left paragraph indent is set at the horizontal position where you click the direct cursor. The paragraph is left aligned. + +

Paragraph alignment

+Sets the paragraph alignment when the direct cursor is used. Depending on where the mouse is clicked, the paragraph is formatted left aligned, centered or right aligned. The cursor before the mouse-click shows, by means of a triangle, which alignment is set. +All insert options refer only to the current paragraph generated with the Direct Cursor. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7e2bff3b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changes + /text/shared/optionen/01040700.xhp + + + +
+ + +Changes + Defines the appearance of changes in the document. +
+ To record or show changes in your text or spreadsheet document, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record or Edit - Track Changes - Show. +
+ +
+ Text display + Defines the settings for displaying recorded changes. Select the type of change and the corresponding display attribute and color. The preview field shows the effect of the selected display options. + +Insertions / Attributes + Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is inserted. + +Deletions / Attributes + Specifies how changes in the document are displayed when text is deleted. If you record text deletions, the text is displayed with the selected attribute (for example, strikethrough) and is not deleted. + +Changed attributes / Attributes + Defines how changes to text attributes are displayed in the document. These changes affect attributes such as bold, italic or underline. + + + +Color + You can also choose a color to display each type of recorded change. When you choose the condition "By author" in the list, the color is automatically determined by $[officename], then modified to match to the author of each change. + Lines changed + To indicate which lines of the text have been changed, you can define a mark that appears in the left or right page margin. + +Mark + Defines if and where changed lines in the document are marked. You can set the markings so that they always appear on the left or right page margin, or on the outer or inner margin. + +Color + Specifies the color for highlighting the changed lines in the text. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d3f82c5c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + Comparison Options + /text/shared/optionen/01040800.xhp + + + + + document comparison;options + comparison;automatic + comparison;by word + comparison;by character + document comparison;random ID + +
+ +

Document Comparison Options

+ Defines the comparison options for the document. +
+ +
+ Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Comparison. +
+ + + +

Compare documents

+ + + Automatic: Uses traditional algorithm for document comparison (default). + + + By word: compares documents segmenting contents word by word. + + + By characters: compares documents segmenting contents character by character. You can define the minimal number of character for the comparison. + + + +

Random Number to improve accuracy of document comparison

+ Introduce an identifier to improve accuracy of document comparison when done by word or by characters. + These options are enabled when the Compare documents options are by words or by characters. + +

Take it into account when comparing

+ Activates the document comparison using By word and By character options. + +

Ignore pieces of length

+ Set the minimum number of characters to trigger a valid comparison. + +

Store it when changing the document

+ Stores the random number in the document. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..734d6d1d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01040900.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + links; updating options (Writer) + updating; links in text documents + updating; fields and charts, automatically (Writer) + tab stops; spacing in text documents + spacing; tab stops in text documents + word counts; separators + + + + + +

General

+Specifies general settings for text documents. +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Update

+ +

Update links when loading

+ + +Settings for automatic links updates stored in documents are ignored for security reasons. Link updates are always bounded by %PRODUCTNAME Security settings in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options... - %PRODUCTNAME – Security. + +

Always

+Always updates links while loading a document, and only if the document is in a trusted file location or the global security level is Low (Not recommended). +This setting is treated as On request unless either the global macro security level is set to Low in %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options... - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - Macro Security... - Security Level - Low (not recommended) or the document is located in a trusted place defined by %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences +Tools - Options... - %PRODUCTNAME - Security - Macro Security... - Trusted Sources - Trusted File Locations. + + + +

On request

+Updates links only on request while loading a document. + + + +

Never

+Links are never updated while loading a document. +
+ +

Automatically

+ + +To update fields manuallyi81240 + + + + +

Fields

+The contents of all fields are updated automatically whenever the screen contents are displayed as new. Even with this box unchecked, some fields are updated each time a special condition takes place. The following table lists the fields that are updated without regard to this checkbox. + + + + + Condition + + + Automatically updated fields + + + + + Printing the document (also exporting as PDF) + + + Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time, References, Last printed + + + + + Reloading the document + + + Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time + + + + + Saving the document + + + File name, Statistics, Document number, Editing time, Modified + + + + + Editing the text line where the field is in + + + Author, Sender, Chapter, Date, Time + + + + + Manually changing a variable + + + Conditional text, Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Variables, DDE field + + + + + Switching off "fixed content" + + + Author, Sender, all document information fields + + + + + Changing the page count + + + Page + + +
+ + + +

Charts

+Specifies whether to automatically update charts. Whenever a Writer table cell value changes and the cursor leaves that cell, the chart that displays the cell value is updated automatically.see message "[sw-features] changed/CWS chart2mst3 : Automatic update for charts in Writer" by Thomas Lange + +

Settings

+ + +

Measurement unit

+Specifies the unit of measurement for text documents. + + +

Tab stops

+Specifies the spacing between the individual tab stops. The horizontal ruler displays the selected spacing. + + +

Enable char unit

+When this setting is enabled, the measurement units of indents and spacing on Format - Paragraph - Indents & Spacing tab will be character (ch) and line. + + +

Use square page mode for text grid

+When this setting is enabled, the text grid will look like square page. Square page is a kind of page layout which is used to train students to write articles in China and Japan. + +

Word count

+ +

Additional separators

+Specifies the characters that are considered as word separators when counting words, in addition to spaces, tabs and line and paragraph breaks. +

Show standardized page count

+Editors and publishers often define a “standard” page as containing a specified number of characters or words. Mark this field to allow quick calculation of the number of these pages. +

Characters per standardized page

+Set the number of characters for the standardized page. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4fa9aadb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Compatibility + /text/shared/optionen/01041000.xhp + + + +Word documents;compatibility + importing;compatibility settings for text import + options;compatibility (Writer) + compatibility settings for MS Word import + Microsoft Office;importing Word documents + layout;importing Word documents + formatting;printer metrics (Writer) + metrics;document formatting (Writer) + printer metrics for document formatting (Writer) + +
+ + +Compatibility + +Specifies compatibility settings for text documents. These options help in fine-tuning %PRODUCTNAME when importing Microsoft Word documents. +
+
+ +
+Some of the settings defined here are only valid for the current document and must be defined separately for each document. +
+ +Use printer metrics for document formatting +Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. +If you set this option for the current document and then save the document, for example, in an older binary format, this option will not be saved. If you later open the file from the older format, this option will be set by default. +
+Add spacing between paragraphs and tables +In $[officename] Writer, paragraph spacing is defined differently than in Microsoft Word documents. If you have defined spacing between two paragraphs or tables, spacing is also added in the corresponding Word documents. +Specifies whether to add Microsoft Word-compatible spacing between paragraphs and tables in $[officename] Writer text documents. +Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages +Specifies whether paragraph spacing at the top of a page will also be effective at the beginning of a page or column if the paragraph is positioned on the first page of the document. The same applies for a page break. +If you import a Word document, the spaces are automatically added during the conversion. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 tab stop formattingUFI: spec "Tab Stop Compatibility" +Specifies how to align text at tab stops beyond the right margin, how to handle decimal tab stops, and how to handle tab stops close to a line break. If this check box is not selected, tab stops are handled in the same way as in other Office applications. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the new tab stop handling is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the old tab stop handling is applied. +Do not add leading (extra space) between lines of textUFI: spec external_leading +Specifies that additional leading (extra space) between lines of text is not added, even if the font in use contains the additional leading attribute. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer, the additional leading is used by default. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the additional leading is not used. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 line spacingUFI: spec spec-line-spacingUFI: api.feature "Adjusted formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing" +If the option is off, a new process for formatting text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. If the option is on, the previous method of formatting of text lines with proportional line spacing will be applied. +In text documents created by your current version of Writer and in Microsoft Word documents of recent versions, the new process is used. In text documents created by Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the previous process is used. +Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cellsUFI: spec spec-formatting-table-cells +Specifies that the bottom spacing is added to a paragraph, even when it is the last paragraph in a table cell. +If the option is off, table cells will be formatted as in Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0. If the option is on, an alternative method of formatting table cells will be applied. The option is on by default for new documents created with %PRODUCTNAME and for documents imported from Microsoft Word format. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 object positioningUFI: spec spec-adjust-object-positioning +Specifies how to calculate the position of floating objects anchored to a character or paragraph with respect to the top and bottom paragraph spacing. +If the option is on, the floating objects are positioned as in Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0. If the option is off, the floating objects are positioned using an alternative method that is similar to the method used by Microsoft Word. +The option will be set to off for new documents. For Writer documents created by a version prior to OpenOffice.org 2.0 the option is on. +Use OpenOffice.org 1.1 text wrapping around objectsUFI: spec doc adjust-text-wrapping.sxw +Microsoft Word and Writer have different approaches on wrapping text around floating screen objects. Floating screen object are Writer frames and drawing objects, and the objects 'text box', 'graphic', 'frame', 'picture' etc. in Microsoft Word. +In Microsoft Word and in current versions of Writer, page header/footer content and footnote/endnote content does not wrap around floating screen objects. Text body content wraps around floating screen objects which are anchored in the page header. +In Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, the opposite was true. +If the option is off, which is the default setting, the new text wrapping will be applied. If the option is on, the former text wrapping will be applied. +Consider wrapping style when positioning objectsUFI: spec obj-pos-without-wrapping +Specifies how the complex process of positioning floating objects that are anchored to a character or paragraph should work. In Writer versions prior to StarOffice 8 or OpenOffice.org 2.0, an iterative process was used, while in current versions a straightforward process is used, which is similar to the same process in Microsoft Word. +If the option is off, the old %PRODUCTNAME iterative process of object positioning is used. If the option is on, the new straightforward process is used to ensure compatibility with Microsoft Word documents. +Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphsUFI: i79041 +If enabled, Writer adds spacing between words, in lines that end with Shift+Enter in justified paragraphs. If disabled, spacing between words will not be expanded to justify the lines. +This setting is on by default for .odt text documents. It will be saved and loaded with the document in the .odt text document format. This setting cannot be saved in old .sxw text documents, so this setting is off for .sxw text documents. +Tolerate white lines of PDF page backgrounds for compatibility with old documents +Use %PRODUCTNAME 4.3 anchoring paint order and tolerate white lines that may appear in PDF page backgrounds created from legacy documents. + +Use as Default +Click to use the current settings on this tab page as the default for further sessions with %PRODUCTNAME. +The factory defaults are set as follows. Enabled are the following options, while all other options are disabled: + + +Add spacing between paragraphs and tables + + +Add paragraph and table spacing at tops of pages + + +Add paragraph and table spacing at bottom of table cells + + +Expand word space on lines with manual line breaks in justified paragraphs + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..407944e0c --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +AutoCaption +/text/shared/optionen/01041100.xhp + + + + + +
+ + +automatic captions (Writer) +AutoCaption function in %PRODUCTNAME Writer +captions;automatic captions (Writer) + + mw deleted "adding;" + + + AutoCaption + Specifies the settings for captions that are automatically added to inserted objects. + +
+
+ + + +
+ + + Add captions automatically when inserting + Select the object type for which the AutoCaption settings are to be valid. + Caption + Defines the options to be applied to the selected object type. These options are identical to those in the Insert - Caption menu, which is available when an object is selected. Below the settings is a preview of the object category, together with numbering type. + + + Category + Specifies the category of the selected object.UFI: copied text from optionen/01040801 + + + Numbering + Specifies the type of numbering required. + + + + + Separator + Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. + + + Position + Determines the position of the caption with respect to the object. + Numbering captions by chapter + + + Level + Specifies the headings or chapter levels where you want the numbering to start. + + Separator + Defines the character to be displayed after the number of the heading or chapter level. + Category and frame format + + + Character style + Specifies the character style of the caption paragraph. + + + Apply border and shadow + Applies the border and shadow of the object to the caption frame. +
+ + + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..4b7742e50 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +HTML Document Options +/text/shared/optionen/01050000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web Options + +Defines the basic settings for $[officename] documents in HTML format. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..391fd75fe --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Grid + /text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp + + + +
+grids; defaults (Writer/Calc) + defaults; grids (Writer/Calc) + snap grid defaults (Writer/Calc) + + + +Grid + Specifies the settings for the configurable grid on your document pages. This grid helps you determine the exact position of your objects. You can also set this grid in line with the "magnetic" snap grid. +
+
+ +
+ Grid + +Snap to grid +
+ Specifies whether to move frames, drawing elements, and controls only between grid points. To change the status of the snap grip only for the current action, drag an object while holding down the Control key +Ctrl key. +
+ + +Visible grid + Specifies whether to display the grid. + + It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Display Grid command in the context menu for the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. + + + It is also possible to toggle the visibility of the grid with the Grid - Display Grid command in the context menu of the page. You can also select the Grid - Grid to Front submenu of this context menu to display the grid in front of objects. + + +
+ Resolution + +Horizontal + Defines the unit of measure for the spacing between grid points on the X-axis. + +Vertical + Defines the grid points spacing in the desired unit of measurement on the Y-axis. + Subdivision + +Horizontal + Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the X-axis.UFI: see #i39831#UFI: see #i112000 + +Vertical + Specify the number of intermediate spaces between grid points on the Y-axis. + +Synchronize axes + Specifies whether to change the current grid settings symmetrically. The resolution and subdivision for the X and Y axes remain the same. + There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: +There are additional commands on the context menu of a page: + +
+ +Grid to Front +Grid to Front + + Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. +Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. + + Sets the visible grid in front of all objects. + +Snap Lines to Front +Snap Lines to Front + + Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. +Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. + + Sets the snap lines in front of all objects. +
+ Set the grid color on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..349b93802 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + +Background +/text/shared/optionen/01050300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+

Background

+ Specifies the background for HTML documents. The background is valid for both new HTML documents and for those that you load, as long as these have not defined their own background. +
+
+ +
+Click a color. Click the None button to remove a background color. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c0f7a8d65 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Spreadsheet Options +/text/shared/optionen/01060000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Calc Options +Defines various settings for spreadsheets, contents to be displayed, and the cursor direction after a cell entry. You can also define sorting lists, determine the number of decimal places and the settings for recording and highlighting changes. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..3179d2658 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + + + View + /text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp + + + +
+cells; showing grid lines (Calc) + borders; cells on screen (Calc) + grids; displaying lines (Calc) + colors; grid lines and cells (Calc) + page breaks; displaying (Calc) + guides; showing (Calc) + displaying; zero values (Calc) + zero values; displaying (Calc) + tables in spreadsheets; value highlighting + cells; formatting without effect (Calc) + cells; coloring (Calc) + anchors; displaying (Calc) + colors;restriction (Calc) + text overflow in spreadsheet cells + references; displaying in color (Calc) + objects; displaying in spreadsheets + pictures; displaying in Calc + charts; displaying (Calc) + draw objects; displaying (Calc) + row headers; displaying (Calc) + column headers; displaying (Calc) + scrollbars; displaying (Calc) + sheet tabs; displaying + tabs; displaying sheet tabs + outlines;outline symbols +MW copied "displaying;comments" over to Calc guide note_insert.xhp and deleted "comments;displaying" + + +View + Defines which elements of the %PRODUCTNAME Calc main window are displayed. You can also show or hide highlighting of values in tables. +
+
+ +
+ Visual aids + Specifies which lines are displayed. + +Grid lines + Specifies when grid lines will be displayed. Default is to display grid lines only on cells that do not have a background color. You can choose to also display grid lines on cells with background color, or to hide them. For printing, choose Format - Page - Sheet and mark the Grid check box. + +Color +Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document. To see the grid line color that was saved with the document, go to %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Application Colors, under Scheme find the entry Spreadsheet - Grid lines and set the color to "Automatic". + +Page breaks + Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area. + +Helplines While Moving + Specifies whether to view guides when moving drawings, frames, graphics and other objects. These guides help you align objects. + Display + Select various options for the screen display. + +Formulas + Specifies whether to show formulas instead of results in the cells. + +Zero values + Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0. + +Comment indicator +Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box. + +To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu. + You can type and edit comments with the Insert - Comment command. Comments that are permanently displayed can be edited by clicking the comment box. Click the Navigator and under the Comments entry you can view all comments in the current document. By double clicking a comment in Navigator, the cursor will jump to the corresponding cell containing the comment. + +Value highlighting +Mark the Value highlighting box to show the cell contents in different colors, depending on type. Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, number cells in blue, and protected cells are shown with light grey background, no matter how their display is formatted. +When this command is active, any colors assigned in the document will not be displayed until the function is deactivated. + +Anchor + Specifies whether the anchor icon is displayed when an inserted object, such as a graphic, is selected. + +Text overflow + If a cell contains text that is wider than the width of the cell, the text is displayed over empty neighboring cells in the same row. If there is no empty neighboring cell, a small triangle at the cell border indicates that the text continues.UFI: sc.features "Alignment of text that is larger than a cell" + +Show references in color + Specifies that each reference is highlighted in color in the formula. The cell range is also enclosed by a colored border as soon as the cell containing the reference is selected for editing. + Objects + Defines whether to display or hide objects for up to three object groups.removed "placeholder" text, see i81634 + +Objects/Graphics + Defines if objects and graphics are shown or hidden. + +Charts + Defines if charts in your document are shown or hidden. + +Drawing objects + Defines if drawing objects in your document are shown or hidden. + Zoom + +Synchronize sheets + If checked, all sheets are shown with the same zoom factor. If not checked, each sheet can have its own zoom factor. + Window + Specifies whether some Help elements will or will not appear in the table. + +Column/Row headers + Specifies whether to display row and column headers. + +Horizontal scrollbar + Specifies whether to display a horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the document window. + +Vertical scrollbar + Specifies whether to display a vertical scrollbar at the right of the document window. + +Sheet tabs + Specifies whether to display the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet document. If this box is not checked, you will only be able to switch between the sheets through the Navigator +Navigator. + +Outline symbols + If you have defined an outline +outline, the Outline symbols option specifies whether to view the outline symbols at the border of the sheet. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..a1d1e8ceb --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01060300.xhp + + + +
+ + metrics;in sheets + tab stops; setting in sheets + cells; cursor positions after input (Calc) + edit mode; through Enter key (Calc) + formatting; expanding (Calc) + expanding formatting (Calc) + references; expanding (Calc) + column headers; highlighting (Calc) + row headers; highlighting (Calc) + + + + + General + + Defines general settings for spreadsheet documents. +
+
+ +
+ Metrics + + Measurement unit + + Defines the unit of measure in spreadsheets. + + + Tab stops + + Defines the tab stops distance. + + + Input settings + + + Press Enter to move selection + + Determines the direction that the cursor in the spreadsheet will move after you press the Enter key. + + + + see i53756 + Press Enter to switch to edit mode + + Determines the behavior of the Enter key in a spreadsheet. Checking this option causes Enter to open cell contents for editing. + + Uncheck this option to make the Enter key select the cell below the current cell. + If a range of cells is selected, each time Enter is pressed will select the next cell inside the range. Hence, enabling this option is useful when entering values into a range of cells sequentially. + + Expand formatting + Specifies whether to automatically apply the formatting attributes of the selected cell to the empty adjacent cells. If, for example, the contents of the selected cell have the bold attribute, this bold attribute will also apply to adjacent cells. Cells that already have a special format will not be modified by this function. You can see the range in question by pressing the Command +Ctrl + * (multiplication sign on the number pad) shortcut. This format also applies to all new values inserted within this range. The normal default settings apply to cells outside this range. + + Expand references when new columns/rows are inserted + + Specifies whether to expand references when inserting columns or rows adjacent to the reference range. This is only possible if the reference range, where the column or row is inserted, originally spanned at least two cells in the desired direction. + + Example: If the range A1:B1 is referenced in a formula and you insert a new column after column B, the reference is expanded to A1:C1. If the range A1:B1 is referenced and a new row is inserted under row 1, the reference is not expanded, since there is only a single cell in the vertical direction. + If you insert rows or columns in the middle of a reference area, the reference is always expanded. + + Highlight selection in column/row headings + + Specifies whether to highlight column and row headers in the selected columns or rows. + + + Use printer metrics for text formatting + Specifies that printer metrics are applied for printing and also for formatting the display on the screen. If this box is not checked, a printer independent layout will be used for screen display and printing. + + Show overwrite warning when pasting data + + Specifies that, when you paste cells from the clipboard to a cell range that is not empty, a warning appears. + + + Position cell reference with selection + + With the option set, expanding a selection (with Command + Ctrl +Shift+Down/Up) jumps to the end of the range in the column that was added as last to the initial selection. + When the option is not set, expanding a selection (with CommandCtrl+Shift + +Down/Up) jumps to the end of the range in the column where selecting the cell range was started. + The same of course applies when extending a selection on rows, with CommandCtrl+ + Shift+Left/Right. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f253c111f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sort Lists +/text/shared/optionen/01060400.xhp + + + +
+ + +Sort Lists +All user-defined lists are displayed in the Sort Lists dialog. You can also define and edit your own lists. Only text can be used as sort lists, no numbers.UFI: fix to #111848# +
+
+ +
+ + + + + + + + + +Lists +Displays all the available lists. These lists can be selected for editing. + +Entries +Displays the content of the currently selected list. This content can be edited. + +Copy list from +Defines the spreadsheet and the cells to copy, in order to include them in the Lists box. The currently selected range in the spreadsheet is the default. + +Copy +Copies the contents of the cells in the Copy list from box. If you select a reference to related rows and columns, the Copy List dialog appears after clicking the button. You can use this dialog to define if the reference is converted to sort lists by row or by column. + + +New/Discard +Enters the contents of a new list into the Entries box. This button will change from New to Discard, which enables you to delete the new list. + + +Add/Modify +Adds a new list into the Lists box. If you would like to edit this list in the Entries box, this button will change from Add to Modify, which enables you to include the newly modified list. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..dbdb298a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Copy List +/text/shared/optionen/01060401.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +sort lists; copying to in Calc + + + +Copy List +Allows you to copy marked cells to a sort list. +
+ +
+List from +Choose between the options Rows and Columns. Cells without text will be ignored when copying. + +Rows +Select the Rows option to summarize the contents of the selected rows in a list. + +Columns +Select the Columns option to summarize the contents of the selected columns in a list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..14625f669 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,241 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculate + /text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp + + + +
+references; iterative (Calc) + calculating;iterative references (Calc) + iterative references in spreadsheets + recursions in spreadsheets + dates; default (Calc) + dates; start 1900/01/01 (Calc) + dates; start 1904/01/01 (Calc) + case sensitivity;comparing cell contents (Calc) + decimal places displayed (Calc) + precision as shown (Calc) + values; rounded as shown (Calc) + rounding precision (Calc) + search criteria for database functions in cells + Excel; search criteria +UFI: removed a double entrymw changed "cell contents;" to "case sensitivity;.."mw deleted "numbers;decimal places (Calc)" + + +

Calculate

+ Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets. Defines the behavior of spreadsheets with iterative references, the date settings, the number of decimal places, and if capitalization or lower cases are to be considered when searching within sheets. +
+
+ +
+

Iterative references

+ In this section you can delimit the number of approximation steps carried out during iterative calculations. In addition, you can specify the degree of precision of the answer. + +

Iterations

+ Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions. If the Iterations box is not marked, an iterative reference in the table will cause an error message. + + Example: calculating the cost of an item without the value-added tax. + + + Type the text 'Selling price' in cell A5, the text 'Net' in cell A6, and the text 'Value-added tax' in cell A7. + + + Now type a selling price (for example, 100) in cell B5. The net price should be shown in cell B6 and the value-added tax should be shown in cell B7. + + + You know that the value-added tax is calculated as 'net price times 15%' and that you arrive at the net price by deducting the value-added tax from the selling price. Type the formula =B5-B7 in B6 to calculate the net price, and type the formula =B6*0.15 in cell B7 to calculate the value-added tax. + + + Switch on the iterations to correctly calculate the formulas, otherwise a 'Circular reference' error message appears in the Status Bar. + + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 5 + + + Selling Price + + + 100 + + + + + 6 + + + Net + + + =B5-B7 + + + + + 7 + + + Tax + + + =B6*0.15 + + +
+ + +

Steps

+ Sets the maximum number of iteration steps. + +

Minimum Change

+ Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop. +

Date

+ Select the start date for the internal conversion from days to numbers. + +

12/30/1899 (default)

+ Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero. + +

01/01/1900 (StarCalc 1.0)

+ Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries. + +

01/01/1904

+ Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format. + +

Case sensitive

+ Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents. + + Example: Type the text 'Test' in cell A1; and the text 'test' in B1. Then type the formula "=A1=B1" in cell C1. If the Case sensitive box is marked, FALSE will appear in the cell; otherwise, TRUE will appear in the cell. + The EXACT text function is always case-sensitive, independent of the settings in this dialog. + Disable case sensitivity for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + +

Precision as shown

+ Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number. + +

Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells

+ Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When both, the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box and the Enable wildcards in formulas box are marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as Microsoft Excel when searching cells in the database functions. + + + + * in following position: + + + Search result: + + + + + win + + + Finds win, but not win95, os2win, or upwind + + + + + win* + + + Finds win and win95, but not os2win or upwind + + + + + *win + + + Finds win and os2win, but not win95 or upwind + + + + + *win* + + + Finds win, win95, os2win, and upwind + + +
+ + If Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is not enabled, the "win" search pattern acts like "*win*". The search pattern can be at any position within the cell when searching with the Calc database functions. + Enable whole cell match for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + +
+ +

Enable wildcards in formulas

+ Specifies that wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to LOOKUP, VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. + + + ? (question mark) matches any single character + + + * (asterisk) matches any sequence of characters, including an empty string + + + ~ (tilde) escapes the special meaning of a question mark, asterisk or tilde character that follows immediately after the tilde character + + + Enable wildcards in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. +
+ + +

Enable regular expressions in formulas

+ Specifies that regular expressions instead of simple wildcards are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to LOOKUP, VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. +Sorry, no more switches allowed inside AVIS tags + Do not enable regular expressions in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + + +

No wildcards or regular expressions in formulas

+ Specifies that only literal strings are used when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to LOOKUP, VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, MATCH, AVERAGEIF, AVERAGEIFS, COUNTIF, COUNTIFS, SUMIF, SUMIFS and SEARCH. + + Do not disable wildcards in formulas for spreadsheets that need to be interoperable with Microsoft Excel. + + +

Automatically find column and row labels

+ Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators. + + Example: Cell E5 contains the text "Europe". Below, in cell E6, is the value 100 and in cell E7 the value 200. If the Automatically find column and row labels box is marked, you can write the following formula in cell A1: =SUM(Europe). + + +

Limit decimals for general number format

+You can specify the maximum number of decimal places that are shown by default for cells with General number format. If not enabled, cells with General number format show as many decimal places as the column width allows. + +

Decimal places

+ Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the General number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..85ffe2ca5 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Changes +/text/shared/optionen/01060600.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +Changes +The Changes dialog specifies various options for highlighting recorded changes in documents. +
+To record changes to your work, choose Edit - Track Changes - Record. +
+ +
+Color Definition for Changes +Defines colors for recorded changes. If you select the "By author" entry, $[officename] will automatically set the color depending on the author who undertook the changes. + +Changes +Specifies the color for changes of cell contents. + +Deletions +Specifies the color to highlight deletions in a document. + +Insertions +Specifies the color to highlight insertions in a document. + +Moved entries +Specifies the color to highlight moved cell contents. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6be8fcf9d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Print +/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp + + + +
+ + +

Print

+Determines the printer settings for spreadsheets. +
+%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print defines the settings for all spreadsheets. To define settings for the current document only, choose File - Print, then click the Options button. +
+ +
+

Pages

+ + + printing;manual breaks + +

Always apply manual breaks

+Setting this option gives manual row breaks precedence over automatic page breaks done using the Reduce/enlarge printout scaling mode. + +

Suppress output of empty pages

+Specifies that empty pages that have no cell contents or draw objects are not printed. Cell attributes such as borders or background colors are not considered cell contents. Empty pages are not counted for page numbering. +

Sheets

+ +

Print only selected sheets

+Specifies that only contents from selected sheets are printed, even if you specify a wider range in the File - Print dialog or in the Format - Print Ranges dialog. Contents from sheets that are not selected will not be printed. +To select multiple sheets, click on the sheet names on the bottom margin of the workspace while keeping the CommandCtrl key pressed. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..af721498b --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + Compatibility + /text/shared/optionen/01060800.xhp + + + +
+ + compatibility settings;key bindings (Calc) + + + + Compatibility + Defines compatibility options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +
+
+ +
+ Key bindings + The following table shows what actions are associated with what key bindings for the two key binding types (Default and OpenOffice.org legacy): + + + + + Key binding + + + Default + + + OpenOffice.org legacy + + + + + Backspace + + + delete contents + + + delete + + + + + Delete + + + delete + + + delete contents + + + + + CommandCtrl+D + + + fill down + + + data select + + + + + OptionAlt+Down Arrow + + + data select + + + increase row height + + +
+ Where the actions are: + + + delete contents - launch the Delete Contents dialog. + + + delete - immediately delete the cell content, without the dialog. + + + fill down - fill cell content downward within selection. + + + data select - launch the Selection List dialog. + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..790c3851a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + Formula + /text/shared/optionen/01060900.xhp + + + +
+ +formula options;formula syntax +formula options;separators +formula options;reference syntax in string parameters +formula options;recalculating spreadsheets +formula options;large spreadsheet files +formula options;loading spreadsheet files +separators;function +separators;array column +separators;array row +recalculate;formula options +recalculating;formula options +recalculating;large spreadsheet files +loading;large spreadsheet files + + + +

Formula

+ Defines formula syntax options and loading options for %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +
+
+ +
+

Formula options

+

Formula syntax

+ There are three options. Let's see it by example. In a sample spreadsheet there are two worksheets, Sheet1 and Sheet2. In A1 cell of Sheet1 there is a reference to C4 cell of Sheet2. + + + + Calc A1 - This is the default of %PRODUCTNAME Calc. The reference will be =$Sheet2.C4 + + + Excel A1 - This is the default of Microsoft Excel. The reference will be =Sheet2!C4 + + + Excel R1C1 - This is the relative row/column addressing, known from Microsoft Excel. The reference will be =Sheet2!R[3]C[2] + +

Use English function names

+ In %PRODUCTNAME Calc function names can be localized. By default, the check box is off, which means the localized function names are used. Checking this check box will swap localized function names with the English ones. This change takes effect in all of the following areas: formula input and display, function wizard, and formula tips. You can of course uncheck it to go back to the localized function names. + +

Separators

+ This option group lets you configure separators in your formula expressions. This comes in handy when, for instance, you want to separate your function parameters by commas (,) instead of semicolons (;). + For example, instead of =SUM(A1;B1;C1) you can type =SUM(A1,B1,C1). + Likewise, you can also change the column and row separators for in-line arrays. Previously, an in-line array used semicolons (;) as the column separators and the pipe symbols (|) as the row separators, so a typical in-line array expression looked like this for a 5 x 2 matrix array: + ={1;2;3;4;5|6;7;8;9;10} + By changing the column separators to commas (,) and the row separators to semicolons (;), the same expression will look like this: + ={1,2,3,4,5;6,7,8,9,10} + + + +

Recalculation on File Load

+ Recalculating formulas can take significant time while loading very large files. + +

Excel 2007 and newer:

+ Loading a large spreadsheet file can take a long time. If you don't need to update your large spreadsheet data immediately, you can postpone the recalculation at a better time. %PRODUCTNAME allows you to defer recalculation of Excel 2007 (and above) spreadsheets to speedup loading time. + +

ODF Spreadsheet (not saved by %PRODUCTNAME):

+ Recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME caches spreadsheet formula results into its ODF file. This feature helps %PRODUCTNAME to recalculate a large ODF spreadsheet saved by %PRODUCTNAME faster. + For ODF spreadsheets saved by other programs, where such cached formula results may not exist, recalculation can be deferred to speedup file loading as with Excel 2007 files. + For the entries above the following choices are possible: + + + + Never recalculate - No formulas will be recalculated on loading the file. + + + Always recalculate - All formulas will be recalculated on file load. + + + Prompt user - Prompt user for action. + + %PRODUCTNAME saved ODF spreadsheets will honor Never recalculate and Always recalculate options. + +
+ Array formulas +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99375130e --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + + Defaults + /text/shared/optionen/01061000.xhp + + + +
+ + defaults;number of worksheets in new documents + defaults;prefix name for new worksheet + number of worksheets in new documents + prefix name for new worksheet + + + + Defaults + Defines default settings for new spreadsheet documents. +
+
+ +
+ New spreadsheets + You can set the number of worksheets in a new document, and the prefix name for new worksheets. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ef698f054 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Presentation Options +/text/shared/optionen/01070000.xhp + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Impress Options +Defines various settings for newly created presentation documents, such as the contents to be displayed, the measurement unit used, if and how grid alignment is carried out. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b20196029 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + +View +/text/shared/optionen/01070100.xhp + + + +
+rulers; visible in presentations +moving; using guide lines in presentations +guides; displaying when moving objects (Impress) +control point display in presentations +Bézier curves; control points in presentations +mw made "line contours..." a two level entryremoved "placeholder" entries, see i81634 + + + +

View

+Specifies the available display modes. By selecting an alternative display, you can speed up the screen display while editing your presentation. +
removed 4 options, see i81634 + +

Display

+

Rulers visible

+Specifies whether to display the rulers at the top and to the left of the work area. + +

Helplines While Moving

+Specifies whether to display guides when moving an object. + +%PRODUCTNAME creates dotted guides that extend beyond the box containing the selected object and which cover the entire work area, helping you position the object. + +You also can use this function through the icon +icon +icon with the same name in the Options bar if a presentation or a drawing document is opened. +

All control points in Bézier editor

+Displays the control points of all Bézier points if you have previously selected a Bézier curve. If the All control points in Bézier editor option is not marked, only the control points of the selected Bézier points will be visible. +

Contour of each individual object

+%PRODUCTNAME displays the contour line of each individual object when moving this object. The Contour of each individual object option enables you to see if single objects conflict with other objects in the target position. If you do not mark the Contour of each individual object option, %PRODUCTNAME only displays a square contour that includes all selected objects. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..36cfd8bc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Grid + /text/shared/optionen/01070300.xhp + + + +
+snapping in presentations and drawings + points;reducing editing points when snapping (Impress/Draw) + +

Grid

+ Defines the grid settings for creating and moving objects. +
+
+ +
+ + If you have activated the snap grid but wish to move or create individual objects without constraining them, keep the Shift key pressed to deactivate this function for as long as needed. + +

Snap

+ + +

To snap guides

+ Snaps the edge of a dragged object to the nearest snap guide when you release the mouse. + + You can also define this setting by using the Snap to Snap Guides +Snap to Snap Guides +Snap to Snap Guides icon, which is available in the Options bar in a presentation or drawing document. + + +

To the page margins

+ Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the nearest page margin. + + The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. + + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Page Margins +Snap to Page Margins +Snap to Page Margins icon in the Options bar. + + +

To object frame

+ Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the border of the nearest graphic object. + + The cursor or a contour line of the graphics object must be in the snap range. + + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Border +Snap to Object Border +Snap to Object Border icon in the Options bar. + + +To object points + Specifies whether to align the contour of the graphic object to the points of the nearest graphic object. + + This only applies if the cursor or a contour line of the graphics object is in the snap range. + + In a presentation or drawing document, this function can also be accessed with the Snap to Object Points +Snap to Object Points +Snap to Object Points icon in the Options bar. + +Snap range + Defines the snap distance between the mouse pointer and the object contour. $[officename] Impress snaps to a snap point if the mouse pointer is nearer than the distance selected in the Snap range control. + Constrain Objects + +When creating or moving objects + Specifies that graphic objects are restricted vertically, horizontally or diagonally (45°) when creating or moving them. You can temporarily deactivate this setting by pressing the Shift key. + +Extend edges + Specifies that a square is created based on the longer side of a rectangle when the Shift key is pressed before you release the mouse button. This also applies to an ellipse (a circle will be created based on the longest diameter of the ellipse). When the Extend edges box is not marked, a square or a circle will be created based on the shorter side or diameter. + + +When rotating + Specifies that graphic objects can only be rotated within the rotation angle that you selected in the When rotating control. If you want to rotate an object outside the defined angle, press the Shift key when rotating. Release the key when the desired rotation angle is reached. + +Point reduction + Defines the angle for point reduction. When working with polygons, you might find it useful to reduce their editing points. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d58cd47ef --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Print + /text/shared/optionen/01070400.xhp + + + + +
+ + printing; drawings defaults + drawings; printing defaults + pages;printing page names in presentations + printing; dates in presentations + dates; printing in presentations + times; inserting when printing presentations + printing; hidden pages of presentations + hidden pages; printing in presentations + printing; without scaling in presentations + scaling; when printing presentations + printing; fitting to pages in presentations + fitting to pages; print settings in presentations + printing; tiling pages in presentations + + + +

Print

+ Specifies print settings within a drawing or presentation document. +
+
+ +
+ +

Print

+ Defines additional elements to be printed on the page margin. + +

Page name

+ Specifies whether to print the page name. + +

Date

+ Specifies whether to print the current date. + +

Time

+ Specifies whether to print the current time. + +

Hidden pages

+ Specifies whether to print the pages that are currently hidden from the presentation. +

Quality

+ See also Printing in Black and White. + +

Default

+ Specifies that you want to print in original colors. + +

Grayscale

+ Specifies that you want to print colors as grayscale. + +

Black & white

+ Specifies that you want to print the document in black and white. +

Page options

+ Define additional options for printing the pages. + +

Default

+ Specifies that you do not want to further scale pages when printing. + +

Fit to page

+
+ Specifies whether to scale down objects that are beyond the margins of the current printer, so that they fit on the paper in the printer. +
+ + +

Tile pages

+ Specifies that pages are to be printed in tiled format. If the pages or slides are smaller than the paper, several pages or slides will be printed on one page of paper. + +

Brochure

+ Select the Brochure option to print the document in brochure format. You can also decide if you want to print the front, the back or both sides of the brochure. + + + + + + +

Front

+ Select Front to print the front of a brochure. + +

Back

+ Select Back to print the back of a brochure. + +

Paper tray from printer settings

+ Determines that the paper tray to be used is the one defined in the printer setup. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..808bfdcf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/optionen/01070500.xhp + + + +
+presentations; starting with wizard +objects; always moveable (Impress/Draw) +distorting in drawings +spacing; tabs in presentations +tab stops; spacing in presentations +text objects; in presentations and drawings + + + +

General

+Defines the general options for drawing or presentation documents. +
+
+ +
+ +

Text objects

+ + +

Allow quick editing

+If on, you can edit text immediately after clicking a text object. If off, you must double-click to edit text. + + + + + +In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate the text editing mode through the Allow Quick Editing icon in the Options bar. + + +

Only text area selectable

+Specifies whether to select a text box by clicking the text. + +In the area of the text box that is not filled with text, an object behind the text box can be selected. + + + + + +In a presentation or drawing document, you can also activate this mode through the Select Text Area Only icon in the Options bar. +

New document (only in presentations)

+ +

Start with Template Selection

+Specifies whether to activate the Select a Template window when opening a presentation with File - New - Presentation. +

Settings

+ +

Use background cache

+Specifies whether to use the cache for displaying objects on the master slide. This speeds up the display. Unmark the Use background cache option if you want to display changing contents on the master slide. + +

Copy when moving

+If enabled, a copy is created when you move an object while holding down the CommandCtrl key. The same will apply for rotating and resizing the object. The original object will remain in its current position and size. + +

Objects always moveable

+Specifies that you want to move an object with the Rotate tool enabled. If Object always moveable is not marked, the Rotate tool can only be used to rotate an object. + +

Do not distort objects in curve (only in drawings)

+Maintains relative alignment of Bézier points and 2D drawing objects to each other when you distort the object. + +

Unit of measurement

+Determines the Unit of measurement for presentations. + +

Tab stops

+Defines the spacing between tab stops. + +

Presentation (only in presentations)

+ +

Enable remote control

+Specifies that you want to enable Bluetooth remote control while Impress is running. Unmark Enable remote control to disable remote controlling. + + +

Enable Presenter Console

+Specifies that you want to enable the Presenter Console during slideshows. + +

Scale (only in drawings)

+ +

Drawing scale

+Determines the drawing scale on the status bar. Right-click on the scale factor in the status bar to open a list of possible values. +

Compatibility (document specific settings)

+The settings in this area are valid for the current document only. + + +

Add spacing between paragraphs and tables

+Specifies that $[officename] Impress calculates the paragraph spacing exactly like Microsoft PowerPoint. +Microsoft PowerPoint adds the bottom spacing of a paragraph to the top spacing of the next paragraph to calculate the total spacing between both paragraphs. $[officename] Impress utilizes only the larger of the two spacings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..17d7fb087 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + +Drawing Options +/text/shared/optionen/01080000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Draw Options +Defines the global settings for drawing documents, including the contents to be displayed, the scale to be used, the grid alignment and the contents to be printed by default. + +
+ +
+ + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d0afda169 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + + +Formula +/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + +%PRODUCTNAME Math Options +Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math. + You can also call the dialog by clicking the Options button in the Print dialog. The settings you define in the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options dialog will be permanent settings, whereas the settings in the Print dialog are only valid for the current document. +
+ +
+Options + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..69a4bbe6a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Settings +/text/shared/optionen/01090100.xhp + + + +printing;formulas in $[officename] Math +title rows; printing in $[officename] Math +formula texts; printing in $[officename] Math +frames; printing in $[officename] Math +printing; in original size in $[officename] Math +original size; printing in $[officename] Math +printing; fitting to pages in $[officename] Math +format filling printing in $[officename] Math +printing; scaling in $[officename] Math +scaling; printing in $[officename] Math +fitting to pages;print settings in Math +mw inserted "fitting..." + + +Settings +Defines formula settings that will be valid for all documents. + +
+ +
+Print options +Title +Specifies whether you want the name of the document to be included in the printout. +Formula text +Specifies whether to include the contents of the Commands window at the bottom of the printout. +Border +Applies a thin border to the formula area in the printout. Title and Formula text are only set down by a frame if the corresponding check box is active. +Print format +Original size +Prints the formula without adjusting the current font size. It is possible that with large formulas a part of the command text is cut off. +Fit to size +Adjusts the formula to the page format used in the printout. The real size will be determined by the used paper format. + +Scaling +Reduces or enlarges the size of the printed formula by a specified enlargement factor. Type the desired enlargement factor directly in the Scaling control, or set the value using the arrow buttons. +Other options +Ignore ~ and ' at the end of the line +Specifies that these space wildcards will be removed if they are at the end of a line. In earlier versions of $[officename], adding such characters at the end of a line prevented the right edge of the formula from being cut off during printing. + +Embed only used symbols (smaller file size) +Saves only those symbols with each formula that are used in that formula. In earlier versions of $[officename], all symbols were saved with each formula. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b42edbab1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Chart options +/text/shared/optionen/01110000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + + Chart options + Defines the general settings for charts. +
+ +
+ + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f2b4f94e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Default colors +/text/shared/optionen/01110100.xhp + + + +
+charts; colors +colors;charts + + + +Default colors +Assigns colors to the data rows. The settings only apply for all newly created charts. +
+
+ +
+Chart colors +Displays all the colors available for the data series. Select a data series to change its color. Select the desired color from the adjacent color table. +Color table +This table is used as a means of replacing the chart colors for the selected data rows. For example, if you selected data row 6 and then click on the color green 8, the old color of the data row is replaced by green 8. The name of the selected color is shown below the color table. +Default +Restores the color settings that were defined when the program was installed. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..18971986f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + VBA Properties + /text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + Microsoft Office; importing/exporting VBA code + importing; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + exporting; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + loading; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + saving; VBA code in Microsoft Office documents + VBA code; loading/saving documents with VBA code + Visual Basic for Applications; loading/saving documents with VBA code + + + + + +

VBA Properties

+Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code. +
+ +
+ +
+ +

Microsoft Word 97/2000/XP

+Select the settings for Microsoft Word documents. + + + + +

Load Basic code

+Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub. You can edit the code. When saving the document in $[officename] format, the Basic code is saved as well. When saving in another format, the Basic code from the $[officename] Basic IDE is not saved. + +
+ + +

Executable code

+The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run. +After loading the VBA code, %PRODUCTNAME inserts the statement Option VBASupport 1 in every Basic module to enable a limited support for VBA statements, functions and objects. See Option VBASupport Statement for more information. +
+ +

Save original Basic code

+ + + + +
+Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form. +When saving in another format than Microsoft Format, the Microsoft Basic Code is not saved. For example, if the document contains Microsoft Basic Code and you save it in $[officename] format, you will be warned that the Microsoft Basic Code will not be saved. +The Save original Basic code checkbox takes precedence over the Load Basic code check box. If both boxes are marked and you edit the disabled Basic Code in the $[officename] Basic IDE, the original Microsoft Basic code will be saved when saving in the Microsoft format. A message appears to inform you of this. +To remove any possible Microsoft Basic macro viruses from the Microsoft document, unmark the Save Original Basic Code check box and save the document in Microsoft format. The document will be saved without the Microsoft Basic code. +
+ +

Microsoft Excel 97/2000/XP

+Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft Excel. + +

Load Basic code

+ + + +

Save original Basic code

+ + +

Microsoft PowerPoint 97/2000/XP

+Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft PowerPoint. + +

Load Basic code

+ + +

Save original Basic code

+ + +
+ + +Setting the default file format +VBA support in %PRODUCTNAME +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2d838ec3a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Microsoft Office + /text/shared/optionen/01130200.xhp + + + + +
+ + + +Microsoft lock files +lock files;Microsoft Office +lock files;%PRODUCTNAME +OLE objects;import and export +embedded objects;import and export +OLE objects;Microsoft Office +OLE objects;PDF +character highlighting;Microsoft Office export +character shading;Microsoft Office export + +

Microsoft Office

+Specifies the settings for importing and exporting Microsoft Office and other documents. +
+
+ +
+

Embedded Objects

+ The Embedded Objects section specifies how to import and export Microsoft Office or other OLE objects. + These settings are valid when no Microsoft or other OLE server exists (for example, in UNIX) or when there is no $[officename] OLE server ready for editing the OLE objects. + If an OLE server is active for the embedded object, then the OLE server will be used to handle the object. + If no OLE server is active for MathType objects, then embedded MathType objects can be converted to %PRODUCTNAME Math objects. For this conversion, the embedded MathType objects must not exceed the MathType 3.1 specifications.mail answer by Thomas Lange re i97686 + +

[L] and [S] Columns

+ The [L] and [S] checkbox displays the entries for the pair of OLE objects that can be converted when loading into $[officename] [L] and/or when saving into a Microsoft format [S]. + Mark the box in the [L] column in front of the entry if a Microsoft or other OLE object is to be converted into the specified $[officename] OLE object when a Microsoft or other document is loaded into $[officename]. + Mark the box in the [S] column in front of the entry if a $[officename] OLE object is to be converted into the specified Microsoft OLE object when a document is saved in a Microsoft file format. + + +

Character Highlighting

+Microsoft Office has two character attributes similar to $[officename] character highlighting. Use this control to select the attribute, highlighting or shading, that $[officename] should use when exporting $[officename] character highlighting to Microsoft Office file formats. +Highlighting exports the closest match between a $[officename] highlighting color and one of the 16 Microsoft highlighting colors, using the Office character attribute that makes it easy for Office users to edit with the highlighting tool in Office applications. This is the default setting in $[officename] 5.0 to 6.4. +Shading exports all RGB colors to the other Office character attribute. This preserves color fidelity between $[officename] and Microsoft Office documents, but Office users must edit this character attribute with a tool that is not commonly used or easy to find in Office applications. This is the default setting since $[officename] 7.0. +The "compatibility" filter in the Character Highlighting Color dialog provides the Microsoft Office highlighting colors. Use those colors and choose Export as: Highlighting if you want both color fidelity and ease of editing for Office users. + +

Lock files

+Mark this checkbox to generate a Microsoft Office lock file in addition to %PRODUCTNAME own lock file. Lock files signal to applications that a resource or file should not be used until the lock is released. +%PRODUCTNAME can read lock files generated by Microsoft Office. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ab67c9772 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + Languages (Options) + /text/shared/optionen/01140000.xhp + + + +
+languages; locale settings + locale settings + Asian languages; enabling + languages; Asian support + complex text layout; enabling + Arabic;language settings + Hebrew;language settings + Thai;language settings + Hindi;language settings + decimal separator key + date acceptance patterns + + + +

Languages

+ Defines the default languages and some other locale settings for documents. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Language of

+ +

User interface

+ Select the language used for the user interface, for example menus, dialogs, help files. You must have installed at least one additional language pack or a multi-language version of %PRODUCTNAME. + The "Default" entry selects the language of the user interface for the operating system. If this language is not available in the %PRODUCTNAME installation, the language of the %PRODUCTNAME installation is the default language. + +

Locale setting

+ Specifies the locale setting of the country setting. This influences settings for numbering, currency and units of measure. + The "Default" entry selects the locale which name is reported by the operating system. + A change in this field is immediately applicable. However, some formats that were formatted by default change only if the document is newly loaded. + +

Default currency

+ Specifies the default currency that is used for the currency format and the currency fields. If you change the locale setting, the default currency changes automatically. + The default entry applies to the currency format that is assigned to the selected locale setting. + A change in Default currency field will be transmitted to all open documents and will lead to corresponding changes in the dialogs and icons that control the currency format in these documents. + +

Decimal separator key - Same as locale setting

+ Specifies to use the decimal separator key that is set in your system when you press the respective key on the number pad. + If this checkbox is activated, the character shown after "Same as locale setting" is inserted when you press the key on the number pad. If this checkbox is not activated, the character that your keyboard driver software provides is inserted. + + +

Date acceptance patterns

+ Specifies the date acceptance patterns for the current locale. Calc spreadsheet and Writer table cell input needs to match locale dependent date acceptance patterns before it is recognized as a valid date. + If you type numbers and characters that correspond to the defined date acceptance patterns in a table cell, and then move the cursor outside of the cell, %PRODUCTNAME will automatically recognize and convert the input to a date, and format it according to the locale setting. + The initial pattern(s) in Date acceptance patterns are determined by the locale (set in Locale setting), but you can modify these default patterns, and add more patterns. Use ; to separate each pattern. + Patterns can be composed according to the following rules: + + + A pattern must start with D, M, or Y, and include at least two items, with at least one separator between each one. + A pattern may also include all three, in any order. + + + Y means year, M means month, and D means day, regardless of which locale is set. Each can only be used once in a pattern. + + + . - : / , can be used as separators between and after D, M, and Y. + Any combination of separators can be used, and more than one separator can be used between D, M, and Y, but the input must match the separator pattern exactly for recognition. + + + Patterns can combine different separators, and may include a trailing separator. + Examples of valid patterns are: D,Y ; Y-M ; M.D.Y ; D-M/Y ; M.D. + + + If you change the Locale setting, the date acceptance pattern will be reset to the new locale default, and any user-defined modifications or additions will be lost. + In addition to the explicit patterns defined in the edit box, input matching the Y-M-D pattern is implicitly recognized and converted automatically to a date. Input that starts from 1 to 31 is not interpreted with this implicit Y-M-D pattern. Since %PRODUCTNAME 3.5, this input is formatted as YYYY-MM-DD (ISO 8601). + For all patterns, two-digit year input is interpreted according to the setting in Tools - Options - General - Year (Two Digits). +

Default languages for documents

+ Specifies the languages for spelling, thesaurus and hyphenation. + +
+ The spellcheck for the selected language only functions when you have installed the corresponding language module. + +
+ +

Western

+ Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in western alphabets. + +

Show UI elements for East Asian writings

+ Activates Asian languages support. You can now modify the corresponding Asian language settings in %PRODUCTNAME. + If you want to write in Chinese, Japanese or Korean, you can activate the support for these languages in the user interface. + +

Asian

+ Specifies the language used for the spellcheck function in Asian alphabets. + + +

Show UI elements for Bi-Directional writing

+ Activates complex text layout support. You can now modify the settings corresponding to complex text layout in %PRODUCTNAME. + +

Complex text layout

+ Specifies the language for the complex text layout spellcheck. + +

For the current document only

+ Specifies that the settings for default languages are valid only for the current document. +

Enhanced language support

+ +

Ignore system input language

+ Indicates whether changes to the system input language/keyboard will be ignored. If ignored, when new text is typed that text will follow the language of the document or current paragraph, not the current system language. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fefd17e91 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Language Setting Options +/text/shared/optionen/01150000.xhp + + + +languages;setting options +mw changed index entryLanguage Setting Options +Defines the properties for additional languages. + +The Searching in Japanese and Asian Layout tab pages are only visible if the Asian language support option in the Languages tab page is activated and the Options dialog is re-opened. The Complex Text Layout tab page is only visible if the CTL support is enabled. +
+ +
+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..2db9d1a9d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + +Asian Layout +/text/shared/optionen/01150100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+ + +

Asian Layout

+Defines the typographic default settings for Asian text. + +
+
+ +
+kerning;Asian texts + + +

Kerning

+Defines the default settings for kerning between individual characters. + +

Western text only

+Specifies that kerning is only applied to western text. + +

Western text and Asian punctuation

+Specifies that kerning is applied to both western text and Asian punctuation. +

Character spacing

+Defines the default settings for character spacing in Asian texts, cells, and drawing objects. + +

No compression

+Specifies that no compression at all will occur. + +

Compress only punctuation

+Specifies that only the punctuation is compressed. + +

Compress punctuation and Japanese Kana

+Specifies that punctuation and Japanese Kana are compressed. +

First and last characters

+Defines the default settings for 'first' and 'last' characters. In the dialog that appears when you choose Format -Asian Typography, you can specify whether the list of forbidden characters applies to those at the beginning or end of a line in a paragraph. + +

Language

+Specifies the language for which you want to define first and last characters. + +

Default

+When you mark Default, the following two text boxes are filled with the default characters for the selected language: + +

Not at start of line:

+Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the beginning of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the beginning of a line after a line break, it is automatically moved to the end of the previous line. For example, an exclamation point at the end of a sentence never appears at the start of a line if it is part of the Not at start of line list. + +

Not at end of line:

+Specifies the characters that should not appear alone at the end of a line. If a character typed here is positioned at the end of a line due to a line break, it is automatically moved to the beginning of the next line. For example, a currency symbol that appears in front of an amount never appears at the end of a line if it is part of the Not at end of line list. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..64f5445f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Searching in Japanese +/text/shared/optionen/01150200.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + + + +
+ + + Searching in Japanese + Defines the search options for Japanese. + +
+
+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + Treat as equal + Specifies the options to be treated as equal in a search. + + + + Ignore + Specifies the characters to be ignored. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b0ab9fa43 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + +Complex Text Layout +/text/shared/optionen/01150300.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+CTL; options + + + +

Complex Text Layout

+Defines the options for documents with complex text layouts. +
+
+ +
+ + +

Sequence checking

+In languages such as Thai, rules specify that certain characters are not allowed next to other characters. If Sequence Input Checking (SIC) is enabled, %PRODUCTNAME will not allow a character next to another if this is forbidden by a rule. + +

Use sequence checking

+Enables sequence input checking for languages such as Thai. + + +

Restricted

+Prevents the use as well as the printing of illegal character combinations. +

Cursor control

+Select the type of text cursor movement and text selection for mixed text (right-to-left mixed with left-to-right text direction). + +

Logical

+Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the end of the current text. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor toward the beginning of the current text. + +

Visual

+Pressing the Right Arrow key moves the text cursor in the right-hand direction. Pressing the Left Arrow key moves the text cursor in the left-hand direction. +

General options

+ +

Numerals (in text only)

+Selects the type of numerals used within text, text in objects, fields, and controls, in all %PRODUCTNAME modules. Only cell contents of %PRODUCTNAME Calc are not affected.UFI: see http://www.webster-dictionary.org/definition/Indian%20numerals + + +Arabic: All numbers are shown using Arabic numerals. This is the default. + + +Hindi: All numbers are shown using Hindi numerals. + + +System: All numbers are shown using Arabic or Hindi numerals, according to the locale settings defined by your system locale. + + +This setting is not saved in the document but in the %PRODUCTNAME configuration. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b6a1d266d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Data sources options +/text/shared/optionen/01160000.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +Data sources options +Defines the general settings for the data sources in $[officename]. + +
+ +
+ + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..6c3fff9c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Connections +/text/shared/optionen/01160100.xhp + + +Sun Microsystems, Inc. + + + +
+connections to data sources (Base) +data sources; connection settings (Base) + + +Connections +Defines how the connections to data sources are pooled. +
+The Connections facility allows you to stipulate that connections that are no longer needed are not deleted immediately, but are kept freeUFI: better: idle ? for a certain period of time. If a new connection to the data source is needed in that period, the free connection can be used for this purpose. +
+ +
+Connection Pool + +Connection pooling enabled +Specifies whether the chosen connections are pooled. +Drivers known in $[officename] +Displays a list of defined drivers and connection data. +Current driver +The currently selected driver is displayed below the list. + +Enable pooling for this driver +Select a driver from the list and mark the Enable pooling for this driver checkbox in order to pool its connection. + +Timeout (seconds) +Defines the time in seconds after which a pooled connection is freed. The time can be anywhere between 30 and 600 seconds. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e95443025 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Registered Databases +/text/shared/optionen/01160200.xhp + + +UFI: Registered Databases tab page + + + +
MW deleted "registered databases (Base)" and "databases;" and copied "lists;" to Shared guide data_register.xhp +Databases +Add, modify, or remove entries to the list of registered databases. You must register a database within %PRODUCTNAME in order to see it in the View - Data sources window. +
+
+ +
+ +Registered Databases +Lists the registered name and database file of all registered databases. Double-click an entry to edit. + +New +Opens the Database Link dialog to create a new entry. + +Delete +Removes the selected entry from the list. + +Edit +Opens the Database Link dialog to edit the selected entry. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..772900b68 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Database Link +/text/shared/optionen/01160201.xhp + + + +Database Link +should be New Database Link or Edit Database Link, respective to the button that was clicked + + +Creates or edits an entry in the Databases tab page. + +Database file +Enter the path and the file name of the database file. The name of the file must end with the *.odb extension. + +Browse +Opens a file dialog where you can select the database file. + +Registered name +Enter a name for the database. %PRODUCTNAME uses this name to access the database. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99ef436b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + Basic IDE + /text/shared/optionen/BasicIDE.xhp + + + + +
+ + + + Basic IDE;Autocorrection + Basic IDE;Autocompletion + Basic IDE;Autoclose quotes + Basic IDE;Basic UNO extended types + Basic IDE;Autoclose parenthesis + Basic IDE;options + options;Basic IDE + +Basic IDE +Defines the settings for the Basic IDE (Integrated Development Environment) to help edit macros in Basic. +
+ +
+
+ +Code Completion +This feature helps the Basic programmer to complete the code, saves extensive typing and helps to reduce coding errors. + +Enable code completion +Display methods of a Basic object. Code completion will display the methods of a Basic object, provided the object is a UNO extended type. Its does not work on a generic Object or Variant Basic types. +When a variable is a UNO interface or structure, a list box appears when pressing the dot after a variable's name (like aVar. [list box appears] ). Its methods and variables are listed in the list box, displayed just below. You can navigate between the suggested methods and variables with the arrow keys. To insert the selected entry, press the Enter key or double click on it with the mouse. To cancel the list box, press the Esc key. +When typing the method's name, and pressing the Tab key once, it will complete the selected entry, pressing the Tab key again will cycle through the matches with the longest prefix. For example, when aVar.aMeth is typed, it will cycle through aMeth1, aMethod2, aMethod3 entries, and other entries are not hidden. +Example: + +is a valid variable definition, its methods can be accessed via the dot (".") operator: + +Code Suggestion +These are coding helpers for the Basic programmer. + +Autocorrection + +Correct cases of Basic variables and keywords while typing. %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE will modify the typing of Basic statements and Basic variables of your code to improve coding style and readability. Modifications of the code are based on the program's variables declarations and on the %PRODUCTNAME Basic commands parsed. +Example: + +and when writing Intvar, will be corrected to intVar to match the case existing in the declaration of intVar . +Basic keywords are also automatically corrected (the list of the keywords is grabbed out from the parser). +Examples: +Integer, String, ReDim, ElseIf, etc... + +Autoclose quotes +Automatically close open quotes. %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE will add a closing quote each time you type an opening quote. Handy for inserting strings in the Basic code. + +Autoclose parenthesis +Automatically close open parenthesis. %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE will add a closing parenthesis “)” each time you type an opening parenthesis “(“. + +Autoclose procedures +Automatically insert closing statements for procedures. %PRODUCTNAME Basic IDE will add a statement End Sub or End Function after you type a Sub or Function statement and press Enter. + +Language Features + +Use extended types +Allow UNO object types as valid Basic types. This feature extend the Basic programming language standard types with the %PRODUCTNAME UNO types. This allows the programmer to define variables with the right UNO type and is necessary for the code completion feature. +Example: + +The use of UNO Extended Types in Basic programs can restrain interoperability of the program when executed in other office suites. + +
+Basic IDE +
+ + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b14c0a9b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Detailed Calculation + /text/shared/optionen/detailedcalculation.xhp + + + + + + string;conversion to number settings + string conversion to number options + string;conversion to date settings + string conversion to date options + string;conversion to reference settings + string conversion to reference options + string;setting in spreadsheet formulas + cell reference syntax in strings;Excel R1C1 + cell reference syntax in strings;Excel A1 + cell reference syntax in strings;Calc A1 + Excel R1C1;cell reference syntax in strings + Excel A1;cell reference syntax in strings + Calc A1;cell reference syntax in strings + +
+ + +

Detailed Calculation Settings

+ Sets the rules for conversion from strings values to numeric values, string values to cell references, and strings values to date and time values. This affects built-in functions such as INDIRECT that takes a reference as a string value or date and time functions that takes arguments as string values in local or ISO 8601 formats. +
+
+ Menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Formula, and in section Detailed Calculation Settings press Details... button. +
+

Contents to Numbers

+

Conversion from text to number

+ How to treat text when encountered as operand in an arithmetic operation or as argument to a function that expects a number instead. Unambiguous conversion is possible for integer numbers including exponents and ISO 8601 dates and times in their extended formats with separators. Fractional numeric values with decimal separators or dates other than ISO 8601 are locale dependent. Note that in locale dependent conversions the resulting numeric value may differ between locales! + Generate #VALUE! error: Text found where numeric data is expected will generate #VALUE! error. Example: "123.45" will generate a #VALUE! error, while 123.45 not. + Treat as zero: Any text found where numeric data is expected will be considered as a number of value zero. Example: "123.45" will map to zero, while 123.45 not. + Convert only if unambiguous: If the text represents a valid and unambiguous numeric value, convert it. Example: "123.456" will generate a #VALUE! error because the text contains a separator, while "123456" will not.
See Converting Text to Numbers for details. + Convert also locale dependent: convert values valid in the locale representation. Example: "123,45" is a valid number in some locales because the comma is the decimal separator there. +

Treat empty string as zero

+ This option determines how an empty string is treated when used in arithmetic operations. If you have set "Conversion from text to number" to either "Generate #VALUE! error" or "Treat as zero", you cannot choose (here) if conversion of an empty string to a number will generate an error or if it will treat empty strings as zero. Otherwise this option determines how empty strings are treated. +

Reference syntax for string reference

+ Formula syntax to use when parsing references given in string parameters. This affects built-in functions such as INDIRECT that takes a reference as a string value. + + + Use formula syntax + + + Calc A1 + + + Excel A1 + + + Excel R1C1 + + + Calc A1 | Excel A1 + + +

Apply those settings to current document only

+ Mark this checkbox to apply the settings to the document only. +
+ Date and time functions + INDIRECT function +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1cd77c756 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + Experimental Feature + /text/shared/optionen/experimental.xhp + + + +
+This feature is experimental and may produce errors or behave unexpectedly. To enable it anyway, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced and select Enable experimental features checkbox. +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..004d0e9c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Expert Configuration + /text/shared/optionen/expertconfig.xhp + + + + + + + + + expert configuration;setting options + + + +Expert Configuration + +
+Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Advanced - Open Expert Configuration. +
+Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME. The Expert Configuration dialog allows user to access hundreds of %PRODUCTNAME configuration preferences, and most of them are not available in the user interface or in the options dialogs. +The Expert Configuration dialog lets you access, edit and save configuration preferences that can harm your %PRODUCTNAME user profile. It can turn the user profile of %PRODUCTNAME unstable, inconsistent or even unusable. Proceed only if you know what you are doing. +The expert configuration does not modify the %PRODUCTNAME system installation in your computer. + +Text search entry area +Type the preference you want to display in the text area. Then click in the Search button. + +Search button +Click to search your preference text in the Preferences tree. + +Preferences tree +List the preferences organized hierarchically in a tree layout. To open the branches, double click in the (+) sign. Once the preference is visible in the tree, you can edit it. + +Preference Name +The name of the preference. + +Property +Shows the name of the property of the preference. + +Type +Defines the type of the property. Valid types are: + + + + string: Alphanumeric values; + + + long: integer numbers; + + + boolean: true or false values; + + + void: properties of type of void cannot be modified. + + +Value +Current value of the property. + +Edit +Opens a dialog to edit the preference. +Double-click in the preference row to edit current string and long values or toggle boolean types. + +

Reset

+Undo changes done so far in this dialog. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ee6849843 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/java.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + Advanced + /text/shared/optionen/java.xhp + + + + + + +
+ + + + + Java;setting options + experimental features + unstable options + expert configuration;setting options + + + +

Advanced

+Specifies the support options for Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME, including which Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to use. It also specifies whether to use experimental (unstable) features such as macro recording and access expert configuration. +
+ +
+ +
+ + + +

Java options

+ +The current list of %PRODUCTNAME modules and resources that depends on Java is available in the wiki. +

Use a Java runtime environment

+Allows you to run Java applications in %PRODUCTNAME. When a Java application attempts to access your hard drive, a prompt opens.UFI: moved this para here from Security tab page + + +Make sure to install a JRE compatible with the %PRODUCTNAME architecture: 64-bit JRE for 64-bit %PRODUCTNAME and 32-bit JRE for 32-bit %PRODUCTNAME. + + + + +

Java runtime environments (JRE) already installed:

+Select the JRE that you want to use. On some systems, you must wait a minute until the list gets populated. On some systems, you must restart %PRODUCTNAME to use your changed setting. The path to the JRE is displayed beneath the list box. +You can override the default JRE of the operating system with one of the following alternatives: + + + By setting the environment variable JAVA_HOME, + + + By adding a JRE to the $PATH variable, + + + By providing the configuration file + javasettings_macOS_X86_64.xml + javasettings_Windows_X86_64.xml + javasettings_Linux_X86_64.xml + javasettings_${_OS}_${_ARCH}.xml + in the folder <instdir>/presets/config. + + + + + +

Add

+Add a path to the root folder of a JRE on your computer. The path is set in the following dialog.UFI: #i38927# + + +

Parameters

+Opens the Java Start Parameters dialog. + + +

Class Path

+Opens the Class Path dialog. + +

Optional Features

+ +

Enable experimental features

+Enables features that are not yet complete or may contain known bugs. The list of these features is different version by version, or even it can be empty. + +

Enable macro recording

+Enables macro recording. The Tools - Macros - Record Macro menu item is available. + +

Expert Configuration

+Opens the Expert Configuration dialog for advanced settings and configuration of %PRODUCTNAME. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f3707abf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Class Path +/text/shared/optionen/javaclasspath.xhp + + +UFI: new dialog from Java tab page + + + + + +Class Path +You use this dialog to add folders and archives to the Java class path. These paths are valid for any JRE that you start. +
+ +
+ +Assigned folders and archives +Specifies the location of Java classes or Java class libraries. The new classpath becomes valid after you restart %PRODUCTNAME.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page +Java classes that are accessed through the classpath do not undergo a security check.UFI: moved these paras here from the Security tab page + +Add Archive +Select an archive file in jar or zip format and add the file to the class path. + +Add Folder +Select a folder and add the folder to the class path. + +Remove +Select an archive or a folder in the list and click Remove to remove the object from the class path. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..fccda285d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Start Parameters +/text/shared/optionen/javaparameters.xhp + + +UFI: new dialog from Java tab page + + + + + +Java Start Parameters +You can use this dialog to enter optional start parameters for the Java runtime environment (JRE). The settings that you specify in this dialog are valid for any JRE that you start. +
+ +
+ +Java Start parameter +Enter a start parameter for a JRE as you would on a command line. Click Assign to add the parameter to the list of available start parameters. +Do not use escape characters or quotes in path names. +For example, to point the system property "myprop" to a folder, enter the following parameter: +-Dmyprop=c:\program files\java +To enable debugging in a JRE, enter the following parameters: +-Xdebug +-Xrunjdwp:transport=dt_socket,server=y,address=8000 +These changes take effect after you restart %PRODUCTNAME. + +Assigned start parameters +Lists the assigned JRE start parameters. To remove a start parameter, select the parameter, and then click Remove. + +Add +Adds the current JRE start parameter to the list. + +Edit +Opens a dialog where the selected JRE start parameter can be edited. + +Remove +Deletes the selected JRE start parameter. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..7c47ddd15 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Macro Security +/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp + + + +Macro Security +The Macro Security dialog appears when a document contains one or more macros. You can also call the dialog from the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security page. + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8d99df5a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Security Level +/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_sl.xhp + + + +security;security levels for macros +macros;security levels +levels;macro security + + + +Security Level + +Select the macro security level from one of four options. The options differ according to the security level. Macros that are allowed to run on a higher security level are also allowed to run in all lower levels. + +Very high +Only macros from trusted file locations are allowed to run. All other macros, regardless of whether they are signed or not, are disabled.UFI: for each option, the first para is copied from the string table. +Trusted file locations can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. + +High +Only signed macros from trusted sources are allowed to run. Unsigned macros are disabled. +Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Only signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. + +Medium +Confirmation required before executing macros from unknown sources. +Trusted sources can be set on the Trusted Sources tab page. Signed macros from a trusted source are allowed to run. In addition, any macro from a trusted file location is allowed to run. All other macros require your confirmation. + +Low (not recommended) +All macros will be executed without confirmation. Use this setting only if you are certain that all documents that will be opened are safe. +A macro can be set to auto-start, and it can perform potentially damaging actions, as for example delete or rename files. This setting is not recommended when you open documents from other authors. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ed7a5c854 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Trusted Sources +/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity_ts.xhp + + + +Trusted Sources + + + +Specifies the macro security settings for trusted certificates and trusted file locations. +Trusted certificates +Lists the trusted certificates. +View +Opens the View Certificate dialog for the selected certificate. +Remove +Removes the selected certificate from the list of trusted certificates. +Trusted file locations +Document macros are only executed if they have been opened from one of the following locations. +Add +Opens a folder selection dialog. Select a folder from which all macros are allowed to execute. +Remove +Removes the selected folder from the list of trusted file locations. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d87d18c4f --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mail Merge Email +/text/shared/optionen/mailmerge.xhp + + +UFI: Mail Merge E-Mail tab page for Writer options + + + +
+ + +Mail Merge Email +Specifies the user information and server settings for when you send form letters as email messages. +
+
+ +
+User information +Enter the user information to use when you send email. + +Your name +Enter your name. + +Email address +Enter your email address for replies. + +Send replies to different email address +Uses the email address that you enter in the Reply address text box as the reply-to email address. + +Reply address +Enter the address to use for email replies. +Outgoing server (SMTP) settings +Specify the server settings for outgoing emails. + +Server name +Enter the SMTP server name. + +Port +Enter the SMTP port. + +Use secure connection +When available, uses a secure connection to send emails. + +Server Authentication +Opens the Server Authentication dialog where you can specify the server authentication settings for secure email. + +Test Settings +Opens the Test Account Settings dialog to test the current settings. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0fa05a8c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + Online Update + /text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp + + + +
+update options + online update options + options;online update + online updates; checking automatically + updates; checking automatically + Internet; checking for updates + +Online Update + + + Specifies some options for the automatic notification and downloading of online updates to %PRODUCTNAME. +
+
+ +
+ +Online Update is a module that is installed by default. To exclude, choose "Custom" in the Setup when installing %PRODUCTNAME. Check your distribution package to see if it is possible to exclude installation of Online Update. +

Online Update Options

+Check for updates automatically + Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates. %PRODUCTNAME will check once a day, week, or month, as soon as a working Internet connection is detected. If you connect to the Internet by a proxy server, set the proxy on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + When an update is available, an icon in the menu bar Update Icon displays some explaining text. Click the icon to proceed. + If you disable the check, the icon is removed from the menu bar. + +Every Day + A check will be performed once a day. + +Every Week + A check will be performed once a week. This is the default setting. + +Every Month + A check will be performed once a month. + +Check now + A check will be performed now. +

Download Destination

+Displays the selected folder to store the downloaded files. + +

Download updates automatically

+Enable the automatic download of updates to the specified folder. + + +Change +Click to select the destination folder for downloaded files. +

User Agent

+Enable the check to send information about your %PRODUCTNAME version, operating system and basic hardware. This information is used to optimize the download. + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..939f70b36 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +OpenCL +/text/shared/optionen/opencl.xhp + + + +
+ + + +OpenCL;setting options +setting options;OpenCL + +OpenCL +OpenCL is a technology to speed up calculation on large spreadsheets. +
+
+
+OpenCL™ is the first open, royalty-free standard for cross-platform, parallel programming of modern processors found in personal computers, servers and handheld/embedded devices. OpenCL (Open Computing Language) greatly improves speed and responsiveness for a wide spectrum of applications in numerous market categories from gaming and entertainment to scientific and medical software +for more information on OpenCL, visit the OpenCL site + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..91f85e305 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + Search Commands + /text/shared/optionen/search_commands.xhp + + + + + + search commands + head-up display (hud) + + +

Search Commands

+ Allows to search and execute all commands available in application menus by their names. +
+ Choose Help - Search Commands + Use the shortcut Shift + Esc +
+ When the Search Commands feature is activated, a head-up display (HUD) is shown and can be used to quickly search commands by their names. As the search string is typed, all matching commands are shown in a list below the search field. + To execute a command: + + + Use the mouse to click on one of the items shown in the list. This will immediately run the selected command. + + + Use the arrow keys in the keyboard to navigate through the items shown in the list and press Enter to run the desired command. + + + This feature is available in Writer, Calc, Impress and Draw. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..101c13c87 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + Security Options and Warnings + /text/shared/optionen/securityoptionsdialog.xhp + + + + +
+ + selecting;security warnings + selecting;security options + options;security + warnings;security + + Security Options and Warnings + + + Set security related options and warnings about hidden information in documents. +
+
+ Press the Options button on the Security page. +
+ The Security options and warnings dialog contains the following controls: + + When saving or sending + Select to see a warning dialog when you try to save or send a document that contains recorded changes, versions, or comments. + + When printing + Select to see a warning dialog when you try to print a document that contains recorded changes or comments. + + When signing + Select to see a warning dialog when you try to sign a document that contains recorded changes, versions, fields, references to other sources (for example linked sections or linked pictures), or comments. + + When creating PDF files + Select to see a warning dialog when you try to export a document to PDF format that displays recorded changes in Writer, or that displays comments. + + Remove personal information on saving + Select to always remove user data from file properties, comments and tracked changes. The names of authors in comments and changes will be replaced by generic values as "Author1", "Author2" and so forth. Time values will also be reset to a single standard value. If this option is not selected, you can still remove the personal information for the current document with the Reset Properties button on File - Properties - General. + + Recommend password protection on saving + Select to always enable the Save with password option in the file save dialogs. Deselect the option to save files by default without password. + + CommandCtrl-click required to follow hyperlinks + If enabled, you must hold down the CommandCtrl key while clicking a hyperlink to follow that link. If not enabled, a click opens the hyperlink. + + Block any links from documents not among the trusted locations (see Macro Security) + Blocks the use of linked images by documents not in the trusted locations defined on the Trusted Sources tab of the Macro Security dialog. This can increase security in case you work with documents from untrusted sources (e.g. the internet) and are worried about vulnerabilities in image processing software components. Blocking the use of links means that images are not loaded in untrusted documents, only a placeholder frame is visible. + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..99f89a939 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Server Authentication +/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp + + + + + +Server Authentication +On the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge Email tab page, click the Server Authentication button to specify the server security settings. + +The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires authentication +Enables the authentication that is required to send email by SMTP. + +The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires separate authentication +Select if your SMTP server requires a user name and password. + +User name +Enter the user name for the SMTP server. + +Password +Enter the password for the user name. + +The outgoing mail server uses the same authentication as the incoming mail server. +Select if you are required to first read your email before you can send email. This method is also called "SMTP after POP3". + +Server name +Enter the server name of your POP 3 or IMAP mail server. + +Port +Enter the port on the POP3 or IMAP server. + +POP 3 +Specifies that the incoming mail server uses POP 3. + +IMAP +Specifies that the incoming mail server uses IMAP. + +User name +Enter the user name for the IMAP server. + +Password +Enter the password. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9c5cef74a --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Test Account Settings +/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp + + + + + +Test Account Settings +When you enter settings on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge Email tab page, you can click the Test Settings button to test your settings. +(Results list box) +In the top list box you will see the results of the test session. + +Errors +In the Errors list box you can read an explanation of any errors encountered while testing the settings. + +Stop +Click the Stop button to stop a test session manually. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9063f06a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +View Certificate +/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate.xhp + + + +View Certificate +The View Certificate dialog opens when you click the View Certificate button on the Trusted Sources tab page of the Macro Security dialog. +The dialog has the following tab pages: + + + + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..5f1989c6d --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Certificate Path +/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_c.xhp + + +UFI: View Certificate Path tab page + + + + + + + +Certificate Path + +The Certificate Path page of the View Certificate dialog displays the location and the status of the certificate. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b94f1fef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Details +/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_d.xhp + + +UFI: View certificate Details tab page + + + + + + +Details + +The Details page of the View Certificate dialog displays detailed information about the certificate. + +Use the value list box to view values and copy them to the clipboard. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d12e018d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +General +/text/shared/optionen/viewcertificate_g.xhp + + +UFI: View certificate General tab page + + + + + +General + +The General page of the View Certificate dialog displays basic information about the certificate. + + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..9639b2b31 --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + Spacing + /text/shared/submenu_spacing.xhp + + + + +
+ +
+ + + + +

Increase Paragraph Spacing

+ Increases the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. + + + + + Icon Increase Paragraph Spacing + + + + Increase Paragraph Spacing + + +
+

Decrease Paragraph Spacing

+ Decreases the paragraph spacing above the selected paragraph. + + + + + Icon Decrease Paragraph Spacing + + + + Decrease Paragraph Spacing + + +
+

Increase Indent

+ Increases the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and sets it to the next default tab position. If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is increased. + + + + + Icon Increase Indent + + + + Increase Indent + + +
+

Decrease Indent

+ Decreases the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and sets it to the previous default tab position. If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is decreased. + + + + + Icon Decrease Indent + + + + Decrease Indent + + +
+ + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp new file mode 100644 index 000000000..0d87549ad --- /dev/null +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/submenu_text.xhp @@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ + + + + + + Text + /text/shared/submenu_text.xhp + + + +
+ +

+ Text +

+ + Opens a submenu where you can choose text formatting commands. + +
+
+ +
+ + + + + +

+ Overline +

+ + + + + +

+ Shadow +

+ +

+ Outline +

+ + + + +

Wrap Text

+ + Break text automatically at the right edges of the selected cells. + + + +

+ Increase Size +

+ +

+ Decrease Size +

+ + + +

+ Increase Size +

+ +

+ Decrease Size +

+ + + +

+ Increase Size +

+ +

+ Decrease Size +

+ + + +

+ UPPERCASE +

+ + + +

+ lowercase +

+ + + + +

Cycle Case

+ + Cycles the case of the selected characters between Title Case, Sentence case, UPPERCASE and lowercase. + + + +

Sentence case

+ + Changes the first letter of the selected characters to an uppercase character. + + +

+ Capitalize Every Word +

+ + + + + +

tOGGLE cASE

+ + Toggles case of all selected characters. + + + +

+ Small capitals +

+ + + + + +

+ Small capitals +

+ + + + + +

+ Small capitals +

+ + + + + + + +

Half-width

+ + Changes the selected Asian characters to half-width characters. + + +

Full Width

+ + Changes the selected Asian characters to full-width characters. + + +

Hiragana

+ + Changes the selected Asian characters to Hiragana characters. + + +

Katakana

+ + Changes the selected Asian characters to Katakana characters. + + + -- cgit v1.2.3